Handbook of Practical Logic and Automated Reasoning

This page intentionally left blank HANDBOOK OF PRACTICAL LOGIC AND AUTOMATED REASONING John Harrison The sheer compl...

Author: John Harrison

153 downloads 1625 Views 3MB Size Report

This content was uploaded by our users and we assume good faith they have the permission to share this book. If you own the copyright to this book and it is wrongfully on our website, we offer a simple DMCA procedure to remove your content from our site. Start by pressing the button below!

Report copyright / DMCA form

DOWNLOAD PDF

This page intentionally left blank

HANDBOOK OF PRACTICAL LOGIC AND AUTOMATED REASONING John Harrison

The sheer complexity of computer systems has meant that automated reasoning, i.e. the use of computers to perform logical inference, has become a vital component of program construction and of programming language design. This book meets the demand for a self-contained and broad-based account of the concepts, the machinery and the use of automated reasoning. The mathematical logic foundations are described in conjunction with their practical application, all with the minimum of prerequisites. The approach is constructive, concrete and algorithmic: a key feature is that methods are described with reference to actual implementations (for which code is supplied) that readers can use, modify and experiment with. This book is ideally suited for those seeking a one-stop source for the general area of automated reasoning. It can be used as a reference, or as a place to learn the fundamentals, either in conjunction with advanced courses or for self study. John Harrison is a Principal Engineer at Intel Corporation in Portland, Oregon. He specialises in formal veriﬁcation, automated theorem proving, ﬂoating-point arithmetic and mathematical algorithms.

HANDBOOK OF PRACTICAL LOGIC AND AUTOMATED REASONING JOHN HARRISON

CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS

Cambridge, New York, Melbourne, Madrid, Cape Town, Singapore, São Paulo Cambridge University Press The Edinburgh Building, Cambridge CB2 8RU, UK Published in the United States of America by Cambridge University Press, New York www.cambridge.org Information on this title: www.cambridge.org/9780521899574 © J. Harrison 2009 This publication is in copyright. Subject to statutory exception and to the provision of relevant collective licensing agreements, no reproduction of any part may take place without the written permission of Cambridge University Press. First published in print format 2009

ISBN-13

978-0-511-50865-3

eBook (NetLibrary)

ISBN-13

978-0-521-89957-4

hardback

Cambridge University Press has no responsibility for the persistence or accuracy of urls for external or third-party internet websites referred to in this publication, and does not guarantee that any content on such websites is, or will remain, accurate or appropriate.

To Porosusha

When a man Reasoneth, hee does nothing else but conceive a summe totall, from Addition of parcels. For as Arithmeticians teach to adde and substract in numbers; so the Geometricians teach the same in lines, ﬁgures (solid and superﬁciall,) angles, proportions, times, degrees of swiftnesse, force, power, and the like; The Logicians teach the same in Consequences of words; adding together two Names, to make an Aﬃrmation; and two Aﬃrmations, to make a Syllogisme; and many Syllogismes to make a Demonstration; and from the summe, or Conclusion of a Syllogisme, they substract one Proposition, to ﬁnde the other. For REASON, in this sense, is nothing but Reckoning (that is, Adding and Substracting) of the Consequences of generall names agreed upon, for the marking and signifying of our thoughts. And as in Arithmetique, unpractised men must, and Professors themselves may often erre, and cast up false; so also in any other subject of Reasoning, the ablest, most attentive, and most practised men, may deceive themselves and inferre false Conclusions; Not but that Reason it selfe is always Right Reason, as well as Arithmetique is a certain and infallible Art: But no one mans Reason, nor the Reason of any one number of men, makes the certaintie; no more than an account is therefore well cast up, because a great many men have unanimously approved it. Thomas Hobbes (1588–1697), ‘Leviathan, or The Matter, Forme, & Power of a Common-Wealth Ecclesiasticall and Civill’. Printed for ANDREW CROOKE, at the Green Dragon in St. Pauls Church-yard, 1651.

Contents

Preface

page xi

1 Introduction 1.1 What is logical reasoning? 1.2 Calculemus! 1.3 Symbolism 1.4 Boole’s algebra of logic 1.5 Syntax and semantics 1.6 Symbolic computation and OCaml 1.7 Parsing 1.8 Prettyprinting 2 Propositional logic 2.1 The syntax of propositional logic 2.2 The semantics of propositional logic 2.3 Validity, satisﬁability and tautology 2.4 The De Morgan laws, adequacy and duality 2.5 Simpliﬁcation and negation normal form 2.6 Disjunctive and conjunctive normal forms 2.7 Applications of propositional logic 2.8 Deﬁnitional CNF 2.9 The Davis–Putnam procedure 2.10 St˚ almarck’s method 2.11 Binary decision diagrams 2.12 Compactness 3 First-order logic 3.1 First-order logic and its implementation 3.2 Parsing and printing 3.3 The semantics of ﬁrst-order logic vii

1 1 4 5 6 9 13 16 21 25 25 32 39 46 49 54 61 73 79 90 99 107 118 118 122 123

viii

Contents

3.4 Syntax operations 3.5 Prenex normal form 3.6 Skolemization 3.7 Canonical models 3.8 Mechanizing Herbrand’s theorem 3.9 Uniﬁcation 3.10 Tableaux 3.11 Resolution 3.12 Subsumption and replacement 3.13 Reﬁnements of resolution 3.14 Horn clauses and Prolog 3.15 Model elimination 3.16 More ﬁrst-order metatheorems 4 Equality 4.1 Equality axioms 4.2 Categoricity and elementary equivalence 4.3 Equational logic and completeness theorems 4.4 Congruence closure 4.5 Rewriting 4.6 Termination orderings 4.7 Knuth–Bendix completion 4.8 Equality elimination 4.9 Paramodulation 5 Decidable problems 5.1 The decision problem 5.2 The AE fragment 5.3 Miniscoping and the monadic fragment 5.4 Syllogisms 5.5 The ﬁnite model property 5.6 Quantiﬁer elimination 5.7 Presburger arithmetic 5.8 The complex numbers 5.9 The real numbers 5.10 Rings, ideals and word problems 5.11 Gr¨ obner bases 5.12 Geometric theorem proving 5.13 Combining decision procedures

130 139 144 151 158 164 173 179 185 194 202 213 225 235 235 241 246 249 254 264 271 287 297 308 308 309 313 317 320 328 336 352 366 380 400 414 425

Contents

ix

6 Interactive theorem proving 6.1 Human-oriented methods 6.2 Interactive provers and proof checkers 6.3 Proof systems for ﬁrst-order logic 6.4 LCF implementation of ﬁrst-order logic 6.5 Propositional derived rules 6.6 Proving tautologies by inference 6.7 First-order derived rules 6.8 First-order proof by inference 6.9 Interactive proof styles 7 Limitations 7.1 Hilbert’s programme 7.2 Tarski’s theorem on the undeﬁnability of truth 7.3 Incompleteness of axiom systems 7.4 G¨ odel’s incompleteness theorem 7.5 Deﬁnability and decidability 7.6 Church’s theorem 7.7 Further limitative results 7.8 Retrospective: the nature of logic

464 464 466 469 473 478 484 489 494 506 526 526 530 541 546 555 564 575 586

Appendix 1 Mathematical background Appendix 2 OCaml made light of Appendix 3 Parsing and printing of formulas References Index

593 603 623 631 668

Preface

This book is about computer programs that can perform automated reasoning. I interpret ‘reasoning’ quite narrowly: the emphasis is on formal deductive inference rather than, for example, poker playing or medical diagnosis. On the other hand I interpret ‘automated’ broadly, to include interactive arrangements where a human being and machine reason together, and I’m always conscious of the applications of deductive reasoning to realworld problems. Indeed, as well as being inherently fascinating, the subject is deriving increasing importance from its industrial applications. This book is intended as a ﬁrst introduction to the ﬁeld, and also to logical reasoning itself. No previous knowledge of mathematical logic is assumed, although readers will inevitably ﬁnd some prior experience of mathematics and of computer programming (especially in a functional language like OCaml, F#, Standard ML, Haskell or LISP) invaluable. In contrast to the many specialist texts on the subject, this book aims at a broad and balanced general introduction, and has two special characteristics. • Pure logic and automated theorem proving are explained in a closely intertwined manner. Results in logic are developed with an eye to their role in automated theorem proving, and wherever possible are developed in an explicitly computational way. • Automated theorem proving methods are explained with reference to actual concrete implementations, which readers can experiment with if they have convenient access to a computer. All code is written in the high-level functional language OCaml.

Although this organization is open to question, I adopted it after careful consideration, and extensive experimentation with alternatives. A more detailed self-justiﬁcation follows, but most readers will want to skip straight to the main content, starting with ‘How to read this book’ on page xvi. xi

xii

Preface

Ideological orientation This section explains in more detail the philosophy behind the present text, and attempts to justify it. I also describe the focus of this book and major topics that I do not include. To fully appreciate some points made in the discussion, knowledge of the subject matter is needed. Readers may prefer to skip or skim this material. My primary aim has been to present a broad and balanced discussion of many of the principal results in automated theorem proving. Moreover, readers mainly interested in pure mathematical logic should ﬁnd that this book covers most of the traditional results found in mainstream elementary texts on mathematical logic: compactness, L¨owenheim–Skolem, completeness of proof systems, interpolation, G¨ odel’s theorems etc. But I consistently strive, even when it is not directly necessary as part of the code of an automated prover, to present results in a concrete, explicit and algorithmic fashion, usually involving real code that can actually be experimented with and used, at least in principle. For example: • the proof of the interpolation theorem in Section 5.13 contains an algorithm for constructing interpolants, utilizing earlier theorem proving code; • decidability based on the ﬁnite model property is demonstrated in Section 5.5 by explicitly interleaving proving and refuting code rather than a general appeal to Theorem 7.13. I hope that many readers will share my liking for this concrete hands-on style. Formal logic usually involves a considerable degree of care over tedious syntactic details. This can be quite painful for the beginner, so teachers and authors often have to make the unpalatable choice between (i) spelling everything out in excruciating detail and (ii) waving their hands profusely to cover over sloppy explanations. While teachers rightly tend to recoil from (i), my experience of teaching has shown me that many students nevertheless resent the feeling of never being told the whole story. By implementing things on a computer, I think we get the best of both worlds: the details are there in precise formal detail, but we can mostly let the computer worry about their unpleasant consequences. It is true that mathematics in the last 150 years has become more abstractly set-theoretic and less constructive. This is particularly so in contemporary model theory, where traditional topics that lie at the historical root of the subject are being de-emphasized. But I’m not alone in swimming against this tide, for the rise of the computer is helping to restore the place of explicit algorithmic methods in several areas of mathematics. This is

Preface

xiii

particularly notable in algebraic geometry and related areas (Cox, Little and O’Shea 1992; Schenk 2003) where computer algebra and speciﬁcally Gr¨ obner bases (see Section 5.11) have made considerable impact. But similar ideas are being explored in other areas, even in category theory (Rydeheard and Burstall 1988), often seen as the quintessence of abstract nonconstructive mathematics. I can do no better than quote Knuth (1974) on the merits of a concretely algorithmic point of view in mathematics generally: For three years I taught a sophomore course in abstract algebra for mathematics majors at Caltech, and the most diﬃcult topic was always the study of “Jordan canonical forms” for matrices. The third year I tried a new approach, by looking at the subject algorithmically, and suddenly it became quite clear. The same thing happened with the discussion of ﬁnite groups deﬁned by generators and relations, and in another course with the reduction theory of binary quadratic forms. By presenting the subject in terms of algorithms, the purpose and meaning of the mathematical theorems became transparent. Later, while writing a book on computer arithmetic [Knuth (1969)], I found that virtually every theorem in elementary number theory arises in a natural, motivated way in connection with the problem of making computers do high-speed numerical calculations. Therefore I believe that the traditional courses in number theory might well be changed to adopt this point of view, adding a practical motivation to the already beautiful theory.

In the case of logic, this approach seems especially natural. From the very earliest days, the development of logic was motivated by the desire to reduce reasoning to calculation: the word logos, the root of ‘logic’, can mean not just logical thought but also computation or ‘reckoning’. More recently, it was decidability questions in logic that led Turing and others to deﬁne precisely the notion of a ‘computable function’ and set up the abstract models that delimit the range of algorithmic methods. This relationship between logic and computation, which dates from before the Middle Ages, has continued to the present day. For example, problems in the design and veriﬁcation of computer systems are stimulating more research in logic, while logical principles are playing an increasingly important role in the design of programming languages. Thus, logical reasoning can be seen not only as one of the many beneﬁciaries of the modern computer age, but as its most important intellectual wellspring. Another feature of the present text that some readers may ﬁnd surprising is its systematically model-theoretic emphasis; by contrast many other texts such as Goubault-Larrecq and Mackie (1997) place proof theory at the centre. I introduce traditional proof systems late (Chapter 6), and I hardly mention, and never exploit, structural properties of natural deduction or sequent calculus proofs. While these topics are fascinating, I believe that all the traditional computer-based proof methods for classical logic can be presented

xiv

Preface

perfectly well without them. Indeed the special refutation-complete calculi for automated theorem proving (binary resolution, hyperresolution, etc.) also provide strong results on canonical forms for proofs. In some situations these are even more convenient for theoretical results than results from Gentzen-style proof theory (Matiyasevich 1975), as with our proof of the Nullstellensatz in Section 5.10 `a la Lifschitz (1980). In any case, the details of particular proof systems can be much less signiﬁcant for automated reasoning than the way in which the corresponding search space is examined. Note, for example, how diﬀerent tableaux and the inverse method are, even though they can both be understood as search for cut-free sequent proofs. I wanted to give full, carefully explained code for all the methods described. (In my experience it’s easy to underestimate the diﬃculty in passing from a straightforward-looking algorithm to a concrete implementation.) In order to present real executable code that’s almost as readable as the kind of pseudocode often used to describe algorithms, it seemed necessary to use a very high-level language where concrete issues of data representation and memory allocation can be ignored. I selected the functional programming language Objective CAML (OCaml) for this purpose. OCaml is a descendant of Edinburgh ML, a programming language speciﬁcally designed for writing theorem provers, and several major systems are written in it. A drawback of using OCaml (rather than say, C or Java) is that it will be unfamiliar to many readers. However, I only use a simple subset, which is brieﬂy explained in Appendix 2; the code is functional in style with no assignments or sequencing (except for producing diagnostic output). In a few cases (e.g. threading the state through code for binary decision diagrams), imperative code might have been simpler, but it seemed worthwhile to stick to the simplest subset possible. Purely functional programming is particularly convenient for the kind of tinkering that I hope to encourage, since one doesn’t have to worry about accidental side-eﬀects of one computation on others. I will close with a quotation from McCarthy (1963) that nicely encapsulates the philosophy underlying this text, implying as it does the potential new role of logic as a truly applied science. It is reasonable to hope that the relationship between computation and mathematical logic will be as fruitful in the next century as that between analysis and physics in the last.

What’s not in this book Although I aim to cover a broad range of topics, selectivity was essential to prevent the book from becoming unmanageably huge. I focus on theories in classical one-sorted ﬁrst-order logic, since in this coherent setting many of

Preface

xv

the central methods of automated reasoning can be displayed. Not without regret, I have therefore excluded from serious discussion major areas such as model checking, inductive theorem proving, many-sorted logic, modal logic, description logics, intuitionistic logic, lambda calculus, higher-order logic and type theory. I believe, however, that this book will prepare the reader quite well to proceed with any of those areas, many of which are best understood precisely in terms of their contrast with classical ﬁrst-order logic. Another guiding principle has been to present topics only when I felt competent to do so at a fairly elementary level, without undue technicalities or diﬃcult theory. This has meant the neglect of, for example, ordered paramodulation, cylindrical algebraic decomposition and G¨ odel’s second incompleteness theorem. However, in such cases I have tried to give ample references so that interested readers can go further on their own. Acknowledgements This book has taken many years to evolve in haphazard fashion into its current form. During this period, I worked in the University of Cambridge Computer Laboratory, ˚ Abo Akademi University/TUCS and Intel Corporation, as well as spending shorter periods visiting other institutions; I’m grateful above all to Tania and Yestin, for accompanying me on these journeys and tolerating the inordinate time I spent working on this project. It would be impossible to fairly describe here the extent to which my thinking has been shaped by the friends and colleagues that I have encountered over the years. But I owe particular thanks to Mike Gordon, who ﬁrst gave me the opportunity to get involved in this fascinating ﬁeld. I wrote this book partly because I knew of no existing text that presents the range of topics in logic and automated reasoning that I wanted to cover. So the general style and approach is my own, and no existing text can be blamed for its malign inﬂuence. But on the purely logical side, I have mostly followed the presentation of basic metatheorems given by Kreisel and Krivine (1971). Their elegant development suits my purposes precisely, being purely model-theoretic and using the workaday tools of automated theorem proving such as Skolemization and the (so-called) Herbrand theorem. For example, the appealingly algorithmic proof of the interpolation theorem given in Section 5.13 is essentially theirs. Though I have now been a researcher in automated reasoning for almost 20 years, I’m still routinely ﬁnding old results in the literature of which I was previously unaware, or learning of them through personal contact with

xvi

Preface

colleagues. In this connection, I’m grateful to Grigori Mints for pointing me at Lifschitz’s proof of the Nullstellensatz (Section 5.10) using resolution proofs, to Lo¨ıc Pottier for telling me about H¨ ormander’s algorithm for real quantiﬁer elimination (Section 5.9), and to Lars H¨ ormander himself for answering my questions on the genesis of this procedure. I’ve been very lucky to have numerous friends and colleagues comment on drafts of this book, oﬀer welcome encouragement, take up and modify the associated code, and even teach from it. Their inﬂuence has often clariﬁed my thinking and sometimes saved me from serious errors, but needless to say, they are not responsible for any remaining faults in the text. Heartfelt thanks to Rob Arthan, Jeremy Avigad, Clark Barrett, Robert Bauer, Bruno Buchberger, Amine Chaieb, Michael Champigny, Ed Clarke, Byron Cook, Nancy Day, Torkel Franz´en (who, alas, did not live to see the ﬁnished book), Dan Friedman, Mike Gordon, Alexey Gotsman, Jim Grundy, Tom Hales, Tony Hoare, Peter Homeier, Joe Hurd, Robert Jones, Shuvendu Lahiri, Arthur van Leeuwen, Sean McLaughlin, Wojtek Moczydlowski, Magnus Myreen, Tobias Nipkow, Michael Norrish, John O’Leary, Cagdas Ozgenc, Heath Putnam, Tom Ridge, Konrad Slind, Jørgen Villadsen, Norbert Voelker, Ed Westbrook, Freek Wiedijk, Carl Witty, Burkhart Wolﬀ, and no doubt many other correspondents whose contributions I have thoughtlessly forgotten about over the course of time, for their invaluable help. Even in the age of the Web, access to good libraries has been vital. I want to thank the staﬀ of the Cambridge University Library, the Computer Laboratory and DPMMS libraries, the mathematics and computer science libraries of ˚ Abo Akademi, and more recently Portland State University Library and Intel Library, who have often helped me track down obscure references. I also want to acknowledge the peerless Powell’s Bookstore (www.powells.com), which has proved to be a goldmine of classic logic and computer science texts. Finally, let me thank Frances Nex for her extraordinarily painstaking copyediting, as well as Catherine Appleton, Charlotte Broom, Clare Dennison and David Tranah at Cambridge University Press, who have shepherded this book through to publication despite my delays, and have provided invaluable advice, backed up by the helpful comments of the Press’s anonymous reviewers. How to read this book The text is designed to be read sequentially from beginning to end. However, after a study of Chapter 1 and a good part of each of Chapters 2 and 3, the reader may be in a position to dip into other parts according to taste.

Preface

xvii

To support this, I’ve tried to make some important cross-references explicit, and to avoid over-elaborate or non-standard notation where possible. Each chapter ends with a number of exercises. These are almost never intended to be routine, and some are very diﬃcult. This reﬂects my belief that it’s more enjoyable and instructive to solve one really challenging problem than to plod through a large number of trivial drill exercises. The reader shouldn’t be discouraged if most of them seem too hard. They are all optional, i.e. the text can be understood without doing any of them.

The mathematics used in this book Mathematics plays a double role in this book: the subject matter itself is treated mathematically, and automated reasoning is also applied to some problems in mathematics. But for the most part, the mathematical knowledge needed is not all that advanced: basic algebra, sets and functions, induction, and perhaps most fundamentally, an understanding of the notion of a proof. In a few places, more sophisticated analysis and algebra are used, though I have tried to explain most things as I go along. Appendix 1 is a summary of relevant mathematical background that the reader might refer to as needed, or even skim through at the outset.

The software in this book An important part of this book is the associated software, which includes simple implementations, in the OCaml programming language, of the various theorem-proving techniques described. Although the book can generally be understood without detailed study of the code, explanations are often organized around it, and code is used as a proxy for what would otherwise be a lengthy and formalistic description of a syntactic process. (For example, the completeness proof for ﬁrst-order logic in Sections 6.4–6.8 and the proof of Σ1 -completeness of Robinson arithmetic in Section 7.6 are essentially detailed informal arguments that some speciﬁc OCaml functions always work.) So without at least a weak impressionistic idea of how the code works, you will probably ﬁnd some parts of the book heavy going. Since I expect that many readers will have little or no experience of programming, at least in a functional language like OCaml, I have summarized some of the key ideas in Appendix 2. I don’t delude myself into believing that reading this short appendix will turn a novice into an accomplished functional programmer, but I hope it will at least provide some orientation, and it does include references that the reader can pursue if necessary. In fact,

xviii

Preface

the whole book can be considered an extended case study in functional programming, illustrating many important ideas such as structured data types, recursion, higher-order functions, continuations and abstract data types. I hope that many readers will not only look at the code, but actually run it, apply it to new problems, and even try modifying or extending it. To do any of these, though, you will need an OCaml interpreter (see Appendix 2 again). The theorem-proving code itself is almost entirely listed in piecemeal fashion within the text. Since the reader will presumably proﬁt little from actually typing it in, all the code can be downloaded from the website for this book (www.cambridge.org/9780521899574) and then just loaded into the OCaml interpreter with a few keystrokes or cut-and-pasted one phrase at a time. In the future, I hope to make updates to the code and perhaps ports to other languages available at the same URL. More details can be found there about how to run the code, and hence follow along the explanations given in the book while trying out the code in parallel, but I’ll just mention a couple of important points here. Probably the easiest way to proceed is to load the entire code associated with this book, e.g. by starting the OCaml interpreter ocaml in the directory (folder) containing the code and typing: #use "init.ml";;

The default environment is set up to automatically parse anything in French-style quotations as a ﬁrst-order formula. To use some code in Chapter 1 you will need to change this to parse arithmetic expressions: let default_parser = make_parser parse_expression;;

and to use some code in Chapter 2 on propositional logic, you will need to change it to parse propositional formulas: let default_parser = parse_prop_formula;;

Otherwise, you can more or less dip into any parts of the code that interest you. In a very few cases, a basic version of a function is deﬁned ﬁrst as part of the expository ﬂow but later replaced by a more elaborate or eﬃcient version with the same name. The default environment in such cases will always give you the latest one, and if you want to follow the exposition conscientiously you may want to cut-and-paste the earlier version from its source ﬁle. The code is mainly intended to serve a pedagogical purpose, and I have always given clarity and/or brevity priority over eﬃciency. Still, it sometimes

Preface

xix

might be genuinely useful for applications. In any case, before using it, please pay careful attention to the (minimal) legal restrictions listed on the website. Note also that St˚ almarck’s algorithm (Section 2.10) is patented, so the code in the ﬁle stal.ml should not be used for commercial applications.

1 Introduction

In this chapter we introduce logical reasoning and the idea of mechanizing it, touching brieﬂy on important historical developments. We lay the groundwork for what follows by discussing some of the most fundamental ideas in logic as well as illustrating how symbolic methods can be implemented on a computer.

1.1 What is logical reasoning? There are many reasons for believing that something is true. It may seem obvious or at least immediately plausible, we may have been told it by our parents, or it may be strikingly consistent with the outcome of relevant scientiﬁc experiments. Though often reliable, such methods of judgement are not infallible, having been used, respectively, to persuade people that the Earth is ﬂat, that Santa Claus exists, and that atoms cannot be subdivided into smaller particles. What distinguishes logical reasoning is that it attempts to avoid any unjustiﬁed assumptions and conﬁne itself to inferences that are infallible and beyond reasonable dispute. To avoid making any unwarranted assumptions, logical reasoning cannot rely on any special properties of the objects or concepts being reasoned about. This means that logical reasoning must abstract away from all such special features and be equally valid when applied in other domains. Arguments are accepted as logical based on their conformance to a general form rather than because of the speciﬁc content they treat. For instance, compare this traditional example: All men are mortal Socrates is a man Therefore Socrates is mortal

1

2

Introduction

with the following reasoning drawn from mathematics: All positive integers are the sum of four integer squares 15 is a positive integer Therefore 15 is the sum of four integer squares

These two arguments are both correct, and both share a common pattern: All X are Y a is X Therefore a is Y

This pattern of inference is logically valid, since its validity does not depend on the content: the meanings of ‘positive integer’, ‘mortal’ etc. are irrelevant. We can substitute anything we like for these X, Y and a, provided we respect grammatical categories, and the statement is still valid. By contrast, consider the following reasoning: All Athenians are Greek Socrates is an Athenian Therefore Socrates is mortal

Even though the conclusion is perfectly true, this is not logically valid, because it does depend on the content of the terms involved. Other arguments with the same superﬁcial form may well be false, e.g. All Athenians are Greek Socrates is an Athenian Therefore Socrates is beardless

The ﬁrst argument can, however, be turned into a logically valid one by making explicit a hidden assumption ‘all Greeks are mortal’. Now the argument is an instance of the general logically valid form: All G are M All A are G s is A Therefore s is M

At ﬁrst sight, this forensic analysis of reasoning may not seem very impressive. Logically valid reasoning never tells us anything fundamentally new about the world – as Wittgenstein (1922) says, ‘I know nothing about the weather when I know that it is either raining or not raining’. In other words, if we do learn something new about the world from a chain of reasoning, it must contain a step that is not purely logical. Russell, quoted in Schilpp (1944) says:

1.1 What is logical reasoning?

3

Hegel, who deduced from pure logic the whole nature of the world, including the non-existence of asteroids, was only enabled to do so by his logical incompetence.†

But logical analysis can bring out clearly the necessary relationships between facts about the real world and show just where possibly unwarranted assumptions enter into them. For example, from ‘if it has just rained, the ground is wet’ it follows logically that ‘if the ground is not wet, it has not just rained’. This is an instance of a general principle called contraposition: from ‘if P then Q’ it follows that ‘if not Q then not P ’. However, passing from ‘if P then Q’ to ‘if Q then P ’ is not valid in general, and we see in this case that we cannot deduce ‘if the ground is wet, it has just rained’, because it might have become wet through a burst pipe or device for irrigation. Such examples may be, as Locke (1689) put it, ‘triﬂing’, but elementary logical fallacies of this kind are often encountered. More substantially, deductions in mathematics are very far from triﬂing, but have preoccupied and often defeated some of the greatest intellects in human history. Enormously lengthy and complex chains of logical deduction can lead from simple and apparently indubitable assumptions to sophisticated and unintuitive theorems, as Hobbes memorably discovered (Aubrey 1898): Being in a Gentleman’s Library, Euclid’s Elements lay open, and ’twas the 47 El. libri 1 [Pythagoras’s Theorem]. He read the proposition. By G—, sayd he (he would now and then sweare an emphaticall Oath by way of emphasis) this is impossible! So he reads the Demonstration of it, which referred him back to such a Proposition; which proposition he read. That referred him back to another, which he also read. Et sic deinceps [and so on] that at last he was demonstratively convinced of that trueth. This made him in love with Geometry.

Indeed, Euclid’s seminal work Elements of Geometry established a particular style of reasoning that, further reﬁned, forms the backbone of present-day mathematics. This style consists in asserting a small number of axioms, presumably with mathematical content, and deducing consequences from them using purely logical reasoning.‡ Euclid himself didn’t quite achieve a complete separation of logical and non-logical, but his work was ﬁnally perfected by Hilbert (1899) and Tarski (1959), who made explicit some assumptions such as ‘Pasch’s axiom’. †

‡

To be fair to Hegel, the word logic was often used in a broader sense until quite recently, and what we consider logic would have been called speciﬁcally deductive logic, as distinct from inductive logic, the drawing of conclusions from observed data as in the physical sciences. Arguably this approach is foreshadowed in the Socratic method, as reported by Plato. Socrates would win arguments by leading his hapless interlocutors from their views through chains of apparently inevitable consequences. When absurd consequences were derived, the initial position was rendered untenable. For this method to have its uncanny force, there must be no doubt at all over the steps, and no hidden assumptions must be sneaked in.

4

Introduction

1.2 Calculemus! ‘Reasoning is reckoning’. In the epigraph of this book we quoted Hobbes on the similarity between logical reasoning and numerical calculation. While Hobbes deserves credit for making this better known, the idea wasn’t new even in 1651.† Indeed the Greek word logos, used by Plato and Aristotle to mean reason or logical thought, can also in other contexts mean computation or reckoning. When the works of the ancient Greek philosophers became well known in medieval Europe, logos was usually translated into ratio, the Latin word for reckoning (hence the English words rational, ratiocination, etc.). Even in current English, one sometimes hears ‘I reckon that . . . ’, where ‘reckon’ refers to some kind of reasoning rather than literally to computation. However, the connection between reasoning and reckoning remained little more than a suggestive slogan until the work of Gottfried Wilhelm von Leibniz (1646–1716). Leibniz believed that a system for reasoning by calculation must contain two essential components: • a universal language (characteristica universalis) in which anything can be expressed; • a calculus of reasoning (calculus ratiocinator) for deciding the truth of assertions expressed in the characteristica. Leibniz dreamed of a time when disputants unable to agree would not waste much time in futile argument, but would instead translate their disagreement into the characteristica and say to each other ‘calculemus’ (let us calculate). He may even have entertained the idea of having a machine do the calculations. By this time various mechanical calculating devices had been designed and constructed, and Leibniz himself in 1671 designed a machine capable of multiplying, remarking: It is unworthy of excellent men to lose hours like slaves in the labour of calculations which could safely be relegated to anyone else if machines were used.

So Leibniz foresaw the essential components that make automated reasoning possible: a language for expressing ideas precisely, rules of calculation for manipulating ideas in the language, and the mechanization of such calculation. Leibniz’s concrete accomplishments in bringing these ideas to fruition were limited, and remained little-known until recently. But though his work had limited direct inﬂuence on technical developments, his dream still resonates today. †

The Epicurian philosopher Philodemus, writing in the ﬁrst century B.C., introduced the term logisticos (λoγιστ ικ´ oς) to describe logic as the science of calculation.

1.3 Symbolism

5

1.3 Symbolism Leibniz was right to draw attention to the essential ﬁrst step of developing an appropriate language. But he was far too ambitious in wanting to express all aspects of human thought. Eventual progress came rather by extending the scope of the symbolic notations already used in mathematics. As an example of this notation, we would nowadays write ‘x2 ≤ y + z’ rather than ‘x multiplied by itself is less than or equal to the sum of y and z’. Over time, more and more of mathematics has come to be expressed in formal symbolic notation, replacing natural language renderings. Several sound reasons can be identiﬁed. First, a well-chosen symbolic form is usually shorter, less cluttered with irrelevancies, and helps to express ideas more brieﬂy and intuitively (at least to cognoscenti). For example Leibniz’s own notation for diﬀerentiation, dy/dx, nicely captures the idea of a ratio of small diﬀerences, and makes theorems like the chain rule dy/dx = dy/du · du/dx look plausible based on the analogy with ordinary algebra. Second, using a more stylized form of expression can avoid some of the ambiguities of everyday language, and hence communicate meaning with more precision. Doubts over the exact meanings of words are common in many areas, particularly law.† Mathematics is not immune from similar basic disagreements over exactly what a theorem says or what its conditions of validity are, and the consensus on such points can change over time (Lakatos 1976; Lakatos 1980). Finally, and perhaps most importantly, a well-chosen symbolic notation can contribute to making mathematical reasoning itself easier. A simple but outstanding example is the ‘positional’ representation of numbers, where a number is represented by a sequence of numerals each implicitly multiplied by a certain power of a ‘base’. In decimal the base is 10 and we understand the string of digits ‘179’ to mean: 179 = 1 × 102 + 7 × 101 + 9 × 100 . In binary (currently used by most digital computers) the base is 2 and the same number is represented by the string 10110011: 10110011 = 1 × 27 + 0 × 26 + 1 × 25 + 1 × 24 + 0 × 23 + 0 × 22 + 1 × 21 + 1 × 20 . †

For example ‘Since the object of ss 423 and 425 of the Insolvency Act 1986 was to remedy the avoidance of debts, the word ‘and’ between paragraphs (a) and (b) of s 423(2) must be read conjunctively and not disjunctively.’ (Case Summaries, Independent newspaper, 27th December 1993.)

6

Introduction

These positional systems make it very easy to perform important operations on numbers like comparing, adding and multiplying; by contrast, the system of Roman numerals requires more involved algorithms, though there is evidence that many Romans were adept at such calculations (Maher and Makowski 2001). For example, we are normally taught in school to add decimal numbers digit-by-digit from the right, propagating a carry leftwards by adding one in the next column. Once it becomes second nature to follow the rules, we can, and often do, forget about the underlying meaning of these sequences of numerals. Similarly, we might transform an equation x − 3 = 5 − x into x = 3 + 5 − x and then to 2x = 5 + 3 without pausing each time to think about why these rules about moving things from one side of the equation to the other are valid. As Whitehead (1919) says, symbolism and formal rules of manipulation: [. . . ] have invariably been introduced to make things easy. [. . . ] by the aid of symbolism, we can make transitions in reasoning almost mechanically by the eye, which otherwise would call into play the higher faculties of the brain. [. . . ] Civilisation advances by extending the number of important operations which can be performed without thinking about them.

Indeed, such formal rules can be followed reliably by people who do not understand the underlying justiﬁcation, or by computers. After all, computers are expressly designed to follow formal rules (programs) quickly and reliably. They do so without regard to the underlying justiﬁcation, and will faithfully follow even erroneous sets of rules (programs with ‘bugs’).

1.4 Boole’s algebra of logic The word algebra is derived from the Arabic ‘al-jabr’, and was ﬁrst used in the ninth century by Mohammed al-Khwarizmi (ca. 780–850), whose name lies at the root of the word ‘algorithm’. The term ‘al-jabr’ literally means ‘reunion’, but al-Khwarizmi used it to describe in particular his method of solving equations by collecting together (‘reuniting’) like terms, e.g. passing from x + 4 = 6 − x to 2x = 6 − 4 and so to the solution x = 1.† Over the following centuries, through the European renaissance, algebra continued to mean, essentially, rules of manipulation for solving equations. During the nineteenth century, algebra in the traditional sense reached its limits. One of the central preoccupations had been the solving of equations of higher and higher degree, but Niels Henrik Abel (1802–1829) proved in †

The ﬁrst use of the phrase in Europe was nothing to do with mathematics, but rather the appellation ‘algebristas’ for Spanish barbers, who also set (‘reunited’) broken bones as a sideline to their main business.

1.4 Boole’s algebra of logic

7

1824 that there is no general way of solving polynomial equations of degree 5 and above using the ‘radical’ expressions that had worked for lower degrees. Yet at the same time the scope of algebra expanded and it became generalized. Traditionally, variables had stood for real numbers, usually unknown numbers to be determined. However, it soon became standard practice to apply all the usual rules of algebraic manipulation to the ‘imaginary’ quantity i assuming the formal property i2 = −1. Though this procedure went for a long time without any rigorous justiﬁcation, it was eﬀective. Algebraic methods were even applied to objects that were not numbers in the usual sense, such as matrices and Hamilton’s ‘quaternions’, even at the cost of abandoning the usual ‘commutative law’ of multiplication xy = yx. Gradually, it was understood that the underlying interpretation of the symbols could be ignored, provided it was established once and for all that the rules of manipulation used are all valid under that interpretation. The state of aﬀairs was described clear-sightedly by George Boole (1815–1864). They who are acquainted with the present state of the theory of Symbolic Algebra, are aware, that the validity of the processes of analysis does not depend upon the interpretation of the symbols which are employed, but solely on their laws of combination. Every system of interpretation which does not aﬀect the truth of the relations supposed, is equally admissible, and it is true that the same process may, under one scheme of interpretation, represent the solution of a question on the properties of numbers, under another, that of a geometrical problem, and under a third, that of a problem of dynamics or optics. (Boole 1847)

Boole went on to observe that nevertheless, by historical or cultural accident, all algebra at the time involved objects that were in some sense quantitative. He introduced instead an algebra whose objects were to be interpreted as ‘truth-values’ of true or false, and where variables represent propositions.† By a proposition, we mean an assertion that makes a declaration of fact and so may meaningfully be considered either true or false. For example, ‘1 < 2’, ‘all men are mortal’, ‘the moon is made of cheese’ and ‘there are inﬁnitely many prime numbers p such that p + 2 is also prime’ are all propositions, and according to our present state of knowledge, the ﬁrst two are true, the third false and the truth-value of the fourth is unknown (this is the ‘twin primes conjecture’, a famous open problem in mathematics). We are familiar with applying to numbers various arithmetic operations like unary ‘minus’ (negation) and binary ‘times’ (multiplication) and ‘plus’ (addition). In an exactly analogous way, we can combine truth-values using †

Actually Boole gave two diﬀerent but related interpretations: an ‘algebra of classes’ and an ‘algebra of propositions’; we’ll focus on the latter.

8

Introduction

so-called logical connectives, such as unary ‘not’ (logical negation or complement) and binary ‘and’ (conjunction) and ‘or’ (disjunction).† And we can use letters to stand for arbitrary propositions instead of numbers when we write down expressions. Boole emphasized the connection with ordinary arithmetic in the precise formulation of his system and in the use of the familiar algebraic notation for many logical constants and connectives: 0 1 pq p+q

false true p and q p or q

On this interpretation, many of the familiar algebraic laws still hold. For example, ‘p and q’ always has the same truth-value as ‘q and p’, so we can assume the commutative law pq = qp. Similarly, since 0 is false, ‘0 and p’ is false whatever p may be, i.e. 0p = 0. But the Boolean algebra of propositions satisﬁes additional laws that have no counterpart in arithmetic, notably the law p2 = p, where p2 abbreviates pp. In everyday English, the word ‘or’ is ambiguous. The complex proposition ‘p or q’ may be interpreted either inclusively (p or q or both) or exclusively (p or q but not both).‡ In everyday usage it is often implicit that the two cases are mutually exclusive (e.g. ‘I’ll do it tomorrow or the day after’). Boole’s original system restricted the algebra so that p + q only made sense if pq = 0, rather as in ordinary algebra x/y only makes sense if y = 0. However, following Boole’s successor William Stanley Jevons (1835–1882), it became customary to allow use of ‘or’ without restriction, and interpret it in the inclusive sense. We will always understand ‘or’ in this now-standard sense, ‘p or q’ meaning ‘p or q or both’.

Mechanization Even before Boole, machines for logical deduction had been developed, notably the ‘Stanhope demonstrator’ invented by Charles, third Earl of Stanhope (1753–1816). Inspired by this, Jevons (1870) subsequently designed and built his ‘logic machine’, a piano-like device that could perform certain calculations in Boole’s algebra of classes. However, the limits of mechanical †

‡

Arguably disjunction is something of a misnomer, since the two truth-values need not be disjoint, so some like Quine (1950) prefer alternation. And the word ‘connective’ is a misnomer in the case of unary operations like ‘not’, since it does not connect two propositions, but merely negates a single one. However, both usages are well-established. Latin, on the other hand, has separate phrases ‘p vel q’ and ‘aut p aut q’ for the inclusive and exclusive readings, respectively.

1.5 Syntax and semantics

9

engineering and the slow development of logic itself meant that the mechanization of reasoning really started to develop somewhat later, at the start of the modern computer age. We will cover more of the history later in the book in parallel with technical developments. Jevons’s original machine can be seen in the Oxford Museum for the History of Science.†

Logical form In Section 1.1 we talked about arguments ‘having the same form’, but did not deﬁne this precisely. Indeed, it’s hard to do so for arguments expressed in English and other natural languages, which often fail to make the logical structure of sentences apparent: superﬁcial similarities can disguise fundamental structural diﬀerences, and vice versa. For example, the English word ‘is’ can mean ‘has the property of being’ (‘4 is even’), or it can mean ‘is the same as’ (‘2 + 2 is 4’). This example and others like it have often generated philosophical confusion. Once we have a precise symbolism for logical concepts (such as Boole’s algebra of logic) we can simply say that two arguments have the same form if they are both instances of the same formal expression, consistently replacing variables by other propositions. And we can use the formal language to make a mathematically precise deﬁnition of logically valid arguments. This is not to imply that the deﬁnition of logical form and of purely logical argument is a philosophically trivial question; quite the contrary. But we are content not to solve this problem but to ﬁnesse it by adopting a precise mathematical deﬁnition, rather as Hertz (1894) evaded the question of what ‘force’ means in mechanics. After enough concrete experience we will brieﬂy consider (Section 7.8) how our demarcation of the logical arguments corresponds to some traditional philosophical distinctions.

1.5 Syntax and semantics An unusual feature of logic is the careful separation of symbolic expressions and what they stand for. This point bears emphasizing, because in everyday mathematics we often pass unconsciously to the mathematical objects denoted by the symbols. For example when we read and write ‘12’ we think of it as a number, a member of the set N, not as a sequence of two numeral symbols used to represent that number. However, when we want to make precise our formal manipulations, whether these be adding decimal numbers †

See www.mhs.ox.ac.uk/database/index.htm?fname=brief&invno=18230 for some small pictures.

10

Introduction

digit-by-digit or using algebraic laws to rearrange symbolic expressions, we need to maintain the distinction. After all, when deriving equations like x + y = y + x, the whole point is that the mathematical objects denoted are the same; we cannot directly talk about such manipulations if we only consider the underlying meaning. Typically then, we are concerned with (i) some particular set of allowable formal expressions, and (ii) their corresponding meanings. The two are sharply distinguished, but are connected by an interpretation, which maps expressions to their meanings:

Interpretation Expression

- Meaning

The distinction between formal expressions and their meanings is also important in linguistics, and we’ll take over some of the jargon from that subject. Two traditional subﬁelds of linguistics are syntax, which is concerned with the grammatical formation of sentences, and semantics, which is concerned with their meanings. Similarly in logic we often refer to methods as ‘syntactic’ if ‘like algebraic manipulations’ they are considered in isolation from meanings, and ‘semantic’ or ‘semantical’ if meanings play an important role. The words ‘syntax’ and ‘semantics’ are also used in linguistics with more concrete meanings, and these too are adopted in logic. • The syntax of a language is a system of grammar laying out rules about how to produce or recognize grammatical phrases and sentences. For example, we might consider ‘I went to the shop’ grammatical English but not ‘I shop to the went’ because the noun and verb are swapped. In logical systems too, we will often have rules telling us how to generate or recognize well-formed expressions, perhaps for example allowing ‘x + 1’ but not ‘+1×’. • The semantics of a particular word, symbol, sign or phrase is simply its meaning. More broadly, the semantics of a language is a systematic way of ascribing such meanings to all the (grammatical) expressions in the language. Translated into linguistic jargon, choosing an interpretation amounts exactly to giving a semantics to the language.

1.5 Syntax and semantics

11

Object language and metalanguage It may be confusing that we will be describing formal rules for performing logical reasoning, and yet will reason about those rules using . . . logic! In this connection, it’s useful to keep in mind the distinction between the (formal) logic we are talking about and the (everyday intuitive) logic we are using to reason about it. In order to emphasize the contrast we will sometimes deploy the following linguistic jargon. A metalanguage is a language used to talk about another distinct object language, and likewise a metalogic is used to reason about an object logic. Thus, we often call the theorems we derive about formal logic and automated reasoning systems metatheorems rather than merely theorems. This is not (only) to sound more grandiose, but to emphasize the distinction from ‘theorems’ expressed inside those formal systems. Likewise, metalogical reasoning applied to formalized mathematical proofs is often called metamathematics (see Section 7.1). By the way, our chosen programming language OCaml is derived from Edinburgh ML, which was expressly designed for writing theorem proving programs (Gordon, Milner and Wadsworth 1979) and whose name stands for Meta Language. This object–meta distinction (Tarski 1936; Carnap 1937) isn’t limited to logical languages. For instance, in a Russian language lesson given in English, we can consider Russian to be the object language and English the metalanguage.

Abstract and concrete syntax Fine details of syntax are of no fundamental importance. Some mathematics is typed, some is handwritten, and people make various essentially arbitrary choices that do not change anything about the structural way symbols are used together. When mechanizing logic on the computer, we will, for simplicity, restrict ourselves to the usual stock of ASCII characters,† which includes unaccented Latin letters, numbers and some common punctuation signs and spaces. For the fancy letters and special symbols that many logicians use, we will use other letters or words, e.g. ‘forall’ instead of ‘∀’. We will, however, continue to employ the usual symbols in theoretical discussions. This continual translation may even be helpful to the reader who hasn’t seen or understood the symbols before. Regardless of how the symbolic expressions are read or written, it’s more convenient to manipulate them in a form better reﬂecting their structure. Consider the expression ‘x + y × z − w’ in ordinary algebra. This linear form †

See en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII.

12

Introduction

obscures the meaningful structure. To understand which operators have been applied to which subexpressions, or even what constitutes a subexpression, we need to know rules of precedence and associativity, e.g. that ‘×’ ‘binds tighter’ than ‘+’. For instance, despite their apparent similarity in the linear form, ‘y × z’ is a subexpression while ‘x + y’ is not. Even if we make the structure explicit by fully bracketing it as ‘(x + (y × z)) − w’, basic useful operations on expressions like ﬁnding subexpressions, or evaluating the expression for particular values of the variables, become tiresome to describe precisely; one needs to shuﬄe back and forth over the formula matching up brackets. A ‘tree’ structure is much better: just as a family tree makes relations among family members clearly apparent, a tree representation of an expression displays its structure and makes most important manipulations straightforward. As in genealogy, it’s customary to draw trees growing downwards on the printed page, so the same expression might be represented as follows: −

@@

@

w

+ @ @

@

x

×

@ @

y

@z

Generally we refer to the (mainly linear) format used by people as the concrete syntax, and the structural (typically tree-like) form used for manipulations as the abstract syntax. Trees like the above are often called abstract syntax trees (ASTs) and are widely used as the internal representation of formal languages in all kinds of symbolic programs, including the compilers that translate high-level programming languages into machine instructions. Despite their making the structure of an expression clearer, most people prefer not to think or communicate using trees, but to use the less structured concrete syntax.† Hence in our theorem-proving programs we will need to translate input from concrete syntax to abstract syntax, and translate output back from abstract syntax to concrete syntax. These two tasks, known to computer scientists as parsing and prettyprinting, are now well understood †

This is not to say that concrete syntax is necessarily a linear sequence of symbols. Mathematicians often use semi-graphical symbolism (matrix notation, commutative diagrams), and the pioneering logical notation introduced by Frege (1879) was tree-like.

1.6 Symbolic computation and OCaml

13

and fairly routine. The small overhead of writing parsers and prettyprinters is amply repaid by the greater convenience of the tree form for internal manipulation. There are enthusiastic advocates of systems of concrete syntax such as ‘Polish notation’, ‘reverse Polish notation (RPN)’ and LISP ‘S-expressions’, where our expression would be denoted, respectively, by - + x × y z w x y z × + w (- (+ x (× y z)) w) but we will use more traditional notation, with inﬁx operators like ‘+’ and rules of precedence and bracketing.†

1.6 Symbolic computation and OCaml In the early days of modern computing it was commonly believed that computers were essentially devices for numeric calculation (Ceruzzi 1983). Their input and output devices were certainly biased in that direction: when Samuels wrote the ﬁrst checkers (draughts) program at IBM in 1948, he had to encode the output as a number because that was all that could be printed.‡ However, it had already been recognized, long before Turing’s theoretical construction of a universal machine (see Section 7.5), that the potential applicability of computers was much wider. For example, Ada Lovelace observed in 1842 (Huskey and Huskey 1980):§ Many persons who are not conversant with mathematical studies, imagine that because the business of [Babbage’s analytical] engine is to give its results in numerical notation, the nature of its processes must consequently be arithmetical and numerical, rather than algebraical and analytical. This is an error. The engine can arrange and combine its numerical quantities exactly as if they were letters or any other general symbols; and in fact it might bring out its results in algebraical notation, were provisions made accordingly.

There are now many programs that perform symbolic computation, including various quite successful ‘computer algebra systems’ (CASs). Theorem proving programs bear a strong family resemblance to CASs, and even overlap in some of the problems they can solve (see Section 5.11, for example). †

‡ §

Originally the spartan syntax of LISP ‘S-expressions’ was to be supplemented by a richer and more conventional syntax of ‘M-expressions’ (meta-expressions), and this is anticipated in some of the early publications like the LISP 1.5 manual (McCarthy 1962). However, such was the popularity of S-expressions that M-expressions were seldom implemented and never caught on. Related in his speech to the 1985 International Joint Conference on Artiﬁcial Intelligence. See www.fourmilab.to/babbage/sketch.html.

14

Introduction

The preoccupations of those doing symbolic computation have inﬂuenced their favoured programming languages. Whereas many system programmers favour C, numerical analysts FORTRAN and so on, symbolic programmers usually prefer higher-level languages that make typical symbolic operations more convenient, freeing the programmer from explicit details of memory representation etc. We’ve chosen to use Objective CAML (OCaml) as the vehicle for the programming examples in this book. Our code does not use any of OCaml’s more exotic features, and should be easy to port to related functional languages such as F, Standard ML or Haskell. Our insistence on using explicit OCaml code may be disquieting for those with no experience of computer programming, or for those who only know imperative and relatively low-level languages like C or Java. However, we hope that with the help of Appendix 2 and additional study of some standard texts recommended at the end of this chapter, the determined reader will pick up enough OCaml to follow the discussion and play with the code. As a gentle introduction to symbolic computation in OCaml, we will now implement some simple manipulations in ordinary algebra, a domain that will be familiar to many readers. The ﬁrst task is to deﬁne a datatype to represent the abstract syntax of algebraic expressions. We will allow expressions to be built from numeric constants like 0, 1 and 33 and named variables like x and y using the operations of addition (‘+’) and multiplication (‘*’). Here is the corresponding recursive datatype declaration: type expression = Var of string | Const of int | Add of expression * expression | Mul of expression * expression;;

That is, an expression is either a variable identiﬁed by a string, a constant identiﬁed by its integer value, or an addition or multiplication operator applied to two subexpressions. (A ‘*’ indicates that the domain of a type constructor is a Cartesian product, so it can take two expressions as arguments. It is nothing to do with the multiplication being deﬁned!) We can use the syntax constructors introduced by this type deﬁnition to create the symbolic representation for any particular expression, such as 2 × x + y: # Add(Mul(Const 2,Var "x"),Var "y");; - : expression = Add (Mul (Const 2, Var "x"), Var "y")

1.6 Symbolic computation and OCaml

15

A simple but representative example of symbolic computation is applying speciﬁed transformation rules like 0 + x −→ x and 3 + 5 −→ 8 to ‘simplify’ an expression. Each rule is expressed in OCaml by a starting and ﬁnishing pattern, e.g. Add(Const(0),x) -> x for a transformation 0 + x −→ x. (The special pattern ‘_’ matches anything, so the last line ensures that if none of the other patterns match, expr is returned unchanged.) When the function is applied, OCaml will run through the rules in order and apply the ﬁrst one whose starting pattern matches the input expression expr, replacing variables like x by the relevant subexpression. let simplify1 expr = match expr with Add(Const(m),Const(n)) -> Const(m + n) | Mul(Const(m),Const(n)) -> Const(m * n) | Add(Const(0),x) -> x | Add(x,Const(0)) -> x | Mul(Const(0),x) -> Const(0) | Mul(x,Const(0)) -> Const(0) | Mul(Const(1),x) -> x | Mul(x,Const(1)) -> x | _ -> expr;;

However, simplifying just once is not necessarily adequate; we would like instead to simplify repeatedly until no further progress is possible. To do this, let us apply the above function in a bottom-up sweep through an expression tree, which will simplify in a cascaded manner. In traditional OCaml recursive style, we ﬁrst simplify any immediate subexpressions as much as possible, then apply simplify1 to the result:† let rec simplify expr = match expr with Add(e1,e2) -> simplify1(Add(simplify e1,simplify e2)) | Mul(e1,e2) -> simplify1(Mul(simplify e1,simplify e2)) | _ -> simplify1 expr;;

Rather than a simple bottom-up sweep, a more sophisticated approach would be to mix top-down and bottom-up simpliﬁcation. For example, if E is very large it would seem more eﬃcient to simplify 0 × E immediately to 0 without any examination of E. However, this needs to be implemented with care to ensure that all simpliﬁable subterms are simpliﬁed without the danger of looping indeﬁnitely. Anyway, here is our simpliﬁcation function in action on the expression (0 × x + 1) ∗ 3 + 12: †

We could leave simplify1 out of the last line, since no simpliﬁcation will be applicable to any expression reaching this case, but it seems more thematic to include it.

16

Introduction

# let e = Add(Mul(Add(Mul(Const(0),Var "x"),Const(1)),Const(3)), Const(12));; val e : expression = Add (Mul (Add (Mul (Const 0, Var "x"), Const 1), Const 3), Const 12) # simplify e;; - : expression = Const 15

Getting this far is straightforward using standard OCaml functional programming techniques: recursive datatypes to represent tree structures and the deﬁnition of functions via pattern-matching and recursion. We hope the reader who has not used similar languages before can begin to see why OCaml is appealing for symbolic computing. But of course, those who are fond of other programming languages are more than welcome to translate our code into them. As planned, we will implement a parser and prettyprinter to translate between abstract syntax trees and concrete strings (‘x + 0’), setting them up to be invoked automatically by OCaml for input and output of expressions. We model our concrete syntax on ordinary algebraic notation, except that in a couple of respects we will follow the example of computer languages rather than traditional mathematics. We allow arbitrarily long ‘words’ as variables, whereas mathematicians traditionally use mostly single letters with superscripts and subscripts; this is especially important given the limited stock of ASCII characters. And we insist that multiplication is written with an explicit inﬁx symbol (‘x * y’), rather than simple juxtaposition (‘x y’), which later on we will use for function application. In everyday mathematics we usually rely on informal cues like variable names and background knowledge to see at once that f (x + 1) denotes function application whereas y(x + 1) denotes multiplication, but this kind of context-dependent parsing is a bit more complicated to implement.

1.7 Parsing Translating concrete into abstract syntax is a well-understood topic because of its central importance to programming language compilers, interpreters and translators. It is now conventional to separate the transformation into two separate stages: • lexical analysis (scanning) decomposes the sequences of input characters into ‘tokens’ (roughly speaking, words); • parsing converts the linear sequences of tokens into an abstract syntax tree.

1.7 Parsing

17

For example, lexical analysis might split the input ‘v10 + v11’ into three tokens ‘v10’, ‘+’ and ‘v11’, coalescing adjacent alphanumeric characters into words and throwing away any number of spaces (and perhaps even line breaks) between these tokens. Parsing then only has to deal with sequences of tokens and can ignore lower-level details.

Lexing We start by classifying characters into broad groups: spaces, punctuation, symbolic, alphanumeric, etc. We treat the underscore and prime characters as alphanumeric, in deference to the usual conventions in computing (‘x_1’) and mathematics (‘f ’). The following OCaml predicates tell us whether a character (actually, one-character string) belongs to a certain class:† let matches s = let chars = explode s in fun c -> mem c chars;; let space = matches " \t\n\r" and punctuation = matches "()[]{}," and symbolic = matches "~‘!@#$%^&*-+=|\\:;<>.?/" and numeric = matches "0123456789" and alphanumeric = matches "abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz_’ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789";;

A token will be either a sequence of adjacent alphanumeric characters (like ‘x’ or ‘size1’), a sequence of adjacent symbolic characters (‘+’, ‘<=’), or a single punctuation character (‘(’).‡ Lexical analysis, scanning left-to-right, will assume that a token is the longest possible, for instance that ‘x1’ is a single token, not two. We treat punctuation characters diﬀerently from other symbols just to avoid some counterintuitive eﬀects of the ‘longest possible token’ rule, such as the detection of a token ‘((’ in the string ‘((x + y) + z)’. Next we will deﬁne an auxiliary function lexwhile that takes a property prop of characters, such as one of the classifying predicates above, and a list of input characters, separating oﬀ as a string the longest initial sequence of that list of characters satisfying prop: let rec lexwhile prop inp = match inp with c::cs when prop c -> let tok,rest = lexwhile prop cs in c^tok,rest | _ -> "",inp;; † ‡

Of course, this is a very ineﬃcient procedure. However, we care even less than usual about eﬃciency in these routines since parsing is not usually a critical component in overall runtime. In the present example, the only meaningful symbolic tokens consist of a single character, like ‘+’. However, by allowing longer symbolic tokens we will be able to re-use this lexical analyzer unchanged in later work.

18

Introduction

The lexical analyzer itself maps a list of input characters into a list of token strings. First any initial spaces are separated and thrown away, using lexwhile space. If the resulting list of characters is nonempty, we classify the ﬁrst character and use lexwhile to separate the longest string of characters of the same class; for punctuation (or other unexpected) characters we give lexwhile an always-false property so it stops at once. Then we add the ﬁrst character back on to the token and recursively analyze the rest of the input. let rec lex inp = match snd(lexwhile space inp) with [] -> [] | c::cs -> let prop = if alphanumeric(c) then alphanumeric else if symbolic(c) then symbolic else fun c -> false in let toktl,rest = lexwhile prop cs in (c^toktl)::lex rest;;

We can try the lexer on a typical input string, and another example reminiscent of C syntax to illustrate longer symbolic tokens. # lex(explode "2*((var_1 + x’) + 11)");; - : string list = ["2"; "*"; "("; "("; "var_1"; "+"; "x’"; ")"; "+"; "11"; ")"] # lex(explode "if (*p1-- == *p2++) then f() else g()");; - : string list = ["if"; "("; "*"; "p1"; "--"; "=="; "*"; "p2"; "++"; ")"; "then"; "f"; "("; ")"; "else"; "g"; "("; ")"]

Parsing Now we want to transform a sequence of tokens into an abstract syntax tree. We can reﬂect the higher precedence of multiplication over addition by considering an expression like 2 ∗ w + 3 ∗ (x + y) + z to be a sequence of ‘product expressions’ (here ‘2 ∗ w’, ‘3 ∗ (x + y)’ and ‘z’) separated by ‘+’. In turn each product expression, say 2 ∗ w, is a sequence of ‘atomic expressions’ (here ‘2’ and ‘w’) separated by ‘∗’. Finally, an atomic expression is either a constant, a variable, or an arbitrary expression enclosed in brackets; note that we require parentheses (round brackets), though we could if we chose allow square brackets and/or braces as well. We can invent names for these three categories, say ‘expression’, ‘product’ and ‘atom’, and illustrate how each is built up from the others by a series of rules often called a ‘BNF† †

BNF stands for ‘Backus–Naur form’, honouring two computer scientists who used this technique to describe the syntax of the programming language ALGOL. Similar grammars are used in formal language theory.

1.7 Parsing

19

grammar’; read ‘−→’ as ‘may be of the form’ and ‘|’ as ‘or’. expression −→ product + · · · + product product −→ atom ∗ · · · ∗ atom atom −→ (expression) |

constant

|

variable

Since the grammar is already recursive (‘expression’ is deﬁned in terms of itself, via the intermediate categories), we might as well use recursion to replace the repetitions: expression −→ product |

product + expression

product −→ atom |

atom ∗ product

atom −→ (expression) |

constant

|

variable

This gives rise to a very direct way of parsing the input using three mutually recursive functions for the three diﬀerent categories of expression, an approach known as recursive descent parsing. Each parsing function is given a list of tokens and returns a pair consisting of the parsed expression tree together with any unparsed input. Note that the pattern of recursion exactly matches the above grammar and simply examines tokens when necessary to decide which of several alternatives to take. For example, to parse an expression, we ﬁrst parse a product, and then test whether the ﬁrst unparsed character is ‘+’; if it is, then we make a recursive call to parse the rest and compose the results accordingly. let rec parse_expression i = match parse_product i with e1,"+"::i1 -> let e2,i2 = parse_expression i1 in Add(e1,e2),i2 | e1,i1 -> e1,i1

A product works similarly in terms of a parser for atoms: and parse_product i = match parse_atom i with e1,"*"::i1 -> let e2,i2 = parse_product i1 in Mul(e1,e2),i2 | e1,i1 -> e1,i1

20

Introduction

and an atom parser handles the most basic expressions, including an arbitrary expression in brackets: and parse_atom i = match i with [] -> failwith "Expected an expression at end of input" | "("::i1 -> (match parse_expression i1 with e2,")"::i2 -> e2,i2 | _ -> failwith "Expected closing bracket") | tok::i1 -> if forall numeric (explode tok) then Const(int_of_string tok),i1 else Var(tok),i1;;

The ‘right-recursive’ formulation of the grammar means that we interpret repeated operations that lack disambiguating brackets as right-associative, e.g. x+y +z as x+(y+z). Had we instead deﬁned a ‘left-recursive’ grammar: expression −→ product |

expression + product

then x + y + z would have been interpreted as (x + y) + z. For an associative operation like ‘+’ it doesn’t matter that much, since at least the meanings are the same, but for ‘−’ this latter policy is clearly more appropriate.† Finally, we deﬁne the overall parser via a wrapper function that explodes the input string, lexically analyzes it, parses the sequence of tokens and then ﬁnally checks that no input remains unparsed. We deﬁne a generic function for this, applicable to any core parser pfn, since it will be useful again later: let make_parser pfn s = let expr,rest = pfn (lex(explode s)) in if rest = [] then expr else failwith "Unparsed input";;

We call our parser default_parser, and test it on a simple example: # let default_parser = make_parser parse_expression;; val default_parser : string -> expression = # default_parser "x + 1";; - : expression = Add (Var "x", Const 1)

But we don’t even need to invoke the parser explicitly. Our setup exploits OCaml’s quotation facility so that any French-style quotation will automatically have its body passed as a string to the function default_parser:‡ †

‡

Translating such a left-recursive grammar naively into recursive parsing functions would cause an inﬁnite loop since parse expression would just call itself directly right at the beginning and never get started on useful work. However, a small modiﬁcation copes with this diﬃculty – see the deﬁnition of parse left infix in Appendix 3. OCaml’s treatment of quotations is programmable; our action of feeding the string to default parser is set up in the ﬁle Quotexpander.ml.

1.8 Prettyprinting

21

# <<(x1 + x2 + x3) * (1 + 2 + 3 * x + y)>>;; - : expression = Mul (Add (Var "x1", Add (Var "x2", Var "x3")), Add (Const 1, Add (Const 2, Add (Mul (Const 3, Var "x"), Var "y"))))

The process by which parsing functions were constructed from the grammar is almost mechanical, and indeed there are tools to produce parsers automatically from slightly augmented grammars. However, we thought it worthwhile to be explicit about this programming task, which is not really so diﬃcult and provides a good example of programming with recursive functions.

1.8 Prettyprinting For presentation to the user we need the reverse transformation, from abstract to concrete syntax. A crude but adequate solution is the following: let rec string_of_exp e = match e with Var s -> s | Const n -> string_of_int n | Add(e1,e2) -> "("^(string_of_exp e1)^" + "^(string_of_exp e2)^")" | Mul(e1,e2) -> "("^(string_of_exp e1)^" * "^(string_of_exp e2)^")";;

Brackets are necessary in general to reﬂect the groupings in the abstract syntax, otherwise we could mistakenly print, say ‘6×(x+y)’ as ‘6×x+y’. Our function puts brackets uniformly round each instance of a binary operator, which is perfectly correct but sometimes looks cumbersome to a human: # string_of_exp <<x + 3 * y>>;; - : string = "(x + (3 * y))"

We would (probably) prefer to omit the outermost brackets, and others that are implicit in rules for precedence or associativity. So let’s give string_of_exp an additional argument for the ‘precedence level’ of the operator of which the expression is an immediate subexpression. Now, brackets are only needed if the current expression has a top-level operator with lower precedence than this ‘outer precedence’ argument. We arbitrarily allocate precedence 2 to addition, 4 to multiplication, and use 0 at the outermost level. Moreover, we treat the operators asymmetrically to reﬂect right-associativity, so the left-hand recursive subcall is given a slightly higher outer precedence to force brackets if iterated instances of the same operation are left-associated.

22

Introduction

let rec string_of_exp pr e = match e with Var s -> s | Const n -> string_of_int n | Add(e1,e2) -> let s = (string_of_exp 3 if 2 < pr then "("^s^")" | Mul(e1,e2) -> let s = (string_of_exp 5 if 4 < pr then "("^s^")"

e1)^" + "^(string_of_exp 2 e2) in else s e1)^" * "^(string_of_exp 4 e2) in else s;;

Our overall printing function will print with starting precedence level 0 and surround the result with the kind of quotation marks we use for input: let print_exp e = Format.print_string ("<<"^string_of_exp 0 e^">>");;

As with the parser, we can set up the printer to be invoked automatically on any result of the appropriate type, using the following magic incantation (the hash is part of the directive that is entered, not the OCaml prompt): #install_printer print_exp;;

Now we get output quite close to the concrete syntax we would naturally type in: # # # # -

<<x + 3 * y>>;; : expression = <<x + 3 * y>> <<(x + 3) * y>>;; : expression = <<(x + 3) * y>> <<1 + 2 + 3>>;; : expression = <<1 + 2 + 3>> <<((1 + 2) + 3) + 4>>;; : expression = <<((1 + 2) + 3) + 4>>

The main rough edge remaining is that expressions too large to ﬁt on one line are not split up in an intelligent way to reﬂect the structure via the line breaks, as in the following example. The printers we use later (see Appendix 3) make a somewhat better job of this by employing a special OCaml library Format. # <<(x1 + x2 + x3 (y1 + y2 + y3 - : expression = <<(x1 + x2 + x3 + y4 + y5 + y6 + y7

+ x4 + x5 + x6 + x7 + x8 + x9 + x10) * + y4 + y5 + y6 + y7 + y8 + y9 + y10)>>;; x4 + x5 + x6 + x7 + x8 + x9 + x10) * (y1 + y2 + y3 + + y8 + y9 + y10)>>

Having demonstrated the basic programming needed to support symbolic computation, we will end this chapter and move on to the serious study of logic and automated reasoning.

Further reading

23

Further reading We conﬁne ourselves here to general references and those for topics that we won’t cover ourselves in more depth later. More speciﬁc and technical references will be presented at the end of each later chapter. Davis (2000) and Devlin (1997) are general accounts of the development of logic and its mechanization, as well as related topics in computer science and linguistics. There are many elementary textbooks on logic such as Hodges (1977), Mates (1972) and Tarski (1941). Two logic books that, like this one, are accompanied by computer programs are Keisler (1996) and Barwise and Etchemendy (1991). There are also several books discussing carefully the role of logical reasoning in mathematics, e.g. Garnier and Taylor (1996). Boche´ nski (1961), Dumitriu (1977) and Kneale and Kneale (1962) are detailed and scholarly accounts of the history of logic. Kneebone (1963) is a survey of mathematical logic which also contains a lot of historical information, while Marciszewski and Murawski (1995) shares our emphasis on mechanization. For a readable account of Jevons’s logical piano and other early ‘reasoning machines’, starting with the Spanish mystic Ramon Lull in the thirteenth century, see Gardner (1958). MacKenzie (2001) is a historical overview of the development of automated theorem proving and its applications. There are numerous introductions to philosophical logic that discuss issues like the notion of logical consequence in more depth; e.g. Engel (1991), Grayling (1990) and Haack (1978). Philosophically inclined readers may enjoy considering the claims of Mill (1865) and Mauthner (1901) that logical consequence is merely a psychological accident, and the polemical replies by Frege (1879) and Husserl (1900). For further OCaml and functional programming references, see Appendix 2. The basic parsing techniques we have described are explained in detail in virtually every book ever written on compiler technology. The ‘dragon book’ by Aho, Sethi and Ullman (1986) has long been considered a classic, though its treatment of parsing is probably too extensive for those whose primary interest is elsewhere. A detailed theoretical analysis of what kind of parsing tasks are and aren’t decidable leads naturally into the theory of computation. Davis, Sigal and Weyuker (1994) not only covers this material thoroughly, but is also a textbook on logic. For more on prettyprinting, see Oppen (1980b) and Hughes (1995). Other discussions of theorem proving in the same implementation-oriented style as ours are given by Huet (1986), Newborn (2001) and Paulson (1992), while Gordon (1988) also describes, in similar style, the use of theorem provers within a program veriﬁcation environment. Other general textbooks

24

Introduction

on automated theorem proving are Chang and Lee (1973), Duﬀy (1991) and Fitting (1990), as well as some more specialized texts we will mention later. Exercises 1.1

1.2

1.3

1.4

1.5

1.6

1.7

Modify the parser and printer to support a concrete syntax where juxtaposition is an acceptable (or the only) way of denoting multiplication. Add an inﬁx exponentiation operation ‘^’ to the parser, printer and simpliﬁcation functions. You can make it right-associative so that ‘x^y^z’ is interpreted as ‘x^(y^z)’. Add a subtraction operation to the parser, printer and simpliﬁcation functions. Be careful to make subtraction associate to the left, so that x − y − z is understood as (x − y) − z not x − (y − z). If you get stuck, you can see how similar things are done in Appendix 3. After adding subtraction as in the previous exercise, add a unary negation operator using the same ‘−’ symbol. Take care that you can parse an expression such as x − − − x, correctly distinguishing instances of subtraction and negation, and simplify it to 0. Write a simpliﬁer that uses a more intelligent traversal strategy to avoid wasteful evaluation of subterms such as E in 0 · E or E − E. Write a function to generate huge expressions in order to test how much more eﬃcient it is. Write a more sophisticated simpliﬁer that will put terms in a canonical polynomial form, e.g. transform (x+1)3 −3·(x+1)2 +3·(2·x−x) into x3 −2. We will eventually develop similar functions in Chapter 5. Many concrete strings with slightly diﬀerent bracketing or spacing correspond to the same abstract syntax tree, so we can’t expect print(parse(s)) = s in general. But how about parse(print(e)) = e? If not, how could you change the code to make sure it does hold? (There is a probably apocryphal story of testing an English/Russian translation program by translating the English expression ‘the spirit is willing, but the ﬂesh is weak’ into Russian and back to English, resulting in ‘the vodka is good and the meat is tender’. Another version has ‘out of sight, out of mind’ returned as ‘invisible idiot’.)

2 Propositional logic

We study propositional logic in detail, deﬁning its formal syntax in OCaml together with parsing and printing support. We discuss some of the key propositional algorithms and prove the compactness theorem, as well as indicating the surprisingly rich applications of propositional theorem proving. 2.1 The syntax of propositional logic Propositional logic is a modern version of Boole’s algebra of propositions as presented in Section 1.4.† It involves expressions called formulas‡ that are intended to represent propositions, i.e. assertions that may be considered true or false. These formulas can be built from constants ‘true’ and ‘false’ and some basic atomic propositions (atoms) using various logical connectives (‘not’, ‘and’, ‘or’, etc.). The atomic propositions are like variables in ordinary algebra, and we sometimes refer to them as propositional variables or Boolean variables. As the word ‘atomic’ suggests, we do not analyze their internal structure; that will be considered when we treat ﬁrst-order logic in the next chapter. Representation in OCaml We represent propositional formulas using an OCaml datatype by analogy with the type of expressions in Section 1.6. We allow the ‘constant’ propositions False and True and atomic formulas Atom p, and can build up formulas from them using the unary operator Not and the binary connectives †

‡

Indeed, propositional logic is sometimes called ‘Boolean algebra’. But this is apt to be confusing because mathematicians refer to any algebraic structure satisfying certain axioms, roughly the usual laws of algebra together with x2 = x, as a Boolean algebra (Halmos 1963). When consulting the literature, the reader may ﬁnd the phrase well-formed formula (wﬀ for short) used instead of just ‘formula’. This is to emphasize that in the concrete syntax, we are only interested in strings with a syntactically valid form, not arbitrary strings of symbols.

25

26

Propositional logic

And, Or, Imp (‘implies’) and Iff (‘if and only if’). We defer a discussion of the exact meanings of these connectives, and deal ﬁrst with immediate practicalities. The underlying set of atomic propositions is largely arbitrary, although for some purposes it’s important that it be inﬁnite, to avoid a limit on the complexity of formulas we can consider. In abstract treatments it’s common just to index the primitive propositions by number. We make the underlying type ’a of atomic propositions a parameter of the deﬁnition of the type of formulas, so that many basic functions work equally well whatever it may be. This apparently specious generality will be useful to avoid repeated work later when we consider the extension to ﬁrst-order logic. For the same reason we include two additional formula type constructors Forall and Exists. These will largely be ignored in the present chapter but their role will become clear later on. type (’a)formula = | | | | | | | | |

False True Atom of ’a Not of (’a)formula And of (’a)formula * (’a)formula Or of (’a)formula * (’a)formula Imp of (’a)formula * (’a)formula Iff of (’a)formula * (’a)formula Forall of string * (’a)formula Exists of string * (’a)formula;;

Concrete syntax As we’ve seen, Boole used traditional algebraic signs like ‘+’ for the logical connectives. This makes many logical truths look beguilingly familiar, e.g. p(q + r) = pq + pr But some logical truths then look quite alien, such as the following, resulting from systematically exchanging ‘and’ and ‘or’ in the ﬁrst formula: p + qr = (p + q)(p + r) In its logical guise this says that if either p holds or both q and r hold, then either p or q holds, and also either p or r holds, and vice versa. A little thought should convince the reader that this is indeed always the case; recall that ‘p or q’ is inclusive, meaning p or q or both. To avoid confusion or misleading analogies with ordinary algebra, we will use special symbols for the connectives that are nowadays fairly standard.

2.1 The syntax of propositional logic

27

In each row of the following table we give the English reading of each construct, followed by the standard symbolism we will adopt in discussions, then the ASCII approximations that we will support in our programs, the corresponding abstract syntax construct, and ﬁnally some other symbolisms in use. (This last column can be ignored for the purposes of this book, but may be useful when consulting the literature.) English false true not p p and q p or q p implies q p iﬀ q

Symbolic ⊥ ¬p p∧q p∨q p⇒q p⇔q

ASCII false true ~p p /\ q p \/ q p ==> q p <=> q

OCaml False True Not p And(p,q) Or(p,q) Imp(p,q) Iff(p,q)

Other symbols 0, F 1, T p, −p, ∼ p pq, p&q, p · q p + q, p | q, p or q p → q, p ⊃ q p ↔ q, p ≡ q, p ∼ q

The symbol ‘∨’ is derived from the ﬁrst letter of ‘vel’, the Latin word for inclusive or, looks like the ﬁrst letter of ‘true’, while ⊥ and ∧ are just mirror-images of and ∨, reﬂecting a principle of duality to be explained in Section 2.4.† The sign for negation is close enough to the sign for arithmetical negation to be easy to remember. Some readers may have seen the symbols for implication and ‘if and only if’ in informal mathematics. As with ordinary algebra, we establish rules of precedence for the connectives, overriding it by bracketing if necessary. The (quite standard) precedence order we adopt is indicated in the ordering of the table above, with ‘¬’ the highest and ‘⇔’ the lowest. For example p ⇒ q ∧ ¬r ∨ s means p ⇒ ((q ∧ (¬r)) ∨ s). Perhaps it would be more appropriate to give ∧ and ∨ equal precedence, but only a few authors do that (Dijkstra and Scholten 1990) and we will follow the herd by giving ∧ higher precedence. All our binary connectives are parsed in a right-associated fashion, so p∧q∧r means p∧(q∧r), and so on. In informal practice, iterated implications of the form p ⇒ q ⇒ r are often used as a shorthand for ‘p ⇒ q and q ⇒ r’, just as x ≤ y ≤ z is for ‘x ≤ y and y ≤ z’. For us, however, p ⇒ q ⇒ r just means p ⇒ (q ⇒ r), which is not the same thing.‡ In informal discussions, we will not make the Atom constructor explicit, but will try to use variable names like p, q and r for general formulas and †

‡

The symbols for ‘and’ and ‘or’ are also just more angular versions of the standard symbols for set intersection and union. This is no coincidence: x ∈ S ∩ T iﬀ x ∈ S ∧ x ∈ T and x ∈ S ∪ T iﬀ x ∈ S ∨ x ∈ T . It is logically equivalent to p ∧q ⇒ r, as the reader will be able to conﬁrm when we have deﬁned the term precisely.

28

Propositional logic

x, y and z for general atoms. For example, when we talk about a formula x ⇔ p, we usually mean a formula of the form Iff(Atom(x),p). Generic parsing and printing We set up automated parsing and printing support for formulas, just as we did for ordinary algebraic expressions in Sections 1.7–1.8. Since the details are not important for present purposes, a detailed description of the code is deferred to Appendix 3. We do want to emphasize, however, that since the type of formulas is parametrized by a type of atomic propositions, the parsing and printing functions are similarly parametrized. The function parse_formula has type: # parse_formula;; - : (string list -> string list -> ’a formula * string list) * (string list -> string list -> ’a formula * string list) -> string list -> string list -> ’a formula * string list =

This takes as additional arguments a pair of parsers for atoms and a list of strings. For present purposes the ﬁrst atom parser in the pair and the list of strings can essentially be ignored; they will be used when we extend parsing to ﬁrst-order formulas in the next chapter, the former to handle special inﬁx atomic formulas like x < y and the latter to retain a context of non-propositional variables. Similarly, print_qformula (print a formula with quotation marks) has type: # print_qformula;; - : (int -> ’a -> unit) -> ’a formula -> unit =

expecting a basic ‘primitive proposition printer’ (which as well as the proposition gets supplied with the current precedence level) and producing a printer for the overall type of formulas. Primitive propositions Although many functions will be generic, it makes experimentation with some of the operations easier if we ﬁx on a deﬁnite type of primitive propositions. Accordingly we deﬁne the following type of primitive propositions indexed by names (i.e. strings): type prop = P of string;;

We deﬁne the following to get the name of a proposition: let pname(P s) = s;;

2.1 The syntax of propositional logic

29

Now we just need to provide a parser for atomic propositions, which is quite straightforward. For reasons explained in Appendix 3 we need to check that the ﬁrst input character is not a left bracket, but otherwise we just take the ﬁrst token in the input stream as the name of a primitive proposition: let parse_propvar vs inp = match inp with p::oinp when p <> "(" -> Atom(P(p)),oinp | _ -> failwith "parse_propvar";;

Now we feed this to the generic formula parser, with an always-failing function for the presently unused inﬁx atom parser and an empty list for the context of non-propositional variables: let parse_prop_formula = make_parser (parse_formula ((fun _ _ -> failwith ""),parse_propvar) []);;

and we can set it to automatically apply to anything typed in quotations by: let default_parser = parse_prop_formula;;

Now we turn to printing, constructing a (trivial) function to print propositional variables, ignoring the additional precedence argument: let print_propvar prec p = print_string(pname p);;

and then setting up and installing the overall printer: let print_prop_formula = print_qformula print_propvar;; #install_printer print_prop_formula;;

We are now in an environment where propositional formulas will be automatically parsed and printed, e.g.: # <

q ==> r>>;; formula = <

r>> = <

q <=> r /\ s \/ (t <=> ~ ~u /\ v)>>;; prop formula = <

q <=> r /\ s \/ (t <=> ~(~u) /\ v)>>

(Note that the space between the two negation symbols is necessary or it would be interpreted as a single token, resulting in a parse error.)

30

Propositional logic

The printer is designed to split large formulas across lines in a reasonable fashion: # And(fm,fm);; - : prop formula = <<(p ==> q <=> r /\ s \/ (t <=> ~(~u) /\ v)) /\ (p ==> q <=> r /\ s \/ (t <=> ~(~u) /\ v))>> # And(Or(fm,fm),fm);; - : prop formula = <<((p ==> q <=> r /\ s \/ (t <=> ~(~u) /\ v)) \/ (p ==> q <=> r /\ s \/ (t <=> ~(~u) /\ v))) /\ (p ==> q <=> r /\ s \/ (t <=> ~(~u) /\ v))>>

Syntax operations It’s convenient to have syntax operations corresponding to the formula constructors usable as ordinary OCaml functions: let mk_and p q = And(p,q) and mk_or p q = Or(p,q) and mk_imp p q = Imp(p,q) and mk_iff p q = Iff(p,q) and mk_forall x p = Forall(x,p) and mk_exists x p = Exists(x,p);;

Dually, it’s often convenient to be able to break formulas apart without explicit pattern-matching. This function breaks apart an equivalence (or biimplication or biconditional), i.e. a formula of the form p ⇔ q, into the pair (p, q): let dest_iff fm = match fm with Iff(p,q) -> (p,q) | _ -> failwith "dest_iff";;

Similarly this function breaks apart a formula p ∧ q, called a conjunction, into its two conjuncts p and q: let dest_and fm = match fm with And(p,q) -> (p,q) | _ -> failwith "dest_and";;

while the following recursively breaks down a conjunction into a list of conjuncts: let rec conjuncts fm = match fm with And(p,q) -> conjuncts p @ conjuncts q | _ -> [fm];;

The following similar functions break down a formula p ∨ q, called a disjunction, into its disjuncts p and q, one at the top level, one recursively:

2.1 The syntax of propositional logic

31

let dest_or fm = match fm with Or(p,q) -> (p,q) | _ -> failwith "dest_or";; let rec disjuncts fm = match fm with Or(p,q) -> disjuncts p @ disjuncts q | _ -> [fm];;

This is a top-level destructor for implications: let dest_imp fm = match fm with Imp(p,q) -> (p,q) | _ -> failwith "dest_imp";;

The formulas p and q in an implication p ⇒ q are referred to as its antecedent and consequent respectively, and we deﬁne corresponding functions: let antecedent fm = fst(dest_imp fm);; let consequent fm = snd(dest_imp fm);;

We’ll often want to deﬁne functions by recursion over formulas, just as we did with simpliﬁcation in Section 1.6. Two patterns of recursion seem suﬃciently common that it makes sense to deﬁne generic functions. The following applies a function to all the atoms in a formula, but otherwise leaves the structure unchanged. It can be used, for example, to perform systematic replacement of one particular atomic proposition by another formula: let rec onatoms f fm = match fm with Atom a -> f a | Not(p) -> Not(onatoms f p) | And(p,q) -> And(onatoms f p,onatoms f q) | Or(p,q) -> Or(onatoms f p,onatoms f q) | Imp(p,q) -> Imp(onatoms f p,onatoms f q) | Iff(p,q) -> Iff(onatoms f p,onatoms f q) | Forall(x,p) -> Forall(x,onatoms f p) | Exists(x,p) -> Exists(x,onatoms f p) | _ -> fm;;

The following is an analogue of the list iterator itlist for formulas, iterating a binary function over all the atoms of a formula. let rec overatoms f fm b = match fm with Atom(a) -> f a b | Not(p) -> overatoms f p b | And(p,q) | Or(p,q) | Imp(p,q) | Iff(p,q) -> overatoms f p (overatoms f q b) | Forall(x,p) | Exists(x,p) -> overatoms f p b | _ -> b;;

32

Propositional logic

A particularly common application is to collect together some set of attributes associated with the atoms; in the simplest case just returning the set of all atoms. We can do this by iterating a function f together with an ‘append’ over all the atoms, and ﬁnally converting the result to a set to remove duplicates. (We could use union to remove duplicates as we proceed, but the present implementation can be more eﬃcient where the sets involved are large.) let atom_union f fm = setify (overatoms (fun h t -> f(h)@t) fm []);;

We will soon see some illustrations of how these very general functions can be used in practice.

2.2 The semantics of propositional logic Since propositional formulas are intended to represent assertions that may be true or false, the ultimate meaning of a formula is just one of the two truth-values ‘true’ and ‘false’. However, just as an algebraic expression like x + y + 1 only has a deﬁnite meaning when we know what the variables x and y stand for, the meaning of a propositional formula depends on the truth-values assigned to its atomic formulas. This assignment is encoded in a valuation, which is a function from the set of atoms to the set of truthvalues {false, true}. Given a formula p and a valuation v we then evaluate the overall truth-value by the following recursively deﬁned function: let rec eval fm v = match fm with False -> false | True -> true | Atom(x) -> v(x) | Not(p) -> not(eval p v) | And(p,q) -> (eval p v) & (eval q v) | Or(p,q) -> (eval p v) or (eval q v) | Imp(p,q) -> not(eval p v) or (eval q v) | Iff(p,q) -> (eval p v) = (eval q v);;

This is our mathematical deﬁnition of the semantics of propositional logic,† intended to be a natural formalization of our intuitions. (The semantics of implication is unobvious, and we discuss this at length below.) Each logical connective is interpreted by a corresponding operator on OCaml’s inbuilt type bool. To be quite explicit about what these operators mean, we †

We may choose to regard the partially evaluated eval p, a function from valuations to values, as the semantics of the formula p, rather than make the valuation an additional argument. This is mainly a question of terminology.

2.2 The semantics of propositional logic

33

can enumerate all possible combinations of inputs and see the corresponding output, for example for the & operator: # # # # -

false & false;; : bool = false false & true;; : bool = false true & false;; : bool = false true & true;; : bool = true

We can lay out this information in a truth-table showing how the truthvalue assigned to a formula is determined by those of its immediate subformulas:† p false false true true

q false true false true

p∧q false false false true

p∨q false true true true

p⇒q true true false true

p⇔q true false false true

Of course, for the sake of completeness we should also include a truth-table for the unary negation: p false true

¬p true false

Let’s try evaluating a formula p ∧ q ⇒ q ∧ r in a valuation where p, q and r are set to ‘true’, ‘false’ and ‘true’ respectively. (We don’t bother to deﬁne the value on atoms not involved in the formula, and OCaml issues a warning that we have not done so.) # eval <

q /\ r>> (function P"p" -> true | P"q" -> false | P"r" -> true);; ... - : bool = true

In another valuation, however, the formula evaluates to ‘false’; readers may ﬁnd it instructive to check these results by hand: eval <

q /\ r>> (function P"p" -> true | P"q" -> true | P"r" -> false);; †

Truth-tables were popularized by Post (1921) and Wittgenstein (1922), though they had been used earlier by Peirce in unpublished work.

34

Propositional logic

Truth-tables mechanized We would expect the evaluation of a formula to be independent of how the valuation assigns atoms not occurring in that formula. Let us make this precise by deﬁning a function to extract the set of atomic propositions occurring in a formula. In abstract mathematical terms, we would deﬁne atoms as follows by recursion on formulas: atoms(⊥) = ∅ atoms() = ∅ atoms(x) = {x} atoms(¬p) = atoms(p) atoms(p ∧ q) = atoms(p) ∪ atoms(q) atoms(p ∨ q) = atoms(p) ∪ atoms(q) atoms(p ⇒ q) = atoms(p) ∪ atoms(q) atoms(p ⇔ q) = atoms(p) ∪ atoms(q) As a simple example of proof by structural induction (see appendices 1 and 2) on formulas, will show that atoms(p) is always ﬁnite, and hence we do not distort it by interpreting it in terms of ML lists. (Of course, we need to remember that list equality and set equality are not in general the same.) Theorem 2.1 For any propositional formula p, the set atoms(p) is ﬁnite. Proof By induction on the structure of the formula. If p is ⊥ or , then atoms(p) is the empty set, and if p is an atom, atoms(p) is a singleton set. In all cases, these are ﬁnite. If p is of the form ¬q, then by the induction hypothesis, atoms(q) is ﬁnite and by deﬁnition atoms(¬q) = atoms(q). If p is of the form q ∧ r, q ∨ r, q ⇒ r or q ⇔ r, then atoms(p) = atoms(q) ∪ atoms(r). By the inductive hypothesis, both atoms(q) and atoms(r) are ﬁnite, and the union of two ﬁnite sets is ﬁnite. Similarly, we can justify formally the intuitively obvious fact mentioned above. Theorem 2.2 For any propositional formula p, if two valuations v and v agree on the set atoms(p) (i.e. v(x) = v (x) for all x in atoms(p)), then eval p v = eval p v .

2.2 The semantics of propositional logic

35

Proof By induction on the structure of p. If p is of the form ⊥ or , then it is interpreted as true or false independent of the valuation. If p is an atom x, then atoms(x) = {x} and by assumption v(x) = v (x). Hence eval p v = v(x) = v (x) = eval p v . If p is of the form q ∧ r, q ∨ r, q ⇒ r or q ⇔ r, then atoms(p) = atoms(q) ∪ atoms(r). Since the valuations agree on the union of the two sets, they agree, a fortiori, on each of atoms(q) and atoms(r). We can therefore apply the inductive hypothesis to conclude that eval q v = eval q v and that eval r v = eval r v . Since the evaluation of p is a function of these subevaluations, eval p v = eval p v . The deﬁnition of atoms above can be translated directly into an OCaml function, for example using union for ‘∪’ and [x] for ‘{x}’. However, we prefer to deﬁne it in terms of the existing iterator atom union: let atoms fm = atom_union (fun a -> [a]) fm;;

For example: # atoms <

~p \/ (r <=> s)>>;; - : prop list = [P "p"; P "q"; P "r"; P "s"]

Because the interpretation of a propositional formula p depends only on the valuation’s action on the ﬁnite (say n-element) set atoms(p), and it can only make two choices for each, the ﬁnal truth-value is completely determined by all 2n choices for those atoms. Hence we can naturally extend the enumeration in truth-table form from the basic operations to arbitrary formulas. To implement this in OCaml, we start by deﬁning a function that tests whether a function subfn returns true on all possible valuations of the atoms ats, using an existing valuation v for all other atoms. The space of all valuations is explored by successively modifying v to consider setting each atom p to ‘true’ and ‘false’ and calling recursively: let rec onallvaluations subfn v ats = match ats with [] -> subfn v | p::ps -> let v’ t q = if q = p then t else v(q) in onallvaluations subfn (v’ false) ps & onallvaluations subfn (v’ true) ps;;

We can apply this to a function that draws one row of the truth table and then returns ‘true’. (The return value is important, because ‘&’ will only

36

Propositional logic

evaluate its second argument if the ﬁrst argument is true.) This can then be used to draw the whole truth table for a formula: let print_truthtable fm = let ats = atoms fm in let width = itlist (max ** String.length ** pname) ats 5 + 1 in let fixw s = s^String.make(width - String.length s) ’ ’ in let truthstring p = fixw (if p then "true" else "false") in let mk_row v = let lis = map (fun x -> truthstring(v x)) ats and ans = truthstring(eval fm v) in print_string(itlist (^) lis ("| "^ans)); print_newline(); true in let separator = String.make (width * length ats + 9) ’-’ in print_string(itlist (fun s t -> fixw(pname s) ^ t) ats "| formula"); print_newline(); print_string separator; print_newline(); let _ = onallvaluations mk_row (fun x -> false) ats in print_string separator; print_newline();;

Note that we print in columns of width width that are wide enough to hold the names of all the atoms together with true and false, plus a ﬁnal space. Then all the items in the table line up nicely. For example: # print_truthtable <

q /\ r>>;; p q r | formula --------------------------false false false | true false false true | true false true false | true false true true | true true false false | true true false true | true true true false | false true true true | true --------------------------- : unit = ()

Formal and natural language Propositional logic gives us a formal way to express some of the complex propositions that can be stated in English or other natural languages. It can be instructive to practice the formalization (translation into formal logic) of compound propositions in English. As with translation between pairs of natural languages, one can’t always expect a word-for-word correspondence. But with some awareness of the structure of an informal proposition, a quite direct formalization is often possible. In propositional logic, apart from the rules of precedence given above, we can group propositions together using the standard mathematical technique of bracketing, distinguishing for example between ‘p∧(q ∨r)’ and ‘(p∧q)∨r’.

2.2 The semantics of propositional logic

37

Brackets are used quite diﬀerently in English and most other languages (to make asides like this one). Indicating the precedence in English is a more ad hoc and awkward aﬀair and is usually done by inserting additional punctuation and ‘noise words’ to bracket phrases and hence disambiguate. For example we might distinguish the above two examples as ‘p, and also either q or r’ and ‘either both p and q, or else r’. This gets unwieldy for complicated propositions, and indeed this is part of the reason for having a formal language. Generally speaking, constructs like ‘and’, ‘or’ and ‘not’ can be translated quite directly from English to the corresponding logical connectives. The connective ‘not’ can also be implicit in English preﬁxes such as ‘dis-’ and ‘un-’, so we might translate ‘You are either honest and kind, or dishonest, or unkind’ into ‘H ∧ K ∨ ¬H ∨ ¬K’. However, sometimes English phrases suggest nuances beyond the merely truth-functional. For example ‘and’ often indicates a causal connection (‘he dropped the plate and it broke’) or a temporal ordering (‘she climbed into bed and turned out the light’). The word ‘but’ arguably has the same truth-functional interpretation as ‘and’, yet it expresses the idea that the component propositions connect in a surprising or unfortunate way. Similarly, ‘unless’ can reasonably be translated by ‘or’, but the consequent symmetry between ‘p unless q’ and ‘q unless p’ seems surprising. More problematical is the relationship between the implication or conditional p ⇒ q and the intended English reading ‘p implies q’ or ‘if p then q’. An apparent dissonance on this point disturbs many newcomers to formal logic, and put at least one oﬀ the subject permanently (Waugh 1991). Indeed, debates about the meaning of implication go back over 2000 years to the Megarian-Stoic logicians (Boche´ nski 1961). According to Sextus Empiricus, the librarian Callimachus at Alexandria said in the second century BC that ‘even the crows on the rooftops are cawing about which conditionals are true’. First of all, let’s be clear that if we adopt any truth-functional semantics of p ⇒ q, i.e. deﬁne the truth-value of p ⇒ q in terms of the truth-values of p and q, then the semantics we have chosen is the only reasonable one. The most fundamental principle of implication as intuitively understood is that if p and p ⇒ q are true, then so is q; consequently if p is true and q is false, then p ⇒ q must be false. Moreover it is also plausible that p ∧ q ⇒ p is always true, and only the chosen semantics makes this true whatever the truth-values of p and q. But how do we justify giving implication a truth-functional semantics at all? In everyday life, when we say ‘p implies q’ or ‘if p then q’ we usually have

38

Propositional logic

in mind a causal connection between p and q. It doesn’t seem reasonable to assert ‘p implies q’ just because it happens not to be the case that p is true while q is false. This deﬁnition commits us to accepting ‘p implies q’ as true whenever q is true, regardless of whether p is true or not, let alone whether it has any relation to q. Perhaps even more surprising, we also have to accept that ‘p implies q’ is true whenever p is false, regardless of q. For example, we would have to accept ‘if Paris is the capital of France then 2 + 2 = 4’ and ‘if the moon is made of cheese then 2 + 2 = 5’ as both true. However, further reﬂection reveals that these peculiar cases do have their parallel in everyday phrases like ‘if Smith wins the election then I’ll eat my hat’. In mathematician’s jargon we may think of such implications as being true ‘trivially’, with the consequent irrelevant. Similarly, if a friend plans deﬁnitely to leave town tomorrow, it seems hard to argue that his assertion ‘I will leave town tomorrow or the day after’ is not true, merely that it is a peculiar and misleading way to express himself. Again, if James is 40 years old and 2 metres tall, a remark by his mother that ‘he is tall for his age’ might be accepted as literally true while provoking giggles. One can argue, roughly as the Megarian-Stoic logician Diodorus did, that the intuitive meaning of ‘if p, then q’ is not simply that we do not have p∧¬q, but more strongly that we cannot under any circumstances have p ∧ ¬q. Rather than ‘under any circumstances’, Diodorus said ‘at all times’, being mainly concerned with propositions denoting states of aﬀairs in the world. In mathematical assertions, the equivalent might be ‘whatever the value(s) taken by the component variables’. Indeed, in everyday speech we may tend to interpret implication in a ‘universalized’ sense, just as we understand equations like ex+y = ex ey as implicitly valid for all values of the variables.† However, in formal logic we need to be much more precise about which variables are universal, and in the next chapter we will introduce quantiﬁers that allow us to say ‘for all x . . . ’ and so make the universal status of variables quite explicit. Once we have this ability, our truth-functional implication can be used to build up other notions of implication with the aid of explicit quantiﬁers, and by then we hope the reader’s qualms will have eased somewhat in any case. Readers who are still uncomfortable may choose to regard our material or truth-functional conditional ‘p ⇒ q’ as something distinct from the various everyday notions. The use of the same terminology may seem unfortunate, †

Quine (1950) refers to p ⇒ q as a conditional statement and always reads it as ‘if p then q’, reserving the reading ‘p implies q’ for the universal validity of that conditional. Thus, implication for Quine not only contains an implicit universal quantiﬁcation but is also a metalevel statement about propositional formulas.

2.3 Validity, satisﬁability and tautology

39

but it’s often the case that superﬁcially equivalent terminologies in everyday speech and in a precise science diﬀer. It is unlikely, for example, that words like ‘energy’, ‘power’, ‘force’ and ‘momentum’ as used in everyday speech correspond to the formal deﬁnitions of a physicist, nor ‘glass’ and ‘metal’ to those of a chemist. In ordinary usage and our formal deﬁnitions, ‘if and only if’ naturally corresponds to implication in both directions: ‘p if and only if q’ is the same as ‘p implies q and q implies p’. We’ve already noted that the connective is frequently called bi-implication, and indeed we often prove mathematical theorems of the form ‘p if and only if q’ by separately proving ‘if p then q’ and ‘if q then p’, just as one might prove x = y by separately proving x ≤ y and y ≤ x. So if the semantics of implication is accepted, that for bi-implication should be acceptable too.

2.3 Validity, satisﬁability and tautology We say that a valuation v satisﬁes a formula p if eval p v = true. A formula is said to be: • a tautology or logically valid if is satisﬁed by all valuations, or equivalently, if its truth-table value is ‘true’ in all rows; • satisﬁable if it is satisﬁed by some valuation(s) i.e. if its truth-table value is ‘true’ in at least one row; • unsatisﬁable or a contradiction if no valuation satisﬁes it, i.e. if its truthtable value is ‘false’ in all rows. Note that a tautology is also satisﬁable, and as the names suggest, a formula is unsatisﬁable precisely if it is not satisﬁable. Moreover, in any valuation eval (¬p) v is false iﬀ eval p v is true, so p is a tautology if and only if ¬p is unsatisﬁable. The simplest tautology is just ‘’; a slightly more interesting example is p ∧ q ⇒ p ∨ q (‘if both p and q are true then at least one of p and q is true’), while one that many people ﬁnd surprising at ﬁrst sight is ‘Peirce’s Law’ ((p ⇒ q) ⇒ p) ⇒ p: # print_truthtable <<((p ==> q) ==> p) ==> p>>;; p q | formula --------------------false false | true false true | true true false | true true true | true ---------------------

40

Propositional logic

The formula p ∧ q ⇒ q ∧ r whose truth-table we ﬁrst produced in OCaml is satisﬁable, since its truth table has a ‘true’ in the last column, but it’s not a tautology because it also has one ‘false’. The simplest contradiction is just ‘⊥’, and another simple one is p ∧ ¬p (‘p is both true and false’): # print_truthtable <

>;; p | formula --------------false | false true | false ---------------

Intuitively speaking, tautologies are ‘always true’, satisﬁable formulas are ‘sometimes (but possibly not always) true’ and contradictions are ‘always false’. Indeed, the notion of a tautology is intended to capture formally, insofar as we can in propositional logic, the idea of a logical truth that we discussed in a non-technical way in the introductory chapter. A tautology is exactly analogous to an algebraic equation like x2 − y 2 = (x + y)(x − y) that is universally true whatever the values of the constituent variables. A satisﬁable formula is analogous to an equation that has at least one solution but may not be universally valid, e.g. x2 + 2 = 3x. A contradiction is analogous to an unsolvable equation like 0 · x = 1. It’s useful to extend the idea of (un)satisﬁability from a single formula to a set of formulas: a set Γ of formulas is said to be satisﬁable if there is a valuation v that simultaneously satisﬁes them all. Note the ‘simultaneously’: {p ∧ ¬q, ¬p ∧ q} is unsatisﬁable even though each formula by itself is satisﬁable. When the set concerned is ﬁnite, Γ = {p1 , . . . , pn }, satisﬁability of Γ is equivalent to that of the single formula p1 ∧ · · · ∧ pn , as the reader will see from the deﬁnitions. However, in our later work it will be essential to consider satisﬁability of inﬁnite sets of formulas, where it cannot so directly be reduced to satisﬁability of a single formula. We also use the notation Γ |= q to mean ‘for all valuations in which all p ∈ Γ are true, q is true’. Note that in the case of ﬁnite Γ = {p1 , . . . , pn }, this is equivalent to the assertion that p1 ∧ · · · ∧ pn ⇒ q is a tautology. In the case Γ = ∅ it’s common just to write |= p rather than ∅ |= p, both meaning that p is a tautology.

Tautology and satisﬁability checking Although we can decide the status of formulas by examining their truth tables, it’s simpler to let the computer do all the work. The following function

2.3 Validity, satisﬁability and tautology

41

tests whether a formula is a tautology by checking that it evaluates to ‘true’ for all valuations. let tautology fm = onallvaluations (eval fm) (fun s -> false) (atoms fm);;

Note that as soon as any evaluation to ‘false’ is encountered this will, by the way onallvaluations was written, terminate with ‘false’ at once, rather than plough on through all possible valuations. # # # # -

tautology <

>;; : bool = true tautology <

p>>;; : bool = false tautology <

q \/ (p <=> q)>>;; : bool = false tautology <<(p \/ q) /\ ~(p /\ q) ==> (~p <=> q)>>;; : bool = true

Using the interrelationships noticed above, we can deﬁne satisﬁability and unsatisﬁability in terms of tautology: let unsatisfiable fm = tautology(Not fm);; let satisfiable fm = not(unsatisfiable fm);;

Substitution As with algebraic identities, we expect to be able to substitute other formulas consistently for the atomic propositions in a tautology, and still get a tautology. We can deﬁne such substitution of formulas for atoms as follows, where subfn is a ﬁnite partial function (see Appendix 2): let psubst subfn = onatoms (fun p -> tryapplyd subfn p (Atom p));;

For example, using the substitution function p |⇒ p ∧ q, which maps p to p ∧ q but is otherwise undeﬁned, we get: # psubst (P"p" |=> <

>) <

>;; - : prop formula = <<(p /\ q) /\ q /\ (p /\ q) /\ q>>

42

Propositional logic

We will prove that substituting in tautologies yields a tautology, via a more general result that can be proved directly by structural induction on formulas: Theorem 2.3 For any atomic proposition x and arbitrary formulas p and q, and any valuation v, we have† eval (psubst (x |⇒ q) p) v = eval p ((x → eval q v) v). Proof By induction on the structure of p. If p is ⊥ or then the valuation plays no role and the equation clearly holds. If p is an atom y, we distinguish two possibilities. If y = x then using the deﬁnitions of substitution and evaluation we ﬁnd: eval (psubst (x |⇒ q) x) v = eval q v = eval x ((x → eval q v) v). If, on the other hand, y = x then: eval (psubst (x |⇒ q) y) v = eval y v = eval y ((x → eval q v) v). For other kinds of formula, evaluation and substitution follow the structure of the formula so the result follows easily by the inductive hypothesis. For example, if p is of the form ¬r then by deﬁnition and using the inductive hypothesis for r: eval (psubst (x |⇒ q) (¬r)) v = eval (¬(psubst (x |⇒ q) r)) v = not(eval (psubst (x |⇒ q) r) v) = not(eval r ((x → eval q v) v)) = eval (¬r) ((x → eval q v) v). The binary connectives all follow the same essential pattern but with two distinct formulas r and s instead of just r. Corollary 2.4 If p is a tautology, x is any atom and q any other formula, then psubst (x |⇒ q) p is also a tautology. †

The notation (x → a)v means the function v that maps v (x) = a and v (y) = v(y) for y = x, and x |⇒ a is the function that maps x to a and is undeﬁned elsewhere (see Appendix 1). In our OCaml implementation there are corresponding operators ‘|->’ and ‘|=>’ for ﬁnite partial functions; see Appendix 2.

2.3 Validity, satisﬁability and tautology

43

Proof By the previous theorem we have for any valuation v: eval (psubst (x |⇒ q) p) v = eval p ((x → eval q v) v) But since p is a tautology it evaluates to ‘true’ in all valuations, including the one on the right of this equation. Hence eval (psubst (x |⇒ q) p) v = true, and since v is arbitrary, this means the formula is a tautology. Note that this result only applies to substituting for atoms, not arbitrary propositions. For example, p ∧ q ⇒ q ∧ p is a tautology, but if we substitute p ∨ q for p ∧ q it ceases to be so. This again is just as in ordinary algebra, and the fact that our substitution function is a function from names of atoms helps to enforce such a restriction. The main results are however easily generalized to substitution for multiple atoms simultaneously. These can always be done using individual substitutions repeatedly, but one might have to use additional substitutions to change variables and avoid spurious eﬀects of later substitutions on earlier ones. For example, we would expect to be able to simultaneously substitute x for y and y for x in x ∧ y to get y ∧ x. Yet if we perform the substitutions sequentially we get: psubst (x |⇒ y) (psubst (y |⇒ x) (x ∧ y)) = psubst (x |⇒ y) (x ∧ x) = y ∧ y. However, by renaming variables appropriately using other substitutions such problems can always be avoided. For example: psubst (z |⇒ y) (psubst (y |⇒ x) (psubst (x |⇒ z) (x ∧ y)) = psubst (z |⇒ y) (psubst (y |⇒ x) (z ∧ y)) = psubst (z |⇒ y) (z ∧ x) = y ∧ x. It’s useful to get a feel for propositional logic by listing some common tautologies. Some are simple and plausible such as the law of the excluded middle ‘p ∨ ¬p’ stating that every proposition is either true or false. A more surprising tautology, no doubt because of the poor accord between ‘⇒’ and the intuitive notion of implication, is: # tautology <<(p ==> q) \/ (q ==> p)>>;; - : bool = true

If p ⇒ q is a tautology, i.e. any valuation that satisﬁes p also satisﬁes q, we say that q is a logical consequence of p. If p ⇔ q is a tautology, i.e.

44

Propositional logic

a valuation satisﬁes p if and only if it satisﬁes q, we say that p and q are logically equivalent. Many important tautologies naturally take this latter form, and trivially if p is a tautology then so is p ⇔ , as the reader can conﬁrm. In algebra, given a valid equation such as 2x = x+x, we can replace 2x by x + x in any other expression without changing its value. Similarly, if a valuation satisﬁes p ⇔ q, then we can substitute q for p or vice versa in another formula r (even if p is not just an atom) without aﬀecting whether the valuation satisﬁes r. Since we haven’t formally deﬁned substitution for non-atoms, we imagine identifying the places to substitute using some other atom x in a ‘pattern’ term. Theorem 2.5 Given any valuation v and formulas p and q such that eval p v = eval q v, for any atom x and formula r we have eval (psubst (x |⇒ p) r) v = eval (psubst (x |⇒ q) r) v. Proof We have eval (psubst (x |⇒ p) r) v = eval r ((x → eval p v) v) and eval (psubst (x |⇒ q) r) v = eval r ((x → eval q v) v) by Theorem 2.3. But since by hypothesis eval p v = eval q v these are the same. Corollary 2.6 If p and q are logically equivalent, then eval (psubst (x |⇒ p) r) v = eval (psubst (x |⇒ q) r) v. In particular psubst (x |⇒ p) r is a tautology iﬀ psubst (x |⇒ q) r is. Proof Since p and q are logically equivalent, we have eval p v = eval q v for any valuation v, and the result follows from the previous theorem.

Some important tautologies Without further ado, here’s a list of tautologies. Many of these correspond to ordinary algebraic laws if rewritten in the Boolean symbolism, e.g. p∧⊥ ⇔ ⊥ to p · 0 = 0. ¬ ⇔ ⊥ ¬⊥ ⇔ ¬¬p ⇔ p p∧⊥ ⇔ ⊥ p∧ ⇔ p p∧p ⇔ p

2.3 Validity, satisﬁability and tautology

45

p ∧ ¬p ⇔ ⊥ p∧q ⇔ q∧p p ∧ (q ∧ r) ⇔ (p ∧ q) ∧ r p∨⊥ ⇔ p p∨ ⇔ p∨p ⇔ p p ∨ ¬p ⇔ p∨q ⇔ q∨p p ∨ (q ∨ r) ⇔ (p ∨ q) ∨ r p ∧ (q ∨ r) ⇔ (p ∧ q) ∨ (p ∧ r) p ∨ (q ∧ r) ⇔ (p ∨ q) ∧ (p ∨ r) ⊥⇒p ⇔ p⇒ ⇔ p ⇒ ⊥ ⇔ ¬p p⇒p ⇔ p ⇒ q ⇔ ¬q ⇒ ¬p p ⇒ q ⇔ (p ⇔ p ∧ q) p ⇒ q ⇔ (q ⇔ q ∨ p) p⇔q ⇔ q⇔p p ⇔ (q ⇔ r) ⇔ (p ⇔ q) ⇔ r The last couple are perhaps particularly surprising, since we are not accustomed to ‘equations within equations’ from everyday mathematics. Eﬀectively, they show that ‘⇔’ is a symmetric and associative operator (like ‘+’ in arithmetic), in that the order and association of iterated equivalences makes no logical diﬀerence. Some other tautologies involving equivalence are given by Dijkstra and Scholten (1990) and can be checked in OCaml; they refer to the second of these tautologies as the ‘Golden Rule’. # # -

tautology <

r) <=> (p \/ q <=> p \/ r)>>;; : bool = true tautology <

((p <=> q) <=> p \/ q)>>;; : bool = true

Another tautology in our list corresponds to the principle of contraposition, the equivalence of p ⇒ q and its contrapositive ¬q ⇒ ¬p, or of p ⇒ ¬q and q ⇒ ¬p. (For example ‘those who mind don’t matter’ and ‘those who

46

Propositional logic

matter don’t mind’ are logically equivalent.) By contrast, we can conﬁrm that p ⇒ q and q ⇒ p are not equivalent, refuting a common fallacy: # # # -

tautology <<(p ==> q) <=> (~q ==> ~p)>>;; : bool = true tautology <<(p ==> ~q) <=> (q ==> ~p)>>;; : bool = true tautology <<(p ==> q) <=> (q ==> p)>>;; : bool = false

2.4 The De Morgan laws, adequacy and duality The following important tautologies are called De Morgan’s laws, after Augustus De Morgan, a near-contemporary of Boole who made important contributions to the ﬁeld of logic.† ¬(p ∨ q) ⇔ ¬p ∧ ¬q ¬(p ∧ q) ⇔ ¬p ∨ ¬q An everyday example of the ﬁrst is that ‘I can not speak either Finnish or Swedish’ means that same as ‘I can not speak Finnish and I can not speak Swedish’. An example of the second is that ‘I am not a wife and mother’ is the same as ‘either I am not a wife or I am not a mother (or both)’. Variants of the De Morgan laws, also easily seen to be tautologies, are: p ∨ q ⇔ ¬(¬p ∧ ¬q) p ∧ q ⇔ ¬(¬p ∨ ¬q) These are interesting because they show how to express either connective ∧ and ∨ in terms of the other. By virtue of the above theorems on substitution, this means for example that we can ‘rewrite’ any formula to a logically equivalent formula not involving ‘∨’, simply by systematically replacing each subformula of the form q ∨ r with ¬(¬q ∧ ¬r). There are many other options for expressing some logical connectives in terms of others. For instance, using the following equivalences, one can ﬁnd an equivalent for any formula using only atomic formulas, ∧ and ¬. In the jargon, {∧, ¬} is said to be an adequate set of connectives. ⊥ ⇔ p ∧ ¬p ⇔ ¬(p ∧ ¬p) p ∨ q ⇔ ¬(¬p ∧ ¬q) †

These were given quite explicitly by John Duns the Scot (1266-1308) in his Universam Logicam Quaestiones. However, De Morgan was the ﬁrst to put them in algebraic form.

2.4 The De Morgan laws, adequacy and duality

47

p ⇒ q ⇔ ¬(p ∧ ¬q) p ⇔ q ⇔ ¬(p ∧ ¬q) ∧ ¬(¬p ∧ q) Similarly the following equivalences, which we check in OCaml, show that {⇒, ⊥} is also adequate: forall tautology [<<true <=> false ==> false>>; <<~p <=> p ==> false>>; <

(p ==> q ==> false) ==> false>>; <

(p ==> false) ==> q>>; <<(p <=> q) <=> ((p ==> q) ==> (q ==> p) ==> false) ==> false>>];; - : bool = true

Is any single connective alone enough to express all the others? For the connectives we have introduced, the answer is no. We need one of the binary connectives, otherwise we could never introduce formulas that involve, and hence depend on the valuation of, more than one variable. And in fact not even the whole set {, ∧, ∨, ⇒, ⇔}, without negation or falsity, forms an adequate set, so a fortiori, neither does any one binary connective individually. To see this, note that all these binary connectives with entirely ‘true’ arguments yield the result ‘true’. (In other words, the last row of each of their truth tables contains ‘true’ in the ﬁnal column.) Hence any formula built up from these components must evaluate to ‘true’ in the valuation that maps all atoms to ‘true’, so negation is not representable. 2 However, there are 22 = 16 possible truth-tables for a binary truthfunction (there are 22 = 4 rows in the truth table and each can be given one of two truth-values) and the conventional binary connectives only cover four of them. Perhaps a connective with one of the other 12 functions for its truth-table would be adequate? As argued above, any single adequate connective must have ‘false’ in the last row of its truth table, so that it can express negation. By a similar argument, we can also see that the ﬁrst row of its truth-table must be ‘true’. This only leaves us freedom of choice for the middle two rows, for which there are four choices. Two of them are trivial in that they are just the negation of one of the arguments, and hence cannot be used to build expressions whose evaluation depends on the value of more than a single atom. However, either of the other two is adequate alone: the ‘not and’ operation p NAND q = ¬(p ∧ q), or the ‘not or’ operation p NOR q = ¬(p ∨ q), both of whose truth tables are written out below:

48

Propositional logic

p false false true true

q false true false true

p NAND q true true true false

p NOR q true false false false

For example, we can express negation by ¬p = p NAND p and then get p ∧ q = ¬(p NAND q), and we already know that {∧, ¬} is adequate; NOR works similarly. In fact, once we have an adequate set of connectives, we can ﬁnd formulas whose semantics corresponds to any of the other 12 truthfunctions as well, as will become clear when we discuss disjunctive normal form in Section 2.6. The adequacy of either one of the connectives NAND and NOR is wellknown to electronics designers: corresponding gates are often the basic building blocks of digital circuits (see Section 2.7). Among pure logicians it’s customary to denote one or the other of these connectives by p | q and refer to ‘|’ as the ‘Sheﬀer stroke’ (Sheﬀer 1913).†

Duality In Section 1.4 we noted the choice to be made between the ‘inclusive’ and ‘exclusive’ readings of ‘or’. No doubt a pleasing symmetry between ‘and’ and ‘inclusive or’ was a strong motivation for what might seem an arbitrary choice of the inclusive reading. Suppose we have a formula involving only the connectives ⊥, , ∧ and ∨. By its dual we mean the result of systematically exchanging ‘∧’s and ‘∨’s and also ‘’s and ‘⊥’s, thus: let rec dual fm = match fm with False -> True | True -> False | Atom(p) -> fm | Not(p) -> Not(dual p) | And(p,q) -> Or(dual p,dual q) | Or(p,q) -> And(dual p,dual q) | _ -> failwith "Formula involves connectives ==> or <=>";;

†

Nowadays people usually interpret the stroke as NAND, but Sheﬀer originally used his stroke for NOR, and it was used in a parsimonious presentation of propositional logic by Nicod (1917). The idea had been well known to Peirce 30 years earlier. Sch¨ onﬁnkel (1924) elaborated it into a ‘quantiﬁer stroke’, where φ(x) |x ψ(x) means ¬∃x. φ(x) ∧ ψ(x), and this led on to an interest in performing the same paring-down for more general mathematical expressions, and hence to his development of combinators.

2.5 Simpliﬁcation and negation normal form

49

for example: # dual <

>;; - : prop formula = <

>

A little thought shows that dual(dual(p)) = p. The key semantic property of duality is: Theorem 2.7 eval (dual p) v = not(eval p (not ◦ v)) for any valuation v. Proof This can be proved by a formal structural induction on formulas (see Exercise 2.5), but it’s perhaps easier to see using more direct reasoning based on the De Morgan laws. Let p∗ be the result of negating all the atoms in a formula and replacing ⊥ by ¬, by ¬⊥. We then have eval p (not ◦ v) = eval p∗ v. Now using the De Morgan laws we can repeatedly pull the newly introduced negations up from the atoms in p∗ giving a logically equivalent form: ¬p ∧ ¬q ⇔ ¬(p ∨ q) ¬p ∨ ¬q ⇔ ¬(p ∧ q). By doing so, we exchange ‘∧’s and ‘∨’s, and bubble the newly introduced negation signs upwards, until we just have one additional negation sign at the top, resulting in exactly ¬(dual p). The result follows. Corollary 2.8 If p and q are logically equivalent, so are dual p and dual q. If p is a tautology then so is ¬(dual p). Proof eval (dual p) v = not(eval p (not ◦ v)) = not(eval q (not ◦ v)) = eval (dual q) v. If p is a tautology, then p and are logically equivalent, so dual p and dual = ⊥ are logically equivalent and the result follows. For example, since p ∧ (q ∨ r) and (p ∧ q) ∨ (p ∧ r) are equivalent, so are p ∨ (q ∧ r) and (p ∨ q) ∧ (p ∨ r), and since p ∨ ¬p is a tautology, so is ¬(p ∧ ¬p).

2.5 Simpliﬁcation and negation normal form In ordinary algebra it’s common to systematically transform an expression into an equivalent standard or normal form. One approach involves expanding and cancelling, e.g. obtaining from (x+y)(y −x)+y +x2 the normal form y 2 + y. By putting expressions in normal form, we can sometimes see that superﬁcially diﬀerent expressions are equivalent. Moreover, if the normal

50

Propositional logic

form is chosen appropriately, it can yield valuable information. For example, looking at y 2 +y we can see that the value of x is irrelevant, whereas this isn’t at all obvious from the initial form. In logic, normal forms for formulas are of great importance, and just as in algebra the normal form can often yield important information. Before proceeding to create the normal forms proper, it’s convenient to apply routine simpliﬁcations to the formula to eliminate the basic propositional constants ‘⊥’ and ‘’, precisely by analogy with the algebraic example in Section 1.6. Whenever ‘⊥’ and ‘’ occur in combination, there is always a tautology justifying the equivalence with a simpler formula, e.g. ⊥ ∧ p ⇔ ⊥, ⊥ ∨ p ⇔ p, p ⇒ ⊥ ⇔ ¬p. For good measure, we also eliminate double negation ¬¬p. The code just uses pattern-matching to consider the possibilities case-by-case:† let psimplify1 fm = match fm with Not False -> True | Not True -> False | Not(Not p) -> p | And(p,False) | And(False,p) -> False | And(p,True) | And(True,p) -> p | Or(p,False) | Or(False,p) -> p | Or(p,True) | Or(True,p) -> True | Imp(False,p) | Imp(p,True) -> True | Imp(True,p) -> p | Imp(p,False) -> Not p | Iff(p,True) | Iff(True,p) -> p | Iff(p,False) | Iff(False,p) -> Not p | _ -> fm;;

and we then apply the simpliﬁcation in a recursive bottom-up sweep: let rec psimplify fm = match fm with | Not p -> psimplify1 (Not(psimplify p)) | And(p,q) -> psimplify1 (And(psimplify p,psimplify q)) | Or(p,q) -> psimplify1 (Or(psimplify p,psimplify q)) | Imp(p,q) -> psimplify1 (Imp(psimplify p,psimplify q)) | Iff(p,q) -> psimplify1 (Iff(psimplify p,psimplify q)) | _ -> fm;;

For example: # psimplify <<(true ==> (x <=> false)) ==> ~(y \/ false /\ z)>>;; - : prop formula = <<~x ==> ~y>> †

Note that the clauses resulting in ¬p given p ⇒ ⊥, p ⇔ ⊥ and ⊥ ⇔ p are placed at the end of their group so that, for example, ⊥ ⇒ ⊥ gets simpliﬁed to rather than ¬⊥, which would then need further simpliﬁcation at the same level.

2.5 Simpliﬁcation and negation normal form

51

If we start by applying this simpliﬁcation function, we can almost ignore the propositional constants, which makes things more convenient. However, we need to remember two trivial exceptions: though in the simpliﬁed formula ‘⊥’ and ‘’, cannot occur in combination, the entire formula may simply be one of them, e.g.: # psimplify <<((x ==> y) ==> true) \/ ~false>>;; - : prop formula = <<true>>

A literal is either an atomic formula or the negation of one. We say that a literal is negative if it is of the form ¬p and positive otherwise. This is tested by the following OCaml functions, both of which assume they are indeed applied to a literal: let negative = function (Not p) -> true | _ -> false;; let positive lit = not(negative lit);;

When we speak later of negating a literal l, written −l, we mean applying negation if the literal is positive, and removing a negation if it is negative (not double-negating it, since then it would no longer be a literal). Two literals are said to be complementary if one is the negation of the other: let negate = function (Not p) -> p | p -> Not p;;

A formula is in negation normal form (NNF) if it is constructed from literals using only the binary connectives ‘∧’ and ‘∨’, or else is one of the degenerate cases ‘⊥’ or ‘’. In other words it does not involve the other binary connectives ‘⇒’ and ‘⇔’, and ‘¬’ is applied only to atomic formulas. Examples of formulas in NNF include ⊥, p, p∧¬q and p∨(q ∧(¬r)∨s), while formulas not in NNF include p ⇒ p (involves other binary connectives) as well as ¬¬p and p ∧ ¬(q ∨ r) (involve negation of non-atomic formulas). We can transform any formula into a logically equivalent NNF one. As in the last section, we can eliminate ‘⇒’ and ‘⇔’ in favour of the other connectives, and then we can repeatedly apply the De Morgan laws and the law of double negation: ¬(p ∧ q) ⇔ ¬p ∨ ¬q ¬(p ∨ q) ⇔ ¬p ∧ ¬q ¬¬p ⇔ p to push the negations down to the atomic formulas, exactly the reverse of the transformation considered in the proof of Theorem 2.7. (The present

52

Propositional logic

transformation is analogous to the following procedure in ordinary algebra: replace subtraction by its deﬁnition x − y = x + −y and then systematically push negations down using −(x + y) = −x + −y, −(xy) = (−x)y, −(−x) = x.) This is rather straightforward to program in OCaml, and in fact we can eliminate ‘⇒’ and ‘⇔’ as we recursively push down negations rather than in a separate phase. let rec nnf fm = match fm with | And(p,q) -> And(nnf p,nnf q) | Or(p,q) -> Or(nnf p,nnf q) | Imp(p,q) -> Or(nnf(Not p),nnf q) | Iff(p,q) -> Or(And(nnf p,nnf q),And(nnf(Not p),nnf(Not q))) | Not(Not p) -> nnf p | Not(And(p,q)) -> Or(nnf(Not p),nnf(Not q)) | Not(Or(p,q)) -> And(nnf(Not p),nnf(Not q)) | Not(Imp(p,q)) -> And(nnf p,nnf(Not q)) | Not(Iff(p,q)) -> Or(And(nnf p,nnf(Not q)),And(nnf(Not p),nnf q)) | _ -> fm;;

The elimination by this code of ‘⇒’ and ‘⇔’, unnegated and negated respectively, is justiﬁed by the following tautologies: p ⇒ q ⇔ ¬p ∨ q ¬(p ⇒ q) ⇔ p ∧ ¬q p ⇔ q ⇔ p ∧ q ∨ ¬p ∧ ¬q ¬(p ⇔ q) ⇔ p ∧ ¬q ∨ ¬p ∧ q. although for some purposes we might have preferred other variants, e.g. p ⇔ q ⇔ (p ∨ ¬q) ∧ (¬p ∨ q) ¬(p ⇔ q) ⇔ (p ∨ q) ∧ (¬p ∨ ¬q). To ﬁnish, we redeﬁne nnf to include initial simpliﬁcation, then call the main function just deﬁned. (This is not a recursive deﬁnition, but rather a redeﬁnition of nnf using the former one, since there is no rec keyword.) let nnf fm = nnf(psimplify fm);;

Let’s try this function on an example, and conﬁrm that the resulting formula is logically equivalent to the original.

2.5 Simpliﬁcation and negation normal form

53

# let fm = <<(p <=> q) <=> ~(r ==> s)>>;; val fm : prop formula = <<(p <=> q) <=> ~(r ==> s)>> # let fm’ = nnf fm;; val fm’ : prop formula = <<(p /\ q \/ ~p /\ ~q) /\ r /\ ~s \/ (p /\ ~q \/ ~p /\ q) /\ (~r \/ s)>> # tautology(Iff(fm,fm’));; - : bool = true

The NNF formula is signiﬁcantly larger than the original. Indeed, because each time a formula ‘p ⇔ q’ is expanded the formulas p and q both get duplicated, in the worst case a formula with n connectives can expand to an NNF with more than 2n connectives — see Exercise 2.6 below. This sort of exponential blowup seems unavoidable while preserving logical equivalence, but we can at least avoid doing an exponential amount of computation by rewriting the nnf function in a more eﬃcient way (Exercise 2.7). If the objective were simply to push negations down to the level of atoms, we could keep ‘⇔’ and avoid the potentially exponential blowup, using a tautology such as ¬(p ⇔ q) ⇔ (¬p ⇔ q): let rec nenf fm = match fm with Not(Not p) -> nenf p | Not(And(p,q)) -> Or(nenf(Not p),nenf(Not q)) | Not(Or(p,q)) -> And(nenf(Not p),nenf(Not q)) | Not(Imp(p,q)) -> And(nenf p,nenf(Not q)) | Not(Iff(p,q)) -> Iff(nenf p,nenf(Not q)) | And(p,q) -> And(nenf p,nenf q) | Or(p,q) -> Or(nenf p,nenf q) | Imp(p,q) -> Or(nenf(Not p),nenf q) | Iff(p,q) -> Iff(nenf p,nenf q) | _ -> fm;;

with simpliﬁcation once again rolled in: let nenf fm = nenf(psimplify fm);;

This function will have its uses. However, the special appeal of NNF is that we can distinguish ‘positive’ and ‘negative’ occurrences of the atomic formulas. The connectives ‘∧’ and ‘∨’, unlike ‘¬’, ‘⇒’ and ‘⇔’, are monotonic, meaning that their truth-functions f have the property p ≤ p ∧ q ≤ q ⇒ f (p, q) ≤ f (p , q ), where ‘≤’ is the truth-function for implication. Another way of putting this is that the following are tautologies:

54 # # -

Propositional logic tautology <<(p ==> p’) /\ (q ==> q’) ==> (p /\ q ==> p’ /\ q’)>>;; : bool = true tautology <<(p ==> p’) /\ (q ==> q’) ==> (p \/ q ==> p’ \/ q’)>>;; : bool = true

Consequently, if an atom x in a NNF formula p occurs only unnegated, we can deduce a corresponding monotonicity property for the whole formula: (x ⇒ x ) ⇒ (p ⇒ psubst (x |⇒ x ) p), while if it occurs only negated, we have an anti-monotonicity, since (p ⇒ p ) ⇒ (¬p ⇒ ¬p) is a tautology: (x ⇒ x ) ⇒ (psubst (x |⇒ x ) p ⇒ p). 2.6 Disjunctive and conjunctive normal forms A formula is said to be in disjunctive normal form (DNF) when it is of the form: D1 ∨ D2 ∨ · · · ∨ Dn with each disjunct Di of the form: li1 ∧ li2 ∧ · · · ∧ limi and each lij a literal. Thus a formula in DNF is also in NNF but has the additional restriction that it is a ‘disjunction of conjunctions’ rather than having ‘∧’ and ‘∨’ intermixed arbitrarily. It is exactly analogous to a fully expanded ‘sum of products’ expression like x3 + x2 y + xy + z in algebra. Dually, a formula is said to be in conjunctive normal form (CNF) when it is of the form: C1 ∧ C2 ∧ · · · ∧ Cn with each conjunct Ci in turn of the form: li1 ∨ li2 ∨ · · · ∨ limi and each lij a literal. Thus a formula in CNF is also in NNF but has the additional restriction that it is a ‘conjunction of disjunctions’. It is exactly analogous to a fully factorized ‘product of sums’ form in ordinary algebra like (x + 1)(y + 2)(z + 3). In ordinary algebra we can always expand into a sum of products equivalent, but not in general a product of sums (consider x2 +y 2 −1 for example). This asymmetry does not exist in logic, as one might expect from the duality of ∧ and ∨. We will ﬁrst show how to transform

2.6 Disjunctive and conjunctive normal forms

55

a formula into a DNF equivalent, and then it will be easy to adapt it to produce a CNF equivalent.

DNF via truth tables If a formula involves the atoms {p1 , . . . , pn }, each row of the truth table identiﬁes a particular assignment of truth-values to {p1 , . . . , pn }, and thus a class of valuations that make the same assignments to that set (we don’t care how they assign other atoms). Now given any valuation v, consider the formula: l1 ∧ · · · ∧ l n where

li =

pi if v(pi ) = true ¬pi if v(pi ) = false.

By construction, a valuation w satisﬁes l1 ∧ · · · ∧ ln if and only if v and w agree on all the p1 , . . . , pn . Now, the rows of the truth table for the original formula having ‘true’ in the last column identify precisely those classes of valuations that satisfy the formula. Accordingly, for each of the k ‘true’ rows, we can select a corresponding valuation vi (for deﬁniteness, we can map all variables except {p1 , . . . , pn } to ‘false’), and construct the formula as above: Di = li1 ∧ · · · ∧ lin . Now the disjunction D1 ∨· · ·∨Dk is satisﬁed by exactly the same valuations as the original formula, and therefore is logically equivalent to it; moreover, by the way it was constructed, it must be in DNF. To implement this procedure in OCaml, we start with functions list_conj and list_disj to map a list of formulas [p1 ; . . . ; pn ] into, respectively, an iterated conjunction p1 ∧ · · · ∧ pn and an iterated disjunction p1 ∨ · · · ∨ pn . In the special case where the list is empty we return and ⊥ respectively. These choices avoid some special case distinctions later, and in any case are natural if one thinks of the formulas as saying ‘all of the p1 , . . . , pn are true’ (which is vacuously true if there aren’t any pi ) and ‘some of the p1 , . . . , pn are true’ (which must be false if there aren’t any pi ). let list_conj l = if l = [] then True else end_itlist mk_and l;; let list_disj l = if l = [] then False else end_itlist mk_or l;;

56

Propositional logic

Next we have a function mk_lits, which, given a list of formulas pvs, makes a conjunction of these formulas and their negations according to whether each is satisﬁed by the valuation v. let mk_lits pvs v = list_conj (map (fun p -> if eval p v then p else Not p) pvs);;

We now deﬁne allsatvaluations, a close analogue of onallvaluations that now collects the valuations for which subfn holds into a list: let rec allsatvaluations subfn v pvs = match pvs with [] -> if subfn v then [v] else [] | p::ps -> let v’ t q = if q = p then t else v(q) in allsatvaluations subfn (v’ false) ps @ allsatvaluations subfn (v’ true) ps;;

Using this, we select the list of valuations satisfying the formula, map mk_lits over it and collect the results into an iterated disjunction. Note that in the degenerate cases when the formula contains no variables or is unsatisﬁable, the procedure returns ⊥ or as appropriate. let dnf fm = let pvs = atoms fm in let satvals = allsatvaluations (eval fm) (fun s -> false) pvs in list_disj (map (mk_lits (map (fun p -> Atom p) pvs)) satvals);;

For example: # let fm = <<(p \/ q /\ r) /\ (~p \/ ~r)>>;; val fm : prop formula = <<(p \/ q /\ r) /\ (~p \/ ~r)>> # dnf fm;; - : prop formula = <<~p /\ q /\ r \/ p /\ ~q /\ ~r \/ p /\ q /\ ~r>>

As expected, the disjuncts of the formula naturally correspond to the three classes of valuations yielding the ‘true’ rows of the truth table: # print_truthtable fm;; p q r | formula --------------------------false false false | false false false true | false false true false | false false true true | true true false false | true true false true | false true true false | true true true true | false ---------------------------

2.6 Disjunctive and conjunctive normal forms

57

This approach requires no initial simpliﬁcation or pre-normalization, and emphasizes the relationship between DNF and truth tables. We can now conﬁrm the claim made in Section 2.4: given any n-ary truth function, we can consider it as a truth table with n atoms and 2n rows, and directly construct a formula (in DNF) that has that truth-function as its interpretation. On the other hand, the fact that we need to consider all 2n valuations is rather unattractive when n, the number of atoms in the original formula, is large. For example, the following formula, that is already in a nice simple DNF, gets blown up into a much more complicated variant: # dnf <

>;; ...

DNF via transformation An alternative approach to creating a DNF equivalent is by analogy with ordinary algebra. There, in order to arrive at a fully-expanded form, we can just repeatedly apply the distributive laws x(y + z) = xy + xz and (x + y)z = xz + yz. Similarly, starting with a propositional formula in NNF, we can put it into DNF by repeatedly rewriting it based on the tautologies: p ∧ (q ∨ r) ⇔ p ∧ q ∨ p ∧ r (p ∨ q) ∧ r ⇔ p ∧ r ∨ q ∧ r. To encode this as an eﬃcient OCaml function that doesn’t run over the formula tree too many times requires a little care. We start with a function to repeatedly apply the distributive laws, assuming that the immediate subformulas are already in DNF: let rec distrib fm = match fm with And(p,(Or(q,r))) -> Or(distrib(And(p,q)),distrib(And(p,r))) | And(Or(p,q),r) -> Or(distrib(And(p,r)),distrib(And(q,r))) | _ -> fm;;

Now, when the input formula is a conjunction or disjunction, we ﬁrst recursively transform the immediate subformulas into DNF, then if necessary ‘distribute’ using the previous function: let rec rawdnf fm = match fm with And(p,q) -> distrib(And(rawdnf p,rawdnf q)) | Or(p,q) -> Or(rawdnf p,rawdnf q) | _ -> fm;;

58

Propositional logic

For example: # rawdnf <<(p \/ q /\ r) /\ (~p \/ ~r)>>;; - : prop formula = <<(p /\ ~p \/ (q /\ r) /\ ~p) \/ p /\ ~r \/ (q /\ r) /\ ~r>>

Although this is in DNF, it’s quite hard to read because of the mixed associations in iterated conjunctions and disjunctions. Moreover, some disjuncts are completely redundant: both p∧¬p and (q∧r)∧¬r are logically equivalent to ⊥, and so could be omitted without destroying logical equivalence. Set-based representation To render the association question moot, and make simpliﬁcation easier using standard list operations, it’s convenient to represent the DNF formula as a set of sets of literals, e.g. rather than p∧q ∨¬p∧r using {{p, q}, {¬p, r}}. Since the logical structure is always a disjunction of conjunctions, and (the semantics of) both disjunction and conjunction are associative, commutative and idempotent, nothing essential is lost in such a translation, and it’s easy to map back to a formula. We can now write the DNF function like this, using OCaml lists for sets but taking care to avoid duplicates in the way they are constructed: let distrib s1 s2 = setify(allpairs union s1 s2);; let rec purednf fm = match fm with And(p,q) -> distrib (purednf p) (purednf q) | Or(p,q) -> union (purednf p) (purednf q) | _ -> [[fm]];;

The essential structure is the same; this time distrib simply takes two sets of sets and returns the union of all possible pairs of sets taken from them. If we apply it to the same example, we get the same result, modulo the new representation: # purednf <<(p \/ q /\ r) /\ (~p \/ ~r)>>;; - : prop formula list list = [[<

>; <<~p>>]; [<

>; <<~r>>]; [<>; <>; <<~p>>]; [<>; <>; <<~r>>]]

But thanks to the list representation, it’s now rather easy to simplify the resulting formula. First we deﬁne a function trivial to check if there are complementary literals of the form p and ¬p in the same list. We do this by partitioning the literals into positive and negative ones, and then seeing if

2.6 Disjunctive and conjunctive normal forms

59

the set of positive ones has any common members with the negations of the negated ones: let trivial lits = let pos,neg = partition positive lits in intersect pos (image negate neg) <> [];;

We can now ﬁlter to leave only noncontradictory disjuncts, e.g. # filter (non trivial) (purednf <<(p \/ q /\ r) /\ (~p \/ ~r)>>);; - : prop formula list list = [[<

>; <<~r>>]; [<>; <>; <<~p>>]]

This already gives a smaller DNF. Another reﬁnement worth applying } ⊆ in many situations is based on subsumption. Note that if {l1 , . . . , lm {l1 , . . . , ln } every valuation satisfying D = l1 ∧ · · · ∧ ln also satisﬁes D = . Therefore the disjunction D ∨ D is logically equivalent to just l1 ∧ · · · ∧ lm D . In such a case we say that D subsumes D, or that D is subsumed by D . Here is our overall function to produce a set-of-sets DNF equivalent for a formula already in NNF, obtaining the initial unsimpliﬁed DNF then ﬁltering out contradictory and subsumed disjuncts: let simpdnf fm = if fm = False then [] else if fm = True then [[]] else let djs = filter (non trivial) (purednf(nnf fm)) in filter (fun d -> not(exists (fun d’ -> psubset d’ d) djs)) djs;;

Note that we deal specially with ‘⊥’ and ‘’, returning the empty list and the singleton list with an empty conjunction respectively. Moreover, in the main code, stripping out the contradictory disjuncts may also result in the empty list. If indeed all disjuncts are contradictory, the formula must be logically equivalent to ‘⊥’, and that is consistent with the stated interpretation of the empty list as implemented by the list_disj function we deﬁned earlier. To turn everything back into a formula we just do: let dnf fm = list_disj(map list_conj (simpdnf fm));;

We can check that we have indeed, despite the rather complicated construction, returned a logical equivalent: # let fm = <<(p \/ q /\ r) /\ (~p \/ ~r)>>;; val fm : prop formula = <<(p \/ q /\ r) /\ (~p \/ ~r)>> # dnf fm;; - : prop formula = <

> # tautology(Iff(fm,dnf fm));; - : bool = true

60

Propositional logic

Note that a DNF formula is satisﬁable precisely if one of the disjuncts is, just by the semantics of disjunction. In turn, any of these disjuncts, itself a conjunction of literals, is satisﬁable precisely when it does not contain two complementary literals (and when it does not, we can ﬁnd a satisfying valuation as when ﬁnding DNFs using truth-tables). Thus, having transformed a formula into a DNF equivalent we can recognize quickly and eﬃciently whether it is satisﬁable. (Indeed, our latest DNF function eliminated any such contradictory disjuncts, so a formula is satisﬁable iﬀ the simpliﬁed DNF contains any disjuncts at all.) This approach is not necessarily superior to truth-tables, however, since the DNF equivalent can be exponentially large.

CNF For CNF, we will similarly use a list-based representation, but this time the implicit interpretation will be as a conjunction of disjunctions. Note that by the De Morgan laws, if: ¬p ⇔

n m

pij

i=1 j=1

then p⇔

n m

−pij .

i=1 j=1

In list terms, therefore, we can produce a CNF equivalent by negating the starting formula (putting it back in NNF), producing its DNF and negating all the literals in that:† let purecnf fm = image (image negate) (purednf(nnf(Not fm)));;

In terms of formal list manipulations, the code for eliminating superﬂuous and subsumed conjuncts is the same, even though the interpretation is different. For example, trivial conjuncts now represent disjunctions containing some literal and its negation and are hence equivalent to ; since ∧C ⇔ C we are equally justiﬁed in leaving them out of the ﬁnal conjunction. Only the two degenerate cases need to be treated diﬀerently: †

Recall that the nnf function expands p ⇔ q into p ∧ q ∨ ¬p ∧ ¬q. This is not so well suited to CNF since the expanded formula will suﬀer a further expansion that may complicate the resulting expression unless the intermediate result is simpliﬁed. However, applying nnf to the negation of the formula, as here, not only saves code but makes this expansion appropriate since the roles of ‘∧’ and ‘∨’ will subsequently change.

2.7 Applications of propositional logic

61

let simpcnf fm = if fm = False then [[]] else if fm = True then [] else let cjs = filter (non trivial) (purecnf fm) in filter (fun c -> not(exists (fun c’ -> psubset c’ c) cjs)) cjs;;

We now just need to map back to the correct interpretation as a formula: let cnf fm = list_conj(map list_disj (simpcnf fm));;

for example: # let fm = <<(p \/ q /\ r) /\ (~p \/ ~r)>>;; val fm : prop formula = <<(p \/ q /\ r) /\ (~p \/ ~r)>> # cnf fm;; - : prop formula = <<(p \/ q) /\ (p \/ r) /\ (~p \/ ~r)>> # tautology(Iff(fm,cnf fm));; - : bool = true

Just as we can quickly test a DNF formula for satisﬁability, we can quickly test a CNF formula for validity. Indeed, a conjunction C1 ∧ · · · ∧ Cn is valid precisely if each Ci is valid. And since each Ci is a disjunction of literals, it is valid precisely if it contains the disjunction of a literal and its negation; if not, we could produce a valuation not satisfying it. Once again, using our simplifying CNF, things are even easier: a formula is valid precisely if its simpliﬁed CNF is just . And once again, this is not necessarily a good practical algorithm because of the possible exponential blowup when converting to CNF.

2.7 Applications of propositional logic We have completed the basic study of propositional logic, identifying the main concepts to be used later and mechanizing various operations including the recognition of tautologies. From a certain point of view, we are ﬁnished. But these methods for identifying tautologies are impractical for many more complex formulas, and in subsequent sections we will present more eﬃcient algorithms. It’s quite hard to test such algorithms, or even justify their necessity, without a stock of non-trivial propositional formulas. There are various propositional problems available in collections such as Pelletier (1986), but we will develop some ways of generating whole classes of interesting propositional problems from concise descriptions.

62

Propositional logic

Ramsey’s theorem We start by considering some special cases of Ramsey’s combinatorial theorem (Ramsey 1930; Graham, Rothschild and Spencer 1980).† A simple Ramsey-type result is that in any party of six people, there must either be a group of three people all of whom know each other, or a group of three people none of whom know each other. It’s customary to think of such problems in terms of a graph, i.e. a collection V of vertices with certain pairs connected by edges taken from a set E. A generalization of the ‘party of six’ result, still much less general than Ramsey’s theorem, is: Theorem 2.9 For each s, t ∈ N there is some n ∈ N such that any graph with n vertices either has a completely connected subgraph of size s or a completely disconnected subgraph of size t. Moreover if the ‘Ramsey number’ R(s, t) denotes the minimal such n for a given s and t we have: R(s, t) ≤ R(s − 1, t) + R(s, t − 1). Proof By complete induction on s + t. We can assume by the inductive hypothesis that the result holds for any s and t with s + t < s + t, and we need to prove it for s and t. Consider any graph of size n = R(s − 1, t) + R(s, t − 1). Pick an arbitrary vertex v. Either there are at least R(s−1, t) vertices connected to v, or there are at least R(s, t−1) vertices not connected to v, for otherwise the total size of the graph would be at most (R(s − 1, t) − 1) + (R(s, t − 1) − 1) + 1 = n − 1, contrary to hypothesis. Suppose the former, the argument being symmetrical in the latter case. Consider the subgraph based on set of a vertices attached to v, which has size at least R(s − 1, t). By the inductive hypotheses, this either has a completely connected subgraph of size s − 1 or a completely disconnected subgraph of size t. If the former, including v gives a completely connected subgraph of the main graph of size s, so we are ﬁnished. If the latter, then we already have a disconnected subgraph of size t as required. Consequently any graph of size n has a completely connected subgraph of size s or a completely disconnected subgraph of size t, so R(s, t) ≤ n. For any speciﬁc positive integers s, t and n, we can formulate a propositional formula that is a tautology precisely if R(s, t) ≤ n. We index the vertices using integers 1 to n, calculate all s-element and t-element subsets, †

See Section 5.5 for the logical problem Ramsey was attacking when he introduced his theorem. Another connection with logic is that the ﬁrst ‘natural’ statement independent of ﬁrst-order Peano Arithmetic (Paris and Harrington 1991) is essentially a numerical encoding of a Ramseytype result.

2.7 Applications of propositional logic

63

and then for each of these s or t-element subsets in turn, all possible 2element subsets of them. We want to express the fact that for one of the s-element sets, each pair of elements is connected, or for one of the t-element sets, each pair of elements is disconnected. The local deﬁnition e[m;n] produces an atomic formula p_m_n that we think of as ‘m is connected to n’ (or ‘m knows n’, etc.): let ramsey s t n = let vertices = 1 -- n in let yesgrps = map (allsets 2) (allsets s vertices) and nogrps = map (allsets 2) (allsets t vertices) in let e[m;n] = Atom(P("p_"^(string_of_int m)^"_"^(string_of_int n))) in Or(list_disj (map (list_conj ** map e) yesgrps), list_disj (map (list_conj ** map (fun p -> Not(e p))) nogrps));;

For example: # ramsey - : prop <<(p_1_2 p_1_2 p_1_3 ~p_1_2 ~p_1_2 ~p_1_3

3 3 4;; formula = /\ p_1_3 /\ p_2_3 \/ /\ p_1_4 /\ p_2_4 \/ /\ p_1_4 /\ p_3_4 \/ p_2_3 /\ p_2_4 /\ p_3_4) \/ /\ ~p_1_3 /\ ~p_2_3 \/ /\ ~p_1_4 /\ ~p_2_4 \/ /\ ~p_1_4 /\ ~p_3_4 \/ ~p_2_3 /\ ~p_2_4 /\ ~p_3_4>>

We can conﬁrm that the number 6 in the initial party example is the best possible, i.e. that R(3, 3) = 6: # # -

tautology(ramsey 3 3 5);; : bool = false tautology(ramsey 3 3 6);; : bool = true

However, the latter example already takes an appreciable time, and even slightly larger input parameters can create propositional problems way beyond those that can be solved in a reasonable time by the methods we’ve described so far. In fact, relatively few Ramsey numbers are known exactly, with even R(5, 5) only known to lie between 43 and 49 at time of writing.

Digital circuits Digital computers operate with electrical signals that may only occupy one of a ﬁnite number of voltage levels. (By contrast, in an analogue computer, levels can vary continuously.) Almost all modern computers are binary, i.e. use just two levels, conventionally called 0 (‘low’) and 1 (‘high’). At any

64

Propositional logic

particular time, we can regard each internal or external wire in a binary digital computer as having a Boolean value, ‘false’ for 0 and ‘true’ for 1, and think of each circuit element as a Boolean function, operating on the values on its input wire(s) to produce a value at its output wire. (Of course, in taking such a view we are abstracting away many important physical aspects, but our interest here is only in the logical structure.) The key building-blocks of digital circuits, logic gates, correspond closely to the usual logical connectives. For example an ‘AND gate’ is a circuit element corresponding to the ‘and’ (∧) connective: it has two inputs and one output, and the output wire is high (true) precisely if both the input wires are high. Similarly a ‘NOT gate’, or inverter, has one input wire and one output wire, and the output is high when the input is low and low when the input is high, thus corresponding to the ‘not’ connective (¬). So there is a close correspondence between digital circuits and formulas, which can be crudely summarized as follows: Digital design circuit logic gate input wire internal wire voltage level

Propositional logic formula propositional connective atom subexpression truth value

For example, the following logic circuit corresponds to the propositional formula ¬s ∧ x ∨ s ∧ y. A compound circuit element with this behaviour is known as a multiplexer, since the output is either the input x or y, selected by whether s is low or high respectively.† x AND s

NOT OR

out

AND y

One notable diﬀerence is that in the circuit we duplicate the input s simply by splitting the wire into two, whereas in the expression, we need to write s twice. This becomes more signiﬁcant for a large subexpression: in †

We draw gates simply as boxes with a word inside indicating their kinds. Circuit designers often use special symbols for gates.

2.7 Applications of propositional logic

65

the formula we may need to write it several times, whereas in the circuit we can simply run multiple wires from the corresponding circuit element. In Section 2.8 we will develop an analogous technique for formulas.

Addition Given their two-level circuits, it’s natural that the primary representation of numbers in computers is the binary positional representation, rather than decimal or some other scheme. A binary digit or bit can be represented by the value on a single wire. Larger numbers with n binary digits can be represented by an ordered sequence of n bits, and implemented as an array of n wires. (Special names are used for arrays of a particular size, e.g. bytes or octets for sequences of eight bits.) The usual algorithms for arithmetic on many-digit numbers that we learn in school can be straightforwardly modiﬁed for the binary notation; in fact they often become simpler. Suppose we want to add two binary numbers, each represented by a group of n bits. This means that each number is in the range 0 . . . 2n − 1, and so the sum will be in the range 0 . . . 2n+1 − 2, possibly requiring n + 1 bits for its storage. We simply add the digits from right to left, as in decimal. When the sum in one position is ≥ 2, we reduce it by 2 and generate a ‘carry’ of 1 into the next bit position. Here is an example, corresponding to the decimal 179 + 101 = 280:

+ =

1

1 0 0

0 1 0

1 1 0

1 0 1

0 0 1

0 1 0

1 0 0

1 1 0

In order to implement addition of n-bit numbers as circuits or propositional formulas, the simplest approach is to exploit the regularity of the algorithm, and produce an adder by replicating a 1-bit adder n times, propagating the carry between each adjacent pair of elements. The ﬁrst task is to produce a 1-bit adder, which isn’t very diﬃcult. We can regard the ‘sum’ (s) and ‘carry’ (c) produced by adding two digits as separate Boolean functions with the following truth-tables, which we draw using 0 and 1 rather than ‘false’ and ‘true’ to emphasize the arithmetical link:

66

Propositional logic

x 0 0 1 1

y 0 1 0 1

c 0 0 0 1

s 0 1 1 0

The truth-table for carry might look familiar: it’s just an ‘and’ operation x∧y. As for the sum, it is an exclusive version of ‘or’, which we can represent by ¬(x ⇔ y) or x ⇔ ¬y and abbreviate XOR. We can implement functions in OCaml corresponding to these operations as follows: let halfsum x y = Iff(x,Not y);; let halfcarry x y = And(x,y);;

and now we can assert the appropriate relation between the input and output wires of a half-adder as follows: let ha x y s c = And(Iff(s,halfsum x y),Iff(c,halfcarry x y));;

The use of ‘half’ emphasizes that this is only part of what we need. Except for the rightmost digit position, we need to add three bits, not just two, because of the incoming carry. A full-adder adds three bits, which since the answer is ≤ 3 can still be returned as just one sum and one carry bit. The truth table is: x 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

y 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1

z 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

c 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1

s 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1

and one possible implementation as gates is the following: let carry x y z = Or(And(x,y),And(Or(x,y),z));; let sum x y z = halfsum (halfsum x y) z;; let fa x y z s c = And(Iff(s,sum x y z),Iff(c,carry x y z));;

2.7 Applications of propositional logic

67

It is now straightforward to put multiple full-adders together into an nbit adder, which moreover allows a carry propagation in at the low end and propagates out bit n + 1 at the high end. The corresponding OCaml function expects the user to supply functions x, y, out and c that, when given an index, generate an appropriate new variable. The values x and y return variables for the various bits of the inputs, out does the same for the desired output and c is a set of variables to be used internally for carry, and to carry in c(0) and carry out c(n). let conjoin f l = list_conj (map f l);; let ripplecarry x y c out n = conjoin (fun i -> fa (x i) (y i) (c i) (out i) (c(i + 1))) (0 -- (n - 1));;

For example, using indexed extensions of stylized names for the inputs and generating a 3-bit adder: let mk_index x i = Atom(P(x^"_"^(string_of_int i))) and mk_index2 x i j = Atom(P(x^"_"^(string_of_int i)^"_"^(string_of_int j)));; val mk_index : string -> int -> prop formula = val mk_index2 : string -> int -> int -> prop formula = # let [x; y; out; c] = map mk_index ["X"; "Y"; "OUT"; "C"];; ...

we get: # ripplecarry x y c out 2;; - : prop formula = <<((OUT_0 <=> (X_0 <=> ~Y_0) <=> ~C_0) /\ (C_1 <=> X_0 /\ Y_0 \/ (X_0 \/ Y_0) /\ C_0)) /\ (OUT_1 <=> (X_1 <=> ~Y_1) <=> ~C_1) /\ (C_2 <=> X_1 /\ Y_1 \/ (X_1 \/ Y_1) /\ C_1)>>

If we are not interested in a carry in at the low end, we can modify the structure to use only a half-adder in that bit position. A simpler, if crude, alternative, is simply to feed in False (i.e. 0) and simplify the resulting formula: let ripplecarry0 x y c out n = psimplify (ripplecarry x y (fun i -> if i = 0 then False else c i) out n);;

The term ‘ripple-carry’ adder is used because the carry ﬂows through the full-adders from right to left. In practical circuits, there is a propagation delay between changes in inputs to a gate and the corresponding change in

68

Propositional logic

output. In extreme cases (e.g. 11111 . . . 111 + 1), the ﬁnal output bits are only available after the carry has propagated through n stages, taking about 2n gate delays. When n is quite large, say 64, this delay can be unacceptable, and a diﬀerent design needs to be used. For example, in a carry-select adder† the n-bit inputs are split into several blocks of k, and corresponding k-bit blocks are added twice, once assuming a carry-in of 0 and once assuming a carry-in of 1. The correct answer can then be decided by multiplexing using the actual carry-in from the previous stage as the selector. Then the carries only need to be propagated through n/k blocks with a few gate delays in each.‡ To implement such an adder, we need another element to supplement ripplecarry0, this time forcing a carry-in of 1: let ripplecarry1 x y c out n = psimplify (ripplecarry x y (fun i -> if i = 0 then True else c i) out n);;

and we will be selecting between the two alternatives when we do carry propagation using a multiplexer: let mux sel in0 in1 = Or(And(Not sel,in0),And(sel,in1));;

Now the overall function can be implemented recursively, using an auxiliary function to oﬀset the indices in an array of bits: let offset n x i = x(n + i);;

Suppose we are dealing with bits 0, . . . , k − 1 of an overall n bits. We separately add the block of k bits assuming 0 and 1 carry-in, giving outputs c0,s0 and c1,s1 respectively. The ﬁnal output and carry-out bits are selected by a multiplexer with selector c(0). The remaining n − k bits can be dealt with by a recursive call, but all the bit-vectors need to be oﬀset by k since we start at 0 each time. The only additional point to note is that n might not be an exact multiple of k, so we actually use k each time, which is either k or the total number of bits n, whichever is smaller: † ‡

This is perhaps the oldest technique for speeding up carry propagation, since it was used in Babbage’s design for the Analytical Engine. For very large n the process of subdivision into blocks can be continued recursively giving O(log(n)) delay.

2.7 Applications of propositional logic

69

let rec carryselect x y c0 c1 s0 s1 c s n k = let k’ = min n k in let fm = And(And(ripplecarry0 x y c0 s0 k’,ripplecarry1 x y c1 s1 k’), And(Iff(c k’,mux (c 0) (c0 k’) (c1 k’)), conjoin (fun i -> Iff(s i,mux (c 0) (s0 i) (s1 i))) (0 -- (k’ - 1)))) in if k’ < k then fm else And(fm,carryselect (offset k x) (offset k y) (offset k c0) (offset k c1) (offset k s0) (offset k s1) (offset k c) (offset k s) (n - k) k);;

One of the problems of circuit design is to verify that some eﬃciency optimization like this has not made any logical change to the function computed. Thus, if the optimization in moving from a ripple-carry to a carryselect structure is sound, the following should always generate tautologies. It states that if the same input vectors x and y are added by the two diﬀerent methods (using diﬀerent internal variables) then the all sum outputs and the carry-out bit should be the same in each case. let mk_adder_test n k = let [x; y; c; s; c0; s0; c1; s1; c2; ["x"; "y"; "c"; "s"; "c0"; "s0"; Imp(And(And(carryselect x y c0 c1 s0 ripplecarry0 x y c2 s2 n), And(Iff(c n,c2 n), conjoin (fun i -> Iff(s i,s2

s2] = map mk_index "c1"; "s1"; "c2"; "s2"] in s1 c s n k,Not(c 0)), i)) (0 -- (n - 1))));;

This is a useful generator of arbitrarily large tautologies. It also shows how practical questions in computer design can be tackled by propositional methods.

Multiplication Now that we can add n-bit numbers, we can multiply them using repeated addition. Once again, the traditional algorithm can be applied. Consider multiplying two 4-bit numbers A and B. We will use the notation Ai , Bi for the ith bit of A or B, with the least signiﬁcant bit (LSB) numbered zero so that bit i is implicitly multiplied by 2i . Just as we do by hand in decimal arithmetic, we can lay out the numbers as follows with the product terms Ai Bj with the same i + j in the same column, then add them all up:

70

Propositional logic

+ + + =

P7

A3 B3 P6

A2 B3 A3 B2 P5

A1 B3 A2 B2 A3 B1 P4

A0 B3 A1 B2 A2 B1 A3 B0 P3

A0 B2 A1 B1 A2 B0

A0 B1 A1 B0

A0 B0

P2

P1

P0

In future we will write Xij for the product term Ai Bj ; each such product term can be obtained from the input bits by a single AND gate. The calculation of the overall result can be organized by adding the rows together from the top. Note that by starting at the top, each time we add a row, we get the rightmost bit ﬁxed since there is nothing else to add in that row. In fact, we just need to repeatedly add two n-bit numbers, then at each stage separate the result into the lowest bit and the other n bits (for in general the sum has n + 1 bits). The operation we iterate is thus:

+ = +

Wn−1

Un−1 Vn−1 Wn−2

Un−1 Vn−1 ···

··· ··· ···

U2 V2 W1

U1 V1 W0

U0 V0 Z

The following adaptation of ripplecarry0 does just that: let rippleshift u v c z w n = ripplecarry0 u v (fun i -> if i = n then w(n - 1) else c(i + 1)) (fun i -> if i = 0 then z else w(i - 1)) n;;

Now the multiplier can be implemented by repeating this operation. We assume the input is an n-by-n array of input bits representing the product terms, and use the other array u to hold the intermediate sums and v to hold the carries at each stage. (By ‘array’, we mean a function of two arguments.) let multiplier x u v out n = if n = 1 then And(Iff(out 0,x 0 0),Not(out 1)) else psimplify (And(Iff(out 0,x 0 0), And(rippleshift (fun i -> if i = n - 1 then False else x 0 (i + 1)) (x 1) (v 2) (out 1) (u 2) n, if n = 2 then And(Iff(out 2,u 2 0),Iff(out 3,u 2 1)) else conjoin (fun k -> rippleshift (u k) (x k) (v(k + 1)) (out k) (if k = n - 1 then fun i -> out(n + i) else u(k + 1)) n) (2 -- (n - 1)))));;

2.7 Applications of propositional logic

71

A few special cases need to be checked because the general pattern breaks down for n ≤ 2. Otherwise, the lowest product term x 0 0 is fed to the lowest bit of the output, and then rippleshift is used repeatedly. The ﬁrst stage is separated because the topmost bit of one argument is guaranteed to be zero (note the blank space above A1 B3 in the ﬁrst diagram). At each stage k of the iterated operation, the addition takes a partial sum in u k, a new row of input x k and the carry within the current row, v(k + 1), and produces one bit of output in out k and the rest in the next partial sum u(k + 1), except that in the last stage, when k = n - 1 is true, it is fed directly to the output.

Primality and factorization Using these formulas representing arithmetic operations, we can encode some arithmetical assertions as tautology/satisﬁability questions. For example, consider the question of whether a speciﬁc integer p > 1 is prime, i.e. has no factors besides itself and 1. First, we deﬁne functions to tell us how many bits are needed for p in binary notation, and to extract the nth bit of a nonnegative integer x: let rec bitlength x = if x = 0 then 0 else 1 + bitlength (x / 2);; let rec bit n x = if n = 0 then x mod 2 = 1 else bit (n - 1) (x / 2);;

We can now produce a formula asserting that the atoms x(i) encode the bits of a value m, at least modulo 2n . We simply form a conjunction of these variables or their negations depending on whether the corresponding bits are 1 or 0 respectively: let congruent_to x m n = conjoin (fun i -> if bit i m then x i else Not(x i)) (0 -- (n - 1));;

Now, if a number p is composite and requires at most n bits to store, it must have a factorization with both factors at least 2, hence both ≤ p/2 and so storable in n − 1 bits. To assert that p is prime, then, we need to state that for any two (n − 1)-element sequences of bits, their product does not correspond to the value p. Note that without further restrictions, the product could take as many as 2n − 2 bits. While we only need to consider those products less than p, it’s easier not to bother with encoding this property in propositional terms. Thus the following function applied to a positive integer p should give a tautology precisely if p is prime.

72

Propositional logic

let prime p = let [x; y; out] = map mk_index ["x"; "y"; "out"] in let m i j = And(x i,y j) and [u; v] = map mk_index2 ["u"; "v"] in let n = bitlength p in Not(And(multiplier m u v out (n - 1), congruent_to out p (max n (2 * n - 2))));;

For example: # # # -

tautology(prime 7);; : bool = true tautology(prime 9);; : bool = false tautology(prime 11);; : bool = true

The power of propositional logic This section has given just a taste of how certain problems can be reduced to ‘SAT’, satisﬁability checking of propositional formulas. Cook (1971) famously showed that a wide class of combinatorial problems, including SAT itself, are in a precise sense exactly as diﬃcult as each other. (Roughly, an algorithm for solving any one of them gives rise to an algorithm for solving any of the others with at most a polynomial increase in runtime.) This class of NPcomplete problems is now known to contain many apparently very diﬃcult problems of great practical interest (Garey and Johnson 1979). Our tautology or satisfiable functions can in the worst case take a time exponential in the size of the input formula, since they may need to evaluate the formula on all 2n valuations of its n atomic propositions. The algorithms we will develop later are much more eﬀective in practice, but nevertheless also have exponential worst-case complexity. A polynomial-time algorithm for SAT or any other NP-complete problem would give rise to a polynomial-time algorithm for all NP-complete problems. Since none has been found to date, there is a widespread belief that it is impossible, but at time of writing this has not been proved. This is the famous P=NP problem, perhaps the outstanding open question in discrete mathematics and computer science.† Baker, Gill and Solovay (1975) give some reasons why many plausible attacks on the problem are unlikely to work. Still, the reducibility of many other problems to SAT has positive implications too. Considerable eﬀort has been devoted to algorithms for SAT and †

A $1000000 prize is oﬀered by the Clay Institute for settling it either way. See www.claymath. org/millennium/ for more information.

2.8 Deﬁnitional CNF

73

their eﬃcient implementation. It often turns out that a careful reduction of a problem to SAT followed by the use of one of these tools works better than all but the ﬁnest specialized algorithms.‡

2.8 Deﬁnitional CNF We have observed that tautology checking for a formula in CNF is easy, as is satisﬁability checking for a formula in DNF (Section 2.6). Unfortunately, the simple matter of transforming a formula into a logical equivalent in either of these normal forms can make it blow up exponentially. This is not simply a defect of our particular implementation but is unavoidable in principle (Reckhow 1976). However, if we require a weaker property than logical equivalence, we can do much better. We will show how any formula p can be transformed to a CNF formula p that is at worst a few times as large as p and is equisatisﬁable, i.e. p is satisﬁable if and only if p is, even though they are not in general logically equivalent. We can as usual dualize the procedure to give a DNF formula that is equivalid with the original, i.e. is a tautology iﬀ the original formula is. Neither of these then immediately yields a trivial tautology or satisﬁability test, since the CNF and DNF are the wrong way round. However, at least they make a useful simpliﬁed starting point for more advanced algorithms. The basic idea, originally due to Tseitin (1968) and subsequently reﬁned in many ways (Wilson 1990), is to introduce new atoms as abbreviations or ‘deﬁnitions’ for subformulas, hence the name ‘deﬁnitional CNF’. The method is probably best understood by looking at a simple paradigmatic example. Suppose we want to transform the following formula to CNF: (p ∨ (q ∧ ¬r)) ∧ s. We introduce a new atom p1 , not used elsewhere in the formula, to abbreviate q ∧ ¬r, conjoining the abbreviated formula with the ‘deﬁnition’ of p1 : (p1 ⇔ q ∧ ¬r) ∧ (p ∨ p1 ) ∧ s. ‡

This is not the case for primality or factorization as far as we know. There is a polynomial-time algorithm known for testing primality (Agrawal, Kayal and Saxena 2004), and probabilistic algorithms are often even faster in practice. However, there is (at the time of writing) no known polynomial-time algorithm for factoring a composite number.

74

Propositional logic

We now proceed through additional steps of the same kind, introducing another variable p2 abbreviating p ∨ p1 : (p1 ⇔ q ∧ ¬r) ∧ (p2 ⇔ p ∨ p1 ) ∧ p2 ∧ s and then p3 as an abbreviation for p2 ∧ s: (p1 ⇔ q ∧ ¬r) ∧ (p2 ⇔ p ∨ p1 ) ∧ (p3 ⇔ p2 ∧ s) ∧ p3 . Finally, we just put each of the conjuncts into CNF using traditional methods: (¬p1 ∨ q) ∧ (¬p1 ∨ ¬r) ∧ (p1 ∨ ¬q ∨ r) ∧ (¬p2 ∨ p ∨ p1 ) ∧ (p2 ∨ ¬p) ∧ (p2 ∨ ¬p1 ) ∧ (¬p3 ∨ p2 ) ∧ (¬p3 ∨ s) ∧ (p3 ∨ ¬p2 ∨ ¬s) ∧ p3 . We can see that the resulting formula can only be a modest constant factor larger than the original. The number of deﬁnitional conjuncts introduced is bounded by the number of connectives in the original formula. And the ﬁnal expansion of each conjunct into CNF only causes a modest expansion because of their simple form. Even the worst case, p ⇔ (q ⇔ r), only has 11 binary connectives in its CNF equivalent: # cnf <

(q <=> r)>>;; - : prop formula = <<(p \/ q \/ r) /\ (p \/ ~q \/ ~r) /\ (q \/ ~p \/ ~r) /\ (r \/ ~p \/ ~q)>>

So our claim about the size of the formula is justiﬁed. For the equisatisﬁability, we just need to show that each deﬁnitional step is satisﬁabilitypreserving, for the overall transformation is just a sequence of such steps followed by a transformation to a logical equivalent. Theorem 2.10 If x does not occur in q, the formulas psubst (x |⇒ q) p and (x ⇔ q) ∧ p are equisatisﬁable. Proof If psubst (x |⇒ q) p is satisﬁable, say by a valuation v, then by Theorem 2.3 the modiﬁed valuation v = (x → eval q v) v satisﬁes p. It also satisﬁes x ⇔ q because by construction v (x) = eval q v and since x

2.8 Deﬁnitional CNF

75

does not occur in q, this is the same as eval q v (Theorem 2.2). Therefore v satisﬁes (x ⇔ q) ∧ p and so that formula is satisﬁable. Conversely, suppose a valuation v satisﬁes (x ⇔ q) ∧ p. Since it satisﬁes the ﬁrst conjunct, v(x) = eval q v and therefore (x → eval q v) v is just v. By Theorem 2.3, v therefore satisﬁes psubst (x |⇒ q) p. The second part of this proof actually shows that the right-to-left implication (x ⇔ q) ∧ p ⇒ psubst (x |⇒ q) p is a tautology. However, the implication in the other direction is not, and hence we do not have logical equivalence. For if a valuation v satisﬁes psubst (x |⇒ q) p, then since x does not occur in that formula, so does v = (x → not(v(x))) v. But one or other of these must fail to satisfy x ⇔ q.

Implementation of deﬁnitional CNF For the new propositional variables we will use stylized names of the form p_n. The following function returns such an atom as well as the incremented index ready for next time. let mkprop n = Atom(P("p_"^(string_of_num n))),n +/ Int 1;;

For simplicity, suppose that the starting formulas has been pre-simpliﬁed by nenf, so that negation is only applied to atoms, and implication has been eliminated. The main recursive function maincnf takes a triple consisting of the formula to be transformed, a ﬁnite partial function giving the ‘deﬁnitions’ made so far, and the current variable index counter value. It returns a similar triple with the transformed formula, the augmented deﬁnitions and a new counter moving past variables used in these deﬁnitions. All it does is decompose the top-level binary connective into the type constructor and the immediate subformulas, then pass them as arguments op and (p,q) to a general function defstep that does the main work. (The two functions maincnf and defstep are mutually recursive and so we enter them in one phrase: note that there is no double-semicolon after the code in the next box.) let rec maincnf (fm,defs,n as trip) = match fm with And(p,q) -> defstep mk_and (p,q) trip | Or(p,q) -> defstep mk_or (p,q) trip | Iff(p,q) -> defstep mk_iff (p,q) trip | _ -> trip

76

Propositional logic

Inside defstep, a recursive call to maincnf transforms the left-hand subformula p, returning the transformed formula fm1, an augmented list of definitions defs1 and a counter n1. The right-hand subformula q together with the new list of deﬁnitions and counter are used in another recursive call, giving a transformed formula fm2 and further modiﬁed deﬁnitions defs2 and counter n2. We then construct the appropriate composite formula fm’ by applying the constructor op passed in. Next, we check if there is already a deﬁnition corresponding to this formula, and if so, return the deﬁning variable. Otherwise we create a new variable and insert a new deﬁnition, afterwards returning this variable as the simpliﬁed formula, and of course the new counter after the call to mkprop. and defstep op (p,q) (fm,defs,n) = let fm1,defs1,n1 = maincnf (p,defs,n) in let fm2,defs2,n2 = maincnf (q,defs1,n1) in let fm’ = op fm1 fm2 in try (fst(apply defs2 fm’),defs2,n2) with Failure _ -> let v,n3 = mkprop n2 in (v,(fm’|->(v,Iff(v,fm’))) defs2,n3);;

We need to make sure that none of our newly introduced atoms already occur in the starting formula. This tedious business will crop up a few times in the future, so we implement a more general solution now. The max_varindex function returns whichever is larger of the argument n and all possible m such that the string argument s is pfx followed by the string corresponding to m, if any: let max_varindex pfx = let m = String.length pfx in fun s n -> let l = String.length s in if l <= m or String.sub s 0 m <> pfx then n else let s’ = String.sub s m (l - m) in if forall numeric (explode s’) then max_num n (num_of_string s’) else n;;

Now we can implement the overall function. First the formula is simpliﬁed and negations are pushed down, giving fm’, and we use this formula to choose an appropriate starting variable index, adding 1 to the largest n for which there is an existing variable ‘p n’. We then call the main function, kept as a parameter fn to allow future modiﬁcation, starting with no deﬁnitions and with the variable-name counter set to the starting index. We then return the resulting CNF in the set-of-sets representation:

2.8 Deﬁnitional CNF

77

let mk_defcnf fn fm = let fm’ = nenf fm in let n = Int 1 +/ overatoms (max_varindex "p_" ** pname) fm’ (Int 0) in let (fm’’,defs,_) = fn (fm’,undefined,n) in let deflist = map (snd ** snd) (graph defs) in unions(simpcnf fm’’ :: map simpcnf deflist);;

Our ﬁrst deﬁnitional CNF function just applies this to maincnf and converts the result back to a formula: let defcnf fm = list_conj(map list_disj(mk_defcnf maincnf fm));;

Trying it out on the example formula gives the expected result, coinciding with the result obtained by hand above, except for ordering of conjuncts and literals within them: # defcnf <<(p \/ (q /\ ~r)) /\ s>>;; - : prop formula = <<(p \/ p_1 \/ ~p_2) /\ (p_1 \/ r \/ ~q) /\ (p_2 \/ ~p) /\ (p_2 \/ ~p_1) /\ (p_2 \/ ~p_3) /\ p_3 /\ (p_3 \/ ~p_2 \/ ~s) /\ (q \/ ~p_1) /\ (s \/ ~p_3) /\ (~p_1 \/ ~r)>>

Instead of transforming each deﬁnition into CNF in isolation, we could have formed the ﬁnal conjunction ﬁrst and called the old CNF function once. This would be slightly simpler to program, and would eliminate more subsumed conjuncts, such as ¬p2 ∨¬s∨p3 in that example, which is subsumed by p3 . However, for very large formulas the subsumption testing becomes extremely slow since (in our simple-minded implementation) it performs about n2 operations for a formula of size n. Optimizations We can optimize the procedure by avoiding some obviously redundant deﬁnitions. First, when dealing with an iterated conjunction in the initial formula, we can just put the conjuncts into CNF separately and conjoin them.† And if any of those conjuncts in their turn contain disjunctions, we can ignore atomic formulas within them and only introduce deﬁnitions for other subformulas. †

Note that the initial nenf is beneﬁcial here, since it can expose existing CNF structure that was formerly hidden by nested negations. For example, after this transformation the formula ¬(p ∨ q ∧ r) is already in CNF.

78

Propositional logic

The coding is fairly simple: we ﬁrst descend through arbitrarily many nested conjunctions, and then through arbitrarily many nested disjunctions, before we begin the deﬁnitional work. However, we still need to link the deﬁnitional transformations in the diﬀerent parts of the formula, so we maintain the same overall structure with three arguments. The function subcnf has the same structure as defstep except that it handles the linkage housekeeping without introducing new deﬁnitions, and has the function called recursively as an additional parameter sfn: let subcnf sfn op (p,q) (fm,defs,n) = let fm1,defs1,n1 = sfn(p,defs,n) in let fm2,defs2,n2 = sfn(q,defs1,n1) in (op fm1 fm2,defs2,n2);;

This is used ﬁrst to deﬁne a function that recursively descends through disjunctions performing the deﬁnitional transformation of the disjuncts: let rec orcnf (fm,defs,n as trip) = match fm with Or(p,q) -> subcnf orcnf mk_or (p,q) trip | _ -> maincnf trip;;

and in turn a function that recursively descends through conjunctions calling orcnf on the conjuncts: let rec andcnf (fm,defs,n as trip) = match fm with And(p,q) -> subcnf andcnf mk_and (p,q) trip | _ -> orcnf trip;;

Now the overall function is the same except that andcnf is used in place of maincnf. We separate the actual reconstruction of a formula from the set of sets into a diﬀerent function, since it will be useful later to intercept the intermediate result. let defcnfs fm = mk_defcnf andcnf fm;; let defcnf fm = list_conj (map list_disj (defcnfs fm));;

This does indeed give a signiﬁcantly simpler result on our running example: # defcnf <<(p \/ (q /\ ~r)) /\ s>>;; - : prop formula = <<(p \/ p_1) /\ (p_1 \/ r \/ ~q) /\ (q \/ ~p_1) /\ s /\ (~p_1 \/ ~r)>>

With a little more care one can design a deﬁnitional CNF procedure so that it will always at least equal a naive algorithm in the size of the output (Boy de la Tour 1990). However, the function defcnf that we have now

2.9 The Davis–Putnam procedure

79

arrived at is not bad and will be quite adequate for our purposes. For one possible optimization, see Exercise 2.11. 3-CNF Note that after the unoptimized deﬁnitional CNF conversion, the resulting formula is in ‘3-CNF’, meaning that each conjunct contains a disjunction of at most three literals. The reader can verify this by conﬁrming that at most three literals result for each conjunct in the CNF translation of every deﬁnition p ⇔ q ⊗ r for all connectives ‘⊗’. However, the ﬁnal optimization of leaving alone conjuncts that are already a disjunction of literals spoils this property. If 3-CNF is considered important, it can be reinstated while still treating individual conjuncts separately. A crude but adequate method is simply to omit the intermediate function orcnf: let rec andcnf3 pos (fm,defs,n as trip) = match fm with And(p,q) -> subcnf (andcnf3 pos) (fun (p,q) -> And(p,q)) (p,q) trip | _ -> maincnf pos trip;; let defcnf3 fm = list_conj (map list_disj(mk_defcnf andcnf3 fm));;

The results of this section show that we can reduce SAT, testing satisﬁability of an arbitrary formula, to testing satisﬁability of a formula in CNF that is only a few times as large. Indeed, by the above we only need to be able to test ‘3-SAT’, satisﬁability of formulas in 3-CNF. For this reason, many practical algorithms assume a CNF input, and theoretical results often consider just CNF or 3-CNF formulas. 2.9 The Davis–Putnam procedure The Davis–Putnam procedure is a method for deciding satisﬁability of a propositional formula in conjunctive normal form.† There are actually two signiﬁcantly diﬀerent algorithms commonly called ‘Davis–Putnam’, but we’ll consider them separately and try to maintain a terminological distinction. The original algorithm presented by Davis and Putnam (1960) will be referred to simply as ‘Davis–Putnam’ (DP), while the later and now more popular variant developed by Davis, Logemann and Loveland (1962) will be called ‘Davis–Putnam–Loveland–Logemann’ (DPLL). Following the historical line, we consider DP ﬁrst. †

As we shall see in section 3.8, the Davis–Putnam procedure for propositional logic was originally presented as a component of a ﬁrst-order search procedure. Since this was based on refuting ever-larger conjunctions of substitution instances, the use of CNF was particularly attractive.

80

Propositional logic

We found a ‘set of sets’ representation useful in transforming a formula into CNF, and we’ll use it in the DP and DPLL procedures themselves. An implicit ‘set of sets’ representation of a CNF formula is often referred to as clausal form, and each conjunct is called a clause. The earlier auxiliary function simpcnf already puts a formula in clausal form, and defcnfs does likewise using deﬁnitional CNF. We will just use the latter, avoiding the ﬁnal reconstruction of a formula from the set-of-sets representation. In our discussions, we will write clauses with the implicit logical connectives, but with the understanding that we are really performing set operations. The degenerate cases of clausal form should be kept in mind: a list including the empty clause corresponds to the formula ‘⊥’, while an empty list of clauses corresponds to the formula ‘’; this interpretation is often used in what follows. The DP procedure successively transforms a formula in clausal form through a succession of others, maintaining clausal form and equisatisﬁability with the original formula. It terminates when the clausal form either contains an empty clause, in which case the original formula must be unsatisﬁable, or is itself empty, in which case the original formula must be satisﬁable. There are three basic satisﬁability-preserving transformations used in the DP procedure: I the 1-literal rule, II the aﬃrmative-negative rule, III the rule for eliminating atomic formulas. Rules I and II always make the formula simpler, reducing the total number of literals. Hence they are always applied as much as possible, and the third rule, which may greatly increase the size of the formula, is used only when neither of the ﬁrst two is applicable. However, from a logical point of view we can regard I as a special case of III, so we will re-use the argument that III preserves satisﬁability to show that I does too.

The 1-literal rule This rule can be applied whenever one of the clauses is a unit clause, i.e. simply a single literal rather than the disjunction of more than one. If p is such a unit clause, we can get a new formula by: • removing any instances of −p from the other clauses, • removing any clauses containing p, including the unit clause itself. We will show later that this transformation preserves satisﬁability. The 1-literal rule is also called unit propagation since it propagates the infor-

2.9 The Davis–Putnam procedure

81

mation that p is true into the the other clauses. To implement it in the list-of-lists representation, we search for a unit clause, i.e. a list of length 1, and let u be the sole literal in it and u’ its negation. Then we ﬁrst remove all clauses containing u and then remove u’ from the remaining clauses.† let one_literal_rule clauses = let u = hd (find (fun cl -> length cl = 1) clauses) in let u’ = negate u in let clauses1 = filter (fun cl -> not (mem u cl)) clauses in image (fun cl -> subtract cl [u’]) clauses1;;

If there is no unit clause, the application of find will raise an exception. This makes it easy to apply one_literal_rule repeatedly to get rid of multiple unit clauses, until failure indicates there are no more left. Note that even if there is only one unit clause in the initial formula, an application of the rule may itself create more unit clauses by deleting other literals.

The aﬃrmative–negative rule This rule, also sometimes called the pure literal rule, exploits the fact that if any literal occurs either only positively or only negatively, then we can delete all clauses containing that literal while preserving satisﬁability. For the implementation, we start by collecting all the literals together and partitioning them into positive (pos) and negative (neg’). From these we obtain the literals pure that occur either only positively or only negatively, then eliminate all clauses that contain any of them. We make it fail if there are no pure literals, since it then ﬁts more easily into the overall procedure. let affirmative_negative_rule clauses = let neg’,pos = partition negative (unions clauses) in let neg = image negate neg’ in let pos_only = subtract pos neg and neg_only = subtract neg pos in let pure = union pos_only (image negate neg_only) in if pure = [] then failwith "affirmative_negative_rule" else filter (fun cl -> intersect cl pure = []) clauses;;

If any valuation satisﬁes the original set of clauses, then it must also satisfy the new set, which is a subset of it. Conversely, if a valuation v satisﬁes the new set, we can modify it to set v (p) = true for all positive-only literals p in the original and v (n) = false for all negative-only literals ¬n, setting v (a) = v(a) for all other atoms. By construction this satisﬁes the deleted †

We use a setifying map image rather than just map because we may otherwise get duplicates, e.g. removing ¬u from ¬u ∨ p ∨ q when there is already a clause p ∨ q. This is not essential, but it seems prudent not to have more clauses than necessary.

82

Propositional logic

clauses, and since it does not change the assignment to any atom occurring in the ﬁnal clauses, satisﬁes them too and hence the original set of clauses. Rule for eliminating atomic formulas This rule is the only one that can make the formula increase in size, and in the worst case the increase can be substantial. However, it completely eliminates some particular atom from consideration, without any special requirements on the clauses that contain it. The rule is parametrized by a literal p that occurs positively in at least one clause and negatively in at least one clause. (If the pure literal rule has already been applied, any remaining literal has this property. Indeed, if we’ve also ﬁltered out trivial, i.e. tautologous, clauses, no literal will occur both positively and negatively in the same clause, but we won’t rely on that when stating and proving the next theorem.) Theorem 2.11 Given a literal p, separate a set of clauses S into those clauses containing p only positively, those containing it only negatively, and those for which neither is true: S = {p ∨ Ci | 1 ≤ i ≤ m} ∪ {−p ∨ Dj | 1 ≤ j ≤ n} ∪ S0 , where none of the Ci or Dj include the literal p or its negation, and if either p or −p occurs in any clause in S0 then they both do. Then S is satisﬁable iﬀ S is, where: S = {Ci ∨ Dj | 1 ≤ i ≤ m, 1 ≤ j ≤ n} ∪ S0 . Proof We can assume without loss of generality that p is positive, i.e. an atomic formula, since otherwise the same reasoning applies to −p. If a valuation v satisﬁes S, there are two possibilities. If v(p) = false, then since each p ∨ Ci is satisﬁed but p is not, each Ci is satisﬁed and a fortiori each Ci ∨ Dj . If v(p) = true, then since each −p ∨ Dj is satisﬁed but −p is not, each Dj is satisﬁed and hence so is each Ci ∨ Dj . The formulas in S0 were already in the original clauses S and hence are still satisﬁed by v. Conversely, suppose a valuation v satisﬁes S . We claim that v either satisﬁes all the Ci or else satisﬁes all the Dj . Indeed, if it doesn’t satisfy some particular Ck , the fact that it does nevertheless satisfy all the Ck ∨ Dj for 1 ≤ j ≤ n shows at once that it satisﬁes all Dj ; similarly if it fails to satisfy some Dl then it must satisfy all Ci . Now, if v satisﬁes all Ci , modify it by setting v (p) = false and setting v (a) = v(a) for all other atoms. All the p ∨ Ci are satisﬁed by v because all the Ci are, and all the −p ∨ Dj

2.9 The Davis–Putnam procedure

83

are because −p is. Since the formulas in S0 either do not involve p or are tautologies, they are still satisﬁed by v . The other case is symmetrical: if v satisﬁes all Dj , modify it by setting v(p) = true and reason similarly. Rule III is also commonly called the resolution rule, and we will study it in more detail in Chapter 3. Correspondingly, the clause Ci ∨ Dj is said to be a resolvent of the clauses p ∨ Ci and −p ∨ Dj , and to have been obtained by resolution, or more speciﬁcally by resolution on p. In the implementation, we also ﬁlter out trivial (tautologous) clauses at the end: let resolve_on p clauses = let p’ = negate p and pos,notpos = partition (mem p) clauses in let neg,other = partition (mem p’) notpos in let pos’ = image (filter (fun l -> l <> p)) pos and neg’ = image (filter (fun l -> l <> p’)) neg in let res0 = allpairs union pos’ neg’ in union other (filter (non trivial) res0);;

Theoretically, we can regard the 1-literal rule applied to a unit clause p as subsumption followed by resolution on p, and hence deduce as promised: Corollary 2.12 The 1-literal rule preserves satisﬁability. Proof If the original set S contains the unit clause {p}, then, by subsumption, the set of all other formulas involving p positively can be removed without aﬀecting satisﬁability, giving S , say. Now by the above theorem the new set resulting from resolution on p is also equisatisﬁable, and this precisely removes the unit clause itself and all instances of −p. In practice, we will only apply the resolution rule after the 1-literal and aﬃrmative–negative rules have already been applied. In this case we can assume that any literal present occurs both positively and negatively, and are faced with a choice of which literal to resolve on. Given a literal l, we can predict the change in the number of clauses resulting from resolution on l: let resolution_blowup cls l = let m = length(filter (mem l) cls) and n = length(filter (mem (negate l)) cls) in m * n - m - n;;

We will pick the literal that minimizes this blowup. (While this looks plausible, it is simplistic; much more sophisticated heuristics are possible and perhaps desirable.)

84

Propositional logic

let resolution_rule clauses = let pvs = filter positive (unions clauses) in let p = minimize (resolution_blowup clauses) pvs in resolve_on p clauses;;

The DP procedure The main DP procedure is deﬁned recursively. It terminates if the set of clauses is empty (returning true since that set is trivially satisﬁable) or contains the empty clause (returning false for unsatisﬁability). Otherwise, it applies the ﬁrst of the rules I, II and III to succeed and then continues recursively on the new set of clauses.† This recursion must terminate, for each rule either decreases the number of distinct atoms (in the case of III, assuming that tautologies are always removed ﬁrst) or else leaves the number of atoms unchanged but reduces the total size of the clauses. let rec dp clauses = if clauses = [] then true else if mem [] clauses then false else try dp (one_literal_rule clauses) with Failure _ -> try dp (affirmative_negative_rule clauses) with Failure _ -> dp(resolution_rule clauses);;

The code can be used for satisﬁability and tautology checking functions: let dpsat fm = dp(defcnfs fm);; let dptaut fm = not(dpsat(Not fm));;

Encouragingly, dptaut proves the formula prime 11 much more quickly than the tautology function: # # -

tautology(prime 11);; : bool = true dptaut(prime 11);; : bool = true

The DPLL procedure For more challenging problems, the number and size of the clauses generated in the DP procedure can grow enormously, and may exhaust available memory before a decision is reached. This eﬀect was even more pronounced on the early computers available when the DP algorithm was developed, and †

The overall procedure will never fail, so any Failure exceptions must be from the rule.

2.9 The Davis–Putnam procedure

85

it motivated Davis, Logemann and Loveland (1962) to replace the resolution rule III with a splitting rule. If neither of the rules I and II is applicable, then some literal p is chosen and the satisﬁability of a clause set Δ is reduced to the satisﬁability of Δ ∪ {−p} and of Δ ∪ {p}, which are tested separately. Note that this preserves satisﬁability: Δ is satisﬁable if and only if one of Δ ∪ {−p} and Δ ∪ {p} is, since any valuation must satisfy either −p or p. The new unit clauses will then immediately be used by the 1-literal rule to simplify the clause set. Since this step reduces the number of atoms, the termination of the procedure is guaranteed. A reasonable choice of splitting literal seems to be the one that occurs most often (either positively or negatively), since the subsequent unit propagation will then cause the most substantial simpliﬁcation.† Accordingly we deﬁne the analogue of the DP procedure’s resolution_blowup: let posneg_count cls l = let m = length(filter (mem l) cls) and n = length(filter (mem (negate l)) cls) in m + n;;

Now the basic algorithm is as before except that the resolution rule is replaced by a case-split: let rec dpll clauses = if clauses = [] then true else if mem [] clauses then false else try dpll(one_literal_rule clauses) with Failure _ -> try dpll(affirmative_negative_rule clauses) with Failure _ -> let pvs = filter positive (unions clauses) in let p = maximize (posneg_count clauses) pvs in dpll (insert [p] clauses) or dpll (insert [negate p] clauses);;

Once again, it can be applied to give tautology and satisﬁability testing functions: let dpllsat fm = dpll(defcnfs fm);; let dplltaut fm = not(dpllsat(Not fm));;

and the time for the same example is even better than for DP: # dplltaut(prime 11);; - : bool = true †

It is in fact, in a precise sense, harder to make the optimal choice of split variable than to solve the satisﬁability question itself (Liberatore 2000).

86

Propositional logic

Iterative DPLL For really large problems, the DPLL procedure in the simple recursive form that we have presented can require an impractical amount of memory, because of the storage of intermediate states when case-splits are nested. Most modern implementations are based instead on a tail-recursive (iterative) control structure, using an explicit trail to store information about the recursive case-splits. We will implement this trail as just a list of pairs, the ﬁrst member of each pair being a literal we are assuming, the second a ﬂag indicating whether it was just assumed as one half of a case-split (Guessed) or deduced by unit propagation from literals assumed earlier (Deduced). The trail is stored in reverse order, so that the head of the list is the literal most recently assumed or deduced, and the ﬂags are taken from this enumerated type: type trailmix = Guessed | Deduced;;

In general, we no longer modify the clauses of the input problem as we explore case-splits, but retain the original formula, recording our further (and in general temporary) assumptions only in the trail. All literals in the trail are assumed to hold at the current stage of exploration. In order to ﬁnd potential atomic formulas to case-split over, we use the following to indicate which atomic formulas in the problem have no assignment either way in the trail, whether that literal was guessed or deduced: let unassigned = let litabs p = match p with Not q -> q | _ -> p in fun cls trail -> subtract (unions(image (image litabs) cls)) (image (litabs ** fst) trail);;

To perform unit propagation, it is convenient internally to modify the problem clauses cls, and also to process the trail trail into a ﬁnite partial function fn for more eﬃcient lookup. This is all implemented inside the following subfunction, which performs unit propagation until either no further progress is possible or the empty clause is derived: let rec unit_subpropagate (cls,fn,trail) = let cls’ = map (filter ((not) ** defined fn ** negate)) cls in let uu = function [c] when not(defined fn c) -> [c] | _ -> failwith "" in let newunits = unions(mapfilter uu cls’) in if newunits = [] then (cls’,fn,trail) else let trail’ = itlist (fun p t -> (p,Deduced)::t) newunits trail and fn’ = itlist (fun u -> (u |-> ())) newunits fn in unit_subpropagate (cls’,fn’,trail’);;

2.9 The Davis–Putnam procedure

87

This is then used in the overall function, returning both the modiﬁed clauses and the trail, though the former is only used for convenience and will not be retained around the main loop: let unit_propagate (cls,trail) = let fn = itlist (fun (x,_) -> (x |-> ())) trail undefined in let cls’,fn’,trail’ = unit_subpropagate (cls,fn,trail) in cls’,trail’;;

When we reach a contradiction or conﬂict, we need to backtrack to try the other branch of the most recent case-split. This is where the distinction between the decision literals (those ﬂagged with Guessed) and the others is used: we remove items from the trail until we reach the most recent decision literal or there are no items left at all. let rec backtrack trail = match trail with (p,Deduced)::tt -> backtrack tt | _ -> trail;;

Now we will express the classic DPLL algorithm using this iterative reformulation. The arguments to dpli are the clauses cls of the original problem, which is unchanged over recursive calls, and the current trail. First of all we perform exhaustive unit propagation to obtain a new set of clauses cls’ and trail trail’. (We do not bother with the aﬃrmative–negative rule, though it could be added without diﬃculty.) If we have deduced the empty clause, then we backtrack to the most recent decision literal. If there are none left then we are done: the formula is unsatisﬁable. Otherwise we take the most recent one and put its negation back in the trail, now ﬂagged as Deduced to indicate that it follows from the previously assumed literals in the trail. (Operationally, this means that on the next conﬂict we will not negate it again and go into a loop.) If there is no conﬂict, then as in the recursive formulation we pick an unassigned literal p and initiate a case-split, while if there are no unassigned literals the formula is satisﬁable. let rec dpli cls trail = let cls’,trail’ = unit_propagate (cls,trail) in if mem [] cls’ then match backtrack trail with (p,Guessed)::tt -> dpli cls ((negate p,Deduced)::tt) | _ -> false else match unassigned cls trail’ with [] -> true | ps -> let p = maximize (posneg_count cls’) ps in dpli cls ((p,Guessed)::trail’);;

88

Propositional logic

As usual we can turn this into satisﬁability and tautology tests for an arbitrary formula: let dplisat fm = dpli (defcnfs fm) [];; let dplitaut fm = not(dplisat(Not fm));;

It works just as well as the recursive implementation, though it is often somewhat slower because our naive data structures don’t support eﬃcient lookup and unit propagation. But the iterative structure really comes into its own when we consider some further optimizations.

Backjumping and learning For an unsatisﬁable set of clauses, after recursively case-splitting enough times, we always get the empty clause showing that some particular combination of literal assignments is inconsistent. However, it may be that not all of the assignments made in a particular case-split are really necessary to get the empty clause. For example, suppose we perform nested case-splits over the atoms p1 ,. . . ,p10 in that order, ﬁrst assuming them all to be true. If we have clauses ¬p1 ∨ ¬p10 ∨ p11 and ¬p1 ∨ ¬p10 ∨ ¬p11 , we will then be able to reach a conﬂict and initiate backtracking. The next combination to be tried will be p1 ,. . . ,p9 ,¬p10 . Since the clauses were assumed to be unsatisﬁable, we will eventually, perhaps after further nested case-splits, reach a contradiction and backtrack again. Unfortunately, for each subsequent assignment of the atoms p2 ,. . . ,p9 , we will waste time once again exploring the case where p10 holds. How can we avoid this? When ﬁrst backtracking, we could instead have observed that assumptions about p2 ,. . . ,p9 make no diﬀerence to the clauses from which the conﬂict was derived. Thus we could have chosen to backtrack more than one level, going back to just p1 in the trail and adding ¬p10 as a deduced clause. This is known as (non-chronological) backjumping. A simple version, just going back through the trail as far as possible while ensuring that the most recent decision p still leads to a conﬂict, can be implemented as follows: let rec backjump cls p trail = match backtrack trail with (q,Guessed)::tt -> let cls’,trail’ = unit_propagate (cls,(p,Guessed)::tt) in if mem [] cls’ then backjump cls p tt else trail | _ -> trail;;

2.9 The Davis–Putnam procedure

89

In the example above, a conﬂict arose via unit propagation from assuming just p1 and p10 even though there isn’t simply a clause ¬p1 ∨ ¬p10 in the initial clauses. Still, the fact that the simple combination of p1 and p10 leads to a conﬂict is useful information that could be retained in case it shortcuts later deductions. We can do this by adding a corresponding conﬂict clause ¬p1 ∨ ¬p10 , negating the conjunction of the decision literals in the trail. Adding such clauses to our problem is known as learning. For example, in the following version we perform backjumping and use the backjump trail to construct a conﬂict clause that is added to the problem. let rec dplb cls trail = let cls’,trail’ = unit_propagate (cls,trail) in if mem [] cls’ then match backtrack trail with (p,Guessed)::tt -> let trail’ = backjump cls p tt in let declits = filter (fun (_,d) -> d = Guessed) trail’ in let conflict = insert (negate p) (image (negate ** fst) declits) in dplb (conflict::cls) ((negate p,Deduced)::trail’) | _ -> false else match unassigned cls trail’ with [] -> true | ps -> let p = maximize (posneg_count cls’) ps in dplb cls ((p,Guessed)::trail’);;

Note that modifying cls in this way doesn’t break the essentially iterative structure of the code, since the conﬂict clause is a consequence of the input problem regardless of the temporary assignments and we will not need to reverse the modiﬁcation. We can turn dplb into satisﬁability and tautology tests as before: let dplbsat fm = dplb (defcnfs fm) [];; let dplbtaut fm = not(dplbsat(Not fm));;

For example, on this problem the use of backjumping and learning leads to about a 4X improvement: # dplitaut(prime 101);; # dplbtaut(prime 101);;

Of course, all our implementations were designed for clarity, and by using more eﬃcient data structures to represent clauses, as well as careful lowlevel programming, they can be made substantially more eﬃcient. It is also probably worth performing at least some selective subsumption to reduce

90

Propositional logic

the number of redundant clauses; more eﬃcient data structures can make this practical. Our implementation of backjumping was rather trivial, just skipping over a contiguous series of guesses in the trail. This can be further improved using a more sophisticated conﬂict analysis, working backwards from the conﬂict clause and ‘explaining’ how the conﬂict arose. Some SAT solvers even perform periodic restarts where the learned clauses are retained but the current branching abandoned, which can often be surprisingly beneﬁcial. Finally, the heuristics for picking literals in both DP and DPLL can be modiﬁed in various ways, and sometimes the particular choice can spectacularly aﬀect eﬃciency. For example, in DPLL, rather than pick the literal occurring most often, one can select one that occurs in the shortest clause, to maximize the chance of getting an additional unit clause out of the 1-literal rule and causing a cascade of simpliﬁcations without a further case-split. It is sometimes desirable that a SAT algorithm like DPLL should return not just a yes/no answer but some additional information. For example, if a formula is satisﬁable, we might like to know a satisfying assignment, e.g. to support its use within an SMT system (Section 5.13), and it is reasonably straightforward to modify any of our DPLL implementations to do so (Exercise 2.12). In the case of an unsatisﬁable formula, we might want a complete ‘proof’ in some sense of that unsatisﬁability, either to verify it more rigorously in case of a program bug, or to support other applications (McMillan 2003). A more modest requirement is for the system to return an unsat core, a ‘minimal’ subset of the initial clauses that are unsatisﬁable. Some current SAT solvers can do all this, producing an unsat core and also a proof, as a sequence of resolution steps, of the empty clause starting from those clauses (see Exercise 2.13).

2.10 St˚ almarck’s method The DPLL procedure and the naive tautology code both perform nested case-splits to explore the space of all valuations, although DPLL’s simpliﬁcation rules I and II often terminate paths without going through all possible combinations. By contrast, St˚ almarck’s method (St˚ almarck and S¨ aﬂund † tries to minimize the number of nested case-splits using a dilemma 1990) rule, which applies a case-split and garners common conclusions from the two branches. Suppose we have some basic ‘simple’ deduction rules R that generate certain logical consequences of a set of formulas. (We’ll specify these rules †

Note that St˚ almarck’s method is patented for commercial use (St˚ almarck 1994b).

2.10 St˚ almarck’s method

91

later, but most of the present general discussion is independent of the exact choice.) The dilemma rule based on R performs a case-split over some literal p, considering the new sets of formulas Δ ∪ {−p} and Δ ∪ {p}. To each of these it applies the simple rules R to yield sets of formulas Δ0 and Δ1 in the respective branches (we at least have −p ∈ Δ0 and p ∈ Δ1 ). If these have any common elements, then since they are consequences of both Δ ∪ {−p} and Δ ∪ {p}, they must be consequences of Δ alone, so we are justiﬁed in augmenting the original set of formulas with Δ0 ∩ Δ1 : Δ

Δ ∪ {–p}

Δ ∪ {p}

R

R

Δ ∪ Δ0

Δ ∪ Δ1

Δ ∪ ( Δ 0 ∩ Δ1 )

The process of applying the simple rules until no further progress is possible is referred to as 0-saturation and will be written S0 . Repeatedly applying the dilemma rule with simple rules S0 until no further progress is possible is 1-saturation and written S1 . Similarly, (n + 1)-saturation, Sn+1 , is the process of applying the dilemma rule with simple rules Sn . Roughly speaking, a formula’s satisﬁability is decidable by n-saturation if it is decidable by the primitive rules and at most n-deep nesting of case-splits. (Note that the dilemma rule may still be applied many times sequentially, but not necessarily in a deeply nested fashion.) A formula decidable by n-saturation is said to be n-easy, and if it is decidable by n-saturation but not (n−1)-saturation, it is said to be n-hard. Many practically signiﬁcant classes of problems turn out to be n-easy for quite moderate n, often just n = 1. This is quite appealing because (St˚ almarck 1994a) an n-easy formula with p connectives can be tested for satisﬁability in time proportional to O|p|2n+1 . Triplets We’ll present St˚ almarck’s method in its original setting, although the basic dilemma rule can also be incorporated into the same clausal framework as DPLL, as considered in Exercise 2.15 below. The formula to be tested for

92

Propositional logic

satisﬁability is ﬁrst reduced to a conjunction of ‘triplets’ li ⇔ lj ⊗ lk with the literals li representing subformulas of the original formula. We derive this as in the 3-CNF procedure from Section 2.8, introducing abbreviations for all nontrivial subformulas but omitting the ﬁnal CNF transformation of the triplets: let triplicate fm = let fm’ = nenf fm in let n = Int 1 +/ overatoms (max_varindex "p_" ** pname) fm’ (Int 0) in let (p,defs,_) = main (fm’,undefined,n) in p,map (snd ** snd) (graph defs);;

Simple rules Rather than deriving clauses, the rules in St˚ almarck’s method derive equivalences p ⇔ q where p and q are either literals or the formulas or ⊥.† The underlying ‘simple rules’ in St˚ almarck’s method enumerate the new equivalences that can be deduced from a triplet given some existing equivalences. For example, if we assume a triplet p ⇔ q ∧ r then: • • • • •

if if if if if

we we we we we

know know know know know

r ⇔ we can deduce p ⇔ q, p ⇔ we can deduce q ⇔ and r ⇔ , q ⇔ ⊥ we can deduce p ⇔ ⊥, q ⇔ r we can deduce p ⇔ q and p ⇔ r, p ⇔ ¬q we can deduce p ⇔ ⊥, q ⇔ and r ⇔ ⊥.

We’ll try to avoid deducing redundant sets of equivalences. To identify equivalences that are essentially the same (e.g. p ⇔ ¬q, ¬q ⇔ p and q ⇔ ¬p) we force alignment of each p ⇔ q such that the atom on the right is no bigger than the one on the left, and the one on the left is never negated: let atom lit = if negative lit then negate lit else lit;; let rec align (p,q) = if atom p < atom q then align (q,p) else if negative p then (negate p,negate q) else (p,q);;

Our representation of equivalence classes rests on the union-ﬁnd data structure from Appendix 2. The equate function described there merges two equivalence classes, but we will ensure that whenever p and q are to be identiﬁed, we also identify −p and −q: †

An older variant (St˚ almarck and S¨ aﬂund 1990) just accumulates unit clauses, but the use of equivalences is more powerful.

2.10 St˚ almarck’s method

93

let equate2 (p,q) eqv = equate (negate p,negate q) (equate (p,q) eqv);;

We’ll also ignore redundant equivalences, i.e. those that already follow from the existing equivalence, including the immediately trivial p ⇔ p:

let rec irredundant rel eqs = match eqs with [] -> [] | (p,q)::oth -> if canonize rel p = canonize rel q then irredundant rel oth else insert (p,q) (irredundant (equate2 (p,q) rel) oth);;

It would be tedious and error-prone to enumerate by hand all the ways in which equivalences follow from each other in the presence of a triplet, so we will deduce this information automatically. The following takes an assumed equivalence peq and triplet fm, together with a list of putative equivalences eqs. It returns an irredundant set of those equivalences from eqs that follow from peq and fm together:

let consequences (p,q as peq) fm eqs = let follows(r,s) = tautology(Imp(And(Iff(p,q),fm),Iff(r,s))) in irredundant (equate2 peq unequal) (filter follows eqs);;

To generate the entire list of ‘triggers’ generated by a triplet, i.e. a list of equivalences with their consequences, we just need to apply this function to each canonical equivalence:

let triggers fm = let poslits = insert True (map (fun p -> Atom p) (atoms fm)) in let lits = union poslits (map negate poslits) in let pairs = allpairs (fun p q -> p,q) lits lits in let npairs = filter (fun (p,q) -> atom p <> atom q) pairs in let eqs = setify(map align npairs) in let raw = map (fun p -> p,consequences p fm eqs) eqs in filter (fun (p,c) -> c <> []) raw;;

94

Propositional logic

For instance, we can conﬁrm and extend the examples noted above: # triggers <

(q /\ r)>>;; - : ((prop formula * prop formula) * (prop formula * prop formula) list) list = [((<

>, <<true>>), [(<>, <<true>>); (<>, <<true>>)]); ((<>, <<true>>), [(<>, <

>)]); ((<>, <<~true>>), [(<

>, <<~true>>)]); ((<>, <<~p>>), [(<

>, <<~true>>); (<>, <

>)]); ((<>, <<true>>), [(<>, <

>)]); ((<>, <>), [(<>, <

>)]); ((<>, <<~true>>), [(<

>, <<~true>>)]); ((<>, <<~p>>), [(<

>, <<~true>>); (<>, <

>)]); ((<>, <<~q>>), [(<

>, <<~true>>)])]

We could apply this to the actual triplets in the formula (indeed, it is applicable to any formula fm), but it’s more eﬃcient to precompute it for the possible forms p ⇔ q ∧ r, p ⇔ q ∨ r, p ⇔ q ⇒ r and p ⇔ (q ⇔ r) and then instantiate the results for each instance in question. However, after instantiation, we may need to realign, and also eliminate double negations if some of p, q and r are replaced by negative literals. let trigger = let [trig_and; trig_or; trig_imp; trig_iff] = map triggers [<

q /\ r>>; <

q \/ r>>; <

(q ==> r)>>; <

(q <=> r)>>] and ddnegate fm = match fm with Not(Not p) -> p | _ -> fm in let inst_fn [x;y;z] = let subfn = fpf [P"p"; P"q"; P"r"] [x; y; z] in ddnegate ** psubst subfn in let inst2_fn i (p,q) = align(inst_fn i p,inst_fn i q) in let instn_fn i (a,c) = inst2_fn i a,map (inst2_fn i) c in let inst_trigger = map ** instn_fn in function (Iff(x,And(y,z))) -> inst_trigger [x;y;z] trig_and | (Iff(x,Or(y,z))) -> inst_trigger [x;y;z] trig_or | (Iff(x,Imp(y,z))) -> inst_trigger [x;y;z] trig_imp | (Iff(x,Iff(y,z))) -> inst_trigger [x;y;z] trig_iff;;

0-saturation The core of St˚ almarck’s method is 0-saturation, i.e. the exhaustive application of the simple rules to derive new equivalences from existing ones. Given an equivalence, only triggers sharing some atoms with it could yield new

2.10 St˚ almarck’s method

95

information from it, so we set up a function mapping literals to relevant triggers:

let relevance trigs = let insert_relevant p trg f = (p |-> insert trg (tryapplyl f p)) f in let insert_relevant2 ((p,q),_ as trg) f = insert_relevant p trg (insert_relevant q trg f) in itlist insert_relevant2 trigs undefined;;

The principal 0-saturation function, equatecons, deﬁned below, derives new information from an equation p0 = q0, and in general modiﬁes both the equivalence relation eqv between literals and the ‘relevance’ function rfn. We maintain the invariant that the relevance function maps a literal l that is a canonical equivalence class representative to the set of triggers where the triggering equation contains some l equivalent to l under the equivalence relation. Initially, there are no non-trivial equations, so this collapses to the special case l = l, corresponding to the action of the relevance function. First of all, we get canonical representatives p and q for the two literals. If these are already the same then the equation p0 = q0 yields no new information and we return the original equivalence and relevance. Otherwise, we similarly canonize the negations of p0 and q0 to get p’ and q’, which we also need to identify. The equivalence relation is updated just by using equate2, but updating the relevance function is a bit more complicated. We get the set of triggers where the triggering equation involves something (originally) equivalent to p (sp pos) and p’ (sp neg), and similarly for q and q’. Now, the new equations we have eﬀectively introduced by identifying p and q are all those with something equivalent to p on one side and something equivalent to q on the other side, or equivalent to p’ and q’. These are collected as the set news. As for the new relevance function, we just collect the triggers componentwise from the two equivalence classes. This has to be indexed by the canonical representatives of the merged equivalence classes corresponding to p and p’, and we have to re-canonize these as we can’t a priori predict which of the two representatives that were formerly canonical will actually get chosen.

96

Propositional logic

let equatecons (p0,q0) (eqv,rfn as erf) = let p = canonize eqv p0 and q = canonize eqv q0 in if p = q then [],erf else let p’ = canonize eqv (negate p0) and q’ = canonize eqv (negate q0) in let eqv’ = equate2(p,q) eqv and sp_pos = tryapplyl rfn p and sp_neg = tryapplyl rfn p’ and sq_pos = tryapplyl rfn q and sq_neg = tryapplyl rfn q’ in let rfn’ = (canonize eqv’ p |-> union sp_pos sq_pos) ((canonize eqv’ p’ |-> union sp_neg sq_neg) rfn) in let nw = union (intersect sp_pos sq_pos) (intersect sp_neg sq_neg) in itlist (union ** snd) nw [],(eqv’,rfn’);;

Though this function was a bit involved, it’s now easy to perform 0-saturation, taking an existing equivalence-relevance pair and updating it with new equations assigs and all the consequences: let rec zero_saturate erf assigs = match assigs with [] -> erf | (p,q)::ts -> let news,erf’ = equatecons (p,q) erf in zero_saturate erf’ (union ts news);;

At some point, we would like to check whether a contradiction has been reached, i.e. some literal has become identiﬁed with its negation. The following function performs 0-saturation, then if a contradiction has been reached equates ‘true’ and ‘false’: let zero_saturate_and_check erf trigs = let (eqv’,rfn’ as erf’) = zero_saturate erf trigs in let vars = filter positive (equated eqv’) in if exists (fun x -> canonize eqv’ x = canonize eqv’ (Not x)) vars then snd(equatecons (True,Not True) erf’) else erf’;;

to allow a simple test later on when needed: let truefalse pfn = canonize pfn (Not True) = canonize pfn True;;

Higher saturation levels To implement higher levels of saturation, we need to be able to take the intersection of equivalence classes derived in two branches. We start with an auxiliary function to equate a whole set of elements:

2.10 St˚ almarck’s method

97

let rec equateset s0 eqfn = match s0 with a::(b::s2 as s1) -> equateset s1 (snd(equatecons (a,b) eqfn)) | _ -> eqfn;;

Now to intersect two equivalence classes eqv1 and eqv2, we repeatedly pick some literal x, ﬁnd its equivalence classes s1 and s2 w.r.t. each equivalence relation, intersect them to give s, and then identify that set of literals in the ‘output’ equivalence relation using equateset. Here rev1 and rev2 are reverse mappings from a canonical representative back to the equivalence class, and erf is an equivalence relation to be augmented with the new equalities resulting. let rec inter els (eq1,_ as erf1) (eq2,_ as erf2) rev1 rev2 erf = match els with [] -> erf | x::xs -> let b1 = canonize eq1 x and b2 = canonize eq2 x in let s1 = apply rev1 b1 and s2 = apply rev2 b2 in let s = intersect s1 s2 in inter (subtract xs s) erf1 erf2 rev1 rev2 (equateset s erf);;

We can obtain reversed equivalence class mappings thus: let reverseq domain eqv = let al = map (fun x -> x,canonize eqv x) domain in itlist (fun (y,x) f -> (x |-> insert y (tryapplyl f x)) f) al undefined;;

The overall intersection function can exploit the fact that if contradiction is detected in one branch, the other branch can be taken over in its entirety. let stal_intersect (eq1,_ as erf1) (eq2,_ as erf2) erf = if truefalse eq1 then erf2 else if truefalse eq2 then erf1 else let dom1 = equated eq1 and dom2 = equated eq2 in let comdom = intersect dom1 dom2 in let rev1 = reverseq dom1 eq1 and rev2 = reverseq dom2 eq2 in inter comdom erf1 erf2 rev1 rev2 erf;;

In n-saturation, we run through the variables, case-splitting over each in turn, (n − 1)-saturating the subequivalences and intersecting them. This is repeated until a contradiction is reached, when we can terminate, or no more information is derived, in which case the formula is not n-easy and a

98

Propositional logic

higher saturation level must be tried. The implementation uses two mutually recursive function: saturate takes new assignments, 0-saturates to derive new information from them, and repeatedly calls splits: let rec saturate n erf assigs allvars = let (eqv’,_ as erf’) = zero_saturate_and_check erf assigs in if n = 0 or truefalse eqv’ then erf’ else let (eqv’’,_ as erf’’) = splits n erf’ allvars allvars in if eqv’’ = eqv’ then erf’’ else saturate n erf’’ [] allvars

which in turn runs splits over each variable in turn, performing (n − 1)saturations and intersecting the results: and splits n (eqv,_ as erf) allvars vars = match vars with [] -> erf | p::ovars -> if canonize eqv p <> p then splits n erf allvars ovars else let erf0 = saturate (n - 1) erf [p,Not True] allvars and erf1 = saturate (n - 1) erf [p,True] allvars in let (eqv’,_ as erf’) = stal_intersect erf0 erf1 erf in if truefalse eqv’ then erf’ else splits n erf’ allvars ovars;;

Top-level function We are now ready to implement a tautology prover based on St˚ almarck’s method. The main loop saturates up to a limit, with progress indications: let rec saturate_upto vars n m trigs assigs = if n > m then failwith("Not "^(string_of_int m)^"-easy") else (print_string("*** Starting "^(string_of_int n)^"-saturation"); print_newline(); let (eqv,_) = saturate n (unequal,relevance trigs) assigs vars in truefalse eqv or saturate_upto vars (n + 1) m trigs assigs);;

The top-level function transforms the negated input formula into triplets, sets the entire formula equal to True and saturates. The triggers are collected together initially in a triggering function, which is then converted to a set: let stalmarck fm = let include_trig (e,cqs) f = (e |-> union cqs (tryapplyl f e)) f in let fm’ = psimplify(Not fm) in if fm’ = False then true else if fm’ = True then false else let p,triplets = triplicate fm’ in let trigfn = itlist (itlist include_trig ** trigger) triplets undefined and vars = map (fun p -> Atom p) (unions(map atoms triplets)) in saturate_upto vars 0 2 (graph trigfn) [p,True];;

2.11 Binary decision diagrams

99

The procedure is quite eﬀective in many cases; in particular for instances of mk_adder_test it degrades much more gracefully with size than dplltaut # stalmarck (mk_adder_test 6 3);; *** Starting 0-saturation *** Starting 1-saturation *** Starting 2-saturation - : bool = true

Since we only saturate up to a limit of 2, we can’t conclude from the failure of stalmarck that a formula is not a tautology (this is why we make it fail rather than returning false). It’s not hard to see that a formula with n atoms is n-easy, so it could easily be made complete. However, for nontautologies, DPLL seems more eﬀective, so some kind of combined algorithm may be appropriate, using saturation as well as DPLL-style splitting.

2.11 Binary decision diagrams 2n

Consider the valuations of atoms p1 , . . . , pn as paths through a binary tree labelled with atomic formulas. Starting at the root, we take the left (solid) path from a node labelled with p if v(p) = true and the right (dotted) path if v(p) = false, and proceed similarly for the other atoms. For a given formula, we can label the leaves of the tree with ‘T’ if the formula holds in that valuation and ‘F’ otherwise, giving another presentation of its truth table, or the trace of the calls of onallvaluations hidden inside tautology. For the formula p ∧ q ⇒ q ∧ r we might get: p

q

q

r

T

r

F

T

r

T

T

r

T

T

T

We can simplify such a binary decision tree in two ways: • replace any nodes with the same subtree to the left and right by that subtree;

100

Propositional logic

• share any common subtrees, creating a directed acyclic graph. Such a reduced graph representation of a Boolean function is called a binary decision diagram (Lee 1959; Akers 1978), or if a ﬁxed order of the atoms is used in all subtrees, a reduced ordered binary decision diagram (Bryant 1986). The reduced ordered binary decision diagram arising from the formula p ∧ q ⇒ q ∧ r, using alphabetical ordering of variables, can be represented as follows, using dotted lines to indicate a ‘false’ branch whether we show it to the left or right: p

q

r

T

F

The use of a ﬁxed variable ordering is now usual, and when people talk about binary decision diagrams (BDDs), they normally mean the reduced ordered kind. A ﬁxed ordering tends to maximize sharing, and it turns out that many important Boolean functions, such as those corresponding to adders and other digital hardware components, have fairly compact ordered BDD representations. Another appealing feature not shared by unordered BDDs (even if they are reduced) is that, given a particular variable ordering, there is a unique BDD representation for any function. This means that testing equivalence of two Boolean expressions represented as BDDs (with the same variable order) simply amounts to checking graph isomorphism. In particular, a formula is a tautology iﬀ its BDD representation is the single node ‘T’. Complement edges Since Bryant’s introduction of the BDD representation, the basic idea has been reﬁned and extended in many ways. The use of complement edges (Madre and Billon 1988; Brace, Rudell and Bryant 1990) seems worth incorporating into our implementation, since the basic operations can be made

2.11 Binary decision diagrams

101

more eﬃcient and in many ways simpler. The idea is to allow each edge of the BDD graph to carry a tag, usually denoted by a small black circle in pictures, indicating the complementation (logical negation) of the subgraph it points to. With this representation, negating a BDD now takes constant time: one simply needs to ﬂip its top tag. Furthermore, greater sharing is achieved because a graph and its complement can be shared; only the edges pointing into it need diﬀer. In particular we only need one terminal node, which we choose (arbitrarily) to be ‘true’, with ‘false’ represented by a complement edge into it. Complement edges do create one small problem: without some extra constraints, canonicality is lost. This is illustrated below: each of the four BDDs at the top is equivalent to the one below it. This ambiguity is (arbitrarily) resolved by ensuring that whenever we construct a BDD node, we transform between such equivalent pairs to ensure that the ‘true’ branch is uncomplemented, i.e. always replace any node listed on the top row by its corresponding node on the bottom row.

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

Implementation Our OCaml representation of a BDD graph works by associating an integer index with each node.† Complementation is indicated by negating the node index, and since −0 = 0 we don’t use 0 as an index. Index 1 is reserved for the ‘true’ node, and hence −1 for ‘false’; other nodes are allocated indices n with |n| ≥ 2. A BDD node itself is then just a propositional variable together with the ‘left’ and ‘right’ node indices: type bddnode = prop * int * int;; †

All the code in this book is written in a purely functional subset of OCaml. It’s tempting to implement BDDs imperatively: sharing could be implemented more directly using references as pointers, and we wouldn’t need the messy threading of global tables through various functions. However, the purely functional style is more convenient for experimentation so we will stick with it.

102

Propositional logic

The BDD graph is essentially just the association between BDD nodes and their integer indices, implemented as a ﬁnite partial function in each direction. But the data structure also stores the smallest (positive) unused node index and the ordering on atoms used in the graph: type bdd = Bdd of ((bddnode,int)func * (int,bddnode)func * int) * (prop->prop->bool);;

We don’t print the internal structure of a BDD, just a size indication: let print_bdd (Bdd((unique,uback,n),ord)) = print_string ("");; #install_printer print_bdd;;

To pass from an index to the corresponding node, we just apply the ‘expansion’ function in the data structure, negating appropriately to deal with complementation. For indices without an expansion, e.g. the terminal nodes 1 and −1, a trivial atom and two equivalent children are returned, since this makes some later code more regular. let expand_node (Bdd((_,expand,_),_)) n = if n >= 0 then tryapplyd expand n (P"",1,1) else let (p,l,r) = tryapplyd expand (-n) (P"",1,1) in (p,-l,-r);;

Before any new node is added to the BDD, we check whether there is already such a node present, by looking it up using the function from nodes to indices. (Because its role is to ensure a single occurrence of each node in the graph, that function is traditionally called the unique table.) Otherwise a new node is added; in either case the (possibly modiﬁed) BDD and the ﬁnal node index are returned: let lookup_unique (Bdd((unique,expand,n),ord) as bdd) node = try bdd,apply unique node with Failure _ -> Bdd(((node|->n) unique,(n|->node) expand,n+1),ord),n;;

The core ‘make a new BDD node’ function ﬁrst checks whether the two subnodes are identical, and if so returns one them together with an unchanged BDD. Otherwise it inserts a new node in the table, taking care to maintain an unnegated left subnode for canonicality. let mk_node bdd (s,l,r) = if l = r then bdd,l else if l >= 0 then lookup_unique bdd (s,l,r) else let bdd’,n = lookup_unique bdd (s,-l,-r) in bdd’,-n;;

2.11 Binary decision diagrams

103

To get started, we want to be able to create a trivial BDD structure, with a user-speciﬁed ordering of the propositional variables: let mk_bdd ord = Bdd((undefined,undefined,2),ord);;

The following function extracts the ordering from a BDD, treating the trivial variable as special so we can sometimes treat terminal nodes uniformly: let order (Bdd(_,ord)) p1 p2 = (p2 = P"" & p1 <> P"") or ord p1 p2;;

The BDD representation of a formula is constructed bottom-up. For example, to create a BDD for a formula p∧q, we ﬁrst create BDDs for p and q and then combine them appropriately by a function bdd_and. In order to avoid repeating work, we maintain a second function called the ‘computed table’ that stores previously computed results from bdd_and.† For updating the various tables, the following is convenient: it’s similar to g(f1 x2,f2 x2) but with all the functions f1, f2 and g also taking and returning some ‘state’ that we want to successively update through the evaluation: let thread s g (f1,x1) (f2,x2) = let s’,y1 = f1 s x1 in let s’’,y2 = f2 s’ x2 in g s’’ (y1,y2);;

To implement conjunction of BDDs, we ﬁrst consider the trivial cases where one of the BDDs is ‘false’ or ‘true’, in which case we return ‘false’ and the other BDD respectively. We also check whether the result has already been computed; since conjunction is commutative, we can equally well accept an entry with the arguments either way round. Otherwise, both BDDs are branches. In general, however, they may not branch on the same variable – although the order of variables is the same, many choices may be (and we hope are) omitted because of sharing. If the variables are the same, then we recursively deal with the left and right pairs, then create a new node. Otherwise, we pick the variable that comes ﬁrst in the ordering and consider its two sides, but the other side is, at this level, not broken down. Note that at the end, we update the computed table with the new information. †

The unique table is essential for canonicality, but the computed table is purely an eﬃciency optimization, and we could do without it, at a sometimes considerable performance cost.

104

Propositional logic

let rec bdd_and (bdd,comp as bddcomp) (m1,m2) = if m1 = -1 or m2 = -1 then bddcomp,-1 else if m1 = 1 then bddcomp,m2 else if m2 = 1 then bddcomp,m1 else try bddcomp,apply comp (m1,m2) with Failure _ -> try bddcomp,apply comp (m2,m1) with Failure _ -> let (p1,l1,r1) = expand_node bdd m1 and (p2,l2,r2) = expand_node bdd m2 in let (p,lpair,rpair) = if p1 = p2 then p1,(l1,l2),(r1,r2) else if order bdd p1 p2 then p1,(l1,m2),(r1,m2) else p2,(m1,l2),(m1,r2) in let (bdd’,comp’),(lnew,rnew) = thread bddcomp (fun s z -> s,z) (bdd_and,lpair) (bdd_and,rpair) in let bdd’’,n = mk_node bdd’ (p,lnew,rnew) in (bdd’’,((m1,m2) |-> n) comp’),n;;

We can use this to implement all the other binary connectives on BDDs: let bdd_or bdc (m1,m2) = let bdc1,n = bdd_and bdc (-m1,-m2) in bdc1,-n;; let bdd_imp bdc (m1,m2) = bdd_or bdc (-m1,m2);; let bdd_iff bdc (m1,m2) = thread bdc bdd_or (bdd_and,(m1,m2)) (bdd_and,(-m1,-m2));;

Now to construct a BDD for an arbitrary formula, we recurse over its structure; for the binary connectives we produce BDDs for the two subformulas then combine them appropriately: let rec mkbdd (bdd,comp as bddcomp) fm = match fm with False -> bddcomp,-1 | True -> bddcomp,1 | Atom(s) -> let bdd’,n = mk_node bdd (s,1,-1) in (bdd’,comp),n | Not(p) -> let bddcomp’,n = mkbdd bddcomp p in bddcomp’,-n | And(p,q) -> thread bddcomp bdd_and (mkbdd,p) (mkbdd,q) | Or(p,q) -> thread bddcomp bdd_or (mkbdd,p) (mkbdd,q) | Imp(p,q) -> thread bddcomp bdd_imp (mkbdd,p) (mkbdd,q) | Iff(p,q) -> thread bddcomp bdd_iff (mkbdd,p) (mkbdd,q);;

This can now be made into a tautology-checker simply by creating a BDD for a formula and comparing the overall node index against the index for ‘true’. We just use the default OCaml ordering ‘<’ on variables: let bddtaut fm = snd(mkbdd (mk_bdd (<),undefined) fm) = 1;;

2.11 Binary decision diagrams

105

Exploiting deﬁnitions The tautology checker bddtaut performs quite well on some examples; for example it works markedly faster than dplltaut here: # bddtaut (mk_adder_test 4 2);; - : bool = true

However, it’s relatively ineﬃcient on larger formulas of the same kind, such as mk_adder_test 9 5. These formulas, as a result of the way they were created, use ‘deﬁnitions’ of the form xi ⇔ Ei occurring positively in the antecedent of an implication, or the body of a negated formula. We can break down the overall formula uniformly, regarding ¬p as p ⇒ ⊥: let dest_nimp fm = match fm with Not(p) -> p,False | _ -> dest_imp fm;;

The ‘deﬁned’ variables are used to express sharing of common subexpressions within a propositional formula via equivalences x ⇔ E, just as they were in the construction of deﬁnitional CNF. However, since a BDD structure already shares common subexpressions, we’d rather exclude the variable x and replace it by the BDD for E wherever it appears elsewhere. The following breaks down a deﬁnition: let rec dest_iffdef fm = match fm with Iff(Atom(x),r) | Iff(r,Atom(x)) -> x,r | _ -> failwith "not a defining equivalence";;

However, we can’t treat any conjunction of suitable formulas as a sequence of deﬁnitions, because they might be cyclic, e.g. (x ⇔ y ∧ r) ∧ (y ⇔ x ∨ s). In order to change our mind and put a deﬁnition x ⇔ e back as an antecedent to the formula, we use: let restore_iffdef (x,e) fm = Imp(Iff(Atom(x),e),fm);;

We then try to organize the deﬁnitions into an acyclic dependency order by repeatedly picking out one x ⇔ e that is suitable, meaning that no other atom potentially ‘deﬁned’ later occurs in e: let suitable_iffdef defs (x,q) = let fvs = atoms q in not (exists (fun (x’,_) -> mem x’ fvs) defs);;

The main code for sorting deﬁnitions is recursive. The list acc holds the deﬁnitions already processed into a suitable order, defs is the unprocessed deﬁnitions and fm is the main formula. The code looks for a deﬁnition x ⇔ e

106

Propositional logic

that is suitable, adds it to acc and moves any other deﬁnitions x ⇔ e from defs back into the formula. Should no suitable deﬁnition be found, all remaining deﬁnitions are put back into the formula and the processed list is reversed so that the earliest items in the dependency order occur ﬁrst: let rec sort_defs acc defs fm = try let (x,e) = find (suitable_iffdef defs) defs in let ps,nonps = partition (fun (x’,_) -> x’ = x) defs in let ps’ = subtract ps [x,e] in sort_defs ((x,e)::acc) nonps (itlist restore_iffdef ps’ fm) with Failure _ -> rev acc,itlist restore_iffdef defs fm;;

The BDD for a formula will be constructed as before, but each atom will ﬁrst be looked up using a ‘subfunction’ sfn to see if it is already considered just a shorthand for another BDD: let rec mkbdde sfn (bdd,comp as bddcomp) fm = match fm with False -> bddcomp,-1 | True -> bddcomp,1 | Atom(s) -> (try bddcomp,apply sfn s with Failure _ -> let bdd’,n = mk_node bdd (s,1,-1) in (bdd’,comp),n) | Not(p) -> let bddcomp’,n = mkbdde sfn bddcomp p in bddcomp’,-n | And(p,q) -> thread bddcomp bdd_and (mkbdde sfn,p) (mkbdde sfn,q) | Or(p,q) -> thread bddcomp bdd_or (mkbdde sfn,p) (mkbdde sfn,q) | Imp(p,q) -> thread bddcomp bdd_imp (mkbdde sfn,p) (mkbdde sfn,q) | Iff(p,q) -> thread bddcomp bdd_iff (mkbdde sfn,p) (mkbdde sfn,q);;

We now create the BDD for a series of deﬁnitions and ﬁnal formula by successively forming BDDs for the deﬁnitions, including those into the subfunction sfn and recursing, forming the BDD for the formula when all definitions have been used: let rec mkbdds sfn bdd defs fm = match defs with [] -> mkbdde sfn bdd fm | (p,e)::odefs -> let bdd’,b = mkbdde sfn bdd e in mkbdds ((p |-> b) sfn) bdd’ odefs fm;;

For the overall tautology checker, we break the formula into deﬁnitions and a main formula, sort the deﬁnitions into dependency order, and then call mkbdds before testing at the end: let ebddtaut fm = let l,r = try dest_nimp fm with Failure _ -> True,fm in let eqs,noneqs = partition (can dest_iffdef) (conjuncts l) in let defs,fm’ = sort_defs [] (map dest_iffdef eqs) (itlist mk_imp noneqs r) in snd(mkbdds undefined (mk_bdd (<),undefined) defs fm’) = 1;;

2.12 Compactness

107

This is substantially more eﬃcient on many of the examples that were barely feasible before: # # -

ebddtaut : bool = ebddtaut : bool =

(prime 101);; true (mk_adder_test 9 5);; true

However, there are many other optimizations worthy of note. In particular, our naive choice of the default alphabetical variable order has little to recommend it. For circuit examples, variable orders reﬂecting the topology are often eﬀective (Malik, Wang, Brayton and Sangiovanni-Vincentelli 1988). However, there is no feasible algorithm for arriving at the best variable ordering, and in fact many available BDD packages automatically try reordering variables partway through the BDD construction. Indeed, for certain classes of formulas, the BDD representation has exponential size whatever variable ordering is used, e.g. those involving multipliers (Bryant 1986) or the ‘hidden weighted bit’ function (Bryant 1991). We should emphasize that BDDs are not simply a path to tautology or satisﬁability checking, but an alternative representation for propositional formulas. This gives them a useful role in various methods for formal veriﬁcation such as symbolic simulation (Bryant 1985), symbolic trajectory evaluation (Seger and Bryant 1995) and temporal logic model checking (Burch, Clarke, McMillan, Dill and Hwang 1992), where their canonical nature is particularly appropriate.

2.12 Compactness We now establish a key theoretical property of propositional logic, used essentially in the next chapter, concerning the satisﬁability of an inﬁnite set of formulas. Recall that a set Γ of propositional formulas is said to be satisﬁable if there is a valuation that simultaneously satisﬁes them all. The compactness theorem† states: †

The name comes from a link with point-set topology (Engelking 1989; Kelley 1975). Give the set of all valuations BN , where B = {false, true}, the product topology based on the discrete topology for B. (This is sometimes called Cantor space.) For any formula p, the set Vp of valuations satisfying it is closed (in fact open too) in this topology because each formula only involves ﬁnitely many propositional variables. Since B is compact, so is BN by Tychonoﬀ’s theorem. By hypothesis, all ﬁnite intersections from the set {Vp | p ∈ Γ} are nonempty, and so by deﬁnition of compactness, the intersection of all of them is nonempty, as required. Assuming the Axiom of Choice, Tychonoﬀ’s theorem holds if N is replaced by any set of atoms, giving a proof of the compactness theorem in the general case.

108

Propositional logic

Theorem 2.13 For any set Γ of propositional formulas, if each ﬁnite subset Δ ⊆ Γ is satisﬁable, then Γ itself is satisﬁable. Proof We will assume that the set of atoms is countable, and enumerate them in some way p1 , p2 , . . . This is suﬃcient for all the applications to automated reasoning, and requires less mathematical machinery. The method of proof is to produce a valuation v that satisﬁes Γ by considering the atoms in sequence and choosing appropriate v(p1 ), v(p2 ), . . . one at a time. First we will show that if there are truth values t1 , t2 , . . . , tn such that every ﬁnite Δ ⊆ Γ is satisﬁable by a valuation v with v(p1 ) = t1 , . . . , v(pn ) = tn then there is a truth-value tn+1 such that every ﬁnite Δ ⊆ Γ is satisﬁable by a valuation v with v(p1 ) = t1 , . . . , v(pn+1 ) = tn+1 . For suppose not. Then setting tn+1 = false doesn’t work, so there’s some ﬁnite Δ0 ⊆ Γ not satisﬁable by any valuation v with v(p1 ) = t1 , . . . , v(pn ) = tn , v(pn+1 ) = false. Similarly, setting tn+1 = true doesn’t work so there’s some ﬁnite Δ1 ⊆ Γ not satisﬁable by any valuation v with v(p1 ) = t1 , . . . , v(pn ) = tn , v(pn+1 ) = true. Therefore the set Δ0 ∪ Δ1 is not satisﬁable by any valuation v with v(p1 ) = t1 , . . . , v(pn ) = tn since any such valuation must either set v(pn+1 ) = false, in which case it fails to satisfy Δ0 , or v(pn+1 ) = true in which case it fails to satisfy Δ1 . However since Δ0 ∪ Δ1 is the union of two ﬁnite sets, it is also ﬁnite, contradicting the assumption. Therefore we can deﬁne an inﬁnite sequence of truth values (ti ) by recursion with the property that for any n ∈ N, any ﬁnite Δ ⊆ Γ is satisﬁable by a valuation v with v(p1 ) = t1 , . . . , v(pn ) = tn , and this deﬁnes a valuation by v(pn ) = tn . We claim v satisﬁes Γ, i.e. satisﬁes every formula p ∈ Γ. For any such p, since the number of atoms in p is ﬁnite, we can ﬁnd some N so that each pn occurring in p has n ≤ N . But by construction all ﬁnite subsets of Γ, in particular {p}, are satisﬁable by a valuation w where w(pn ) = tn = v(pn ) for n ≤ N . Since assignments to variables not in p are irrelevant, this shows that p is indeed satisﬁed by v as required. Corollary 2.14 If an arbitrary set Γ of propositional formulas is unsatisﬁable, then some ﬁnite subset Δ ⊆ Γ is unsatisﬁable. Proof Suppose instead that every ﬁnite subset Δ ⊆ Γ were satisﬁable. By the compactness theorem, Γ is satisﬁable, contradicting the hypothesis. Corollary 2.15 If a set Γ of formulas is such that for any valuation v there is some p ∈ Γ that is satisﬁed by v, then there is a ﬁnite disjunction of pi ∈ Γ, say p1 ∨ · · · ∨ pn , that is a tautology.

2.12 Compactness

109

Proof Let Γ = {¬p | p ∈ Γ}. Since every valuation satisﬁes some p ∈ Γ it must fail to satisfy the corresponding ¬p ∈ Γ. Hence Γ is unsatisﬁable. By the previous corollary, some ﬁnite subset {¬p1 , . . . , ¬pn } is unsatisﬁable. However by deﬁnition, a valuation satisﬁes this set precisely if it satisﬁes the conjunction ¬p1 ∧ · · · ∧ ¬pn , and so this formula is unsatisﬁable. Hence its negation ¬(¬p1 ∧ · · · ∧ ¬pn ) is a tautology, and by the De Morgan laws this is logically equivalent to p1 ∨ · · · ∨ pn . In the next chapter, we will apply the Compactness Theorem to automated theorem proving. However, perhaps it’s interesting to see a direct mathematical application. Readers may skip the remainder of this section without impairing their understanding of the rest of the book.

Colouring inﬁnite graphs How many diﬀerent colours are needed to colour the regions on a map so that no two regions sharing a border have the same colour? (These ‘regions’ might be countries, states, counties, etc. depending on the map.) The following map needs at least four: a d c

b

Remarkably, four colours are enough for any map. (We assume no region is split into two disconnected pieces, and ignore common borders consisting of just a point.) This was ﬁrst conjectured by the map-maker Francis Guthrie who had been colouring the counties on a map of England. De Morgan (of the De Morgan laws) communicated the problem to other leading mathematicians. The ﬁrst ‘proof’ was published by Kempe (1879), but rather later Heawood (1890) showed that it was ﬂawed, and only proves that ﬁve colours suﬃce. The conjecture remained open for almost a century until it was proved by Appel and Haken (1976) using a reﬁnement of Kempe’s original argument supported by extensive computer checking of particular conﬁgurations. The fact that important parts of the proof were delegated to a computer has caused controversy ever since (Lam 1990), though recent work by Gonthier (2005) on a thoroughgoing formalization may have helped to dispel some worries.

110

Propositional logic

First, let us formulate the result in a more mathematical way, ignoring inessential details like the shapes of regions and making clear that we are considering maps drawn on a plane rather than, say, the surface of a torus (where as many as seven colours may be needed). We consider the map as a graph where the regions are represented by vertices V and those sharing a common border are connected by an edge. We will consider the edges as binary relations, with E(a, b) meaning ‘there is an edge between a and b’. E is irreﬂexive, i.e. it is never the case that E(a, a), and symmetric, i.e. E(a, b) iﬀ E(b, a). A graph is said to be planar if there is a mapping f : V → R2 of vertices to points in the Euclidean plane so that paths can be drawn between each pair (f (a), f (b)) where E(a, b) such that no two distinct paths touch except at the vertices, i.e. it can be drawn on a plane without edges crossing. By a k-colouring of a graph, we mean a mapping C : V → {1, . . . , k} assigning to each vertex one of k distinct ‘colours’. We say that a graph is k-colourable if an assignment C of k colours can be made such that whenever E(x, y) then C(x) = C(y), i.e. no connected vertices have the same colour. In this guise, the 4-colour theorem can be stated as follows: Theorem 2.16 Every planar graph with a ﬁnite number of vertices is 4colourable. Proof Too complex to be given. See Appel and Haken (1976) for a brief account of the original proof, and Robertson, Sanders, Seymour and Thomas (1996) for a simpler proof. Given any particular graph, we can formulate 4-colourability as a propositional satisﬁability problem on a set of atoms {piv | v ∈ V ∧ i ∈ {1, 2, 3, 4}} representing the assignment of colour i to vertex v. To encode the assertion that the assignment of colours is indeed a valid colouring, we need three things. • Every vertex has some colour. This can be represented by the formulas {p1v ∨ p2v ∨ p3v ∨ p4v | v ∈ V }. • No vertex has more than one colour. This can be represented by the formulas {¬(p1v ∧ p2v ) ∧ ¬(p1v ∧ p3v ) ∧ ¬(p1v ∧ p4v ) ∧ ¬(p2v ∧ p3v ) ∧ ¬(p2v ∧ p4v ) ∧ ¬(p3v ∧ p4v ) | v ∈ V }. • Two vertices connected by an edge do not have the same colour. This can be represented by the formulas {¬(p1a ∧ p1b ) ∧ ¬(p2a ∧ p2b ) ∧ ¬(p3a ∧ p3b ) ∧ ¬(p4a ∧ p4b ) | E(a, b)}.

Further reading

111

We claim that the graph is 4-colourable precisely if the set of all these formulas together, say Γ, is satisﬁable. In fact, given a colouring C : V → {1, . . . , 4}, create a corresponding valuation v where v(piv ) = true precisely when C(v) = i. Note that C is a valid colouring precisely when the set of formulas is satisﬁed by v. We can now apply the compactness theorem to deduce that the 4-colour theorem remains true even for inﬁnite graphs. Consider any ﬁnite subset Δ of Γ. This ﬁnite collection of formulas can only involve ﬁnitely many propositional variables piv and hence only ﬁnitely many v, say some ﬁnite subset V ⊆ V . Consider the subgraph based on the vertex set V , i.e. restrict the edges to E (x, y) meaning E(x, y) and x ∈ V , y ∈ V . Create the corresponding ﬁnite set of formulas Γ . By the 4-colour theorem this is satisﬁable, and clearly includes Δ. Therefore by the compactness theorem, the whole set Γ is satisﬁable and so the entire graph, even if inﬁnite, is 4-colourable. Thanks to the formulation of colourability in terms of propositional satisﬁability, the proof based on compactness was relatively simple. It easily generalizes to prove that if every ﬁnite subset of a graph is k-colourable, so is the whole graph, as was originally proved by de Bruijn (1951) using a more direct argument. Dually, by formulating certain properties as propositional tautologies, we can sometimes deduce a ﬁnite version of a theorem from an inﬁnite one – see Exercise 2.22.

Further reading For the general theory of Boolean algebra, which includes propositional, set-theoretic and other interpretations of Boole’s original system, see for example Abian (1976), Davey and Priestley (1990) and Halmos (1963). There are discussions of Boolean algebras in many logic textbooks such as Bell and Slomson (1969), some of which we will recommend later for other technical topics. Finally, Halmos and Givant (1998) treats logic in the modern way but adopts a more explicitly algebraic style. Propositional logic is covered in many standard logic texts, e.g. Church (1956), van Dalen (1994), Enderton (1972), Goodstein (1971), Hilbert and Ackermann (1950), Hodges (1977), Johnstone (1987), Kreisel and Krivine (1971), Mates (1972), Quine (1950) and Tarski (1941); many of these also prove the compactness theorem. Most books on automated theorem proving also discuss propositional logic and classical decision methods such as Davis– Putnam, though often spend little time on propositional logic before moving on to ﬁrst-order logic (our next chapter). Davis, Sigal and Weyuker (1994)

112

Propositional logic

is a combination of theoretical logic with automated theorem proving, as well as being a textbook on computability and complexity. More focused on automated theorem proving are Bibel (1987), Chang and Lee (1973), Duﬀy (1991), Fitting (1990), Loveland (1978), Newborn (2001) and Wos, Overbeek, Lusk and Boyle (1992). Backjumping and learning were ﬁrst used in DPLL in the SAT solvers GRASP (Marques-Silva and Sakallah 1996) and rel sat (Bayardo and Schrag 1997). Some more recent DPLL-based systems, in approximately chronological order of development, are SATO (Zhang 1997), Chaﬀ (Moskewicz, Madigan, Zhao, Zhang and Malik 2001), BerkMin (Goldberg and Novikov 2002) and MiniSat (Een and S¨ orensson 2003). The papers describing these systems are a valuable source of information about both the fundamental DPLL algorithm versions and the clever implementation tricks. Nieuwenhuis, Oliveras and Tinelli (2006) and Krsti´c and Goel (2007) describe iterative DPLL by a nondeterministic sequence of abstract rules, so that particular implementations can be seen as ways of deploying these rules. Kroening and Strichman (2008) also discuss the architectures of ‘industrialstrength’ SAT solvers, as well as discussing numerous extensions of propositional logic and how they are used in applications. Some of these topics will be discussed later in this book, but some will not, notably quantiﬁed Boolean formulas (QBF), where formulas may be quantiﬁed over the atoms. (This is diﬀerent from ﬁrst-order logic described in the next chapter where quantiﬁcation is over elements of the domain, not propositions.) Some of the topics we have discussed are not (yet) widely covered in general textbooks and the reader must consult more specialist monographs or research papers. This is notably the case for St˚ almarck’s algorithm, though a survey of the theory and its successful practical applications is given by Sheeran and St˚ almarck (2000). The idea of recursive learning (Kunz and Pradhan 1994) shares important ideas with St˚ almarck’s method. The survey article by Bryant (1992) and the textbook by Kropf (1999) discuss BDDs and their role in automated methods for formal hardware veriﬁcation. Most strikingly, temporal logic model checking (Clarke and Emerson 1981; Queille and Sifakis 1982) underwent a minor revolution when McMillan and others (Coudert, Berthet and Madre 1989; Burch, Clarke, McMillan, Dill and Hwang 1992; Pixley 1990) married them with a BDD representation.† For a detailed introduction to model checking, see Clarke, Grumberg

†

However, there has recently been interest in approaches using other, non-canonical, representations (Bjesse 1999; Abdulla, Bjesse and E´en 2000) as well as pure SAT solving (Biere, Cimatti, Clarke and Zhu 1999; McMillan 2003).

Exercises

113

and Peled (1999), as well as some books on logic in computer science like Huth and Ryan (1999). Propositional satisﬁability can be reduced to linear integer arithmetic, interpreting 0 as false and 1 as true and mapping each propositional atom p to a variable vp with a constraint 0 ≤ vp ≤ 1. Now, for example, p ∨ ¬q ∨ r holds if vp + (1 − vq ) + vr ≥ 1. Thus we can convert satisﬁability for a propositional formula in clausal form into an integer arithmetic problem consisting of a conjunction of such inequalities. See Hooker (1988) for more on this kind of technique, which is radically diﬀerent from those algorithms we have considered.

Exercises 2.1

2.2

2.3

2.4

Implement a function to generate all propositional formulas with a given number of symbols (measuring either the number of nodes in the abstract syntax tree or some standard linear form). Plot the proportion of such formulas that are tautologies or contradictions against the size. Can you generate results for large enough lengths to see a trend? Is the trend as expected? Prove the following nice result in equivalential logic due to Le´sniewski (1929). We remarked that features of logical equivalence ‘⇔’ such as associativity often seem peculiar because we are not accustomed to thinking of propositional functions. Show in fact that a propositional formula involving only atoms, ‘’ and ‘⇔’ is a tautology iﬀ each atom occurs an even number of times. Show that if ‘¬’ is also allowed, a formula is a tautology iﬀ each atom occurs an even number of times and the negation operator appears an even number of times. Prove this elegant result from Post (1941); see Goodstein (1971) for an easier proof and further generalizations. We showed earlier that all truth-functions can be generated from the binary operations ‘NAND’ and ‘NOR’, i.e. either variant of the ‘Sheﬀer stroke’. More generally, call an n-ary truth-function f : {0, 1}n → {0, 1} a Sheﬀer function if all truth-functions can be generated from it alone. Show that f is a Sheﬀer function iﬀ (i) for all p we have f (p, p, . . . , p) = ¬p and (ii) for some p1 , . . . , pn we have f (¬p1 , . . . , ¬pn ) = ¬f (p1 , . . . , pn ). Implement an algorithm to generate all n-ary Sheﬀer functions for a given n. Implement another algorithm that takes a basic propositional function, perhaps speciﬁed by a formula, and a second formula p, and expresses p in terms of the basic function if possible, or fails if not.

114

2.5 2.6

2.7

Propositional logic

Prove the key duality result eval (dual p) v = not(eval p (not ◦ v)) by a formal induction on formulas. Show that applying our nnf function to a right-associated chain of equivalences p1 ⇔ p2 ⇔ · · · ⇔ pn results in a formula with An atoms (and therefore An − 1 binary connectives) where A1 = 1 and for n ≥ 1 we have An+1 = 2(An + 1). Show that this is the worst possible result for any starting formula with n atoms. We can avoid the potentially exponential duplication of work when transforming a formula to NNF by the trick of returning for a formula p two NNF formulas, one equivalent to p and the other equivalent to ¬p. Write a direct recursive OCaml implementation of such a function, nnfp, whose runtime is linear in the size of the formula. For example, the clause for an equivalence Iff(p,q) might be: let p’,p’’ = nnfp p and q’,q’’ = nnfp q in Or(And(p’,q’),And(p’’,q’’)),Or(And(p’,q’’),And(p’’,q’))

Test the function on heavily nested instances of ‘⇔’. Note that the resulting formulas will still be exponentially large when printed out, but internally will share common subexpressions. Thus, when testing the eﬃciency you will want to avoid looking at the result, e.g. by let fm’ = time nnfp (simplify fm) in ();;

2.8

2.9

2.10

Look at some alternative digital circuits for multiplication, e.g. Wallace trees, in standard computer arithmetic texts such as Koren (1992). Realize them as propositional formulas and verify equivalence to the implementations we have given by tautology checking. Show how to construct a digital circuit with three inputs a, b and c and three outputs that are the respective negations ¬a, ¬b and ¬c, using an arbitrary number of ‘AND’ and ‘OR’ gates but at most two ‘NOT’ gates (inverters). This surprisingly diﬃcult puzzle in logic circuit design (Wos 1998) was suggested by E. Snow from Intel. Can you prove a more general result about how many wires can be inverted using any number of ‘AND’ and ‘OR’ gates together with n inverters? Show that if an atomic proposition x occurs only positively in a formula p, then psubst (x |⇒ q) p is satisﬁable precisely if (x ⇒ q)∧p is (Plaisted and Greenbaum 1986). Use this to create an variant of defcnf using implication rather than equivalence for the deﬁnitions

Exercises

2.11

2.12

2.13

2.14

2.15

2.16

2.17

115

wherever possible. How does this aﬀect subsequent performance of algorithms like DPLL, on both satisﬁable and unsatisﬁable formulas? The comparison between tautology and dplltaut is rather unfair in that we don’t test the particular CNF form and Davis–Putnam rules against other ways of simplifying the formula. Implement a version of tautology that simpliﬁes the formula (perhaps using psimplify) between case-splits and uses similar variable-picking heuristics to dplltaut. How does this compare? Modify one of our DPLL implementations so that when a formula is satisﬁable, it returns a satisfying assignment in some form (e.g. a ﬁnite partial function into booleans, or the set of atoms to be assigned ‘true’). Modify one of our DPLL implementations so that when given an unsatisﬁable set of clauses, it provides a proof of that unsatisﬁability as a sequence of resolution steps. Can you make this work both when doing backjumping/learning and when doing purely the traditional DPLL splitting? In an early presentation (St˚ almarck and S¨ aﬂund 1990) of St˚ almarck’s method, negations were eliminated by pulling them up the formula, leaving just implication and conjunction. Deﬁne a function nunf to do this. Show that if the ﬁnal formula is unnegated, the whole formula is automatically satisﬁable. Implement a variant of St˚ almarck’s method based on 3-CNF along the lines described by Groote (2000), accumulating unit and 2-clauses (which can be considered as implications). How does performance compare with the usual version? Suppose that instead of splitting over variables, one uses the clauses themselves and splits over the various disjuncts (in general a three-way split). How does that compare? Does it help if when splitting over p ∨ q ∨ r one assumes separately p, ¬p ∧ q, and ¬p ∧ ¬q ∧ r? ‘Urquhart formulas’ are tautologies of the form p1 ⇔ p2 ⇔ · · · ⇔ pn ⇔ p1 ⇔ p2 ⇔ · · · ⇔ pn for some n. Show that they are all 2-easy for St˚ almarck’s method. Implement an OCaml function to return an Urquhart formula for a given parameter n, and compare the performance of our implementations of DPLL and St˚ almarck on them. Try modifying the BDD construction functions to choose variable orderings reﬂecting the characteristics of the problem, perhaps derived from the sequence of ‘deﬁnitions’ in ebddtaut. Can you ﬁnd some simple approaches that work well on a wide class of examples?

116

2.18

2.19

Propositional logic

Implement a function to generate (pseudo-)random formulas in 3CNF, based on input parameters giving the desired number of clauses (C) and the number of distinct atoms (V ). A naive statistical anal 3 ysis would suggest that, since each clause excludes 12 = 18 of the possible valuations, the number of satisfying valuations would be 7 C V of the order of 2 8 . Regardless of the method used, satisﬁa C ≈ 1, i.e. C ≈ 5.2V , might be bility of problems where 2V 78 expected to be the most diﬃcult to resolve, since they are on the borderline between satisﬁability and unsatisﬁability. Empirical studies of algorithms such as DPLL often suggest a diﬃculty peak closer to C ≈ 4.3V (Kirkpatrick and Selman 1994; Crawford and Auton 1996). But the diﬃculty peak, and the onset of other qualitative changes, is quite subtle and apparently algorithm-dependent (Coarfa, Demopoulos, Alfonso, Subramanian and Vardi 2000). Experiment with the performance of various tautology-checking or satisﬁability-checking methods on your random formulas as the C/V ratio is varied. Are your results in line with theoretical expectations? Can you reﬁne the analysis, e.g. using techniques presented by Kirousis, Kranakis, Krizanc and Stamatiou (1998), so that they are? How does the diﬃculty peak vary if one considers 4-CNF, 5CNF etc.? Is this again in line with expectations? A set of formulas Γ is said to be independent if whenever φ ∈ Γ, Γ − {φ} |= φ, i.e. no formula in Γ follows from all the others. Two sets Γ and Δ are said to be equivalent if for any formula φ, Γ |= φ iﬀ Δ |= φ. Prove that: • any ﬁnite set Γ has an equivalent independent subset; • not every countable set of formulas has an equivalent independent subset; • every countable set of formulas does have an equivalent independent set, not necessarily a subset of the original set.

2.20

2.21

Does the last result extend to uncountable sets? Let B be an inﬁnite set of boys, each of whom has at most a ﬁnite number of girlfriends. If for each integer k, any k of the boys have between them at least k girlfriends, prove that it is possible for each boy to marry one of his girlfriends without any of them committing bigamy (Bell and Slomson 1969). Gardner (1975) gave a planar map which he claimed (as an April Fool’s joke) not to be 4-colourable. Construct the corresponding propositional formula and refute the claim by proving it satisﬁable.

Exercises

2.22

2.23

2.24

2.25

117

An inﬁnite variant of Ramsey’s Theorem 2.9 states that any graph on vertices N has either an inﬁnite connected subgraph or an inﬁnite completely disconnected subgraph. (You might want to try and prove that.) Use the compactness theorem to deduce our ﬁnite Ramsey Theorem 2.9 from that inﬁnite variant. Prove the following combinatorial theorems taken from Bonet, Buss and Pitassi (1995). (i) If a town has n citizens and there is a set of clubs such that each club has an odd number of citizens and any two distinct clubs have an even number of citizens in common, then there are at most n clubs. (ii) If F1 , . . . , Fm is a system of distinct nonempty subsets of {1, . . . , n} such that for each i = j, |Fi ∩Fj | = k, for some ﬁxed k, then m ≤ n. Write programs to encode particular instances of these assertions as propositional satisﬁability problems and test some of the methods we have covered in this chapter. A group (not necessarily abelian) is said to be ordered by ≤ iﬀ ≤ is a total order such that a ≤ b ⇒ ac ≤ bc ∧ ca ≤ cb. Show that a group can be ordered iﬀ each ﬁnitely generated subgroup can be ordered. Deduce that an abelian group can be ordered iﬀ it is torsion-free, i.e. there is no n ≥ 1 such that xn = 1 for x = 1 (Kreisel and Krivine 1971). Although no polynomial-time algorithm for SAT is known at the time of writing, show that you could implement a function polysat that accepts propositional formulas and always correctly tests them for satisﬁability, and is such that if P = N P then there is a polynomial p(n) so that the runtime of polysat on satisﬁable formulas of size n is ≤ p(n). (The author learned of this result from Carl Witty, and Martin Hofmann pointed out that it is a special case of Levin’s search theorem in recursion theory.)

3 First-order logic

We now move from propositional logic to richer ﬁrst-order logic, where propositions can involve non-propositional variables that may be universally or existentially quantiﬁed. We show how proof in ﬁrst-order logic can be mechanized naively via Herbrand’s theorem. We then introduce various reﬁnements, notably uniﬁcation, that help make automated proof more eﬃcient.

3.1 First-order logic and its implementation Propositional logic only allows us to build formulas from primitive propositions that may independently be true or false. However, this is too restrictive to capture patterns of reasoning where the truth or falsity of propositions depends on the values of non-propositional variables. For example, a typical proposition about numbers is ‘m < n’, and its truth depends on the values of m and n. If we simply introduce a distinct propositional variable for each such proposition, we lose the ability to interrelate diﬀerent instances according to the variables they contain, e.g. to assert that ¬(m < n∧n < m). Firstorder (predicate) logic extends propositional logic in two ways to accommodate this need: • the atomic propositions can be built up from non-propositional variables and constants using functions and predicates; • the non-propositional variables can be bound with quantiﬁers. We make a syntactic distinction between formulas, which are intuitively intended to be true or false, and terms, which are intended to denote ‘objects’ in the domain being reasoned about (numbers, people, sets or whatever). Terms are built up from (object-denoting) variables using functions. In discussions we use f (s, t, u) for a term built from subterms s, t and u using 118

3.1 First-order logic and its implementation

119

the function f , or sometimes inﬁx notation like s + t rather than +(s, t) where it seems more natural or familiar. All of these are merely understood as presentations of the underlying abstract syntax of terms where a term is either a variable or a function applied to any number of other ‘argument’ terms: type term = Var of string | Fn of string * term list;;

Functions can have any number of arguments, this number being known as the arity of the function (from a pun on the words unary, binary, ternary, quaternary, etc.) In particular we can accommodate constants like 1 or π as nullary functions, i.e. functions with zero arguments. Most mathematical expressions can be quite directly formalized as terms, e.g. 1 − cos2 (x + y) as: Fn("sqrt",[Fn("-",[Fn("1",[]); Fn("cos",[Fn("power",[Fn("+",[Var "x"; Var "y"]); Fn("2",[])])])])]);;

All the logical connectives of propositional logic carry over into ﬁrst-order logic. However, each atomic proposition is now analyzed into a named predicate or relation applied to any ﬁnite number of terms. Once again we write P (s, t) for a predicate P applied to arguments s and t, but use inﬁx notation like s < t where it seems natural instead of < (s, t). We create a new type fol of ﬁrst-order atomic propositions, so we get a natural fol formula type for the type of ﬁrst-order formulas: type fol = R of string * term list;;

For example, x + y < z can be formalized as the atomic formula: Atom(R("<",[Fn("+",[Var "x"; Var "y"]); Var "z"]))

A predicate may have zero arguments, corresponding to a simple propositional variable. We call functions and predicates with one argument unary or monadic, those with two arguments binary or dyadic, and those with n arguments n-ary. In certain contexts, we will consider terms and/or formulas in a restricted language. Formally, we deﬁne a signature as a pair of sets, one a list of functions and one a list of predicates, both as name–arity pairs, and the corresponding language as the sets of terms and formulas that can be built using only functions and predicates appearing in that signature (but any

120

First-order logic

variables). For example the language of arithmetic that we use in Chapter 7 has the following signature: ({("0", 0), ("S", 1), ("+", 2), ("*", 2)}, {("=", 2), ("<", 2), ("<=", 2)}), so terms like x + S(0) and formulas like S(S(0)) < x + y are in the language but 1 + x and P (0, x) are not. The exact formal deﬁnitions of ‘language’ and ‘signature’ are unimportant (these vary in the literature, and some authors identify the two), provided the concept of a term or formula being in a restricted language is clear.

Quantiﬁers Now we come to the other main change compared with propositional logic: the introduction of quantiﬁers. • The formula ∀x. p, or Forall("x",p) in our OCaml formulation, where x is a variable and p any formula, means intuitively ‘for all values of x, p is true’. For this reason ∀ is referred to as the universal quantiﬁer; the symbol is derived from the ﬁrst letter of ‘all’. • The analogous formula ∃x. p, or Exists("x",p) in OCaml, means intuitively ‘there exists an x such that p is true’, i.e. ‘p is true for some value(s) of x’. For this reason ∃ is referred to as the existential quantiﬁer; the symbol is derived from the ﬁrst letter of ‘exists’. In the formulas ∀x.P [x] and ∃x.P [x], the subformula P [x] is referred to as the scope of the corresponding quantiﬁer. (In informal discussions we often write expressions like P [x] for ‘some arbitrary formula possibly involving x’.) The quantiﬁer is said to bind instances of x within its scope, and these variables are said to be bound. Instances of variables not within the scope of a quantiﬁer are called free. Note that the same variable can occur both free and bound in the same formula, e.g. in R(x, a) ∧ ∀x. R(y, x), where the variable x has one free occurrence and one bound occurrence. Intuitively speaking, a bound variable is just a placeholder referring back to the corresponding binding operation, rather than an independent variable in the usual sense. Bound variables can be compared with English pronouns referring back to some particular noun established at the start: ‘Although the money was missing, John denied that he stole it’. Binding operations are 2 quite common in mathematical notation, e.g. the variable n in ∞ n=1 1/n , ∞ −x2 2 dx and the variable k in {k | k ∈ N}. They the variable x in −∞ e also occur in programming languages, e.g. for OCaml the x in the deﬁnition let f(x) = 2 * x and the a in the expression let a = 2 in a * a * a.

3.1 First-order logic and its implementation

121

As in logic, variables in mathematics x sometimes occur both free and bound in the same expression, e.g. in 0 2x dx, where the variable x has both a free occurrence (as the upper limit of the integral) and a bound occurrence (inside the body of the integral). Similarly, x really occurs both free and bound in d(x2 )/dx, though the conventional notation obscures the fact. We can analyze it as the derivative of x → x2 (in which x is bound) evaluated at point x (where x is a free variable). In our concrete syntax, the scope of a quantiﬁer extends as far to the right as possible, e.g. ∀x.P (x) ⇒ Q(x) means ∀x.(P (x) ⇒ Q(x)) not (∀x.P (x)) ⇒ Q(x). (Many, especially older, texts use exactly the opposite convention, making quantiﬁers bind tighter than propositional connectives. The reader should keep this in mind when consulting the literature.) If we apply the universal or existential quantiﬁer to several variables in succession, then we usually only write one quantiﬁer symbol, e.g. ∀x y z. x + (y + z) = (x + y) + z rather than ∀x.∀y.∀z.x+(y+z) = (x+y)+z. Moreover, it is sometimes useful to assert that there exists exactly one x such that p is true. We write this ∃!x. p and consider ∃!x. P [x] as a shorthand for ∃x. P [x] ∧ ∀y. P [y] ⇒ y = x. Intuitively, the ordering of a sequence of quantiﬁers of the same kind (all universal or all existential) shouldn’t matter: ‘for all x, for all y, . . . ’ means the same as ‘for all y, for all x, . . . ’, and so on. When we deﬁne logical equivalence precisely below, the reader will be able to conﬁrm this intuition. However, where quantiﬁers of diﬀerent kinds are nested inside each other, or where the derived quantiﬁer ∃! is involved (see Exercise 3.1), the order is often important. For example, if we think of loves(x, y) as ‘x loves y’, the formula ∀x. ∃y. loves(x, y) asserts that everybody loves somebody, whereas ∃y. ∀x. loves(x, y) asserts that somebody is loved by everybody. For a more mathematical example, consider the − δ deﬁnitions of continuity and uniform continuity of a function f : R → R. Continuity asserts that given > 0, for each x there is a δ > 0 such that whenever |x − x| < δ, we also have |f (x ) − f (x)| < ε: ∀. > 0 ⇒ ∀x. ∃δ. δ > 0 ∧ ∀x . |x − x| < δ ⇒ |f (x ) − f (x)| < ε. Uniform continuity, on the other hand asserts that given > 0 there is a δ > 0 independent of x such that for any x and x , whenever |x − x| < δ, we also have |f (x ) − f (x)| < ε: ∀. > 0 ⇒ ∃δ. δ > 0 ∧ ∀x. ∀x . |x − x| < δ ⇒ |f (x ) − f (x)| < ε. Note how the changed order of quantiﬁcation radically changes the asserted property. (For example, f (x) = x2 is continuous on the real line, but not uniformly continuous there.) The notion of uniform continuity was only

122

First-order logic

articulated relatively late in the arithmetization of analysis, and several early ‘proofs’ supposedly requiring only continuity in fact require uniform continuity. Perhaps the use of a formal language would have cleared up many conceptual diﬃculties sooner.† The name ‘ﬁrst-order logic’ arises because quantiﬁers can be applied only to object-denoting variables, not to functions or predicates. Logics where quantiﬁcation over functions and predicates is permitted (e.g. ∃f. ∀x. P [x, f (x)]) are said to be second-order or higher-order. But we restrict ourselves to ﬁrst-order quantiﬁers: the parser deﬁned next will treat such a string as if the ﬁrst f were just an ordinary object variable and the second a unary function that just happens to have the same name.

3.2 Parsing and printing Parsing and printing of terms and formulas in concrete syntax is implemented using a mostly familiar pattern, described in detail in Appendix 3. Any quotation <<...>> is automatically passed to the formula parser parse, except that surrounding bars <<|...|>> force parsing as a term using the term parser parset. Printers for terms and formulas are installed in the toplevel so no explicit invocation is needed. As well as the general concrete syntax f(x), g(x,y) etc. for terms, we allow inﬁx use of the customary binary function symbols ‘+’, ‘-’, ‘*’, ‘/’ and ‘^’ (exponentiation), all with conventional precedences, as well as an inﬁx list constructor :: with the lowest precedence. Unary negation may be written with or without the brackets required by the general unary function notation, as -(x) or -x. Remember in the latter case that all unary functions have higher precedence than binary ones, so -x^2 is interpreted as (-x)^2, not -(x^2) as one might expect. Users can always force a name c to be recognized as a constant by explicitly writing a nullary function application c(). However, this is apt to look a bit peculiar, so we adopt some additional conventions. All alphanumeric identiﬁers apparently within the scope of a quantiﬁer over a variable with the same name will be treated as variables; otherwise they will be treated as constants if and only if the OCaml predicate is_const_name returns true when applied to them. We have set this up to recognizes only strings of digits †

Even with a formal language, it is often hard to grasp the meaning of repeated alternations of ‘∀’ and ‘∃’ quantiﬁers. As we will see in Chapter 7, the number of quantiﬁer alternations is a signiﬁcant metric of the ‘mathematical complexity’ of a formula. It has even been suggested that the whole array of mathematical concepts and structures like complex numbers and topological spaces are mainly a means of hiding larger numbers of quantiﬁer alternations and so making them more accessible to our intuition.

3.3 The semantics of ﬁrst-order logic

123

and the special name nil (the empty list) as constants, but the reader can change this behaviour. For example, one might borrow the conventions from the Prolog programming language (see Section 3.14), where names beginning with uppercase letters (like ‘X’ or ‘First’) are taken to be variables and those beginning with lowercase letters or numbers (like ‘12’ or ‘const A’) are taken to be constants. Our concrete syntax for ‘∀x. P [x]’ is ‘forall x. P[x]’, and for ‘∃x. P [x]’ we use ‘exists x. P[x]’. There seemed no single symbols suﬃciently like the backward letters to be recognizable, though the HOL theorem prover (Gordon and Melham 1993) uses ‘!x. P[x]’ and ‘?x. P[x]’. For example: # # -

<
exists z. x < z /\ y < z>>;; = <> P(x)) <=> exists y. ~P(y)>>;; = <<~(forall x. P(x)) <=> (exists y. ~P(y))>>

Note that the printer includes brackets around quantiﬁed statements even though they can sometimes be omitted without ambiguity based on the fact that both we humans and the OCaml parser read expressions from left to right. 3.3 The semantics of ﬁrst-order logic As with a propositional formula, the meaning of a ﬁrst-order formula is deﬁned recursively and depends on the basic meanings given to the components. In propositional logic the only components are propositional variables, but in ﬁrst-order logic the variables, function symbols and predicate symbols all need to be interpreted. It’s customary to separate these concerns, and deﬁne the meaning of a term or formula with respect to both an interpretation, which speciﬁes the interpretation of the function and predicate symbols, and a valuation which speciﬁes the meanings of variables. Mathematically, an interpretation M consists of three parts. • A nonempty set D called the domain of the interpretation. The intention is that all terms have values in D.† • A mapping of each n-ary function symbol f to a function fM : Dn → D. • A mapping of each n-ary predicate symbol P to a Boolean function PM : Dn → {false, true}. Equivalently we can think of the interpretation as a subset PM ⊆ Dn . †

Some authors such as Johnstone (1987) allow empty domains, giving free or inclusive logic. This seems quite natural since one does sometimes consider empty structures (partial orders, graphs etc.) in mathematics. However, several results such as the validity of (∀x. P [x]) ⇒ P [x] and the existence of prenex normal forms (see Section 3.5) fail when empty domains are allowed.

124

First-order logic

We deﬁne the value of a term in a particular interpretation M and valuation v by recursion, simply taking note of how all variables are interpreted by v and function symbols by M : termval M v x = v(x), termval M v (f (t1 , . . . , tn )) = fM (termval M v t1 , . . . , termval M v tn ). Whether a formula holds (i.e. has value ‘true’) in a particular interpretation M and valuation v is similarly deﬁned by recursion (Tarski 1936) and mostly follows the pattern established for propositional logic. The main added complexity is specifying the meaning of the quantiﬁers. We intend that ∀x. P [x] should hold in a particular interpretation M and valuation v precisely if the body P [x] is true for any interpretation of the variable x, in other words, if we modify the eﬀect of the valuation v on x in any way at all. holds M v ⊥ = false holds M v = true holds M v (R(t1 , . . . , tn )) = RM (termval M v t1 , . . . , termval M v tn ) holds M v (¬p) = not(holds M v p) holds M v (p ∧ q) = (holds M v p) and (holds M v q) holds M v (p ∨ q) = (holds M v p) or (holds M v q) holds M v (p ⇒ q) = not(holds M v p) or (holds M v q) holds M v (p ⇔ q) = (holds M v p = holds M v q) holds M v (∀x. p) = for all a ∈ D, holds M ((x → a)v) p holds M v (∃x. p) = for some a ∈ D, holds M ((x → a)v) p The domain D in an interpretation is assumed nonempty, but otherwise may have arbitrary ﬁnite or inﬁnite cardinality (e.g. the set {0, 1} or the set of real numbers R), and the functions and predicates may be interpreted by arbitrary (possibly uncomputable) mathematical functions. For inﬁnite D we cannot directly realize the holds function in OCaml, since interpreting a quantiﬁer involves running a test on all elements of D. However, we will implement a cut-down version that works for a ﬁnite domain. An interpretation is represented by a triple of the domain, the interpretation of functions, and the interpretation of predicates. (To be a meaningful interpretation, the domain D should be nonempty, and each n-ary function f should be interpreted by an fM that maps n-tuples of elements of D back into D. The OCaml functions below just assume that the argument m is meaningful in this sense.) The valuation is represented as a ﬁnite partial function

3.3 The semantics of ﬁrst-order logic

125

(see Appendix 2). Then the semantics of terms can be deﬁned following very closely the abstract description we gave above: let rec termval (domain,func,pred as m) v tm = match tm with Var(x) -> apply v x | Fn(f,args) -> func f (map (termval m v) args);;

and the semantics of a formula as: let rec holds (domain,func,pred as m) v fm = match fm with False -> false | True -> true | Atom(R(r,args)) -> pred r (map (termval m v) args) | Not(p) -> not(holds m v p) | And(p,q) -> (holds m v p) & (holds m v q) | Or(p,q) -> (holds m v p) or (holds m v q) | Imp(p,q) -> not(holds m v p) or (holds m v q) | Iff(p,q) -> (holds m v p = holds m v q) | Forall(x,p) -> forall (fun a -> holds m ((x |-> a) v) p) domain | Exists(x,p) -> exists (fun a -> holds m ((x |-> a) v) p) domain;;

To clarify the concepts, let’s try a few examples of interpreting formulas involving the nullary function symbols ‘0’, ‘1’, the binary function symbols ‘+’ and ‘·’ and the binary predicate symbol ‘=’. We can consider an interpretation a` la Boole, with ‘+’ as exclusive ‘or’: let bool_interp = let func f args = match (f,args) with ("0",[]) -> false | ("1",[]) -> true | ("+",[x;y]) -> not(x = y) | ("*",[x;y]) -> x & y | _ -> failwith "uninterpreted function" and pred p args = match (p,args) with ("=",[x;y]) -> x = y | _ -> failwith "uninterpreted predicate" in ([false; true],func,pred);;

An alternative interpretation is as arithmetic modulo n for some arbitrary positive integer n:

126

First-order logic

let mod_interp n = let func f args = match (f,args) with ("0",[]) -> 0 | ("1",[]) -> 1 mod n | ("+",[x;y]) -> (x + y) mod n | ("*",[x;y]) -> (x * y) mod n | _ -> failwith "uninterpreted function" and pred p args = match (p,args) with ("=",[x;y]) -> x = y | _ -> failwith "uninterpreted predicate" in (0--(n-1),func,pred);;

If all variables are bound by quantiﬁers, the valuation plays no role in whether a formula holds or not. (We will state and prove this more precisely shortly.) In such cases, we can just use undefined to experiment. For example, ∀x. x = 0 ∨ x = 1 holds in bool interp and mod interp 2, but not in mod interp 3: # # # -

holds bool_interp undefined <>;; : bool = true holds (mod_interp 2) undefined <>;; : bool = true holds (mod_interp 3) undefined <>;; : bool = false

Consider now the assertion that every nonzero object of the domain has a multiplicative inverse. # let fm = < exists y. x * y = 1>>;;

As the reader who knows some number theory may be able to anticipate, this holds in mod interp n precisely when n is prime, or trivially 1: # filter (fun n -> holds (mod_interp n) undefined fm) (1--45);; - : int list = [1; 2; 3; 5; 7; 11; 13; 17; 19; 23; 29; 31; 37; 41; 43]

This formula holds in bool_interp too, as the reader can conﬁrm. (In fact, even though they are based on diﬀerent domains, mod_interp 2 and bool_interp are isomorphic, i.e. essentially the same, a concept explained in Section 4.2.)

3.3 The semantics of ﬁrst-order logic

127

The set of free variables We write FVT(t) for the set of all the variables involved in a term t, e.g. FVT(f (x + y, y + z)) = {x, y, z}, implemented recursively in OCaml as follows: let rec fvt tm = match tm with Var x -> [x] | Fn(f,args) -> unions (map fvt args);;

A term t is said to be ground when it contains no variables, i.e. FVT(t) = ∅. As might be expected, the semantics of a term depends only on the action of the valuation on variables that actually occur in it, so in particular, the valuation is irrelevant for a ground term. Theorem 3.1 If two valuations v and v agree on all variables in a term t, i.e. for all x ∈ FVT(t) we have v(x) = v (x), then termval M v t = termval M v t. Proof By induction on the structure of t. If t is just a variable x then FVT(t) = {x} so termval M v x = v(x) = v (x) = termval M v x by hypothesis. If t is of the form f (t1 , . . . , tn ) then by hypothesis v and v agree on the set FVT(f (t1 , . . . , tn )) and hence on each FVT(ti ). By the inductive hypothesis, termval M v ti = termval M v ti for each ti , so as required we have termval M v (f (t1 , . . . , tn )) = termval M v (f (t1 , . . . , tn )). The following function returns the set of all variables occurring in a formula. let rec var fm = match fm with False | True -> [] | Atom(R(p,args)) -> unions (map fvt args) | Not(p) -> var p | And(p,q) | Or(p,q) | Imp(p,q) | Iff(p,q) -> union (var p) (var q) | Forall(x,p) | Exists(x,p) -> insert x (var p);;

As with terms, a formula p is said to be ground when it contains no variables, i.e var p = ∅. However, we’re usually more interested in the set of free variables FV(p) in a formula, ignoring those that only occur bound. In this case, when passing through a quantiﬁer we need to subtract the quantiﬁed variable from the free variables of its body rather than add it:

128

First-order logic

let rec fv fm = match fm with False | True -> [] | Atom(R(p,args)) -> unions (map fvt args) | Not(p) -> fv p | And(p,q) | Or(p,q) | Imp(p,q) | Iff(p,q) -> union (fv p) (fv q) | Forall(x,p) | Exists(x,p) -> subtract (fv p) [x];;

Indeed, it is the set of free variables that is signiﬁcant in extending the above theorem from terms to formulas: Theorem 3.2 If two valuations v and v agree on all free variables in a formula p, i.e. for all x ∈ FV(p) we have v(x) = v (x), then holds M v p = holds M v p. Proof By induction on the structure of p. If p is ⊥ or the theorem is trivially true. If p is of the form R(t1 , . . . , tn ) then since v and v agree on FV(R(t1 , . . . , tn )) and hence on each FVT(ti ), Theorem 3.1 shows that for each ti we have termval M v ti = termval M v ti , and therefore holds M v (R(t1 , . . . , tn )) = holds M v (R(t1 , . . . , tn )). If p is of the form ¬q then since by deﬁnition FV(p) = FV(q) the inductive hypothesis gives holds M v p = not(holds M v p) = not(holds M v q) = holds M v p. Similarly, if p is of the form q ∧ r then since FV(q ∧ r) = FV(q) ∪ FV(r) the inductive hypothesis ensures that holds M v q = holds M v q and holds M v r = holds M v r and so holds M v (q ∧ r) = holds M v (q ∧ r). The other binary connectives are almost the same. If p is of the form ∀x. q then by hypothesis v(y) = v (y) for all y ∈ FV(p), which since FV(∀x. q) = FV(q) − {x}, means that v(y) = v (y) for all y ∈ FV(q) except possibly y = x. But this ensures that for any a in the domain of M we have ((x → a)v)(y) = ((x → a)v )(y) for all y ∈ FV(q). So, by the inductive hypothesis, for all such a we have holds M ((x → a)v) q = holds M ((x → a)v ) q. By deﬁnition this means holds M v p = holds M v p. The case of the existential quantiﬁer is similar. A formula p is said to be a sentence if it has no free variables, i.e. FV(p) = ∅. A ground formula is also a sentence, but a sentence may contain variables so long as all instances are bound, e.g. ∀x. ∃y. P (x, y). Corollary 3.3 If p is a sentence, i.e. FV(p) = ∅, then for any interpretation M and any valuations v and v we have holds M v p = holds M v p.

3.3 The semantics of ﬁrst-order logic

129

Proof If FV(p) = ∅ then whatever the valuations are they agree on FV(p). Validity and satisﬁability By analogy with propositional logic, a ﬁrst-order formula is said to be logically valid if it holds in all interpretations and all valuations. And again, if p ⇔ q is logically valid we say that p and q are logically equivalent. Valid formulas are the ﬁrst-order analogues of propositional tautologies, and the word ‘tautology’ is sometimes used for the ﬁrst-order case too. Indeed, all propositional tautologies give rise to corresponding valid ﬁrst-order formulas (see Corollary 3.13 below). A valid formula involving quantiﬁers is (∀x. P [x]) ⇒ P [a], which asserts that if P is true for all x, then it is true for any particular constant a. The presence and scope of the quantiﬁer are crucial, though; neither P [x] ⇒ P [a] nor ∀x. P [x] ⇒ P [a] is valid. For instance, the latter holds in some interpretations but fails in others: # # -

holds (mod_interp 3) undefined <<(forall x. x = 0) ==> 1 = 0>>;; : bool = true holds (mod_interp 3) undefined < 1 = 0>>;; : bool = false

A rather more surprising logically valid formula is ∃x. ∀y. P (x) ⇒ P (y). Intuitively speaking, either P is true of everything, in which case the consequent P (y) is always true, or there is some x so that the antecedent P (x) is false. Either way, the whole implication is true. (This is often called ‘the drinker’s principle’ since it can be thought of as asserting the existence of someone x such that if x drinks, everybody does.) We say that an interpretation M satisﬁes a ﬁrst-order formula p, or simply that p holds in M , if for all valuations v we have holds M v p = true. Similarly, we say that M satisﬁes a set of formulas, or that S holds in M , if it satisﬁes each formula in the set. We say that a ﬁrst-order formula or set of ﬁrst-order formulas is satisﬁable if there is some interpretation that satisﬁes it. Note the asymmetry between the interpretation and valuation in the deﬁnition of satisﬁability: there is some interpretation M such that for all valuations v we have holds M v p; this looks surprising but makes later material technically easier.† In any case, the asymmetry disappears when we consider sentences, since then the valuation plays no role. It is easily seen †

Indeed, many logic texts use a deﬁnition with ‘some valuation’, while others carefully avoid deﬁning the notion of satisﬁability for formulas with free variables. When consulting other sources, the reader should keep this lack of unanimity in mind. Our deﬁnition is particularly convenient for considering satisﬁability of quantiﬁer-free formulas after Skolemization. With another deﬁnition, we would repeatedly need to keep in mind implicit universal quantiﬁcation.

130

First-order logic

that a sentence p is valid iﬀ ¬p is unsatisﬁable, just as in the propositional case. For formulas with free variables, however, this is no longer true. For example, P (x) ∨ ¬P (y) is not valid, yet the negated form ¬P (x) ∧ P (y) is unsatisﬁable because it would have to be satisﬁed by all valuations, including those assigning the same object to x and y. An interpretation that satisﬁes a set of formulas Γ is said to be a model of Γ. The notation Γ |= p means ‘p holds in all models of Γ’, and we usually just |= p instead of ∅ |= p. In particular, Γ is unsatisﬁable iﬀ Γ |= ⊥ (since ⊥ never holds, there must be no models of Γ). However, in contrast to propositional logic, even when Γ = {p1 , . . . , pn } is ﬁnite, it is not necessarily the case that {p1 , . . . , pn } |= p is equivalent to |= p1 ∧ · · · ∧ pn ⇒ p. The reason is that the quantiﬁcation over valuations is happening at a diﬀerent place. For example {P (x)} |= P (y) is true, but |= P (x) ⇒ P (y) is not. However, if each pi is a sentence (no free variables) then the two are equivalent. We occasionally use Γ |=M p to indicate that p holds in a speciﬁc model M whenever all the Γ do, so |=M p just means that M satisﬁes p. As we have noted, we cannot possibly implement a test for validity or satisﬁability based directly on the semantics. We have no way at all of evaluating whether a formula holds in an interpretation with an inﬁnite domain. And while we can test whether it holds in a ﬁnite interpretation, we can’t test whether it holds in all such interpretations, because there are inﬁnitely many. Note the contrast with propositional logic, where the propositional variables range over a ﬁnite (2-element) set which can therefore be enumerated exhaustively, and there is no separate notion of interpretations. This, however, does not a priori destroy all hope of testing ﬁrst-order validity in subtler ways. Indeed, we will attack the problem of validity testing more indirectly, ﬁrst transforming a ﬁrst-order formula into a set of propositional formulas that are satisﬁable if and only if the original formula is. Thus, we will ﬁrst consider how to transform a formula to put the quantiﬁers at the outside, and then eliminate them altogether. However, before we set about the task, we need to deal precisely with some rather tedious syntactic issues.

3.4 Syntax operations We often want to take a ﬁrst-order formula and universally quantify it over all its free variables, e.g. pass from ∃y. x < y + z to ∀x. ∃y. x < y + z. Note that this ‘generalization’ or ‘universal closure’ is valid iﬀ the original formula is, since either way we demand that the core formula holds under arbitrary assignments of domain elements to that variable. (More formally,

3.4 Syntax operations

131

use Theorem 3.2 to show that for all valuations v and a ∈ D we have holds M ((x → a)v) p iﬀ simply for all v we have holds M v p.) And it’s often more convenient to work with sentences; for example if all formulas involved are sentences, {p1 , . . . , pn } |= q iﬀ |= p1 ∧ · · · ∧ pn ⇒ q, and validity of p is the same as unsatisﬁability of ¬p, both as in propositional logic. Here is an OCaml implementation of universal generalization: let generalize fm = itlist mk_forall (fv fm) fm;;

Substitution in terms The other key operation we need to deﬁne is substitution of terms for variables in another term or formula, e.g. substituting 1 for the variable x in x < 2 ⇒ x ≤ y to obtain 1 < 2 ⇒ 1 ≤ y. We will specify the desired variable assignment or instantiation as a ﬁnite partial function from variable names to terms, which can either be undeﬁned or simply map x to Var(x) for variables we don’t want changed. Given such an assignment sfn, substitution on terms can be deﬁned by recursion: let rec tsubst sfn tm = match tm with Var x -> tryapplyd sfn x tm | Fn(f,args) -> Fn(f,map (tsubst sfn) args);;

We will observe some important properties of this notion. First of all, the variables in a substituted term are as expected: Lemma 3.4 For any term t and instantiation i, the free variables in the substituted term are precisely those free in the terms substituted for the free variables of t, i.e. FVT(i(y)). FVT(tsubst i t) = y∈FVT(t) Proof By induction on the structure of the term. If t is a variable z, then FVT(tsubst i t) = FVT(i(z)) = y∈{z} FVT(i(y)) and since FVT(z) = {z} the result follows. If t is of the form f (t1 , . . . , tn ) then by the inductive hypothesis we have for each k = 1, . . . , n: FVT(i(y)). FVT(tsubst i tk ) = y∈FVT(tk )

132

First-order logic

Consequently: FVT(tsubst i (f (t1 , . . . , tn )) = FVT(f (tsubst i t1 , . . . , tsubst i tn ) n FVT(tsubst i tk ) = =

k=1 n

FVT(i(y))

k=1 y∈FVT(tk )

=

n

y∈

=

k=1

FVT(i(y))

FVT(tk )

FVT(i(y)).

y∈FVT(f (t1 ,...,tn ))

The following result gives a simple property, which on reﬂection would be expected, for the interpretation of a substituted term. Lemma 3.5 For any term t and instantiation i, then in any interpretation M and valuation v, the substituted term has the same value as the original formula in the modiﬁed valuation termval M v ◦ i, i.e. termval M v (tsubst i t) = termval M (termval M v ◦ i) t. Proof If t is a variable x then termval M v (tsubst i x) = termval M v (i(x)) = (termval M v ◦ i)(x) as required. If t is of the form f (t1 , . . . , tn ) then by the inductive hypothesis we have for each k = 1, . . . , n: termval M v (tsubst i tk ) = termval M (termval M v ◦ i) tk and so: termval M v (tsubst i (f (t1 , . . . , tn )) = termval M v (f (tsubst i t1 , . . . , tsubst i tn )) = fM (termval M v (tsubst i t1 ), . . . , termval M v (tsubst i tn )) = fM ( termval M (termval M v ◦ i) t1 , . . . , termval M (termval M v ◦ i) tn ) = termval M (termval M v ◦ i) (f (t1 , . . . , tn )).

3.4 Syntax operations

133

Substitution in formulas It might seem at ﬁrst sight that we could deﬁne substitution in formulas by a similar structural recursion. However, the presence of bound variables makes matters considerably more complicated. We have already observed that bound variables are just placeholders indicating a correspondence between bound variables and the binding instance, and for this reason they should not be substituted for. For example, substitutions for x should have no eﬀect on the formula ∀x. x = x because each instance of x is bound by the quantiﬁer. Moreover, even avoiding substitution of the bound variables themselves, we still run the risk of having free variables in the substituted terms ‘captured’ by an outer variable-binding operation. For example if we straightforwardly replace y by x in the formula ∃x. x + 1 = y, the resulting formula ∃x. x + 1 = x is not what we want, since the substituted variable x has become bound. What we’d like to do is alpha-convert,† i.e. rename the bound variable, e.g. to z. We can then safely substitute to get ∃z. z + 1 = x, replacing the free variable as required while maintaining the correct binding correspondence. To implement this, we start with a function to invent a ‘variant’ of a variable name by adding prime characters to it until it is distinct from some given list of variables to avoid; this will be used to rename bound variables when necessary: let rec variant x vars = if mem x vars then variant (x^"’") vars else x;;

For example: # # # -

variant "x" ["y"; "z"];; : string = "x" variant "x" ["x"; "y"];; : string = "x’" variant "x" ["x"; "x’"];; : string = "x’’"

Now, the deﬁnition of substitution starts with a series of straightforward structural recursions. However, the two tricky cases of quantiﬁed formulas ∀x. p and ∃x. p are handled by a mutually recursive function substq:

†

The terminology originates with lambda-calculus (Church 1941; Barendregt 1984).

134

First-order logic

let rec subst subfn fm = match fm with False -> False | True -> True | Atom(R(p,args)) -> Atom(R(p,map (tsubst subfn) args)) | Not(p) -> Not(subst subfn p) | And(p,q) -> And(subst subfn p,subst subfn q) | Or(p,q) -> Or(subst subfn p,subst subfn q) | Imp(p,q) -> Imp(subst subfn p,subst subfn q) | Iff(p,q) -> Iff(subst subfn p,subst subfn q) | Forall(x,p) -> substq subfn mk_forall x p | Exists(x,p) -> substq subfn mk_exists x p

This substq function checks whether there would be variable capture if the bound variable x is not renamed. It does this by testing if there is a y = x in FV(p) such that applying the substitution to y gives a term with x free. If so, it picks a new bound variable x that will not clash with any of the results of substituting in p; otherwise, it just sets x = x. The overall result is then deduced by applying substitution to the body p with an additional mapping x → x . Note that in the case where no renaming is needed, this still inhibits the (non-trivial) replacement of x, as required. and substq subfn quant x p = let x’ = if exists (fun y -> mem x (fvt(tryapplyd subfn y (Var y)))) (subtract (fv p) [x]) then variant x (fv(subst (undefine x subfn) p)) else x in quant x’ (subst ((x |-> Var x’) subfn) p);;

For example: # # -

subst : fol subst : fol

("y" |=> Var "x") <>;; formula = <> ("y" |=> Var "x") < x = x’>>;; formula = < x’ = x’’>>

We hope that this renaming trickery looks at least vaguely plausible. But the ultimate vindication of our deﬁnition is really that subst satisﬁes analogous properties to Lemmas 3.4 and 3.5 for tsubst, though we have to work much harder to establish them. Lemma 3.6 For any formula p and instantiation i, the free variables in the substituted formula are precisely those free in the terms substituted for the free variables of p, i.e. FVT(i(y)). FV(subst i p) = y∈FV(p)

3.4 Syntax operations

135

Proof We will prove by induction on the structure of p that for all i the above holds. This allows us to use the inductive hypothesis even when renaming occurs and we have to consider a diﬀerent instantiation for a subformula. If p is ⊥ or the theorem holds trivially. If p is an atomic formula R(t1 , . . . , tn ) then, by Lemma 3.4, for each k = 1, . . . , n: FVT(i(y)). FVT(tsubst i tk ) = y∈FVT(tk ) Consequently: FV(subst i (R(t1 , . . . , tn )) = FV(R(tsubst i t1 , . . . , tsubst i tn ) n FVT(tsubst i tk ) = =

k=1 n

FVT(i(y))

k=1 y∈FVT(tk )

=

n

y∈

=

FVT(i(y))

FVT(tk )

k=1

FVT(i(y)).

y∈FV(R(t1 ,...,tn ))

If p is of the form ¬q then by the inductive hypothesis FV(subst i q) = y∈FV(q) FVT(i(y)) and so

FV(subst i (¬q) = FV(¬(subst i q)) = FV(subst i q) FVT(i(y)) = y∈FV(q) FVT(i(y)). = y∈FV(¬q)

If p is of the form q ∧ r then by the inductive hypothesis FV(subst i q) = y∈FV(q) FVT(i(y)) and FV(subst i r) = y∈FV(r) FVT(i(y)) and so: FV(subst i (q ∧ r)) = FV((subst i q) ∧ (subst i r)) = FV(subst i q) ∪ FV(subst i r)

136

=

First-order logic

y∈FV(q)

=

FVT(i(y)) ∪

FVT(i(y))

y∈FV(r)

FVT(i(y))

y∈FV(q)∪FV(r)

=

FVT(i(y)).

y∈FV(q∧r)

The other binary connectives are similar. Now suppose p is of the form ∀x. q. With the possibly-renamed variable x from the deﬁnition of substitution, we have: FV(subst i (∀x. q)) = FV(∀x . (subst ((x → x )i) q) = FV(subst ((x → x )i) q) − {x } FVT(((x → x )i)(y)) − {x }. = y∈FV(q) We can remove the case y = x from the union, because in that case we have FVT(((x → x )i)(y)) = FVT(((x → x )i)(x)) = FVT(x ) = {x }, and this set is removed again on the outside. Hence this is equal to: FVT(((x → x )i)(y)) − {x } y∈FV(q)−{x} FVT(i(y)) − {x }. = y∈FV(q)−{x} Now we distinguish two cases according to the test in the substq function. • If x ∈ y∈FV(q)−{x} FVT(i(y)) then x = x. • If x ∈ y∈FV(q)−{x} FVT(i(y)) then x ∈ FV(subst ((x → x)i) q) by construction. That set is equal to y∈FV(q) FVT(((x → x)i)(y)) by the inductive hypothesis, and so it includes the set FVT(((x → x)i)(y)) = FVT(i(y)). y∈FV(q)−{x} y∈FV(q)−{x} In either case, x ∈ y∈FV(q)−{x} FVT(i(y)) and so we always have FVT(i(y)) − {x } = FVT(i(y)), y∈FV(q)−{x} y∈FV(q)−{x} which is exactly y∈FV(∀x. q) FVT(i(y)) as required. The case of the existential quantiﬁer is exactly analogous.

3.4 Syntax operations

137

Theorem 3.7 For any formula p, instantiation i, interpretation M and valuation v, we have holds M v (subst i p) = holds M (termval M v ◦ i) p. Proof We will ﬁx M at the outset, but as with the previous theorem, will prove by induction on the structure of p that for all valuations v and instantiations i the result holds. This will allow us to deploy the inductive hypothesis with modiﬁed valuation and/or substitution. If p is ⊥ or the result holds trivially. If p is an atomic formula R(t1 , . . . , tn ) then by Lemma 3.5 for each k = 1, . . . , n: termval M v (tsubst i tk ) = termval M (termval M v ◦ i) tk and so: holds M v (subst i (R(t1 , . . . , tn )) = holds M v (R(tsubst i t1 , . . . , tsubst i tn )) = RM (termval M v (tsubst i t1 ), . . . , termval M v (tsubst i tn )) = RM ( termval M (termval M v ◦ i) t1 , . . . , termval M (termval M v ◦ i) tn ) = holds M (termval M v ◦ i) (R(t1 , . . . , tn )). If p is of the form ¬q, then using the inductive hypothesis we know that holds M v (subst i q) = holds M (termval M v ◦ i) q and so: holds M v (subst i (¬q)) = holds M v (¬(subst i q)) = not(holds M v (subst i q)) = not(holds M (termval M v ◦ i) q) = holds M (termval M v ◦ i) (¬q). Similarly, if p is of the form q ∧ r then by the inductive hypothesis we have holds M v (subst i q) = holds M (termval M v ◦ i) q and also holds M v (subst i r) = holds M (termval M v ◦ i) r, so: holds M v (subst i (q ∧ r)) = holds M v ((subst i q) ∧ (subst i r)) = (holds M v (subst i q)) and (holds M v (subst i r)) = (holds M (termval M v ◦ i) q) and (holds M (termval M v ◦ i) r) = holds M (termval M v ◦ i) (q ∧ r).

138

First-order logic

The other binary connectives follow the same pattern. For the case where p is of the form ∀x. q, we again need a bit more care because of variable renaming. Using the inductive hypothesis we have, with x the possiblyrenamed variable: holds M v (subst i (∀x. q)) = holds M v (∀x . (subst ((x → x )i) q)) = for all a ∈ D, holds M ((x → a)v) (subst ((x → x )i) q) = for all a ∈ D, holds M (termval M ((x → a)v) ◦ ((x → x )i))q. We want to show that this is equivalent to holds M (termval M v ◦ i) (∀x. q) = for all a ∈ D, holds M ((x → a)(termval M v ◦ i)) q. By Theorem 3.2, it’s enough to show that for arbitrary a ∈ D, the valuations termval M ((x → a)v) ◦ ((x → x )i) and (x → a)(termval M v ◦ i) agree on each variable z ∈ FV(q). There are two cases to distinguish. If z = x then (termval M ((x → a)v) ◦ ((x → x )i))(x) = termval M ((x → a)v) (((x → x )i)(x)) = termval M ((x → a)v) (x ) = ((x → a)v)(x ) = a = ((x → a)(termval M v ◦ i))(x) as required, and if z = x then: (termval M ((x → a)v) ◦ ((x → x )i))(z) = termval M ((x → a)v) (((x → x )i)(z)) = termval M ((x → a)v) (i(z)). By hypothesis, z ∈ FV(q), and since z = x we have z ∈ FV(q)−{x}. How ever, as noted in the proof of Theorem 3.6, x ∈ y∈FV(q)−{x} FVT(i(y)) and so in particular x ∈ FV(i(z)). Thus we can continue the chain of equivalences: = termval M v (i(z)) = (termval M v ◦ i)(z) = ((x → a)(termval M v ◦ i))(z) as required.

3.5 Prenex normal form

139

One straightforward consequence, unsurprising if we think of free variables as implicitly universally quantiﬁed, is the following: Corollary 3.8 If a formula is valid, so is any substitution instance. Proof Let p be a logically valid formula. For any instantiation i we have holds M v (subst i p) = holds M (termval M v ◦ i) p = true, since holds M v p = true for any valuation v, in particular termval M v ◦ i. The deﬁnition of substitution and the proofs of its key properties were rather tedious. An alternative is to separate free and bound variables into diﬀerent syntactic categories so that capture is impossible. A particularly popular scheme, using numerical indices indicating nesting degree for bound variables, is given by de Bruijn (1972). However, this has some drawbacks of its own. 3.5 Prenex normal form A ﬁrst-order formula is said to be in prenex normal form (PNF) if all quantiﬁers occur on the outside with a body (or ‘matrix’) where only propositional connectives are used. For example, ∀x. ∃y. ∀z. P (x) ∧ P (y) ⇒ P (z) is in PNF but (∃x. P (x)) ⇒ ∃y. P (y) ∧ ∀z. P (z) is not, because quantiﬁed subformulas are combined using propositional connectives. We will show in this section how to transform an arbitrary ﬁrst-order formula into a logically equivalent one in PNF. When implementing DNF in propositional logic (Section 2.6) we considered two approaches, one based on truth tables and the other repeatedly applying tautological transformations like p ∧ (q ∨ r) −→ (p ∧ q) ∨ (p ∧ r). In ﬁrst-order logic there is no analogue of truth tables, but we can similarly transform a formula to PNF by repeatedly transforming subformulas into logical equivalents that move the quantiﬁers further out. There is no convenient way of pulling quantiﬁers out of logical equivalences, so it’s useful to eliminate them as we did in propositional NNF. In fact, it simpliﬁes matters if we follow a similar pattern to the earlier DNF transformation: • simplify away False, True, vacuous quantiﬁcation, etc.; • eliminate implication and equivalence, push down negations; • pull out quantiﬁers. The simpliﬁcation stage proceeds as before for eliminating False and True from formulas. But we also eliminate vacuous quantiﬁers, where the quantiﬁed variable does not occur free in the body.

140

First-order logic

Theorem 3.9 If x ∈ FV(p) then ∀x. p is logically equivalent to p. Proof The formula ∀x. p holds in a model M and valuation v if and only if for each a in the domain of M , p holds in M under valuation (x → a)v. However, since x is not free in p, this is the case precisely if p holds in M and v, given that the domain is nonempty. Similarly, if x ∈ FV(p) then ∃x. p is logically equivalent to p. Thus we can see that the following simpliﬁcation function always returns a logical equivalent: let simplify1 fm = match fm with Forall(x,p) -> if mem x (fv p) then fm else p | Exists(x,p) -> if mem x (fv p) then fm else p | _ -> psimplify1 fm;;

and hence we can apply it repeatedly at depth: let rec simplify fm = match fm with Not p -> simplify1 (Not(simplify p)) | And(p,q) -> simplify1 (And(simplify p,simplify q)) | Or(p,q) -> simplify1 (Or(simplify p,simplify q)) | Imp(p,q) -> simplify1 (Imp(simplify p,simplify q)) | Iff(p,q) -> simplify1 (Iff(simplify p,simplify q)) | Forall(x,p) -> simplify1(Forall(x,simplify p)) | Exists(x,p) -> simplify1(Exists(x,simplify p)) | _ -> fm;;

For example: # # # -

simplify <<true ==> (p <=> (p <=> false))>>;; : fol formula = <

~p>> simplify <<exists x y z. P(x) ==> Q(z) ==> false>>;; : fol formula = <<exists x z. P(x) ==> ~Q(z)>> simplify <<(forall x y. P(x) \/ (P(y) /\ false)) ==> exists z. Q>>;; : fol formula = <<(forall x. P(x)) ==> Q>>

Next, we transform into NNF by eliminating implication and equivalence and pushing down negations. Recall the De Morgan laws, which can be used repeatedly to obtain the equivalences: ¬(p1 ∧ p2 ∧ · · · ∧ pn ) ⇔ ¬p1 ∨ ¬p2 ∨ · · · ∨ ¬pn , ¬(p1 ∨ p2 ∨ · · · ∨ pn ) ⇔ ¬p1 ∧ ¬p2 ∧ · · · ∧ ¬pn . By analogy, we have the following ‘inﬁnite De Morgan laws’ for quantiﬁers. The logical equivalence should be similarly clear; for example if it is not the

3.5 Prenex normal form

141

case that P (x) holds for all x, there must exist some x for which P (x) does not hold, and vice versa: ¬(∀x. p) ⇔ ∃x. ¬p, ¬(∃x. p) ⇔ ∀x. ¬p. These justify additional transformations to push negation down through quantiﬁers, to supplement the transformations already used in the propositional case. Thus we deﬁne: let rec nnf fm = match fm with And(p,q) -> And(nnf p,nnf q) | Or(p,q) -> Or(nnf p,nnf q) | Imp(p,q) -> Or(nnf(Not p),nnf q) | Iff(p,q) -> Or(And(nnf p,nnf q),And(nnf(Not p),nnf(Not q))) | Not(Not p) -> nnf p | Not(And(p,q)) -> Or(nnf(Not p),nnf(Not q)) | Not(Or(p,q)) -> And(nnf(Not p),nnf(Not q)) | Not(Imp(p,q)) -> And(nnf p,nnf(Not q)) | Not(Iff(p,q)) -> Or(And(nnf p,nnf(Not q)),And(nnf(Not p),nnf q)) | Forall(x,p) -> Forall(x,nnf p) | Exists(x,p) -> Exists(x,nnf p) | Not(Forall(x,p)) -> Exists(x,nnf(Not p)) | Not(Exists(x,p)) -> Forall(x,nnf(Not p)) | _ -> fm;;

For example: # nnf <<(forall x. P(x)) ==> ((exists y. Q(y)) <=> exists z. P(z) /\ Q(z))>>;; - : fol formula = <<(exists x. ~P(x)) \/ (exists y. Q(y)) /\ (exists z. P(z) /\ Q(z)) \/ (forall y. ~Q(y)) /\ (forall z. ~P(z) \/ ~Q(z))>>

Now we come to the really distinctive part of PNF, pulling out the quantiﬁers. By the time we have simpliﬁed and made the NNF transformation, any quantiﬁers not already at the outside must be connected by ‘∧’ or ‘∨’, since negations have been pushed down past them to the atomic formulas while other propositional connectives have been eliminated. Thus, the crux is to pull quantiﬁers upward in formulas like p ∧ (∃x. q). Once again by inﬁnite analogy with the DNF distribution rule: p ∧ (q1 ∨ · · · ∨ qn ) ⇔ p ∧ q1 ∨ · · · ∨ p ∧ qn it would seem that the following should be logically valid: p ∧ (∃x. q) ⇔ ∃x. p ∧ q.

142

First-order logic

This is almost true, but we have to watch out for variable capture if x is free in p. For example, the following isn’t logically valid: P (x) ∧ (∃x. Q(x)) ⇔ ∃x. P (x) ∧ Q(x). We can always avoid such problems by renaming the bound variable, if necessary, to some y that is not free in either p or q: p ∧ (∃x. q) ⇔ ∃y. p ∧ (subst (x |⇒ y) q). This equivalence can be justiﬁed rigorously using the theorems from the previous section. By deﬁnition, in a model M (with domain D) and valuation v, the formula p ∧ (∃x. q) holds if holds M v p and there exists some a ∈ D such that holds M ((x → a)v) q. The formula ∃y. p ∧ (subst (x |⇒ y) q) holds if there is an a ∈ D such that both holds M ((y → a)v) p and holds M ((y → a)v) (subst (x |⇒ y) q). However, since by construction y is not free in the whole formula and hence not free in p, Theorem 3.2 shows that holds M ((y → a)v) p is equivalent to holds M v p. As for holds M ((y → a)v) (subst (x |⇒ y) q), this is by Theorem 3.7 equivalent to holds M (termval M ((y → a)v) ◦ subst (x |⇒ y)) q and hence to holds M ((x → a)v) q as required. Exactly analogous results allow us to pull either universal or existential quantiﬁers past conjunction or disjunction. If any of them seem doubtful, they can be rigorously justiﬁed in a similar way: (∀x. p) ∧ q ⇔ ∀y. (subst (x |⇒ y) p) ∧ q p ∧ (∀x. q) ⇔ ∀y. p ∧ (subst (x |⇒ y) q) (∀x. p) ∨ q ⇔ ∀y. (subst (x |⇒ y) p) ∨ q p ∨ (∀x. q) ⇔ ∀y. p ∨ (subst (x |⇒ y) q) (∃x. p) ∧ q ⇔ ∃y. (subst (x |⇒ y) p) ∧ q p ∧ (∃x. q) ⇔ ∃y. p ∧ (subst (x |⇒ y) q) (∃x. p) ∨ q ⇔ ∃y. (subst (x |⇒ y) p) ∨ q p ∨ (∃x. q) ⇔ ∃y. p ∨ (subst (x |⇒ y) q) In the special cases that both immediate subformulas are quantiﬁed, we can sometimes produce a result with fewer quantiﬁers using these equivalences, where z is chosen not to be free in the original formula. (∀x. p) ∧ (∀y. q) ⇔ ∀z. (subst (x |⇒ z) p) ∧ (subst (y |⇒ z) q), (∃x. p) ∨ (∃y. q) ⇔ ∃z. (subst (x |⇒ z) p) ∨ (subst (y |⇒ z) q).

3.5 Prenex normal form

143

However, the following are not logically valid: (∀x. p) ∨ (∀y. q) ⇔ ∀z. (subst (x |⇒ z) p) ∨ (subst (y |⇒ z) q), (∃x. p) ∧ (∃y. q) ⇔ ∃z. (subst (x |⇒ z) p) ∧ (subst (y |⇒ z) q). For example, the ﬁrst implies that (∀n. Even(n)) ∨ (∀n. Odd(n))) is equivalent to ∀n.Even(n)∨Odd(n), yet the former is false in the obvious interpretation in terms of evenness and oddity of integers, while the latter is true. Similarly, the second implies that (∃n. Even(n)) ∧ (∃n. Odd(n)) is equivalent to ∃n. Even(n) ∧ Odd(n), yet in the obvious interpretation the former is true and the latter false. Now, to pull out all quantiﬁers that occur as immediate subformulas of either conjunction or disjunction, we implement these transformations in OCaml: let rec pullquants fm = match fm with And(Forall(x,p),Forall(y,q)) -> pullq(true,true) fm mk_forall mk_and x y p q | Or(Exists(x,p),Exists(y,q)) -> pullq(true,true) fm mk_exists mk_or x y p q | And(Forall(x,p),q) -> pullq(true,false) fm mk_forall mk_and x x p q | And(p,Forall(y,q)) -> pullq(false,true) fm mk_forall mk_and y y p q | Or(Forall(x,p),q) -> pullq(true,false) fm mk_forall mk_or x x p q | Or(p,Forall(y,q)) -> pullq(false,true) fm mk_forall mk_or y y p q | And(Exists(x,p),q) -> pullq(true,false) fm mk_exists mk_and x x p q | And(p,Exists(y,q)) -> pullq(false,true) fm mk_exists mk_and y y p q | Or(Exists(x,p),q) -> pullq(true,false) fm mk_exists mk_or x x p q | Or(p,Exists(y,q)) -> pullq(false,true) fm mk_exists mk_or y y p q | _ -> fm

where for economy various similar subcases are dealt with by the mutually recursive function pullq, which calls the main pullquants functions again on the body to pull up further quantiﬁers: and pullq(l,r) fm quant op x y p q = let z = variant x (fv fm) in let p’ = if l then subst (x |=> Var z) p else p and q’ = if r then subst (y |=> Var z) q else q in quant z (pullquants(op p’ q’));;

The overall prenexing function leaves quantiﬁed formulas alone, and for conjunctions and disjunctions recursively prenexes the immediate subformulas and then uses pullquants:

144

First-order logic

let rec prenex fm = match fm with Forall(x,p) -> Forall(x,prenex p) | Exists(x,p) -> Exists(x,prenex p) | And(p,q) -> pullquants(And(prenex p,prenex q)) | Or(p,q) -> pullquants(Or(prenex p,prenex q)) | _ -> fm;;

Combining this with the NNF and simpliﬁcation stages we get: let pnf fm = prenex(nnf(simplify fm));;

for example: # pnf <<(forall x. P(x) \/ R(y)) ==> exists y z. Q(y) \/ ~(exists z. P(z) /\ Q(z))>>;; - : fol formula = <<exists x. forall z. ~P(x) /\ ~R(y) \/ Q(x) \/ ~P(z) \/ ~Q(z)>>

3.6 Skolemization Prenex normal form separates out the quantiﬁers from the propositional part or ‘matrix’, but the quantiﬁer preﬁx may still contain an arbitrarily complicated nesting of universal and existential quantiﬁers. We can go further, eliminating existential quantiﬁers and leaving only universal ones using a technique called Skolemization after Thoraf Skolem (1928). Note that the following are generally considered to be mathematically equivalent: (1) for all x ∈ D, there exists a y ∈ D such that P [x, y]; (2) there exists an f : D → D such that for all x ∈ D, P [x, f (x)]. One direction is relatively easy: if (2) holds then by taking y = f (x) we see that (1) does too. The other direction is subtler: even if for each x there is at least one y such that P [x, y], there might be many such, and to get a function f we need to restrict ourselves to one speciﬁc y for each x. In general, the assertion that there always exists such a selection of exactly one y per x, even if we can’t write down a recipe for choosing it, is the famous Axiom of Choice, AC (Moore 1982; Jech 1973). In accordance with usual mathematical practice, we will simply assume this axiom, though this is only a convenience and we could avoid it if necessary.† †

The Axiom of Choice is unproblematically derivable when the domain D is wellordered, in particular countable, because we can deﬁne f (x) as the least y such that P [x, y]. It is a consequence of the downward L¨ owenheim–Skolem Theorem 3.49 that for our countable languages we may essentially restrict our attention to countable models. Although our proof of that result uses

3.6 Skolemization

145

Even accepting the equivalence of (1) and (2), the latter doesn’t correspond to the semantics of a ﬁrst-order formula. If we were allowed to existentially quantify the function symbols, extending the notion of semantics in an intuitively plausible way, this equivalence means that the following should be logically valid: (∀x. ∃y. P [x, y]) ⇔ (∃f. ∀x. P [x, f (x)]), and more generally: (∀x1 , . . . , xn . ∃y. P [x1 , . . . , xn , y]) ⇔ (∃f. ∀x1 , . . . , xn . P [x1 , . . . , xn , f (x1 , . . . , xn )]). In a suitable system of second-order logic, these are indeed logical equivalences, and we can use them to transform the quantiﬁer preﬁx of a prenex formula so that all the existential quantiﬁers come before all the universal ones, e.g. (∀x. ∃y. ∀u. ∃v. P [u, v, x, y]) ⇔ (∃f. ∀x u. ∃v. P [u, v, x, f (x)]) ⇔ (∃f g. ∀x u. P [u, g(x, u), x, f (x)]). As noted, neither the transforming equivalences nor even the eventual results are expressible as ﬁrst-order formulas, so we can’t follow this procedure exactly. However, we can get roughly the same eﬀect if we accept a transformed formula that is not logically equivalent but merely equisatisﬁable (see Section 2.8). The point is that an existential quantiﬁcation over functions is already implicit in an assertion of satisﬁability: a formula is satisﬁable if there exists some domain and interpretation of the function and predicate symbols that satisﬁes it. Thus we are justiﬁed in simply Skolemizing, i.e. making the same transformation without the explicit quantiﬁcation over functions, e.g. transforming the formula ∀x. ∃y. ∀u. ∃v. P [u, v, x, y] to: ∀x u. P [u, g(x, u), x, f (x)], where f and g are distinct function symbols not present in the original formula. Indeed, since universal quantiﬁcation over free variables is implicit in the deﬁnition of satisfaction, we can equally well pass to Skolemization, a more elaborate method due to Henkin (1949) avoids this, instead expanding the language with new constants in a countable set of stages. Several texts such as Enderton (1972) prove completeness in this way.

146

First-order logic

P [u, g(x, u), x, f (x)]. Although no two of these formulas are logically equivalent, they are all equisatisﬁable. Hence, if we want to decide if the ﬁrst formula is satisﬁable, we need only consider the last one, which has no explicit quantiﬁers at all. We will see in the next section that the satisﬁability problem for such quantiﬁer-free formulas can be tackled using techniques from propositional logic. But let us ﬁrst give a more careful and rigorous justiﬁcation of the main Skolemizing transformation, deﬁning as we go some of the auxiliary notions used in the actual implementation. It is necessary to introduce new function symbols called Skolem functions (or Skolem constants in the nullary case), and these must not occur in the original formula. So, ﬁrst of all, we deﬁne a procedure to get the functions already present in a term and in a formula, so that we can avoid clashes with them. This is straightforward to implement; note that we identify functions by name–arity pairs since functions of the same name but diﬀerent arities are treated as distinct. let rec funcs tm = match tm with Var x -> [] | Fn(f,args) -> itlist (union ** funcs) args [f,length args];; let functions fm = atom_union (fun (R(p,a)) -> itlist (union ** funcs) a []) fm;;

Just as holds M v p only depends on the values of v(x) for x ∈ FV(p) (Theorem 3.2), it only depends on the interpretation M gives to functions that actually appear in p. (The proof of Theorem 3.2 is routinely adapted; indeed things are somewhat simpler since binding of variables plays no role.) When we say from now on ‘p does not involve the n-ary function symbol f ’, we mean formally that (f, n) ∈ functions p. Theorem 3.10 If p is a formula not involving the n-ary function symbol f , with FV(∃y. p) = {x1 , . . . , xn } (distinct xi in an arbitrary order), then given any interpretation M there is another interpretation M that diﬀers from M only in the interpretation of f , such that in all valuations v: holds M v (∃y. p) = holds M v (subst (y |⇒ f (x1 , . . . , xn )) p). and also holds M v (∃y. p) = holds M v (∃y. p) as p does not involve f .

3.6 Skolemization

147

Proof We deﬁne M to be M with the interpretation fM of f changed as follows. Given a1 , . . . , an ∈ D, if there is some b ∈ D such that holds M (x1 |⇒ a1 , . . . , xn |⇒ an , y |⇒ b) p then fM (a1 , . . . , an ) is some such b, otherwise it is any arbitrary b. The point of this deﬁnition is that for an arbitrary assignment v the assertions holds M ((y → fM (v(x1 ), . . . , v(xn ))) v) p and for some b ∈ D, holds M ((y → b) v) p are equivalent, since if there is such a b, fM will pick one. Using Theorem 3.7 and that equivalence we deduce holds M v (subst (y |⇒ f (x1 , . . . , xn )) p) = holds M (termval M v ◦ (y |⇒ f (x1 , . . . , xn ))) p = holds M ((y → termval M v (f (x1 , . . . , xn ))) v) p = holds M ((y → fM (v(x1 ), . . . , v(xn ))) v) p = for some b ∈ D, holds M ((y → b) v) p = holds M v (∃y. p) as required. Since this equivalence holds for all valuations, it propagates up through a formula when a subformula is replaced, since in the recursive deﬁnitions of termval and holds only the valuation changes. Thus the theorem establishes the following: if we take some arbitrary interpretation M and a formula p with some subformula ∃y. q, then provided f does not occur in the whole formula p, we can Skolemize the subformula with f and get a new formula p , and a new model M diﬀering from M only in the interpretation of f , such that for all valuations v: holds M v p = holds M v p . This can then be done repeatedly, replacing all existentially quantiﬁed subformulas, at each stage choosing some function not present in the formula as processed so far. Starting with the initial formula p and some interpretation M , we get a sequence of formulas p1 , . . . , pm and interpretations M1 , . . . , Mm such that each Mk+1 modiﬁes Mk ’s interpretation of a new Skolem function only, and holds Mk v pk = holds Mk+1 v pk+1.

148

First-order logic

By induction, we have for all valuations v and all M : holds M v p = holds Mm v pm , where pm contains no existential quantiﬁers. Thus, if the original formula p is satisﬁable, by some model M , then the Skolemized formula pm is satisﬁed by Mm . None of this depends on any kind of initial normal form transformation; we are free to apply Skolemization to any existentially quantiﬁed subformula, and if the original formula is satisﬁable, so is its Skolemization. Conversely, the Skolemized form of an existential formula implies the original, so provided all Skolemized subformulas occur positively (in the sense of Section 2.5), the overall Skolemized formula logically implies the original, so is equisatisﬁable. Without this condition, we cannot expect it; for example if we Skolemize the second existential subformula in the unsatisﬁable formula (∃y. P (y)) ∧ ¬(∃x. P (x)) we get the satisﬁable (∃y. P (y)) ∧ ¬P (c). Thus, it makes sense to ﬁrst transform the formula into NNF so we can identify positive and negative subformulas, and then Skolemize away the existential quantiﬁers, which all occur positively. We could go further and put the formula into PNF, but it’s often advantageous to apply Skolemization ﬁrst, since the PNF transformation can introduce more free variables into the scope of an existential quantiﬁer, necessitating more arguments on the Skolem functions. For example ∀x z. x = z ∨ ∃y. x · y = 1 can be Skolemized directly to give ∀x z. x = z ∨ x · f (x) = 1, whereas if we ﬁrst prenex to ∀x z. ∃y. x = z ∨ x · y = 1, subsequent Skolemization gives ∀x z.x = z ∨x·f (x, z) = 1. For the same reason, it seems sensible to Skolemize outer quantiﬁers before inner ones, since this also reduces the number of free variables, e.g. ∃x y. x · y = 1 −→ ∃y. c · y = 1 −→ c · d = 1 rather than ∃x y. x · y = 1 −→ ∃x. x · f (x) = 1 −→ c · f (c) = 1. So, for the overall Skolemization function, we simply recursively descend the formula, Skolemizing any existential formulas and then proceeding to subformulas. We retain a list of the functions fns already in the formula, so we can avoid using them as Skolem functions. (We conservatively avoid even functions with the same name and diﬀerent arity, which is not logically necessary but may sometimes give less confusing results. A reﬁnement in the other direction would be to re-use the same Skolem function for identical

3.6 Skolemization

149

Skolem formulas; a little reﬂection on the main Skolemization theorem shows that this is permissible.) let rec skolem fm fns = match fm with Exists(y,p) -> let xs = fv(fm) in let f = variant (if xs = [] then "c_"^y else "f_"^y) fns in let fx = Fn(f,map (fun x -> Var x) xs) in skolem (subst (y |=> fx) p) (f::fns) | Forall(x,p) -> let p’,fns’ = skolem p fns in Forall(x,p’),fns’ | And(p,q) -> skolem2 (fun (p,q) -> And(p,q)) (p,q) fns | Or(p,q) -> skolem2 (fun (p,q) -> Or(p,q)) (p,q) fns | _ -> fm,fns

When dealing with binary connectives, the set of functions to avoid needs to be updated with new Skolem functions introduced into one formula before tackling the other, hence the auxiliary function skolem2: and skolem2 cons (p,q) fns = let p’,fns’ = skolem p fns in let q’,fns’’ = skolem q fns’ in cons(p’,q’),fns’’;;

The skolem function is speciﬁcally intended to be applied after NNF transformation, and hence returns unchanged any formulas involving negation, implication or equivalence, as well as simply atomic formulas. For the overall Skolemization function we simplify, transform into NNF then apply skolem with an appropriate initial set of function symbols to avoid: let askolemize fm = fst(skolem (nnf(simplify fm)) (map fst (functions fm)));;

Frequently we just want to transform the result into PNF and omit the universal quantiﬁers, giving an equisatisﬁable formula with no explicit quantiﬁers. The last step needs a new function, albeit a fairly simple one: let rec specialize fm = match fm with Forall(x,p) -> specialize p | _ -> fm;;

and then we just put all the pieces together: let skolemize fm = specialize(pnf(askolemize fm));;

150

First-order logic

For example: # skolemize <<exists y. x < y ==> forall u. exists v. x * u < y * v>>;; - : fol formula = <<~x < f_y(x) \/ x * u < f_y(x) * f_v(u,x)>> # skolemize < (exists y z. Q(y) \/ ~(exists z. P(z) /\ Q(z)))>>;; - : fol formula = <<~P(x) \/ Q(c_y) \/ ~P(z) \/ ~Q(z)>>

Although in practice we will usually be interested in Skolemizing away all existential quantiﬁers in a formula or set of formulas, it’s worth pointing out that we don’t need to do so. If we Skolemize a formula p to get p∗ , not only are the two formulas equisatisﬁable, but provided none of the new Skolem functions appear in some other formula q, so are p∧q and p∗ ∧q, just applying the same reasoning to p∧q but leaving existential quantiﬁers in q alone. This further implies that for sentences p and q, we have |= p ⇒ q iﬀ |= p∗ ⇒ q provided q does not involve any of the Skolem functions, since |= p ⇒ q iﬀ p ∧ ¬q is unsatisﬁable. We express this by saying that Skolemization is conservative: if q follows from a Skolemized formula, it must follow from the un-Skolemized one, provided q does not itself involve any of the Skolem functions. In a diﬀerent direction we can immediately deduce the following theorem, though the direct proof is not hard either: Theorem 3.11 A formula p is valid iﬀ p is, where p is the result of replacing all free variables in p with distinct constants not present in p. Proof Generalize over all free variables, negate, and apply Skolemization to those outer quantiﬁed variables. Skolem functions may seem purely an artifact of formal logic, but the use of functions instead of quantiﬁer nesting to indicate dependencies is common in mathematics, even if it is sometimes unconscious and only semi-formal. For example, analysis textbooks like Burkill and Burkill (1970) sometimes write for a typical − δ logical assertion of the form ‘∀. > 0 ⇒ ∃δ. . . .’ something like ‘for all > 0 there is a δ() > 0 such that . . . ’, emphasizing the (possible) dependence of δ on by the notation ‘δ()’. As the discussions in this section show, such functional notation can be taken at face value by regarding δ as a Skolem function arising from Skolemizing ∀. ∃δ. P [, δ] into ∃δ. ∀. P [, δ()]. In fact, Skolem functions can express more reﬁned dependencies than ﬁrst-order quantiﬁers can, suggesting the study of more general ‘branching’ quantiﬁers (Hintikka 1996).

3.7 Canonical models

151

3.7 Canonical models A quantiﬁer-free formula can be considered as a formula of propositional logic. Instead of prop as the primitive set of propositional variables, we have relations applied to terms, corresponding to our OCaml type fol, but this makes no essential diﬀerence, since the theoretical results depended very little on the nature of the underlying set. In particular, a given ﬁrst-order formula can only involve ﬁnitely many variables, functions and predicates, so the set of atomic propositions is countable, and our proof of propositionally compactness (Theorem 2.13) can be carried over. We will use a slight variant of the notion of propositional evaluation eval where for convenience a propositional valuation d maps atomic formulas themselves to truth values. The function pholds determines whether a formula holds in the sense of propositional logic for this notion of valuation. (This function will fail if applied to a formula containing quantiﬁers.) let pholds d fm = eval fm (fun p -> d(Atom p));;

The modiﬁed notion of valuation is purely cosmetic, to avoid the repeated appearance of the Atom mapping in our theorems, but composition with Atom deﬁnes a natural bijection with the original notion of propositional valuation, so a quantiﬁer-free formula p is valid (respectively satisﬁable) in the sense of propositional logic iﬀ pholds d p for all (resp. some) valuations d. We now prove also that a quantiﬁer-free formula is valid in the ﬁrst-order sense if and only if it is valid in the propositional sense, by setting up a correspondence between ﬁrst-order interpretations and valuations and corresponding propositional valuations. One direction is fairly straightforward. Every interpretation M and valuation v deﬁnes a corresponding propositional valuation of the atomic formulas in a natural way, namely holds M v. We then have: Theorem 3.12 If p is a quantiﬁer-free formula, then for all interpretations M and valuations v we have pholds (holds M v) p = holds M v p. Proof A straightforward structural induction on the structure of p, since for quantiﬁer-free formulas the deﬁnitions of holds and pholds have the same recursive pattern, while for atomic formulas the result holds by deﬁnition.

Corollary 3.13 If a quantiﬁer-free ﬁrst-order formula is a propositional tautology, it is also ﬁrst-order valid.

152

First-order logic

Proof In any interpretation M and valuation v, we have shown in the previous theorem that holds M v p = pholds (holds M v) p. However, if p is a propositional tautology, the right-hand side is just ‘true’. Now we turn to the opposite direction: given a propositional valuation d on the atomic formulas, constructing an interpretation M and valuation v such that holds M v p = pholds d p. Again, it’s enough to make sure this is true for atomic formulas, since as noted in the proof of Theorem 3.12 the recursions of holds and pholds are exactly the same for quantiﬁerfree formulas. All atomic formulas are of the form R(t1 , . . . , tn ), and by deﬁnition holds M v (R(t1 , . . . , tn )) = RM (termval M v t1 , . . . , termval M v tn ). We want to concoct an interpretation M and valuation v such that this is the same as pholds d (R(t1 , . . . , tn )). It suﬃces to construct the interpretation of functions and the valuation such that distinct tuples of terms (t1 , . . . , tn ) map to distinct tuples (termval M v t1 , . . . , termval M v tn ) of domain elements, for then we can choose the interpretations of predicate symbols RM as required to match the propositional valuation d. (This would not be possible if d(R(s1 , . . . , sn )) = d(R(t1 , . . . , tn )) yet the tuples of terms had the same interpretation.) This condition can be achieved in various ways, but perhaps the most straightforward is to take for the domain of the model some subset of the set of terms itself. A canonical interpretation for a formula p is one whose domain is some subset of the set of terms and in which each n-ary function f occurring in p is interpreted in the natural way as a syntax constructor, i.e. fM (t1 , . . . , tn ) = f (t1 , . . . , tn ), or properly speaking in terms of our OCaml implementation, Fn(f, [t1 ; · · · ; tn ]). Since interpretations of function symbols need to map Dn → D, we require that the domain is closed under application of functions occurring in p, i.e. if t1 , . . . , tn ∈ D then f (t1 , . . . , tn ) ∈ D, and in particular c ∈ D for each constant (nullary function) in p; one possibility is just to take for D the set of all terms. Now, given a propositional valuation d, we can construct a corresponding canonical interpretation Md by interpreting the functions as we must: fMd (t1 , . . . , tn ) = f (t1 , . . . , tn ) and predicates as follows: RMd (t1 , . . . , tn ) = d(R(t1 , . . . , tn )).

3.7 Canonical models

153

Now we have the required correspondence, at least for the identity valuation Var that maps a variable ‘to itself’. This has the unsurprising property that termval Md Var is the identity: Lemma 3.14 For all terms t, termval Md Var t = t. Proof By induction on the structure of t. If t is a variable Var(x) then termval Md Var (Var(x)) = Var(x) by deﬁnition. Otherwise, if t is of the form f (t1 , . . . , tn ), we have termval Md Var tk = tk for each k = 1, . . . , n by the inductive hypothesis, and so termval Md Var (f (t1 , . . . , tn )) = fMd (termval Md Var t1 , . . . , termval Md Var tn ) = fMd (t1 , . . . , tn ) = f (t1 , . . . , tn ) = t as required. Theorem 3.15 If d is a propositional valuation of atomic formulas, then for any quantiﬁer-free formula p we have: holds Md Var p = pholds d p. Proof By induction on the structure of p. For atomic formulas: holds Md Var (R(t1 , . . . , tn )) = RMd (termval Md Var t1 , . . . , termval Md Var tn ) = RMd (t1 , . . . , tn ) = d(R(t1 , . . . , tn )) = pholds d (R(t1 , . . . , tn )). The other cases are straightforward since for quantiﬁer-free formulas the deﬁnitions of holds and pholds have the same recursive pattern. This allows us to prove that ﬁrst-order and propositional validity coincide. Corollary 3.16 A quantiﬁer-free ﬁrst-order formula is a propositional tautology if and only if it is ﬁrst-order valid. Proof The left-to-right direction was proved in Corollary 3.13. Conversely, suppose p is ﬁrst-order valid. Then for any propositional valuation d we have

154

First-order logic

by the above theorem pholds d p = holds Md Var p. However, since p is ﬁrst-order valid, it holds in all interpretations and valuations so the righthand side is ‘true’. This is an interesting result, but for our overall project we’re more interested in analogous results for satisﬁability, since Skolemization (our means of reaching a quantiﬁer-free formula) is satisﬁability-preserving but not validitypreserving. For ground formulas, everything is easy: Corollary 3.17 A ground formula is propositionally valid iﬀ it is ﬁrst-order valid, and propositionally satisﬁable iﬀ it is ﬁrst-order satisﬁable. Proof The ﬁrst part is a special case of Corollary 3.16, and the second part follows because validity of p is the same as unsatisﬁability of ¬p for propositional logic and for ground formulas in ﬁrst-order logic. Thus we are justiﬁed in switching freely between propositional and ﬁrstorder validity or satisﬁability for ground formulas. What about quantiﬁerfree formulas in general? Again, one way is straightforward: Corollary 3.18 If a quantiﬁer-free ﬁrst-order formula is ﬁrst-order satisﬁable, it is also (propositionally) satisﬁable. Proof If p were not propositionally satisﬁable, then ¬p would be propositionally valid and hence, by Corollary 3.16, ﬁrst-order valid, so p cannot also be ﬁrst-order satisﬁable. However, a little reﬂection shows that the converse relationship is not so simple. For example, P (x) ∧ ¬P (y) is satisﬁable as a propositional formula, since the atomic subformulas P (x) and P (y) are distinct and can be interpreted as ‘true’ and ‘false’ respectively. However, it is not satisﬁable as a ﬁrst-order formula, since a model for it would have to be found where it holds in all valuations, in particular those that assign x and y the same domain value. We proceed by ﬁrst generalizing Theorem 3.15. Note that a valuation in a canonical model is a mapping from variable names to terms, and so can be considered as an instantiation. Lemma 3.19 If M is any canonical interpretation and v any valuation then for any term t we have termval M v t = tsubst v t.

3.7 Canonical models

155

Proof The deﬁnitions of termval M and tsubst are the same in any canonical model because each fM is just f as a syntax constructor. We ﬁrst note a simple consequence, though it is also relatively easy to prove directly. Corollary 3.20 If i and j are two instantiations and t any term, then tsubst i (tsubst j t) = tsubst (tsubst i ◦ j) t. Proof Pick an arbitrary canonical interpretation M (e.g. interpret all relations as identically false). By Lemma 3.19 the claim is the same as termval M i (tsubst j t) = termval M (termval M i ◦ j) t, which is exactly Theorem 3.5. Our main goal, however, is the following. Theorem 3.21 If p is a quantiﬁer-free formula, d is a propositional valuation of atomic formulas and M is some canonical interpretation for p with RM (t1 , . . . , tn ) = d(R(t1 , . . . , tn )), then for any valuation v we have: holds M v p = pholds d (subst v p). Proof By induction on the structure of p. For atomic formulas: holds M v (R(t1 , . . . , tn )) = RM (termval M v t1 , . . . , termval M v tn ) = RM (tsubst v t1 , . . . , tsubst v tn ) = d(R(tsubst v t1 , . . . , tsubst v tn ) = d(subst v (R(t1 , . . . , tn ))) = pholds d (subst v (R(t1 , . . . , tn ))), while for the other classes of formulas, the recursions match up as before. For practical purposes, it can be convenient to make the domain of a canonical model as small as possible. The Herbrand universe or Herbrand domain for a particular ﬁrst-order language is the set of all ground terms of that language, i.e. all terms that can be built from constants and function symbols of the language without using variables, except that if the language has no constants, a constant c is added to make the Herbrand universe nonempty. Usually in what follows we are interested in the language of a

156

First-order logic

single formula p, and we will refer simply to the Herbrand universe for p, meaning for the language of p. We can get the set of the functions in a term, separated into nullary and non-nullary and including the tweak for the case where we want to add a constant to the language, as follows: let herbfuns fm = let cns,fns = partition (fun (_,ar) -> ar = 0) (functions fm) in if cns = [] then ["c",0],fns else cns,fns;;

Note that the Herbrand universe for p is inﬁnite precisely if p involves a non-nullary function; for example, with just a constant c and a unary function f , the Herbrand universe is {c, f (c), f (f (c)), f (f (f (c))), . . .}. A Herbrand interpretation is a canonical interpretation whose domain is the Herbrand universe for some suitable language (usually the symbols occurring in the formula(s) of interest) and a Herbrand model of a set of formulas is a model of those formulas that is a Herbrand interpretation. We will refer to some subst i p where i maps into the Herbrand universe as a ground instance of p. Theorem 3.22 A Herbrand interpretation H satisﬁes a quantiﬁer-free formula p iﬀ it satisﬁes the set of all ground instances subst i p. Proof If H satisﬁes p, it also satisﬁes all ground instances, since by Theorem 3.7, holds H v (subst i p) = holds H (termval H v ◦ i) p = true. Conversely, suppose H satisﬁes all ground instances. Any valuation v for H is a mapping into ground terms, so using Lemma 3.19 we have termval H v ◦ v = tsubst v ◦ v = v. But then by Theorem 3.7 we have holds H v p = holds H (termval H v ◦ v) p = holds H v (tsubst v p) = true. Indeed, the same kind of result holds not just for satisfaction in a particular Herbrand model, but for satisﬁability as a whole. Theorem 3.23 A quantiﬁer-free formula p is ﬁrst-order satisﬁable iﬀ the set of all its ground instances is (propositionally) satisﬁable. Proof If p is satisﬁable, then it holds in some model M under all valuations. Let i be any ground instantiation, i.e. mapping from the variables to members of the Herbrand universe. Using Theorem 3.7 and Theorem 3.12 we deduce that, for any valuation v: pholds (holds M v) (subst i p) = holds M v (subst i p)

3.7 Canonical models

157

= holds M (termval M v ◦ i) p = true, so the propositional valuation holds M v simultaneously satisﬁes all ground instances of p. Conversely, if some propositional valuation d satisﬁes all ground instances, deﬁne a Herbrand interpretation H by RH (t1 , . . . , tn ) = d(R(t1 , . . . , tn )). By Theorem 3.21 we have for any valuation/ground instantiation i that holds H i p = pholds d (subst i p) = true and so H satisﬁes p. This crucial result is usually known as Herbrand’s theorem, though this is a misnomer.† By essentially the same proof, we can also deduce the following important equivalence, bypassing the propositional step. Theorem 3.24 A quantiﬁer-free formula has a model (i.e. is satisﬁable) iﬀ it has a Herbrand model. Proof The right-to-left direction is immediate since a Herbrand model is indeed a model. In the other direction, we just re-use both parts of the proof of Theorem 3.23, noting that the model constructed is indeed a Herbrand model. That is, if p has a model, then all its ground instances are propositionally satisﬁable, and therefore it has a Herbrand model. Note that this reasoning only covers quantiﬁer-free or universal formulas. For example, P (c) ∧ ∃x. ¬P (x) is satisﬁable (e.g. set P to ‘is even’ and c to zero on the natural numbers), but has no Herbrand model, since the Herbrand universe is just {c} and the formula fails in a 1-element model. For the same reason, analogous results to Theorems 3.23 and 3.24 fail for validity: P (c) ⇒ P (x) is not logically valid, but its only ground instance P (c) ⇒ P (c) is a propositional tautology and the formula holds in the Herbrand model with domain {c}. On the other hand, by similarly re-examining the proof of Theorem 3.16, one can deduce that a quantiﬁer-free formula is valid iﬀ it holds in all canonical models (not just those whose domain is the Herbrand universe). †

The theorem here was present with varying degrees of explicitness in earlier work of Skolem and G¨ odel and so is sometimes referred to as the Skolem–G¨ odel–Herbrand theorem. The theorem given by Herbrand (1930) has a similar ﬂavour but talks about proof rather than semantic validity, and in fact Herbrand’s original demonstration was not entirely correct (Andrews 2003).

158

First-order logic

3.8 Mechanizing Herbrand’s theorem After a lot of work, we have ﬁnally succeeded in reducing ﬁrst-order satisﬁability to propositional satisﬁability. But our triumph is marred by the fact that we need to test propositional satisﬁability of the set of all ground instances, of which there are usually inﬁnitely many. However, the compactness Theorem 2.13 for propositional logic comes to our rescue. Theorem 3.25 A quantiﬁer-free formula is ﬁrst-order satisﬁable iﬀ all ﬁnite sets of ground instances are (propositionally) satisﬁable. Proof Immediate from Herbrand’s Theorem 3.23 and compactness for propositional logic (Theorem 2.13). Corollary 3.26 A quantiﬁer-free formula p is ﬁrst-order unsatisﬁable iﬀ some ﬁnite set of ground instances is (propositionally) unsatisﬁable. Proof The contraposition of the previous theorem. This gives rise to a procedure whereby we can verify that a formula p is unsatisﬁable. We simply enumerate larger and larger sets of ground instances and test them for propositional satisﬁability. Provided that every ground instance appears eventually in the enumeration, we are sure that if p is unsatisﬁable we will eventually reach a ﬁnite unsatisﬁable set of propositional formulas. If p is in fact satisﬁable, this process may never terminate, so this is only a semi-decision procedure, but, as we’ll see in Section 7.6, this is the best we can hope for in general. In the late 1950s, perhaps inspired by a suggestion from A. Robinson (1957) at the 1954 Summer Institute for Symbolic Logic at Cornell University, there were several implementations of theorem-proving systems along these lines, one of the earliest being due to Gilmore (1960). Gilmore enumerated larger and larger sets of ground instances, at each stage checking for contradiction by putting them into disjunctive normal form and checking each disjunct for complementary literals. Let’s follow this approach to get an idea of how well it works. We need to set up an appropriate enumeration of the ground instances, or more precisely, of m-tuples of ground terms where m is the number of free variables in the formula. If we want to ensure that every unsatisﬁable formula will eventually be proved unsatisﬁable, then the enumeration must eventually include every possible ground instance. One reasonable approach is to ﬁrst generate all m-tuples involving no functions (i.e. just combinations

3.8 Mechanizing Herbrand’s theorem

159

of constant terms), then all those involving one function, then two, three, etc. Every tuple will appear eventually, and the ‘simpler’ possibilities will be tried ﬁrst. We can set up this enumeration via two mutually recursive functions, both taking among their arguments the set of constant terms cntms and the set of functions with their arities, funcs. The function groundterms enumerates all ground terms involving n functions. If n = 0 the constant terms are returned. Otherwise all possible functions are tried, and since we then need to ﬁll the argument places of each m-ary function with terms involving in total n - 1 functions, one already having been used, we recursively call groundtuples: let rec groundterms cntms funcs n = if n = 0 then cntms else itlist (fun (f,m) l -> map (fun args -> Fn(f,args)) (groundtuples cntms funcs (n - 1) m) @ l) funcs []

while the mutually recursive function groundtuples generates all m-tuples of ground terms involving (in total) n functions.† For all k up to n, this in turn tries all ways of occupying the ﬁrst argument place with a k-function term and then recursively produces all (m - 1)-tuples involving all the remaining n - k functions. and groundtuples cntms funcs n m = if m = 0 then if n = 0 then [[]] else [] else itlist (fun k l -> allpairs (fun h t -> h::t) (groundterms cntms funcs k) (groundtuples cntms funcs (n - k) (m - 1)) @ l) (0 -- n) [];;

Gilmore’s method can be considered just one member of a family of ‘Herbrand procedures’ that somehow test larger and larger conjunctions of ground instances until unsatisﬁability is veriﬁed. We can generalize over the way the satisﬁability test is done (tfn) and the modiﬁcation function (mfn) that augments the ground instances with a new instance, whatever form they may be stored in. This generalization, which not only saves code but emphasizes that the key ideas are independent of the particular propositional satisﬁability test at the core, is carried through in the following loop: †

Note that this can involve repeated recomputation of the same instances; a more eﬃcient approach would be to compute lower levels once and recall them when needed. But in our simple experiments this won’t be the time-critical aspect.

160

First-order logic

let rec herbloop mfn tfn fl0 cntms funcs fvs n fl tried tuples = print_string(string_of_int(length tried)^" ground instances tried; "^ string_of_int(length fl)^" items in list"); print_newline(); match tuples with [] -> let newtups = groundtuples cntms funcs n (length fvs) in herbloop mfn tfn fl0 cntms funcs fvs (n + 1) fl tried newtups | tup::tups -> let fl’ = mfn fl0 (subst(fpf fvs tup)) fl in if not(tfn fl’) then tup::tried else herbloop mfn tfn fl0 cntms funcs fvs n fl’ (tup::tried) tups;;

Several parameters are carried around unchanged: the modiﬁcation and testing function parameters, the initial formula in some transformed list representation (fl0), then constant terms cntms and functions funcs and the free variables fvs of the formula. The other arguments are n, the next level of the enumeration to generate, fl, the set of ground instances so far, tried, the instances tried, and tuples, the remaining ground instances in the current level. When tuples is empty, we simply generate the next level and step n up to n + 1. In the other case, we use the modiﬁcation function to update fl with another instance. If this is unsatisﬁable, then we return the successful set of instances tried; otherwise, we continue. In the particular case of the Gilmore procedure, formulas are maintained in fl0 and fl in a DNF representation, and the modiﬁcation function applies the instantiation to the starting formula fl0 and combines the DNFs by distribution: let gilmore_loop = let mfn djs0 ifn djs = filter (non trivial) (distrib (image (image ifn) djs0) djs) in herbloop mfn (fun djs -> djs <> []);;

We’re more usually interested in proving validity rather than unsatisﬁability. For this, we generalize, negate and Skolemize the initial formula and set up the appropriate sets of free variables, functions and constants. Then we simply start the main loop, and report if it terminates how many ground instances were tried: let gilmore fm = let sfm = skolemize(Not(generalize fm)) in let fvs = fv sfm and consts,funcs = herbfuns sfm in let cntms = image (fun (c,_) -> Fn(c,[])) consts in length(gilmore_loop (simpdnf sfm) cntms funcs fvs 0 [[]] [] []);;

3.8 Mechanizing Herbrand’s theorem

161

Let’s try out our new ﬁrst-order prover on some examples. We’ll start small: # gilmore <<exists x. forall y. P(x) ==> P(y)>>;; ... 1 ground instances tried; 1 items in list - : int = 2

So far, so good. This should be an easy problem. However, to clarify what’s going on inside, it’s worth tracing through this example. The negated formula, after Skolemization, is: # let sfm = skolemize(Not <<exists x. forall y. P(x) ==> P(y)>>);; val sfm : fol formula = <>

The reader can conﬁrm by running through the other steps inside gilmore that the set of constant terms consists purely of one ‘invented’ constant c† and there is a single unary Skolem function f y. The ﬁrst ground instance to be generated is P(c) /\ ~P(f_y(c))

Since this is still propositionally satisﬁable, a second instance is generated: P(f_y(c)) /\ ~P(f_y(f_y(c)))

Since the conjunction of these two instances is propositionally unsatisﬁable (the conjunction includes both P(f y(c)) and its negation), the procedure terminates, indicating that two ground instances were used and that the formula is valid as claimed. The reader may ﬁnd it very instructive to step through more of the examples that follow in a similar way. In this chapter, we will take many of our examples from a suite given by Pelletier (1986), in an attempt to get some idea of the merits of diﬀerent approaches. Some are very easily handled by the present program: # let p24 = gilmore <<~(exists x. U(x) /\ Q(x)) /\ (forall x. P(x) ==> Q(x) \/ R(x)) /\ ~(exists x. P(x) ==> (exists x. Q(x))) /\ (forall x. Q(x) /\ R(x) ==> U(x)) ==> (exists x. P(x) /\ R(x))>>;; 0 ground instances tried; 1 items in list 0 ground instances tried; 1 items in list val p24 : int = 1 †

That this case is called for shows that if we were to allow interpretations with an empty domain, the formula would in fact be invalid.

162

First-order logic

Some take a little more time and require quite a few ground instances to be tried, like: # let p45 = gilmore <<(forall x. P(x) /\ (forall y. G(y) /\ H(x,y) ==> J(x,y)) ==> (forall y. G(y) /\ H(x,y) ==> R(y))) /\ ~(exists y. L(y) /\ R(y)) /\ (exists x. P(x) /\ (forall y. H(x,y) ==> L(y)) /\ (forall y. G(y) /\ H(x,y) ==> J(x,y))) ==> (exists x. P(x) /\ ~(exists y. G(y) /\ H(x,y)))>>;; 4 ground instances tried; 2511 items in list val p45 : int = 5

Still others appear quite intractable, running for a long time and eventually causing the machine to run out of memory, so large is the number of disjuncts generated. let p20 = gilmore <<(forall x y. exists z. forall w. P(x) /\ Q(y) ==> R(z) /\ U(w)) ==> (exists x y. P(x) /\ Q(y)) ==> (exists z. R(z))>>;;

All in all, although the Gilmore procedure is a promising start to ﬁrstorder theorem proving, there is plenty of room for improvement. Since the main limitation seems to be the explosion in the number of disjuncts in the DNF, a natural approach is to maintain the same kind of enumeration procedure but check the propositional satisﬁability of the conjunction of ground instances generated so far by a more eﬃcient propositional algorithm. In fact, it was for exactly this purpose that Davis and Putnam (1960) developed their procedure for propositional satisﬁability testing (see Section 2.9). In this context, clausal form has the particular advantage that there is no analogue of the multiplicative explosion of disjuncts. One simply puts the (negated, Skolemized) formula into clausal form, with say k conjuncts, and each new ground instance generated just adds another k clauses to the accumulated pile. Against this, of course, one needs a real satisﬁability test algorithm to be run, whereas in the Gilmore procedure this is simply a matter of looking for complementary literals. Slightly anachronistically, we will use the DPLL rather than the DP procedure, since our earlier experiments suggested it is usually better, and it certainly has better space behaviour. The structure of the Davis–Putnam program is very similar to the Gilmore one. This time the stored formulas are all in CNF rather than DNF, and

3.8 Mechanizing Herbrand’s theorem

163

each time we incorporate a new instance, we check for unsatisﬁability using dpll: let dp_mfn cjs0 ifn cjs = union (image (image ifn) cjs0) cjs;; let dp_loop = herbloop dp_mfn dpll;;

The outer wrapper is unchanged except that the formula is put into CNF rather than DNF: let davisputnam fm = let sfm = skolemize(Not(generalize fm)) in let fvs = fv sfm and consts,funcs = herbfuns sfm in let cntms = image (fun (c,_) -> Fn(c,[])) consts in length(dp_loop (simpcnf sfm) cntms funcs fvs 0 [] [] []);;

This code turns out to be much more eﬀective in most cases. For example, the formerly problematic p20 is solved rapidly, using 19 ground instances: # let p20 = davisputnam <<(forall x y. exists z. forall w. P(x) /\ Q(y) ==> R(z) /\ U(w)) ==> (exists x y. P(x) /\ Q(y)) ==> (exists z. R(z))>>;; 0 ground instances tried; 0 items in list ... 18 ground instances tried; 37 items in list val p20 : int = 19

Although the Davis–Putnam procedure avoids the catastrophic explosion in memory usage that was the bane of the Gilmore procedure, it still often generates a very large number of ground instances and becomes quite slow at each propositional step. Typically, most of these instances make no contribution to the ﬁnal refutation, and a much smaller set would be adequate. The overall runtime (and ultimately feasibility) depends on how quickly an adequate set turns up in the enumeration, which is quite unpredictable. Suppose we deﬁne a function that runs through the list of possibly-needed instances (dunno), putting them onto the list of needed ones need only if the other instances are satisﬁable: let rec dp_refine cjs0 fvs dunno need = match dunno with [] -> need | cl::dknow -> let mfn = dp_mfn cjs0 ** subst ** fpf fvs in let need’ = if dpll(itlist mfn (need @ dknow) []) then cl::need else need in dp_refine cjs0 fvs dknow need’;;

164

First-order logic

We can use this reﬁnement process after the main loop has succeeded: let dp_refine_loop cjs0 cntms funcs fvs n cjs tried tuples = let tups = dp_loop cjs0 cntms funcs fvs n cjs tried tuples in dp_refine cjs0 fvs tups [];;

As the reader can conﬁrm, replacing dp_loop by dp_refine_loop in the Davis–Putnam procedure massively reduces the number of ﬁnal instances, e.g. from 40 to just 3 in the case of p36, and from 181 to 5 for p29. However, while cutting down the number like this may be beneﬁcial if we want to use the set of ground instances for something (as we will in Section 5.13), it doesn’t help to improve the eﬃciency of the procedure itself, which still needs to examine the whole set of instances so far at each iteration. As Davis (1983) admits in retrospect: . . . eﬀectively eliminating the truth-functional satisﬁability obstacle only uncovered the deeper problem of the combinatorial explosion inherent in unstructured search through the Herbrand universe . . .

The next major step forward in theorem proving was a more intelligent means of choosing instances, to pick out the small set of relevant ones instead of blindly trying all possibilities.

3.9 Uniﬁcation The gilmore and davisputnam procedures follow essentially the same pattern. Decision methods for propositional logic, respectively disjunctive normal forms and the Davis–Putnam method, are used together with a systematic enumeration of ground instances. A more sophisticated idea, ﬁrst used by Prawitz, Prawitz and Voghera (1960), is to perform propositional operations on the uninstantiated formulas, or at least instantiate them intelligently just as much as is necessary to make progress with propositional reasoning. Prawitz’s work was extended by J. A. Robinson (1965b), who gave an eﬀective syntactic procedure called uniﬁcation for deciding on appropriate instantiations to make terms match up correctly. Suppose for example that we have the following uninstantiated clauses in the Davis–Putnam method: P (x, f (y)) ∨ Q(x, y), ¬P (g(u), v). Instead of enumerating blindly, we can choose instantiations for the variables in the two clauses so that P (x, f (y)) and ¬P (g(u), v) become

3.9 Uniﬁcation

165

complementary, e.g. setting x = g(u) and v = f (y). After instantiation, we have the clauses: P (g(u), f (y)) ∨ Q(g(u), y), ¬P (g(u), f (y)). and so we are able to derive a new clause using the resolution rule: Q(g(u), y). By contrast, in the enumeration-based approach, we would have to wait until instances allowing the same kind of resolution step were generated, by which time we may have become overwhelmed by other (often irrelevant) instances. Deﬁnition 3.27 Given a set of pairs of terms S = {(s1 , t1 ), . . . , (sn , tn )}, a uniﬁer of the set S is an instantiation σ such that tsubst σ si = tsubst σ ti for each i = 1, . . . , n. In the special case of a single pair of terms, we often talk about a ‘uniﬁer of s and t’, meaning a uniﬁer of {(s, t)}. Unifying a set of pairs of terms is analogous to solving a system of simultaneous equations such as 2x + y = 3 and x − y = 6 in ordinary algebra, and we will emphasize this parallel in the following discussion. Just as a set of equations may be unsolvable, so may a uniﬁcation problem. First of all, there is no uniﬁer of f (x) and g(y) where f and g are diﬀerent function symbols, for whatever terms replace the variables x and y, the instantiated terms will have diﬀerent functions at the top level. Slightly more subtly, there is no uniﬁer of x and f (x), or more generally of x and any term involving x as a proper subterm, for whatever the instantiation of x, one term will remain a proper subterm of the other, and hence unequal. This is exactly analogous to trying to solve x = x + 1 in ordinary algebra. A more complicated example of this kind of circularity is the uniﬁcation problem {(x, f (y)), (y, g(x))}, analogous to the unsolvable simultaneous equations x = y + 1 and y = x + 2.

166

First-order logic

On the other hand, if a uniﬁcation problem has a solution, it always has inﬁnitely many, because if σ is a uniﬁer of the si and ti , then so is tsubst τ ◦σ for any other instantiation τ , using Corollary 3.20: tsubst (tsubst τ ◦ σ) si = tsubst τ (tsubst σ si ) = tsubst τ (tsubst σ ti ) = tsubst (tsubst τ ◦ σ) ti . For example, instead of unifying P (x, f (y)) and P (g(u), v) by setting x = g(u) and v = f (y), we could have used other variables or even arbitrarily complicated terms like x = g(f (g(y)), u = f (g(y)) and v = f (y). But it will turn out that we can always ﬁnd a ‘most general’ uniﬁer that keeps the instantiating terms as ‘simple’ as possible. We say that an instantiation σ is more general than another one τ , and write σ ≤ τ , if there is some instantiation δ such that tsubst τ = tsubst δ ◦ tsubst σ. We say σ is a most general uniﬁer (MGU) of S if (i) it is a uniﬁer of S, and (ii) for every other uniﬁer τ of S, we have σ ≤ τ . Most general uniﬁers are not necessarily unique. For example, the set {(x, y)} has two diﬀerent MGUs, one that maps x |⇒ y and one that maps y |⇒ x. However, one can quite easily show that two MGUs of a given set S can, like these two, diﬀer only up to a permutation of variable names. (Assuming that we restrict uniﬁers to instantiations that aﬀect a ﬁnite number of variables.)

A uniﬁcation algorithm Let us now turn to a general method for solving a uniﬁcation problem or deciding that it has no solution. Our main function unify is recursive, with two arguments: env, which is a ﬁnite partial function from variables to terms, and eqs, which is a list of term–term pairs to be uniﬁed. The uniﬁcation function essentially applies some transformations to eqs and incorporates the resulting variable–term mappings into env. This env is not quite the ﬁnal unifying mapping itself, because it may map a variable to a term containing variables that are themselves assigned, e.g. x → y and y → z instead of just x → z directly. But we will require env to be free of cycles. Write x −→ y to indicate that there is an assignment x → t in env with y ∈ FVT(t). By

3.9 Uniﬁcation

167

a cycle, we mean a nonempty ﬁnite sequence leading back to the starting point: x0 −→ x1 −→ · · · −→ xp −→ x0 . Our main uniﬁcation algorithm will only incorporate new entries x → t into env that preserve the property of being cycle-free. It is suﬃcient to ensure the following: (1) there is no existing assignment x → s in env; (2) there is no variable y ∈ FVT(t) such that y −→∗ x, i.e. there is a sequence of zero or more −→-steps leading from y to x; in particular x ∈ FVT(t). To see that if env is cycle-free and these properties hold then (x → t)env is also cycle-free, note that if there were now a cycle for the new relation −→ : z −→ x1 −→ · · · −→ xp −→ z then there must be one of the following form: z −→ x1 −→ x −→ y −→ · · · −→ xp −→ z for some y ∈ FVT(t). For there must be at least one case where the new assignment x → t plays a role, since env was originally cycle-free, while if there is more than one instance of x, we can cut out any intermediate steps between the ﬁrst and the last. However, a cycle of the above form also gives us the following, contradicting assumption (2): y −→ · · · −→ xp −→ z −→ x1 −→ x. The following function will return ‘false’ if condition (2) above holds for a new assignment x → t. If condition (2) does not hold then it fails, except in the case t = x when it returns ‘true’, indicating that the assignment is ‘trivial’. let rec istriv env x t = match t with Var y -> y = x or defined env y & istriv env x (apply env y) | Fn(f,args) -> exists (istriv env x) args & failwith "cyclic";;

This is eﬀectively calculating a reﬂexive-transitive closure of −→, which could be done much more eﬃciently. However, this simple recursive implementation is usually fast enough, and is certainly guaranteed to terminate, precisely because the existing env is cycle-free.

168

First-order logic

Now we come to the main uniﬁcation function. This just transforms the list of pairs eqs from the front using various transformations until the front pair is of the form (x, t). If there is already a deﬁnition x → s in env, then the pair is expanded into (s, t) and the recursion proceeds. Otherwise we know that condition (1) holds, so x → t is a candidate for incorporation into env. If there is a benign cycle istriv env x t is true and env is unchanged. Any other kind of cycle will cause failure, which will propagate out. Otherwise condition (2) holds, and x → t is incorporated into env for the next recursive call. let rec unify env eqs = match eqs with [] -> env | (Fn(f,fargs),Fn(g,gargs))::oth -> if f = g & length fargs = length gargs then unify env (zip fargs gargs @ oth) else failwith "impossible unification" | (Var x,t)::oth -> if defined env x then unify env ((apply env x,t)::oth) else unify (if istriv env x t then env else (x|->t) env) oth | (t,Var x)::oth -> unify env ((Var x,t)::oth);;

Let us regard the assignments xi → ti in env and the pairs (sj , sj ) in eqs as a collective set of pairs S = {. . . , (xi , ti ), . . . , (sj , sj ), . . .}. The unify function is tail-recursive and the key observation is that the successive recursive calls have arguments env and eqs satisfying two properties: • the ﬁnite partial function env is cycle-free; • the set S combining env and eqs has exactly the same set of uniﬁers as the original problem. The ﬁrst claim follows because a new assignment x → t is only added to the environment when there is no existing assignment x → s, hence conﬁrming condition (1), and when defined env x returns false, hence conﬁrming condition (2). To verify the other claim, we consider the clauses that can lead to recursive calls. The second clause will lead to a recursive call only when the front pair in eqs is of the form (f (s1 , . . . , sn ), f (t1 , . . . , tn )), and the claim then follows since {(f (s1 , . . . , sn ), f (t1 , . . . , tn ))} ∪ E

3.9 Uniﬁcation

169

has exactly the same uniﬁers as {(s1 , t1 ), . . . , (sn , tn )} ∪ E because any instantiation uniﬁes f (s1 , . . . , sn ) and f (t1 , . . . , tn ) iﬀ it uniﬁes each corresponding pair si and ti . When the front pair is (x, t) and there is already an assignment x → s, we get a recursive call with (x, t) replaced by (s, t), which also preserves the claimed property since {(x, t), (x, s)} ∪ E has exactly the same uniﬁers as {(s, t), (x, s)} ∪ E. The ﬁnal clause just reverses the front pair, and this order is immaterial to the uniﬁers. Thus the claim is veriﬁed. Any failure indicates that one of the intermediate problems is unsolvable, because it involves either incompatible toplevel functions like a pair (f (s), g(t)), or a circularity where a uniﬁer would unify (x, t) where x ∈ FVT(t) and x = t. Since this intermediate problem has exactly the same set of uniﬁers as the original problem, failure therefore indicates the unsolvability of the original problem. We will next show that successful termination of unify indicates that there is a uniﬁer of the initial set of pairs, and in fact that a most general uniﬁer can be obtained from the resulting env by applying the following function to reach a ‘fully solved’ form: let rec solve env = let env’ = mapf (tsubst env) env in if env’ = env then env else solve env’;;

Once again, this transforms env in a way that preserves the set of uniﬁers of the corresponding pairs across recursive calls, because the set {(x1 , t1 ), . . . , (xn , tn )} has exactly the same set of uniﬁers as {(x1 , tsubst (x1 |⇒ t1 ) t1 ), . . . , (xn , tsubst (x1 |⇒ t1 ) tn )}. Moreover, because the initial env was free of cycles, the function terminates and the result is an instantiation σ whose assignments xi → ti satisfy xi ∈ FVT(tj ) for all i and j. It is immediate that σ uniﬁes each pair (xi , ti ) in its own assignment, since xi is instantiated to ti by this very assignment while ti is unchanged as it contains none of the variables xj . In fact, σ is

170

First-order logic

actually a most general uniﬁer of the set of pairs (xi , ti ), because for any other uniﬁer τ of these pairs we have: tsubst τ xi = tsubst τ ti = tsubst τ (tsubst σ xi ) = (tsubst τ ◦ tsubst σ) xi for each variable xi involved in σ. For all other variables x, we have tsubst σ x = tsubst τ x = Var(x) so the same is trivially true. Hence tsubst τ = tsubst τ ◦ tsubst σ and so σ ≤ τ by deﬁnition. (And even stronger, the δ we need to exist for this to hold can be taken to be τ itself.) Moreover, since by the basic preservation property the set of pairs (xi , ti ) has exactly the same uniﬁers as the original problem, we conclude that if unify undefined eqs terminates successfully with result env, then σ = solve env is an MGU of the original pairs eqs. Finally, we will prove that unify env eqs does always terminate if env is cycle-free, in particular for the starting value undefined. Let n be the ‘size’ of eqs, which we deﬁne as the total number of Var and Fn constructors in the instantiated terms t = tsubst (solve env) t for all t on either side of a pair in eqs. Now note that across recursive calls, either the number of variables in eqs that have no assignment in env decreases (when a new assignment is added to env), or else this count stays the same and n decreases (when a function is split apart or a trivial pair (x, x) is discarded), or both those stay the same but the front pair is either reversed (which cannot happen twice in a row) or has one member instantiated using env (which can only happen ﬁnitely often since env is cycle-free). Thus termination is guaranteed. In summary, we have proved that (i) failure indicates unsolvability, (ii) successful termination results in an MGU, and (iii) termination, either with success or failure, is guaranteed. Therefore the function terminates with success if and only if the uniﬁcation problem is solvable, and in such cases returns an MGU. We can now ﬁnally package up everything as a function that solves the uniﬁcation problem completely and creates an instantiation. let fullunify eqs = solve (unify undefined eqs);;

For example, we can use this to ﬁnd a uniﬁer for a pair of terms, then apply it, to check that the terms are indeed uniﬁed:

3.9 Uniﬁcation

171

# let unify_and_apply eqs = let i = fullunify eqs in let apply (t1,t2) = tsubst i t1,tsubst i t2 in map apply eqs;; val unify_and_apply : (term * term) list -> (term * term) list = # unify_and_apply [<<|f(x,g(y))|>>,<<|f(f(z),w)|>>];; - : (term * term) list = [(<<|f(f(z),g(y))|>>, <<|f(f(z),g(y))|>>)] # unify_and_apply [<<|f(x,y)|>>,<<|f(y,x)|>>];; - : (term * term) list = [(<<|f(y,y)|>>, <<|f(y,y)|>>)] # unify_and_apply [<<|f(x,g(y))|>>,<<|f(y,x)|>>];; Exception: Failure "cyclic".

Note that uniﬁcation problems can generate exponentially large uniﬁers, e.g. # unify_and_apply [<<|x_0|>>,<<|f(x_1,x_1)|>>; <<|x_1|>>,<<|f(x_2,x_2)|>>; <<|x_2|>>,<<|f(x_3,x_3)|>>];; - : (term * term) list = [(<<|f(f(f(x_3,x_3),f(x_3,x_3)),f(f(x_3,x_3),f(x_3,x_3)))|>>, <<|f(f(f(x_3,x_3),f(x_3,x_3)),f(f(x_3,x_3),f(x_3,x_3)))|>>); (<<|f(f(x_3,x_3),f(x_3,x_3))|>>, <<|f(f(x_3,x_3),f(x_3,x_3))|>>); (<<|f(x_3,x_3)|>>, <<|f(x_3,x_3)|>>)]

The core function unify avoids creating these large uniﬁers, but can still take exponential time because of its descent through the list of assignments, which can cause exponential branching in cases like the one above. It is possible to implement more eﬃcient uniﬁcation algorithms like those given by Martelli and Montanari (1982), but we will not usually ﬁnd the time or space usage of uniﬁcation a serious problem in our applications. For a good discussion of several uniﬁcation algorithms, see Baader and Nipkow (1998). Using uniﬁcation We will explore several ways of incorporating uniﬁcation into ﬁrst-order theorem proving, combining it with diﬀerent methods for propositional logic. Before getting involved in the details, however, we want to emphasize a useful distinction. In the Davis–Putnam example at the beginning of this section we started with some clauses, which are implicitly conjoined and universally quantiﬁed over all their variables. Consequently, the variables in the new clause Q(g(u), y) derived can be regarded as universal and may freely be instantiated diﬀerently each time it is used later. Suppose, on the other hand, we had decided to use the DPLL procedure, and used the ﬁrst clause as the basis for a case-split, assuming separately P (x, f (y)) and Q(x, y) and trying to

172

First-order logic

derive a contradiction separately from each of these together with the other clauses. In this case, if the variables x and y later need to be instantiated, they must be instantiated in the same way. We can only assume ∀x y. P (x, f (y)) ∨ Q(x, y), which does not imply (∀x y. P (x, f (y))) ∨ (∀x, y. Q(x, y)). Consequently, when we perform operations like case-splitting, we need to maintain a correlation between certain variables, and make sure they are instantiated consistently. Methods like the ﬁrst, where no case-splits are performed and all variables may be treated as universally quantiﬁed and independently instantiated, are called local, because the variable instantiations in the immediate steps do not aﬀect other parts of the overall proof; they are also referred to as bottom-up because they can build up independent lemmas without regard to the overall problem. Uniﬁcation-based methods that do involve case-splits, on the other hand, are called global or top-down because certain variable instantiations need to be propagated throughout the proof, and often the instantiations end up being driven by the overall problem. There are characteristic diﬀerences between local and global methods that correlate strongly with the kinds of problems where they perform well or badly. In local methods, all intermediate results are absolute, independent of context, and can be re-used at will with diﬀerent variable instantiations later in the proof. They can be used just like lemmas in ordinary mathematical proofs, which are often used several times in diﬀerent contexts. By contrast, using lemmas in global methods is more diﬃcult, because they depend on the ambient environment of variable assignments and may, at one extreme, have to be proved separately each time they are used. Nevertheless, the tendency of global methods to use variable instantiations relevant to the overall result can be a strength, giving a measure of goal-direction. The best-known local method is resolution, and it was in the context of resolution that J. A. Robinson (1965b) introduced uniﬁcation in its full generality to automated theorem proving. Another important local method quite close to resolution and developed independently at about the same time is the inverse method (Maslov 1964; Lifschitz 1986). As for global methods, two of the best-known are tableaux, which were implicitly used in an implementation by Prawitz, Prawitz and Voghera (1960), and model elimination (Loveland 1968; Loveland 1978). Crudely speaking:

3.10 Tableaux

173

• tableaux = Gilmore procedure + uniﬁcation; • resolution = Davis–Putnam procedure (DP, not DPLL) + uniﬁcation. We will consider these important techniques in the next sections. Note that resolution is a uniﬁcation-based extension of the original DP procedure, not DPLL. Adding uniﬁcation to DPLL naturally yields a global rather than a local method, since literals used in case-splits must be instantiated consistently in both branches; one such approach is model evolution (Baumgartner and Tinelli 2003). An interesting intermediate case is the ﬁrst-order extension (Bj¨ork 2005) of St˚ almarck’s method from Section 2.10. Here the variables in the two branches of the dilemma rule need to be correlated, but the common results in merged branches can have those variables promoted to universal status so they can later be instantiated freely. 3.10 Tableaux By Herbrand and compactness, if a ﬁrst-order formula P [x1 , . . . , xn ] is unsatisﬁable, there are ﬁnitely many ground instances (say k of them) such that the following conjunction is propositionally unsatisﬁable: P [t11 , . . . , t1n ] ∧ · · · ∧ P [tk1 , . . . , tkn ]. In Gilmore’s method, this propositional unsatisﬁability is veriﬁed by expanding the conjunction into DNF and checking that each disjunct contains a conjoined pair of complementary literals. Suppose that instead of creating ground instances, we replace the variables x1 , . . . , xn with tuples of distinct variables: P [z11 , . . . , zn1 ] ∧ · · · ∧ P [z1k , . . . , znk ]. This formula can similarly be expanded out into DNF. If we now apply the instantiation θ that maps each new variable zij to the corresponding ground term tji , we obtain a DNF equivalent of the original conjunction of substitution instances. (This is not necessarily exactly the same as the one that would have been obtained by instantiating ﬁrst and then making the DNF transformation, because the instantiation might have caused distinct terms to become identiﬁed, but that doesn’t matter.) Since this conjunction of ground instances is unsatisﬁable, and ground, it is itself propositionally unsatisﬁable, and hence when the instantiation θ is applied, each disjunct in the DNF must have (at least) two complementary literals. This means that each disjunct in the uninstantiated DNF must contain two literals: · · · ∧ R(s1 , . . . , sm ) ∧ · · · ∧ ¬R(s1 , . . . , sm ) ∧ · · ·

174

First-order logic

such that θ uniﬁes the set of terms S = {(si , si ) | i = 1, . . . , m}. However, since S has some uniﬁer, it also has a most general uniﬁer σ, which we can ﬁnd using the algorithm of the previous section. By the MGU property, we have σ ≤ θ, and so θ can be obtained by applying σ ﬁrst and then some other instantiation. Now, applying σ to the original DNF makes one (or maybe more) of the disjuncts contradictory, and the original instantiation θ can still be obtained by further instantiation. Thus, we can now proceed to the next disjunct, and so on, until all possibilities are exhausted. In this way, we never have to generate the ground terms, but rather let the necessary instantiations emerge gradually by need. In the terminology of the last section, this is a global, free-variable method, because the same variable instantiation needs to be applied (or further specialized) when performing the same kind of matching up in other disjuncts. We will maintain the environment of variable assignments globally, represented as a cycle-free ﬁnite partial function just as in unify itself. To unify atomic formulas, we treat the predicates as if they were functions, then use the existing uniﬁcation code, and we also deal with negation by recursion, and handle the degenerate case of ⊥ since we will use this later: let rec unify_literals env tmp = match tmp with Atom(R(p1,a1)),Atom(R(p2,a2)) -> unify env [Fn(p1,a1),Fn(p2,a2)] | Not(p),Not(q) -> unify_literals env (p,q) | False,False -> env | _ -> failwith "Can’t unify literals";;

To unify complementary literals, we just ﬁrst negate one of them: let unify_complements env (p,q) = unify_literals env (p,negate q);;

Next we deﬁne a function that iteratively runs down a list (representing a disjunction), trying all possible complementary pairs in each member, unifying them and trying to ﬁnish the remaining items with the instantiation so derived. Each disjunct d is itself an implicitly conjoined list, so we separate it into positive and negative literals, and for each possible positive– negative pair, attempt to unify them as complementary literals and solve the remaining problem with the resulting instantiation. let rec unify_refute djs env = match djs with [] -> env | d::odjs -> let pos,neg = partition positive d in tryfind (unify_refute odjs ** unify_complements env) (allpairs (fun p q -> (p,q)) pos neg);;

3.10 Tableaux

175

Now, for the main loop, we maintain the original DNF of the uninstantiated formula djs0, the set fvs of its free variables, and a counter n used to generate the fresh variable names as needed. The main loop creates a new substitution instance using fresh variables newvars, and incorporates this into the previous DNF djs to give djs1. The refutation of this DNF is attempted, and if it succeeds, the ﬁnal instantiation is returned together with the number of instances tried (the counter divided by the number of free variables). Otherwise, the counter is increased and a larger conjunction tried. Because this approach is quite close to the pioneering work by Prawitz, Prawitz and Voghera (1960), we name the procedure accordingly. let rec prawitz_loop djs0 fvs djs n = let l = length fvs in let newvars = map (fun k -> "_"^string_of_int (n * l + k)) (1--l) in let inst = fpf fvs (map (fun x -> Var x) newvars) in let djs1 = distrib (image (image (subst inst)) djs0) djs in try unify_refute djs1 undefined,(n + 1) with Failure _ -> prawitz_loop djs0 fvs djs1 (n + 1);;

Now, for the overall proof procedure, we just need to start by negating and Skolemizing the formula to be proved. We throw away the instantiation information and just return the number of instances tried, though it might sometimes be interesting to reconstruct the set of ground instances from the instantiation, and the reader may care to try a few examples. let prawitz fm = let fm0 = skolemize(Not(generalize fm)) in snd(prawitz_loop (simpdnf fm0) (fv fm0) [[]] 0);;

Generally speaking, this is a substantial improvement on the Gilmore procedure. For example, one problem that previously seemed infeasible is solved almost instantly: # let p20 = prawitz <<(forall x y. exists z. forall w. P(x) /\ Q(y) ==> R(z) /\ U(w)) ==> (exists x y. P(x) /\ Q(y)) ==> (exists z. R(z))>>;; val p20 : int = 2

Although the original Davis–Putnam procedure also solved this problem quickly, it only did so after trying 19 ground instances, whereas here we only needed two. In some cases, uniﬁcation saves us from searching through a much larger number of substitution instances. On the other hand, there

176

First-order logic

are a few cases where the original enumeration-based Gilmore procedure is actually faster, including Pelletier (1986) problem 45.

Tableaux Although the prawitz procedure is usually far more eﬃcient than gilmore, some further improvements are worthwhile. In prawitz we prenexed the formula and replaced formerly universally quantiﬁed variables with fresh ones at once, then expanded the DNF completely. Instead, we can do all these things incrementally. Suppose we have a set of assumptions to refute. If it contains two complementary literals p and −p, we are already done. Otherwise we pick a non-atomic assumption and deal with it as follows: • for p ∧ q, separately assume p and q; • for p ∨ q, perform two refutations, one assuming p and one assuming q; • for ∀x. P [x], introduce a new variable y and assume P [y], but also keep the original ∀x. P [x] in case multiple instances are needed. This is essentially the method of analytic tableaux. (Analytic because the new formulas assumed are subformulas of the current formula, and tableaux because they systematically lay out the assumptions and case distinctions to be considered.) When used on paper, it’s traditional to write the current assumptions along a branch of a tree, extending the branch with the new assumptions and splitting it into two sub-branches when handling disjunctions. In our implementation, we maintain a ‘current’ disjunct, which we separate into its literals (lits) and other conjuncts not yet broken down to literals (fms), together with the remaining disjuncts that we need to refute. Rather than maintain an explicit list for the last item, we use a continuation (cont). A continuation (Reynolds 1993) merely encapsulates the remaining computation as a function, in this case one that is intended to try and refute all remaining disjuncts under the given instantiation. Initially this continuation is just the identity function, and as we proceed, it is augmented to ‘remember’ what more remains to be done. Rather than bounding the number of instances, we bound the number of universal variables that have been replaced with fresh variables by a limit n. The other variable k is a counter used to invent new variables when eliminating a universal quantiﬁer. This must be passed together with the current environment to the continuation, since it must avoid re-using the same variable in later refutations.

3.10 Tableaux

177

let rec tableau (fms,lits,n) cont (env,k) = if n < 0 then failwith "no proof at this level" else match fms with [] -> failwith "tableau: no proof" | And(p,q)::unexp -> tableau (p::q::unexp,lits,n) cont (env,k) | Or(p,q)::unexp -> tableau (p::unexp,lits,n) (tableau (q::unexp,lits,n) cont) (env,k) | Forall(x,p)::unexp -> let y = Var("_" ^ string_of_int k) in let p’ = subst (x |=> y) p in tableau (p’::unexp@[Forall(x,p)],lits,n-1) cont (env,k+1) | fm::unexp -> try tryfind (fun l -> cont(unify_complements env (fm,l),k)) lits with Failure _ -> tableau (unexp,fm::lits,n) cont (env,k);;

For the overall procedure, we simply recursively increase the ‘depth’ (bound on the number of fresh variables) until the core function succeeds. Since we’ll be using such iterative deepening with other proof procedures, it’s worth deﬁning a generic function to handle this, which also outputs information to the user to give an idea what’s happening:† let rec deepen f n = try print_string "Searching with depth limit "; print_int n; print_newline(); f n with Failure _ -> deepen f (n + 1);;

Now everything can be packaged up as a refutation procedure for a list of formulas: let tabrefute fms = deepen (fun n -> tableau (fms,[],n) (fun x -> x) (undefined,0); n) 0;;

The top-level function to verify a formula uses askolemize rather than skolemize to retain the universal quantiﬁers explicitly. We also handle the degenerate case of refuting ⊥ specially so the main logic doesn’t have to deal with it: let tab fm = let sfm = askolemize(Not(generalize fm)) in if sfm = False then 0 else tabrefute [sfm];;

This turns out to be generally much more eﬀective than our earlier procedures, any of which would ﬁnd the following problem diﬃcult: †

A more detailed discussion of the merits of iterative deepening is deferred until our discussion of Prolog in Section 3.14.

178

First-order logic

# let p38 = tab <<(forall x. P(a) /\ (P(x) ==> (exists y. P(y) /\ R(x,y))) ==> (exists z w. P(z) /\ R(x,w) /\ R(w,z))) <=> (forall x. (~P(a) \/ P(x) \/ (exists z w. P(z) /\ R(x,w) /\ R(w,z))) /\ (~P(a) \/ ~(exists y. P(y) /\ R(x,y)) \/ (exists z w. P(z) /\ R(x,w) /\ R(w,z))))>>;; Searching with depth limit 0 Searching with depth limit 1 Searching with depth limit 2 Searching with depth limit 3 Searching with depth limit 4 val p38 : int = 4

In fact, most of the Pelletier problems dealing with pure ﬁrst-order logic, are solved quite easily with tab. We can add a further tweak that helps with problems like p46, and particularly p34 (‘Andrews’s challenge’) which involves many instances of logical equivalence. After the initial normalization, we can try transforming the formula into DNF, and deal with each of the disjuncts separately. Of course, we can only split up a disjunction if it contains no free variables, but this is quite often the case. The existing DNF function treats quantiﬁed formulas as atomic, so provided the initial formula is closed, any disjunctions created at the top level are also closed. Now, applying the tableau procedure to each one independently is often beneﬁcial, since variables are not instantiated together when they cannot possibly aﬀect each other, and so the necessary variable limit is kept low, cutting down the search space. let splittab fm = map tabrefute (simpdnf(askolemize(Not(generalize fm))));;

With this, we can solve all the pure ﬁrst-order logic Pelletier problems in a reasonable time, except p47, ‘Schubert’s Steamroller’ (Stickel 1986). Note that Andrews’s challenge p34 splits into no fewer than 32 independent subproblems: # let p34 = splittab <<((exists x. forall ((exists x. Q(x)) ((exists x. forall ((exists x. P(x)) ... val p34 : int list = [5; 4; 5; 3; 3; 3; 2; 4; 3; 3; 3; 3; 3; 4;

y. P(x) <=> <=> (forall y. Q(x) <=> <=> (forall

P(y)) <=> y. Q(y)))) <=> Q(y)) <=> y. P(y))))>>;;

4; 6; 2; 3; 3; 4; 3; 3; 3; 3; 2; 2; 3; 6; 3; 2; 4; 4]

3.11 Resolution

179

Thus, at least measured by the somewhat arbitrary metric of success on the Pelletier problems, the successive reﬁnement from gilmore to splittab represents continuous progress. We can now easily solve some quite interesting problems that were barely feasible before, e.g. the following, attributed by Dijkstra (1989) to Hoare: # let ewd1062 = splittab <<(forall x. x <= x) /\ (forall x y z. x <= y /\ y <= z ==> x <= z) /\ (forall x y. f(x) <= y <=> x <= g(y)) ==> (forall x y. x <= y ==> f(x) <= f(y)) /\ (forall x y. x <= y ==> g(x) <= g(y))>>;; ... val ewd1062 : int list = [9; 9]

Tableaux were developed and named by logicians (Beth 1955; Hintikka 1955) some time before computer implementations. Nevertheless, Beth (1958) at least clearly had mechanization in mind. Indeed, tableaux are very appealing from this point of view, because the decision as to what to do next is largely driven by the structure of the formula. The later addition of uniﬁcation, apparently ﬁrst done by Cohen, Trilling and Wegner (1974) to show oﬀ the facilities of ALGOL 68, further improves their structure-directedness. The particularly straightforward code we have presented is very similar to leanTAP (Beckert and Posegga 1995). Although quite powerful, it is still fairly simplistic. For example, the formulas are broken down left-to-right and universal formulas instantiated in an undirected round-robin fashion. One can often improve performance by a more intelligent and directed approach, and in Section 3.15 we will see a more goal-directed variation on the tableau theme.

3.11 Resolution The centrepiece of the propositional Davis–Putnam procedure is the resolution rule, deducing from the two clauses p ∨ C1 and −p ∨ C2 the conclusion C1 ∨ C2 . In fact, given a set of propositional clauses, if we form all resolvents on any literal p and then discard all formulas involving p or −p, the resulting set is equisatisﬁable with the original: this follows from Theorem 2.11 and the fact that discarding tautologies makes no diﬀerence to satisﬁability of a set. Moreover, assuming p does occur in the initial clauses, the result involves fewer distinct propositional variables since p has been eliminated. Thus, just exhaustively applying the resolution rule to an unsatisﬁable set

180

First-order logic

of clauses, resolving on each literal in turn, one can derive the empty clause. Of course, preferential use of the 1-literal rule and aﬃrmative–negative rule are useful for eﬃciency, but not logically essential. Just as the Prawitz procedure improved on the Gilmore procedure by working with the most general instances possible, the ﬁrst-order resolution principle (J. A. Robinson 1965b) employs uniﬁcation so that the most general forms of the clauses possible are resolved directly. By Herbrand’s theorem, if a set of clauses is unsatisﬁable, then a ﬁnite conjunction of propositional instances of them is propositionally unsatisﬁable. As we noted, this propositional unsatisﬁability can be detected by repeatedly applying the propositional resolution rule. Suppose that two clauses C[x1 , . . . , xn ] and D[y1 , . . . , ym ] have instances to which propositional resolution is applicable, say: C[x1 , . . . , xn ] = · · · ∨ P (s1 , . . . , sm ) ∨ · · · and D[y1 , . . . , yn ] = · · · ∨ ¬P (s1 , . . . , sm ) ∨ · · · such that when the appropriate ground instantiation θ is applied, it uniﬁes the set S = {(si , si ) | i = 1, . . . , m} and allows us to apply resolution. Suppose now that we use an MGU of S instead of θ. (We will ﬁrst rename variables to ensure the two clauses have no variables in common.) Are we guaranteed that if we now perform resolution on the instantiated clauses, the original result can be obtained by a further instantiation? At ﬁrst sight the answer seems to be ‘yes’. For example, if we have the two input clauses {¬P (x) ∨ P (f (x)), ¬P (f (f (y))) ∨ Q(y)} we may decide ﬁrst to instantiate them to {¬P (f (g(c))) ∨ P (f (f (g(c)))), ¬P (f (f (g(c)))) ∨ Q(g(c))}, then perform a resolution step to get ¬P (f (g(c))) ∨ Q(g(c)), but we could just as well use an MGU x = f (y) and get the clause ¬P (f (y)) ∨ Q(y), of which ¬P (f (g(c))) ∨ Q(g(c)) is just an instance. Yet things aren’t always so simple. The MGU may be too general to cause certain literals in one of the input clauses to become identiﬁed, and this identiﬁcation may be essential for the propostional proof, where clauses were sets. This phenomenon is illustrated by the following example, a variant of Russell’s paradox proving that in a given village, there cannot be a barber who shaves exactly those people who do not shave themselves. The formula to be proved is: let barb = <<~(exists b. forall x. shaves(b,x) <=> ~shaves(x,x))>>;;

3.11 Resolution

181

The reader can conﬁrm by trying any of the earlier proof procedures that it is valid. But if we simply negate the formula and reduce it to clausal form: # simpcnf(skolemize(Not barb));; - : fol formula list list = [[<<~shaves(x,x)>>; <<~shaves(c_b,x)>>]; [<<shaves(x,x)>>; <<shaves(c_b,x)>>]]

it turns out that we cannot refute this using naive resolution based on most general uniﬁers. There are four possible pairs of potentially complementary literals, but, as the reader can conﬁrm, whichever pair we choose to unify, we just get a tautology that is of no further help in proof search. So as well as merely unifying complementary literals, we need to consider unifying some subset of the literals in the same clause to allow the possibility that the notional ground instance may identify them. If we start by doing this, we get the simpler clauses shaves(c_b,c_b) and ~shaves(c_b,c_b), trivially contradictory. The following result, often called the ‘lifting lemma’, states the key result precisely. Given a set C of literals, we write C − as a shorthand for {−p | p ∈ C}, and we will often write subst θ C for the application of an instantiation θ to a set C, where we should more properly write image (subst θ) C. Lemma 3.28 Suppose A and B are ﬁrst-order clauses with no variables in common, and A and B are instances (not necessarily ground) of A and B respectively, such that A and B have a propositional resolvent C . Then there are nonempty subsets A1 ⊆ A and B1 ⊆ B such that S = A1 ∪ B1− is uniﬁable, and for any σ that is an MGU of S, C is an instance of subst σ ((A − A1 ) ∪ (B − B1 )). Proof Since A and B have no variables in common, there is a single instantiation θ such that A = subst θ A and B = subst θ B. Since C is a resolvent of A and B , there must be some literal p such that p ∈ A , −p ∈ B and C = (A − {p}) ∪ (B − {−p}). Let A1 = {q ∈ A | subst θ q = p} and B1 = {q ∈ B | subst θ q = −p}, and abbreviate S = A1 ∪ B1− . By deﬁnition of A1 and A2 , θ is a uniﬁer of S. Let σ be any MGU of S. Then we have subst θ = subst τ ◦ subst σ for some τ . So: C = (A − {p}) ∪ (B − {−p}) = (subst θ (A − A1 )) ∪ (subst θ (B − B1 ))

182

First-order logic

= subst θ ((A − A1 ) ∪ (B − B1 )) = (subst τ ◦ subst σ )((A − A1 ) ∪ (B − B1 )) = subst τ (subst σ ((A − A1 ) ∪ (B − B1 ))) showing that C is an instance of subst σ ((A − A1 ) ∪ (B − B1 ))) as claimed. Accordingly, given some ﬁxed scheme for producing renamed versions of clauses and for arriving at MGUs, we deﬁne a (ﬁrst-order) resolvent of two clauses A and B to be subst σ ((A0 − A1 ) ∪ (B0 − B1 )), where A0 and B0 are renamed versions of A and B with no variables in common, and A1 and B1 are arbitrary nonempty subsets of A0 and B0 respectively with σ the selected MGU of A1 ∪ B1− . A clause is said to be derivable by resolution from an initial set S if it can be obtained by repeatedly deriving resolvents of clauses from S and other resolvents. Consequently, we can deduce the fundamental result that resolution is refutation complete, i.e. if a set of clauses is unsatisﬁable, resolution can, by deriving the empty clause, verify that unsatisﬁability. Resolution is in fact not complete in the stronger sense that if a clause C is a logical consequence of a set of clauses Γ then C can be derived from Γ by resolution. For example, from the singleton clause set {P } there is no resolution derivation of the logical consequence P ∨ Q, or indeed of anything else. But since we typically start by transforming the initial problem into an equivalent refutation, the distinction is not too important here and we sometimes loosely talk about just ‘completeness’ of proof procedures when we really mean refutation completeness. Corollary 3.29 If a set S of ﬁrst-order clauses is unsatisﬁable, the empty clause is derivable using resolution. Proof By Herbrand’s theorem and compactness, some ﬁnite set of ground instances of clauses in S is unsatisﬁable, and so by the refutation completeness of propositional resolution there is a resolution derivation of the empty clause. By induction on the structure or size of this proof, we can apply the lifting Lemma 3.28 to show that for each subproof of a clause C there is a corresponding proof by ﬁrst-order resolution of a clause C of which C is an instance. In particular, for the ﬁnal empty clause conclusion, the empty clause must be derivable by ﬁrst-order resolution, since the empty clause cannot be an instance of a nonempty one.

3.11 Resolution

183

The reader should bear in mind when consulting the literature that, despite the important role of resolution in automated reasoning, there are several subtle diﬀerences between the notions of resolution presented in different texts (Leitsch 1997). In particular, while we have followed the original treatment of resolution (J. A. Robinson 1965b) in common with some other standard texts (Chang and Lee 1973), it is quite common to restrict the notion of resolvent to insist that A1 and B1 have exactly one member, and separately deﬁne a factor of a clause A to be subst σ A for σ an MGU of some subset A1 ⊆ A (Loveland 1978). The corresponding completeness result is that repeatedly applying the resolution rule and the separate factoring rule is a refutation-complete proof method. Indeed, if a clause can be obtained by (our) resolution, it can separately be obtained by possible factorings of the two input clauses followed by a restricted resolution, since an MGU of S1 ∪ S2 can always be decomposed though an MGU of S1 . From a practical point of view, combining resolution and factoring in a single rule is simpler to implement and restricts the formation of factors to those necessary to ‘lift’ a particular propositional resolution step. On the other hand, generating all factors separately often avoids recomputation of factors for numerous diﬀerent resolutions. The reader might like to experiment with separate resolution and factoring rules, but we will stick to a single combined rule in what follows. Exercise 3.19 describes a simple further reﬁnement of this combined rule with factoring only applied to one of the input clauses.

Implementation In contrast with the top-down method of tableaux, all variable assignments are local, so we actually want to translate the results of uniﬁcation into an instantiation for immediate application. Moreover, it’s convenient to directly unify a set of literals rather than a list of equations between them: let rec mgu l env = match l with a::b::rest -> mgu (b::rest) (unify_literals env (a,b)) | _ -> solve env;;

On the other hand, we’ll also use a simple test for uniﬁability, and there’s no point here in fully expanding the uniﬁer: let unifiable p q = can (unify_literals undefined) (p,q);;

We’ll need to apply renaming to the hypothesis clauses. This is done via the following function, which adds a preﬁx to each variable name in a clause:

184

First-order logic

let rename pfx cls = let fvs = fv(list_disj cls) in let vvs = map (fun s -> Var(pfx^s)) fvs map (subst(fpf fvs vvs)) cls;;

in

We ﬁnd all resolvents of two clauses cl1 and cl2 via an auxiliary function that takes a particular literal p in cl1 and an accumulator acc of results so far. First, all literals ps2 in cl2 that could possibly be uniﬁed with -p are selected, and if there are none no resolvents are added. Otherwise we ﬁlter out the literals ps1 in cl1 that are uniﬁable with p, other than p itself. Then we form all possible pairs of nonempty subsets of ps1 and ps2, always including p in the former. We then pick those pairs where ps1 ∪ ps2− are uniﬁable (just because each member of this set is in itself uniﬁable with p doesn’t mean the whole set is). For each such pair we form the resolvent and add it into the accumulator: let resolvents cl1 cl2 p acc = let ps2 = filter (unifiable(negate p)) cl2 in if ps2 = [] then acc else let ps1 = filter (fun q -> q <> p & unifiable p q) cl1 in let pairs = allpairs (fun s1 s2 -> s1,s2) (map (fun pl -> p::pl) (allsubsets ps1)) (allnonemptysubsets ps2) in itlist (fun (s1,s2) sof -> try image (subst (mgu (s1 @ map negate s2) undefined)) (union (subtract cl1 s1) (subtract cl2 s2)) :: sof with Failure _ -> sof) pairs acc;;

The overall function to generate all possible resolvents of a set of clauses now proceeds by renaming the input clauses and mapping the previous function over all literals in the ﬁrst clause: let resolve_clauses cls1 cls2 = let cls1’ = rename "x" cls1 and cls2’ = rename "y" cls2 in itlist (resolvents cls1’ cls2’) cls1’ [];;

For the main loop of the resolution procedure, we simply keep generating resolvents of existing clauses until the empty clause is derived. To avoid repeating work, we split the clauses into two lists, used and unused. The main loop consists of taking one given clause cls from unused, moving it to used and generating all possible resolvents of the new clause with clauses from used (including itself), appending the new clauses to the end of unused. The idea is that, provided used is initially empty, every pair of clauses is

3.12 Subsumption and replacement

185

tried once: if clause 1 comes before clause 2 in unused, then clause 1 will be moved to used and later clause 2 will be the given clause and have the opportunity to participate in an inference. On the other hand, once they have participated, both clauses are moved to used and will never be used together again. (This organization, used in various resolution implementations at the Argonne National Lab, is often referred to as the given clause algorithm.) let rec resloop (used,unused) = match unused with [] -> failwith "No proof found" | cl::ros -> print_string(string_of_int(length used) ^ " used; "^ string_of_int(length unused) ^ " unused."); print_newline(); let used’ = insert cl used in let news = itlist(@) (mapfilter (resolve_clauses cl) used’) [] in if mem [] news then true else resloop (used’,ros@news);;

Overall, we split up the formula, put it into clausal form and start the main loop. let pure_resolution fm = resloop([],simpcnf(specialize(pnf fm)));; let resolution fm = let fm1 = askolemize(Not(generalize fm)) in map (pure_resolution ** list_conj) (simpdnf fm1);;

This procedure can solve many simple problems in a reasonable time, e.g. this from Davis and Putnam (1960): # let davis_putnam_example = resolution <<exists x. exists y. forall z. (F(x,y) ==> (F(y,z) /\ F(z,z))) /\ ((F(x,y) /\ G(x,y)) ==> (G(x,z) /\ G(z,z)))>>;; ... val davis_putnam_example : bool list = [true]

3.12 Subsumption and replacement Some problems solved easily by tableaux, such as Pelletier’s (1986) p26, are very diﬃcult for our basic resolution procedure, and result in the generation

186

First-order logic

of tens of thousands of clauses without leading to a solution. Often, many apparently pointless clauses such as tautologous ones . . . ∨ P ∨ . . . ∨ ¬P ∨ . . . get generated, particularly through factoring; for example, a clause ¬R(x, y)∨ ¬R(y, z) ∨ R(x, z) asserting that a binary relation is transitive gives rise to the tautologous factor ¬R(x, x) ∨ R(x, x). We might expect tautologies to make no useful contribution to the search for a refutation. Logically, after all, a set of formulas Δ is satisﬁable if the set of its non-tautological members Δ is. This doesn’t however immediately justify deleting tautologies at arbitrary intermediate steps of the resolution process, and we defer a rigorous proof till after we have considered the related question of subsumption. In the propositional case, we said that a clause C subsumes a clause D if C logically implies D, which is equivalent to the syntactic condition that C is a subset of D. In the ﬁrst-order case, validity of implication between clauses is actually undecidable in general (Schmidt-Schauss 1988). We adopt a more manageable deﬁnition: a ﬁrst-order clause C subsumes another D, written C ≤ss D, if there is some instantiation θ such that subst θ C (a set operation collapsing identical literals) is a subset of D. If this is the case, then C does logically imply D, but the converse does not hold, as can be seen by noting that the clause ¬P (x) ∨ P (f (x)) logically implies ¬P (x) ∨ P (f (f (x))), remembering that the variables in each clause are implicitly universally quantiﬁed, yet does not subsume it.† In order to implement a subsumption test, we ﬁrst want a procedure for matching, which is a cut-down version of uniﬁcation allowing instantiation of variables in only the ﬁrst of each pair of terms. Note that in contrast to uniﬁcation we treat the variables in the two terms of a pair as distinct even if their names coincide, and maintain the left–right distinction in recursive calls. This means that we won’t need to rename variables ﬁrst, and won’t need to check for cycles. On the other hand, we must remember that apparently ‘trivial’ mappings x → x are in general necessary, so if x does not have a mapping already and we need to match it to t, we always add x → t to the function even if t = x. But, stylistically, the deﬁnition is very close to that of unify. †

Many resolution reﬁnements are justiﬁed at the ﬁrst-order level by ‘lifting’ from the propositional level. When doing this, the standard notion of subsumption has the merit that it interacts well with lifting: if D is a ground instance of D and C ≤ss D then there is a ground instance C of C that subsumes D propositionally. So even if logical entailment were decidable, it might be undesirable to use it as a subsumption test.

3.12 Subsumption and replacement

187

let rec term_match env eqs = match eqs with [] -> env | (Fn(f,fa),Fn(g,ga))::oth when f = g & length fa = length ga -> term_match env (zip fa ga @ oth) | (Var x,t)::oth -> if not (defined env x) then term_match ((x |-> t) env) oth else if apply env x = t then term_match env oth else failwith "term_match" | _ -> failwith "term_match";;

We can straightforwardly modify this to attempt to match a pair of literals instead of a list of pairs of terms: let rec match_literals env tmp = match tmp with Atom(R(p,a1)),Atom(R(q,a2)) | Not(Atom(R(p,a1))),Not(Atom(R(q,a2))) -> term_match env [Fn(p,a1),Fn(q,a2)] | _ -> failwith "match_literals";;

Now our subsumption test proceeds along the ﬁrst clause cls1, systematically considering all ways of instantiating the ﬁrst literal to match one in the second clause cls2, then, given the necessary instantiations, trying to do likewise for the others. let subsumes_clause cls1 cls2 = let rec subsume env cls = match cls with [] -> env | l1::clt -> tryfind (fun l2 -> subsume (match_literals env (l1,l2)) clt) cls2 in can (subsume undefined) cls1;;

Note that when we successfully instantiate a literal in the ﬁrst clause to match one in the second, we do not then eliminate that literal in the second, because it may be matchable by another literal in the ﬁrst clause. This has the rather counterintuitive consequence that, for example, P (1, x) ∨ P (y, 2) subsumes P (1, 2), even though it is longer. Logically, this is irreproachable since the latter is indeed a logical consequence of the former and not vice versa, but it can be pragmatically unappealing since unit clauses tend to be more useful. Note that subsumption is reﬂexive (C ≤ss C), by considering the identity instantiation. It is also transitive: if C ≤ss D and D ≤ss E then C ≤ss E, since if subst θC C ⊆ D and subst θD D ⊆ E we also have (subst θD ◦ subst θC ) C ⊆ E. But why is discarding subsumed clauses

188

First-order logic

permissible without destroying refutation completeness? The key property is that subsumption is ‘preserved’ by resolution: Theorem 3.30 If C ≤ss C , then any resolvent of C and D is subsumed either by a resolvent of C and D or by C itself. Proof Suppose E = subst σ ((C − C1 ) ∪ (D − D1 )) is a resolvent of C and D, σ being an MGU of the nonempty set C1 ∪ D1− , where C1 ⊆ C and D1 ⊆ D. Since C ≤ss C we have subst θ C ⊆ C for some θ. Because of the renaming of D that occurs in resolution, we can assume without loss of generality that θ has no eﬀect on D. There are now two cases to consider. If C1 ∩ subst θ C = ∅ then subst θ C ⊆ (C − C1 ) ∪ (D − D1 ), so we have (subst σ ◦ subst θ )C ⊆ E and therefore C ≤ss E . The more interesting case is where C1 ∩ subst θ C = ∅, i.e. the set C0 = {p ∈ C | subst θ p ∈ C1 } is nonempty. We will derive a resolvent E of C and D that subsumes E . Since subst θ C0 ⊆ C1 and we assumed that θ does not aﬀect D, we have subst θ (C0 ∪ D1− ) ⊆ C1 ∪ D1− and so the set C0 ∪ D1− is uniﬁed by subst σ ◦ subst θ . Thus it also has an MGU τ where subst σ ◦ subst θ = subst δ ◦ subst τ for some δ. Let E = subst τ ((C − C0 ) ∪ (D − D1 )). Then, remembering that C0 = {p ∈ C | subst θ p ∈ C1 } and that θ does not aﬀect D, we have: subst δ E = (subst δ ◦ subst τ )((C − C0 ) ∪ (D − D1 )) = (subst σ ◦ subst θ )((C − C0 ) ∪ (D − D1 )) = subst σ (subst θ ((C − C0 ) ∪ (D − D1 ))) = subst σ (subst θ (C − C0 ) ∪ subst θ (D − D1 )) = subst σ (subst θ (C − C0 ) ∪ (D − D1 )) = subst σ ((subst θ C − C1 ) ∪ (D − D1 )) ⊆ subst σ ((C − C1 ) ∪ (D − D1 )) = E and so E ≤ss E as required. Corollary 3.31 If D ≤ss D , then any resolvent of C and D is subsumed either by a resolvent of C and D or by D itself.

3.12 Subsumption and replacement

189

Proof One can routinely adapt the previous proof. Alternatively, note that although it is not strictly true to say that the result of resolving C and D on literal set S is the same as the result of resolving D and C on literals S − , it is nevertheless the case that each subsumes the other, so resolution is ‘essentially’ symmetrical. So one can deduce this directly as a corollary of the previous theorem. Corollary 3.32 If C ≤ss C and D ≤ss D , then any resolvent of C and D is subsumed either by a resolvent of C and D or by C or D itself. Proof By Theorem 3.30, any resolvent of C and D is subsumed either by a resolvent of C and D or by C itself. In the latter case we are done. In the former case, use Corollary 3.31 and observe that a resolvent of C and D is subsumed either by a resolvent of C and D or by D itself. By transitivity of subsumption, the result follows. Using this result, we can at least show that we can restrict ourselves, without losing refutation completeness, to derivations where no clause C is subsumed by any of its ancestors, i.e. the clauses C is derived from, including the initial clauses and intermediate results in C’s derivation. Corollary 3.33 If C is derivable by resolution from hypotheses S, then there is a resolution derivation of some C with C ≤ss C from S in which no clause is subsumed by any of its ancestors. Proof By induction on the structure of the proof. If C ∈ S then the result holds trivially with C = C, S = S. Otherwise, suppose C is derived by resolving on C1 and C2 . By the inductive hypothesis, there are C1 ≤ss C1 and C2 ≤ss C2 derivable without subsumption by an ancestor. By the lemma, C is subsumed by either C1 , or C2 , or a resolvent of C1 and C2 . In the case of a resolvent, unless the result C is subsumed by an ancestor of C1 or C2 we are ﬁnished. And if it is, simply take the subproof of that ancestor. In particular, if the empty clause is derivable, it is derivable without ever deriving an intermediate clause subsumed by one of its ancestors. Moreover: Lemma 3.34 If a resolution proof of a non-tautologous conclusion involves a tautology, it also involves subsumption by an (immediate) ancestor. Proof Suppose a proof of a non-tautology involves a tautology. Since the conclusion is not tautologous, there must be at least one ‘maximal’ tautology,

190

First-order logic

where a clause C contains complementary literals p and −p and is resolved with another clause D to give a non-tautologous resolvent. This must be of the form E = subst σ ((C − C1 ) ∪ (D − D1 )) for nonempty C1 ⊆ C and D1 ⊆ D with σ an MGU of C1 ∪D1− . We must have either p ∈ C1 or −p ∈ C1 , otherwise subst σ p ∈ E and −(subst σ p) ∈ E, making it tautologous. Clearly, however, we cannot have both, or C1 would not have a uniﬁer. So, without loss of generality, we can suppose p ∈ C1 and −p ∈ C − C1 . But now, since subst σ C1 = {subst σ p} and subst σ D1 = {subst σ (−p)} we have: subst σ D ⊆ {subst σ (−p)} ∪ subst σ (D − D1 ) ⊆ subst σ (C − C1 ) ∪ subst σ (D − D1 ) = E so subsumption by an immediate ancestor occurs, as claimed. This justiﬁes our immediately discarding tautologies, since a proof can always be found without using them at all. As for discarding subsumed clauses, we still need to take care, because the relationship between the way in which clauses are generated and used in the proof search algorithm and the ancestral relation in any eventual proof is not trivial. We can envisage using subsumption as part of the search procedure in at least three diﬀerent ways: • forward deletion – if a newly generated clause is subsumed by one already present, discard the newly generated clause; • backward deletion – if a newly generated clause subsumes one already present, discard the one already present; • backward replacement – if a newly generated clause subsumes one already present, replace the one already present by the newly generated one. Intuitively, forward deletion should be safe since anything one could generate from the newly generated clause will (earlier) be generated from existing clauses. However, if the subsuming clause is in used, this is not quite so clear, since the newly generated clause would be put on unused and so eventually have the opportunity to be resolved with another clause from used, whereas because of the way the enumeration is structured, two clauses from used are never resolved together. It looks plausible that this doesn’t matter, since by the time they get to used clauses have already ‘had their

3.12 Subsumption and replacement

191

chance’ to be resolved. However, the argument is a little more complicated, especially in conjunction with additional reﬁnements considered in the next section. Accordingly, we will only discard newly generated clauses if they are subsumed by a clause in unused. Backward deletion is also fraught with problems. If one too readily discards existing clauses when subsumed by a newly generated one, there are pathological situations where the desired clause recedes indeﬁnitely: before it can reach the front of the unused list, it is discarded in favour of a subsuming clause further back in the list, and before that can reach the front it is subsumed by another, and so on. It’s not too hard to concoct real examples of this phenomenon (Kowalski 1970b). But, provided the newly generated clause C properly subsumes the original clause C, that is, C ≤ss C but C ≤ss C , this cannot happen indeﬁnitely, since the ‘properly subsumes’ relation is wellfounded (see Exercise 3.13). Proper subsumption will automatically be enforced if we check for forward subsumption before back subsumption. Nevertheless, even though recession can’t continue indeﬁnitely, it can happen enough times to substantially delay the drawing of important conclusions. Thus, it seems that the policy of replacement, where the subsumed clause is replaced by the subsuming one at the original point in the unused list, is probably better, and this is what we will do. The following replace function puts cl in place of the ﬁrst clause in lis that it subsumes, or at the end if it doesn’t subsume any of them. let rec replace cl lis = match lis with [] -> [cl] | c::cls -> if subsumes_clause cl c then cl::cls else c::(replace cl cls);;

Now, the procedure for inserting a newly generated clause cl, generated from given clause gcl, into an unused list is as follows. First we check if cl is a tautology (using trivial) or subsumed by either gcl or something already in unused, and if so we discard it. Otherwise we perform the replacement, which if no back-subsumption is found will simply put the new clause at the back of the list. let incorporate gcl cl unused = if trivial cl or exists (fun c -> subsumes_clause c cl) (gcl::unused) then unused else replace cl unused;;

With the subsumption handling buried inside this auxiliary function, the main loop is almost the same as before, with incorporate used iteratively

192

First-order logic

on all the newly generated clauses, rather than their simply being appended at the end. let rec resloop (used,unused) = match unused with [] -> failwith "No proof found" | cls::ros -> print_string(string_of_int(length used) ^ " used; "^ string_of_int(length unused) ^ " unused."); print_newline(); let used’ = insert cls used in let news = itlist (@) (mapfilter (resolve_clauses cls) used’) [] in if mem [] news then true else resloop(used’,itlist (incorporate cls) news ros);;

We then redeﬁne pure_resolution and resolution exactly as before. The addition of subsumption and tautology deletion already results in dramatic eﬃciency improvements. All the problems solved by tableaux, and more besides, are now quickly solved by resolution. All those solved with diﬃculty by the naive resolution procedure are solved very quickly and with far fewer redundant clauses generated, e.g. for the Davis–Putnam example: ... 6 used; 3 unused. 7 used; 2 unused. val davis_putnam_example : bool list = [true]

Before proceeding, we will prove more precisely that the given resolution procedure, with forward subsumption and back replacement, is refutation complete. To do this, it’s helpful to denote by Used(n) and Unused(n) the state of the ‘used’ and ‘unused’ lists after n iterations of the inner loop. (In our resolution variants so far, Used(0) = ∅ and Unused(0) is the set of input clauses, but we will later consider the ‘set of support’ restriction where some input clauses go straight into used.) Because of replacement, the invariants satisﬁed by these sets are a bit involved, so it’s also convenient to introduce Sub(n) to denote the set of ‘given clauses’ processed so far. In order to state the invariants simply, we will also extend the notion of subsumption from pairs of clauses to pairs of sets of clauses. We abbreviate S ≤SS S = def ∀C ∈ S . ∃C ∈ S. C ≤ss C . It is easy to see that, like subsumption on pairs of clauses, this notion is reﬂexive and transitive. Now, the ﬁrst and simplest invariant of the algorithm

3.12 Subsumption and replacement

193

simply records the fact that after being resolved with, all the given clauses are simply inserted into the ‘used’ list: Used(n) = Used(0) ∪ Sub(n). Moreover, if Res(S, T ) denotes all non-tautologous resolvents of pairs of clauses from S and T , we note that all resolvents generated are subsumed by clauses that are retained, at ﬁrst in the unused list and later as subsequent given clauses: Sub(n) ∪ Unused(n) ≤SS Res(Sub(n), Used(n)). This is trivially true at the beginning, since Sub(0) is empty and there are no resolvents. And to show that this invariant is preserved in passing from stage n to stage n + 1, note that if G is the next given clause then Res(Sub(n + 1), Used(n + 1)) = Res(Sub(n) ∪ {G}, Used(n) ∪ {G}) and this is subsumed, using the symmetry of resolution up to subsumption and the fact that Sub(n) ⊆ Used(n), by Res(Sub(n), Used(n)) ∪ Res({G}, Used(n) ∪ {G}). The ﬁrst set in this union, by hypothesis, is already subsumed by Sub(n)∪ Unused(n). The others are precisely the newly generated resolvents in our implementation, which are subsequently incorporated into Unused(n + 1) and hence subsumed by it. Finally, since clauses already in Unused(n) are either maintained, replaced by those subsuming them, or in the case of the given clause moved into Sub(n + 1), we have Sub(n + 1) ∪ Unused(n + 1) ≤SS Unused(n). Hence the invariant is maintained. Now note that, starting at stage n, if we make a further |Unused(n)| iteration, all clauses from Unused(n), or others subsuming them that are introduced later, are moved into Sub(n + |Unused(n)|). This allows us to deﬁne a particular sequence of values of n where we get a stratiﬁcation into levels. Deﬁne: brk(0) = |Unused(0)| brk(n + 1) = brk(n) + |Unused(brk(n))| and write level(n) = Sub(brk(n)). Then we have level(0) ≤SS Unused(0) and our main invariant yields level(n + 1) ≤SS level(n) ∪ Res(level(n), Used(0) ∪ level(n)).

194

First-order logic

In our algorithms so far putting all input clauses in unused, all the input clauses are contained in Unused(0) and hence subsumed by level(0), while since Used(0) = ∅, level(n + 1) subsumes level(n) and all non-tautologous resolvents of pairs of clauses taken from level(n). Consequently, if a resolution refutation of those clauses exists, the empty clause will be derived in some level. Moreover, assuming that the empty clause was not in Unused(0), it can only have got into a level by being one of the newly generated resolvents, and hence will be detected. That it does not occur in the initial input clauses is assured by the use of simpdnf, which ﬁlters out such trivially unsatisﬁable disjuncts. 3.13 Reﬁnements of resolution Unfortunately, it often happens that resolution can arrive at the same intermediate clause in many diﬀerent ways. For example, the two pictures below show two diﬀerent ways in which the conclusion X ∨ Y ∨ Z at the root of the tree can be derived by resolution steps from the input clauses at the leaves. X ∨Y ∨Z

X ∨Y ∨Z @

@

@

P ∨X

@

@

Q∨X ∨Y

¬P ∨ Y ∨ Z @

@ @

@

¬P ∨ Q ∨ Y

@

¬Q ∨ Z

P ∨X

@

¬Q ∨ Z

@

¬P ∨ Q ∨ Y

Although many duplicates are eventually removed by subsumption checking, there is still an unfortunate blowup in the search space being explored, for the duplication may occur over much longer ranges than in this simple example. It would be much better if we could cut down on this redundancy in the search space, for example by systematically preferring one kind of proof tree whenever there are many alternatives. Linear resolution In fact, we can regard the duplication above as indicating a possible proof transformation. Given a resolution proof where some right branch is itself a branch rather than one of the input clauses (for example ¬P ∨ Y ∨ Z in the earlier ﬁgure), we can ‘rotate’ the proof tree to eliminate it. This transformation can apparently be applied repeatedly until the proof ‘tree’ is maximally lopsided, consisting of a single linear ‘trunk’ with input clauses

3.13 Reﬁnements of resolution

195

suspended from it. Thus, we seem to be justiﬁed in searching only for such a linear input proof, avoiding a great deal of redundancy. Such a conclusion is too hasty, however, as the reader can see by attempting to linearize a resolution refutation of the clauses {P ∨ Q, P ∨ ¬Q, ¬P ∨ Q, ¬P ∨ ¬Q}. The problem with treating the ﬁrst ﬁgure as a paradigm is that the clauses X, Y and Z might be, or might contain, P or Q or their negations. Considering this, it turns out that we can always apply such a rotation, but we may need an additional step where one of the earlier clauses on the trunk is re-used. With this extension, the above set of clauses can be refuted thus: ⊥

¬Q

@ @

@

¬P ∨ ¬Q

P @

@

@

P ∨ ¬Q

Q

@

@

P ∨Q

@

¬P ∨ Q

One can show that in this fashion, any resolution proof of a clause C can, by such ‘rotations’, be transformed into a linear one of some C ≤ss C, allowing at each stage resolution of the previously deduced clause either with an input clause or an earlier one in the linear sequence. In particular, if a set of clauses has a refutation, it has a linear refutation. The idea of searching just for linear refutations gives linear resolution (Loveland 1970; Luckham 1970; Zamov and Sharanov 1969). Although this greatly reduces redundancy, compatibility with subsumption and elimination of tautologies becomes more complicated. For example (Loveland 1970), the set of clauses {p∨q, p, q, ¬p∨¬q} has a linear resolution refutation with root p∨q. However it is clear that such a proof must necessarily involve a tautology, since the only resolvents of other clauses with p ∨ q are p ∨ ¬p or q ∨ ¬q; thus it is no longer the case if tautologies are forbidden that an arbitrary clause can be chosen as the ‘root’. We will not go into more detail, since we will not actually implement linear resolution. However it is useful to understand the

196

First-order logic

concept of linear resolution since it is related to material covered in the following two sections on Prolog and Model elimination.

Positive resolution Another way of imposing restrictions on resolution proofs was introduced by Robinson (1965a) very soon after his original paper on resolution. He showed that refutation completeness is retained if each resolution operation is restricted so that one of the two hypothesis clauses is all-positive, i.e. contains no negative literals. This often cuts down the search space quite dramatically. Robinson referred to resolution subject to this restriction as P1 -resolution, though it is more often nowadays referred to simply as positive resolution. We will now demonstrate the refutation completeness of this restriction, following Robinson. As usual, we need only establish the result for ground clauses at the propositional level and can then lift it to general clauses, since instantiation or factoring has no eﬀect on the positivity of a clause. We start with the following. Lemma 3.35 If S is a ﬁnite unsatisﬁable set of propositional clauses not containing the empty clause, then there is a positive resolution step with two clauses from S resulting in a clause not already in S. Proof Partition the set S into two disjoint sets, the all-positive clauses P and the clauses with at least one negative literal N . Thus S = P ∪ N . Note that neither P nor N can be empty, otherwise S would be satisﬁable in either the propositional valuation mapping all atomic propositions to ‘false’ or the one mapping them all to ‘true’. In fact, since P is satisﬁed by any valuation that maps the ﬁnitely many atoms A appearing in S to true, it follows that there is a ‘minimal’ valuation v : A → bool satisfying P , i.e. one such that there is no valuation satisfying P that assigns ‘true’ to fewer propositional variables. Now, since S as a whole is unsatisﬁable and v satisﬁes P , there must be at least one clause in N that is false under v. Let K be some clause from N that is false in v and has the minimal number of negative literals among such clauses; i.e. no other K ∈ N that is false in v has fewer negative literals. K must contain at least one negative literal, say ¬p, since it belongs to N . Note that v(p) = , since otherwise K would hold in v, contrary to our assumption. Now the positive literal p must occur in some clause J ∈ P such that J − {p} is not satisﬁed by v, for otherwise the valuation v setting

3.13 Reﬁnements of resolution

197

v (p) = ⊥ and treating other propositional variables in the same way as v would satisfy P , contrary to the minimality assumption on v. Now J is all-positive and so R = (J − {p}) ∪ (K − {¬p}) is derivable by a positive resolution step. This contains fewer negative literals than K, since J is all-positive. Since K was false in v, all the literals in K − {¬p} must be false in v, and by hypothesis so are all the literals in J − {p}. Thus R has fewer negative literals than K and is false in v. This contradicts the minimality of K unless R is actually empty and therefore belongs to P . However by hypothesis the empty clause was not in S and so the result is proved. Theorem 3.36 If S is a ﬁnite unsatisﬁable set of propositional clauses then there is a positive resolution derivation of the empty clause from S. Proof Since S is ﬁnite there can only be a ﬁnite set of propositional variables involved in S and therefore the set of all resolvents (positive or not) derivable from S is ﬁnite. (Remember that we work at the propositional level and treat clauses as sets of literals, so repetitions of a literal do not give distinct clauses). By the above lemma, given any set Sn of resolvents of S, if Sn does not contain the empty clause we can ﬁnd another positive resolvent Cn of clauses in Sn and set Sn+1 = Sn ∪ {Cn }. Starting with S0 = S we can repeat this procedure; since the number of possible resolvents is ﬁnite, we cannot do so indeﬁnitely and therefore must eventually reach the empty clause. Corollary 3.37 If S is an unsatisﬁable set of ﬁrst-order clauses there is a deduction by positive resolution of the empty clause. Proof The usual lifting argument. By compactness and Herbrand’s theorem there is a ﬁnite set of ground instances of clauses in S that is unsatisﬁable. By the previous theorem, there is a derivation of the empty clause by positive resolution. Now we simply repeatedly apply the lifting Lemma 3.28 and derive a proof by ﬁrst-order positive resolution; note that instantiation does not aﬀect positivity of clauses. It is easy to see using the same argument as above that positive resolution is compatible with our subsumption and replacement policies. The key property of resolution used to justify these reﬁnements was Corollary 3.32, asserting that if C ≤ss C and D ≤ss D , then any resolvent of C and

198

First-order logic

D is subsumed either by a resolvent of C and D or by C or D itself. This remains true if we change ‘resolvent’ to ‘positive resolvent’ since if C1 ≤ss C2 and C2 is positive, so is C1 . Thus we will modify the resolution prover with subsumption to perform positive resolution. The modiﬁcation is simplicity itself: we restrict the core function resolve clauses so that it returns the empty set unless one of the two input clauses is all-positive: let presolve_clauses cls1 cls2 = if forall positive cls1 or forall positive cls2 then resolve_clauses cls1 cls2 else [];;

Now we simply re-enter the deﬁnition of resloop, this time calling it presloop and replacing resolve clauses with presolve clauses, and then deﬁne the positive variant of pure resolution in the same way: let pure_presolution fm = presloop([],simpcnf(specialize(pnf fm)));;

followed by the same function with a diﬀerent name: let presolution fm = let fm1 = askolemize(Not(generalize fm)) in map (pure_presolution ** list_conj) (simpdnf fm1);;

It turns out, in fact, that positive resolution is often much more eﬃcient than unrestricted resolution. For example, the following interesting ﬁrstorder formula due to L o´s:† # let los = time presolution <<(forall x y z. P(x,y) /\ P(y,z) ==> P(x,z)) /\ (forall x y z. Q(x,y) /\ Q(y,z) ==> Q(x,z)) /\ (forall x y. Q(x,y) ==> Q(y,x)) /\ (forall x y. P(x,y) \/ Q(x,y)) ==> (forall x y. P(x,y)) \/ (forall x y. Q(x,y))>>;; ... val los : bool list = [true]

is solvable reasonably quickly, whereas it is hopelessly slow with either tableaux or unrestricted resolution. Semantic resolution The special role of positivity isn’t essential; we could equally well have considered negative resolution where at least one of the input clauses must be all-negative, or more generally for each propositional variable given it a †

Most people ﬁnd it less than obvious (Rudnicki 1987) and the reader may enjoy understanding it intuitively.

3.13 Reﬁnements of resolution

199

particular ‘positive’ or ‘negative’ status. Essentially the same argument can be used to establish refutation completeness in each case. All these can be seen as special cases of a more general technique of semantic resolution (Slagle 1967). Theorem 3.38 If S is an unsatisﬁable set of propositional clauses and v an arbitrary propositional valuation, then there is a resolution derivation of S restricting resolution steps to those where at least one of the hypothesis clauses is not satisﬁed by v (i.e. all literals in that clause are false in v). Proof Essentially the same as the completeness proof for positive resolution, replacing ‘positive’ with ‘does not hold in v’ and ‘negative’ with ‘holds in v’. Theorem 3.39 If S is an unsatisﬁable set of clauses and I an arbitrary interpretation of the symbols used in those clauses, there is a resolution derivation of S restricting resolution steps to those where at least one of the hypothesis clauses does not hold in I. (That is, for some valuation does not hold, because we regard the clauses as implicitly universally quantiﬁed.) Proof As usual, we will perform lifting. By compactness and Herbrand’s theorem there is a ﬁnite set of ground instances of clauses in S that is unsatisﬁable. Given the interpretation I, pick an arbitrary valuation w and hence deﬁne a propositional valuation on atoms by v(P (a1 , . . . , an )) = holds I w (P (a1 , . . . , an )). By the previous theorem, there is a refutation of the set of ground instances by resolution where at least one hypothesis is false in v. But in the lifting argument, we simply need to note that if a ground instance C of C does not hold propositionally in v, then C cannot hold in I, since otherwise all instances would hold in all valuations, in particular w. Positive resolution, for example, is the special case where the interpretation sets RI (a1 , . . . , an ) = ⊥ for all predicate letters R and elements ai in the domain of I.

The set of support strategy The ﬂexibility of semantic resolution is appealing, since we may be able to use semantic concerns to pick an appropriate interpretation. However, it

200

First-order logic

might be easier if we did not need to spell out an appropriate interpretation, but only kept it implicitly at the background. In the main resolution setup above, we started with the used list empty, ensuring that all pairs of clauses had the opportunity to be resolved. However, it may be that we would do better to forbid resolutions entirely among some particular subset of the initial clauses. The idea is that by this means, resolution can be focused away from deducing valid but irrelevant conclusions, and towards deducing those that contribute to the problem at hand. This is the basic principle of the set of support strategy (Wos, Robinson and Carson 1965). We start by separating the set of input clauses into two disjoint subsets, the set of support S and the ‘unsupported’ clauses U . Now we simply impose the requirement on resolution refutations that no two clauses of U are resolved together. A linear refutation can be seen as one where the set of support is the singleton set {C0 }, where C0 is the start clause. However, a set-of-support refutation from {C0 } may have multiple separate branches that join higher up the proof tree, provided that each one starts from C0 , whereas in a linear refutation there is only one. Theorem 3.40 If a subset S of a set T of input clauses has the property that T is unsatisﬁable, but T − S is satisﬁable, then there is a resolution refutation of T with set of support S. Proof Since by hypothesis, T − S is satisﬁable, there is an interpretation I that satisﬁes it. By the refutation completeness of semantic resolution, there is therefore a resolution refutation in which at least one of the clauses that is resolved does not hold in I. In particular, this implies that no two clauses of T − S are resolved together. The condition in the theorem that T − S should be satisﬁable cannot in general be relaxed. For example, the clauses: {¬P ∨ R, P, Q, ¬P ∨ ¬Q} are clearly unsatisﬁable. However, if we choose {¬P ∨ R} as the set of support, then no refutation is possible; we can deduce the clause R but make no further progress. To implement the set-of-support restriction, we need no major changes to the given clause algorithm: simply set the initial used to be the unsupported clauses rather than the empty set. This precisely ensures that two unsupported clauses are never resolved together. Recall that

3.13 Reﬁnements of resolution

201

level(n + 1) ≤SS level(n) ∪ Res(level(n), Used(0) ∪ level(n)), so the successive levels enumerate precisely the desired sets of resolvents. One satisfactory choice for the set of support is the collection of allnegative input clauses. This is because any set of clauses in which each clause contains a positive literal is satisﬁable (just interpret all predicates as true everywhere), so the basic theoretical condition is satisﬁed. Thus we make the following modiﬁcation: let pure_resolution fm = resloop(partition (exists positive) (simpcnf(specialize(pnf fm))));;

and re-enter the deﬁnition of resolution. Although this may not be optimal, it often works quite well. The L o´s problem is solved much faster than with unrestricted resolution, though not as quickly as with positive resolution. However, resolution experts usually like to make a particular choice of set of support themselves rather than using the simple syntactically-based default we have adopted. Suppose, for example, one is trying to use a standard set of mathematical axioms A together with special additional hypothesis B to prove a conclusion C. In a refutational framework, this amounts to deriving the empty clause from A ∧ B ∧ ¬C. Reasonable choices for the set of support are B ∧ ¬C or just ¬C, since they will inhibit general exploration of axioms A. Indeed, ¬C will often be the choice of our default in such situations, because it may well be the only all-negative clause. Note that simply imposing negative resolution would be more restrictive than set-of-support proofs starting with all-negative clauses as the set of support, but in many cases the set-of-support restriction allows shorter proofs that compensate for the larger search space.

Hyperresolution Robinson’s introduction of positive resolution was just a prelude to an additional reﬁnement called positive hyperresolution, which is based on the following observation. Every step in a positive resolution refutation involves one all-positive clause, and in order for resolution to be possible, there must be at least one negative literal in the other clause. Consider a clause participating in a positive resolution refutation that contains some number n ≥ 1 of negative literals: ¬L1 ∨ ¬L2 ∨ · · · ∨ ¬Ln ∨ P.

202

First-order logic

Since it contains negative literals, the other hypothesis in any resolution where it is used must be all-positive, and hence must resolve with one of the literals ¬Li ; say L1 for simplicity. If we ignore instantiation and the possibility of factoring, the result is of the form ¬L2 ∨ · · · ∨ ¬Ln ∨ P ∨ Q for all-positive P and Q. If n ≥ 2 then any subsequent resolution step using that clause must in its turn be with another all-positive clause, and so on. In general, a clause containing n negative literals, if it participates in a positive resolution derivation, must be repeatedly resolved with positive clauses until all the negative literals have disappeared. (This might, because factoring merges some of the Li together, take fewer than n resolution steps.) We can imagine combining all these successive resolutions into a single hyperresolution step. That is, although we might still implement it as a succession of resolution steps, we don’t need to keep the intermediate results, since we know that if they participate at all in a refutation, it will be via more resolutions with all-positive clauses and give one of the results of the hyperresolution step. By performing hyperresolution as a single step, we avoid repeatedly deriving the same result by resolving with the same clauses in a slightly diﬀerent order, and hence cut down on redundancy. Of course, a single hyperresolution step still has to enumerate all the essentially diﬀerent possibilities, which makes it in general a much more productive rule than binary resolution. However it is sometimes eﬃcient for dealing with certain kinds of problems. We will not actually implement hyperresolution, but later (Section 4.9) we will exploit for theoretical purposes the restriction on the form of refutations implied by positive hyperresolution. We have only scratched the surface of the huge literature on resolution reﬁnements. For more detail on these and many other reﬁnements, including some relatively modern methods using orderings and selection functions, the reader can refer, for example, to Loveland (1978), Leitsch (1997), Bachmair and Ganzinger (2001) and de Nivelle (1995).

3.14 Horn clauses and Prolog With respect to any Herbrand interpretation H, a valuation v is a mapping into the set of ground terms of the language, and using Lemma 3.19 we see that for any atomic formula P (t1 , . . . , tn ): holds H v (P (t1 , . . . , tn )) = PH (tsubst v t1 , . . . , tsubst v tn ).

3.14 Horn clauses and Prolog

203

In the special case that all ti are ground, this is simply PH (t1 , . . . , tn ). The set of all atomic ground formulas in a language is often called the Herbrand base. Our observation sets up a natural bijection between Herbrand interpretations and subsets of the Herbrand base, viz. the set of elements of the Herbrand base that hold in the interpretation. Let S be a set of clauses. We construct a Herbrand interpretation M interpreting each n-ary predicate P by PM (t1 , . . . , tn ) = true if and only if PH (t1 , . . . , tn ) = true for every Herbrand model H of S. From the above remarks, it is clear that a ground atom holds in M iﬀ it holds in every Herbrand model of H. In fact, since any Herbrand interpretation satisﬁes a quantiﬁer-free formula iﬀ it satisﬁes all its ground instances, it follows that any atomic formula is satisﬁed by M iﬀ it is satisﬁed by all Herbrand models of S. Accordingly, if M so constructed is in fact a model of S, we say that it is the least or minimal Herbrand model of S. But under what circumstances is it indeed a model of S? To see what can go wrong, consider S = {P (0) ∨ Q(0)}. There are three diﬀerent Herbrand models of S, one of which makes P (0) true and Q(0) false, one that makes P (0) false and Q(0) true, and one that makes both of them true. Since neither P (0) nor Q(0) holds in all Herbrand models, M makes neither of them hold, and so is not a model of S. However, in a precise sense, a disjunction of more than one positive literal in S is the only case where things go wrong. We deﬁne a Horn clause to be a clause containing at most one positive literal, and a deﬁnite clause to be one containing exactly one positive literal. (Thus, a deﬁnite clause is also a Horn clause.) The signiﬁcance of this classiﬁcation becomes a little clearer if we write clauses in a slightly diﬀerent style using implication instead of negation: • P1 ∧ · · · ∧ Pn ⇒ Q for the deﬁnite clause ¬P1 ∨ · · · ∨ ¬Pn ∨ Q with n ≥ 1 negative literals, or just Q if there are no negative literals; • P1 ∧ · · · ∧ Pn ⇒ ⊥ for a non-deﬁnite Horn clause ¬P1 ∨ · · · ∨ ¬Pn ; • P1 ∧ · · · ∧ Pn ⇒ Q1 ∨ · · · ∨ Qm for a non-Horn clause ¬P1 ∨ · · · ∨ ¬Pn ∨ Q1 ∨ · · · ∨ Qm containing m ≥ 2 positive literals. It is clear that any set of deﬁnite clauses is satisﬁable by any model M that sets PM (a1 , . . . , an ) = true without restriction, since each clause contains a positive literal. More interestingly, the construction above does indeed yield a least model of it:† †

The reasoning justifying the existence of a least Herbrand model for a set of deﬁnite clauses is

204

First-order logic

Lemma 3.41 Any set S of deﬁnite clauses has a least Herbrand model M , which satisifes an atomic formula p iﬀ every Herbrand model of S satisﬁes p. Proof Consider a deﬁnite clause in S, perhaps meaning just Q(s1 , . . . , sp ) in the case n = 0: P 1 (t11 , . . . , t1m1 ) ∧ · · · ∧ P n (tn1 , . . . , tnmn ) ⇒ Q(s1 , . . . , sp ). We want to show that this holds in M for any valuation v. Consistently abbreviating t = tsubst v t, this amounts to showing that if for each k (tk , . . . , tk ) = true, then also Q (s , . . . , s ) = 1 ≤ k ≤ n we have PM M 1 mk p 1 k k k true. But if each PM (t1 , . . . , tmk ) is true, it means by deﬁnition that for every Herbrand model H of S, we have PHk (tk1 , . . . , tkmk ) = true. But since each such H is a model of S, it follows that QH (s1 , . . . , sp ) = true. Thus QM (s1 , . . . , sp ) = true as required. By contrast, a set of general Horn clauses may not be satisﬁable at all, e.g. the set S = {P, ¬P }. But if it is satisﬁable, we have the same least model property. Theorem 3.42 If a set S of Horn clauses is satisﬁable, it has a least Herbrand model M , which satisifes an atomic formula p iﬀ every Herbrand model of S satisﬁes p. Proof Separate S = D ∪ N into disjoint sets of deﬁnite clauses D and nondeﬁnite Horn clauses N . Let M be the least Herbrand model of D, whose existence is guaranteed by the previous lemma. We claim that it is in fact a model of N as well. For if a clause P 1 (t11 , . . . , t1m1 )∧· · ·∧P n (tn1 , . . . , tnmn ) ⇒ ⊥ in S fails to hold in M , there is some valuation v such that, consistently k (tk , . . . , tk ) = abbreviating t = tsubst v t, for each 1 ≤ k ≤ n we have PM mk 1 true. But this means that each PHk (tk1 , . . . , tkmk ) = true for every Herbrand model of D, implying that the clause holds in no Herbrand model of D. Thus D ∪ N has no Herbrand model and so by Theorem 3.24 no model at all, contradicting the assumption that S was satisﬁable. Several interesting consequences ﬂow from the existence of least models, in particular the following convexity property. strongly reminiscent of monotone inductive deﬁnitions (see Appendix 1), and in fact we could consider the subset of the Herbrand base corresponding to the least model as being deﬁned inductively by treating the set of ground instances of clauses as rules.

3.14 Horn clauses and Prolog

205

Theorem 3.43 If S is a set of Horn clauses and the Ai are atomic formulas, then S |= A1 ∨ · · · ∨ An iﬀ S |= Ai for some 1 ≤ i ≤ n. Proof The right-to-left deﬁnition is immediate, so we need only consider leftto-right. By expanding the language if necessary, we can assume that all the Ai are ground (cf. Theorem 3.11). If S is unsatisﬁable, then the result follows trivially. Otherwise S has a least model M , and since S |= A1 ∨ · · · ∨ An and all the Ai are ground, it follows that some Ai holds in M . It therefore, by deﬁnition, holds in all Herbrand models of S and therefore by Theorem 3.24 in all models of S, as required. Although, as is traditional, we have mainly focused on refutation of an unsatisﬁable formula as the core of our proof procedures, we could dualize and present it in terms of validity. In this case, a more natural version of Herbrand’s theorem is the following (cf. also corollary 2.15): Theorem 3.44 If P [x1 , . . . , xn ] and all formulas in the set S are quantiﬁerfree, then S |= ∃x1 , . . . , xn . P [x1 , . . . , xn ] iﬀ there is a ﬁnite disjunction of m ground instances such that S |= P [t11 , . . . , t1n ] ∨ · · · ∨ P [tm 1 , . . . , tn ] Proof The right-to-left direction is straightforward. Conversely if we have S |= ∃x1 , . . . , xn .P [x1 , . . . , xn ] then the set of formulas S ∪{¬P [x1 , . . . , xn ]}, where as usual the variables xi are implicitly universally quantiﬁed, is unsatisﬁable. By Theorem 3.25 there is a ﬁnite set of ground instances such that m S ∪ {¬P [t11 , . . . , t1n ], . . . , ¬P [tm 1 , . . . , tn ]} m is unsatisﬁable, so S |= P [t11 , . . . , t1n ] ∨ · · · ∨ P [tm 1 , . . . , tn ] and therefore m S |= P [t11 , . . . , t1n ] ∨ · · · ∨ P [tm 1 , . . . , tn ] as required.

In the case of Horn clauses, we can sharpen this to a kind of inﬁnitary analogue of convexity. Theorem 3.45 If P [x1 , . . . , xn ] is quantiﬁer-free and S is a set of Horn clauses, then S |= ∃x1 , . . . , xn .P [x1 , . . . , xn ] iﬀ there is some ground instance such that S |= P [t1 , . . . , tn ]. Proof Combine Theorems 3.43 and 3.44. Given a set of deﬁnite clauses S, consider the set of ﬁnite trees T whose nodes are labelled by ground atoms and such that whenever a node Q has children P1 , . . . , Pn , there is a ground instance P1 ∧ · · · ∧ Pn ⇒ Q of a clause

206

First-order logic

in S. We claim that the set B of ground atoms that can form the root of such a tree is exactly the subset of the Herbrand base corresponding to the least model. In one direction, the model corresponding to this set B satisﬁes all ground instances P1 ∧ · · · ∧ Pn ⇒ Q of the clauses in S, because if each Pi forms the root of such a tree, we can construct a tree with root Q and children Pi forming the roots of corresponding subtrees. Conversely, it is clear that any model of the ground instances of the clauses in S must include B, since if each Pi holds in a model, so does Q. By Theorem 3.22, being a Herbrand model of S and being a Herbrand model of the set of its ground instances coincide, so the result follows. This gives a nice goal-directed way of verifying that some atomic ground formula holds in all models of a set of deﬁnite clauses S. It does if there is a ﬁnite set of ground instances of formulas in S by which it can be deduced via a kind of tree search. Given an initial goal P , we know that if it holds in the least model there is some clause that when instantiated, say to Q1 ∧ · · · ∧ Qn ⇒ P , has P as its conclusion. Thus it suﬃces to show that all the ‘subgoals’ Qi hold in the least model, by further search of the same kind. As with tableaux, the appropriate instantiations can be discovered gradually by uniﬁcation of the goal with the heads of clauses. Indeed, if we start with an initial goal containing variables that we regard as implicitly existentially quantiﬁed, Theorem 3.45 implies that there is a speciﬁc ground instance that is a consequence of the clauses, and the process of uniﬁcation will not only prove the goal but even provide witnesses, i.e. speciﬁc terms that can replace the existentially quantiﬁed variables. We will exploit this feature when we consider Prolog below. Satisﬁability of a set of Horn clauses can be reduced to deﬁnite clause theorem proving, and hence tested in the same goal-directed way. To see this, take a set S of Horn clauses, and introduce a new nullary predicate symbol F that does not occur in S. Intuitively we think of F as standing for ⊥, so we replace every all-negative clause in S of the form: ¬P1 ∨ · · · ∨ ¬Pn by ¬P1 ∨ · · · ∨ ¬Pn ∨ F, hence turning the set S of Horn clauses into a set S of deﬁnite clauses. Note that S is satisﬁable if and only if S ∪ {¬F } is. Modulo propositional equivalence, we are replacing each clause ¬C by C ⇒ F . Now any model of S ∪ {¬F } must be a model of S, since if both C ⇒ F and ¬F hold, so does ¬C. Conversely, we claim that any model of S can be extended to a model

3.14 Horn clauses and Prolog

207

of S ∪ {¬F } by also interpreting F as false. This trivially satisﬁes ¬F , and it also still satisﬁes S since the interpretation within the language of S has not changed. But if a clause ¬C in S holds then certainly the corresponding clause C ⇒ F of S does too.

Implementation The implementation of this backchaining search with uniﬁcation is quite similar to the tableau implementation from Section 3.10. Variable instantiations are kept globally, and backtracking is initiated when a given instantiation does not lead to a complete solution. Since the rules are considered universally quantiﬁed, we can introduce fresh variable names each time we use one, so that diﬀerent instances of the same rule can be used without restriction. The following takes an integer k and a rule’s assumptions asm and conclusion c, and renames the variables schematically starting with ‘ k’, returning both the modiﬁed formula and a new index that can be used next time. let renamerule k (asm,c) = let fvs = fv(list_conj(c::asm)) in let n = length fvs in let vvs = map (fun i -> "_" ^ string_of_int i) (k -- (k+n-1)) in let inst = subst(fpf fvs (map (fun x -> Var x) vvs)) in (map inst asm,inst c),k+n;;

The core function backchain organizes the backward chaining with uniﬁcation and backtracking search. If the list of goals is empty, it simply succeeds and returns the current instantiation env, unpacked into a list of pairs for later manipulation, while if n, which is a limit on the maximum number of rule applications, is zero, it fails. Otherwise it searches through the rules for one whose consequent c can be uniﬁed with the current goal g and such that the new subgoals a together with the original subgoals gs can be solved under that instantiation. let rec backchain rules n k env goals = match goals with [] -> env | g::gs -> if n = 0 then failwith "Too deep" else tryfind (fun rule -> let (a,c),k’ = renamerule k rule in backchain rules (n - 1) k’ (unify_literals env (c,g)) (a @ gs)) rules;;

208

First-order logic

In order to apply this to validity checking, we need to convert a raw Horn clause into a rule. Note that we do not literally introduce a new symbol F to turn a Horn clause into a deﬁnite clause, but just use ⊥ directly: let hornify cls = let pos,neg = partition positive cls in if length pos > 1 then failwith "non-Horn clause" else (map negate neg,if pos = [] then False else hd pos);;

As with the tableau provers, we now simply need to iteratively increase the proof size bound n until a proof is found. As well as the instantiations, the necessary size bound is returned. let hornprove fm = let rules = map hornify (simpcnf(skolemize(Not(generalize fm)))) in deepen (fun n -> backchain rules n 0 undefined [False],n) 0;;

Where it is applicable, it is quite eﬀective, e.g. # let p32 = hornprove <<(forall x. P(x) /\ (G(x) \/ H(x)) ==> Q(x)) /\ (forall x. Q(x) /\ H(x) ==> J(x)) /\ (forall x. R(x) ==> H(x)) ==> (forall x. P(x) /\ R(x) ==> J(x))>>;; ... val p32 : (string, term) func * int = (, 8)

However, it is limited to problems that give rise to a set of Horn clauses, and so is inapplicable to some quite trivial problems, even on the propositional level: # hornprove <<(p \/ q) /\ (~p \/ q) /\ (p \/ ~q) ==> ~(~q \/ ~q)>>;; Exception: Failure "non-Horn clause".

In the next section we will see how to retain some of the attractive features of this backchaining style of proof search, while at the same time dealing with arbitrary ﬁrst-order formulas. First, however, it is worth noting another interesting feature of the present setup. Even though it is limited as a theorem prover, it can actually be used as a programming language.

Prolog To ensure completeness, we performed iterative deepening over the total number of rule applications. Other approaches are possible, e.g. bounding on the maximum depth of the ‘proof tree’, and we’ll examine a more reﬁned approach in more detail in the next section. We could also store the possible

3.14 Horn clauses and Prolog

209

‘tree fringes’ at a given limit, and then instead of recalculating them when the limit is increased, consider all ways of extending them with one more rule application. The drawback is that doing so requires a large amount of storage, whereas with the recalculation-based approach, storage requirements are not signiﬁcant. Besides, as pointed out by Korf (1985), the additional load of recalculation is usually relatively small because the number of possibilities tends to expand exponentially with depth, making the latest level dominate the runtimes anyway. A radical alternative is simply to abandon any kind of bound. The practical eﬀect of this is that the goal tree will be expanded in a depth-ﬁrst fashion, with the ﬁrst possible rule applied to the current goal tree, backtracking only when no more uniﬁcations are possible. At ﬁrst sight, this looks a dubious idea, since looping can occur and completeness is lost. For example, if the two rules are P (f (x)) ⇒ P (x) and P (0), in that order, then attempting to solve the goal P (0), the ﬁrst rule will be applied ad inﬁnitum, generating increasingly complicated subgoals P (0), P (f (0)), P (f (f (0))),. . . . Only by placing a limit on the number of rule applications did backtracking force hornprove to consider the second rule. However, when it does succeed, the unlimited search is often quicker, because it avoids the wasteful duplication and excessive search space exploration that can result from iterative deepening. This style of search is the basis of the popular ‘logic programming’ language Prolog (Colmerauer, Kanoi, Roussel and Pasero 1973). Although it is not a complete proof procedure even for the Horn subset of ﬁrst-order logic, it can be used as an eﬀective programming language. As noted by Kowalski (1974), a set of deﬁnite clauses can be given a procedural interpretation. It is customary in Prolog to write a deﬁnite clause P1 ∧ · · · ∧ Pn ⇒ Q as Q :- P1 , · · ·, Pn to emphasize this interpretation. We can think of this clause as deﬁning a procedure Q in terms of other procedures Pi . Application of this rule amounts to calling Q which in its turn will call the sub-procedures Pi . Uniﬁcation of variables handles the passing of parameters to and from procedures in a uniform way. This is perhaps best understood by implementing it and demonstrating a few simple examples. First, we will write a parser for rules in their Prolog syntax:†

†

In actual Prolog syntax, all rules should be terminated by ‘.’. Moreover, upper-case identiﬁers are variables and lower-case identiﬁers are constants, and for conformance we use upper-case variable names below.

210

First-order logic

let parserule s = let c,rest = parse_formula parse_atom [] (lex(explode s)) in let asm,rest1 = if rest <> [] & hd rest = ":-" then parse_list "," (parse_formula parse_atom []) (tl rest) else [],rest in if rest1 = [] then (asm,c) else failwith "Extra material after rule";;

The core of our Prolog interpreter will be the backchain function without taking into account the bounding size n. We could modify the code to remove it, but the path of least resistance, albeit a slightly sleazy one, is simply to start it oﬀ with a negative number, since we test for its becoming exactly zero, and this will never happen (at least, not until integer wraparound occurs). let simpleprolog rules gl = backchain (map parserule rules) (-1) 0 undefined [parse gl];;

To illustrate how it may be used, consider a zero-successor representation of numerals, with 1 = S(0), 2 = S(S(0)) etc. We can deﬁne the ‘≤’ relation by a pair of deﬁnite clauses: let lerules = ["0 <= X"; "S(X) <= S(Y) :- X <= Y"];;

for example: # simpleprolog lerules "S(S(0)) <= S(S(S(0)))";; - : (string, term) func = # simpleprolog lerules "S(S(0)) <= S(0)";; Exception: Failure "tryfind".

At ﬁrst sight, Prolog is more limited than a functional language like OCaml because we can only deﬁne predicates, not functions with nonBoolean values. However, because of uniﬁcation, Prolog can actually return values by binding one of the variables in the goal. Before demonstrating this idea, we’ll set up code to output these variable bindings clearly. Although we can’t predict whether a free variable in the goal clause will occur on the left or right of the lists returned, we know, because no variables are repeated on the left and no composite terms are there, that any interesting instantiations (i.e. other than temporary variables, which

3.14 Horn clauses and Prolog

211

are equally general) will be derivable by reading the equations left-to-right. Thus we can modify the interpreter: let prolog rules gl = let i = solve(simpleprolog rules gl) in mapfilter (fun x -> Atom(R("=",[Var x; apply i x]))) (fv(parse gl));;

Now we see at once that S(S(0)) ≤ X is true for any X of the form S(S(Y )): # prolog lerules "S(S(0)) <= X";; - : fol formula list = [<<X = S(S(_3))>>]

So where in OCaml we would deﬁne a function f of n arguments, in Prolog we can deﬁne a corresponding predicate P of n + 1 arguments, where P (x1 , . . . , xn , y) is true precisely if f (x1 , . . . , xn ) = y. In fact, this mechanism is very general, since it allows P to have multiple possible values, giving a natural vehicle for nondeterministic programming. Moreover, Prolog treats inputs and outputs more symmetrically. Consider the following Prolog analogue of the standard OCaml list append operation: let appendrules = ["append(nil,L,L)"; "append(H::T,L,H::A) :- append(T,L,A)"];;

We can exploit this in the usual way: # prolog appendrules "append(1::2::nil,3::4::nil,Z)";; - : fol formula list = [<>]

but we can also use it backwards, to discover what list would give a certain result: # # # -

prolog appendrules : fol formula list prolog appendrules : fol formula list prolog appendrules : fol formula list

"append(1::2::nil,Y,1::2::3::4::nil)";; = [<>] "append(X,3::4::nil,1::2::3::4::nil)";; = [<<X = 1::2::nil>>] "append(X,Y,1::2::3::4::nil)";; = [<<X = nil>>; <>]

In the last case, we just get the ﬁrst of many possible answers returned, and real Prolog implementations allow one to obtain multiple answers if desired. In such cases, Prolog seems to be showing an impressive degree of intelligence. However, under the surface it is just using a simple search strategy, and this can be thwarted. For example, the following loops indeﬁnitely rather than failing: prolog appendrules "append(X,3::4::nil,X)";;

212

First-order logic

Logic programming in a general sense, giving procedural interpretations to logical formulas, aspires to an ideal of ‘declarative’ (or ‘assertional’) programming where the programmer merely speciﬁes what is to be done, rather than how to do it. In practice, languages like Prolog impose particular search strategies that give quite diﬀerent behaviour, or at least eﬃciency, on problem descriptions that are logically equivalent. For example, the following rules (Lloyd 1984) specify declaratively what it means for a list of 0-successor integers to be a sorted permutation of another: let sortrules = ["sort(X,Y) :- perm(X,Y),sorted(Y)"; "sorted(nil)"; "sorted(X::nil)"; "sorted(X::Y::Z) :- X <= Y, sorted(Y::Z)"; "perm(nil,nil)"; "perm(X::Y,U::V) :- delete(U,X::Y,Z), perm(Z,V)"; "delete(X,X::Y,Y)"; "delete(X,Y::Z,Y::W) :- delete(X,Z,W)"; "0 <= X"; "S(X) <= S(Y) :- X <= Y"];;

This is a good example of Prolog’s power as a declarative programming language, since the standard strategy of uniﬁcation and backtracking automatically turns this description into a sorting algorithm, albeit not a very eﬃcient one. # prolog sortrules "sort(S(S(S(S(0))))::S(0)::0::S(S(0))::S(0)::nil,X)";; - : fol formula list = [<<X = 0::S(0)::S(0)::S(S(0))::S(S(S(S(0))))::nil>>]

But note that the logically insigniﬁcant change of swapping the hypotheses in the ﬁrst rule causes this example to loop indeﬁnitely. In practice, Prolog programmers pay close attention to non-declarative aspects such as the ordering of rules, and sometimes use logically impure features such as ‘cut’ to control backtracking more explicitly. It’s also notable that many Prolog implementations omit the occurs check for circular uniﬁcation problems like X = f (X), taking them further from the logical ideal. SLD resolution Prolog-style backchaining can be recast as a restricted form of resolution,† by identifying the current goals list [p1 ; . . . ; pn ], giving the ‘fringe’ of unsolved †

We can also consider the ﬁnal Prolog-style proof tree as a bottom-up refutation of the initial clauses by positive hyperresolution. However, this turns upside down the way the proof is actually found.

3.15 Model elimination

213

goals, with the clause −p1 ∨ · · · ∨ −pn . Now an extension step on the ﬁrst subgoal with a rule q1 ∧ · · · ∧ qm ⇒ p1 , based on an MGU σ of p1 and p1 , can be considered simply as a resolution step with the clause ¬q1 ∨ · · · ∨ −qm ∨ p1 giving a new fringe of subgoals subst σ (−q1 ∨ · · · ∨ −qm ∨ −p2 ∨ · · · ∨ −pn ). Note that if we started with a clause r1 ∧ · · · ∧ rk ⇒ ⊥ the ﬁrst nontrivial set of subgoals corresponds to the input clause −r1 ∨ · · · ∨ −rk from which the top rule was derived. Thus, the entire Prolog backchaining proof can be considered as a refutation by linear resolution. But it places some additional restrictions on linear refutations, and hence shows that these preserve refutation completeness in the special case of Horn clauses: no ancestor resolution is performed, factoring is never implicitly applied, and we always resolve on the leftmost literal of the main branch at each stage. The corresponding restriction on linear resolution is often called SLD-resolution (linear resolution with selection function for deﬁnite clauses), or LUSH resolution (linear resolution with unrestricted selection for Horn clauses). It is very close to being a restriction of a more general procedure of SL-resolution developed by Kowalski and Kuehner (1971), which is itself a variant of the model elimination calculus that we consider next.

3.15 Model elimination Can Prolog-style backward chaining be extended to cover non-Horn clauses? One trick that sometimes works is to transform a set of clauses into Horn form by appropriately ‘renaming’ predicate symbols. Consider for example the following unsatisﬁable set of clauses: {P ∨ Q, ¬P, ¬Q}. Although P ∨Q is not Horn, one can introduce two new predicate symbols P and Q intended to denote the negations of P and Q. It is not too hard to see that the original clause set is equisatisﬁable with: {¬P ∨ ¬Q , P , Q } which is Horn. However, this approach is quite limited in its scope (see Exercise 3.18). For example, the following set of clauses is also unsatisﬁable: {P ∨ Q, P ∨ ¬Q, ¬P ∨ Q, ¬P ∨ ¬Q}, yet, as one can see by symmetry, one of the clauses will remain non-Horn however the predicate symbols are renamed. A slight variant of this idea is to create Prolog-style rules by treating positive and negative literals

214

First-order logic

symmetrically, and turning a clause with n literals into n diﬀerent rules, picking each literal in turn to act as the head clause, regardless of which literals are positive and negative, e.g. converting P ∨ Q ∨ ¬R into the rules ¬Q ∧ R ⇒ P, ¬P ∧ R ⇒ Q, ¬P ∧ ¬Q ⇒ ¬R, together, perhaps, with the additional rule: ¬P ∧ ¬Q ∧ R ⇒ ⊥. These rules are often said to be contrapositives of the original clause; note that they are all logically equivalent to the original clause and to each other. However, even treating all the contrapositives as Prolog-like rules, the set of clauses {P ∨ Q, P ∨ ¬Q, ¬P ∨ Q, ¬P ∨ ¬Q} will not be refuted, because there are no unit clauses to terminate branches of the proof tree. Thus, even a very liberalized notion of Prolog rule is insuﬃcient as a proof procedure for non-Horn clauses. However, it turns out that just one small further extension is needed to give a complete proof procedure, and to understand what it might be we turn to the connection with tableaux.

Model elimination and connection tableaux The model elimination method was invented by Loveland (1968), who later recast it (Loveland 1978) in a format similar to Prolog-like backchaining through subgoals. Loveland called the modiﬁed format MESON (model elimination, subgoal oriented), and it is mainly this that we’ll be concerned with rather than model elimination in its original form. The Prolog connection was eﬀectively exploited by Stickel (1988) in his inﬂuential ‘Prolog technology theorem prover’ (PTTP). Stickel not only presented MESON as a small perturbation of standard Prolog, but even compiled the input clauses to Prolog to take advantage of the advanced optimizations of existing Prolog compilers. From a theoretical point of view, model elimination including MESON was originally analyzed via its relationship with linear resolution.† Since †

Donald Loveland has told the author that he developed model elimination before he had heard of resolution at all, and his later invention of linear resolution was in fact quite separate, even though in retrospect there are obvious parallels.

3.15 Model elimination

215

Prolog-style search corresponds to linear resolution without ancestor steps, it’s natural to attempt to extend it to cover all of ﬁrst-order logic by restoring a kind of ancestor resolution. This is just what MESON does, but it doesn’t correspond exactly to any variant of resolution, since it is with individual literals on a branch of a Prolog-style search tree, rather than with clauses representing the whole fringe of the tree, that MESON allows ancestor uniﬁcation. In fact full SL-resolution that we mentioned above was speciﬁcally designed as an adaptation of model elimination into a standard resolution format. However, it diﬀers in non-trivial details, such as permitting factoring. Instead, it seems more natural to understand MESON as a reﬁnement of tableaux, giving connection tableaux (Letz, Mayr and Goller 1994). This also emphasizes the fact that, unlike the usual reﬁnements of resolution, MESON is a global method. MESON works on formulas in clausal form, and we now consider the behaviour of the tableau prover from Section 3.10 on a conjunction of universally quantiﬁed clauses. It will simply proceed left-to-right across the conjunction, repeatedly instantiating each clause with fresh variables, then splitting the disjunctions to give multiple paths that will, subject to the variable limit, be expanded in a depth-ﬁrst fashion. After a clause is used, it is put at the back of the list and will eventually be re-used unless a contradiction is reached on all paths. A major weakness of the tableau method is that clauses are split over in a round-robin fashion, expanding the number of paths, even if doing so makes no contribution. The following example, for instance: # tab <>;; ... - : int = 2

requires a variable limit of 2 and involves a pointless case-split over the instantiated second clause, even though if the order of the conjuncts is modiﬁed: # tab <>;; ... - : int = 0

no variable instantiation is needed, and the non-unit clause is never examined. This observation suggests that we might be able to make tableaux much more eﬃcient if we could avoid using unnecessary clauses. Recognizing which clauses are unnecessary, however, requires some care if we want to retain completeness.

216

First-order logic

Let us ﬁrst consider the refutation of a ﬁnite unsatisﬁable set of purely propositional clauses. In the tableau prover from Section 3.10, at any point in the execution of some branch we have a list lits of literals and a list fms of other formulas, and the combined lists lits and fms are unsatisﬁable. All the processing steps retain this invariant, implying that we must eventually terminate each branch by the time the list fms becomes empty. (In the full ﬁrst-order case, things are more complicated, of course.) In connection tableaux we will retain a stronger invariant: There exists a minimal unsatisﬁable subset of the combined lists lits and fms that includes the most recently added literal in lits if any. (In the actual implementation, this literal is the head of lits if that list is nonempty.)

By a minimal unsatisﬁable set of a set of formulas, we mean a subset that is unsatisﬁable and such that each proper subset of it is satisﬁable. Note that if a ﬁnite set S of formulas is unsatisﬁable, then there must exist at least one minimal unsatisﬁable subset S0 ⊆ S. In the propositional case we could in principle ﬁnd one by successively removing elements from S until the resulting set is satisﬁable, then putting back the most recently removed element and trying to remove others until no further progress is possible. At the beginning, lits is empty and the set fms is by hypothesis unsatisﬁable, and so the combination of the lists is unsatisﬁable and therefore contains a minimal unsatisﬁable subset. The invariant thus holds initially. The steps of the connection tableau procedure are as follows. (1) If lits is empty, pick an all-negative clause C from fms, say of the form ¬P1 ∨ · · · ∨ ¬Pn , and generate, for each 1 ≤ i ≤ n, the new branches lits = {¬Pi } and fms = fms − {C}. (2) Otherwise, if lits is nonempty with P the most recently added literal, try to ﬁnd a complementary literal −P in lits and terminate the branch if there is one. (3) Otherwise, with lits nonempty and P the most recently added literal, pick a clause C from fms that includes a literal −P , say of the form −P ∨ P1 ∨ · · · ∨ Pn , and generate, for each 1 ≤ i ≤ n, the new branches lits = {Pi } ∪ lits and fms = fms − {C}. Note that each step transforms a refutation problem into an equisatisﬁable set of refutation problems, and either closes a branch or reduces the number of formulas in fms. Therefore, the propositional version of this procedure must terminate whatever choices are made at each stage, closing all branches if the original problem is unsatisﬁable and otherwise running out of possible choices of clauses from fms, indicating satisﬁability, just as for traditional tableaux.

3.15 Model elimination

217

Even at the propositional level, this involves some nondeterministic choices. We will prove that there is always some choice to be made that preserves the invariant, and in the actual implementation we will have to explore all the available possibilities in a backtracking search. Note that it is the fact that in (3) we require a ‘connection’ between the latest literal P and the chosen clause that explains the name ‘connection tableaux’. Trivially (2) preserves the invariant, since it terminates a branch. To prove that (3) preserves the invariant, we can assume not only that the invariant holds initially, but that lits alone is satisﬁable, since (2) is always applied in preference to (3). We know by the invariant that the combined lists lits and fms have a minimal unsatisﬁable subset S0 that contains P . Since S0 − {P } is satisﬁable, this set must contain a clause with the literal −P , otherwise modifying a satisfying assignment to map the literal P to ‘true’ would still satisfy S0 − {P }, and therefore S0 itself. This clause cannot be another unit clause in lits because that was assumed satisﬁable. Thus S0 ∩ fms contains a clause C of the form −P ∨ P1 ∨ · · · ∨ Pn for some n ≥ 0. Now we claim that for any 1 ≤ i ≤ n the new values lits = {Pi } ∪ lits and fms = fms − {C} satisfy the invariant. The combination of lits and fms is a superset of Si = {Pi } ∪ (S0 − {C}), so it suﬃces to show that there is a minimal unsatisﬁable subset of this Si containing Pi . Since Pi implies C, this set is certainly unsatisﬁable, so there is a minimal unsatisﬁable subset T ⊆ {Pi } ∪ (S0 − {C}). But we must have Pi ∈ T , otherwise S0 − {C} would be unsatisﬁable, contradicting minimality. The step (1) is a minor variation of (3), imagining P to be , and the previous argument is routinely adapted. The list lits is empty, and by the invariant fms has a minimal unsatisﬁable subset S0 . This must contain an all-negative literal C, say ¬P1 ∨ · · · ∨ ¬Pn for some n ≥ 1, or the assignment to ‘true’ of all atoms would satisfy it. Now we show exactly as before that for any 1 ≤ i ≤ n the new values lits = {Pi } and fms = fms − {C} satisfy the invariant. At the ﬁrst-order level, all we have to change, given a latest literal P , is to search not only for a clause exactly involving −P but for one uniﬁable with −P . By Herbrand’s theorem, if the set of clauses is unsatisﬁable, so is a ﬁnite set of ground instances. These propositional clauses can be refuted by propositional connection tableaux, and uniﬁcation will discover the necessary instances by a straightforward lifting argument. Instead of actually implementing things in the tableaux setting, we will work in the context of Prolog-style backtracking search with an initial goal of ⊥ and using contrapositives of the clauses as rules, giving exactly the PTTP-style presentation of MESON. In Prolog terms, we imagine reducing

218

First-order logic

the initial goal ⊥ to a collection of subgoals G1 , . . . , Gs on the fringe of the current tree, so that if we solve each goal we can conclude ⊥. The connection tableau view is the contrapositive: we are performing nested case splits and concluding that at least some −Gi holds, so if we can rule out all these possibilities, we will reach a contradiction. Not only that, but as well as each −Gi we may assume the negations of all ancestors along the path leading from the root to −Gi , for in the tableau setting the current subgoal Gi is the negation of the most recent literal added to lits and the other literals on the path to Gi are the negations of the other literals in lits. Thus, the step (2) of connection tableaux, in our context, means to solve a goal Gi by ﬁnding a complementary literal −Gi in its own ancestor list, which is the key addition compared with Prolog. Let us also check that Prolog-style backchaining with contrapositives of rules corresponds to steps (1) and (3) of connection tableaux. We will only create contrapositives of the form P1 ∧ · · · ∧ Pn ⇒ ⊥ for all-negative clauses ¬P1 ∨ ¬ · · · ∨ ¬Pn . Thus, the starting step must be to reduce the initial goal ⊥ to the set of subgoals P1 , . . . , Pn corresponding to some such clause, which in the tableau context means exactly to generate n paths each with a single literal ¬Pi in the literals list. We create all contrapositives with literals as conclusions, so for each clause of the form P ∨ P1 . . . ∨ Pn we obtain rules of the form −P1 ∧ · · · ∧ −Pn ⇒ P . Then the usual Prolog step, using this rule to reduce a goal P to subgoals −P1 , . . . , −Pn , corresponds in the tableau setting to picking a clause P ∨P1 . . .∨Pn connected to the current literal −P and generating the new paths with each Pi as the latest literal, i.e. step (3). The restriction to such connection tableaux almost always leads to more eﬃcient and directed proof search than with raw tableaux. However, in some cases, the initial transformation into CNF can complicate the formula sufﬁciently that it overwhelms this advantage. Actually, even if we start with a formula in CNF, there are rare cases where a connection tableau proof is longer than a naive one. For example, the following formula yields a very eﬃcient tableau proof: tab <<~p /\ (p \/ q) /\ (r \/ s) /\ (~q \/ t \/ u) /\ (~r \/ ~t) /\ (~r \/ ~u) /\ (~q \/ v \/ w) /\ (~s \/ ~v) /\ (~s \/ ~w) ==> false>>;;

However, in a MESON proof that starts by reducing the initial goal ⊥ to p using the rule p ⇒ ⊥, we need to solve each of the subgoals r and s more than once. This requires duplication of a non-trivial sub-proof, whereas had the unconnected clause r ∨ s been used earlier, one of these would exist as a complementary ancestor. Connection proofs not starting with p (even

3.15 Model elimination

219

using clauses that are not all-negative) also turn out longer since they must duplicate the generation of a subgoal ¬p from q. Even when a MESON proof and a naive tableau counterpart have a similar size, their structures are often very diﬀerent. This applies in particular to theorems naturally proved by case-splits, like x = 0 ⇒ 0 < x2 by considering the cases 0 < x and 0 < −x separately. For example, if we have MESONstyle chains of implications P ⇒ · · · ⇒ R and Q ⇒ · · · ⇒ R, a refutation of R and P ∨ Q is typically the rather strange ‘back-to-back’ proof ¬R ⇒ · · · ⇒ ¬Q ⇒ P ⇒ · · · ⇒ R, with a ﬁnal ancestor resolution solving ¬R by uniﬁcation with the complement of the starting goal.† It is not just MESON that can be seen as a specialized variant of tableaux. Most top-down proof procedures can be understood starting with the naive prawitz procedure, as a way of arriving at a contradictory DNF but limiting the search space as much as possible by enforcing further requirements. One interesting top-down method that we do not discuss at length in this book was developed independently as the ‘connection method’ (Kowalski 1975; Bibel and Schreiber 1975; Bibel 1987) and the ‘method of matings’ (Andrews 1976; Andrews 1981). This is similar in principle to tableaux and model elimination, but avoids some of the ineﬃciency caused by the initial transformation into canonical forms.

Implementation We start with a function to map a clause into all its contrapositives. In line with the discussion above, we only create an additional rule with ⊥ as the conclusion if the original clause is all-negative: let contrapositives cls = let base = map (fun c -> map negate (subtract cls [c]),c) cls in if forall negative cls then (map negate cls,False)::base else base;;

The main implementation is not far from Prolog, but to make later extensions easier we use the current goal g and a continuation function cont to solve remaining subgoals, rather than simply a list of subgoals. A triple consisting of the current instantiation env, the maximum number n of additional nodes in the proof tree permitted, and a counter k for variable renaming are passed through the chain of continuations. Each goal g also has associated with it the list of ancestor goals. The actions required are simple. If the current size bound has been exceeded, we fail. Otherwise, we ﬁrst try to unify the current goal with the †

This tendency towards long chains is a reason we prefer bounding proof size rather than depth below.

220

First-order logic

negation of one of its ancestors (not renaming variables of course since this is a global method) and call cont to solve the remaining goals under the new instantiation. If this fails, we try a normal Prolog-style extension with one of the rules, ﬁrst unifying with a renamed rule and then iterating the same goal-solving operation over the list of subgoals, modifying the environment according to the results of uniﬁcation, decreasing the permissible number of new nodes by the number of new subgoals created, and appropriately increasing the variable renaming counter. let rec mexpand rules ancestors g cont (env,n,k) = if n < 0 then failwith "Too deep" else try tryfind (fun a -> cont (unify_literals env (g,negate a),n,k)) ancestors with Failure _ -> tryfind (fun rule -> let (asm,c),k’ = renamerule k rule in itlist (mexpand rules (g::ancestors)) asm cont (unify_literals env (g,c),n-length asm,k’)) rules;;

This can now be packaged up into the overall function with the usual iterative deepening. As with tableaux, we split the input problem into subproblems as much as possible. This is particularly worthwhile here when we reduce the problem to clausal form, since otherwise the translated form often becomes signiﬁcantly more complicated. let puremeson fm = let cls = simpcnf(specialize(pnf fm)) in let rules = itlist ((@) ** contrapositives) cls [] in deepen (fun n -> mexpand rules [] False (fun x -> x) (undefined,n,0); n) 0;;

The overall function starts with the usual generalization, negation and Skolemization, then attempts to refute the clauses using MESON: let meson fm = let fm1 = askolemize(Not(generalize fm)) in map (puremeson ** list_conj) (simpdnf fm1);;

This simple procedure often compares quite favourably with tableaux. For example, the following is solved far faster than with tableaux: # let davis_putnam_example = meson <<exists x. exists y. forall z. (F(x,y) ==> (F(y,z) /\ F(z,z))) /\ ((F(x,y) /\ G(x,y)) ==> (G(x,z) /\ G(z,z)))>>;; ... val davis_putnam_example : int list = [8]

3.15 Model elimination

221

Note also that for Horn clause problems, all atomic formulas considered will be positive, so MESON will never perform ancestor resolution and retains the attractive features of Prolog-style search. However, compared with general tableaux, MESON does have the handicap of requiring an initial transformation into clausal form, and on some formulas this can cause such an increase in complexity that MESON’s superior goal-directedness cannot compensate. For example, Pelletier’s (1986) problem p38, solved in a fraction of a second with tableaux above, takes longer with MESON.

Search optimization Eﬀective though it usually is, there are several ways in which the MESON implementation above can be improved. One simple observation is that we need never repeat a subgoal on a branch, so that if a current goal has an identical ancestor, we can always fail; any expansion done from the current goal could more eﬃciently be done starting from the identical ancestor. It is not diﬃcult to test whether two literals are identical under an existing set of assignments. Rather than code it explicitly, we can simply call the uniﬁcation function and see that no additional assignments are returned.† let rec equal env fm1 fm2 = try unify_literals env (fm1,fm2) == env with Failure _ -> false;;

As well as incorporating this test, we can make some more substantial changes to the search strategy. One quite simple and eﬀective alternative (Harrison 1996b) is to distribute the available size bound over subgoals more eﬃciently. Note that given a current size bound of n to solve two subgoals g1 and g2 , one subgoal or the other must be solvable with size ≤ n/2 (where division truncates downwards if n is odd). Thus, rather than immediately making the full bound of n available for g1 then solving g2 with what’s left, we can try solving g1 with size limit n/2 and then g2 with what’s left of the overall n, and if that fails (or the rest of the goals cannot be solved under any of the resulting instantiations), reverse the roles of g1 and g2 and try it that way round. This applies equally well if any number of subgoals are divided approximately equally into two lists of subgoals. Since the search space typically grows exponentially, this optimization is likely to result in an overall saving even though solutions where both g1 and g2 are solvable with size ≤ n/2 will be found twice. We just want to ensure that this duplication doesn’t cause all the other goals to be attempted †

Recall that ‘==’ is a pointer equality test; conventional equality could also be used, but we exploit our knowledge of the implementation of unify.

222

First-order logic

twice with the same instantiations, otherwise there could be an exponential explosion of duplicated work. Thus, the continuation must sometimes be ignored if a solution is found with too few steps. The following function is intended to take a basic expansion function expfn for lists of subgoals and apply it to goals1 with size limit n1, then attempt goals2 with whatever is left over from goals1 plus an additional n2, yet force the continuation to fail unless the second takes more than n3. let expand2 expfn goals1 n1 goals2 n2 n3 cont env k = expfn goals1 (fun (e1,r1,k1) -> expfn goals2 (fun (e2,r2,k2) -> if n2 + r1 <= n3 + r2 then failwith "pair" else cont(e2,r2,k2)) (e1,n2+r1,k1)) (env,n1,k);;

First, goals1 is attempted with limit n1 and the unused size r1 is captured before proceeding to goals2. They are solved with limit n2+r1, leaving r2 of this limit. Now, we want to ensure that more than n3 steps were used for goals2, so we only call the continuation if (n2 + r1) − r2 > n3 and fail otherwise. The overall MESON expansion is now done via two mutually recursive procedures, mexpand dealing with a single subgoal and mexpands with a list of subgoals. The mexpand function starts as before with a check for exceeding the size bound and an attempt at ancestor uniﬁcation, though it also makes a repetition check using equal. However, when expanding using a rule, control is then passed to mexpands to deal with the multiple subgoals. let rec mexpand rules ancestors g cont (env,n,k) = if n < 0 then failwith "Too deep" else if exists (equal env g) ancestors then failwith "repetition" else try tryfind (fun a -> cont (unify_literals env (g,negate a),n,k)) ancestors with Failure _ -> tryfind (fun r -> let (asm,c),k’ = renamerule k r in mexpands rules (g::ancestors) asm cont (unify_literals env (g,c),n-length asm,k’)) rules

In mexpands, if there are too many new subgoals for the current size limit, we fail at once, and if there is at most one new subgoal, we deal with it in the same way as before. Only if there are at least two do we initiate the optimization. The total available limit n is split into two roughly equal parts n1 and n2, and the list of subgoals is itself chopped in two, giving goals1 and goals2. We try solving goals1 ﬁrst with size n1 and then goals2 with

3.15 Model elimination

223

the remainder plus n2, with no lower limit (hence the -1), and if that fails, try it the other way round, this time imposing a lower limit n1 to avoid running the continuation twice. and mexpands rules ancestors gs cont (env,n,k) = if n < 0 then failwith "Too deep" else let m = length gs in if m <= 1 then itlist (mexpand rules ancestors) gs cont (env,n,k) else let n1 = n / 2 in let n2 = n - n1 in let goals1,goals2 = chop_list (m / 2) gs in let expfn = expand2 (mexpands rules ancestors) in try expfn goals1 n1 goals2 n2 (-1) cont env k with Failure _ -> expfn goals2 n1 goals1 n2 n1 cont env k;;

Generally, the improved version of MESON (redeﬁning puremeson and meson to use the rewritten mexpand) performs much better. For example, we are ﬁnally able to solve the Schubert Steamroller (Stickel 1986) in a reasonable amount of time: # let steamroller = meson <<((forall x. P1(x) ==> P0(x)) /\ (exists x. P1(x))) /\ ((forall x. P2(x) ==> P0(x)) /\ (exists x. P2(x))) /\ ((forall x. P3(x) ==> P0(x)) /\ (exists x. P3(x))) /\ ((forall x. P4(x) ==> P0(x)) /\ (exists x. P4(x))) /\ ((forall x. P5(x) ==> P0(x)) /\ (exists x. P5(x))) /\ ((exists x. Q1(x)) /\ (forall x. Q1(x) ==> Q0(x))) /\ (forall x. P0(x) ==> (forall y. Q0(y) ==> R(x,y)) \/ ((forall y. P0(y) /\ S0(y,x) /\ (exists z. Q0(z) /\ R(y,z)) ==> R(x,y)))) /\ (forall x y. P3(y) /\ (P5(x) \/ P4(x)) ==> S0(x,y)) /\ (forall x y. P3(x) /\ P2(y) ==> S0(x,y)) /\ (forall x y. P2(x) /\ P1(y) ==> S0(x,y)) /\ (forall x y. P1(x) /\ (P2(y) \/ Q1(y)) ==> ~(R(x,y))) /\ (forall x y. P3(x) /\ P4(y) ==> R(x,y)) /\ (forall x y. P3(x) /\ P5(y) ==> ~(R(x,y))) /\ (forall x. (P4(x) \/ P5(x)) ==> exists y. Q0(y) /\ R(x,y)) ==> exists x y. P0(x) /\ P0(y) /\ exists z. Q1(z) /\ R(y,z) /\ R(x,y)>>;; ... steamroller : int list = [53]

There is still plenty of scope for further improvements, which can often cut runtimes dramatically. As Stickel (1988) emphasized, one can sometimes exploit the extensive body of experience with optimizing Prolog implementations. For example, it’s often the case that various ways of solving some initial set of the subgoals give rise to the same instantiation. If the remaining goals have already failed once under this instantiation, there is no need

224

First-order logic

to explore them again, unless a larger size bound is available. Inserting checks for this into the continuation functions is often very eﬀective (Harrison 1996b). Other reasonable changes involve further restricting the proof procedure to cut down the search space (Plaisted 1990) or modifying it to avoid contrapositives (Baumgartner and Furbach 1993).

Retrospective: top-down vs. bottom-up We have now developed two quite powerful ﬁrst-order proof procedures that work on problems in clausal form, resolution and model elimination. At the level of the proofs that are eventually found, these are quite similar, and in fact MESON can almost be considered as a very restricted form of resolution. Nevertheless, the actual procedures are very diﬀerent, with resolution being a local, bottom-up method and model elimination being a global top-down method. As hinted earlier, this aﬀects the problems they can solve most eﬀectively. The fact that resolution accumulates a set (often very large) of derived clauses more or less forces one to use redundancy control and additional strategies to direct the proof in order to get satisfactory performance and avoid ﬁlling up memory. Note that even if virtually unlimited memory is available, the time taken to perform subsumption checking (even with less naive algorithms) can also grow with the number of derived clauses. By contrast, MESON works quite well without any special measures and uses minimal memory. The calculus also has a degree of goal-direction that contrasts with resolution, even if the latter is given a good set of support. However, for tackling truly diﬃcult problems, the very fact that redundancy control and strategy is possible is a strength of resolution-like systems. In MESON, it is diﬃcult to take into account the large-scale structure of the proof, since the current goalstate only exists ephemerally. A particularly fundamental problem with all top-down procedures is that identical subgoals, or instances of a more general subgoal, are often solved more than once at diﬀerent parts of the proof tree. Resolution, for example, dealt with the L o´s problem much more eﬀectively, and this can be traced to the fact that MESON proves two almost identical subgoals that in resolution are just particular instances of a lemma. At present, bottom-up provers seem to have been more eﬀective at solving very hard problems. In particular, a research group at Argonne National Labs has enjoyed remarkable success in answering non-trivial open questions in various ﬁelds of mathematics or logic, using a line of highly engineered

3.16 More ﬁrst-order metatheorems

225

resolution-based theorem provers culminating in McCune’s Prover9.† Of course, it is diﬃcult to decide how much is owed to the talent and focus of the researchers, and how much to the bottom-up approach. However, it seems that the ability to direct the proof with individually tailored strategies depending on the problem domain is important to their success. Despite the better record of bottom-up provers, research continues on retaining the strengths of top-down systems while ameliorating some of their weaknesses. One promising way to retain MESON’s goal-directness while coming closer to resolution in the ability to re-use general results is to somehow remember lemmas encountered earlier in proof search (Astrachan and Stickel 1992; Letz, Mayr and Goller 1994). A particularly well-engineered system that incorporates techniques of this kind is SETHEO (Letz, Schumann, Bayerl and Bibel 1992). Some researchers have also examined judicious combinations of top-down and bottom-up theorem proving, with some success (Fuchs 1988; Schumann 1994).

3.16 More ﬁrst-order metatheorems We can extend Skolemization, at least as a theoretical device, to inﬁnite sets of formulas. However, making sure that the Skolem functions for diﬀerent formulas do not clash, either with each other or with existing function symbols, causes a few tiresome technical complications. We will assume that the function symbols are indexed by a string of characters, as in our OCaml implementation, but similar methods work for any inﬁnite indexing set. The idea is to avoid clashes by ﬁrst consistently renaming all the function symbols in the original set of formulas so that they start with ‘old ’, thus making symbols starting with ‘f ’ and ‘c ’ available for Skolem functions without fear of clashing with existing function symbols. (An inﬁnite set of formulas might already use every possible name.) Here is an OCaml implementation: let rec rename_term tm = match tm with Fn(f,args) -> Fn("old_"^f,map rename_term args) | _ -> tm;; let rename_form fm = onatoms (fun (R(p,args)) -> Atom(R(p,map rename_term args))) fm;;

After that, we can enumerate the renamed formulas in some order, Skolemizing each in turn avoiding Skolem functions that have been previously used. We will show the coding for a ﬁnite list of formulas, but, from a theoretical †

www.cs.unm.edu/~mccune/prover9/

226

First-order logic

point of view, this can be iterated to map a countable set (enumerated in some order) to another countable set. let rec skolems fms corr = match fms with [] -> [],corr | (p::ofms) -> let p’,corr’ = skolem (rename_form p) corr in let ps’,corr’’ = skolems ofms corr’ in p’::ps’,corr’’;; let skolemizes fms = fst(skolems fms []);;

For example: # skolemizes [<<exists x y. x + y = 2>>; <>];; - : fol formula list = [old_+(c_x,c_y) = old_2; forall x. old_+(x,old_1) = f_y(x)]

Theorem 3.46 A countably inﬁnite set Σ of formulas is satisﬁable in domain D iﬀ skolemizes(Σ) is also satisﬁable in domain D. Proof One way is easy, since each model of skolemizes(Σ) gives rise to a model of Σ with the same domain. Conversely, suppose Σ is satisﬁable. Then the set of formulas Σ resulting from renaming the function symbols is also satisﬁable in the same domain, for a model of Σ gives rise immediately to a corresponding model of Σ . Call some such model M0 . Enumerate the formulas of Σ in some order, as p1 , p2 , p3 , . . . Using Theorem 3.10, if we have a model Mn that satisﬁes skolemizes{p1 , . . . , pn }, we can derive a new model Mn+1 of skolemizes{p1 , . . . , pn , pn+1 } diﬀering from Mn only in the interpretation of function symbols that do not occur in pm for m ≤ n. Thus we can form the interpretation M by taking the ‘union’ of all the Mn . This is a model of skolemizes(Σ). Recall from the discussion after Theorem 3.24 that only in general for a quantiﬁer-free formula is satisﬁability equivalent to satisﬁability in a Herbrand model. On the other hand, the consequent equivalence with satisﬁability in a countable domain can be extended. Theorem 3.47 If every ﬁnite subset of a countable set Σ of formulas has a model, then Σ as a whole has a model whose domain is countable. Proof If every ﬁnite subset of Σ has a model, then so does every ﬁnite subset of skolemizes(Σ), because any such subset is contained in skolemizes(Δ)

3.16 More ﬁrst-order metatheorems

227

for some ﬁnite Δ ⊆ Σ. Consequently, any ﬁnite subset of the set of ground instances of formulas in skolemizes(Σ) is propositionally satisﬁable. By propositional compactness, the set of all ground instances is propositionally satisﬁable, so skolemizes(Σ) has a Herbrand model, just adapting the proof of Theorem 3.23 to an inﬁnite set of formulas. The domain of the Herbrand model is countable, because a countable set of formulas can only use a countable language and hence has a countable Herbrand universe. But then by the previous theorem, Σ itself has a model with the same domain, which is therefore also countable. It’s customary to split this up into two theorems, the compactness theorem for ﬁrst-order logic: Corollary 3.48 If every ﬁnite subset of a countable set Σ of formulas has a model, then Σ as a whole has a model; and the downward L¨ owenheim–Skolem theorem: Corollary 3.49 If a countable set Σ of formulas has a model, it has a countable model. This latter result has some rather intriguing consequences. For example, one might try to write down a set of formulas characterizing the set of real numbers, e.g. various basic algebraic properties involving addition, multiplication and ordering, and perhaps some special functions like sin. Nevertheless, the downward L¨ owenheim–Skolem theorem assures us that if this holds in the usual system of real numbers (which is uncountable), it also holds in some countable model. Even more surprisingly, since the theorem still holds for an inﬁnite set of formulas however it is deﬁned, we can actually take the set of all formulas in our (countable) language that are true in the speciﬁc model R with the usual operations. Yet even that set has a countable model. This gives an indication that many characteristics of a model cannot be speciﬁed by ﬁrst-order means, and we will consider this in more depth in Section 4.2. Finally, it is worth pointing out explicitly that we also have an upward variant of the L¨ owenheim–Skolem theorem, but in the present context, without special treatment of the equality relation as in Chapter 4, it is rather trivial. Theorem 3.50 If a countable set Σ of formulas has a model, it has a model of arbitrarily larger cardinality.

228

First-order logic

Proof Take any model M with domain D. Given any cardinal κ ≥ D we can ﬁnd a set S such that |S ∪ D| = κ. Extend the model from D to S ∪ D by picking an arbitrary element a ∈ D and deﬁning the interpretations of functions and predicates to treat every b ∈ S − D the same as a.

Further reading The basic theoretical results here can be found in most introductory logic texts, e.g. Enderton (1972), Mendelson (1987), Boolos and Jeﬀrey (1989), Goodstein (1971), Kreisel and Krivine (1971) and Andrews (1986), and are taken much further in advanced texts on model theory such as Bell and Slomson (1969), Chang and Keisler (1992), Hodges (1993b), Marcja and Toﬀalori (2003) and Poizat (2000). Davis, Sigal and Weyuker (1994) cover the material with more of a bias towards mechanization. Books giving more historical and philosophical background concerning the development of mathematical logic include Boche´ nski (1961), Dumitriu (1977) and Kneale and Kneale (1962), while Kneebone (1963) gives a blend of philosophy and technical results. Van Heijenoort (1967) is a selection of classic papers in the ﬁeld including the seminal work of L¨ owenstein, Skolem, G¨odel and Herbrand underlying most of the methods in this chapter. For a detailed study of Skolemization and reduction to clause normal form, with an emphasis on eﬃciency aspects that are relevant to automated proof, see Nonnengart and Weidenbach (2001). First-order logic admits several generalizations, which we do not consider in any depth. The most radical is higher-order logic (HOL), where quantiﬁcation over functions and predicates is permitted; of the above texts Andrews (1986) is the only one to cover higher-order logic extensively, but it is also mentioned in Boolos and Jeﬀrey (1989) and Enderton (1972). A more modest generalization allows branching scope of quantiﬁers; this can be seen as a more restricted form of higher-order logic. Hintikka (1996) argues that in some sense such an ‘independence friendly’ logic is more fundamental than normal ﬁrst-order logic, but the validity problem for IF logic or HOL is no longer even semidecidable.† †

For HOL, this follows from the corresponding result for ﬁrst-order arithmetic truth proved in Chapter 7, because the second-order Peano axioms P A (in sharp contrast to ﬁrst-order approximations thereof) characterize N up to isomorphism and hence truth of p is equivalent to second-order validity of P A ⇒ p.

Further reading

229

A less dramatic generalization is to many-sorted ﬁrst-order logic, where terms are divided into distinct ‘sorts’. This generalization is often natural, e.g. for formalizing geometry with separate classes of ‘points’ and ‘lines’. We might state that any two distinct points determine a line as follows, where x : T indicates ‘a variable x of sort T ’: ∀x : P, y : P. ¬(x = y) ⇒ ∃!l : L. On(x, l) ∧ On(y, l), whereas in one-sorted logic we would need to add explicit predicates ‘is a point’ and ‘is a line’: ∀x, y. P (x) ∧ P (y) ∧ ¬(x = y) ⇒ ∃!l. L(l) ∧ On(x, l) ∧ On(y, l). All the main results of one-sorted logic extend to the many-sorted case, and indeed can often be stated in a sharper form (Feferman 1968; Feferman 1974; Kreisel and Krivine 1971). Moreover, sorts have signiﬁcant beneﬁts for automated theorem proving since the type discipline can avoid explicit inferences (Cohn 1985; Walther 1985) or cut the search space (Jereslow 1988) even from inﬁnite to ﬁnite (Pnueli, Ruah and Zuck 2001; Fontaine 2004). However, we have avoided many-sortedness here because the machinery is more technical; interpretations need a separate domain Dσ for each sort σ, and functions and predicates acquire type annotations that restrict term formation. For more information see Manzano (1993) and also Kreisel and Krivine (1971). The basic methods of automated theorem proving we have considered, namely tableaux, resolution and model elimination, are covered in various standard texts. Bundy (1983) is a basic survey of relevant material, while Robinson and Voronkov (2001) is a collection of more recent survey articles covering most of the main topics in this chapter in more depth. Siekmann and Wrightson (1983a) and Siekmann and Wrightson (1983b) are collections of some of the most signiﬁcant papers in the ﬁeld in the period 1957-1970. The classic text by Chang and Lee (1973) is still to be recommended as a general introduction to the ﬁeld, focusing mainly on resolution but also mentioning some other approaches. Fitting (1990) is also a more modern text covering resolution and tableaux, and Bibel (1987) gives a distinctive treatment emphasizing the connection method. Newborn (2001) covers some automated theorem proving methods with more on implementation details. Duﬀy (1991) is a survey that, while it also gives few proofs, goes some way beyond our material in this chapter in the range of topics it considers. More technical books on resolution include Loveland (1978), which also covers model elimination in some depth, and Leitsch (1997), while Wos, Overbeek, Lusk and Boyle (1992) and several other books by the Argonne group are

230

First-order logic

recommended for further guidance on actually solving non-trivial problems using (mainly resolution-based) automated reasoning. A thorough discussion of uniﬁcation is given by Baader and Nipkow (1998), which is also the main text recommended in the next chapter. Although uniﬁcation-based methods similar to tableaux or resolution have generally supplanted naive Herbrand procedures, there are still some competitive ‘instantiation-based’ methods for ﬁrst-order logic that work by generating ground instances, albeit in a more intelligent way, e.g. ordered semantic hyperlinking (Plaisted and Zhu 1997). Jacobs and Waldmann (2005) give a survey of several such techniques. An introduction to tableaux and their historical development is given by Fitting (1999). Other papers in the same volume give extensive information about all aspects of the subject, from theoretical complexity results to implementation details. A presentation of model elimination in terms of connection tableaux, discussing many reﬁnements and implementation details, is given by Letz and Stenz (2001). Horn clauses were ﬁrst isolated by McKinsey (1943), who noted several of their key properties; see Hodges (1993a) for a detailed study of their logical features. The use of theorem-provers for question-answering and problemsolving goes back to Green (1969). Languages like Absys (Elcock 1991) and the ﬁrst version of Prolog (Colmerauer, Kanoi, Roussel and Pasero 1973), which we now think of as logic programming languages, were developed before the idea of logic programming in its general sense was thoroughly articulated, e.g. by Hayes (1973) and Kowalski (1974). There are numerous books on Prolog programming, e.g. Clocksin and Mellish (1987), while Lloyd (1984) discusses the theory behind Prolog. Two more recent and arguably purer logic programming languages in the Prolog tradition are G¨ odel (Hill and Lloyd 1994) and Mercury (Somogyi, Henderson and Conway 1994). We have used a variety of examples in this chapter, including those from Pelletier (1986). A large and growing selection of problems, some very hard or even unsolved, can be found in the TPTP (‘Thousands of Problems for Theorem Provers’) problem library (Sutcliﬀe and Suttner 1998). This is the basis for the annual CASC competition between automated theorem provers, which in recent years has usually been dominated by the Vampire system. Exercises 3.1

3.2

Show that the ‘exists unique’ quantiﬁer ∃! does not ‘commute with’ any other kind of quantiﬁer, nor even with itself. For example, ∃!x.∃!y.P [x, y] is not in general logically equivalent to ∃!y.∃!x.P [x, y]. Modify the parser for ﬁrst-order terms so that -x^n parses as -(x^n).

Exercises

3.3

3.4

3.5

3.6

3.7

3.8

231

Modify the basic syntax of ﬁrst-order formulas to include a new quantiﬁer ‘existsunique’ (traditional logic syntax ∃! for ‘there exists a unique...’). Modify the canonical form operations so that it is eliminated using an equivalent such as (∃!x.P [x]) = (∃x.P [x]∧∀y.P [y] ⇒ y = x). Show how to construct, for every ﬁrst-order formula p, another formula p∗ in prenex normal form with all the universal formulas preceding the existential ones (i.e. of the form ∀x1 , . . . , xn .∃y1 , . . . , ym .q with q quantiﬁer-free) such that p∗ is satisﬁable iﬀ p is. You may ﬁnd it helpful to consider introducing new predicate symbols to denote quantiﬁed subformulas by analogy with deﬁnitional CNF in propositional logic, e.g. ∀x y.R(x, y) ⇔ ∃w.P [w, x, y] or ∀x y z.R(x, y, z) ⇔ ∀w. P [w, x, y, z]. Show also that one may make p∗ free of function symbols by replacing each function with a new predicate symbol with an additional hypothesis ∀x. ∃!y. R(x, y). This is often called Skolem normal form (Skolem 1920). Implement a function to perform the translation into Skolem NF, and test it on some examples. We noted that the original Davis–Putnam procedure often examines many useless instances of the formula before arriving at a refutation, and that we could ﬁlter out many redundant ones using dp refine. Is the result guaranteed to be minimal in the sense that no smaller number of ground instances gives a propositional contradiction? Are uniﬁcation-based methods guaranteed to be minimal in this sense? Find a proof or counterexample. Show that if two instantiations σ and τ each only aﬀect ﬁnitely many variables, then σ ≤ τ and τ ≤ σ together imply that there is an instantiation δ with τ = δ ◦ σ that maps distinct variables to distinct variables. Deduce that most general uniﬁers are unique up to renaming. Show, however, that this fails if we allow instantiations to aﬀect inﬁnitely many variables. Show that the ‘≤’ ordering on instantiations deﬁnes a lattice structure where uniﬁcation can be used to ﬁnd least upper bounds. Implement an algorithm for ‘anti-uniﬁcation’, i.e. ﬁnding greatest lower bounds. What is the intuitive signiﬁcance of these GLBs? The tableau prover attempted to close each branch in various ways, eﬀectively enumerating them by backtracking. An alternative to backtracking would be for each branch to return the set of all possible uniﬁers closing that branch, and at each branch-point, perform an appropriate ‘intersection’ operation on the sets of uniﬁers. Of course, it is still necessary to consider multiple instances of universal

232

3.9

3.10

3.11 3.12

3.13 3.14

3.15

First-order logic

formulas. Fill in the details of this idea and implement it; it may help to consult Giese (2001). How does performance compare with backtracking tableaux? In the tableau prover, instead of Skolemizing at the start, we could introduce a new tableau rule to deal with existential formulas by transforming a formula ∃x. P [x] on the current branch into P [c], where c is a new constant symbol. Work out such an approach that maintains soundness and refutation completeness and implement it. How does performance compare with the pre-Skolemizing version? This exercise is non-trivial since one needs to keep track of variable dependencies in a way that Skolemization does automatically; see Section 6.8. In the ‘given clause algorithm’ (the main loop of resolution), we added the given clause cls to the used list before forming all resolvents of the used list with the given clause. This implies that each given clause is resolved with itself. Can you prove whether this is actually necessary? Does avoiding self-resolution signiﬁcantly aﬀect eﬃciency on any interesting problems? Implement (a) linear resolution and (b) hyperresolution, and test them on some problems. A unit clause P can be used to simplify any clause of the form ¬P ∨ Q, with P an instance of P , to Q (this can be seen as a ﬁrst-order generalization of the Davis–Putnam 1-literal rule). The unit deletion feature of Otter can perform this kind of simpliﬁcation. Incorporate this into the main resolution loop and test its eﬀectiveness on some problems. Can you guarantee that this feature will not destroy refutation completeness? Recall that a clause C properly subsumes a clause C if C ≤ss C and C ≤ss C. Show that the ‘properly subsumes’ relation is wellfounded. Horn clauses also have special features from the point of view of eﬃciency of deduction. Implement an algorithm to decide propositional satisﬁability of a set of Horn clauses in linear time in the size of the input. The ‘Towers of Hanoi’ puzzle (invented by Edouard Lucas in 1883 writing under the pen-name N. Lucas de Siam) consists of n discs all of diﬀerent sizes and three pegs. Initially all discs are on the leftmost peg with the discs arranged in order of size, the largest at the bottom and the smallest at the top. One is permitted at each stage to move the topmost disc on any peg onto the top of another peg, subject to the restriction that a disc may never be placed on top

Exercises

3.16

3.17

3.18

3.19

3.20

233

of a smaller one. The objective is to ﬁnish a sequence of moves with all the n discs on the right-hand peg. Express these constraints as a set of Horn clauses and use Prolog to ﬁnd a solution for particular n. You might like to start with n = 3. Arrange your Prolog program so that it ﬁnds the shortest solution. How does the number of moves necessary change with n? Could you predict this theoretically? We argued in Section 3.13 that the set of all the all-negative clauses as the initial set of support retains refutation completeness. Is it true that at least one of the all-negative clauses must be a refutationcomplete set of support in itself? A clause is said to be provable by input resolution if it has a resolution proof in which at least one hypothesis in each resolution step is an input clause. (This is close to linear resolution but without ancestor steps.) A clause is said to be provable by unit resolution if it has a resolution proof in which at least one hypothesis in each resolution step is (possibly after factoring) a unit clause. Give counterexamples to show that neither input nor unit resolution is refutation complete. Prove in fact that the two are refutation equivalent, in the sense that there is an input refutation of a set of clauses S iﬀ there is a unit refutation (Chang 1970). Is it true more generally that an arbitrary clause C is derivable by input resolution iﬀ it is derivable by unit resolution? Given the equivalent power of unit and input resolution (Exercise 3.17), show that both are refutation complete for Horn clauses. Show moreover that a partial converse holds: if a set of ground clauses has a unit or input refutation, then it has an unsatisﬁable subset that can be made Horn by renaming as discussed at the start of Section 3.15, but this is not in general the case for non-ground clauses (Henschen and Wos 1974). For a more eﬃcient algorithm for testing Horn renamability of clauses, see Lewis (1978). In our resolution rule, with factoring included, possible factorings of both clauses were examined. Show, however, that it is only necessary to apply factoring to one of the input clauses to retain refutation completeness (Noll 1980). Does this aﬀect eﬃciency on examples? Does it extend to all the reﬁnements we have considered? Modify meson so that it avoids repeated attempts to solve the same set of subgoals with the same set of instantiations that has already failed before, unless there is a larger size limit available. Show that this optimization greatly increases eﬃciency on many problems, in particular the Steamroller (Pelletier 1986 p47).

234

3.21

3.22

3.23

3.24

3.25

First-order logic

Modify meson so that it performs iterative deepening based on the maximum height of the proof tree. How does eﬃciency compare with the total size bound over a range of problems? Prove that refutation completeness of meson is retained if only positive (or equally, only negative) ancestors are checked for uniﬁability with the complement of the current goal (Plaisted 1990). Implement this ‘positive restriction’ and compare its eﬃciency on some problems. Our proof procedures usually start by ﬁrst splitting up the input formula when it can be expressed as a disjunction of closed formulas. Show that, more generally, it is valid to refute a disjunction p ∨ q by separately refuting p and q provided p and q have no free variables in common. Implement this and see if there are interesting examples where it substantially improves performance. (This more powerful splitting rule is implemented in the Vampire theorem prover.) The Davis–Putnam aﬃrmative–negative rule can be extended to an analogous ‘purity principle’ for ﬁrst-order logic. Show that if a set S of clauses contains a clause C that itself contains a literal P , then if there is no other literal N occurring in S that is uniﬁable with −P , the set S is satisﬁable iﬀ S − {C} is. Does ﬁltering out redundant clauses in this way have much practical impact on the diﬃculty of later proof using resolution or MESON? (This purity principle was already exploited in Robinson’s original paper on resolution.) Consider the ‘2-inverter’ puzzle from the previous chapter (Exercise 2.9). Can you use one of our ﬁrst-order provers to ﬁnd the solution to the problem, rather than leaving the creativity to a human and merely conﬁrming the correctness of the solution?

4 Equality

So far, equality has been treated as just another binary predicate that may be interpreted arbitrarily. However, the role of equality is so central that often we only want to consider interpretations where ‘equality means equality’. The previous logical theory and programmed proof procedures are easily modiﬁed for the new circumstances, but there are also more eﬃcient and specialized ways of handling equality.

4.1 Equality axioms In many applications of logic, particularly to mathematical reasoning, equations play a central role. We’ve partly recognized this by supporting the usual inﬁx notion ‘s = t’ instead of ‘= (s, t)’. Moreover, we can deﬁne various handy syntax operations for testing if a formula is an equation and for creating and breaking apart equations, e.g. let is_eq = function (Atom(R("=",_))) -> true | _ -> false;; let mk_eq s t = Atom(R("=",[s;t]));; let dest_eq fm = match fm with Atom(R("=",[s;t])) -> s,t | _ -> failwith "dest_eq: not an equation";; let lhs eq = fst(dest_eq eq) and rhs eq = snd(dest_eq eq);;

But, logically speaking, equality has just been dealt with as an arbitrary binary predicate; the interpretations we consider when deciding questions of logical validity include those where ‘=’ is interpreted quite diﬀerently from equality. In view of the claimed central role of equality, it’s natural to investigate restricting the class of models to those where ‘equality means 235

236

Equality

equality’, since it is those that we normally have in mind in, say, abstract algebra. We call an interpretation (or model of a particular set of sentences) normal if the equality predicate ‘=’ is interpreted as equality on its domain. Any normal interpretation must satisfy the formulas asserting that equality is an equivalence relation, i.e. is reﬂexive, symmetric and transitive: ∀x. x = x, ∀x y. x = y ⇔ y = x, ∀x y z. x = y ∧ y = z ⇒ x = z, as well as formulas asserting congruence for each n-ary function f in the language under consideration: ∀x1 · · · xn y1 · · · yn . x1 = y1 ∧ · · · ∧ xn = yn ⇒ f (x1 , . . . , xn ) = f (y1 , . . . , yn ), and similarly for each n-ary predicate R: ∀x1 · · · xn y1 · · · yn . x1 = y1 ∧ · · · ∧ xn = yn ⇒ R(x1 , . . . , xn ) ⇒ R(y1 , . . . , yn ). For a given set of ﬁrst-order formulas Δ, we write eqaxioms(Δ) (‘the equality axioms for Δ’) to mean the equivalence relation formulas together with the congruence formulas for all functions f and predicates R appearing in the formulas of Δ. We have observed that any normal interpretation satisﬁes eqaxioms(Δ), but it’s not the case that any interpretation satisfying eqaxioms(Δ) must be normal. Consider, for example, a language with just the two binary function symbols ‘+’ and ‘·’ and the constants 0 and 1. Interpreting all these in the usual way in Z but equality by the relation x ≡ y (mod 2), the equality axioms are still satisﬁed even though the interpretation is not normal. In fact, no set of formulas can constrain its models to be normal, because given any normal model, we can create a non-normal one by picking some a in the domain, adding arbitrarily many additional elements bi ∈ B and interpreting all the bi in the same way as a. Despite this, we do have the following key result. Theorem 4.1 Any set Δ of ﬁrst-order formulas has a normal model if and only if the set Δ ∪ eqaxioms(Δ) has a model. Proof One direction is easy: if M is a normal interpretation, it is clear that eqaxioms(Δ) holds in it; thus in any normal model of Δ, so does Δ ∪ eqaxioms(Δ).

4.1 Equality axioms

237

Conversely, suppose that Δ ∪ eqaxioms(Δ) has a model M . Deﬁne a relation ‘∼’ on the domain D of M by setting a ∼ b precisely when =M (a, b), i.e. when a and b are ‘equal’ according to the interpretation =M . Because the equivalence axioms hold in M , this is an equivalence relation, so we can partition D into equivalence classes where each a ∈ D belongs to the equivalence class: [a] = {b | b ∼ a} and [a] = [b] iﬀ a ∼ b. We will use the set D = {[a] | a ∈ D} of equivalence classes as the domain of a new model M , and interpret each n-ary function symbol f as follows: fM ([a1 ], . . . , [an ]) = [fM (a1 , . . . , an )]. Note that this is well-deﬁned, i.e. independent of the particular representative of each equivalence class, because if ai ∼ ai for i = 1, . . . , n, we also have fM (a1 , . . . , an ) ∼ fM (a1 , . . . , an ) precisely because the functional congruence axiom holds in M . Similarly, we interpret each n-ary predicate symbol R by RM ([a1 ], . . . , [an ]) = RM (a1 , . . . , an ). Once again, this is independent of the particular choice of equivalence class representatives because the predicate congruence holds in M . In particular we have =M ([a], [b]) precisely when a ∼ b and so when [a] = [b]. Thus M is a normal interpretation. To see that it satisﬁes all the formulas in Δ, we essentially need to show that we can ‘pull’ the equivalenceclass forming operation up the semantics of a formula. Note ﬁrst that: termval M δ t = [termval M δ t], where δ (x) = [δ(x)] for all variables x. To prove this, simply proceed by structural induction on t. If t is the variable x then we have termval M δ x = δ x = [δ(x)] = [termval M δ x], while if t = f (s1 , . . . , sn ), then using the inductive hypothesis and the deﬁnition of fM we have: termval M δ f (s1 , . . . , sn ) = fM (termval M δ s1 , . . . , termval M δ sn ) = fM ([termval M δ s1 ], . . . , [termval M δ sn ])

238

Equality

= [fM (termval M δ s1 , . . . , termval M δ sn )] = [termval M δ f (s1 , . . . , sn )]. Now we claim that for any formula p we have holds M δ p = holds M δ p. Once again, the proof is by structural induction. This is trivial if p is ⊥ or , while it holds by deﬁnition of RM when p is an atomic formula. The propositional operations obviously preserve this property, which leaves the quantiﬁed formulas as the interesting case. Note that: holds M δ (∀x. p) = for all A ∈ D , holds M ((x → A)δ ) p = for all a ∈ D, holds M ((x → [a])δ ) p = for all a ∈ D, holds M ((x → a)δ) p = for all a ∈ D, holds M ((x → a)δ) p = holds M δ (∀x. p), and similarly for the existential quantiﬁer. Thus, since each p ∈ Δ holds in M in all valuations δ, it also holds in M for all valuations , since is necessarily of the form δ for some valuation δ in M (just let δ(x) be any member of (x)). In our practical applications, we will be concerned with a single formula. Deﬁne eqaxiom(p) to be the conjunction of the (necessarily ﬁnitely many) equality axioms eqaxioms({p}). Then: Corollary 4.2 Any formula p is satisﬁable in a normal model iﬀ p ∧ eqaxiom(p) is satisﬁable. Proof By deﬁnition of the semantics of conjunction, an interpretation satisﬁes p ∧ eqaxiom(p) iﬀ it satisﬁes p and eqaxiom({p}). We have the following dual result for validity. Corollary 4.3 A formula p holds in all normal models iﬀ eqaxiom(p) ⇒ p holds in all models. Proof Since p holds in a model iﬀ its universal closure does, we can assume without loss of generality that p is closed. Thus it holds in all normal models iﬀ ¬p has no normal model, and so if ¬p ∧ eqaxiom(¬p) has no model. But eqaxiom(¬p) = eqaxiom(p) and so ¬p ∧ eqaxiom(¬p) is logically equivalent to ¬(p ∨ ¬(eqaxiom(p))) and so to ¬(eqaxiom(p) ⇒ p). This is unsatisﬁable iﬀ eqaxiom(p) ⇒ p is valid.

4.1 Equality axioms

239

In the abstract treatment above, the equality axioms included a predicate congruence property for equality itself: ∀x1 x2 y1 y2 . x1 = y1 ∧ x2 = y2 ⇒ x1 = x2 ⇒ y1 = y2 . But we can aﬀord to omit it, because it’s a logical consequence of the equivalence axioms. We can economize further by using only two equivalence axioms, reﬂexivity and a variant of transitivity ∀x y z.x = y∧x = z ⇒ y = z. (Symmetry follows by instantiating that axiom so that x and z are the same, then using reﬂexivity.)

OCaml implementation In Skolemization we used functions to ﬁnd all the functions in a term; similarly the following ﬁnds all predicates, again as name–arity pairs: let rec predicates fm = atom_union (fun (R(p,a)) -> [p,length a]) fm;;

We can manufacture a congruence axiom for each function symbol by producing the appropriate number of arguments x1 , . . . , xn and y1 , . . . , yn and constructing the formula ∀x1 . . . xn y1 . . . yn .x1 = y1 ∧ · · · xn = yn ⇒ f (x1 , . . . , xn ) = f (y1 , . . . , yn ). We return a list that normally has one member but is empty in the case of a nullary function (i.e. individual constant): let function_congruence (f,n) = if n = 0 then [] else let argnames_x = map (fun n -> "x"^(string_of_int n)) (1 -- n) and argnames_y = map (fun n -> "y"^(string_of_int n)) (1 -- n) in let args_x = map (fun x -> Var x) argnames_x and args_y = map (fun x -> Var x) argnames_y in let ant = end_itlist mk_and (map2 mk_eq args_x args_y) and con = mk_eq (Fn(f,args_x)) (Fn(f,args_y)) in [itlist mk_forall (argnames_x @ argnames_y) (Imp(ant,con))];;

for example: # function_congruence ("f",3);; - : fol formula list = [< f(x1,x2,x3) = f(y1,y2,y3)>>] # function_congruence ("+",2);; - : fol formula list = [< x1 + x2 = y1 + y2>>]

240

Equality

An analogous function for predicates is almost the same, except that we use implication of formulas rather than equality of terms in the consequent: let predicate_congruence (p,n) = if n = 0 then [] else let argnames_x = map (fun n -> "x"^(string_of_int n)) (1 -- n) and argnames_y = map (fun n -> "y"^(string_of_int n)) (1 -- n) in let args_x = map (fun x -> Var x) argnames_x and args_y = map (fun x -> Var x) argnames_y in let ant = end_itlist mk_and (map2 mk_eq args_x args_y) and con = Imp(Atom(R(p,args_x)),Atom(R(p,args_y))) in [itlist mk_forall (argnames_x @ argnames_y) (Imp(ant,con))];;

As planned, we use this variant of the equivalence properties: let equivalence_axioms = [<>; < y = z>>];;

Now we deﬁne a function that returns eqaxiom(p) ⇒ p for an input formula p. It leaves p alone if it doesn’t involve equality at all, since there is then no distinction between its normal and non-normal models. let equalitize fm = let allpreds = predicates fm in if not (mem ("=",2) allpreds) then fm else let preds = subtract allpreds ["=",2] and funcs = functions fm in let axioms = itlist (union ** function_congruence) funcs (itlist (union ** predicate_congruence) preds equivalence_axioms) in Imp(end_itlist mk_and axioms,fm);;

The upshot of Corollary 4.3 is that we can test the validity of p in ﬁrstorder logic with equality by testing the validity of equalitize(p) in ordinary ﬁrst-order logic. Thus, we can just apply equalitize as a preprocessing step for any of our existing proof procedures. Note, by the way, that we will avoid creating congruence axioms for the Skolem functions, which only appear later in the underlying proof procedure. It’s hard to predict whether it would be more eﬃcient to add congruences for Skolem functions: it means more hypotheses, but perhaps allows shortcuts in proofs. Observe also that the equality axioms are Horn clauses (Section 3.14), so whenever Δ is a set of Horn clauses, so is Δ∪eqaxioms(Δ). Thus, we can also extend the Prologlike proof procedure hornprove from Section 3.14 to a complete prover for Horn problems in logic with equality just by adding the equality axioms in a preprocessing step in the same way. And since meson reduces to Prolog-type search on Horn problems, it will continue to do so when combined with the preprocessing step.

4.2 Categoricity and elementary equivalence

241

For a ﬁrst example, consider the following formula given by Dijkstra (1997), who shows how its validity underlies a proof of Morley’s theorem in geometry. # let ewd = equalitize <<(forall x. f(x) ==> g(x)) /\ (exists x. f(x)) /\ (forall x y. g(x) /\ g(y) ==> x = y) ==> forall y. g(y) ==> f(y)>>;; ...

We can prove it by any of the main methods developed earlier, including model elimination, resolution and even tableaux with splitting, e.g. # meson ewd;; ... - : int list = [6]

We thus conclude that the original formula is valid in ﬁrst-order logic with equality, i.e. holds in all normal models. Another example, which the author learned from Wishnu Prasetya,† is that for any two functions f : A → B and g : B → A there is a unique x such that x = f (g(x)) iﬀ there is a unique y such that y = g(f (y)). let wishnu = equalitize <<(exists x. x = f(g(x)) /\ forall x’. x’ = f(g(x’)) ==> x = x’) <=> (exists y. y = g(f(y)) /\ forall y’. y’ = g(f(y’)) ==> y = y’)>>;;

The resulting formula is solvable by MESON, but already it takes a signiﬁcant amount of time. So, although just adding equality axioms allows us to re-use existing procedures, one might wonder if there are more eﬀective ways of dealing with equality. This is a matter to which we will return before too long.

4.2 Categoricity and elementary equivalence Thanks to Theorem 4.1, the theoretical results in Chapter 3 can also be adapted quite easily to consider only normal models. Arguably, they are more interesting in this context, since it is usually normal models we have in mind when thinking about mathematical structures. In fact, many of the structures studied in abstract algebra are precisely the normal models of some ﬁrst-order formula or set of ﬁrst-order formulas. For example, a group †

See his message to the info-hol mailing list on 18 October 1993, available on the Web as ftp://ftp.cl.cam.ac.uk/.aftp/hvg/info-hol-archive/15xx/1574.

242

Equality

is essentially just a normal model of the following formula: (∀x y z. m(x, m(y, z)) = m(m(x, y), z)) ∧ (∀x. m(x, 1) = x ∧ m(1, x) = x) ∧ (∀x. m(x, i(x)) = 1 ∧ m(i(x), x) = 1). It’s not diﬃcult to come up with similar axiomatizations for many other structures such as partial orders and rings. Thus, in the model theory of ﬁrst-order logic, we have a suitable mathematical generalization taking in various speciﬁc mathematical structures. This enables us to deﬁne notions like ‘substructure’ and ‘homomorphism’, such that for example ‘subgroup’ and ‘ring homomorphism’ are special cases of the general concept. We give the general deﬁnition of ‘isomorphism’ shortly,† and starting in Section 5.6 we will take a closer look at various algebraic systems.

Metatheorems First, we can easily adapt the compactness theorem to logic with equality. Theorem 4.4 If every ﬁnite subset Δ of a set Σ of formulas has a normal model, then Σ itself has a normal model. Proof If each ﬁnite Δ ⊆ Σ has a normal model, then each Δ ∪ eqaxioms(Δ) for ﬁnite Δ has a model. However, every ﬁnite Δ ⊆ Σ ∪ eqaxioms(Σ) is a subset of some such Δ ∪ eqaxioms(Δ) for ﬁnite Δ, and consequently each ﬁnite Δ ⊆ Σ ∪ eqaxioms(Σ) has a model. By the compactness theorem for arbitrary models, Σ ∪ eqaxioms(Σ) has a model and therefore, by Theorem 4.1, Σ has a normal model. The equalitarian version of the downward L¨ owenheim–Skolem theorem can be derived similarly. Theorem 4.5 If a countable set of formulas Σ has a normal model M , then it has a countable (either ﬁnite or countably inﬁnite) normal model. Proof If Σ has a normal model, Σ ∪ eqaxioms(Σ) has a model, and so by the original downward LS Theorem 3.49, it has a model with a countable domain D. The corresponding normal model of Σ that we constructed in the †

There is actually some divergence in general deﬁnitions of homomorphism, with two standard texts by Enderton (1972) and Mendelson (1987) diﬀering over whether just implication or full equivalence is demanded between interpreted predicates. Also, note that in general these concepts can depend on whether the axioms contain operation symbols or just existence assertions (Hodges 1993b).

4.2 Categoricity and elementary equivalence

243

proof of Theorem 4.1 has as its domain equivalence classes of elements of D. The cardinality of this set of equivalence classes is at most the cardinality of D (since each equivalence class contains at least one element of D) and so is countable too. Constructing larger models than a given model is no longer trivial, because we can’t just add new domain elements and retain normality. However, by cleverly exploiting compactness, we can still ﬁnd a way to grow models. For example: Theorem 4.6 If a set of sentences S has normal models of arbitrarily large ﬁnite cardinality, then it has an inﬁnite normal model. Proof Consider the following sentences Bi , which intuitively mean ‘there are at least i distinct elements’. B2 = ∃x y. x = y, B3 = ∃x y z. x = y ∧ x = z ∧ y = z, B4 = ∃w x y z. w = x ∧ w = y ∧ w = z ∧ x = y ∧ x = z ∧ y = z, B5 = . . . Write B = i∈N Bi . Since, by hypothesis, S has models of arbitrarily large ﬁnite cardinality, all ﬁnite subsets of S ∪ B are satisﬁable. Therefore by compactness so is S ∪ B, but clearly any model of these sentences must be inﬁnite. Using a closely related technique, one can prove the upward L¨ owenheim– Skolem theorem (actually due to Tarski), analogous to Theorem 3.50 but much more interesting: if a set of formulas Σ has a normal model with inﬁnite domain D, then it has a model of any inﬁnite cardinality ≥ |D|. The proof is simply to add enough new constants ci that do not already occur in Σ, and apply compactness to the set Σ ∪ {ci = cj | i, j ∈ S, i = j}. However, we will not present this in detail since we have not proved compactness for uncountable languages. Indeed, the upward L¨ owenheim–Skolem theorem requires the machinery of the Axiom of Choice.† We will, however, give an example of how to construct ‘nonstandard’ models using compactness. Consider some language for the real numbers, maybe including addition, multiplication, negation, inversion, the constants †

The formula ∀x y x y . p(x, y) = p(x , y ) ⇒ x = x ∧ y = y has a model with domain N, e.g. interpreting p as the pairing function x, y in Section 7.2. The upward LS theorem then implies that this has models of arbitrary inﬁnite cardinality, and hence that κ2 ≤ κ for any inﬁnite κ. This is known to be equivalent to AC (Jech 1973).

244

Equality

0 and 1, and special functions like sin. Let Σ be the set of all formulas in this language that are true in R with the intended interpretation, a.k.a. the ‘standard model’, Consider the set: Σ = Σ ∪ {1 < c, 1 + 1 < c, 1 + 1 + 1 < c, . . .}, where c is a constant symbol not appearing in Σ. Any ﬁnite set of these has a model, for the reals are a model of Σ and we can then interpret c by some suitably large number. Thus by compactness there is a ‘nonstandard model’ of Σ in which c behaves like an inﬁnite number, with n < c for each natural number n. Indeed, this gives rise to other larger inﬁnite numbers like c + c and inﬁnitesimal numbers like 1/c (despite the fact that we can also, by the Downward L¨ owenheim–Skolem theorem, assume it to be countable). Yet this strange menagerie of numbers obeys all the ﬁrst-order properties that the ‘real reals’ do. This observation is a possible starting point for non-standard analysis (A. Robinson 1966) which exploits nonstandard models to prove standard results using inﬁnite and inﬁnitesimal elements. For more on this, see Cutland (1988), Davis (1977) or Hurd and Loeb (1985).

Consequences In the axiomatic approach to mathematics, one starts from a set of axioms and derives conclusions without making any additional assumptions. If we are concerned with properties expressible in ﬁrst-order logic, we might formalize this idea by allowing from axioms Σ the deduction of any ﬁrstorder consequence of the axioms Σ. We will sometimes abbreviate the set {p | Σ |= p} of ﬁrst-order consequences of a set of ﬁrst-order ‘axioms’ Σ by Cn(Σ). Part of the appeal of the axiomatic method is that it isolates the assumptions that are actually necessary, so that the full generality of the results is seen. For this to be signiﬁcant, we actually want Σ to have several interesting models. For example, the group axioms are satisﬁed by addition of integers or reals, multiplication of nonzero reals, composition of permutations on a set and so on. Sometimes, however, we want to use a set of axioms almost as a deﬁnition of a particular structure, such that all structures obeying the axioms are essentially the same. In fact, this use of axioms predated the general idea of the axiomatic method. For example, it used to be believed that the traditional axioms for geometry (without the axioms of parallels) had this property, but it later turned out that there were unexpected nonEuclidean models. Given two interpretations M and M of a ﬁrst-order language with

4.2 Categoricity and elementary equivalence

245

respective domains D and D , we say that M and M are isomorphic if there are mappings i : D → D and j : D → D such that for all x ∈ D, j(i(x)) = x, for all x ∈ D , i(j(x )) = x , for each n-ary function symbol f in the language: i(fM (a1 , . . . , an )) = fM (i(a1 ), . . . , i(an )) and for each n-ary predicate symbol RM (a1 , . . . , an ) = RM (i(a1 ), . . . , i(an )) for any a1 , . . . , an ∈ D. The functions i and j are said to set up an isomorphism, or sometimes themselves to be isomorphisms. Intuitively, isomorphic interpretations are ‘essentially the same’ but for using a diﬀerent underlying set, and indeed the word literally means something like ‘equal shape’. A set of formulas (or ‘axioms’) Σ is said to be categorical if any two models are isomorphic. (One usually assumes also that it has at least one model.) The L¨owenheim–Skolem theorems imply that if a set of ﬁrst-order formulas has some inﬁnite model, it has models of a diﬀerent cardinality, which are therefore certainly not isomorphic (since an isomorphism is also a bijection). Thus, for ﬁrst-order formulas, categoricity only arises for sets of formulas with just ﬁnite models, which are often the less interesting ones. However there are at least two natural ways in which we can weaken the idea of categoricity. First, we might say that even though the cardinality of models of Σ may not be ﬁxed, at least all models of some particular cardinality κ are determined up to isomorphism. In this case Σ is said to be κ-categorical. A number of interesting instances of this phenomenon are known, many predating the formal articulation of the concept using ﬁrstorder logic. For example, Steinitz (1910) proved that any two algebraically closed ﬁelds of a given characteristic with the same uncountable cardinality are isomorphic. However, we will not dwell on the theory of κ-categoricity here. Another idea is to say that since Σ consists only of ﬁrst-order statements, it’s unreasonable to expect to be able to prove that all its models are isomorphic. It’s much more reasonable just to demand that all models satisfy the same ﬁrst-order sentences, i.e. are all elementarily equivalent. (It’s not too hard to show that isomorphic models are also elementarily equivalent, though the example of nonstandard models shows that the converse is false in general.) This is essentially the notion of completeness of a theory, which we study in detail in Section 5.6.

246

Equality

4.3 Equational logic and completeness theorems Consider purely equational logic, where we start from a set Δ of (implicitly universally quantiﬁed) equations and ask whether another equation s = t holds in all normal models of Δ, i.e. whether Δ |= s = t in ﬁrst-order logic with equality. A famous theorem due to Birkhoﬀ (1935) relates this to a set of proof rules or inference rules for generating equational conclusions. Given a set of equations Δ we deﬁne ‘s = t is provable from Δ’, written Δ s = t, inductively (see Appendix 1) by the following rules: (s = t) ∈ Δ AXIOM Δs=t Δs=t INST Δ subst i(s = t) Δt=t

REFL

Δs=t SYM Δt=s Δs=t Δt=u TRANS Δs=u Δ s1 = t1 ... Δ sn = tn CONG Δ f (s1 , ..., sn ) = f (t1 , ..., tn ) Theorem 4.7 Δ |= s = t, i.e. an equation s = t holds in all normal models of a set Δ of equations, if and only if Δ s = t, i.e. the equation s = t is derivable from Δ by repeated use of Birkhoﬀ ’s rules. Proof We ﬁrst consider the right-to-left direction. Note that each proof rule applied to logically valid hypotheses gives logically valid conclusions; for example for transitivity we just need to observe that if Δ |= s = t and Δ |= t = u then also Δ |= s = u. So by induction, whenever Δ s = t we also have Δ |= s = t in ﬁrst-order logic with equality. Conversely, if Δ |= s = t, then Δ = Δ ∪ ¬(s = t) has no normal model, and therefore Δ ∪ eqaxioms(Δ ) is unsatisﬁable. As noted earlier, all these formulas are Horn clauses, so there is a Prolog-style proof of ⊥ from them, as explained in Section 3.14. This must start with the formula s = t ⇒ ⊥ to get the subgoal s = t, and thereafter divide into subgoals ending either in instances of reﬂexivity or (possibly instantiation of) formulas in Δ. The internal nodes simply apply transitivity, symmetry and congruence. They

4.3 Equational logic and completeness theorems

247

therefore correspond exactly to Birkhoﬀ’s rules; all we have done is consider instances of the equality axioms as inference rules in themselves. This vindicates a naive expectation that if one equational formula is a logical consequence of others, one can get it by rewriting forwards, backwards and at depth, the kind of manipulative techniques we learn at school. Birkhoﬀ originally approached the problem more directly, and later Maltsev (1936) and others realized that many of the nice properties of equational logic discovered by Birkhoﬀ still hold in the more general setting of Horn clauses.

Soundness and completeness Birkhoﬀ’s theorem is an important case where a semantic notion Δ |= s = t is shown equivalent to a syntactic notion Δ s = t of ‘provability’. In general, we say that such a provability relation ‘’ is: • sound if whenever Δ p we also have Δ |= p; • complete if whenever Δ |= p we also have Δ p. Birkhoﬀ’s theorem asserts that the rules above are both sound and complete provided we restrict ourselves just to equations. They are deﬁnitely incomplete if we consider ﬁrst-order formulas in general, however, since they can only deduce equational conclusions. We can also consider the resolution rule from Section 3.11 as deﬁning a proof system. However, the reader should register an important mathematical distinction and another, purely psychological, one. Completeness and refutation completeness Birkhoﬀ’s theorem assures us that any equation that holds semantically can be derived syntactically. This is in contrast with, say, the resolution calculus, where we merely showed that if a set of clauses is unsatisﬁable, we can derive the empty clause from it. This implies Δ |= p iﬀ Δ p only for the special case p = ⊥, a property we called refutation completeness. As noted in Section 3.11, the example of P |= P ∨ Q shows that resolution is not complete in the stronger sense. Naturalness As mentioned earlier, Birkhoﬀ’s theorem conﬁrms our natural intuition and the Birkhoﬀ rules formalize steps that a human attempting to prove the same theorem might make. By contrast, the resolution calculus, which J. A. Robinson (1965b) explicitly categorized as a machine-oriented

248

Equality

principle, is remote from the methods people typically use when proving theorems, with its Skolemizing steps and insistence on clausal form.† We will describe a more human-oriented proof system that is complete for full ﬁrst-order logic in Section 6.3.

The diﬃculty of equational proofs Although in some respects equational logic has turned out to be ‘tamer’ than full ﬁrst-order logic, there is a precise sense in which it is just as difﬁcult, by virtue of an embedding of full ﬁrst-order logic in equational logic due to McKenzie (1975).‡ Indeed, the reader with any experience of ﬁnding equational proofs in relatively simple axiom systems will know that it can be astonishingly diﬃcult (Kapur and Zhang 1991). For example, the following problem is often set as an exercise in courses on group theory. We are given ‘1-sided’ versions of the identity and inverse axioms, and are required to deduce that left inverses are also right inverses. Our existing setup for equality handling can solve this problem, but it takes many hours; a more eﬃcient approach is discussed in Section 4.8. (meson ** equalitize) <<(forall x y z. x * (y * z) = (x * y) * z) /\ (forall x. 1 * x = x) /\ (forall x. i(x) * x = 1) ==> forall x. x * i(x) = 1>>;;

The reader may like to try competing against the machine! Here is a reasonably human-oriented proof: x · i(x) = 1 · (x · i(x)) = (i(i(x)) · i(x)) · (x · i(x)) = i(i(x)) · (i(x) · (x · i(x))) = i(i(x)) · ((i(x) · x) · i(x)) = i(i(x)) · (1 · i(x)) = i(i(x)) · i(x) = 1. We found this by tracing the proof MESON found, and rearranging the order of some of the Birkhoﬀ rules to turn it into a simple transitivity chain for easier presentation in a linear format. In fact, Birkhoﬀ proofs in some † ‡

Note, however, the suggestion of A. Robinson (1957) that Skolem functions have their analogue in construction lines used in traditional geometrical proofs. On the other hand, an embedding of ﬁrst-order logic in the theory of Boolean rings was actually suggested by Hsiang (1985) as a workable approach to ﬁrst-order proof.

4.4 Congruence closure

249

stronger canonical form can be easier to ﬁnd, just as, say, linear resolution can cut down the search space compared to unrestricted resolution (Section 3.13). And some of the results we present next can be proved using canonical transformations of Birkhoﬀ proofs (Exercise 4.2).

4.4 Congruence closure Consider equational logic in the special case of ground terms, i.e. deciding E |= s = t where s = t and all members of E are equations not containing variables. In the light of Birkhoﬀ’s Theorem 4.7, this is equivalent to E s = t. But since no variables are involved, the Birkhoﬀ instantiation rule is clearly not necessary. The highlight of this section is the observation that we can further restrict the Birkhoﬀ proofs to those where all terms appearing in intermediate equations are subterms of the terms in the original problem, which implies that the problem is decidable. In what follows, we assume some set G of terms that is closed under subterms, i.e. if t ∈ G and s is a subterm of t then s ∈ G. The following can serve as the implementation and the formal deﬁnition of the set of subterms of a term: let rec subterms tm = match tm with Fn(f,args) -> itlist (union ** subterms) args [tm] | _ -> [tm];;

We say that a binary relation ∼ on G is a congruence if it is reﬂexive, symmetric and transitive (i.e. an equivalence relation) and satisﬁes the congruence property: for each n-ary function symbol f , if s1 ∼ t1 , . . . , sn ∼ tn then also f (s1 , . . . , sn ) ∼ f (t1 , . . . , tn ), whenever all those terms are in G. Note that given any binary relation R ⊆ G × G there is a unique smallest congruence extending R, and this is known as the congruence closure of R. It can be deﬁned inductively (see Appendix 1) by starting with R and adding rules for closure under the equivalence and congruence properties. Theorem 4.8 Suppose all si , ti , s and t are ground terms, and G consists of those terms and all their subterms. Let ‘∼’ be the congruence closure on G of {(s1 , t1 ), . . . , (sn , tn )}. Then the following are equivalent: (i) {s1 = t1 , . . . , sn = tn } |= s = t; (ii) s ∼ t; (iii) there is a Birkhoﬀ proof of s = t from s1 = t1 , . . . , sn = tn whose intermediate steps involve only terms in G; (iv) {s1 = t1 , . . . , sn = tn } s = t.

250

Equality

Proof By Birkhoﬀ’s Theorem 4.7, (i) and (iv) are equivalent. If (iii) then (iv), since it is just a more restricted case of the same thing. If (ii) then (iii), since the set of pairs (s, t) that have a restricted Birkhoﬀ proof from s1 = t1 , . . . , sn = tn contains {(s1 , t1 ), . . . , (sn , tn )} and is closed under equivalence and congruence because of the Birkhoﬀ rules, and therefore must include the smallest such relation ‘∼’. To complete the circle of equivalents, we need to show that (ii) follows from (i). In fact we show the contrapositive, assuming s ∼ t and exhibiting an interpretation M where each si = ti holds but s = t does not. The domain of M is the set of equivalence classes of G under ‘∼’. Each constant c is interpreted by itself. An n-ary function f for n ≥ 1 is interpreted as fM (C1 , . . . , Cn ) = C, where C is the equivalence class containing f (u1 , . . . , un ) for some representatives ui ∈ Ci if such a class exists, and some ﬁxed but arbitrary equivalence class otherwise. (There may indeed be no such C containing a suitable f (u1 , . . . , un ), because we are restricted to terms in G, but if there is one, it is uniquely deﬁned independent of the representatives ui , precisely because ∼ is a congruence.) This is indeed a (normal) interpretation, and by induction on terms termval M σ u ∼ u for all u ∈ G. Therefore for all u, v ∈ G, holds M σ (u = v) is equivalent to u ∼ v. Consequently each si = ti holds in M but not s = t, so {s1 = t1 , . . . , sn = tn } |= s = t as required. Implementation of congruence closure Our implementation of congruence closure will take an existing congruence relation and extend it to a new one including a given equivalence s ∼ t. This can then be iterated starting with the empty congruence to ﬁnd the congruence closure of {(s1 , t1 ), . . . , (sn , tn )} as required. We will use a standard union-ﬁnd data structure described in Appendix 2 to represent equivalences, so closure under the equivalence properties will be automatic and we’ll just have to pay attention to closure under congruences. So suppose we have an existing congruence ∼ and we want to extend it to a new one ∼ such that s ∼ t. We need to merge the corresponding equivalence classes [s] and [t], and may also need to merge others such as [f (s, t, f (s, s))] and [f (t, t, f (s, t))] to maintain the congruence property. We can test whether two terms ‘should be’ equated by a 1-step congruence by checking if all their immediate subterms are already equivalent: let congruent eqv (s,t) = match (s,t) with Fn(f,a1),Fn(g,a2) -> f = g & forall2 (equivalent eqv) a1 a2 | _ -> false;;

4.4 Congruence closure

251

For the main algorithm, as well as the equivalence relation itself, eqv, we maintain a ‘predecessor function’ pfn mapping each canonical representative s of an equivalence class C to the set of terms of which some s ∈ C is an immediate subterm. We can then direct our attention at the appropriate terms each time equivalence classes are merged. It is this (eqv,pfn) pair that is updated by the following emerge operation for a new equivalence s ∼ t. First we normalize s → s and t → t based on the current equivalence relation, and if they are already equated, we need do no more. Otherwise we obtain the sets of predecessors, sp and tp, of the two terms. We update the equivalence relation to eqv’ to take account of the new equation, and combine the predecessor sets to update the predecessor function to pfn’ (mapped from the new canonical representative st’ in the new equivalence relation). Then we run over all pairs from sp and tp, recursively performing an emerge operation on terms that should become equated as a result of a single congruence step. let rec emerge (s,t) (eqv,pfn) = let s’ = canonize eqv s and t’ = canonize eqv t in if s’ = t’ then (eqv,pfn) else let sp = tryapplyl pfn s’ and tp = tryapplyl pfn t’ in let eqv’ = equate (s,t) eqv in let st’ = canonize eqv’ s’ in let pfn’ = (st’ |-> union sp tp) pfn in itlist (fun (u,v) (eqv,pfn) -> if congruent eqv (u,v) then emerge (u,v) (eqv,pfn) else eqv,pfn) (allpairs (fun u v -> (u,v)) sp tp) (eqv’,pfn’);;

At least this algorithm must terminate, because each time it gets past the initial s = t test it reduces the total number of equivalence classes, of which there can only be a ﬁnite number. We need to show that if the initial eqv is a congruence and pfn maps canonical representatives to the predecessor sets, the resulting equivalence relation is the congruence closure of eqv and the new equivalence s ∼ t, and pfn is correspondingly updated. The last part is easy, since pfn is always modiﬁed in step with direct changes in the equivalence relation from equate. As for congruence closure, we can see that the new equivalence relation certainly includes the original eqv, since all we do is add to it, and it also contains (s, t) because unless these terms were already equated, the very ﬁrst equate call equates them. Moreover, because of the representation of equivalence classes, it is automatically closed under equivalence properties. We only need to show that it is also closed under congruences. Supposing otherwise, there must be two

252

Equality

terms of the form f (s1 , . . . , sn ) and f (t1 , . . . , tn ) that are not equivalent, yet each pair (si , ti ) for 1 ≤ i ≤ n is. Since, by hypothesis, the initial eqv was congruence closed, at least one of these equivalences si = ti must have resulted from a call to equate from within emerge, and there must have been some such equate call at which all the pairs (si , ti ) became equated for the ﬁrst time. However, by construction, this would be followed by a congruence check that would equate f (s1 , . . . , sn ) and f (t1 , . . . , tn ), a contradiction.

Equality decision procedure We can use congruence closure to give a complete decision procedure for validity of universal formulas ∀x1 , . . . , xn . P [x1 , . . . , xn ] where P [x1 , . . . , xn ] involves no predicates besides equality, but may involve arbitrary function symbols. Such a formula is valid iﬀ its negation ∃x1 , . . . , xn . ¬P [x1 , . . . , xn ] is unsatisﬁable, and so, by Skolemization as usual, if ¬P [c1 , . . . , cn ] is unsatisﬁable for new constants c1 , . . . , cn . If we put ¬P [c1 , . . . , cn ] into DNF: Q1 [c1 , . . . , cn ] ∨ · · · ∨ Qk [c1 , . . . , cn ], then, since no variables are involved, the whole formula is satisﬁable precisely if one of the Qi [c1 , . . . , cn ] is. Each such formula is just a conjunction of equations and inequations: s1 = t1 ∧ · · · ∧ sn = tn ∧ u1 = v1 ∧ · · · ∧ um = vm . Returning to validity by negation, we need to test validity of s1 = t1 ∧ · · · ∧ sn = tn ⇒ u1 = v1 ∨ · · · ∨ um = vm . If m = 1, we know from Theorem 4.8 that this can be tested by forming the congruence closure of ∼ of {(s1 , t1 ), . . . , (sn , tn )} and testing if u1 ∼ v1 . We now observe that for general m, the formula is valid precisely if for some 1 ≤ i ≤ m the formula s1 = t1 ∧ · · · ∧ sn = tn ⇒ ui = vi is valid, by the convexity property for Horn clauses (Theorem 3.43), since we can consider the problem as deduction in ﬁrst-order logic without equality from the (Horn) equality axioms and the hypotheses sk = tk . Alternatively, the proof of Theorem 4.8 extends easily to cover this generalization. To set up the initial ‘predecessor’ function we use the following, which updates an existing function pfn with a new mapping for each immediate subterm s of a term t:

4.4 Congruence closure

253

let predecessors t pfn = match t with Fn(f,a) -> itlist (fun s f -> (s |-> insert t (tryapplyl f s)) f) (setify a) pfn | _ -> pfn;;

Hence, the following tests if a list fms of ground equations and inequations is satisﬁable. This list is partitioned into equations (pos) and inequations (neg), which are mapped into lists of pairs of terms eqps and eqns for easier manipulation. All the left-hand and right-hand sides are collected in lrs, and the predecessor function pfn is constructed to handle all their subterms. (Note that it is only pfn that determines the overall term set.) Then congruence closure is performed starting with the trivial equivalence relation unequal, and iteratively calling emerge over all the positive equations. Then it is tested whether all the lefts and rights of all the negated equations are inequivalent. let ccsatisfiable fms = let pos,neg = partition positive fms in let eqps = map dest_eq pos and eqns = map (dest_eq ** negate) neg in let lrs = map fst eqps @ map snd eqps @ map fst eqns @ map snd eqns in let pfn = itlist predecessors (unions(map subterms lrs)) undefined in let eqv,_ = itlist emerge eqps (unequal,pfn) in forall (fun (l,r) -> not(equivalent eqv l r)) eqns;;

The overall decision procedure now becomes the following: let ccvalid fm = let fms = simpdnf(askolemize(Not(generalize fm))) in not (exists ccsatisfiable fms);;

Let us try a few examples. In this one, the ﬁrst disjunct always holds, but we include another disjunct to show that we can deal with arbitrary formulas. # ccvalid < f(c) = c \/ f(g(c)) = g(f(c))>>;; - : bool = true

On the other hand, the following is not valid: # ccvalid < f(c) = c>>;; - : bool = false

The congruence closure algorithm and its proof that we have presented essentially follows Nelson and Oppen (1980). There are asymptotically faster

254

Equality

algorithms for congruence closure (Downey, Sethi and Tarjan 1980), but the Nelson–Oppen algorithm seems adequate for most typical examples. One drawback is that we need to decide the term universe once and for all based on the hypotheses and the goal. For some applications, it’s preferable to be able to maintain the equivalence relation incrementally so that the relation can be augmented with new equalities and the term universe expanded as new goals are encountered, in which case another algorithm due to Shostak (1978) may be preferable. The earliest decision procedure for this problem was given by Ackermann (1954) using a slightly diﬀerent technique. He observed that matters can be reduced to the theory of equality without functions by introducing new variables for all subterms and adding new constraints to reﬂect congruence properties. For example, given the problem f (f (f (c))) = c ∧ f (f (c)) = c ⇒ f (c) = c, we could introduce variables xk = f k (c) for 0 ≤ k ≤ 3 and consider the problem: (x0 = x1 ⇒ x1 = x2 ) ∧ (x0 = x2 ⇒ x1 = x3 ) ∧ (x1 = x2 ⇒ x2 = x3 ) ∧ ⇒ x3 = x0 ∧ x2 = x0 ⇒ x1 = x0 . This Ackermann reduction can be taken still further by replacing the equations s = t between variables by propositional atoms Ps,t and adding further constraints to reﬂect equivalence properties like Ps,t ∧ Pt,u ⇒ Ps,u , so reducing the problem simply to propositional tautology checking (Exercise 4.4).

4.5 Rewriting In the more general case of nonground equations, matters are no longer so simple. In order to ﬁnd a Birkhoﬀ proof of s = t from hypotheses E, we may have to use arbitrarily large and complex intermediate terms. However, a lot of everyday equational reasoning is very straightforward, mostly using equations in a predictable direction. For example, we would normally think of using the group axiom i(x)·x = 1 left-to-right in order to make expressions ‘simpler’. It’s precisely when we have to use it backwards to make a larger intermediate term that proofs tend to become much harder. (See the group theory puzzle in Section 4.3 for an example.) Admittedly the deﬁnition of what is ‘simpler’ can be subtle. For instance, in algebra we often regard using distributive laws to transform: (u + v)(x + y) → · · · → ux + uy + vx + vy

4.5 Rewriting

255

as a simpliﬁcation. This makes the term larger, but it does makes it easier to perform subsequent cancellation operations. Using equations in a directional fashion like this is called rewriting, because equations are used to ‘rewrite’ one term into another.† More precisely, if t is a term, and l = r an equation, we say that t results from rewriting t with l = r if t is t with a subterm that is an instance of l replaced by a corresponding instance of r. Note that a single rewriting step only transforms a single subterm. For instance, the equation x + x = 2x can rewrite the term (a + a) + (b + b) into either 2a + (b + b) or to (a + a) + 2b, but not (in a single step) to 2a + 2b. Given a set R of equations to be considered as left-to-right rewrite rules, we write t →R t iﬀ there is some equation (l = r) ∈ R which rewrites t to t . When the set of rewrites R is clear from the context, we may just write t → t . Note that rewriting is logically sound, in the sense that t = t holds in any model of the equations R, and we could if we wish decompose each rewriting step into a series of Birkhoﬀ rule applications. If we’re trying to prove that E ⇒ s = t where E is closed (a conjunction of universally quantiﬁed equations in the present situation), then by Theorem 3.11 we’re justiﬁed in replacing all free variables in s and t by new constants. So we can if we wish always assume that the terms we’re rewriting are ground. In principle, rewrite rules might have variables on the RHS that do not occur in the LHS (e.g. y · 0 = 0 · x), and this could make intermediate terms non-ground. However, as the reader might expect, these tend to spoil the nice properties of rewriting, and we will never use rewriting with such terms. In fact, many authors deﬁne a rewrite rule to be an equation l = r where FV(r) ⊆ FV(l) and l is not a variable. (A term with a variable LHS could be applied to any term, and is hence not likely to be controllable.) Nevertheless, it’s quite convenient to be able to rewrite arbitrary terms, ﬁrst so that we don’t have to transform the initial problem, and also because we sometimes want to rewrite some of the rewrite rules themselves with others. On the other hand, even if it does involve variables, we don’t want to permit instantiation of the term being rewritten, since that would spoil the idea that we are simplifying a ﬁxed term. The extension of rewriting to allow instantiation of the term being rewritten is known as narrowing (Fay 1979; Hullot 1980); it is a special case of paramodulation which we consider later.

†

The ﬁrst explicit use of rewriting seems to have been described by Wos, Robinson, Carson and Shalla (1967), and the original term ‘demodulation’ from that paper is still used instead of ‘rewriting’ in some parts of the resolution theorem proving community; see Section 4.9.

256

Equality

Canonical rewrite systems Sometimes, a simpliﬁcation procedure has the property that all ‘equivalent’ expressions reduce to the same simpliﬁed form. In such cases we can decide whether s and t are equivalent by reducing both s and t to their simpliﬁed forms s and t and then comparing s and t syntactically (Evans 1951). In equational reasoning with hypotheses E, it is natural to call s and t equivalent iﬀ E |= s = t. We call E a canonical or convergent rewrite system when it can be decided whether E |= s = t by treating E as a set of rewrite rules, repeatedly rewriting s and t as much as possible to give s and t respectively, and comparing the results. That is, we can rewrite each term to a ‘canonical’ or ‘normal’ form, so that all terms s and s with E |= s = s have the same normal form. For example, the following set of rewrite rules can be thought of as embodying evaluation rules for addition of numbers written in terms of 0 and a successor operation S, though they have other models: {m + 0 = m, 0 + n = n, m + S(n) = S(m + n), S(m) + n = S(m + n)}. No intelligence or creativity is required: even where there are several possible ways of reducing a term, we cannot make an irrevocable wrong decision that will lead us away from the canonical form, e.g. reducing S(0) + S(S(0)) in this way: S(0) + S(S(0)) → S(0 + S(S(0))) → S(S(S(0))), or another: S(0) + S(S(0)) → S(S(0) + S(0)) → S(S(S(0) + 0)) → S(S(S(0 + 0))) → S(S(S(0))). Of course, from the point of view of eﬃciency, it may matter which rewrite we choose (e.g. if we have a rule 0 · x = 0, it makes sense to apply it to a term 0 · E without performing reductions on E). And there are surprisingly simple rewrite systems that, although terminating in principle, can lead to infeasibly lengthy reduction sequences, e.g. (Hofbauer and Lautemann 1989): { f (x) + (y + z) = x + (f (f (y)) + z), f (u) + (v + (w + x)) = u + (w + (v + x))}. Let us neglect eﬃciency for now, and ask how canonicality can fail completely. Using the singleton set {x + y = y + x} any subterm a + b can be

4.5 Rewriting

257

rewritten indeﬁnitely, and for this reason that set is not canonical: a + b → b + a → a + b → b + a → a + b → ··· Rewriting with the following rewrite set: { x · (y + z) = x · y + x · z, (x + y) · z = x · z + y · z} can never be continued indeﬁnitely (we will prove this later), but we may not get a well-deﬁned result in that even the same term can sometimes be rewritten to diﬀerent irreducible forms, e.g. (a + b) · (c + d) → a · (c + d) + b · (c + d) → (a · c + a · d) + b · (c + d) → (a · c + a · d) + (b · c + b · d) or (a + b) · (c + d) → (a + b) · c + (a + b) · d → (a · c + b · d) + (a + b) · d → (a · c + b · d) + (a · d + b · d).

Abstract reduction relations The examples above hint at two critical properties we need, roughly speaking: • termination – starting from any term, we must eventually reach a form that can no longer be further reduced; • conﬂuence – starting from any term, if we apply the simpliﬁcation rules in diﬀerent orders to get diﬀerent intermediate results, we can subsequently ‘rejoin’ them by further reductions. We will now deﬁne these more precisely and show that together they give us the results we need. However, it’s convenient to work in the more general context of an arbitrary binary relation on a set, rather than merely rewrite relations over terms. This helps to clarify the essential theoretical features without introducing technical complications, and also allows us to re-use some of the key results in a diﬀerent context later on.† Our view is fairly pragmatic and we only scratch the surface of the subject; for a more thorough treatment see, for example, Klop (1992). †

See Section 5.11 on Gr¨ obner bases. Many of these concepts were ﬁrst articulated in contexts other than rewriting, e.g. reductions in untyped lambda calculus (Barendregt 1984; Hindley and Seldin 1986).

258

Equality

An abstract reduction relation is simply a binary relation R on a set X, though we jog our intuition by writing x → y instead of R(x, y), and the reader may like to keep in mind the special case of rewrite relations. In the following, we denote by →+ the transitive closure of → and by →∗ its reﬂexive transitive closure (see Appendix 1). That is, x →+ y if there is a possibly-empty sequence of elements xi ∈ X with x → x1 → · · · → xn → y, and x →∗ y if x →+ y or x = y. An x ∈ X is said to be in normal form iﬀ there is no y ∈ X with x → y. In the context of rewriting, a term is in normal form w.r.t. →R precisely when no rewrites from R can be applied to it. A reduction relation is said to be terminating, strongly normalizing (SN) or noetherian iﬀ there is no inﬁnite reduction sequence x0 → · · · → xn → · · ·.† Considering the reverse relation deﬁned by x < y =def y → x, we see that x is in normal form iﬀ it is minimal with respect to <, and → is terminating precisely if < is wellfounded. Thus, the two concepts just deﬁned are familiar in another guise, and we can take over corresponding theorems with trivial changes. For example, the transitive closure of a terminating relation is also terminating, and we can perform induction over a terminating relation: if → is terminating and we can establish that P (x) holds whenever P (y) holds for all y such that x → y, then we may conclude P (x) for all x ∈ X. We’ll apply this principle shortly. (Note that this includes the degenerate case of establishing P (x) for all x in normal form.) An abstract reduction relation is said to have the diamond property iﬀ whenever x → y and x → y , there is a z such that y → z and y → z. It is said to be conﬂuent if →∗ has the diamond property. It is said to be weakly conﬂuent if whenever x → y and x → y , there is a z such that y →∗ z and y →∗ z. We say for short that x and y are joinable, and write x ↓ y, to mean that there is a z with x →∗ z and y →∗ z, so we can express conﬂuence as ‘if x →∗ y1 and x →∗ y2 then y1 ↓ y2 ’ and weak conﬂuence as ‘if x → y1 and x → y2 then y1 ↓ y2 ’. The name ‘diamond property’ comes from the convenient diagrammatic representation of reductions as descending diagonal lines moving from the ﬁrst element to the second. Thus the forms of conﬂuence all assert that given reductions from x to both y and y , there is a z with reductions from both y and y to z; the forms only diﬀer in whether we have → or →∗ at the top or bottom.

†

Weak normalization (WN) means that for each x there is a y in normal form such that x →∗ y. We won’t use this concept but it seems worth noting the distinction in case the reader wants to delve deeper into such material.

4.5 Rewriting

259

x @

@

@

R y @

y @

@

@

R @

z

All the variations on a theme of conﬂuence are closely interrelated. If → has the diamond property, it is weakly conﬂuent, since y → z trivially implies y →∗ z. For similar reasons, conﬂuence implies weak conﬂuence. It is not much harder to see that the diamond property implies conﬂuence, by double induction on the lengths of the initial reduction sequences x →∗ y and x →∗ y . For example, if we have a 2-step reduction x → y1 → y2 and a 3-step reduction x → y3 → y4 → y5 we can show that there is a z with y2 →∗ z and y5 →∗ z by repeatedly using the diamond property to ﬁll in the internal lines in this diagram, starting at the top and ending with some suitable z: x @

R y3 @ @ @ y2 R @ R y4 @ @ @ @ R @ R @ R y5 @ @ @ R @ R @ @ R @

y1

z

On the other hand, weak conﬂuence does not in general imply conﬂuence; the following is a particularly simple counterexample due to Hindley. (One can think of this as specifying a term rewriting system where a, b, c and d are all constants, or simply as an exhaustive enumeration of an abstract binary relation.) b → a b → c c → b c → d

260

Equality

Still, for a terminating reduction relation, weak conﬂuence does imply conﬂuence. This key result is known as Newman’s lemma. The original proof (Newman 1942) was rather complicated, and it was only much later that Huet (1980) pointed out the following relatively straightforward proof, exploiting the fact that when → is terminating we can perform wellfounded induction. Theorem 4.9 If → is terminating and weakly conﬂuent, then it is conﬂuent. Proof Since → is terminating, all reduction sequences terminate, so we just need to prove that if x →∗ y and x →∗ y with y and y in normal form, then y = y . We will prove this by wellfounded induction: suppose x is the minimal element such that for some y and y this fails. The assertion is vacuous if x = y or x = y , so we can assume the existence of w and w such that x → w →∗ y and x → w →∗ y . Weak conﬂuence tells us that there’s a z with w →∗ z and w →∗ z; by continuing the reduction as much as possible we can assume z to be in normal form. But by the fact that y and y are successors of x and x was the minimal case where the key property fails, we have y = z and y = z, and so y = y as required. Let us write ↔∗ for the reﬂexive symmetric transitive closure of →. We say that → is Church–Rosser if whenever x ↔∗ y then x ↓ y.† We will prove in fact that the Church–Rosser property is equivalent to conﬂuence, so the two terms may be, and sometimes are, used synonymously. In one direction this is easy, since conﬂuence is a special case of the Church–Rosser property: if x →∗ y1 and x →∗ y2 then y1 ↔∗ y2 . In the other direction, if x ↔∗ y then we can get from x to y by a series of steps that we can separate into alternating ‘forward’ and ‘backward’ segments, x · · · →∗ xi ←∗ xi+1 →∗ xi+2 ←∗ · · · y. Because of conﬂuence, we can at each stage ﬁnd a suitable zi such that xi →∗ zi and xi+2 →∗ zi and hence successively reduce the number of segments, ﬁlling in the internal sides in the diagram until we eventually reach a ﬁnal z with x →∗ z and y →∗ z. †

The peculiar name ‘Church–Rosser’ arises from the fact that the ﬁrst signiﬁcant instance was proved for the case of β-reduction in lambda calculus by Church and Rosser (1936).

4.5 Rewriting

x

@ @ @ @ R @ R @ R @ R @ @ @ @ R @ R @ R @ @ @ R @ R @ @ R @

261

y

z

In what follows, we recast this argument as a formal induction. Note that we do not need to assume termination to show that interconvertible elements are joinable. Theorem 4.10 Conﬂuence is equivalent to the Church–Rosser property, i.e. → is conﬂuent if and only if for any x and y we have x ↔∗ y iﬀ x ↓ y. Proof Since x ↓ y is a special case of x ↔∗ y, we just need to prove that conﬂuence is equivalent to ‘if x ↔∗ y then x ↓ y’. As noted above, the right-to-left direction is easy because conﬂuence is a special case of the Church–Rosser property. For the other direction, we proceed by induction on the deﬁnition x ↔∗ y. If we actually have x → y then trivially x ↓ y because x →∗ y and y →∗ y. Even more trivially, if x and y are identical, they are joinable. If x ↔∗ y is obtained by symmetry from y ↔∗ x, then by the inductive hypothesis y ↓ x, and since joinability is symmetric between x and y we have x ↓ y. Finally, if x ↔∗ y arises by transitivity from x ↔∗ z and z ↔∗ y, we have by the inductive hypothesis some u and v with x →∗ u, z →∗ u and z →∗ v, y →∗ v. Using conﬂuence, there is a z such that u →∗ z and v →∗ z. By transitivity of →∗ , we therefore have x →∗ z and y →∗ z as required.

Another useful lemma about joinability is the following. Lemma 4.11 A reduction relation → is conﬂuent iﬀ the corresponding joinability relation is transitive, i.e. for all x, y and z such that x ↓ y and y ↓ z we have x ↓ z. Proof If → is conﬂuent, the previous result shows that x ↓ y coincides with x ↔∗ y, and the latter is clearly transitive. (It’s also easy to reason more directly.)

262

Equality

Conversely, suppose joinability is transitive. If p →∗ q1 and p →∗ q2 then p ↓ q1 and p ↓ q2 . Using the obvious symmetry and assumed transitivity of ↓, we see that q1 ↓ q2 so the relation is conﬂuent. We say that a reduction relation is canonical when it is both terminating and conﬂuent. Note that if → is canonical, then whenever x →∗ x and y →∗ y with x and y in normal form, we have x ↔∗ y iﬀ x = y . In the special case of a rewrite relation, this justiﬁes exactly the kind of process for testing E |= s = t that we outlined at the start of this section, by virtue of the following theorem. Theorem 4.12 For a rewrite relation →R generated by a set of rewrites R, for all terms s and t we have s ↔∗R t iﬀ R |= s = t. Proof One way is relatively easy: if s →R t then R |= s = t because t results from replacing s according to an equation in R. By induction, the same applies when s ↔∗R t. Conversely, if R |= s = t then by Theorem 4.7 we have R s = t. We will show by induction on the Birkhoﬀ rules that if R s = t then also s ↔∗R t. Closure of ↔∗R under reﬂexivity, symmetry and transitivity is immediate, and if (s = t) ∈ R then by a trivial rewrite step s ↔∗R t. We will be ﬁnished if we can establish that ↔∗R is closed under congruence and instantiation. Both of these follow (formally, by another induction) by systematically applying the congruence or instantiation to all elements in the transitivity chain, since the core rewrite relation →R is closed in this way. Implementing rewriting To rewrite a term t at the top level with an equation l = r we just attempt to match l to t and apply the corresponding instantiation to r; the following does this with the ﬁrst in a list of equations to succeed: let rec rewrite1 eqs t = match eqs with Atom(R("=",[l;r]))::oeqs -> (try tsubst (term_match undefined [l,t]) r with Failure _ -> rewrite1 oeqs t) | _ -> failwith "rewrite1";;

Our interest is in rewriting at all subterms, and repeatedly, to normalize a term w.r.t. a set of equations. Although, for theoretical reasons, in particular for applying Newman’s Lemma, it’s important to single out the ‘one-step’

4.5 Rewriting

263

(though at depth) rewrite relation →R , from an implementation point of view we needn’t bother isolating it. The following function simply applies rewrites at all possible subterms and repeatedly until no further rewrites are possible. The user is responsible for ensuring that the rewrites terminate, and if this is not the case this function may loop indeﬁnitely. Where several rewrites could be applied, the leftmost outermost subterm in the term being rewritten is always preferred, and thereafter the ﬁrst applicable equation in the list of rewrites. Alternative strategies such as choosing the innermost rewritable subterm would work equally well in our applications. let rec rewrite eqs tm = try rewrite eqs (rewrite1 eqs tm) with Failure _ -> match tm with Var x -> tm | Fn(f,args) -> let tm’ = Fn(f,map (rewrite eqs) args) in if tm’ = tm then tm else rewrite eqs tm’;;

Here’s a simple example, evaluating 3 ∗ 2 + 4 in the zero-successor representation of numerals: rewrite [<<0 + x = x>>; <<S(x) + y = S(x + y)>>; <<0 * x = 0>>; <<S(x) * y = y + x * y>>] <<|S(S(S(0))) * S(S(0)) + S(S(S(S(0))))|>>;; - : term = <<|S(S(S(S(S(S(S(S(S(S(0))))))))))|>>

It is in general undecidable whether a particular set of equations, used as a rewrite system, is terminating, either for some particular reduction strategy or for all strategies. Indeed, one can express arbitrary algorithms as rewrite systems in a manner not unlike the clausal pattern-matching that is typical in functional programming languages.† The analogy is not exact, since functional languages tend to have many additional constructs and a particular evaluation strategy. On the other hand, in one respect the standard clausal function deﬁnitions are simpler than general rewrite rules because they are linear, meaning that each variable occurs at most once on the left-hand side. (For example, OCaml will reject a function deﬁnition ‘function (x,x) -> 0’ because the variable x is bound twice in the pattern.) There is a substantial literature on the theory of linear rewrite rules; they turn out to be in certain respects ‘better behaved’ than general rewrite rules. In particular, it is more straightforward to analyze their †

To see that any algorithm can be suitably encoded, one can observe that SK combinator reduction is just a pair of rewrite rules, and it is known that SK combinators can encode all computable functions (Hindley and Seldin 1986). In practice one can often use more direct encodings (see Exercise 4.7).

264

Equality

conﬂuence without assuming termination. The connection with functional programming is examined in detail by Huet and L´evy (1991).

4.6 Termination orderings One way of showing that a reduction → is terminating is to show that it is included in another relation > (i.e. whenever s → t we also have s > t) that is itself terminating. For a suitable >, this can be more tractable than a direct attack on →. In particular, for a rewrite relation, things are much more straightforward when it suﬃces to consider l > r for the equations (l = r) ∈ R themselves, rather than the induced rewrite relationship, which may involve instantiations and substitution at an arbitrary (single) subterm. This motivates the following deﬁnition. Deﬁnition 4.13 A binary relation > on terms is said to be a rewrite order if it is transitive and irreﬂexive and is closed under instantiation and simple congruences (within a ﬁxed set of function symbols understood implicitly), i.e. • • • •

it if if if

is never the case that t > t, s > t and t > u then s > u, s > t then tsubst i s > tsubst i t, s > t then f (u1 , . . . , ui−1 , s, ui+1 , . . . , un ) > f (u1 , . . . , ui−1 , t, ui+1 , . . . , un ).

A rewrite order that is terminating is said to be a reduction order. Note that in this case the irreﬂexivity clause is redundant since a wellfounded relation is automatically irreﬂexive (if t > t then t > t > t > · · · would be an inﬁnite descending chain). Lemma 4.14 If > is a reduction order and l > r for each equation (l = r) ∈ R, then the rewrite relation →R is terminating. Proof By deﬁnition s →R t if there is some instantiation l = r of an equation (l = r) ∈ R such that t results from s by replacing a single instance of l with r . By hypothesis, l > r, and since > is closed under instantiation l > r . Repeatedly using the fact that > is closed under simple congruences, we see that s > t. Therefore, the rewrite relation →R is included in the relation > and is consequently also terminating.

4.6 Termination orderings

265

Measure-based orders How do we ﬁnd a suitable reduction order for a given rewrite set? One of the standard techniques for generating wellfounded relations is to use a measure function to map into a familiar wellfounded set such as N, using the fact that if < is wellfounded then so is the relation deﬁned by x ≺ y =def m(x) < m(y). In our context, a natural idea is to consider the ‘size’ of terms. Denote by |t| the number of variables and function symbols in t, which we can compute like this: let rec termsize tm = match tm with Var x -> 1 | Fn(f,args) -> itlist (fun t n -> termsize t + n) args 1;;

We might hope to deﬁne a reduction order s > t by |s| > |t|. Since the size is always a positive integer, this is wellfounded and is also transitive and obeys the congruence property. However, it fails the instantiation property; for example f (x, x, x) > g(x, y) but if we instantiate y to f (x, x, x) we have f (x, x, x) > g(x, f (x, x, x)). A little thought will convince the reader that it’s the presence of variables that occur more often in the smaller term than the larger term that is the source of the problem. One can ﬁx this by deﬁning s > t if both |s| > |t| and |s|x ≥ |t|x for each x ∈ FVT(t), where |t|x denotes the number of occurrences of x in t. However, although this does yield a reduction order (as the reader can conﬁrm), it’s poorly suited to the kinds of equations we often encounter in algebraic theories. Two typical examples are associative and distributive laws: • (x · y) · z = x · (y · z), • x · (y + z) = x · y + x · z. Both sides of the associative law have equal measure, so we can’t use the size-based ordering whichever way round it’s written. And for the distributive law things are even worse: the right-hand side is larger than the left, despite the fact that we might want to consider expanding using it left-to-right. Lexicographic path orders These problems with simple measure-based orders suggest that to deal with typical algebraic examples, we need ﬁrst to be able to: • treat the arguments to functions asymmetrically, so that applying the associative law in one preferred direction is possible;

266

Equality

• treat the function symbols asymmetrically so that we can say, for example, that replacing the top-level function symbol f by g represents ‘progress’, even if the term grows in size. It is possible to do both of these things with more elaborate measure-based orderings. However, the most direct method is simply to deﬁne an ordering on terms by recursion, explicitly designed to ‘force’ the required properties. To deal with the associative law, for example, we can say that: • f (s1 , . . . , sm ) > f (t1 , . . . , tm ) if the sequence s1 , . . . , sm is lexicographically greater than t1 , . . . , tm , i.e. if si = ti for all i < k ≤ m and sk > tk under the same ordering. This ensures that (x · y) · z > x · (y · z) provided x · y > x. It’s natural to also arrange more generally that s > t whenever t is a proper subterm of s. It’s more in keeping with the structurally recursive nature of the other clauses if we just specify it for immediate subterms; the general result then follows by induction. Note that this includes the special case that if t is a variable x we have s > x whenever x ∈ FVT(s), excluding the reﬂexive case when s = x. • f (s1 , . . . , sn ) > t whenever si ≥ t. Finally, in order to impose a precedence on function symbols, allowing us to deal with the distributive law by ‘preferring’ ‘·’ to ‘+’ or vice versa, we can stipulate: • f (s1 , · · · , sm ) > g(t1 , . . . , tn ) if f > g according to some speciﬁed precedence ordering of the function symbols, without further analysis of the si and ti . These desiderata are almost enough to allow us to deﬁne the ordering directly by recursion. However, as it stands the requirements are stated too bluntly and are not enough to ensure termination. For example, instead of the correct distributive law, consider x·(y+z) = x·(z+y)+z. The LHS is still greater than the RHS according to the ordering as speciﬁed so far, but it is nonterminating. We therefore reﬁne things slightly to ensure that the proper subterms of the RHS must also be less than the starting term on the left, i.e. that f (s1 , . . . , sm ) > g(t1 , . . . , tn ) (whether or not f = g) only if in addition f (s1 , . . . , sm ) > ti for each 1 ≤ i ≤ n. It isn’t immediately obvious that this ﬁx is enough to ensure termination, but we will prove it below. The resulting order is called the lexicographic path order (LPO). More properly, it speciﬁes a whole class of LPOs parametrized by the particular ‘weighting’ of function

4.6 Termination orderings

267

symbols chosen. We can render the deﬁnition in OCaml quite directly. First we deﬁne the general lexicographic extension of an arbitrary relation ord. It always returns falsity when applied to lists of diﬀerent lengths; this feature is exploited below. let rec lexord ord l1 l2 = match (l1,l2) with (h1::t1,h2::t2) -> if ord h1 h2 then length t1 = length t2 else h1 = h2 & lexord ord t1 t2 | _ -> false;;

Now we deﬁne the irreﬂexive and reﬂexive versions of the LPO, both of which are parametrized by a ‘weighting’ w on function symbols, where w (f, n) (g, m) decides whether the n-ary function f is ‘bigger’ than the mary function symbol g. We will sloppily write f > g for this below, but note from a formal point of view that we treat as distinct function symbols with the same name but diﬀerent arity.† let rec lpo_gt w s t = match (s,t) with (_,Var x) -> not(s = t) & mem x (fvt s) | (Fn(f,fargs),Fn(g,gargs)) -> exists (fun si -> lpo_ge w si t) fargs or forall (lpo_gt w s) gargs & (f = g & lexord (lpo_gt w) fargs gargs or w (f,length fargs) (g,length gargs)) | _ -> false and lpo_ge w s t = (s = t) or lpo_gt w s t;;

Specifying the ordering on function symbols, arities and all, is quite a tedious business. We deﬁne the following function to generate a weight function from a more convenient starting point: a list of function symbols in increasing order of precedence. In the (unexpected) case when functions are identical but arities diﬀerent, we disambiguate by treating functions with larger arity as ‘greater’: let weight lis (f,n) (g,m) = if f = g then n > m else earlier lis g f;;

†

This is just for theoretical reasons; we will never actually work with terms containing identicallynamed function symbols with diﬀerent arities. In fact we could ignore arities for our present purposes. But for some applications, it is important that the LPO be total on ground terms, and f (c, c) and f (c) would be incomparable if we ignored arities. A common alternative is to use a more general notion of lexicographic extension.

268

Equality

Properties of the LPO Although the LPO is a more or less natural embodiment of the desiderata we outlined, with ﬁxes to counter the obvious failures of termination, it isn’t at all obvious that the ﬁnal result is terminating, or indeed satisﬁes other reduction order properties such as transitivity. In fact, if there are inﬁnitely many function symbols with a nonterminating sequence of weights w(f1 ) > w(f2 ) > · · ·, then the LPO is not terminating, but we usually implicitly assume a ﬁnite set of function symbols, those that occur in the ﬁnitely many formulas we are dealing with. In this case, we will establish that the LPO is a reduction order. Most of the proofs that follow are by induction on the (total) sizes of the terms involved followed by an analysis of the cases in the LPO deﬁnition. Lemma 4.15 If s > t then FVT(t) ⊆ FVT(s). Proof By induction on |s| + |t|. If t is a variable x then s > x means that x ∈ FVT(s) and therefore FVT(x) = {x} ⊆ FVT(s), so the result holds. If s is a variable then s > t is false and the result holds trivially. Otherwise we can assume s is of the form f (s1 , . . . , sn ) and t of the form g(t1 , . . . , tm ). One way that s > t can arise is if some si ≥ t. But then FVT(t) ⊆ FVT(si ) by the inductive hypothesis and since FVT(si ) ⊆ FVT(s) we have FVT(t) ⊆ FVT(s) as required. Otherwise, whatever the relation between f and g we always have s > ti for 1 ≤ i ≤ m. Consequently, by the inductive hypothesis each FVT(ti ) ⊆ FVT(s) and therefore FVT(t) = 1≤i≤n FVT(ti ) ⊆ FVT(s) as required. Theorem 4.16 The LPO is transitive. Proof By induction on the total term size |s| + |t| + |u|, we show that if s > t and t > u then s > u. We sometime use variants of the inductive hypothesis such as the inference that if s > t ≥ u then s > u. This is an easy consequence since if t ≥ u either t = u or t > u. Suppose ﬁrst that u is a variable x. In this case we have x ∈ FVT(t) and x = t by deﬁnition. But by Lemma 4.15 we also have FVT(t) ⊆ FVT(s) and so x ∈ FVT(s). We can also rule out x = s because x > t could not then hold. Consequently s > u in this case. Now assume u is of the form h(u1 , . . . , up ). Since we never have x > u it must be the case that t is also of the form g(t1 , . . . , tn ) and similarly s of the form f (s1 , . . . , sm ). We now consider the various ways in which s > t and t > u could arise.

4.6 Termination orderings

269

First, suppose f (s1 , . . . , sm ) > g(t1 , . . . , tn ) arises because for some 1 ≤ i ≤ m we have si ≥ g(t1 , . . . , tn ) = t. By the inductive hypothesis, si ≥ t > u implies si > u, so a fortiori si ≥ u and therefore also s > u by the deﬁnition of the LPO. There now just remains the case where, whatever the relation between f and g, we have s > ti for each 1 ≤ i ≤ n. Now suppose g(t1 , . . . , tn ) > h(u1 , . . . , up ) arises because for some 1 ≤ i ≤ n we have ti ≥ h(u1 , . . . , up ) = u. Since s > ti the inductive hypothesis yields s > u as required. Otherwise, we may now assume t > ui for each 1 ≤ i ≤ p, and also that f ≥ g ≥ h. By the inductive hypothesis we have s > ui for each 1 ≤ i ≤ p, so the additional condition on s > u is satisﬁed. If f > h, therefore, we have s > u immediately. Otherwise we have f = g = h, m = n = p and the lexicographic relations: (s1 , . . . , sp ) >LEX (t1 , . . . , tp ) >LEX (u1 , . . . , up ). By the inductive hypothesis, si > tj and tj > uk implies si > uk for any such triple from these subterms. Therefore we also have transitivity of the lexicographic extension and (s1 , . . . , sp ) >LEX (u1 , . . . , up ), yielding s > u as required. Theorem 4.17 The LPO has the subterm property, i.e. if t is a proper subterm of s then s > t. Proof Now that we know > is transitive, the result follows by induction on the size of s if we can prove the special case f (s1 , . . . , si−1 , t, si+1 , . . . , sn ) > t. If t is a variable this holds by deﬁnition. Otherwise it is also immediate from the deﬁnition since t ≥ t. Theorem 4.18 The LPO is closed under substitutions, i.e. if s > t then for any instantiation σ we have tsubst σ s > tsubst σ t. Proof Fix an instantiation σ; for any term u we will consistently abbreviate u = tsubst σ u. We proceed by induction on |s| + |t|. If t is a variable x we have x ∈ FVT(s) so x is a subterm of s ; since we also have x = s it is a proper subterm and the result follows from the subterm property. Otherwise, neither s nor t can be a variable, so we can suppose that s is of the form f (s1 , . . . , sm ) and t is also of the form g(t1 , . . . , tn ). Consider the ways in which s > t can arise. If si > t for 1 ≤ i ≤ m we have by the inductive hypothesis that si > t . Since si is a proper subterm of s , it follows by transitivity that s > t . Otherwise the auxiliary condition s > ti

270

Equality

for 1 ≤ i ≤ n implies by the inductive hypothesis that the corresponding condition s > ti holds. If f > g then the required result is immediate. If f = g, m = n then we have (s1 , . . . , sm ) >LEX (t1 , . . . , tn ). This means that there is some 1 ≤ i ≤ n such that sj = tj for j ti . Trivially, then sj = tj for j ti , thus showing (s1 , . . . , sm ) >LEX (t1 , . . . , tn ) and hence s > t as required. Theorem 4.19 The LPO is a congruence w.r.t. the function symbols, i.e. if t > u then f (s1 , . . . , si−1 , t, si+1 , . . . , sn ) > f (s1 , . . . , si−1 , u, si+1 , . . . , sn ) Proof (s1 , . . . , si−1 , t, si+1 , . . . , sn ) >LEX (s1 , . . . , si−1 , u, si+1 , . . . , sn ) since t > u and all preceding terms are identical. Moreover, most of the auxiliary condition follows from the fact that f (s1 , . . . , si−1 , t, si+1 , . . . , sn ) > sj for j ∈ {1, . . . , i − 1, i + 1, . . . , n}, while f (s1 , . . . , si−1 , t, si+1 , . . . , sn ) > u is immediate from transitivity given the hypothesis t > u and the subterm property f (s1 , . . . , si−1 , t, si+1 , . . . , sn ) > t proved previously. Theorem 4.20 The LPO is irreﬂexive, i.e. t > t never holds. Proof By induction on the size of t. If t is a variable then t > t is false by deﬁnition because of the x = t clause in the deﬁnition. If on the other hand we have t = f (t1 , . . . , tn ), then t > t can only arise because of lexicographic extension (t1 , . . . , tn ) >LEX (t1 , . . . , tn ). But by the inductive hypothesis we never have ti > ti for 1 ≤ i ≤ n and there could be no ‘ﬁrst’ i such that this holds. Tedious as those proofs were, they were mostly a question of following one’s nose. Termination, however, is a bit more subtle, though not much more diﬃcult if approached in the right way, using a minimality trick. Our proof here is inspired by Ferreira and Zantema (1995); for another relatively short proof see Buchholz (1995). Theorem 4.21 The LPO, restricted to terms based on a ﬁnite set of function symbols, is terminating. Proof If there exists an inﬁnite descending chain at all, there exists one t0 > t1 > t2 > · · · that is minimal in the sense that each term has minimal size among those that could possibly appear at that point in an inﬁnite descending chain. More precisely, let us say that a term t is nonwellfounded if there is an inﬁnite descending chain starting with t. We will show that if

4.7 Knuth–Bendix completion

271

there is a descending chain, then there is one t0 > t1 > t2 > · · · with the following properties: • |t0 | ≤ |s| for all nonwellfounded terms s, • |ti+1 | ≤ |s| for all nonwellfounded terms s with ti > s. To show that such a chain exists, proceed by recursion on i. If there is an inﬁnite descending chain, then there is some nonwellfounded element. Let t0 be one of minimal size (this is not in general unique). Now, having deﬁned a sequence t0 > t1 > · · · > ti with ti nonwellfounded, there must be some nonwellfounded s with ti > s (otherwise ti would be wellfounded). Again, we can simply pick the minimal one as ti+1 . Now, we never have t > x for a variable x, and so no variable is nonwellfounded and so none of the ti can be a variable. And since the number of function symbols is by hypothesis ﬁnite, there must be at least one function symbol (with particular arity n) that occurs inﬁnitely often as the top-level function in the ti . We can deﬁne a subsequence, i.e. an increasing function k : N → N, such that each tki is of the form f (ui1 , . . . , uin ). Now, by the minimality hypothesis, none of the uij can be nonwellfounded, and by transitivity i+1 we have f (ui1 , . . . , uin ) > f (ui+1 1 , . . . , un ) for each i. Consider the ways in which this can happen according to the deﬁnition of i+1 the LPO. We cannot have any uij > f (ui+1 1 , . . . , un ), for that would contradict minimality of tki . Since the function symbols are the same, we must i+1 have (ui1 , . . . , uin ) > (ui+1 1 , . . . , un ) lexicographically for each i. However the LPO restricted to all the terms uij is wellfounded, and therefore so is its lexicographic extension. We thus arrive at a contradiction. A rewrite order with the subterm property (s > t whenever t is a proper subterm of s) is said to be a simpliﬁcation order. Surprisingly, a simpliﬁcation order turns out to be automatically terminating and hence a reduction order (Dershowitz 1979); by appealing to this result, we could have avoided the direct proof that the LPO is terminating.Typically, one proves relations wellfounded by means of mappings into a wellfounded set like N. But provided the properties of a simpliﬁcation order hold, mappings into other sets like R can be useful.

4.7 Knuth–Bendix completion Suppose we know, perhaps via a suitable ordering as in the previous section, that a rewrite system R is terminating. This is a great help in deciding conﬂuence, because of Newman’s lemma (Theorem 4.9): →R is conﬂuent, and hence canonical, iﬀ it is locally conﬂuent. Analyzing local conﬂuence

272

Equality

can be much more tractable than a direct attack on full conﬂuence, because we only need to consider two individual rewrite steps s →R t1 and s →R t2 and decide whether t1 ↓R t2 . Consider, for example, the following axioms for groups, which can be seen to constitute a terminating rewrite set R using a suitable LPO: (x · y) · z = x · (y · z), 1 · x = x, i(x) · x = 1. We can rewrite the term (1 · x) · y in two diﬀerent ways, either by the ﬁrst equation to: (1 · x) · y →R 1 · (x · y) or by the second equation to: (1 · x) · y →R x · y. However, these are joinable, because we can make an additional rewrite to the ﬁrst result by the second equation and get 1 · (x · y) →R x · y. On the other hand, if we start from the term (i(x) · x) · y, we can rewrite with the ﬁrst equation to get (i(x) · x) · y →R i(x) · (x · y) or by the third to get (i(x) · x) · y →R 1 · y. The ﬁrst term is already in R-normal form, and the only further reduct of the second term is 1 · y → y, which is not the same. Consequently, the terms are not joinable so R is not (even locally) conﬂuent. This example suggests how, given any terminating rewrite set (with a ﬁnite number of equations) we can decide its local conﬂuence. We need to discover whether any starting terms s give rise via s →R t1 and s →R t2 to non-joinable reducts t1 and t2 . Because R is terminating, joinability of any given t1 and t2 can be shown to be decidable, since there are only ﬁnitely many possible terms to which each can be rewritten.† In fact, with conﬂuence as the overall aim, the situation is even simpler: we need only reduce t1 and t2 in some arbitrary way to normal forms t1 and t2 and compare them. If they are the same, this particular pair of terms is †

This follows at once from K¨ onig’s lemma, which states that a ﬁnitely-branching tree without an inﬁnite path has only ﬁnitely many nodes. This can be proved simply by wellfounded induction.

4.7 Knuth–Bendix completion

273

joinable, while if they are diﬀerent we can conclude at once that the whole rewrite set is non-conﬂuent (and hence not locally conﬂuent either) without examining any other possibilities.

Critical pairs At ﬁrst sight, this still doesn’t help much because we need to consider an arbitrary starting term s, of which there are inﬁnitely many. However it turns out that we can decide local conﬂuence by examining a ﬁnite number of critical situations where rewrites can interfere with each other and lead to the failure of local conﬂuence. When s →R t1 and s →R t2 we can distinguish three possibilities. • The two rewrites apply to disjoint subterms, for example (1 · x) · (i(y) · y) to x · (i(y) · y) and to (1 · x) · 1, • One rewrite applies to a term that is a (not necessarily proper) subterm of a term to which a variable is instantiated in the other rewrite. For example ((1 · x) · y) · z can be rewritten either to (1 · x) · (y · z) or to (x · y) · z, but the subterm 1 · x to which the second rewrite is applied is exactly the subterm to which x is instantiated in the ﬁrst rewrite (x · y) · z → x · (y · z). • One rewrite applies to a term that is inside the term to which the other rewrite applies, but is not at or below a variable position. Examples include the two rewrites to (1 · x) · y given near the start of this section. It is only the third situation, when the rewritten subterms are said to ‘overlap’,† that non-conﬂuence can occur, because in the ﬁrst two cases the subterm to which the other rewrite is applicable is not structurally changed by the chosen rewrite, though in the second case it may be removed or duplicated. Let us analyze this more precisely. Consider the application of two rewrite rules l1 = r1 and l2 = r2 to subterms l1 and l2 of a term s, replacing them with r1 and r2 respectively. Note that in general we need to consider the case where the two rewrites are identical or are applied to the same subterm. However, if the rewrites and the subterm are both identical, we evidently get the same results immediately so conﬂuence is not an issue. First, if the rewrites are applied to disjoint subterms of s = s[l1 , . . . , l2 ] to give t1 = s[r1 , . . . , l2 ] and t2 = s[l1 , . . . , r2 ], we may rejoin t1 and t2 by applying the other rewrite to the undisturbed subterm. Thus, in the ﬁrst case t1 and t2 are always joinable. †

The terminology is perhaps unfortunate. Despite the misleading impression the concrete syntax might give, two subterms are either disjoint or one is a subterm of the other.

274

Equality

Second, consider the case where one rewrite is applied below the variable position in another. Without loss of generality we will consider the case where l2 = r2 occurs inside l1 = r1 , the other being symmetric. That is, there is some variable x occurring in l1 [. . . , x, . . . , x, . . .] that is instantiated in l1 to some term u[l2 ]: l1 [. . . , u[l2 ], . . . , u[l2 ], . . .], and the other rewrite is applied to one of the subterms (indeed, there may be several of them) u[l2 ]. The result of applying l2 = r2 to one of these subterms, say the ﬁrst, is: l1 [. . . , u[r2 ], . . . , u[l2 ], . . .]. On the other hand, if we apply l1 = r1 , at the top level we get the following term, where the number of instances of u[l2 ] depends on how many times x occurs in r1 ; we choose three as a paradigmatic example: r1 [. . . , u[l2 ], . . . , u[l2 ], . . . , u[l2 ], . . .]. These two terms are always joinable. To the ﬁrst we can apply l2 = r2 repeatedly until all the terms u[l2 ] substituted for x are modiﬁed to u[r2 ], then apply l1 = r1 to the whole term. To the second, we can apply l2 = r2 to all the subterms u[l2 ] and the end result is the same, namely: r1 [. . . , u[r2 ], . . . , u[r2 ], . . . , u[r2 ], . . .]. We see here the advantages of only needing to prove local conﬂuence: we just make a single rewrite step from s to t1 and t2 , but are allowed arbitrarily many subsequent steps to rejoin them. Therefore, in order to decide conﬂuence, we only need to consider nonvariable ‘critical overlaps’, which as the initial examples showed may or may not turn out to be joinable. This is much more appealing, because there are only ﬁnitely many essentially diﬀerent ways that one left-hand side can be overlapped with another: one LHS cannot go below the variable position of the other. The points of overlap may depend on the instantiation, but we can always ﬁnd the most general instantiation that allows overlap at a given position, if any, via most general uniﬁers (MGUs), as we will now show. Deﬁnition 4.22 Suppose l1 = r1 and l2 = r2 are two rewrite rules (we assume the variables of the LHSs are disjoint, i.e. FVT(l1 )∩FVT(l2 ) = ∅). If l2 occurs at least once as a non-variable subterm of l1 = l1 [l2 , . . . , l2 , . . . , l2 ], and σ is a most general uniﬁer of l2 and l2 , then the pair of terms: (tsubst σ r1 , tsubst σ l1 [l2 , . . . , r2 , . . . , l2 ])

4.7 Knuth–Bendix completion

275

is said to be a critical pair of l1 = r1 and l2 = r2 . Critical pairs are intended to be ‘most general’ representatives of the ways in which two rewrites can overlap. Indeed, we have the following key properties. Lemma 4.23 Let l1 = r1 and l2 = r2 be two equations with no common variables. If s →l1 =r1 t1 and s →l2 =r2 t2 with t1 and t2 not joinable, then t1 and t2 diﬀer only in two subterms u1 and u2 (i.e. t1 = u[. . . , u1 , . . .] and t2 = u[. . . , u2 , . . .]) such that either (u1 , u2 ) or (u2 , u1 ) is an instance of a critical pair. Proof The above discussion makes clear that the two rewrites cannot be applied at disjoint positions, nor one at or below a variable subterm of another, for otherwise t1 and t2 would be joinable, contrary to hypothesis. Thus there is a nontrivial overlap in the rewrites; without loss of generality we will suppose that l2 = r2 rewrites inside l1 . Since the two equations have no variables in common, we can assume the same instantiation θ for both l1 and l2 in the rewrites. Thus, l1 has a subterm l2 that is uniﬁable with l2 , say l1 = l1 = l1 [. . . , l2 , . . .], with tsubst θ l2 = tsubst θ l2 . The two rewrites on the term tsubst θ l1 [. . . , l2 , . . .] result in u1 = tsubst θ r1 and u2 = tsubst θ l1 [. . . , r2 , . . .]. Since l2 and l2 are uniﬁable, they have a most general uniﬁer σ, and so (tsubst σ r1 , tsubst σ l1 [. . . , r2 , . . .]) is a critical pair. By the MGU property, (u1 , u2 ) is an instance of this critical pair. Theorem 4.24 A term rewriting system is locally conﬂuent iﬀ all its critical pairs are joinable. Proof If a system is locally conﬂuent, then since critical pairs (t1 , t2 ) all arise by applying two 1-step rewrites to some starting term s, i.e. s → t1 and s → t2 , it follows at once that t1 and t2 are joinable. Conversely, suppose all critical pairs are joinable. Now, given any term s, suppose s → u1 and s → u2 ; we will show that u1 and u2 are joinable. There are two equations (possibly the same) with s →l1 =r1 u1 and s →l2 =r2 u2 . Now, by the previous lemma, either u1 and u2 are joinable, or u1 and u2 diﬀer only in corresponding subterms v1 and v2 where (v1 , v2 ) is an instance of a critical pair (t1 , t2 ). By hypothesis t1 and t2 are joinable. Since reduction is closed under substitution (whenever s → t we also have tsubst θ s → tsubst θ t), v1 and v2 are joinable. Since rewriting allows arbitrary subterms, so are u1 and u2 .

276

Equality

Corollary 4.25 A terminating term rewriting system is conﬂuent iﬀ all its critical pairs are joinable. Proof Since the system is terminating, Newman’s lemma shows that conﬂuence and local conﬂuence are equivalent, so the result is immediate from the previous theorem. We now turn to implementation. As with resolution, we start with the tedious business of preparing for uniﬁcation by renaming variables. For simplicity, we replace the variables in two given formulas by schematic variables of the form x_n: let renamepair (fm1,fm2) = let fvs1 = fv fm1 and fvs2 = fv fm2 in let nms1,nms2 = chop_list(length fvs1) (map (fun n -> Var("x"^string_of_int n)) (0--(length fvs1 + length fvs2 - 1))) in subst (fpf fvs1 nms1) fm1,subst (fpf fvs2 nms2) fm2;;

Now we come to ﬁnding all possible overlaps. This is a little bit trickier than it looks, because we want to ensure that the MGU discovered at depth eventually gets applied to the whole term. The following function deﬁnes all ways of overlapping an equation l = r with another term tm, where the additional argument rfn is used to create each overall critical pair from an instantiation i. The function simply recursively traverses the term, trying to unify l with each non-variable subterm and applying rfn to any resulting instantiations to give the critical pair arising from that overlap. During recursive descent, the function rfn is itself modiﬁed correspondingly. For updating rfn across the list of arguments we deﬁne the auxiliary function listcases, which we will re-use later in a diﬀerent situation: let rec listcases fn rfn lis acc = match lis with [] -> acc | h::t -> fn h (fun i h’ -> rfn i (h’::t)) @ listcases fn (fun i t’ -> rfn i (h::t’)) t acc;; let rec overlaps (l,r) tm rfn = match tm with Fn(f,args) -> listcases (overlaps (l,r)) (fun i a -> rfn i (Fn(f,a))) args (try [rfn (fullunify [l,tm]) r] with Failure _ -> []) | Var x -> [];;

4.7 Knuth–Bendix completion

277

In order to present a nicer interface, we accept equational formulas rather than pairs of terms, and return critical pairs in the same way, by appropriately setting up the initial rfn: let crit1 (Atom(R("=",[l1;r1]))) (Atom(R("=",[l2;r2]))) = overlaps (l1,r1) l2 (fun i t -> subst i (mk_eq t r2));;

For the overall function, we need to rename the variables in the initial formula then ﬁnd all overlaps of the ﬁrst on the second and vice versa, unless the two input equations are identical, in which case only one needs to be done: let critical_pairs fma fmb = let fm1,fm2 = renamepair (fma,fmb) in if fma = fmb then crit1 fm1 fm2 else union (crit1 fm1 fm2) (crit1 fm2 fm1);;

As a simple example, which also illustrates how an equation can have non-trivial overlaps with itself, consider the following: # let eq = <> in critical_pairs eq eq;; - : fol formula list = [<>; <>]

Because of the fairly naive implementation, which doesn’t check the trivial case of overlapping identical equations on the same subterm, we get reﬂexive results. But the other critical pair (f (g(x0 )), g(f (x0 ))), arising from two rewrites to f (f (f (x0 ))), is non-trivial. Since both terms are in normal form, it shows that the initial 1-element rewrite set is not conﬂuent.

Completion We could now code up a function to decide if a terminating rewrite system is conﬂuent by ﬁnding all the critical pairs {(si , ti ) | 1 ≤ i ≤ n} between pairs of equations, and for each such (si , ti ) reducing the terms to some normal forms si and ti . The resulting system is conﬂuent iﬀ all corresponding pairs of terms si and ti are syntactically equal. However, rather than merely doing this, we can be more ambitious. If (si , ti ) is a normalized critical pair, then it is a logical consequence of the initial equations, since it results from repeated rewriting with those equations of a common starting term. Thus, we could add si = ti or ti = si as a new equation, retaining logical equivalence with the old axiom set. It may turn out that with this addition, the set will become conﬂuent. If not, we can repeat the process with remaining critical pairs and any arising from the

278

Equality

new equation. This idea is known as completion, and was ﬁrst systematically investigated by Knuth and Bendix (1970), who demonstrated that it can be a remarkably eﬀective technique for arriving at a canonical rewrite set for many interesting algebraic theories such as groups. It should be noted, however, that success of the procedure is not guaranteed; two things can go wrong. First, adding si = ti or ti = si may cause the resulting rewrite set to become nonterminating. To try and avoid this, we will keep a ﬁxed term ordering in mind, and try to orient the equation so that it respects the ordering, but it may turn out that neither direction respects the ordering. Second, although the new equation si = ti or ti = si trivially means that the originating critical pair (si , ti ) is now joinable in the new system, the new equation will in general create new critical pairs, with the existing equations and perhaps even with itself. It’s entirely possible that the creation of new critical pairs will ‘outrun’ their processing into new rules, so that the overall process never terminates. Despite these provisos, let us implement completion and see it in action. The central component is a procedure that takes an equation s = t, normalizes both s and t to give s and t , and attempts to orient these terms into an equation respecting the given ordering ord, failing if this is impossible. We assume ord is the reﬂexive form of ordering, so failure will not occur in the case where s and t are identical.

let normalize_and_orient ord eqs (Atom(R("=",[s;t]))) = let s’ = rewrite eqs s and t’ = rewrite eqs t in if ord s’ t’ then (s’,t’) else if ord t’ s’ then (t’,s’) else failwith "Can’t orient equation";;

The central completion procedure maintains a set of equations eqs and a set of pending critical pairs crits, and successively examines critical pairs, normalizing and orienting resulting equations and adding them to eqs. However, since the order in which we examine critical pairs is arbitrary, we try to avoid failing too hastily by storing equations that cannot as yet be oriented on a separate ‘deferred’ list def. Only at the end, by which time these troublesome equations may normalize to the point of joinability, or at least orientability, do we reconsider them, putting the ﬁrst orientable one back in the main list of critical pairs. The following auxiliary function is used to conditionally emit a report on current status, so that the user gets an idea what’s going on.

4.7 Knuth–Bendix completion

279

let status(eqs,def,crs) eqs0 = if eqs = eqs0 & (length crs) mod 1000 <> 0 then () else (print_string(string_of_int(length eqs)^" equations and "^ string_of_int(length crs)^" pending critical pairs + "^ string_of_int(length def)^" deferred"); print_newline());;

In the main completion loop, if there is a critical pair left to be examined, we attempt to normalize and orient it; if it is nontrivial (i.e. not of the form t = t) we add it to the equations, and augment the critical pairs (at the tail end) with new critical pairs from this new equation and itself plus those already present. If the orientation fails, then we just add the critical pair to the ‘deferred’ list. Finally, if there are no critical pairs left, we attempt to orient and deal with the deferred critical pairs, starting with any found to be orientable. If we are ultimately left with some that are non-orientable, we fail. Otherwise we terminate with success and return the new equations. let rec complete ord (eqs,def,crits) = match crits with (eq::ocrits) -> let trip = try let (s’,t’) = normalize_and_orient ord eqs eq in if s’ = t’ then (eqs,def,ocrits) else let eq’ = Atom(R("=",[s’;t’])) in let eqs’ = eq’::eqs in eqs’,def, ocrits @ itlist ((@) ** critical_pairs eq’) eqs’ [] with Failure _ -> (eqs,eq::def,ocrits) in status trip eqs; complete ord trip | _ -> if def = [] then eqs else let e = find (can (normalize_and_orient ord eqs)) def in complete ord (eqs,subtract def [e],[e]);;

The main loop maintains the invariant that all critical pairs from pairs of equations in eqs that are not joinable by eqs are contained in crits and def together, so when successful termination occurs, since crits and def are both empty, there are no non-joinable critical pairs, and so by Corollary 4.25 successful the system is conﬂuent. Moreover, since the original equations are included in the ﬁnal set and we have only added equational consequences of the original equations, they give a logically equivalent set. In order to get started, we just have to set crits to the critical pairs for the original equations and also def = [], so the invariant is true to start with. Before considering reﬁnements, let’s try a simple example: the axioms for groups. For the ordering we choose the lexicographic path ordering, with 1 having smallest precedence and the inverse operation the largest. The

280

Equality

intuitive reason for giving the inverse the highest precedence is that it will tend to cause the expansion (x · y)−1 = y −1 · x−1 to be applied (when it is eventually derived), leading to more opportunities for cancellation of multiple inverse operations. Indeed, if we try this out: # let eqs = [<<1 * x = x>>; <>; <<(x * y) * z = x * y * z>>];; ... # let ord = lpo_ge (weight ["1"; "*"; "i"]);; ... # let eqs’ = complete ord (eqs,[],unions(allpairs critical_pairs eqs eqs));;

the completion algorithm terminates successfully after a little computation, and the inverse property is one of the equations deduced as part of the ﬁnal complete set (ﬁrst in the list that follows): val eqs’ : fol formula list = [<>; <<x1 * i(x5 * x1) = i(x5)>>; <>; <<x1 * i(i(x4) * i(x3) * x1) = x3 * x4>>; <>; <>; <>; <>; <>; <<x1 * i(x2 * x1) * x2 = 1>>; <<x1 * i(i(x4 * x5) * x1) * x3 = x4 * x5 * x3>>; <>; <>; <<x1 * x2 * i(x1 * x2) = 1>>; <<x2 * x3 * i(x2 * x3) * x1 = x1>>; <>; <>; <>; <>; <>; <>; <>; <<x0 * i(x0) = 1>>; <<x0 * i(x0) * x3 = x3>>; <>; <<x1 * 1 = x1>>; <>; <>; <>; <<1 * x = x>>; <>; <<(x * y) * z = x * y * z>>]

And, indeed, this complete set gives an eﬀective canonical simpliﬁer for groups based on rewriting, e.g. # rewrite eqs’ <<|i(x * i(x)) * (i(i((y * z) * u) * y) * i(u))|>>;; - : term = <<|z|>>

4.7 Knuth–Bendix completion

281

Interreduction Although eqs’ does form a canonical rewrite set, it seems to be an unnecessarily large and redundant one. For example, the two sides of i(x3 · x5 ) · x0 = i(x5 ) · i(x3 ) · x0 are joinable from the simple inverse law noted above and the associative law. The fact that one equation is joinable by others may mean that the critical pair giving rise to it was processed before the equations that allow it to be joined were derived. Or, since we just blindly normalized them using an essentially arbitrary choice of rewrites at a time when the rewrite set was not conﬂuent, we may just have been unlucky and taken the wrong path even when there was a way to join them. Whatever their genesis, it’s natural to ﬁlter out afterwards equations whose two sides are joinable by others. We might even go further by simplifying both sides of each equation using all the others. Plausible as this looks, we need ﬁrst to satisfy ourselves that the result remains canonical. Indeed, reducing the LHS of an equation may cause it to become mis-oriented, or even non-orientable. Fortunately, however, it turns out that if the LHS of an equation in a canonical term rewriting system is reducible by the other equations, then both sides are automatically joinable by the other equations and it may be discarded. Thus (M´etivier 1983) we can simply: • discard any equation whose LHS is reducible by any of the others (excluding itself); • reduce the RHS of any equation with all the equations (including itself). Both these facts follow quite easily from the following general theorem about arbitrary reduction relations. Theorem 4.26 Let →R be a canonical (terminating and conﬂuent) reduction relation on a set X (this can be any relation, though the reader may care to think of it as a rewrite relation generated by R). Suppose another reduction relation →S has the following two properties: • for any x, y ∈ X, if x →S y then x →+ R y; • for any x, y ∈ X, if x →R y then there is a y ∈ X with x →S y . Then →S is also canonical and deﬁnes the same equivalence, i.e. two objects are joinable by →R iﬀ they are joinable by →S . Proof First we will prove the lemma that if y is in normal form w.r.t. →R , then for any x with x →∗R y we also have x →∗S y. Since →R is terminating, we can prove this by wellfounded induction on x, keeping y ﬁxed. Suppose x →∗R y. If x = y the result follows at once; otherwise there is a u ∈ X

282

Equality

with x →R u →∗R y. Using the hypotheses relating →R and →S , we deduce that there is some v ∈ X with x →S v, and that x →+ R v and so a fortiori x →∗R v. Since →R is conﬂuent, there is therefore a z ∈ X with y →∗R z and v →∗R z. Since y is in normal form w.r.t. →R we must in fact have z = y. Therefore we have v →∗R y. By the inductive hypothesis, v →∗S y and by deﬁnition of reﬂexive transitive closure we have x →∗S y as required. Because →S is a subrelation of the transitive closure →+ R , which is itself terminating because →R is, →S is terminating. To show that it is also conﬂuent, then, we need only prove local conﬂuence and appeal to Newman’s lemma. So suppose x →S y1 and x →S y2 . Then by hypothesis x →+ R y1 and x →+ y . Since → is conﬂuent, we have some z, which we can by R R 2 ∗ ∗ termination assume to be in normal form, such that y1 →R z and y2 →R z. But by the lemma established at the beginning of this proof, y1 →∗S z and y2 →∗S z, establishing local and hence full conﬂuence of →S . Finally, we need to show that for any x, y ∈ X, x ↓R y iﬀ x ↓S y. The right-to-left implication is almost immediate, because →S is contained in ∗ ∗ →+ R and therefore →S is contained in →R . For the other direction, if x ↓R y we can assume by termination that there is a z in normal form w.r.t. →R such that x →∗R z and y →∗R z. But now by the lemma at the start of the proof, we also have x →∗S z and y →∗S z. Corollary 4.27 If R is a canonical term rewriting system and (l = r) ∈ R, then if l is reducible by the other equations, the system R − {l = r} is also canonical and is logically equivalent. Proof We simply need to check that the conditions of Theorem 4.26 are satisﬁed, with →R generated by R and →S by S = R − {l = r}. It is immediate that if s →S t then s →R t, and hence s →+ R t, since S is a subset of R. Moreover, if s →R t then since l is reducible by →S , so is s. Corollary 4.28 If R is a canonical term rewriting system and (l = r) ∈ R, let S be the result of replacing the equation l = r in R with l = r where r is the R-normal form of r. Then S is also canonical and logically equivalent to R. Proof Again, we just need to check the conditions of Theorem 4.26. Suppose ﬁrst that s →S t. If this reduction uses the new rule l = r , then there is a transition s →R u →∗R t, where the ﬁrst step corresponds to the original rewrite l = r and the remaining steps to the normalization of r, with the appropriate subterm and instantiation. This exactly means that s →+ R t. On

4.7 Knuth–Bendix completion

283

the other hand, if the reduction does not use the new rule, then trivially s →R t and so s →+ R t. Now suppose s →R t. Either this reduction involves l = r, in which case it can also be reduced by l = r and hence by →S , or it does not, in which case s →S t anyway.

To implement this, we just transfer equations from the input list eqs to the output list dun as needed, reversing at the end to maintain the order: let rec interreduce dun eqs = match eqs with (Atom(R("=",[l;r])))::oeqs -> let dun’ = if rewrite (dun @ oeqs) l <> l then dun else mk_eq l (rewrite (dun @ eqs) r)::dun in interreduce dun’ oeqs | [] -> rev dun;;

Applying this to the complete set obtained above, we get a much more elegant and manageable result. In fact, it can be shown (M´etivier 1983) that the interreduced set is essentially unique once the reduction ordering is ﬁxed. # interreduce [] eqs’;; - : fol formula list = [<>; <>; <>; <<x0 * i(x0) = 1>>; <<x0 * i(x0) * x3 = x3>>; <<x1 * 1 = x1>>; <>; <<1 * x = x>>; <>; <<(x * y) * z = x * y * z>>]

Let us now set up a slightly more convenient interface to completion, so that input equations are oriented, the initial critical pairs are generated automatically, and interreduction is applied afterwards.

let complete_and_simplify wts eqs = let ord = lpo_ge (weight wts) in let eqs’ = map (fun e -> let l,r = normalize_and_orient ord [] e in mk_eq l r) eqs in (interreduce [] ** complete ord) (eqs’,[],unions(allpairs critical_pairs eqs’ eqs’));;

284

Equality

Instead of waiting till the end of the completion process to perform interreduction, it’s usually signiﬁcantly more eﬃcient to simplify and perhaps delete or reorient equations during the completion process. Nevertheless, justifying such optimizations is signiﬁcantly more complicated, particularly in connection with simpliﬁcation of existing equations on the left (Huet 1981; Baader and Nipkow 1998). And our simple algorithm is already enough to handle most of the examples from the original paper by Knuth and Bendix (1970). One of the more surprising is the following single-axiom system. If one asserts i(x) · (x · y) = y, it also follows that x · (i(x) · y) = y, and vice versa, without any other assumptions such as associativity. Knuth and Bendix remark that ‘this fact can be used to simplify several proofs which appear in the literature, for example in the algebraic structures associated with projective geometry’. # complete_and_simplify ["1"; "*"; "i"] [<>];; 2 equations and 4 pending critical pairs + 3 equations and 9 pending critical pairs + 3 equations and 0 pending critical pairs + - : fol formula list = [<<x0 * i(x0) * x3 = x3>>; <>]

0 deferred 0 deferred 0 deferred = x0 * x1>>;

Knuth and Bendix also demonstrate in their paper some techniques for extending the approach to non-equational axioms. Consider the quite typical ‘cancellation’ property ∀x y z. x · y = x · z ⇒ y = z. Although this isn’t an equation, it is logically equivalent to ∀x z. ∃w. ∀y. z = x · y ⇒ w = y, as we can conﬁrm automatically: # (meson ** equalitize) <<(forall x y z. x * y = x * z ==> y = z) <=> (forall x z. exists w. forall y. z = x * y ==> w = y)>>;; ... - : int list = [5; 4]

If we Skolemize this equivalent form we get ∀x y z. z = x · y ⇒ f (x, z) = y, which is logically equivalent to ∀x y. f (x, x · y) = y, a purely equational property. Thus we can introduce a new operator f and an axiom ∀x y. f (x, x · y) = y, and by the conservativity property of Skolemization (see Section 3.6) anything we can prove that does not involve f must still be true in the original system. Similarly, the language can sometimes be expanded to accommodate otherwise non-orientable rules. For example, if an equation g(w, x, y) = g(w, x, z) is derived, this is an indication that the third argument is irrelevant and we can replace g with a binary function.

4.7 Knuth–Bendix completion

285

Dealing with commutativity Despite tricks for extending the scope of completion, certain standard algebraic axioms give rise to diﬃcult problems. In particular the commutativity law x · y = y · x cannot be oriented according to any rewrite order, since any such order has to be closed under the instantiation x → y, y → x. There are several approaches to dealing with commutativity, either on its own or in conjunction with other properties such as associativity. The most sophisticated is to change the notions of matching and uniﬁcation to treat as equal all associative and commutative rearrangements of the same term. This process is usually called associative–commutative (AC) uniﬁcation or matching. There are algorithms for these operations, but they are a bit more complicated than regular uniﬁcation; indeed the ﬁrst full AC-uniﬁcation algorithm (Stickel 1981) was only proved to terminate some years after it was ﬁrst introduced (Fages 1984). Moreover, in contrast to simple uniﬁcation, single MGUs may not exist, though there are always ﬁnitely many; even in matching, for example, 1 · (x · y) can be matched to (2 · 1) · 3 either by x → 2, y → 3 or x → 3, y → 2, neither of which is an instance of the other. The idea of AC-uniﬁcation can be generalized from uniﬁcation modulo associative and commutative laws to uniﬁcation modulo any set of equational axioms (regular uniﬁcation being the special case of the empty set), and this was actually discussed by Plotkin (1972) some years before algorithms for speciﬁc cases like AC were developed. In the general case, however, uniﬁcation may be undecidable and there may not even be an inﬁnite set of most general uniﬁers (Fages and Huet 1986). Nevertheless, this is an important technique, playing a role in some of the most impressive achievements in automated equational reasoning such as the solution by McCune (1997) of the Robbins conjecture. A simpler alternative is to re-examine a key idea motivating the deﬁnition of rewrite orderings, that we just need to orient an equation l = r once and for all rather than separately considering each individual instance l = r . Appealing as this is, we can consider dropping it and constraining rewriting by an ordering on the instances. This idea seems to have ﬁrst been used by Boyer and Moore (1977), who used a system like the following to implement associative–commutative normalization for an operator ‘+’: x + y = y + x, x + (y + z) = y + (x + z), (x + y) + z = x + (y + z).

286

Equality

Applying these rewrites subject to a suitable ordering constraint on the instances will normalize terms to be right-associated, and also ordered via a kind of ‘bubblesort’, e.g. (1 + 4) + (3 + 2) → 1 + (4 + (3 + 2)) → 1 + (3 + (4 + 2)) → 1 + (3 + (2 + 4)) → 1 + (2 + (3 + 4)). Assuming that the ordering we use is wellfounded, termination is assured, so to show conﬂuence we just need to demonstrate local conﬂuence. For many common orderings such as LPO, testing local conﬂuence with ordering constraints on instances is decidable (Comon, Narendran, Nieuwenhuis and Rusinowitch 1998). In general it can still be diﬃcult, though in typical cases a fairly straightforward approach based on analyzing all the possible orderings of the subterms in the instances works well; see Exercise 4.15 for the automation of such case analysis and checking. Martin and Nipkow (1990) demonstrate conﬂuence of ordered rewrite systems for many important systems of algebraic axioms using such techniques.

Unfailing completion Ordered rewriting can also be used to generalize completion to unfailing completion (Bachmair, Dershowitz and Plaisted 1989), which will never fail owing to non-orientable equations, but rather will use them with ordered rewriting based on some term ordering, typically an LPO. Moreover, if implemented appropriately, one can show that even if it never ﬁnds a canonical rewrite system, it will eventually ﬁnd a rewrite system capable of proving s = t by rewriting whenever s = t follows from the starting axioms. Thus, it can form a complete proof procedure for equational logic. This shift in emphasis from ﬁnding canonical systems to proving equations is quite natural. After all, if we try to complete the axioms for groups where x2 = 1, then we do not meet with success: complete_and_simplify ["1"; "*"; "i"] [<<(x * y) * z = x * (y * z)>>; <<1 * x = x>>; <<x * 1 = x>>; <<x * x = 1>>];;

If we trace through successive loops of the completion procedure (using #trace complete;; before execution), we ﬁnd that the critical pair x2 ·x0 = x0 · x2 is generated, and subsequently put in the deferred list since it is nonorientable. This immediately dooms the standard completion procedure to failure or nontermination, since this equation will never be oriented or rewritten away. Yet from the point of view of ﬁrst-order theorem proving, we have

4.8 Equality elimination

287

rapidly drawn an interesting conclusion (such a group must be commutative) and so this should be considered a success rather than a failure.

4.8 Equality elimination Many of the ideas from equational logic, such as orienting rewrites into a favoured direction and considering only proper overlaps, can be generalized to full ﬁrst-order logic. However, the theoretical justiﬁcation becomes significantly more diﬃcult, and we will not dwell on it. However, we will consider a few approaches to equality handling other than just adding the equality axioms in a preprocessing step. In this section, we brieﬂy consider avoiding equality altogether, then examine a more sophisticated way of preprocessing the input formulas to incorporate the necessary equality properties.

Predicate formulations One technique that was popular for encoding group theory etc. in the early days of automated reasoning was to use, rather than a 2-argument function symbol, a 3-argument predicate symbol, the idea being that P (x, y, z) stands for x · y = z. Now we can render the axioms of identity and inverse as ∀x. P (1, x, x) and ∀x. P (i(x), x, 1). By introducing auxiliary variables for subexpressions, we can express the associative law, e.g. as

∀u, v, w, x, y, z. P (x, y, u) ∧ P (y, z, w) ⇒ (P (x, w, v) ⇔ P (u, z, v)). Admittedly, there are several important properties of the group operation that aren’t captured by the three axioms for P so far, e.g. ∀x y.∃!z.P (x, y, z). Nevertheless, it turns out that some properties of groups can still be derived just from these properties. The problem of proving that a group where x2 = 1 is abelian (x · y = y · x) works particularly nicely, because we don’t need to postulate an inverse operation, each element being its own inverse: # meson <<(forall x. P(1,x,x)) /\ (forall x. P(x,x,1)) /\ (forall u v w x y z. P(x,y,u) /\ P(y,z,w) ==> (P(x,w,v) <=> P(u,z,v))) ==> forall a b c. P(a,b,c) ==> P(b,a,c)>>;; ... - : int list = [13]

288

Equality

Eﬀective though this method can be, and interesting as it is to see how weaker axioms suﬃce for many purposes, it has a rather ad hoc ﬂavour, and obliges us to code up the natural notions in a rather peculiar fashion. Indeed, it was mainly popular before more eﬀective equality reasoning methods had been developed. Nevertheless, the idea of breaking down terms like (x · y) · z by the introduction of auxiliary variables will reappear in a slightly diﬀerent form below. Equivalence elimination Our main interest is in the equality relation, but we’ll consider equality-like properties of an arbitrary binary relation R in what follows. Besides giving greater generality, it might actually be clearer since the notation won’t tempt the reader to make special assumptions about equality. Note that in contrast to most of this chapter, we’re concerned with arbitrary interpretations here, not necessarily normal ones. Consider the axiom ‘Equiv’ asserting that a binary relation R is an equivalence relation, i.e. is reﬂexive, symmetric and transitive. (∀x. R(x, x)) ∧ (∀x y. R(x, y) ⇒ R(y, x)) ∧ (∀x y z. R(x, y) ∧ R(y, z) ⇒ R(x, z)). This is equivalent to simply ∀x y. R(x, y) ⇔ (∀z. R(x, z) ⇔ R(y, z)); the reader can verify this, or we can leave it to the machine: # meson <<(forall x. R(x,x)) /\ (forall x y. R(x,y) ==> R(y,x)) /\ (forall x y z. R(x,y) /\ R(y,z) ==> R(x,z)) <=> (forall x y. R(x,y) <=> (forall z. R(x,z) <=> R(y,z)))>>;; ... - : int list = [4; 3; 9; 3; 2; 7]

Similarly, an assertion of reﬂexivity and transitivity (without symmetry) is equivalent to ∀x y. R(x, y) ⇔ (∀z. R(y, z) ⇒ R(x, z)), while symmetry of R alone is equivalent to ∀x y.R(x, y) ⇔ R(x, y)∧R(y, x). These equivalences are all of the form ∀x y. R(x, y) ⇔ R∗ [x, y], so we can think of them as rules for replacing each instance of R(s, t) in a formula by R∗ [s, t]. After making such replacements, we will prove shortly that the corresponding axioms about R are no longer needed. Consider the case of full equivalence; the reﬂexivity–transitivity and symmetry cases work

4.8 Equality elimination

289

similarly. Given an atomic formula R(s, t), write R∗ [s, t] for ∀w. R(s, w) ⇔ R(t, w) where w ∈ FV(s) ∪ FV(t). Theorem 4.29 P ∧ Equiv is satisﬁable iﬀ the formula P ∗ that results from replacing each subformula R(s, t) in P with R∗ [s, t] is satisﬁable. Proof We noted above that Equiv ⇔ (∀x y. R(x, y) ⇔ R∗ [x, y]) and so for any terms s and t we have Equiv ⇒ (R(s, t) ⇔ R∗ [s, t]). Hence Equiv ∧ P ⇔ Equiv ∧ P ∗ . This means that if Equiv ∧ P is satisﬁable, so is Equiv ∧ P ∗ and a fortiori P ∗ . Note that this works equally well if we choose only to replace some formulas R(s, t) in P with R∗ [s, t], not necessarily all of them. Now suppose that P ∗ is satisﬁable, say in an interpretation M with domain D where R is interpreted by RM . Deﬁne a new interpretation N that is the same except that RN (a, b) is deﬁned to hold precisely when RM (a, c) and RM (b, c) are equivalent for all c ∈ D. By design, holds N v (R(s, t)) = holds M v (R∗ [s, t]), so since P ∗ holds in M , P holds in N . By construction RN is an equivalence relation, so Equiv also holds in N . This approach is generalized by Ohlbach, Gabbay and Plaisted (1994) to a large class of ‘killer transformations’, so called because they ‘kill’ certain axioms. The proofs here of the key equisatisﬁability properties were suggested by Rob Arthan.

Brand’s S- and T-modiﬁcations An earlier equality elimination method (Brand 1975) similarly eliminates symmetry and transitivity, but keeps the reﬂexivity axiom ∀x. R(x, x). The advantage of doing this is that one may then perform the expansive transformation only on positive occurrences of R(s, t), while negative occurrences ¬R(u, v) can be left alone. We can adapt the proof of Theorem 4.29 as follows. Assume the formula P [. . . , R(s, t), . . . , ¬R(u, v), . . .] whose satisﬁability is at issue is in NNF, so we can distinguish positive and negative occurrences simply by whether they are directly covered by a negation operation. All are treated in the way indicated for the paradigmatic examples R(s, t) and ¬R(u, v). Write as before P ∗ = P [. . . , R∗ [s, t], . . . , ¬R∗ [u, v], . . .] but also P = P [. . . , R∗ [s, t], . . . , ¬R(u, v), . . .].

290

Equality

The ﬁrst part of the proof works equally well to show that if Equiv ∧ P is satisﬁable, so is Equiv ∧ P and therefore (∀x. R(x, x)) ∧ P . Conversely, (∀x. R(x, x)) ⇒ R∗ [u, v] ⇒ R(u, v), so (∀x. R(x, x)) ⇒ ¬R(u, v) ⇒ ¬R∗ [u, v] and therefore (∀x.R(x, x))∧P ⇒ (∀x.R(x, x))∧P ∗ . Thus if (∀x.R(x, x))∧P is satisﬁable, so is P ∗ and, by the same proof as before, so is P . Restricted to the special case of a formula in clausal form with R being the equality relation, these ways of eliminating symmetry and transitivity give exactly Brand’s S-modiﬁcation and T -modiﬁcation respectively. Doing these successively works out the same as doing equivalence-elimination once and for all, but we’ll keep them separate both to emphasize the correspondence with Brand’s work and to modularize the implementation. In the clausal context we can also recognize positivity or negativity trivially. If we keep the same predicate symbol, namely =, then we can just leave negative literals untouched in each case, and only modify positive equations. The S-transformation on a clause with n positive equations (written at the beginning for simplicity): s1 = t1 ∨ · · · ∨ sn = tn ∨ C leads to (s1 = t1 ∧ t1 = s1 ) ∨ · · · ∨ (sn = tn ∧ tn = sn ) ∨ C. This is no longer in clausal form, but we can redistribute and arrive at 2n resulting clauses: s1 = t1 ∨ · · · ∨ sn−1 = tn−1 ∨ sn = tn ∨ C, s1 = t1 ∨ · · · ∨ sn−1 = tn−1 ∨ tn = sn ∨ C, s1 = t1 ∨ · · · ∨ tn−1 = sn−1 ∨ sn = tn ∨ C, s1 = t1 ∨ · · · ∨ tn−1 = sn−1 ∨ tn = sn ∨ C, ··· t1 = s1 ∨ · · · ∨ tn−1 = sn−1 ∨ tn = sn ∨ C, which essentially cover all possible combinations of forward and backward equations in the original clause. Admittedly, if n is large, this exponential blowup in the number of clauses is not very appealing, but it can be made manageable using a few extra tricks (see Exercise 4.4). Here is the implementation on a clause represented as a list of literals:

4.8 Equality elimination

291

let rec modify_S cl = try let (s,t) = tryfind dest_eq cl in let eq1 = mk_eq s t and eq2 = mk_eq t s in let sub = modify_S (subtract cl [eq1]) in map (insert eq1) sub @ map (insert eq2) sub with Failure _ -> [cl];;

For the T -modiﬁcation, we need to replace each equation si = ti in a clause: s1 = t1 ∨ · · · ∨ sn = tn ∨ C as follows: (∀w. t1 = w ⇒ s1 = w) ∨ · · · ∨ (∀w. tn = w ⇒ sn = w) ∨ C. We can pull out the universal quantiﬁers to retain clausal form, but we then need to use distinct variable names wi instead of a single w in each equation. We also transform t1 = w ⇒ s1 = w into ¬(ti = w) ∨ si = w to return to clausal form, resulting in: ¬(t1 = w1 ) ∨ s1 = w1 ∨ · · · ∨ ¬(tn = wn ) ∨ sn = wn ∨ C. We can implement this directly, just running through the literals successively, recursively transforming the tail and picking a new variable w that is neither in the transformed tail nor the unmodiﬁed literal being considered: let rec modify_T cl = match cl with (Atom(R("=",[s;t])) as eq)::ps -> let ps’ = modify_T ps in let w = Var(variant "w" (itlist (union ** fv) ps’ (fv eq))) in Not(mk_eq t w)::(mk_eq s w)::ps’ | p::ps -> p::(modify_T ps) | [] -> [];;

Brand’s E-modiﬁcation We have shown how the equivalence axioms can be eliminated by incorporating new structure into the other formulas. We now proceed to do the same with the congruence axioms ∀x1 · · · xn y1 · · · yn . x1 = y1 ∧ · · · ∧ xn = yn ⇒ f (x1 , . . . , xn ) = f (y1 , . . . , yn ) and ∀x1 · · · xn y1 · · · yn . x1 = y1 ∧ · · · ∧ xn = yn ⇒ P (x1 , . . . , xn ) ⇒ P (y1 , . . . , yn )

292

Equality

for the function symbols f and predicates P appearing in the initial formulas. We will actually perform this transformation ﬁrst, and so we can assume the equivalence axioms. The basic idea is to repeatedly pull out non-variable immediate subterms t of function and predicate symbols (other than equality) using the following, which are clearly equivalences in the presence of the congruence and reﬂexivity axioms: f (. . . , t, . . .) = s ⇔ ∀w. t = w ⇒ f (. . . , w, . . .) = s, s = f (. . . , t, . . .) ⇔ ∀w. t = w ⇒ s = f (. . . , w, . . .), P (. . . , t, . . .) ⇔ ∀w. t = w ⇒ P (. . . , w, . . .).

We can repeat this transformation until function symbols (including constants) only appear as arguments to the equality predicate, not other predicates nor other functions. A formula with this property is said to be ﬂat and we will describe the transformation as ﬂattening. For example, we might transform the associative law as follows, assuming all free variables to be implicitly universally quantiﬁed: (x · y) · z = x · (y · z), x · y = w1 ⇒ w1 · z = x · (y · z), x · y = w1 ∧ y · z = w2 ⇒ w1 · z = x · w2 . It turns out that for ﬂat quantiﬁer-free formulas, the congruence axioms are not necessary, in the following precise sense. Theorem 4.30 Suppose a quantiﬁer-free formula P is ﬂat, E asserts the equivalence properties of equality and C is the collection of congruences for the functions and predicates appearing in P . Then P ∧ E ∧ C is satisﬁable iﬀ P ∧ E is. Proof One way is immediate. So suppose P ∧ E is satisﬁable; we will show that P ∧ E ∧ C is too. If M is a model of P ∧ E with domain D, then since it is a fortiori a model of E, the interpretation =M of equality is an equivalence relation. For any a ∈ D, let a be some ﬁxed canonical representative of the equivalence class [a]=M . Thus, for any a, b ∈ D we have =M (a, b) iﬀ a = b. We now deﬁne a new model M with the same domain D interpreting the function symbols as follows: fM (a1 , . . . , an ) = fM (a1 , . . . , an ),

4.8 Equality elimination

293

equality in the same way, =M , and the other predicate symbols like this: PM (a1 , . . . , an ) = PM (a1 , . . . , an ). We claim that M is a model of P ∧ E ∧ C. It is a model of E since we have not changed the interpretation of the equality symbol nor the domain, and no function symbols or other predicates appear in E. To see that it is also a model of C, note that the function congruence axiom x1 = y1 ∧ · · · ∧ xn = yn ⇒ f (x1 , . . . , xn ) = f (y1 , . . . , yn ) holds in M under a valuation mapping each xi → ai and yi → bi precisely if whenever ai =M bi for 1 ≤ i ≤ n, then fM (a1 , . . . , an ) = fM (b1 , . . . , bn ). But ai = bi implies, as noted above, that ai = bi , and since by deﬁnition fM (a1 , . . . , an ) = fM (a1 , . . . , an ) and similarly for bi , the result follows. The predicate congruences hold for similar reasons. All that remains is to show that M is a model of P as well, and this is where the ﬂatness of P is critical. Let v be any valuation, and deﬁne v(x) = v(x). We claim that for any ﬂat atomic formula p we have holds M v p = holds M v p. Note ﬁrst that for each term consisting of a function applied to (not necessarily distinct) variables we have termval M v (f (x1 , . . . , xn )) = fM (termval M v x1 , . . . , termval M v xn ) = fM (v(x1 ), . . . , v(xn )) = fM (v(x1 ), . . . , v(xn )) = fM (v(x1 ), . . . , v(xn )) = fM (termval M v x1 , . . . , termval M v xn ) = termval M v (f (x1 , . . . , xn )). The same result does not hold for variables alone, but at least the two values termval M v x = v(x) and termval M v x = v(x) = v(x) are equivalent under =M by deﬁnition. Thus if t is a ‘ﬂat term’, either a variable or function applied to variables, we have =M (termval M v t, termval M v t).

294

Equality

Consequently, since =M is an equivalence relation we can see that for an equation between two such terms: holds M v (s = t) = =M (termval M v s, termval M v t) = =M (termval M v s, termval M v t) = holds M v (s = t). For other predicate symbols applied to variables, we similarly have: holds M v (P (x1 , . . . , xn )) (termval M v x1 , . . . , termval M v xn )) = PM

(v(x1 ), . . . , v(xn )) = PM

= PM (v(x1 ), . . . , v(xn )) = PM (v(x1 ), . . . , v(xn )) = PM (termval M v x1 , . . . , termval M v xn ) = holds M v (P (x1 , . . . , xn )). It now follows by induction on the structure of P that we can extend the basic result to the whole formula (which is quantiﬁer-free by hypothesis): holds M v P = holds M v P However, since M is a model of P , the RHS is simply ‘true’, and therefore so is the left. But v was arbitrary, and therefore the theorem is proved. Brand’s ‘E-modiﬁcation’ applies the ﬂattening transformation to clauses, adding new negative literals ¬(t = wi ) for the extra variable deﬁnitions included. It follows that if we perform E-modiﬁcation and then S- and T modiﬁcations, the resulting set of clauses plus the reﬂexive law x = x has a model iﬀ the original formula has a normal model. We have thus succeeded in transforming the input clauses to eliminate the need for any equality axioms besides reﬂexivity.

Implementation First we deﬁne functions to identify non-variables: let is_nonvar = function (Var x) -> false | _ -> true;;

and hence ﬁnd a nested non-variable subterm where possible:

4.8 Equality elimination

295

let find_nestnonvar tm = match tm with Var x -> failwith "findnvsubt" | Fn(f,args) -> find is_nonvar args;;

Now we can identify a non-variable subterm that we want to pull out in ﬂattening; in the case of equality this is a nested non-variable subterm, while for the other predicate symbols it is any non-variable subterm: let rec find_nvsubterm fm = match fm with Atom(R("=",[s;t])) -> tryfind find_nestnonvar [s;t] | Atom(R(p,args)) -> find is_nonvar args | Not p -> find_nvsubterm p;;

Having found such a non-variable subterm, we want to replace it with a new variable. We don’t have a general function to replace subterms (tsubst and subst only replace variables), so we deﬁne one, ﬁrst for terms: let rec replacet rfn tm = try apply rfn tm with Failure _ -> match tm with Fn(f,args) -> Fn(f,map (replacet rfn) args) | _ -> tm;;

and then for other formulas (here we only care about literals, and can treat quantiﬁed formulas without regard to variable capture): let replace rfn = onformula (replacet rfn);;

To E-modify a clause, we try to ﬁnd a nested non-variable subterm; if we fail we are already done, and otherwise we replace that term with a fresh variable w, add the new disjunct ¬(t = w) and call recursively: let rec emodify fvs cls = try let t = tryfind find_nvsubterm cls in let w = variant "w" fvs in let cls’ = map (replace (t |=> Var w)) cls in emodify (w::fvs) (Not(mk_eq t (Var w))::cls’) with Failure _ -> cls;;

The fvs parameter tracks the free variables in the clause so far, so we just need to set its initial value: let modify_E cls = emodify (itlist (union ** fv) cls []) cls;;

296

Equality

The overall Brand transformation now applies E-modiﬁcation, then Smodiﬁcation and T -modiﬁcation, then ﬁnally includes the reﬂexive clause x = x: let brand cls = let cls1 = map modify_E cls in let cls2 = itlist (union ** modify_S) cls1 [] in [mk_eq (Var "x") (Var "x")]::(map modify_T cls2);;

We insert Brand’s transformation into MESON’s clausal framework to give bmeson: let bpuremeson fm = let cls = brand(simpcnf(specialize(pnf fm))) in let rules = itlist ((@) ** contrapositives) cls [] in deepen (fun n -> mexpand rules [] False (fun x -> x) (undefined,n,0); n) 0;; let bmeson fm = let fm1 = askolemize(Not(generalize fm)) in map (bpuremeson ** list_conj) (simpdnf fm1);;

For easy comparison, we’ll deﬁne a similar version of MESON that just uses the equality axioms. let emeson fm = meson (equalitize fm);;

The relative performance of these two methods depends on the application. For example, on the wishnu problem from the end of Section 4.1, Brand’s transformation is substantially slower than just adding the equality axioms. But on our group theory examples, Brand’s transformation is much better, e.g. only a few minutes here while emeson takes far longer: # bmeson <<(forall x y z. x * (y * z) = (x * y) * z) /\ (forall x. e * x = x) /\ (forall x. i(x) * x = e) ==> forall x. x * i(x) = e>>;; - : int list = [19]

Since Brand’s original work, several variant methods have been proposed that are often more eﬃcient. Moser and Steinbach (1997) suggest a version that avoids equations with variables on their left-hand sides, which tends to reduce the number of possible uniﬁcations. However, this comes at the cost of needing to split negative equations as well as positive ones in the analogue of the T -modiﬁcation. A further reﬁnement based on imposing term ordering constraints was proved complete by Bachmair, Ganzinger and

4.9 Paramodulation

297

Voronkov (1997) and shown to be substantially more eﬃcient on a number of examples.

4.9 Paramodulation So far we have handled equality by using standard ﬁrst-order proof methods on modiﬁed formulas, resulting either from adding equality axioms or using the more sophisticated modiﬁcation methods in the previous section. Preprocessing has several advantages: we can re-use proof procedures intended for pure ﬁrst-order logic without internal modiﬁcation, and can also transfer results like compactness to the equality case without new theoretical diﬃculties. However, it is also possible to augment one of the standard ﬁrst-order theorem proving techniques with additional rules for equality, rather than modifying the input formulas themselves. It seems more straightforward to add new inference rules in the context of bottom-up procedures like resolution, though some authors have also introduced special equality-handling methods for top-down methods such as tableaux (Fitting 1990), model elimination (Moser, Lynch and Steinbach 1995), model evolution (Baumgartner and Tinelli 2005) and others. The ﬁrst equality-based inference rule to be introduced was demodulation (Wos, Robinson, Carson and Shalla 1967), which uses unit equality clauses like x + 0 = x as rewrite rules to simplify other clauses. The name arises because it is typically used to remove ‘modulations’ of essentially the same fact, e.g. P (x), P (0 + x), P (x − 0) etc. Although useful in practice, it is not complete. However, the more general rule of paramodulation introduced a little later (G. Robinson and Wos 1969) gives, when used together with the standard resolution rule, a theoretically complete method of handling equality. Even in its unrestricted initial form it was often found to be far more eﬀective than adding equality axioms, and it has subsequently been extensively reﬁned, in particular by introducing ordering notions from term . rewriting. Paramodulation is the following inference rule, where s = t may be either s = t or t = s: . C ∨ s = t D ∨ P [s ] Paramodulation, subst σ (C ∨ D ∨ P [t]) where σ is a MGU of s and the indicated term instance s . Paramodulation generalizes rewriting in several respects that make it look more like the resolution rule itself: we can use equations that occur disjoined with additional literals C to rewrite with, the rewrite may be applied in either direction, and the identiﬁcation of the terms s and s is done by full uniﬁcation, not

298

Equality

just matching. It’s relatively easy to see that the rule is sound, i.e that the conclusion holds in any normal model in which the hypotheses do. The issue of its refutation completeness as a method of equality handling is subtler. Refutation completeness of paramodulation It is not the case that if a set of clauses has no normal model then it can be refuted by resolution plus paramodulation, as the example of {¬(x = x)} shows. This suggests that, as with Brand’s method, we may not need all the equality axioms but we do at least need to add reﬂexivity to the input clauses. In fact, we will demonstrate refutation completeness on the stronger assumption that we also add all the functional reﬂexive axioms of the form: f (x1 , . . . , xn ) = f (x1 , . . . , xn ), one for each function symbol f appearing in the input clauses. (This looks strange, but the reason will become clearer below.) Our proof of refutation completeness rests on the fact that a hyperresolution proof assuming equality axioms can be simulated by resolution and paramodulation with the functional reﬂexive axioms. In order to simplify the proof, we will adopt instead of the usual congruence rules the 1-instance variants: ¬(x = x ) ∨ f (x1 , . . . , xi−1 , x, xi+1 , . . . , xn ) = f (x1 , . . . , xi−1 , x , xi+1 , . . . , xn ) for each n-ary function f in the clauses S and for each 1 ≤ i ≤ n, and similarly: ¬(x = x )∨¬P (x1 , . . . , xi−1 , x, xi+1 , . . . , xn )∨P (x1 , . . . , xi−1 , x , xi+1 , . . . , xn ) for each n-ary predicate P in the clauses S and for each 1 ≤ i ≤ n, together with the usual combined symmetry–transitivity rule: ¬(x = y) ∨ ¬(x = z) ∨ (y = z) and simple reﬂexivity x = x. We refer to these collectively as eqaxioms (S). They are logically equivalent to eqaxioms(S), since we can derive the multiple-instance congruence rules by repeated use of the one-instance rule put together by transitivity, while the converse follows by reﬂexivity. We let R be simple reﬂexivity together with the functional reﬂexive axioms, one for each function symbol in S: f (x1 , . . . , xn ) = f (x1 , . . . , xn ).

4.9 Paramodulation

299

Theorem 4.31 If S has no normal model, then S ∪ R has a refutation by resolution and paramodulation. Proof Since S has no normal model, S ∪ eqaxioms (S) is unsatisﬁable (by the above remarks and Theorem 4.1). It therefore has a refutation by positive hyperresolution (see Section 3.13). We will show that all conclusions obtainable by positive hyperresolution from S ∪ eqaxioms (S) can also be obtained by resolution and paramodulation from S ∪ R. We will establish this by induction on the steps of a hyperresolution proof. We need only consider hyperresolution steps where at least one input clause is taken from the set R = eqaxioms (S) − R, since otherwise the conclusion holds at once. And since there are no all-positive clauses in R , we must by the deﬁnition of positive hyperresolution have exactly one input clause from R . If this input clause is a function-congruence axiom, then the resolution must be of the following form. (In such cases, we can assume that only the left-hand hypothesis is instantiated, in this case with a uniﬁer x → s and x → t, because x and x are just variables.) ¬(x = x ) ∨ f (. . . , x, . . .) = f (. . . , x , . . .) C ∨ s = t C ∨ f (. . . , s, . . .) = f (. . . , t, . . .) This can be simulated by a paramodulation inference using the functional reﬂexive axiom: f (. . . , x, . . .) = f (. . . , x, . . .)C ∨ s = t . C ∨ f (. . . , s, . . .) = f (. . . , t, . . .) Now, if the input is a predicate-congruence axiom, then any hyperresolution consisting of two successive positive resolution steps (in the order shown here or vice versa): ¬(x = x ) ∨ ¬P (. . . , x, . . .) ∨ P (. . . , x , . . .) C ∨ s = t C ∨ ¬P (. . . , s, . . .) ∨ P (. . . , t, . . .) D ∨ P (. . . , s , . . .) , subst σ (C ∨ D ∨ P (. . . , t, . . .)) where σ is an MGU of s and s , can be simulated directly by a single paramodulation: C ∨ s = t D ∨ P (. . . , s , . . .)) , subst σ(C ∨ D ∨ P (. . . , t, . . .))

300

Equality

Finally, a hyperresolution with the symmetry–transitivity axiom, again either in the order shown here or vice versa: ¬(x = y) ∨ ¬(x = z) ∨ (y = z) C ∨ s = t C ∨ ¬(s = z) ∨ (t = z) D ∨ s = t , subst σ (C ∨ D ∨ t = t ) with σ a MGU of s and s , can be simulated by a single paramodulation as follows: C ∨ s = t D ∨ s = t . subst σ (C ∨ D ∨ t = t )

This proof exploits the fact that many conclusions can be derived by paramodulation with the functional reﬂexive axioms. But for exactly the same reason, it’s not clear that this combination in practice is actually any better controlled than direct hyperresolution with the equality axioms (Kowalski 1970a). Moreover, the apparent need for the functional reﬂexive axioms, all of which are just instances of x = x, shows that the kind of ‘lifting’ arguments underlying resolution do not generalize, and suggests that subsumption for paramodulation may be subtle. For a long time it was an open question whether simple reﬂexivity x = x is enough to ensure refutation completeness of resolution with paramodulation.† Eventually Brand (1975) presented an analogous simulation argument based on his equality transformation (Section 4.8), showing not only that simple reﬂexivity suﬃces but also that paramodulation can be restricted in other ways without losing refutation completeness. In particular, there is almost no need to paramodulate into variables, i.e. unify the left of the paramodulating equation with a variable subterm of the literal being paramodulated. However, when using many of the most eﬀective reﬁnements of resolution like set-of-support, the functional reﬂexive axioms are necessary once again for refutation completeness. Consider, for example, the following set of clauses, including simple reﬂexivity: {¬(x < x), f (a) < f (b), a = b, x = x}. The entire set is unsatisﬁable, but the set with ¬(x < x) removed is satisﬁable. However, if we attempt to ﬁnd a proof by resolution and paramodulation with set of support ¬(x < x), no proof can be found. On the other hand, †

A footnote in G.G. Robinson and Wos (1969) remarks: ‘In the two years that paramodulation has been under study, no counterexample has been found to the R-refutation completeness of paramodulation and resolution for simply-reﬂexive systems’.

4.9 Paramodulation

301

if we add the functional reﬂexive axiom f (x) = f (x), we can paramodulate with ¬(x < x) to yield ¬(f (x) < f (x)) and quickly arrive at a refutation. Despite such examples, it is common to leave the functional reﬂexive axioms out when attempting theorem proving in the hope that their theoretical necessity will not arise in the particular case under consideration. In our implementation, we will just use simple reﬂexivity and also disallow paramodulation into variables, in line with Brand’s result.

Implementation The key operation in paramodulation is not unlike that of ﬁnding a critical pair in Knuth–Bendix completion (Section 4.7), except that we need to consider overlaps inside an arbitrary literal, not just another term. It’s similar enough that we can re-use some of the code such as the overlaps function. (To allow paramodulation into variables the last line ‘Var x -> []’ could be replaced by ‘Var x -> [rfn (fullunify [l,tm]) r]’.) We then deﬁne an analogous function to ﬁnd overlaps within literals. The code is very similar, the main change being that we don’t attempt overlaps at the top level (which is a formula, not a term) and include a separate clause for negations. let rec overlapl (l,r) fm rfn = match fm with Atom(R(f,args)) -> listcases (overlaps (l,r)) (fun i a -> rfn i (Atom(R(f,a)))) args [] | Not(p) -> overlapl (l,r) p (fun i p -> rfn i (Not(p))) | _ -> failwith "overlapl: not a literal";;

We lift this to an operation on a whole clause, i.e. a list of literals: let overlapc (l,r) cl rfn acc = listcases (overlapl (l,r)) rfn cl acc;;

Now to apply paramodulation to a clause ocl using all the positive equations in a paramodulating clause pcl, we treat each positive equation eq in turn, considering it as both l = r and r = l. In each case we apply overlapc, with the reconstruction function set up to disjoin the other clauses and apply the ﬁnal instantiation to each. let paramodulate pcl ocl = itlist (fun eq -> let pcl’ = subtract pcl [eq] in let (l,r) = dest_eq eq and rfn i ocl’ = image (subst i) (pcl’ @ ocl’) in overlapc (l,r) ocl rfn ** overlapc (r,l) ocl rfn) (filter is_eq pcl) [];;

302

Equality

Now to generate all paramodulants between clauses, we just rename the clauses to avoid variable clashes in uniﬁcation, as usual, and then perform paramodulation of each clause within the other. let para_clauses cls1 cls2 = let cls1’ = rename "x" cls1 and cls2’ = rename "y" cls2 in paramodulate cls1’ cls2’ @ paramodulate cls2’ cls1’;;

Now we modify the main resolution loop from Section 3.11 to incorporate both resolution and paramodulation: let rec paraloop (used,unused) = match unused with [] -> failwith "No proof found" | cls::ros -> print_string(string_of_int(length used) ^ " used; "^ string_of_int(length unused) ^ " unused."); print_newline(); let used’ = insert cls used in let news = itlist (@) (mapfilter (resolve_clauses cls) used’) (itlist (@) (mapfilter (para_clauses cls) used’) []) in if mem [] news then true else paraloop(used’,itlist (incorporate cls) news ros);;

and then set up the top-level function as before, remembering to add simple reﬂexivity to the clause set: let pure_paramodulation fm = paraloop([],[mk_eq (Var "x") (Var "x")]:: simpcnf(specialize(pnf fm)));; let paramodulation fm = let fm1 = askolemize(Not(generalize fm)) in map (pure_paramodulation ** list_conj) (simpdnf fm1);;

This implementation is at least enough to deal with some simple equality problems we’ve already encountered, as well as some others like the following (Dijkstra 1996): # paramodulation <<(forall x. f(f(x)) = f(x)) /\ (forall x. exists y. f(y) = x) ==> forall x. f(x) = x>>;; ... - : bool list = [true]

However, our rather simple-minded implementation cannot really demonstrate the full power of paramodulation. It works best in conjunction with strong restrictions on applicability, e.g. applying equations in a preferred

Further reading

303

direction based on orderings in the style of term rewriting. Moreover, resolution itself, and paramodulation even more so, work best with more intelligent strategies for choosing the next application rather than the naive roundrobin approach that we have implemented. In fact, by encoding atomic formulas P (t1 , . . . , tn ) as equations fP (t1 , . . . , tn ) = T (where ‘T’ is thought of as ‘true’; see Exercise 4.3), one can essentially perform all logical inference via equational techniques like paramodulation, obviating the need for resolution or similar principles. This idea underlies the superposition method (Bachmair and Ganzinger 1994), implemented eﬃciently in the E theorem prover (Schulz 1999).

Further reading The branch of model theory focusing on equational logic is also known as universal algebra, and there are several texts on the subject such as Cohn (1965) and Burris and Sankappanavar (1981). Almost all books on model theory cited in the last chapter also contain something about the theoretical material described here. More information, historical and otherwise, on the concept of categoricity is given by Corcoran (1980). Two more diﬃcult theorems about κ-categoricity are Morley’s theorem, which asserts that a theory categorical in one uncountable cardinal is categorical in them all, and the Ryll–Nardzewski theorem, which gives an attractive algebraic characterization of ℵ0 -categorical theories. Both these theorems can be found in Hodges (1993b). For pure equational reasoning based on rewriting techniques, see the book by Baader and Nipkow (1998) and the survey articles by Huet and Oppen (1980), Klop (1992) and Plaisted (1993). Dershowitz’s result that a simpliﬁcation order is terminating is usually deduced from (a simple case of) Kruskal’s theorem (Kruskal 1960; Nash-Williams 1963); an accessible account can be found in Baader and Nipkow (1998). In implementing the LPO we paid no attention to eﬃciency, but this question is carefully analyzed by L¨ochner (2006). Methods for deciding validity of universal formulas in logic with equality have signiﬁcant applications in veriﬁcation (Burch and Dill 1994). This has led to the exploration of various alternative algorithms to congruence closure. For further reﬁnements of the approach based on Ackermann reduction, see Goel, Sajid, Zhou, Aziz and Singhal (1998), Velev and Bryant (1999) and Lahiri, Bryant, Goel and Talupur (2004). Paramodulation is discussed in some of the automated theorem proving texts already mentioned, including Chang and Lee (1973) and Loveland

304

Equality

(1978). Again, books such as Wos, Overbeek, Lusk and Boyle (1992) by the Argonne group cover the use of paramodulation to solve non-trivial problems. Bachmair and Ganzinger (1994) is a survey of paramodulation and related ideas, and Degtyarev and Voronkov (2001) of equality reasoning in top-down free-variable calculi like tableaux. The TPTP problem library (Sutcliﬀe and Suttner 1998) includes many equational problems, and provides tools to add equality axioms for provers that do not handle equality directly. Some of the most impressive applications of automated reasoning to hard problems are in the general area of equational logic. The most famous example is the Robbins conjecture, which resisted proof attempts by many notable mathematicians including Tarski, yet was solved automatically by McCune (1997) using the EQP prover. This is just one particularly well-known case where automated reasoning programs have answered open questions. Some more can be found in the monographs by McCune and Padmanabhan (1996) and Wos and Pieper (2003), and on the Web.† Exercises 4.1

4.2

4.3

†

Recall that a set of formulas is said to be κ-categorical if (it has a model and) all its models of cardinality κ are isomorphic. Prove a version of the L o´s–Vaught test: if a countable set of formulas is κ-categorical for some inﬁnite κ then all models are elementarily equivalent. (You may ﬁnd it useful to use the upward L¨ owenheimSkolem theorem.) Show that a Birkhoﬀ proof can be rearranged so that all instantiation and symmetry is applied immediately above the leaves, then congruence rules where necessary and at the top level a right-associated transitivity chain such that no two adjacent equations in a transitivity chain are derived by a congruence. Hence deduce in another way that congruence closure of the subterms in the input problem is a complete approach to the equational theory of a set of ground equations. We can reduce validity of arbitrary formulas in ﬁrst-order logic with equality to a language with equality as the only predicate by the device of turning each P (t1 , . . . , tn ) to a term fP (t1 , . . . , tn ) = T for some new n-ary function symbol fP and a new constant T for ‘true’. For example, this allows us to decide the full universal theory of ﬁrstorder logic with equality using standard congruence closure. Under

See http://www-unix.mcs.anl.gov/AR/new_results/

Exercises

4.4

4.5

4.6

4.7

305

what circumstances does this transformation preserve validity? (Take care over 1-element interpretations!) Rigorously justify the Ackermann reduction from universal formulas in logic with equality to the corresponding problem without functions, and so all the way to propositional logic. Implement this idea, using some method such as DPLL to solve the resulting formulas, and test it against congruence closure on examples. We say that two abstract reduction relations →α and →β on a set X commute if whenever a →∗α b and a →∗β b there is a c with b →∗β c and b →∗α c. Thus, in particular, a reduction relation is conﬂuent iﬀ it commutes with itself. Prove that if a set of reduction relations {→α | α ∈ A} on a set X has the property that any two (not necessarily distinct) →α and →β commute, then the union relation →, deﬁned by a → b iﬀ there is an α ∈ A with a →α b, is conﬂuent (Hindley 1964). Prove that if two abstract reduction relations →α and →β on a set X are such that the union relation →, i.e. a → b iﬀ either a →α b or a →β b, is transitive, then → is terminating iﬀ both →α and →β are (Geser 1990). You may ﬁnd Ramsey’s theorem useful. Extend this to the case of n diﬀerent component relations. For an application to termination analysis of programs see Cook, Podelski and Rybalchenko (2006). The Collatz conjecture (Lagarias 1985) is that the following recursive function (assuming unlimited range for the integer n) always terminates. Encode this deﬁnition as a rewrite system: let rec collatz n = if n <= 1 then n else if n mod 2 = 0 then collatz (n / 2) else collatz(3 * n + 1);;

4.8 4.9

4.10

Show that the singleton set of rewrite rules {f (f (x)) = f (g(f (x)))} is terminating, but this cannot be shown via any simpliﬁcation order. Complete the following rewrite sets taken from Baader and Nipkow (1998): (a) {f (g(f (x))) = g(x)} and (b) {f (f (x)) = f (x), g(g(x)) = f (x), f (g(x)) = g(x), g(f (x)) = f (x)}. Can you characterize the normal forms? You may like to analyze the examples by hand before running completion. Suppose E1 and E2 are two separate sets of equations, considered as rewrite rules, that have disjoint signatures, i.e. such that the function (including constant) symbols in E1 do not occur in E2 and vice versa. Show that if E1 and E2 both have the weak normalization

306

4.11

Equality

property (every term has a normal form), then so does the combined set E1 ∪ E2 . However, give a counterexample to show that even if E1 and E2 are terminating (strongly normalizing) E1 ∪ E2 may fail to be (Toyama 1987a). Also prove (more diﬃcult) that if E1 and E2 are conﬂuent, so is E1 ∪ E2 (Toyama 1987b). You will probably ﬁnd that our present implementation cannot complete the following axioms for ‘near rings’ in a reasonable time: 0 + x = x, −x + x = 0, (x + y) + z = x + (y + z), (x · y) · z = x · (y · z), (x + y) · z = x · z + y · z.

4.12

4.13

4.14 4.15

Nevertheless, ﬁnding a completion is quite feasible (Aichinger 1994). Try optimizing our completion algorithm so that left-reducible rules are put back into the critical pair list, and see if you can then solve it. Can you justify the completeness of this reﬁnement? Instead of running completion with a simple queue of critical pairs, an alternative (Lescanne 1984) would be to run the procedure for a while, select the most ‘interesting’ equations derived – perhaps those with the simplest structure, e.g. i(i(x)) = x above i(i(x · i(y))) = i(y · i(x)) – and restart the procedure with the original equations and the interesting ones selected. Implement this idea and see how it works on typical examples. This idea is not restricted to equational reasoning, but could be used for any bottom-up procedure. Try implementing a similar approach to resolution theorem proving and test its eﬀectiveness. Although we’ve exclusively used versions of the LPO as the ordering in rewriting and completion, Knuth and Bendix (1970) originally used somewhat diﬀerent orderings, now known as Knuth–Bendix orderings. Try these out following Knuth and Bendix’s original paper, and try to convince yourselves theoretically that they have the required properties for a simpliﬁcation order. Take care over the restrictions on the ‘weights’. Prove that the LPO is total on ground terms (or terms where weights are assigned to the variables as if they were constants). Implement basic automated conﬂuence analysis for ordered rewrite systems as follows. Generate all the possible orderings for the (terms substituted for) the variables on the left of a rewrite rule, e.g. for

Exercises

4.16

307

(x + y) + z = x + (y + z) the orders include x = y = z, x = y < z, y < x = z and y < z < z. Implement a variant of lpo_gt that uses these orderings as hypotheses and deduces the ordering of terms built up from them. For each case, analyze critical pairs, exclude those that are ruled out by orderings and try to verify that the feasible critical pairs are joinable subject to the same constraints. Try your code out on the examples from Martin and Nipkow (1990). Paramodulation was based on the idea of a special rule for equality, rather than modiﬁcation of the input formula. We might also consider modifying top-down methods such as tableaux with special equality-handling methods. Study the methods presented by Fitting (1990) and implement and test them on some equality problems. Can you use similar techniques with model elimination?

5 Decidable problems

We’ve considered various algorithms (tableaux, resolution, etc.) for verifying that a ﬁrst-order formula is logically valid, if indeed it is. But these will not in general tell us when a formula is not valid. We’ll see in Chapter 7 that there is no systematic procedure for doing so. However, there are procedures that work for certain special classes of formulas, or for validity in certain special (classes of ) models, and we discuss some of the more important ones in this chapter. Often these naturally generalize common decision problems in mathematics and universal algebra such as equation-solving or the ‘word problem’.

5.1 The decision problem There are three natural and closely connected problems for ﬁrst-order logic for which we might want an algorithmic solution. By negating the formula, we can according to taste present them in terms of validity or unsatisﬁability. (1) Conﬁrm that a logically valid (or unsatisﬁable) formula is indeed valid (resp. unsatisﬁable), and never conﬁrm an invalid (satisﬁable) one. (2) Conﬁrm that a logically invalid (or satisﬁable) formula is indeed invalid (resp. satisﬁable), and never conﬁrm a valid (unsatisﬁable) one. (3) Test whether a formula is valid or invalid (or whether it is satisﬁable or unsatisﬁable). Evidently (3) encompasses both (1) and (2). Conversely, solutions to both (1) and (2) could be used together to solve (3): just run the veriﬁcation procedures for validity and invalidity (or satisﬁability and unsatisﬁability) 308

5.2 The AE fragment

309

in parallel. Now, we have presented explicit solutions to (1), such as tableaux or resolution. But these do not solve (3). Given a satisﬁable formula, these algorithms, while at least not incorrectly claiming they are unsatisﬁable, will not always terminate. For example, these attempts to prove an invalid formula just keep fruitlessly searching: # tab <>;; # meson <>;;

Trying resolution instead we do get a termination with failure. But one can concoct slightly more complicated examples where that too will loop indeﬁnitely. In fact, a key limitative result due to Church (1936) and Turing (1936), which we will prove in Chapter 7, shows that no general solution to (2) or (3) is possible. However, we can frequently ﬁnd a full decision procedure for limited or modiﬁed forms of the same problem. First, we can restrict in some way the nature of the formula considered, e.g. the arrangement of nested quantiﬁers when it is placed in prenex normal form. Secondly, we can consider, instead of validity in all interpretations, validity in a more limited class of interpretations. Often this means all models of some standard set of axioms Δ, so instead of a decision procedure for |= p we seek one for Δ |= p.

5.2 The AE fragment All the proof procedures for ﬁrst-order logic that we’ve mechanized are ultimately justiﬁed by Herbrand’s theorem: the Skolemized, quantiﬁer-free form of a formula is unsatisﬁable iﬀ some ﬁnite conjunction of ground instances is propositionally unsatisﬁable. In general, the set of possible ground instances is inﬁnite, and the use of uniﬁcation to guide our search through it does not alter that fundamental fact. However, in the special case when the Skolemized form contains no functions except nullary ones (i.e. constants), the number of ground instances is bounded. For example, recall the L o´s formula: let los = <<(forall x y z. P(x,y) /\ P(y,z) ==> P(x,z)) /\ (forall x y z. Q(x,y) /\ Q(y,z) ==> Q(x,z)) /\ (forall x y. P(x,y) ==> P(y,x)) /\ (forall x y. P(x,y) \/ Q(x,y)) ==> (forall x y. P(x,y)) \/ (forall x y. Q(x,y))>>;;

310

Decidable problems

If we Skolemize its negation as a prelude to refutation, the result contains four constant symbols and three variables, but no non-nullary functions: # skolemize(Not los);; - : fol formula = <<(((~P(x,y) \/ ~P(y,z)) \/ P(x,z)) /\ ((~Q(x,y) \/ ~Q(y,z)) \/ Q(x,z)) /\ (~P(x,y) \/ P(y,x)) /\ (P(x,y) \/ Q(x,y))) /\ ~P(c_x,c_y) /\ ~Q(c_x’,c_y’)>>

Each of the three variables can be replaced only by one of the four constants, so there are just 43 = 64 ground instances. Thus the unsatisﬁability of the Skolemized form is equivalent to propositional unsatisﬁability of the conjunction of these 64 ground instances. Our earlier procedure davisputnam proves it reasonably quickly by trying only 45 of these possibilities: # davisputnam los;; 0 ground instances tried; 0 items in list ... 44 ground instances tried; 109 items in list - : int = 45

However, we now know that we could have just conjoined all ground instances and tested for propositional satisﬁability once and for all. This general approach can be implemented as follows: let aedecide fm = let sfm = skolemize(Not fm) in let fvs = fv sfm and cnsts,funcs = partition (fun (_,ar) -> ar = 0) (functions sfm) in if funcs <> [] then failwith "Not decidable" else let consts = if cnsts = [] then ["c",0] else cnsts in let cntms = map (fun (c,_) -> Fn(c,[])) consts in let alltuples = groundtuples cntms [] 0 (length fvs) in let cjs = simpcnf sfm in let grounds = map (fun tup -> image (image (subst (fpf fvs tup))) cjs) alltuples in not(dpll(unions grounds));;

For our implementations, tested on the L o´s formula, aedecide happens to be signiﬁcantly faster than davisputnam. But we’re not really interested in this, or indeed the relative performance of intermediate possibilities like testing on every tenth ground instance (considered in Davis and Putnam’s original paper). Rather, the crucial point is that by placing a bound on the number of ground instances, aedecide always gives a yes/no answer; if the original formula is not valid, it tells us, rather than simply carrying on forever.

5.2 The AE fragment

311

We could quite easily ensure termination in such cases for many general theorem–proving procedures too. For instance, we could modify the inner loop of our Davis-Putnam procedure so that it returns ‘true’ if the formula is valid (instead of the number of ground instances) and ‘false’ if the set of ground instances is exhausted. Even some uniﬁcation-based procedures are guaranteed to terminate for problems with no function symbols in the Skolemized negated input formula. The same can be true, by accident or design, for formulas in other signiﬁcant subsets (Fermueller, Leitsch, Tammet and Zamov 1993; de Nivelle 1995). How can we anticipate, based on the original problem, that the Skolemized form will have only nullary function symbols? For simplicity, suppose that the formula, to be tested for satisﬁability, is in NNF. First of all, the initial formula must have no non-nullary functions, since Skolemization isn’t going to remove any. Secondly, we must have no subformulas of the form ∃y.P [x, y] with another free or universally quantiﬁed variable x in its scope, since this will result in a Skolem function with (at least) x as an argument. For a sentence, a simple suﬃcient condition for this not to happen is that all the existential quantiﬁers occur before the universal quantiﬁers in any path to a subformula: ∃x1 . · · · ∃xn . · · · ∀y1 . · · · ∀ym . It’s rather hard to state this precisely because of the complicated ways quantiﬁers and propositional connectives can be nested inside each other. It becomes easier to describe if we put the formula into prenex normal form ﬁrst, since then we can say that a formula is in the required subset iﬀ it has the form: ∃x1 , . . . , xn . ∀y1 , . . . , ym . P [x1 , . . . , xn , y1 , . . . , ym ] (where n or m may be zero). Since all the ‘∃’s come before the ‘∀’s, such a formula is said to be in the ‘EA subset’. However, we are speaking here of the satisﬁability problem, which is applied to the negation of the formula we want to prove. We need the original formula that we are testing for validity to be of the form: ∀x1 , . . . , xn . ∃y1 , . . . , ym . P [x1 , . . . , xn , y1 , . . . , ym ], that is, in the ‘AE subset’ or just ‘AE’. The remarks above indicate that validity for AE formulas is decidable, or equivalently, that satisﬁability for EA formulas is decidable. While the systematic use of prenex normal form simpliﬁes categorization of formulas, it’s preferable in the actual implementation to Skolemize

312

Decidable problems

directly. If one does make a PNF transformation ﬁrst, some ﬁnesse can be needed in the order of transformations. For example, if the original formula when put in NNF is of the form: (∀x. P (x)) ∨ (∃y. Q(y)) we must ﬁrst pull out the universal quantiﬁer, then the existential: (∀x. P (x)) ∨ (∃y. Q(y)) −→ ∀x. P (x) ∨ ∃y. Q(y) −→ ∀x. ∃y. P (x) ∨ Q(y) rather than vice versa: (∀x. P (x)) ∨ (∃y. Q(y)) −→ ∃y. (∀x. P (x)) ∨ Q(y) −→ ∃y. ∀x. P (x) ∨ Q(y) even though both are logically valid transitions on the way to PNF. Luckily, we ordered the subcases of pullquants with the universal quantiﬁer matches ﬁrst, so we’ll get the desired eﬀect. But this must be applied to the formula before it is negated for refutation, or the opposite will happen. # let fm = <<(forall x. p(x)) \/ (exists y. p(y))>>;; val fm : fol formula = <<(forall x. p(x)) \/ (exists y. p(y))>> # pnf fm;; - : fol formula = <>

The earlier group theory problem (a group where x2 = 1 is abelian), in its predicate formulation, also lies in the AE subset, because we didn’t use the inverse axiom: # aedecide <<(forall x. P(1,x,x)) /\ (forall x. P(x,x,1)) /\ (forall u v w x y z. P(x,y,u) /\ P(y,z,w) ==> (P(x,w,v) <=> P(u,z,v))) ==> forall a b c. P(a,b,c) ==> P(b,a,c)>>;; - : bool = true

Admittedly, MESON solves it more rapidly, because the large number of variables in the associativity axiom gives rise to many ground instances (46 = 4096). But a decision procedure allows us, at least in principle, to conﬁrm that certain similar assertions are not valid. For example, in case we were in doubt we can conﬁrm that the identity axiom is necessary: # aedecide <<(forall x. P(x,x,1)) /\ (forall u v w x y z. P(x,y,u) /\ P(y,z,w) ==> (P(x,w,v) <=> P(u,z,v))) ==> forall a b c. P(a,b,c) ==> P(b,a,c)>>;; - : bool = false

5.3 Miniscoping and the monadic fragment

313

5.3 Miniscoping and the monadic fragment We have noted that Skolemizing ﬁrst usually avoids the problem of introducing quantiﬁer nesting of an undesirable kind. For example, aedecide can easily settle the validity of the following, Pelletier problem 29: # aedecide <<(exists x. P(x)) /\ (exists x. G(x)) ==> ((forall x. P(x) ==> H(x)) /\ (forall x. G(x) ==> J(x)) <=> (forall x y. P(x) /\ G(y) ==> H(x) /\ J(y)))>>;; - : bool = true

However, the wrong kind of quantiﬁer nesting present from the start precludes the use of aedecide, even on examples that davisputnam can prove very easily, like Pelletier problem 18: # aedecide <<exists y. forall x. P(y) ==> P(x)>>;; Exception: Failure "Not decidable".

Nevertheless, we can massage the formula into AE form by applying some of the PNF transformations in reverse order, to push quantiﬁers in rather than pulling them out. ∃y. ∀x. P (y) ⇒ P (x) −→ ∃y. ∀x. ¬P (y) ∨ P (x) −→ ∃y. ¬P (y) ∨ (∀x. P (x)) −→ (∃y. ¬P (y)) ∨ (∀x. P (x)) −→ ¬(∀y. P (y)) ∨ (∀x. P (x)) The modiﬁed formula is AE, and if it is now prenexed the order of the quantiﬁers will have been reversed. In fact, the formula as it stands is, if we ignore bound variable names, a propositional tautology. Thus, by performing some initial transformations, we can decide a broader class of formulas than those ostensibly in AE. It’s hard to give any deﬁnite limit to the class of formulas that can be reduced to AE form, since after all any valid formula has an AE equivalent (‘’), as does every unsatisﬁable one (‘⊥’). We will present an algorithm that follows the pattern of the above example by trying, fairly straightforwardly, to push quantiﬁers as far inwards as possible. This converse to the PNF procedure is usually known as miniscoping because it minimizes the scope of the quantiﬁer. First we deﬁne a function separate intended to transform a formula ∃x. p1 ∧ · · · ∧ pn into (∃x. pi ∧ · · · pj ) ∧ (pk ∧ · · · ∧ pl ) where the pi , . . . , pj are the formulas with x free and the pk , . . . , pl are the others. The conjuncts in the input formula are presented as a set cjs.

314

Decidable problems

let separate x cjs = let yes,no = partition (mem x ** fv) cjs in if yes = [] then list_conj no else if no = [] then Exists(x,list_conj yes) else And(Exists(x,list_conj yes),list_conj no);;

Now we deﬁne a function pushquant, which given a variable x and formula p transforms the formula ∃x. p into an equivalent with the scope of the quantiﬁer reduced. First of all, if x is not free in p, the answer is just p. Otherwise the formula p is put into disjunctive normal form so the formula is: ∃x. C1 ∨ · · · ∨ Cn , where each Ci is a conjunction of literals. We then transform this to: (∃x. C1 ) ∨ · · · ∨ (∃x. Cn ) and then each disjunct is dealt with by separate and the results disjoined: let rec pushquant x p = if not (mem x (fv p)) then p else let djs = purednf(nnf p) in list_disj (map (separate x) djs);;

Now the overall function is a straightforward recursion. To avoid coding an essentially dual function for the universal quantiﬁer, we transform ∀x. p into ¬(∃x. ¬p). Note that we assume the initial formula is in NNF and hence avoid dealing with some cases: let rec miniscope fm = match fm with Not p -> Not(miniscope p) | And(p,q) -> And(miniscope p,miniscope q) | Or(p,q) -> Or(miniscope p,miniscope q) | Forall(x,p) -> Not(pushquant x (Not(miniscope p))) | Exists(x,p) -> pushquant x (miniscope p) | _ -> fm;;

This handles the simple example we used above: # miniscope(nnf <<exists y. forall x. P(y) ==> P(x)>>);; - : fol formula = <<(exists y. ~P(y)) \/ (forall x. P(x))>>

as well as various more complicated examples such as Pelletier problem 20. Here the miniscoping restricts the scope of the quantiﬁers very successfully, right down to the level of the literals:

5.3 Miniscoping and the monadic fragment

315

# let fm = miniscope(nnf <<(forall x y. exists z. forall w. P(x) /\ Q(y) ==> R(z) /\ U(w)) ==> (exists x y. P(x) /\ Q(y)) ==> (exists z. R(z))>>);; val fm : fol formula = <<((exists x. P(x)) /\ (forall z. ~R(z)) /\ (exists w. ~U(w)) /\ (exists y. Q(y)) \/ (exists x. P(x)) /\ (forall z. ~R(z)) /\ (exists y. Q(y)) \/ (exists x. P(x)) /\ (exists w. ~U(w)) /\ (exists y. Q(y))) \/ ~((exists x. P(x)) /\ (exists y. Q(y))) \/ (exists z. R(z))>>

and then the original prenexing procedure will give an AE result: # pnf(nnf fm);; # pnf(nnf fm);; - : fol formula = <>

It’s hard to give an immediately graspable description of the class of problems where this miniscoping procedure, followed by prenexing, will give an AE formula. However, it does include a class of formulas that is very easy to describe, namely the monadic formulas. These are formulas (like the above example) that may have arbitrary quantiﬁer nesting but involve no function symbols and just monadic (unary) predicate symbols, that is, those with only one argument. (The L o´s formula is not in this class because the predicate R it involves takes two arguments.) Even for a monadic formula, the miniscoping procedure may not always push quantiﬁers down to the level of literals; consider as a counterexample ∃x. P (x) ∧ Q(x). Nevertheless, we claim that miniscope applied to a monadic formula yields a result that has the following property: The body of each quantiﬁer ‘∀x. · · ·’ or ‘∃x. · · ·’ has (i) no other quantiﬁers, and (ii) no free variables other than x.

We can prove this by induction on the size of the input formula, considering the cases in the deﬁnition of miniscope. The property above is preserved by propositional combinations, and the universal quantiﬁer is transformed away. So the interesting case is the existential quantiﬁer, and by the inductive hypothesis, it suﬃces to prove the following lemma: if p has this property so does pushquant x p. (In this application p is the result from the nested call to miniscope.) If we hit the trivial case where x is not free in p and the returned formula is p, the result is immediate. Otherwise, the DNF

316

Decidable problems

transformation of p yields a formula C1 ∨ · · · ∨ Cn (maybe just one disjunct) over which we distribute the existential quantiﬁer. Every Ci is a conjunction of terms: p1 ∧ · · · ∧ p n and the formulas pi are separated into two groups, those with x free and those not. Only the former group are in the scope of the ﬁnal quantiﬁer, and so the other formulas retain the assumed property. But those with x free must be literals, not quantiﬁed formulas, since by the inductive hypothesis quantiﬁed subformulas have no free variables (this is not changed by the propositional operations used in generating the DNF). And since all predicates are monadic, they can have no variable other than x free, and so the ﬁnal quantiﬁed formula will have no free variables and no quantiﬁer nesting. Hence, by incorporating miniscoping we extend the scope of the aedecide function to a broader class of problems that includes at least all monadic formulas. We call the procedure wang, in honour of Hao Wang, who ﬁrst implemented a theorem prover for this subset (Wang 1960).† let wang fm = aedecide(miniscope(nnf(simplify fm)));;

This will, in principle, solve all monadic formulas, such as the following, Pelletier problem 20: # wang <<(forall x y. exists z. forall w. P(x) /\ Q(y) ==> R(z) /\ U(w)) ==> (exists x y. P(x) /\ Q(y)) ==> (exists z. R(z))>>;; - : bool = true

In practice, however, our simple miniscoping transformations can cause an explosion in the size of the formula, because in the case of alternating quantiﬁers, the body is alternately transformed into DNF and CNF. Thus there is no guarantee that the method is acceptably eﬃcient in practice. A particularly bad example is ‘Andrews’s challenge’, which already blows up quite a lot just when transformed to NNF, even though the nesting of quantiﬁers is modest. # pnf(nnf(miniscope(nnf <<((exists x. forall y. P(x) <=> ((exists x. Q(x)) <=> (forall ((exists x. forall y. Q(x) <=> ((exists x. P(x)) <=> (forall †

P(y)) <=> y. Q(y)))) <=> Q(y)) <=> y. P(y))))>>)));;

Wang also discussed a general ﬁrst-order proof procedure based on sequent calculus at much the same time as the other pioneers such as Gilmore and Prawitz. However, he did not actually implement this fuller procedure.

5.4 Syllogisms

317

The resulting formula is AE, but it has 19 universal quantiﬁers followed by 10 existentials. There are thus no fewer than 1019 ground instances, of quite a large body. It is simply not feasible to test them all.

5.4 Syllogisms One of the earliest and most inﬂuential works of logic was the analysis of syllogisms introduced by Aristotle in his Prior Analytics. Aristotelian syllogisms are constructed from three ‘premisses’, each of one of the following forms (the letters A, E, I and O are now standard but were not introduced by Aristotle): • • • •

A – all S are P (universal aﬃrmative), E – no S are P (universal negative), I – some S are P (particular aﬃrmative), O – some S are not P (particular negative).

Examples of premisses include ‘all men are mortal’ (A) and ‘some philosophers are not Greek’ (O). The constructs S and P inside premisses are traditionally called terms, but they are nothing like terms in ﬁrst-order logic, and in fact we will shortly formalize them using ﬁrst-order predicates. Aristotelian syllogisms are certain logical implications of the form ‘if A and B then C’ where A, B and C are premisses. They are restricted to involve just three terms, the subject S and predicate P , which occur in that order in the consequent, and a middle term M which occurs in both antecedents together with either S or P . A concrete example given by Aristotle in the Posterior Analytics is:† If all broad-leafed plants are deciduous, and all vines are broad-leafed plants, then all vines are deciduous.

There are four diﬀerent ‘ﬁgures’ of the syllogism, depending on how the two antecedents are arranged. Actually, Aristotle only laid out the ﬁrst three ﬁgures, but he gave several examples belonging to the fourth ﬁgure and it was therefore natural to add it later – for more information about the development of Aristotelian syllogisms, see L ukasiewicz (1951). †

Aristotle only used variables to denote terms used as general predicates, not to identify speciﬁc individuals, so the popular example ‘Socrates is mortal’ is not a premiss, strictly speaking, though one may interpret ‘Socrates’ as a predicate applying to those individuals identical with Socrates. Note also that syllogisms are implications with hypothetical antecedents, not deductions from premisses assumed to be true, so should not be read ‘A and B, therefore C’. Thus, the example right at the beginning of section 1.1 was not properly speaking a syllogism.

318

Decidable problems

if and then

I MP SM SP

II PM SM SP

III MP MS SP

IV PM MS SP

Now, we have four diﬀerent ﬁgures, and each of the three premisses can be of one of the forms A, E, I and O; thus we can form 4 × 43 = 256 diﬀerent assertions of the syllogistic form. However, only some of these are valid, and we will use our theorem proving apparatus to decide which. First we express the basic premisses in ﬁrst-order logic, with ﬁrst-order predicates for the terms and quantiﬁed sentences that appear to capture the intended meaning of the premisses: • • • •

A (all S are P ): ∀x. S(x) ⇒ P (x), E (no S are P ): ∀x. S(x) ⇒ ¬P (x), I (some S are P ): ∃x. S(x) ∧ P (x), O (some S are not P ): ∃x. S(x) ∧ ¬P (x).

The following syntax functions construct these formulas for given terms p and q: let atom p x = Atom(R(p,[Var x]));; let and and and

premiss_A premiss_E premiss_I premiss_O

(p,q) (p,q) (p,q) (p,q)

= = = =

Forall("x",Imp(atom Forall("x",Imp(atom Exists("x",And(atom Exists("x",And(atom

p p p p

"x",atom q "x")) "x",Not(atom q "x"))) "x",atom q "x")) "x",Not(atom q "x")));;

while the following decomposes such a premiss and produces the corresponding English reading: let anglicize_premiss fm = match fm with Forall(_,Imp(Atom(R(p,_)),Atom(R(q,_)))) -> "all "^p^" are "^q | Forall(_,Imp(Atom(R(p,_)),Not(Atom(R(q,_))))) -> "no "^p^" are "^q | Exists(_,And(Atom(R(p,_)),Atom(R(q,_)))) -> "some "^p^" are "^q | Exists(_,And(Atom(R(p,_)),Not(Atom(R(q,_))))) -> "some "^p^" are not "^q;;

Regarding a syllogism itself as simply a formula P1 ∧ P2 ⇒ P3 where the Pi are premisses, we can describe them in English using the following: let anglicize_syllogism (Imp(And(t1,t2),t3)) = "If " ^ anglicize_premiss t1 ^ " and " ^ anglicize_premiss t2 ^ ", then " ^ anglicize_premiss t3;;

Now let us generate all 256 possible syllogisms:

5.4 Syllogisms

319

let all_possible_syllogisms = let sylltypes = [premiss_A; premiss_E; premiss_I; premiss_O] in let prems1 = allpairs (fun x -> x) sylltypes ["M","P"; "P","M"] and prems2 = allpairs (fun x -> x) sylltypes ["S","M"; "M","S"] and prems3 = allpairs (fun x -> x) sylltypes ["S","P"] in allpairs mk_imp (allpairs mk_and prems1 prems2) prems3;;

Note that these are all in the monadic fragment, hence decidable. In fact the quantiﬁers already have the minimum possible scope, so the formulas can be tested for validity with aedecide. Let us ﬁlter out all the logically valid syllogisms: # let all_valid_syllogisms = filter aedecide all_possible_syllogisms;; ... # length all_valid_syllogisms;; - : int = 15

We get 15, which is perhaps a little surprising given that in the traditional Aristotelian syllogistic, 24 have been regarded as valid. (Sometimes only 19 are listed, but others are regarded as implicitly following by ‘subalternation’.) # map anglicize_syllogism all_valid_syllogisms;; - : string list = ["If all M are P and all S are M, then all S are P"; "If all M are P and some S are M, then some S are P"; "If all M are P and some M are S, then some S are P"; "If all P are M and no S are M, then no S are P"; "If all P are M and no M are S, then no S are P"; "If all P are M and some S are not M, then some S are not P"; "If no M are P and all S are M, then no S are P"; "If no M are P and some S are M, then some S are not P"; "If no M are P and some M are S, then some S are not P"; "If no P are M and all S are M, then no S are P"; "If no P are M and some S are M, then some S are not P"; "If no P are M and some M are S, then some S are not P"; "If some M are P and all M are S, then some S are P"; "If some P are M and all M are S, then some S are P"; "If some M are not P and all M are S, then some S are not P"]

Comparison of this list with the traditional ones shows that we have recognized a proper subset of the traditional syllogisms, excluding several such as Darapti:† ‘if all M are P and all M are S, then some S are P’. In our formulation this is clearly invalid: we can easily derive bogus instances such †

Syllogisms are traditionally allocated mnemonic names, with vowels that indicate the kinds of the three premisses (A, E, I or O), and consonants that show in a rather complicated way how to convert the syllogism to those of the ﬁrst ﬁgure.

320

Decidable problems

as ‘if all immortals will live forever and all immortals are people then some people will live forever’. So the correspondence between Aristotle’s logic and the ﬁrst-order readings is not quite as straightforward as it ﬁrst appeared. The problems seem to arise in cases where one or more of the predicates involved is identically false – i.e. there is nothing that satisﬁes it. One interpretation of the traditional list is that all terms are implicitly supposed to be applicable to something. If we add this hypothesis, then we do recover the classic list: # let all_possible_syllogisms’ = let p = <<(exists x. P(x)) /\ (exists x. M(x)) /\ (exists x. S(x))>> in map (fun t -> Imp(p,t)) all_possible_syllogisms;; ... # let all_valid_syllogisms’ = filter aedecide all_possible_syllogisms’;; ... # length all_valid_syllogisms’;; - : int = 24 # map (anglicize_syllogism ** consequent) all_valid_syllogisms’;; ...

Still, it’s not clear that this is really a faithful exegesis of how Aristotle and/or the medieval logicians really thought about syllogistic reasoning. To be at all conﬁdent about that, we need to consider not only the validity of the syllogisms themselves, but also of the various conversion rules that were used to manipulate them. For a more detailed examination of the relationship between Aristotle’s logic and various ﬁrst-order readings, see Strawson (1952). In any case, since there are only ﬁnitely many possible syllogisms, Aristotle’s logic is decidable, if only by ﬁat. And the other major logical system handed down from the Ancient Greeks, the Megarian–Stoic logic, can be regarded as a subset of propositional logic and so is also decidable. Perhaps this fact was unduly inﬂuential in forming Leibniz’s expectations that a general calculus ratiocinator could be found.

5.5 The ﬁnite model property For another perspective on ﬁrst-order decidability, it’s fruitful to consider the possible sizes of (the domains of) models of a formula. This can naturally explain the decidability of various fragments of ﬁrst-order logic, and give rise to alternative decision procedures. Note ﬁrst that whether a formula p has a model M with domain D can depend only on the size (cardinality) of D. For given a model M with domain

5.5 The ﬁnite model property

321

D, and another set D with the same cardinality, we know there are mutually inverse bijections i : D → D and j : D → D (see Appendix 1). We can then construct a model M of p with domain D by interpreting functions and predicates so that i and j determine an isomorphism (see Section 4.2) by construction: fM (y1 , y2 ) = i(fM (j(y1 ), j(y2 ))), PM (y) = PM (j(y)) etc. Now the L¨owenheim–Skolem theorems tell us that if a ﬁrst-order formula has a model of any cardinality (any inﬁnite cardinality, for logic with equality), it has a model of any other inﬁnite cardinality. But formulas can place strong constraints on the sizes of ﬁnite models, even if we consider logic without equality. For example, ∃x y. P (x) ∧ ¬P (y) is satisﬁable, but any model must have size ≥ 2. If we consider logic with equality, i.e. restrict ourselves to normal models, we can get speciﬁc size constraints; for example ∃x y. ¬(x = y) ∧ ∀z. z = x ∨ z = y is only satisﬁable in models of size exactly 2. More generally, for syntactically restricted classes of formulas, it often turns out that satisﬁability, i.e. having a model at all, is equivalent to having a ﬁnite model. (Or dually, validity is equivalent to holding in all ﬁnite models.) Deﬁnition 5.1 A formula is said to have the ﬁnite model property for validity precisely when it is valid in all models iﬀ it is valid in all ﬁnite models. Similarly, it is said to have the ﬁnite model property for satisﬁability precisely when it is satisﬁable iﬀ it is satisﬁable in a ﬁnite model.

As well as coining the phrase ‘ﬁnite model property’, Harrop (1958) made the following observation, in a somewhat more general context. Theorem 5.2 There is a systematic procedure for deciding the validity (satisﬁability) of all formulas with the ﬁnite model property for validity (resp. satisﬁability) Proof We will prove the ‘validity’ version, the ‘satisﬁability’ one being essentially the same. We already have procedures that will verify the validity of a formula if it is indeed valid – any of the major methods like resolution will do. Moreover, because of the ﬁnite model property, we have a systematic procedure for verifying if it is not valid: just enumerate larger and larger ﬁnite interpretations till we ﬁnd one in which it doesn’t hold. To get a decision procedure we simply need to interleave these procedures, and one or the other will terminate successfully and make the decision.

322

Decidable problems

The proof can be considered just a special case of a general result in computability theory (see Theorem 7.13 later on). But to make the reasoning quite concrete and explicit we will really implement the interleaving posited in the previous proof. First, we implement functions to create the set of all interpretations with a domain {1, . . . , n}, in a series of steps. The following constructs all tuples of size n with members chosen from the list l: let rec alltuples n l = if n = 0 then [[]] else let tups = alltuples (n - 1) l in allpairs (fun h t -> h::t) l tups;;

The following produces all possible functions out of a ﬁnite domain dom and into a ﬁnite range ran, making it undeﬁned outside dom: let allmappings dom ran = itlist (fun p -> allpairs (valmod p) ran) dom [undef];;

To construct all interpretations, we need to enumerate all ways of interpreting function symbols. The intended domain depends on the arity of the function symbol, so we deﬁne a ‘dependent domain’ variant of the above: let alldepmappings dom ran = itlist (fun (p,n) -> allpairs (valmod p) (ran n)) dom [undef];;

We can create all possible interpretations of n-ary functions and predicates over a domain dom: let allfunctions dom n = allmappings (alltuples n dom) dom;; let allpredicates dom n = allmappings (alltuples n dom) [false;true];;

Finally, we can now decide whether a formula holds in all interpretations of size n. First, we set the domain to be the set {1, . . . , n} and construct all possible interpretations of the functions and predicate symbols involved in the formula. Then we generalize the formula over all free variables (simpler than constructing all possible valuations of them) and test whether the generalized formula holds in all the interpretations constructed (the valuation is irrelevant for a closed formula so we make it undefined). let decide_finite n fm = let funcs = functions fm and preds = predicates fm and dom = 1--n in let fints = alldepmappings funcs (allfunctions dom) and pints = alldepmappings preds (allpredicates dom) in let interps = allpairs (fun f p -> dom,f,p) fints pints in let fm’ = generalize fm in forall (fun md -> holds md undefined fm’) interps;;

5.5 The ﬁnite model property

323

Now, for a decision procedure we can interleave calls to this function for larger and larger n with the search process in some validity-proving procedure for the formula. This is quite straightforward using methods like tab and MESON where we already use iterative deepening to separate search into stages, each of which is itself certain to terminate. We just adapt MESON slightly to place a ﬁxed proof size bound n on the search, essentially just removing the use of deepen: let limmeson n fm = let cls = simpcnf(specialize(pnf fm)) in let rules = itlist ((@) ** contrapositives) cls [] in mexpand rules [] False (fun x -> x) (undefined,n,0);;

and construct a theorem-proving function from it as before: let limited_meson n fm = let fm1 = askolemize(Not(generalize fm)) in map (limmeson n ** list_conj) (simpdnf fm1);;

The decision procedure works as follows. Try to prove the formula using MESON with a size limit n. If that succeeds, it is valid so we return ‘true’. If not, we test whether the formula holds in all interpretations of size n. If it does not, it’s not valid so we return ‘false’. Otherwise we increase n by 1 and repeat: let decide_fmp fm = let rec test n = try limited_meson n fm; true with Failure _ -> if decide_finite n fm then test (n + 1) else false in test 1;;

This can indeed be used to prove formulas either valid or invalid, and its results are always correct when it terminates. # decide_fmp <<(forall x y. R(x,y) \/ R(y,x)) ==> forall x. R(x,x)>>;; - : bool = true # decide_fmp <<(forall x y z. R(x,y) /\ R(y,z) ==> R(x,z)) ==> forall x. R(x,x)>>;; - : bool = false

Termination is guaranteed for formulas with the ﬁnite model property, but not if the formula has a countermodel (i.e. an interpretation that does not satisfy it) but no ﬁnite countermodel, as here (this example is discussed in more detail below):

324

Decidable problems

decide_fmp <<~((forall x. ~R(x,x)) /\ (forall x. exists z. R(x,z)) /\ (forall x y z. R(x,y) /\ R(y,z) ==> R(x,z)))>>;;

Moreover, even when termination is guaranteed in principle, in practice the number of possible interpretations explodes dramatically as n increases, so this is hardly a feasible approach. Still, some such procedure is not a bad thing to try when faced with a reasonably simple formula whose validity is open. A generally more eﬃcient alternative algorithm that avoids explicit enumeration of all interpretations by using propositional validity checking as a subroutine is suggested in Exercise 5.1 below. There are a number of more heavyweight tools that are designed to ﬁnd (counter)models for ﬁrst-order formulas, e.g. Mace4 and Paradox.†

Instances of the ﬁnite model property For certain classes of formulas, one can not only demonstrate the ﬁnite model property abstractly, but exhibit some deﬁnite ﬁnite size that is all we need to check. In this case we say that the class of formulas has the small model property. Monadic formulas are a relatively easy example. Theorem 5.3 If a formula p involves k distinct monadic predicates (predicates of arity 1) and none of higher arity (in particular, not equality) and also involves no function symbols, then p has a model iﬀ it has a model of size 2k . Proof (sketch) The basic idea is that in any interpretation, the k predicates can distinguish at most 2k distinct subsets, so all the information in such a model can be conveyed by a model of at most size 2k , collapsing each such subset to a single element. The formal details are left to the reader. The small model property yields a decision algorithm with a deﬁnite bound on its runtime, albeit sometimes not a very practical one, rather than merely an abstract assurance that it will eventually terminate. For example, to decide a monadic formula, we just need to test it in all interpretations of size 2k , where k is the number of monadic predicate symbols involved. †

See www.cs.unm.edu/~mccune/mace4/ and www.cs.chalmers.se/~koen/folkung/.

5.5 The ﬁnite model property

325

let decide_monadic fm = let funcs = functions fm and preds = predicates fm in let monadic,other = partition (fun (_,ar) -> ar = 1) preds in if funcs <> [] or exists (fun (_,ar) -> ar > 1) other then failwith "Not in the monadic subset" else let n = funpow (length monadic) (( * ) 2) 1 in decide_finite n fm;;

This disposes of the Andrews Challenge very quickly: # decide_monadic <<((exists x. forall ((exists x. Q(x)) ((exists x. forall ((exists x. P(x)) - : bool = true

y. P(x) <=> <=> (forall y. Q(x) <=> <=> (forall

P(y)) <=> y. Q(y)))) <=> Q(y)) <=> y. P(y))))>>;;

On the other hand, the new procedure is ineﬃcient when there are many predicates, so diﬀerent methods are often preferable in other situations. For example, Pelletier problem 20, which is trivial for the wang procedure, is not feasible, since it involves constructing all 264 possible interpretations of four predicates with a domain of size 16: decide_monadic <<(forall x y. exists z. forall w. P(x) /\ Q(y) ==> R(z) /\ U(w)) ==> (exists x y. P(x) /\ Q(y)) ==> (exists z. R(z))>>;;

Decidable and undecidable preﬁx classes There are also straightforward small model bounds for the AE fragment that we have already considered, as ﬁrst shown by Bernays and Sch¨ onﬁnkel (1928); see Exercise 5.4. Besides being independently interesting and proving decidability, such a theorem can be used to show deﬁnitively that certain formulas have no AE equivalent, by showing that they do not have the corresponding instances of the ﬁnite model property. Ackermann (1928) also showed that formulas of the form: ∀x1 , . . . , xn . ∃y. ∀z1 , . . . , zm . P [x1 , . . . , xn , y, z1 , . . . , zm ] have the ﬁnite model property for validity. A still further generalization to formulas of the form: ∀x1 , . . . , xn . ∃y1 , y2 . ∀z1 , . . . , zm . P [x1 , . . . , xn , y1 , y2 , z1 , . . . , zm ] was proved by G¨ odel (1932). This set of preﬁxes exhausts the cases where the decision problem can be solved by use of the ﬁnite model property. For

326

Decidable problems

consider these two formulas, having the simplest quantiﬁer preﬁxes that fail to ﬁt in the subsets with the ﬁnite model property discussed so far: • ∃x y z. ∀u. R(x, x) ∨ ¬R(x, u) ∨ (R(x, y) ∧ R(y, z) ∧ ¬R(x, z)), • ∃x. ∀y. ∃z. R(x, x) ∨ ¬R(x, y) ∨ (R(y, z) ∧ ¬R(x, z)). We put them in prenex form to display the quantiﬁer preﬁx, but they are perhaps more perspicuous in the following logically equivalent forms, which the reader may verify using, say, meson: • ¬((∀x. ¬R(x, x)) ∧ (∀x. ∃z. R(x, z)) ∧ (∀x y z. R(x, y) ∧ R(y, z) ⇒ R(x, z))), • ¬((∀x. ¬R(x, x)) ∧ (∀x. ∃y. R(x, y) ∧ ∀z. R(y, z) ⇒ R(x, z))). Interpreting R(x, y) as the strict inequality relation x < y over the real numbers makes both formulas false. (This is not hard to see, and in the next section we will develop tools that can verify it automatically.) Thus neither is logically valid. On the other hand, we will show that they do both hold in all ﬁnite interpretations, and hence the ﬁnite model property fails. It suﬃces to establish this for the second formula because that implies the ﬁrst: meson <<~((forall x. ~R(x,x)) /\ (forall x. exists y. R(x,y) /\ forall z. R(y,z) ==> R(x,z))) ==> ~((forall x. ~R(x,x)) /\ (forall x. exists z. R(x,z)) /\ (forall x y z. R(x,y) /\ R(y,z) ==> R(x,z)))>>;; ... - : int list = [1; 5]

Suppose the second formula is false in some ﬁnite interpretation M ; being closed this means that its negation holds in M : (∀x. ¬R(x, x)) ∧ (∀x. ∃y. R(x, y) ∧ ∀z. R(y, z) ⇒ R(x, z)). Pick an arbitrary a0 ∈ M . The second conjunct shows that there is an a1 ∈ M with RM (a0 , a1 ) and also RM (a0 , z) for any other z with RM (a1 , z). Using the second conjunct again, we deduce that there is some a2 with R(a1 , a2 ), and by the auxiliary property we also have R(a0 , a2 ). Continuing in this way we can generate a sequence of elements (ai ) with RM (ai , aj ) for all i < j. Since the model is ﬁnite, we must eventually get a repetition, say ak = al for some k < l. But then RM (ak , al ) means RM (ak , ak ), violating the ﬁrst, irreﬂexivity, conjunct. The failure of the ﬁnite model property for these preﬁx classes doesn’t a priori rule out some other kind of solution to the decision problem, but in fact it was shown by, respectively, Sur´ anyi (1950) and Kahr, Moore and Wang (1962) that the decision problems for these preﬁxes are not solvable.

5.5 The ﬁnite model property

327

Hence, the quantiﬁer preﬁx ∀n ∃∃∀m represents the most complex class that is decidable in general. We will discuss the undecidability results in a little more detail in Chapter 7.

Adding equality We have assumed above that we are dealing with ﬁrst-order logic without equality, i.e. allowing non-normal interpretations. If we pass to ﬁrst-order logic with equality, the boundary between the decidable and undecidable preﬁx classes is slightly diﬀerent. We can deduce that the AE subset is still decidable even with equality, simply because if a formula p is AE, i.e. of the form: ∀x1 . . . xn . ∃y1 . . . ym . q with q quantiﬁer-free, we have |= p in ﬁrst-order logic with equality iﬀ |= eqaxiom(p) ⇒ p in pure ﬁrst-order logic. But eqaxiom(p) is always, after prenexing in any reasonable way, purely universal, say ∀z1 , . . . , zp . e, and consequently: |= eqaxiom(p) ⇒ p is equivalent to ∀x1 . . . xn . ∃y1 . . . ym z1 . . . zp . e ⇒ q and this is still AE, hence decidable. It’s worth noting that the solvability of this class with equality was the main result of the paper in which Ramsey (1930) introduced his famous combinatorial theorem.† G¨ odel (1932) asserted that his class ∀n ∃∃∀m with equality could be decided using the same method he introduced for the non-equality case. However it seems that this was one of G¨odel’s rare mistakes, for the claim was never subsequently backed up and eventually Goldfarb (1984) proved that the class is in fact undecidable. However, it was proved by Ackermann (1954) that the class with preﬁx ∀n ∃∀m with equality is decidable. The class with preﬁx ∃∀∃ is undecidable even without equality, so a fortiori, with equality. Once again this gives a complete classiﬁcation of decidability according to quantiﬁer preﬁx. Formulas involving only two variables (and no functions) also have the ﬁnite model property. We do not insist on prenex form here, so the two variables can be ‘re-used’ quite extensively and the fragment is surprisingly expressive. Decidability was ﬁrst demonstrated by Scott (1962), who reduced the problem to the G¨ odel preﬁx class ∀n ∃∃∀m . This reduction doesn’t help †

Ramsey’s proof of the decidability result appears laborious compared with the simple one we have given, but he proves a stronger result that the spectrum (set of possible cardinalities of models) is either ﬁnite or coﬁnite.

328

Decidable problems

for the class with equality, but Mortimer (1975) showed that it also has the ﬁnite model property, and a much sharper bound was proved by Gr¨ adel, Kolaitis and Vardi (1997). 5.6 Quantiﬁer elimination In search of further interesting cases where a decision method is possible, we turn our attention away from pure logical validity in all interpretations and towards a couple of related questions (still for logic with equality): • validity in a particular class of interpretations, i.e. whether |=M p for all interpretations M in a class K; • logical consequence from a set of axioms Σ, i.e. whether Σ |= p. For the examples we treat below (but not in general – see Exercises 5.5 and 5.6) which of these formulation is preferred is inconsequential because the class K is anyway deﬁned to be exactly the collection of models of a set of axioms Σ: Mod(Σ) = {M | for all ψ ∈ Σ, |=M ψ}. For example, K might be the class of all groups, which is exactly† the class of models of: (∀x y z. x · (y · z) = (x · y) · z) ∧ (∀x. 1 · x = x) ∧ (∀x. i(x) · x = 1). We can deﬁne a kind of converse to Mod, by deﬁning the theory of a class of interpretations K to be the set of all sentences holding in all interpretations in the class K: Th(K) = {ψ | for all I ∈ K, |=I ψ}. When we want to talk about the theory of a speciﬁc structure (i.e. a 1-element class of interpretations), we will use the same terminology. For example the ‘theory of real numbers’, which with a slight abuse of notation we may write Th(R), is deﬁned to be exactly the set of ﬁrst-order sentences that hold in the speciﬁc structure R. When we want to be precise about the language, as we often do, it’s common to further abuse notation by bundling the list of functions and predicates in to boot, e.g. Th(R, 0, 1, −, +, <) for a purely additive theory of reals with ‘<’ as the only predicate besides equality. Moreover, we sometimes emphasize that we are using ﬁrst-order †

We neglect subtleties over the choice of language, e.g. whether we actually have constants like 1 or just existential axioms. Although this doesn’t matter much in the case of groups, where identities and inverses are unique, the choice of language can in general signiﬁcantly aﬀect whether algebraic notions are instantiations of their model-theoretic generalizations (Hodges 1993b).

5.6 Quantiﬁer elimination

329

logic instead of some richer language by stressing ‘the ﬁrst-order theory of . . . ’ or ‘the elementary theory of . . . ’. We have Σ ⊆ Th(Mod(Σ)), with equality holding precisely when Σ is closed under logical consequence. A set of formulas with this property has a special name, one we use so routinely below that the reader may forget that it has a precise technical meaning: Deﬁnition 5.4 A theory is a set of formulas T closed under logical consequence, i.e. such that for any formula p we have T |= p iﬀ p ∈ T . As we might expect, Th(K) is always a theory. So also is the set of logical consequences Cn(Σ) = {p | Σ |= p} of any set of formulas Σ. In the latter case we say that the theory T is axiomatized by Σ and say that the theory is axiomatizable.† If there is a ﬁnite set of axioms, we say that the theory is ﬁnitely axiomatizable. Some other important characteristics a theory may have are listed below. (We phrase them in terms of T |= p rather than the equivalent p ∈ T so that we can forgive loosely applying them to a set of axioms for a theory rather than the theory itself.) • Consistent – we never have both T |= p and T |= ¬p. (Equivalently, we do not have T |= ⊥, or some formula is not a logical consequence of T .) • Complete – for any sentence p, either T |= p or T |= ¬p. (Note that p is a sentence: with free variables this property could hardly be expected.) • Decidable – there is an algorithm that takes as input a formula p and decides whether T |= p. Note that ‘consistent’ is synonymous with ‘satisﬁable’ when applied to a theory, but it’s more common to use the former in this case.‡ The reader should also take particular care over the use of the word ‘complete’ as applied to a theory, since it is used with a signiﬁcantly diﬀerent meaning when applied to a proof system as in Section 4.3 and Chapter 6; see also Section 7.3. Another characterization of completeness is that the ﬁrst-order consequences are completely determined. Theorem 5.5 A theory is complete iﬀ all its models are elementarily equivalent. † ‡

Take care: some authors require the set of axioms to be recursively enumerable. Some authors use satisﬁable for the semantic notion T |= ⊥ and consistent for a corresponding syntactic notion T ⊥ for a suitable proof system. But still, for ﬁrst-order logic and a complete proof system of the kind we consider in chapter 6 they coincide anyway.

330

Decidable problems

Proof Both properties hold trivially if the theory is unsatisﬁable, since then there are no models and the theory contains ⊥ and all other formulas. So we can restrict ourselves to theories T with at least one model, say M . If theory T is complete, take any formula p that holds in M and consider its universal closure p∗ = generalize(p). Since T is complete, we either have p∗ ∈ T or ¬p∗ ∈ T . The latter is impossible because M is a model of T in which ¬p∗ does not hold, so p∗ ∈ T and hence T |= p, so p holds in all models. Suppose now that all models of T are elementarily equivalent, and let p be any sentence. Either p or ¬p holds in M (in all valuations, since p is a sentence) and so by elementary equivalence in all models, i.e. either T |= p or T |= ¬p. It’s useful to remember that a complete theory with a ﬁnite set of axioms, which we can collect by conjunction into a single axiom A, is automatically decidable. This is simply because for any sentence p we can search in parallel for veriﬁcations of A ⇒ p and A ⇒ ¬p, knowing by completeness that one or the other will terminate (perhaps both if the theory is inconsistent). With a little more care, this argument generalizes, using the compactness theorem, to cases where the axiom set is recursively enumerable. On the other hand, this is usually not a very practical approach, so we will focus on more direct methods of proving decidability.

Quantiﬁer elimination A theory T in a ﬁrst-order language L admits quantiﬁer elimination if for each formula p of L, there is a quantiﬁer-free formula q with FV(q) ⊆ FV(p) such that T |= p ⇔ q (or as we sometimes say, p and q are T -equivalent).† As usual, we are interested in constructing quantiﬁer-free equivalents by an algorithmic process, rather than merely showing that they exist in principle. Quantiﬁer elimination in the case of arithmetical theories is a natural and far-reaching generalization of testing the solvability of equations, which is quantiﬁer elimination for formulas of the particular form ∃x. E[x] = 0. If a theory admits quantiﬁer elimination, we can reduce many logical questions that seem diﬃcult to the special case of quantiﬁer-free formulas, where they can be much easier. We are particularly interested in (completeness and) decidability. If we start with a sentence, its quantiﬁer-free T -equivalent must be ground, i.e. contain no variables at all. For many, though not all, theories †

When the language contains at least one constant, the condition on free variables is no real additional restriction since we could always instantiate any new variables while retaining the validity of T |= p ⇔ q.

5.6 Quantiﬁer elimination

331

of practical interest, the ground formulas have the same truth-values in all models and can be evaluated to ‘true’ or ‘false’ algorithmically; for example, in arithmetic theories they are just concrete arithmetic assertions like 2+2 = 5 ⇒ 7 < 3. Any such theory that admits a quantiﬁer elimination algorithm is therefore complete and decidable, and an eﬀective decision procedure is to reduce a formula to a quantiﬁer-free equivalent and evaluate the latter. Quite generally, to establish quantiﬁer elimination for arbitrary ﬁrst-order formulas, it suﬃces to demonstrate it for formulas with the following rather special form: ∃x. α1 ∧ · · · ∧ αn with each αi a literal (either an atomic formula or the negation of an atomic formula) containing x. The basic idea is that we can apply this elimination successively from the innermost quantiﬁer to the outermost, transforming ∀x.P [x] into ¬(∃x.¬P [x]) and always putting the body in disjunctive normal form and distributing the existential quantiﬁer over it. We will now expand this terse explanation into an OCaml function taking a quantiﬁer elimination procedure for formulas of this special form and returning a general quantiﬁer elimination procedure. The ﬁrst function accepts the core quantiﬁer elimination procedure bfn and generalizes it slightly to work for ∃x. p where p is any conjunction of literals, some perhaps not involving x. The method is simply to partition the literals into those containing x (ycjs) and those not (ncjs) and separate oﬀ the latter before calling bfn on the rest, implicitly using the equivalence (∃x. p ∧ q[x]) ⇔ p ∧ ∃x. q[x]: let qelim bfn x p = let cjs = conjuncts p in let ycjs,ncjs = partition (mem x ** fv) cjs in if ycjs = [] then p else let q = bfn (Exists(x,list_conj ycjs)) in itlist mk_and ncjs q;;

Now we deﬁne the main function, with a somewhat intricate parametrization. For the moment, assume afn vars fm simply returns its second argument fm unchanged, while nfn performs a transformation into disjunctive normal form. The core quantiﬁer elimination is qfn, which takes as an additional parameter the list of quantiﬁers passed through so far; this information is sometimes useful. Before anything else we miniscope the formula, to make the core quantiﬁer elimination apply to as small a formula as possible.

332

Decidable problems

let lift_qelim afn nfn qfn = let rec qelift vars fm = match fm with | Atom(R(_,_)) -> afn vars fm | Not(p) -> Not(qelift vars p) | And(p,q) -> And(qelift vars p,qelift vars q) | Or(p,q) -> Or(qelift vars p,qelift vars q) | Imp(p,q) -> Imp(qelift vars p,qelift vars q) | Iff(p,q) -> Iff(qelift vars p,qelift vars q) | Forall(x,p) -> Not(qelift vars (Exists(x,Not p))) | Exists(x,p) -> let djs = disjuncts(nfn(qelift (x::vars) p)) in list_disj(map (qelim (qfn vars) x) djs) | _ -> fm in fun fm -> simplify(qelift (fv fm) (miniscope fm));;

For the propositional connectives, the same procedure is recursively applied at depth. A universally quantiﬁed formula is mapped into an existential one using the inﬁnite De Morgan law. Thus, the interesting case is when the formula is existentially quantiﬁed. In this case, we recursively apply the overall quantiﬁer elimination procedure to the body, with an augmented list of variables, which should result in a quantiﬁer-free equivalent for the body. We transform this into DNF by a call to nfn, then split the result into its disjuncts and deal with each of them by qelim, implicitly using the equivalence: (∃x. D1 [x] ∨ · · · ∨ Dn [x]) ⇔ (∃x. D1 [x]) ∨ · · · ∨ (∃x. Dn [x]). It is sometimes convenient to pass as nfn an enhanced version of the usual DNF conversion, performing the initial NNF transformation with a couple of tweaks. First, we may wish to apply a function to modify literals, for example to transform negated inequalities into other forms, say ¬(s < t) to t ≤ s. Second, our quantiﬁer elimination functions will often perform case-splits according to some property p of the other variables, yielding a formula of the form p ∧ q0 ∨ ¬p ∧ q1 . If we subsequently negate this and perform DNF transformation, we tend to get an explosion in size. However, we can exploit the fact that ¬(p ∧ q0 ∨ ¬p ∧ q1 ) ⇔ p ∧ ¬q0 ∨ ¬p ∧ ¬q1 . This wrinkle, together with an extra parameter for a ‘literal modiﬁcation’ function lfn, is incorporated into a ‘clever NNF’ function cnnf. We incorporate simpliﬁcation at the beginning, and at the end too in case the literal modiﬁcation function lfn creates additional opportunities.

5.6 Quantiﬁer elimination

333

let cnnf lfn = let rec cnnf fm = match fm with And(p,q) -> And(cnnf p,cnnf q) | Or(p,q) -> Or(cnnf p,cnnf q) | Imp(p,q) -> Or(cnnf(Not p),cnnf q) | Iff(p,q) -> Or(And(cnnf p,cnnf q),And(cnnf(Not p),cnnf(Not q))) | Not(Not p) -> cnnf p | Not(And(p,q)) -> Or(cnnf(Not p),cnnf(Not q)) | Not(Or(And(p,q),And(p’,r))) when p’ = negate p -> Or(cnnf (And(p,Not q)),cnnf (And(p’,Not r))) | Not(Or(p,q)) -> And(cnnf(Not p),cnnf(Not q)) | Not(Imp(p,q)) -> And(cnnf p,cnnf(Not q)) | Not(Iff(p,q)) -> Or(And(cnnf p,cnnf(Not q)), And(cnnf(Not p),cnnf q)) | _ -> lfn fm in simplify ** cnnf ** simplify;;

Example: dense linear orders The theory of ‘dense linear orders without end points’ (DLOs) is based on a language containing the binary predicate ‘<’ as well as equality, but no function symbols. It can be axiomatized by the following ﬁnite set of sentences: ∀x y. x = y ∨ x < y ∨ y < x, ∀x y z. x < y ∧ y < z ⇒ x < z, ∀x. ¬(x < x), ∀x y. x < y ⇒ ∃z. x < z ∧ z < y, ∀x. ∃y. x < y, ∀x. ∃y. y < x. The ﬁrst three are fairly usual axioms for an irreﬂexive total (linear) order. The next one asserts ‘denseness’, i.e. that between each pair of elements there is another, while the last two assert that there is no greatest or least element. Two natural and signiﬁcantly diﬀerent models of these axioms are R and Q with the predicate ‘<’ interpreted in the usual way. (Z, by contrast, does not satisfy the denseness axiom and so is not a model of the DLO axioms.) As shown by Langford (1927), this theory admits quantiﬁer elimination, and we will demonstrate an explicit algorithm for it. By the above reduction result, it suﬃces to consider a formula ∃x. l1 [x] ∧ · · · ∧ ln [x] where each li [x] is a literal containing x. In fact, by giving the following negated literal modiﬁer to the cnnf function, we can eliminate negated literals based on the equivalences ¬(s < t) ⇔ s = t ∨ t < s and ¬(s = t) ⇔ s < t ∨ t < s:

334

Decidable problems

let lfn_dlo fm = match fm with Not(Atom(R("<",[s;t]))) -> Or(Atom(R("=",[s;t])),Atom(R("<",[t;s]))) | Not(Atom(R("=",[s;t]))) -> Or(Atom(R("<",[s;t])),Atom(R("<",[t;s]))) | _ -> fm;;

Thus the core function may assume that all the literals are atoms, which since there are no function symbols must simply be of the form x < y or x = y for variables x and y. Any atom of the form x = x is trivially true and can be ignored; other atoms are collected into a list cjs. If any of these is an equation, then it must (because all literals contain the quantiﬁed variable) be of the form x = y or y = x where x is the existentially quantiﬁed variable to be eliminated and y is another variable. In this case we can get a logically equivalent formula by removing the quantiﬁer and substituting y for x throughout the other conjuncts – this just reﬂects logical equivalences such as (∃x. x = y ∧ P [x, y]) ⇔ P [y, y]. If this step is not applicable, then all atoms must be inequalities. If one is of the form x < x, it and hence the whole formula is trivially false. Otherwise we collect together as ls the set of terms si appearing in inequalities si < x and as rs those tj appearing in inequalities x < tj . Now, note that in the theory the existential formula ∃x. ( si < x) ∧ ( x < tj ) i

j

has the quantiﬁer-free equivalent

si < tj

i,j

and so the algorithm forms this conjunction. For the justiﬁcation of this step, note that si < x ∧ x < tj implies that si < tj , while, conversely, if i,j si < tj , then in the model the largest si and the smallest tj – and since the ordering is total there must be such – are in the relation si < tj and so by denseness there is an x between them and hence by transitivity between all other pairs. In cases where there are no inequalities of one kind or another (ls or rs is empty), the formula is equivalent to ‘true’ since the DLO axioms assert that there are no endpoints. Note that list conj returns ‘’ for the empty list, so these degenerate cases work without special-case logic:

5.6 Quantiﬁer elimination

335

let dlobasic fm = match fm with Exists(x,p) -> let cjs = subtract (conjuncts p) [Atom(R("=",[Var x;Var x]))] in try let eqn = find is_eq cjs in let s,t = dest_eq eqn in let y = if s = Var x then t else s in list_conj(map (subst (x |=> y)) (subtract cjs [eqn])) with Failure _ -> if mem (Atom(R("<",[Var x;Var x]))) cjs then False else let lefts,rights = partition (fun (Atom(R("<",[s;t]))) -> t = Var x) cjs in let ls = map (fun (Atom(R("<",[l;_]))) -> l) lefts and rs = map (fun (Atom(R("<",[_;r]))) -> r) rights in list_conj(allpairs (fun l r -> Atom(R("<",[l;r]))) ls rs) | _ -> failwith "dlobasic";;

Now the overall quantiﬁer elimination procedure is simple. We add an initial conversion to allow us to use other inequality relations and translate them into the core language (s ≤ t ⇔ ¬(t < s) etc.): let afn_dlo vars fm = match fm with Atom(R("<=",[s;t])) -> Not(Atom(R("<",[t;s]))) | Atom(R(">=",[s;t])) -> Not(Atom(R("<",[s;t]))) | Atom(R(">",[s;t])) -> Atom(R("<",[t;s])) | _ -> fm;;

and then exploit the usual lifting function: let quelim_dlo = lift_qelim afn_dlo (dnf ** cnnf lfn_dlo) (fun v -> dlobasic);;

For example: # quelim_dlo <>;; - : fol formula = <<true>>

We can also apply quantiﬁer elimination to formulas with free variables. Sometimes these still simplify to a Boolean constant: # quelim_dlo <<exists z. z < x /\ z < y>>;; - : fol formula = <<true>>

while others give non-trivial formulas, sometimes in their simplest form, sometimes not:

336 # # -

Decidable problems

quelim_dlo <<exists z. x < z /\ z < y>>;; : fol formula = <<x < y>> quelim_dlo <<(forall x. x < a ==> x < b)>>;; : fol formula = <<~(b < a \/ b < a)>>

We can always prove equivalence to a simpler form we have thought up for ourselves by eliminating all quantiﬁers from the claimed equivalence: # # -

quelim_dlo < x < b) <=> a <= b>>;; : fol formula = <<true>> quelim_dlo < x < b) <=> a = b>>;; : fol formula = <<true>>

The following less obvious example conﬁrms that the two formulas we gave in connection with the ﬁnite model property (Section 5.5) do indeed fail over a dense linear order. (We only check one because the other one implies it, but both work equally well.) # quelim_dlo <<exists x y z. forall u. x < x \/ ~x >;; - : fol formula = <>

Since the only ground formulas in the language are and ⊥ (there being no constants), this implies that the theory of DLOs is complete and decidable. By Theorem 5.5 we also see that all models of the DLO axioms are elementarily equivalent, and so no sentence in the ﬁrst-order language considered here can distinguish two models of the theory, such as R and Q. Of course, by using a language with a multiplication operator we can make such distinctions, e.g. via the formula ∃x. x · x = 2. 5.7 Presburger arithmetic We now consider the theory of linear integer arithmetic, which is roughly the set of formulas true in Z that are expressible without using multiplication. (In this context linear signiﬁes the lack of multiplication, not the presence of a total/linear order.) For example, ∀x. ∃q r. x = q + q + r ∧ 0 ≤ r ∧ r < 2 is in this theory; it asserts that every integer x has a quotient and nonnegative remainder when divided by 2. But ∀x. x ≤ x · x is not included because it involves multiplication, even though it does hold in Z. In the most obvious formulation, with the language including just numeric constants, addition and subtraction functions and inequality predicates, the theory does not admit quantiﬁer elimination; for example ∃x. x + x = y has no quantiﬁer-free equivalent. However, if we include in the language

5.7 Presburger arithmetic

337

divisibility predicates Dk for all integers k ≥ 2, we will see that quantiﬁer elimination does hold, even if the original formula itself involves these divisibility predicates. Note that ground instances of divisibility predicates are always decidable – for example D5 (7) is false and D5 (15) is true – so a quantiﬁer elimination algorithm will still give us a decision procedure for sentences. In principle, then, we are ﬁxing the following ﬁrst-order language, which has inﬁnitely many predicate symbols: • constants 0 and 1; • functions of unary negation (‘−’), addition (‘+’) and subtraction (‘−’); • equality (‘=’) and all the usual inequality predicates (≤, <, ≥ and >) as well as unary predicates Dk (‘is divisible by k’) for all integers k ≥ 2. We will not bother to spell out an explicit set of axioms for the theory, but will work directly with properties that clearly hold true in the usual model Z. This theory is usually called ‘Presburger arithmetic’, in honour of Presburger (1930), who ﬁrst demonstrated quantiﬁer elimination and decidability for it. In the actual implementation, we are a bit more liberal with the language; our procedure will simply fail if this liberality is exploited to express things that could not be expressed in the ‘pure’ language like x · x. • We allow arbitrary positive and negative integer constants. This makes no diﬀerence in principle because we could always write −3 as −(1 + 1 + 1), etc. • We allow the multiplication function provided that it is only used to express multiplication by constants. Again, this is a convenience and we could avoid 4 · x by writing x + x + x + x, etc. • We use a single binary divisibility predicate divides, but we only allow the left-hand argument to be a (positive) integer constant. In discussions we sometimes use the conventional notation d|x for ‘d divides x’. We have a special abbreviation zero for the integer constant term 0, since we use it quite often. let zero = Fn("0",[]);;

The following functions convert between terms that are integer constants and OCaml unlimited-precision numbers, and test whether a term is indeed an integer constant.

338

Decidable problems

let mk_numeral n = Fn(string_of_num n,[]);; let dest_numeral t = match t with Fn(ns,[]) -> num_of_string ns | _ -> failwith "dest_numeral";; let is_numeral = can dest_numeral;;

Using these functions we can take an arbitrary unary or binary operation on OCaml numbers, such as negation or addition, and lift it to an operation on numeral constants: let numeral1 fn n = mk_numeral(fn(dest_numeral n));; let numeral2 fn m n = mk_numeral(fn (dest_numeral m) (dest_numeral n));;

Canonical forms As noted, we allow multiplication by numeral constants. Indeed, it makes the transformations involved in quantiﬁer elimination easier to implement if we always keep terms in a canonical form: c1 · x1 + · · · + cn · xn + k, where n ≥ 0, ci and k are integer constants, and the xi are distinct variables, with a ﬁxed order. We insist that ci are present even if they are 1, but that they are never 0, and that k is present even if it is 0. Thus, a canonical term is a constant precisely if the top-level operator is not addition. We need two main operations on terms in canonical form: multiplication by an integer constant, and addition. The former just amounts to multiplying up all the coeﬃcients: n · (c1 · x1 + · · · + cn · xn + k) = (n · c1 ) · x1 + · · · + (n · cn ) · xn + (n · k) unless n = 0, in which case we should just return 0. This can be implemented as a simple recursion: let rec linear_cmul n tm = if n =/ Int 0 then zero else match tm with Fn("+",[Fn("*",[c; x]); r]) -> Fn("+",[Fn("*",[numeral1(( */ ) n) c; x]); linear_cmul n r]) | k -> numeral1(( */ ) n) k;;

5.7 Presburger arithmetic

339

For addition, we need to merge together the sequences of variables, maintaining the ﬁxed order. We assume that this order is deﬁned by a list of variable names, and use earlier to tell us whether element x comes earlier than element y in such a list. The ﬁrst clause corresponds to a term addition (c1 · x1 + r1 ) + (c2 · x2 + r2 ) and the action taken depends on the relationship of the variables x1 and x2 . If they are equal, then the coeﬃcients are added and the remainders dealt with recursively. (Note that if the coeﬃcients cancel, we do not include that term in the result, since we wanted all the ci to be nonzero.) Otherwise, whichever variable takes precedence is put at the head of the output term and recursion proceeds; this is also the action on the other clauses where one term or the other is a constant term. Finally, if both terms are constants they are just added as numerals. let rec linear_add vars tm1 tm2 = match (tm1,tm2) with (Fn("+",[Fn("*",[c1; Var x1]); r1]), Fn("+",[Fn("*",[c2; Var x2]); r2])) -> if x1 = x2 then let c = numeral2 (+/) c1 c2 in if c = zero then linear_add vars r1 r2 else Fn("+",[Fn("*",[c; Var x1]); linear_add vars r1 r2]) else if earlier vars x1 x2 then Fn("+",[Fn("*",[c1; Var x1]); linear_add vars r1 tm2]) else Fn("+",[Fn("*",[c2; Var x2]); linear_add vars tm1 r2]) | (Fn("+",[Fn("*",[c1; Var x1]); r1]),k2) -> Fn("+",[Fn("*",[c1; Var x1]); linear_add vars r1 k2]) | (k1,Fn("+",[Fn("*",[c2; Var x2]); r2])) -> Fn("+",[Fn("*",[c2; Var x2]); linear_add vars k1 r2]) | _ -> numeral2(+/) tm1 tm2;;

Using these basic functions, it’s easy to deﬁne negation and subtraction on canonical forms: let linear_neg tm = linear_cmul (Int(-1)) tm;; let linear_sub vars tm1 tm2 = linear_add vars tm1 (linear_neg tm2);;

and we can even deﬁne multiplication of any two canonical terms, though it will fail unless at least one is just a constant: let linear_mul tm1 tm2 = if is_numeral tm1 then linear_cmul (dest_numeral tm1) tm2 else if is_numeral tm2 then linear_cmul (dest_numeral tm2) tm1 else failwith "linear_mul: nonlinearity";;

In order to convert any permissible term into canonical form, we proceed by recursion, applying one of the arithmetic operations just deﬁned to the

340

Decidable problems

translated subexpressions (allowing multiplication only if one side is simply a numeral), leaving numeral constants unchanged and converting variables from x into their canonical form 1 · x + 0: let rec lint vars tm = match tm with Var(_) -> Fn("+",[Fn("*",[Fn("1",[]); tm]); zero]) | Fn("-",[t]) -> linear_neg (lint vars t) | Fn("+",[s;t]) -> linear_add vars (lint vars s) (lint vars t) | Fn("-",[s;t]) -> linear_sub vars (lint vars s) (lint vars t) | Fn("*",[s;t]) -> linear_mul (lint vars s) (lint vars t) | _ -> if is_numeral tm then tm else failwith "lint: unknown term";;

We next extend this linearization to atomic formulas; this will eventually be plugged into lift qelim as the parameter afn. We force both equations and inequalities to have zero on the LHS, e.g. transforming s = t to 0 = s−t and s < t to 0 < t − s; this makes some later code more regular since in the case of d|t the ‘interesting’ term is also the right-hand argument. Because the integers are a discrete structure, we take the chance to rewrite all the atomic inequality formulas in terms of <, e.g. s ≤ t as 0 < (t + 1) − s. And ﬁnally, we also force the left-hand constants in divisibility assertions to be positive. We start with a simple helper function mkatom to linearize a term and create an atom with that as the left-hand argument and zero as the other: let mkatom vars p t = Atom(R(p,[zero; lint vars t]));;

Now the main function is straightforward case-by-case modiﬁcation of the input formula. let linform vars fm = match fm with Atom(R("divides",[c;t])) -> Atom(R("divides",[numeral1 abs_num c; lint vars t])) | Atom(R("=",[s;t])) -> mkatom vars "=" (Fn("-",[t;s])) | Atom(R("<",[s;t])) -> mkatom vars "<" (Fn("-",[t;s])) | Atom(R(">",[s;t])) -> mkatom vars "<" (Fn("-",[s;t])) | Atom(R("<=",[s;t])) -> mkatom vars "<" (Fn("-",[Fn("+",[t;Fn("1",[])]);s])) | Atom(R(">=",[s;t])) -> mkatom vars "<" (Fn("-",[Fn("+",[s;Fn("1",[])]);t])) | _ -> fm;;

In the main body of the procedure, we’ll now be able to assume that the only inequality predicate is ‘<’. It may still occur negated, but if so we transform it into an unnegated equivalent using the code below. In the DLO procedure the analogous transformation involves a case-split such as

5.7 Presburger arithmetic

341

¬(s < t) ⇔ s = t ∨ t < s, but, because of the discreteness of the integers, we can just use ¬(0 < t) ⇔ 0 < 1 − t: let rec posineq fm = match fm with | Not(Atom(R("<",[Fn("0",[]); t]))) -> Atom(R("<",[Fn("0",[]); linear_sub [] (Fn("1",[])) t])) | _ -> fm;;

Cooper’s algorithm Presburger’s original algorithm is fairly straightforward, and follows the classic quantiﬁer elimination pattern of dealing with the special case of an existentially quantiﬁed conjunction of literals. However, we will present a clever optimized version due to Cooper (1972), which is hardly more complicated and allows us to eliminate an existential quantiﬁer whose body is an arbitrary quantiﬁer-free NNF formula. This can be much more eﬃcient since it avoids the blowup often caused by the transformation to DNF, especially in the presence of many quantiﬁer alternations. For an in-depth discussion of Presburger’s original procedure, the reader can consult Enderton (1972) and Smory´ nski (1980), or indeed the original article, which is quite readable – Stansifer (1984) gives an annotated English translation. Presburger’s algorithm has additional historical signiﬁcance for us, since the implementation by Davis (1957) was arguably the ﬁrst logical decision procedure actually to be implemented on a computer. Consider the task of eliminating the existential quantiﬁer from ∃x.p where p is quantiﬁer-free. We will assume that all the atoms have been maintained in the standard form with 0 on the left and a linearized term on the right, and only strict inequalities using ‘<’ present. Using cnnf with the parameter posineq to eliminate negated inequalities, we may assume in the core procedure that p is in NNF, i.e. built up from conjunction and disjunction from literals of the forms 0 = t, ¬(0 = t), 0 < t, d | t or ¬(d | t), with each term t normalized so that if x occurs in it, it is of the form c · x + s. (Note that lift qelim produces the vars parameter in such a way that the innermost quantiﬁed variable, the one we want to eliminate ﬁrst, is at the head of the list, and hence will appear ﬁrst in the canonical form of any term involving it.) In order to correlate the various instances of x multiplied by diﬀerent coeﬃcients, we ﬁnd the (positive) least common multiple of all the coeﬃcients of x, returning 1 if there are no instances of x:

342

Decidable problems

let rec formlcm x fm = match fm with Atom(R(p,[_;Fn("+",[Fn("*",[c;y]);z])])) when y = x -> abs_num(dest_numeral c) | Not(p) -> formlcm x p | And(p,q) | Or(p,q) -> lcm_num (formlcm x p) (formlcm x q) | _ -> Int 1;;

(Note that the atom clause works uniformly for divisibility and other predicates, because the ‘interesting’ term is always the right-hand argument.) Now, having computed the LCM, say l, by this method, we can make the coeﬃcient of x equal to ±l everywhere by taking each atomic formula whose right-hand argument is of the form c · x + z, and consistently multiplying it through by an appropriate m. For all but inequalities this is m = l/c and so the resulting coeﬃcient of x will be l; for inequalities we use m = |l/c|, since we cannot multiply by negative numbers without changing their sense. Actually, as part of this transformation we force the coeﬃcients of x from ±l · x to ±1 · x, in anticipation of the next stage: let rec adjustcoeff x l fm = match fm with Atom(R(p,[d; Fn("+",[Fn("*",[c;y]);z])])) when y = x -> let m = l // dest_numeral c in let n = if p = "<" then abs_num(m) else m in let xtm = Fn("*",[mk_numeral(m // n); x]) in Atom(R(p,[linear_cmul (abs_num m) d; Fn("+",[xtm; linear_cmul n z])])) | Not(p) -> Not(adjustcoeff x l p) | And(p,q) -> And(adjustcoeff x l p,adjustcoeff x l q) | Or(p,q) -> Or(adjustcoeff x l p,adjustcoeff x l q) | _ -> fm;;

The next stage, which we have partly folded in above, is to replace l · x with just x and add a new divisibility clause, justiﬁed by the following equivalence: (∃x. P [l · x]) ⇔ (∃x. l | x ∧ P [x]). The following code implements the entire transformation, reducing the coeﬃcient of x to be ±1 using the above functions, then adding the additional conjunct l | x, or actually, to retain canonicality, l | 1 · x + 0. We make the slight optimization of not including the trivially true divisibility formula if l = 1, but we still call adjustcoeff since it might be needed to transform, say, 0 = −1 · x + 3 into 0 = 1 · x + −3 which is the form we expect later on.

5.7 Presburger arithmetic

343

let unitycoeff x fm = let l = formlcm x fm in let fm’ = adjustcoeff x l fm in if l =/ Int 1 then fm’ else let xp = Fn("+",[Fn("*",[Fn("1",[]);x]); zero]) in And(Atom(R("divides",[mk_numeral l; xp])),adjustcoeff x l fm);;

Now we come to the main quantiﬁer elimination step for the transformed formula ∃x. P [x]. Note that since the integers are discrete and any set of integers bounded below has a minimal element, ∃x. P [x] holds iﬀ either (i) there are arbitrarily large and negative x such that P [x], or (ii) there is a minimal x such that P [x]. So we’ll separately consider how to ﬁnd quantiﬁerfree equivalents for the two cases on the right of this equivalence: (∃x. P [x]) ⇔ (∀y. ∃x. x < y ∧ P [x]) ∨ (∃x. P [x] ∧ ∀y. y < x ⇒ ¬P [y]). Arbitrarily large and negative x Consider ﬁrst the case where there are arbitrarily large and negative x such that P [x]. For suﬃciently large and negative x, we claim that P [x] must be equivalent to P−∞ [x], the formula that results from replacing the atoms in P [x] as follows: In P [x] 0=x+a 0<x+a 0 < −x + a

In P−∞ [x] ⊥ ⊥

and leaving other atoms, i.e. divisibility assertions and those not involving x, unchanged. Lemma 5.6 For suﬃciently large and negative x, P [x] and P−∞ [x] are equivalent, i.e. ∃y. ∀x. x < y ⇒ (P [x] ⇔ P−∞ [x]) holds. Proof Consider the possible atomic formulas ﬁrst, starting with P [x] of the form 0 = x + a or 0 < x + a. In these cases P−∞ [x] is ⊥ and we have ∀x. x < −a ⇒ (P [x] ⇔ ⊥). The required result follows, with −a the witness for the existentially quantiﬁed variable y. The 0 < −x + a case is similar: P−∞ [x] is and indeed ∀x.x < a ⇒ (P [x] ⇔ ). For other atomic formulas, P−∞ [x] is the same as P [x] and so the result holds trivially. Intuitively, we can now take the minimum of all the y values for the atoms contained in the formula. More formally, we can proceed by induction on

344

Decidable problems

its structure. If P [x] is of the form ¬Q[x], then by the inductive hypothesis ∃y.∀x.x < y ⇒ (Q[x] ⇔ Q−∞ [x]), so ∃y.∀x.x < y ⇒ (¬Q[x] ⇔ ¬Q−∞ [x]) as required. If P [x] is of the form Q[x] ∧ R[x], then by the inductive hypothesis ∃y. ∀x. x < y ⇒ (Q[x] ⇔ Q−∞ [x]) and ∃z. ∀x. x < z ⇒ (R[x] ⇔ R−∞ [x]) hold, so ∃w. ∀x. x < w ⇒ (P [x] ⇔ P−∞ [x]) (given y and z we can choose w to be their minimum). The case where P [x] is of the form Q[x] ∨ R[x] is very similar. Here is the ‘minus inﬁnity’ transformation coded in OCaml, assuming that we have already used the canonical form conversions: let rec minusinf x fm = match fm with Atom(R("=",[Fn("0",[]); Fn("+",[Fn("*",[Fn("1",[]);y]);a])])) when y = x -> False | Atom(R("<",[Fn("0",[]); Fn("+",[Fn("*",[pm1;y]);a])])) when y = x -> if pm1 = Fn("1",[]) then False else True | Not(p) -> Not(minusinf x p) | And(p,q) -> And(minusinf x p,minusinf x q) | Or(p,q) -> Or(minusinf x p,minusinf x q) | _ -> fm;;

The next key point is that all divisibility terms d | ±x + a are unchanged if x is altered by an integer multiple of d. Let us ﬁnd the (positive) least common multiple D of all ds occurring in formulas of the form d | c · x + a (we know in fact that c = ±1 at this stage) using the following code: let rec divlcm x fm = match fm with Atom(R("divides",[d;Fn("+",[Fn("*",[c;y]);a])])) when y = x -> dest_numeral d | Not(p) -> divlcm x p | And(p,q) | Or(p,q) -> lcm_num (divlcm x p) (divlcm x q) | _ -> Int 1;;

Then all divisibility atoms in the formula are invariant if x is changed to x±kD. Indeed, in the case of P−∞ [x], divisibility atoms and other atoms not involving x are all that’s left, so P−∞ [x ± kD] ⇔ P−∞ [x] always holds. Thus we can ﬁnd a simpler equivalent for our current target formula ∀y. ∃x. x < y ∧ P [x]. Theorem 5.7 For any P [x] quantiﬁer-free and in NNF we have (∀y. ∃x. x < y ∧ P [x]) ⇔

D i=1

P−∞ [i].

5.7 Presburger arithmetic

345

Proof By Lemma 5.6, P [x] and P−∞ [x] are equivalent for suﬃciently negative x, so the left-hand side of this formula is equivalent to ∀y. ∃x. x < y ∧P−∞ [x]. Since, by the above remarks, P−∞ [x] is invariant when x changes by any multiple of D, this is equivalent simply to ∃x.P−∞ [x], for given any x with P−∞ [x] we can ﬁnd an arbitrarily large and negative one by subtracting a multiple of D. Finally, again by the invariance of P−∞ [x] under multiples of D, this is equivalent to D i=1 P−∞ [i], since any x is congruent to one of those values modulo D. (The use of 1, . . . , D is inessential; we could have used 0, . . . , D − 1 or any other D numbers that are pairwise incongruent modulo D.) A minimal x We now turn to the other possibility, of a minimal x satisfying P [x]. In this case P [x] holds but P [x − D] does not. Since divisibility formulas do not change under translation by D, this implies that the change from true to false must have arisen from one of the other literals changing from true to false in the step from x to a smaller value. For such a literal, we can always identify a ‘boundary point’ b such that the literal is false for x = b but true for x = b + 1. For example, for 0 < x + a, the boundary point is b = −a since 0 < x + a is false for x = −a but true for x = 1 − a. Here are all the boundary points for literals that can change from true to false as x decreases by D, where applicable.

Literal 0=x+a ¬(0 = x + a) 0<x+a 0 < −x + a d|x+a ¬(d | x + a) literals without x

Boundary point −(a + 1) −a −a none none none none

The collection of such boundary points for the relevant literals is called the B-set for the formula in question.† In OCaml: †

There is no reason to suppose that Cooper meant the ‘B’ to stand for boundary, since he used ‘A’ for the dual notion. But it is perhaps a good way of thinking of it.

346

Decidable problems

let rec bset x fm = match fm with Not(Atom(R("=",[Fn("0",[]); Fn("+",[Fn("*",[Fn("1",[]);y]);a])]))) when y = x -> [linear_neg a] | Atom(R("=",[Fn("0",[]); Fn("+",[Fn("*",[Fn("1",[]);y]);a])])) when y = x -> [linear_neg(linear_add [] a (Fn("1",[])))] | Atom(R("<",[Fn("0",[]); Fn("+",[Fn("*",[Fn("1",[]);y]);a])])) when y = x -> [linear_neg a] | Not(p) -> bset x p | And(p,q) -> union (bset x p) (bset x q) | Or(p,q) -> union (bset x p) (bset x q) | _ -> [];;

This is the crucial property of the B-set. Theorem 5.8 If D is the LCM of all relevant divisors in a quantiﬁer-free NNF formula P [x] with no logically negated inequality literals and a B-set B, and P [x] holds while P [x − D] does not, then x = b + j for some b ∈ B and 1 ≤ j ≤ D. Proof First consider the literals for which the B-set is nonempty. If P [x] is a literal 0 = x + a, then P [x] holding means x = −a. Since the B-set is {−(a + 1)} and x = −a = −(a + 1) + j for j = 1, the result follows. If P [x] is ¬(0 = x + a) then ¬P [x − D] means x = −a + D. Since the B-set is {−a} and −a + D = −a + j for j = D, the result follows. Finally, if P [x] is a literal 0 < x + a then since P [x] holds but not P [x − D], we must have (x − D) + a ≤ 0 < x + a, or in other words −a + 1 ≤ x ≤ −a + D. Since the B-set is {−a} this implies x = −a + j for some 1 ≤ j ≤ D as required. No other literals can satisfy the precondition of the theorem, that P [x] holds but P [x − D] does not. Divisibility relations are invariant modulo D, literals 0 < −x + a cannot possibly satisfy the assumed property since 0 < −x + a ⇒ 0 < −(x − D) + a, and by hypothesis we have no logically negated inequality literals. Having established the result for literals, we can proceed by induction on the structure of the NNF formula. Suppose P [x] is of the form Q[x] ∧ R[x] or Q[x] ∨ R[x], and that P [x] holds while P [x − D] does not. Whichever form P [x] has, this means either that Q[x] holds and Q[x − D] does not, or that R[x] holds and R[x − D] does not. Then the inductive hypothesis, together

5.7 Presburger arithmetic

347

with the fact that the B-set of P [x] contains those of both Q[x] and R[x], implies that the result holds. At last we arrive at the main theorem justifying quantiﬁer elimination. Corollary 5.9 If P [x] is a formula in the subset being discussed with B-set B, and D is the positive lowest common multiple of all the relevant divisors, then the following equivalence holds: (∃x. P [x]) ⇔

D j=1

(P−∞ [j] ∨

P [b + j]).

b∈B

Proof Redistributing the disjunction on the right a bit, we need to show that: D D P−∞ [j]) ∨ ( P [b + j]). (∃x. P [x]) ⇔ ( j=1

j=1 b∈B

Suppose ﬁrst that ∃x. P [x] holds. Then, as noted above, we either have ∀y. ∃x. x < y ∧ P [x] (there are arbitrarily large and negative x with P [x]) or ∃x. P [x] ∧ ∀y. y < x ⇒ ¬P [y] (there is a minimal x with P [x]). In the former case, we immediately have D j=1 P−∞ [j] by Theorem 5.7, while in the latter case there is an x with P [x] but ¬P [x−D], and therefore by Theorem 5.8 we have x = b+j for some b ∈ B and 1 ≤ j ≤ D, from which D j=1 b∈B P [b+j] follows immediately. Conversely, suppose that the disjunction on the right holds. If D j=1 P−∞ [j], then by Theorem 5.7 we have arbitrarily large and negative x with P [x] and so a fortiori ∃x. P [x] holds. And trivially if D j=1 b∈B P [b + j] holds then so does ∃x. P [x]. In order to apply the main theorem, we need to be able to form the substitution instances like P [b + j] while retaining canonical form. Thus we implement a function that replaces the top variable x in atoms by another term t (assumed not to involve x), restoring canonicality: let rec linrep vars x t fm = match fm with Atom(R(p,[d; Fn("+",[Fn("*",[c;y]);a])])) when y = x -> let ct = linear_cmul (dest_numeral c) t in Atom(R(p,[d; linear_add vars ct a])) | Not(p) -> Not(linrep vars x t p) | And(p,q) -> And(linrep vars x t p,linrep vars x t q) | Or(p,q) -> Or(linrep vars x t p,linrep vars x t q) | _ -> fm;;

348

Decidable problems

Now for the overall inner quantiﬁer elimination step, we just perform the transformation corresponding to the equivalence in Corollary 5.9: let cooper vars fm = match fm with Exists(x0,p0) -> let x = Var x0 in let p = unitycoeff x p0 in let p_inf = simplify(minusinf x p) and bs = bset x p and js = Int 1 --- divlcm x p in let p_element j b = linrep vars x (linear_add vars b (mk_numeral j)) p in let stage j = list_disj (linrep vars x (mk_numeral j) p_inf :: map (p_element j) bs) in list_disj (map stage js) | _ -> failwith "cooper: not an existential formula";;

If we eventually eliminate all quantiﬁers from an initially closed formula, the result will contain no variables at all and each atom can be evaluated to true (e.g. 0 < 5, 2|4) or false (e.g. 0 = 7). It’s convenient to deﬁne the function to perform such evaluation now, since we can also apply it at intermediate stages as a useful simpliﬁcation; for example, if we have a subformula of the form 0 < −4 ∧ P , we can simplify it to ⊥ and never need to worry about P . The following auxiliary function just associates atoms with corresponding operations on rational numbers (we will use this later in other contexts, hence the incorporation of other inequalities): let operations = ["=",(=/); "<",(",(>/); "<=",(<=/); ">=",(>=/); "divides",(fun x y -> mod_num y x =/ Int 0)];;

Now the main evaluation function is straightforward. Note that unless an atom has numerals as both of its two arguments, the inner dest numeral calls will fail and the atom will be returned unchanged by the error trap. let evalc = onatoms (fun (R(p,[s;t]) as at) -> (try if assoc p operations (dest_numeral s) (dest_numeral t) then True else False with Failure _ -> Atom at));;

The overall quantiﬁer elimination procedure is built in the usual way, inserting evalc into the intermediate normalization steps and at the end. We use an NNF rather than DNF transformation, since Cooper’s algorithm can cope with any NNF formula.

5.7 Presburger arithmetic

349

let integer_qelim = simplify ** evalc ** lift_qelim linform (cnnf posineq ** evalc) cooper;;

For example, we can conﬁrm or refute closed formulas: # # # #

integer_qelim : fol formula integer_qelim : fol formula integer_qelim : fol formula integer_qelim

<>;; = <<true>> <>;; = <<true>> <<exists x y. 4 * x - 6 * y = 1>>;; = <> < divides(12,x-1) \/ divides(12,x-7)>>;; - : fol formula = <<true>>

and eliminate quantiﬁers from formulas with free variables: # integer_qelim < a <= x>>;; - : fol formula = <<~0 < 1 * a + -1 * b + -1>>

Optimizations There are many ways in which the eﬃciency of Cooper’s algorithm can be improved. One already considered in Cooper’s original paper is to sometimes use a dual expansion based on a ‘plus inﬁnity’ variant of the formula and corresponding ‘A-sets’ instead of B-sets (Exercise 5.13). A subtly improved treatment of the coeﬃcient homogenization part of Cooper’s algorithm due to Reddy and Loveland (1978) is also worth considering. It has long been known that the arithmetical problems arising in program veriﬁcation applications mostly fall within a small fragment of Presburger arithmetic. Typically, they are entirely universally quantiﬁed and do not depend on subtle divisibility properties. Indeed, Pratt (1977) observed that most involve just inequalities of the form x ≤ y + c. For this fragment, often called diﬀerence logic or separation logic,† a very eﬃcient decision method is possible using the Bellman–Ford graph algorithm. Eﬃcient algorithms for the slightly more general ‘unit two variable per inequality’ (UTVPI) case allowing ax ≤ by + c for a, b ∈ {−1, 0, 1} are given by Jaﬀar, Maher, Stuckey and Yap (1994), Harvey and Stuckey (1997) and Lahiri and Musuvathi (2005), while Ball, Cook, Lahriri and Rajamani (2004) give some statistics on how well it handles the demands of applications. †

The phrase ‘separation logic’ is now also used for something completely diﬀerent (Reynolds 2002), so ‘diﬀerence logic’ is probably less ambiguous.

350

Decidable problems

Natural numbers This quantiﬁer elimination procedure for the integers can easily be used to yield one for the natural numbers too. We can make the identiﬁcation N = {x ∈ Z | 0 ≤ x}, or if we prefer to leave out zero, N = {x ∈ Z | 0 < x}. Therefore, given a formula to be interpreted in N, we can obtain a corresponding one whose meaning in Z is the same by systematically relativizing all the quantiﬁers: ∀x. P [x] −→ ∀x. 0 ≤ x ⇒ P [x], ∃x. P [x] −→ ∃x. 0 ≤ x ∧ P [x]. This relativization, for an arbitrary constraint formula, can be implemented as: let rec relativize r fm = match fm with Not(p) -> Not(relativize r p) | And(p,q) -> And(relativize r p,relativize r q) | Or(p,q) -> Or(relativize r p,relativize r q) | Imp(p,q) -> Imp(relativize r p,relativize r q) | Iff(p,q) -> Iff(relativize r p,relativize r q) | Forall(x,p) -> Forall(x,Imp(r x,relativize r p)) | Exists(x,p) -> Exists(x,And(r x,relativize r p)) | _ -> fm;;

and we can apply it to the special case 0 ≤ x as an initial step before integer quantiﬁer elimination to yield a natural number version: let natural_qelim = integer_qelim ** relativize(fun x -> Atom(R("<=",[zero; Var x])));;

The diﬀerence is exempliﬁed by an instance of Bezout’s theorem; we can think of the natural number version as claiming that we can make any value from 3-cent and 5-cent stamps. This is false: # # -

natural_qelim : fol formula integer_qelim : fol formula

<>;; = <> <>;; = <<true>>

but we do have: # # -

natural_qelim : fol formula natural_qelim : fol formula

<= 8 ==> exists x y. 3 * x + 5 * y = d>>;; = <<true>> <>;; = <<true>>

5.7 Presburger arithmetic

351

Skolem arithmetic and other variants Quantiﬁer elimination for essentially the same integer theory was arrived at independently by Skolem (1931), who also sketched a proof of decidability (not full quantiﬁer elimination) for an analogous theory of nonzero natural numbers with multiplication (and no addition), often called ‘Skolem arithmetic’. There’s a natural correspondence between models of Skolem arithmetic and certain ‘weak direct products’ of models of Presburger arithmetic via the prime factorization n → 2n1 3n2 5n3 · · ·, multiplication corresponding to pointwise addition and divisibility to pointwise ordering. Using general theorems about decidability of such products, Mostowski (1952) gave a clear proof of decidability for Skolem arithmetic. A generalization of Mostowski’s result due to Feferman and Vaught (1959) was later applied by Cegielski (1981) to give full quantiﬁer elimination for Skolem arithmetic. As we shall see in Section 7.2, things change dramatically when one has both addition and multiplication together: the theory does not admit quantiﬁer elimination, is not complete and, in a precise sense, is far from being decidable. And the extension of Presburger arithmetic to allow a general divisibility relation, not just divisibility by constants, is equally diﬃcult because one can deﬁne (see Section 7.2) multiplication in terms of divisibility as follows (Tarski, Mostowski and Robinson 1953): • deﬁne the relation ‘l is a least common multiple of m and n’ by m|l ∧ n|l ∧ (∀l . m|l ∧ n|l ⇒ l|l ) • deﬁne the relation m = n2 by ‘m + n is a least common multiple of n and n + 1 and m − n is a least common multiple of n and n − 1’; (This is for Z; over N just the fact that m + n is a least common multiple of n and n + 1 suﬃces.) • deﬁne the relation m = n · p by (n + p)2 = n2 + p2 + 2m. Indeed, with a little more ingenuity multiplication can be deﬁned in terms of divisibility, successor and 1 only (J. Robinson 1949), so even that theory is undecidable. On the other hand, the validity of purely universal formulas is decidable for Presburger arithmetic with divisibility (Beltyokov 1974; Lipshitz 1978). A surprising positive result in another direction is that adding exponentiation, i.e. a function E(x) = 2x , to Presburger arithmetic gives a decidable theory: Sem¨enov (1984) proves this based on a variant of quantiﬁer elimination. By contrast, a general binary exponentiation function immediately leads to undecidability since we can deﬁne the multiplication relation mn = p by (xm )n = xp and then addition m + n = p by xm xn = xp , for any x > 1. Even though basic Presburger arithmetic is decidable, the worst-case

352

Decidable problems

complexity of any algorithm is known to be at least doubly exponential in the size of the formula (Fischer and Rabin 1974). However, the more restricted case of deciding formulas without quantiﬁer alternations is ‘only’ NP-complete (Papadimitriou 1981), and the still more special case of satisﬁability of conjunctions of linear equations over the integers can be solved in polynomial time, e.g. via Hermite normal form (Nemhauser and Wolsey 1999).

5.8 The complex numbers The complex numbers C include the imaginary unit i with i2 = −1, a solution of the polynomial equation x2 + 1 = 0. Indeed, the Fundamental Theorem of Algebra tells us that C is ‘algebraically closed’, meaning that any polynomial equation an xn + · · · + a1 x + a0 = 0 has a solution over C, except for the degenerate case of a nonzero constant (n = 0 and a0 = 0).† Using this property, we will demonstrate full quantiﬁer elimination for C with both addition and multiplication.

Polynomial manipulation Just as with Cooper’s algorithm, it’s convenient to maintain terms in a canonical form. All terms built up using constants, negation, subtraction and multiplication can be considered as multivariate polynomials, and we will choose a particular canonical form for them.‡ We consider a multivariate polynomial as a polynomial in one variable whose coeﬃcients are themselves polynomials in the other variables. Our canonical form will be equivalent to an xn +· · ·+a0 , but expressed slightly diﬀerently in what is known as Horner form: a0 + x · (a1 + x · (a2 + x · · · · (an−1 + x · an )) with each coeﬃcient ai a canonical polynomial in the remaining variables. We will maintain a list with the innermost variable at the head, and this will determine the arrangement of variables in the canonical form. For example, if the variables from the inside out are x, y and z, we consider the polynomial †

‡

For a clear proof of the Fundamental Theorem of Algebra see Ebbinghaus et al. (1990); this is an inductive reﬁnement (Littlewood 1941; Estermann 1956) of Argand’s classic ‘minimum modulus’ proof. Formally, polynomials can be deﬁned as terms in this normal form, though we will later adopt a diﬀerent deﬁnition closer to the usual one in algebra. For the present, readers may if they wish think of polynomials as functions; since we will be concerned only with inﬁnite base rings, two polynomials have the same canonical form iﬀ they determine the same function.

5.8 The complex numbers

353

3xy 2 + 2x2 yz + zx + 3yz as: [0 + y · (0 + z · 3)] + x · ([(0 + z · 1) + y · (0 + y · 3)] + x · [0 + y · (0 + z · 2)]), where the items in square brackets are considered as coeﬃcients when eliminating x. Although not very nice for human reading, this representation suits the organization of the algorithm with variables eliminated from the inside out. First we deﬁne arithmetic operations on canonical polynomials, subject to a list vars deﬁning the variable ordering. For addition, the main case is adding c + x · p and d + y · q. If x and y are diﬀerent, one or other is added to the constant coeﬃcient of the other, via the mutually recursive function poly_ladd. Otherwise we just compute (c+x·p)+(d+x·q) = (c+d)+x·(p+q), taking care to handle the case p + q = 0 by just returning c + d. let rec poly_add vars pol1 pol2 = match (pol1,pol2) with (Fn("+",[c; Fn("*",[Var x; p])]),Fn("+",[d; Fn("*",[Var y; q])])) -> if earlier vars x y then poly_ladd vars pol2 pol1 else if earlier vars y x then poly_ladd vars pol1 pol2 else let e = poly_add vars c d and r = poly_add vars p q in if r = zero then e else Fn("+",[e; Fn("*",[Var x; r])]) | (_,Fn("+",_)) -> poly_ladd vars pol1 pol2 | (Fn("+",_),pol2) -> poly_ladd vars pol2 pol1 | _ -> numeral2 (+/) pol1 pol2 and poly_ladd vars = fun pol1 (Fn("+",[d; Fn("*",[Var y; q])])) -> Fn("+",[poly_add vars pol1 d; Fn("*",[Var y; q])]);;

For negation, we don’t need the variable order, but can just recursively negate the coeﬃcients let rec poly_neg = function (Fn("+",[c; Fn("*",[Var x; p])])) -> Fn("+",[poly_neg c; Fn("*",[Var x; poly_neg p])]) | n -> numeral1 minus_num n;;

and subtraction is an easy combination of addition and negation: let poly_sub vars p q = poly_add vars p (poly_neg q);;

We can base a recursive deﬁnition of polynomial multiplication on the following equation, solving the simpler sub-problems p · d and p · q in the same way: p · (d + y · q) = (p · d) + (0 + y · (p · q)). However, for 0+y·(p·q) to be in canonical form we need y to be the topmost

354

Decidable problems

variable overall, with p including no variables strictly earlier in the list. Hence we check which polynomial has the earlier topmost variable, and call the mutually recursive function poly_lmul to apply the main transformation with the arguments switched as necessary: let rec poly_mul vars pol1 pol2 = match (pol1,pol2) with (Fn("+",[c; Fn("*",[Var x; p])]),Fn("+",[d; Fn("*",[Var y; q])])) -> if earlier vars x y then poly_lmul vars pol2 pol1 else poly_lmul vars pol1 pol2 | (Fn("0",[]),_) | (_,Fn("0",[])) -> zero | (_,Fn("+",_)) -> poly_lmul vars pol1 pol2 | (Fn("+",_),_) -> poly_lmul vars pol2 pol1 | _ -> numeral2 ( */ ) pol1 pol2 and poly_lmul vars = fun pol1 (Fn("+",[d; Fn("*",[Var y; q])])) -> poly_add vars (poly_mul vars pol1 d) (Fn("+",[zero; Fn("*",[Var y; poly_mul vars pol1 q])]));;

Powers pn (for ﬁxed n) are just repeated multiplication: let poly_pow vars p n = funpow n (poly_mul vars p) (Fn("1",[]));;

We can even do division when the quotient polynomial is just a constant: let poly_div vars p q = poly_mul vars p (numeral1((//) (Int 1)) q);;

and it is also handy to have a base case to put a variable x into canonical form 0 + 1 · x: let poly_var x = Fn("+",[zero; Fn("*",[Var x; Fn("1",[])])]);;

Any term can now be translated into canonical form by transforming constants and variables then recursively applying the appropriate canonical form operations: let rec polynate vars tm = match tm with Var x -> poly_var x | Fn("-",[t]) -> poly_neg (polynate vars t) | Fn("+",[s;t]) -> poly_add vars (polynate vars s) (polynate vars t) | Fn("-",[s;t]) -> poly_sub vars (polynate vars s) (polynate vars t) | Fn("*",[s;t]) -> poly_mul vars (polynate vars s) (polynate vars t) | Fn("/",[s;t]) -> poly_div vars (polynate vars s) (polynate vars t) | Fn("^",[p;Fn(n,[])]) -> poly_pow vars (polynate vars p) (int_of_string n) | _ -> if is_numeral tm then tm else failwith "lint: unknown term";;

and we can apply this to put each equation into an equivalent form t = 0

5.8 The complex numbers

355

with t a canonical polynomial. We ignore the predicate, which will always be equality, so this function can be re-used for inequalities in other contexts. let polyatom vars fm = match fm with Atom(R(a,[s;t])) -> Atom(R(a,[polynate vars (Fn("-",[s;t]));zero])) | _ -> failwith "polyatom: not an atom";;

We are already in a position to check simple polynomial identities:† # polyatom ["w"; "x"; "y"; "z"] <<((w + x)^4 + (w + y)^4 + (w + (x + y)^4 + (x + z)^4 + (y + (w - x)^4 + (w - y)^4 + (w (x - y)^4 + (x - z)^4 + (y (w^2 + x^2 + y^2 + z^2)^2>>;; - : fol formula = <<0 = 0>>

z)^4 + z)^4 + z)^4 + z)^4) / 6 =

Properties of univariate polynomials When we assert some arithmetical or relational property of polynomials, we mean it in terms of the operations deﬁned above. For example, to say that a polynomial s is divisible by another polynomial t means that there is a third polynomial q so that qt = s. By that equation, we mean that applying poly_mul to q and t will give s, or equivalently that both sides of the equation have the same canonical form under polynate. Occasionally, however, multivariate polynomials will be thought of as univariate polynomials with parameters. For example, it is not the case that x2 y − zx is divisible by x − 1 as a multivariate polynomial, but considered as a univariate polynomial in x, it is divisible for some values of the other parameters (e.g. when y = z) and not for others. For a univariate polynomial p, the largest n for which the polynomial involves a term axn with a = 0 is called its degree, sometimes written ∂(p). With slight abuse of notation, we write p(a) for the result of ‘evaluating’ the polynomial p(x) by plugging a in place of its variable; for example if p(x) = x2 − 2x + 1 we have p(2) = 1. We also identify values with constant polynomials like p(x) = 2. An elementary fact that will be central in what follows is the following, which applies to polynomials over various number systems, not just C. †

This identity is connected with Waring’s problem in number theory (Nathanson 1996).

356

Decidable problems

Theorem 5.10 For any polynomial p(x) and value a, the polynomial p(x) − p(a) is divisible by x − a, and the quotient polynomial has a degree one less than the degree of p(x). Proof Just observe that x0 − a0 = 1 − 1 = (x − a) · 0 while for any k ≥ 1 we have xk − ak = (x − a) · (xk−1 + axk−2 + · · · + ak−2 x + ak−1 ). Since we can write any polynomial as p(x) = an xn + · · · + a0 the result follows. A root or zero of a univariate polynomial p(x) is a value a such that p(a) = 0. We deduce from the above theorem that: Corollary 5.11 If p(a) = 0 then p(x) is divisible by x − a. An immediate corollary is: Corollary 5.12 A univariate polynomial p(x) of degree n can have at most n roots. Proof By induction over the degree. If p(x) has no roots, the result is trivially true. Otherwise, taking any root a we know p(x) = (x − a)q(x) for some quotient polynomial q(x) of degree n − 1. The roots of p(x) are therefore those of q(x) plus x = a if it is not already a root of q(x). Since by the inductive hypothesis q(x) has at most n − 1 roots, the result follows. In the special case of the complex numbers, algebraic closure gives us something more. Corollary 5.13 A univariate polynomial p(x) of degree n over C has a decomposition into linear factors: for some a1 , . . . , an , not necessarily distinct, p(x) = k·(x−a1 ) · · · (x−an ). In other words, a polynomial over C splits. Proof By induction on the degree of p(x). If p(x) is a constant, the result holds trivially. Otherwise, algebraic closure tells us that there is a root a, and we then know there is a q(x) of lower degree with p(x) = (x − a) · q(x). By the inductive hypothesis, q(x) splits into linear factors.

Quantiﬁer elimination method We’ll now describe a fairly simple quantiﬁer elimination algorithm for the complex numbers, originally due to Tarski and apparently ﬁrst mentioned in print by Seidenberg (1954). Imagine for the moment that all polynomials are

5.8 The complex numbers

357

univariate. By applying the polynomial normalization conversions, we may assume that all atomic formulas are of the form p(x) = 0, and as usual (see Section 5.6), it suﬃces to be able to eliminate a single existential quantiﬁer from a conjunction of literals: ∃x. p1 (x) = 0 ∧ · · · ∧ pn (x) = 0 ∧ q1 (x) = 0 ∧ · · · qm (x) = 0. The ﬁrst step is to reduce this to a similar case where m ≤ 1 and n ≤ 1. We may assume that none of the pi (x) or qj (x) is the zero polynomial, since in the former case we can just delete the equation pi (x) = 0, and in the latter case the entire formula reduces to ⊥ and we are ﬁnished. Now, to reduce n we can use one equation of minimal degree to substitute for higher powers appearing in the others, iterating the process until at most one equation is left, e.g. 2x2 + 5x + 3 = 0 ∧ x2 − 1 = 0 ⇔ 5x + 5 = 0 ∧ x2 − 1 = 0 ⇔ 5x + 5 = 0 ∧ 0 = 0 ⇔ 5x + 5 = 0. To reduce m, we may simply multiply all the qi (x) together since qi (x) = 0 ∧ qi+1 (x) = 0 ⇔ qi (x) · qi+1 (x) = 0. Now, if we just have a single equation left, ∃x. p(x) = 0, there is by the Fundamental Theorem of Algebra a quantiﬁer-free equivalent, namely ⊥ or , depending on whether p(x) is a nonzero constant polynomial. If we have just one inequation, ∃x. q(x) = 0, this is deﬁnitely equivalent to since there are inﬁnitely many complex numbers and a polynomial can only have ﬁnitely many roots. The more interesting case is where we have both equations and inequations for some non-trivial p(x) and q(x): ∃x. p(x) = 0 ∧ q(x) = 0, or equivalently ¬(∀x. p(x) = 0 ⇒ q(x) = 0). Consider the core formula: ∀x. p(x) = 0 ⇒ q(x) = 0. Since C is algebraically closed, we know that the polynomials p(x) and q(x) split into linear factors, whatever they may be (we can assume k = 0 and l = 0 because both polynomials were supposed not to be identically zero): p(x) = k · (x − a1 ) · (x − a2 ) · · · (x − an ), q(x) = l · (x − b1 ) · (x − b2 ) · · · (x − bm ).

358

Decidable problems

Now p(x) = 0 is equivalent to 1≤i≤n x = ai and q(x) = 0 is equivalent to 1≤j≤m x = bj . Thus, the formula ∀x. p(x) = 0 ⇒ q(x) = 0 says precisely that x = ai ⇒ x = bj , ∀x. 1≤i≤n

1≤j≤m

or in other words, all the ai appear among the bj . However, since there are just n linear factors in the antecedent, a given factor (x − ai ) cannot occur more than n times and thus the polynomial divisibility relation p(x)|q(x)n holds. Conversely, if this divisibility relation holds for n > 0, then clearly ∀x. p(x) = 0 ⇒ q(x) = 0 holds. Thus, the key quantiﬁed formula can be reduced to a polynomial divisibility relation, and as we will soon see in more detail, it’s not diﬃcult to express this as a quantiﬁer-free formula in the coeﬃcients, thus eliminating the quantiﬁcation over x. In what follows, we present this sketch-proof in more detail and implement it. Polynomial utilities Before proceeding further, it’s useful to have some additional utility functions on canonical polynomials. The coefficients function converts a polynomial c0 + c1 x + c2 x2 + · · · + cn xn into a list of coeﬃcients [c0 ; c1 ; c2 ; . . . ; cn ]. Note that we need to be explicit about the variable x, otherwise we couldn’t tell whether, say, 1+2·y is a degree 1 polynomial in y or a degree 0 (constant) polynomial in x. let rec coefficients vars = function Fn("+",[c; Fn("*",[Var x; q])]) when x = hd vars -> c::(coefficients vars q) | p -> [p];;

We deﬁne several other functions in terms of coefficients, though a direct implementation would be slightly more eﬃcient. The degree function tells us the degree deg(p) of a polynomial p: let degree vars p = length(coefficients vars p) - 1;;

is_constant tells us if the polynomial is constant in the top variable: let is_constant vars p = degree vars p = 0;;

and head returns the head coeﬃcient, i.e. the coeﬃcient of the highest power of the top variable: let head vars p = last(coefficients vars p);;

5.8 The complex numbers

359

We might have used the terminology formal degree, to emphasize that the head coeﬃcient could still be zero for certain values of the other variables. In situations where it is known to be zero, we often want to just remove that term, and this is done by the behead function. We must take care to maintain the canonical form, not, say, transforming 1 + x · a into 1 + x · 0: let rec behead vars = function Fn("+",[c; Fn("*",[Var x; p])]) when x = hd vars -> let p’ = behead vars p in if p’ = zero then c else Fn("+",[c; Fn("*",[Var x; p’])]) | _ -> zero;;

To avoid redundant calculations later, we’d like to eliminate constant multiples of the same polynomial, e.g. 2x2 − 4y and 6y − 3x2 . To multiply a polynomial through by a (nonzero) constant k we use a special function: let rec poly_cmul k p = match p with Fn("+",[c; Fn("*",[Var x; q])]) -> Fn("+",[poly_cmul k c; Fn("*",[Var x; poly_cmul k q])]) | _ -> numeral1 (fun m -> k */ m) p;;

For deﬁniteness, we pick the coeﬃcient of the ‘maximal’ term: let rec headconst p = match p with Fn("+",[c; Fn("*",[Var x; q])]) -> headconst q | Fn(n,[]) -> dest_numeral p;;

and multiply through by its inverse to put the polynomial in what we might call ‘monic’ form, with head coeﬃcient 1. This monic function also returns a Boolean value indicating whether the multiplying constant was negative, and hence whether the normalization process has made a sign change: let monic p = let h = headconst p in if h =/ Int 0 then p,false else poly_cmul (Int 1 // h) p,h
Pseudo-division In the earlier sketch, we used one polynomial equation p(x) = 0 with degree n to substitute in other polynomials s(x) of degree ≥ n. By doing so repeatedly as necessary we are able to reduce s(x) to an equivalent r(x) with

360

Decidable problems

deg(r) < deg(p). The general process underlying this operation is pseudodivision of a polynomial s(x) by a polynomial p(x), resulting in quotient and remainder polynomials q(x) and r(x) and a ‘constant’ c (i.e. polynomial not involving x) such that: cs(x) = p(x)q(x) + r(x) and deg(r) < deg(p). If we are considering univariate polynomials with rational coeﬃcients, we may ensure c = 1, giving true division. Our ‘coeﬃcients’ will in general be polynomials in other variables, so we can’t do that. However, as will become clear from the algorithm that follows, we may always assume that c is a power of the leading coeﬃcient of p(x). Suppose we isolate the leading terms of the polynomials to give p(x) = axn + p0 (x) and s(x) = bxm + s0 (x). If m < n already, then we can just set c = 1, q(x) = 0 and r(s) = s(x) and the conditions for pseudo-division are trivially satisﬁed. Otherwise, if n ≤ m we have: as(x) = bxm−n p(x) + (as0 (x) − bxm−n p0 (x)). Note that s (x) = as0 (x)−bxm−n p0 (x) has lower degree than s(x) because the leading terms cancel. We can proceed recursively to pseudo-divide it by p, giving, say: ak s (x) = q (x)p(x) + r (x) and then we have a quotient and remainder as required:

ak+1 s(x) = ak (bxm−n p(x) + s (x)) = ak bxm−n p(x) + ak s (x) = ak bxm−n p(x) + q (x)p(x) + r (x) = (ak bxm−n + q (x))p(x) + r (x). Thus we have a recursive pseudo-division algorithm, where the multiplying constant that results is always a power of a, the leading coeﬃcient of p(x). Actually, if it happens that the two leading coeﬃcients a and b of the polynomials are the same, we can make their leading terms match without the multiplications by a and b, which seems a worthwhile optimization. (For more sophisticated enhancements, see Exercise 5.17 below.)

5.8 The complex numbers

361

let pdivide = let shift1 x p = Fn("+",[zero; Fn("*",[Var x; p])]) in let rec pdivide_aux vars a n p k s = if s = zero then (k,s) else let b = head vars s and m = degree vars s in if m < n then (k,s) else let p’ = funpow (m - n) (shift1 (hd vars)) p in if a = b then pdivide_aux vars a n p k (poly_sub vars s p’) else pdivide_aux vars a n p (k+1) (poly_sub vars (poly_mul vars a s) (poly_mul vars b p’)) in fun vars s p -> pdivide_aux vars (head vars p) (degree vars p) p 0 s;;

The auxiliary function shift1 is used to multiply a polynomial by x, and pdivide aux implements the main recursion sketched above, with a and n the head coeﬃcient and degree of p, respectively. We return a pair giving the power of the leading coeﬃcient used and the remainder. We don’t even bother to compute the quotient explicitly, because we don’t need it for our applications. For example, to use this function to simplify p(x) = 0∧s(x) = 0 where deg(p) ≤ deg(s), we will pseudo-divide s(x) by p(x) to get: ak s(x) = q(x)p(x) + s (x), where a is the leading coeﬃcient of p(x). From this we have ak s(x) = s (x) whenever p(x) = 0 and so, provided a = 0, we have p(x) = 0 ∧ s(x) = 0 ⇔ p(x) = 0 ∧ s (x) = 0. The same approach works when we have many other polynomials: si (x) = 0. p(x) = 0 ∧ si (x) = 0 ⇔ p(x) = 0 ∧ i

i

Now we can repeat the process, pseudo-dividing by whichever polynomial in the new conjunction has the lowest degree, and so on, until at most one polynomial is non-constant (with respect to x).

Sign determination However, as we noted, we can only perform this sort of cancellation if the leading coeﬃcient of the cancelling polynomial is nonzero; note that without a = 0 the main equivalence above breaks down. In general, whether a coefﬁcient is nonzero depends on values of the other variables, so we often have to perform a case-split, considering the a = 0 and a = 0 cases separately. In the a = 0 case, we can at least delete the leading term and so we’ve made the degree of one of the polynomials smaller, while in the a = 0 case we

362

Decidable problems

can use it for cancellation to reduce the degree of others. Starting with a formula P , if under the assumption a = 0 we can reduce it to P0 , i.e. a = 0 ⇒ (P ⇔ P0 ), while in the case a = 0 we can reduce it to P1 : a = 0 ⇒ (P ⇔ P1 ), then we have overall: P ⇔ a = 0 ∧ P0 ∨ a = 0 ∧ P1 . To make explicit such ‘local assumptions’, we use a data structure associating coeﬃcients with signs, represented via the following datatype. type sign = Zero | Nonzero | Positive | Negative;;

At present we will only use Zero and Nonzero, but Positive and Negative will be useful for the reals later. For the same reason, we deﬁne a function to optionally swap a sign. Given a sign for a, it returns one for −a if swf is true and otherwise returns the original sign unchanged. let swap swf s = if not swf then s else match s with Positive -> Negative | Negative -> Positive | _ -> s;;

We store the assumptions about signs for monic polynomials, so that we don’t, for example, have separate entries for a and 3a. Thus the context is implemented as an association list of monic polynomials with their signs, and signs are tested by converting to monic form, with a sign ﬂip afterwards if necessary: let findsign sgns p = try let p’,swf = monic p in swap swf (assoc p’ sgns) with Failure _ -> failwith "findsign";;

Adding a new sign assumption to an existing context works similarly, but is a little more involved because it is permissible to reﬁne an existing assumption of Nonzero to one of Positive or Negative (again, this will be useful for the reals):

5.8 The complex numbers

363

let assertsign sgns (p,s) = if p = zero then if s = Zero then sgns else failwith "assertsign" else let p’,swf = monic p in let s’ = swap swf s in let s0 = try assoc p’ sgns with Failure _ -> s’ in if s’ = s0 or s0 = Nonzero & (s’ = Positive or s’ = Negative) then (p’,s’)::(subtract sgns [p’,s0]) else failwith "assertsign";;

Case-splits are organized by a higher-order function split_zero taking a sign context sgns, a polynomial pol, and two functions returning formulas, cont_z for the zero case and cont_n for the nonzero case. If the zero or nonzero status of pol can be determined immediately from the context, then the appropriate continuation is just called directly. Otherwise, the two continuations are both called on appropriately expanded sign contexts. The call of cont_z with the extra assumption that pol is zero returns some formula P0 , and similarly cont_n with the extra assumption that it’s nonzero returns P1 . The splitting function then returns the ﬁnal formula which will be pol = 0 ∧ P0 ∨ pol = 0 ∧ P1 . let split_zero sgns pol cont_z cont_n = try let z = findsign sgns pol in (if z = Zero then cont_z else cont_n) sgns with Failure "findsign" -> let eq = Atom(R("=",[pol; zero])) in Or(And(eq,cont_z (assertsign sgns (pol,Zero))), And(Not eq,cont_n (assertsign sgns (pol,Nonzero))));;

Main algorithm We start with a few supporting functions, the ﬁrst of which produces a formula asserting that a polynomial is not the zero polynomial with respect to the current top variable, i.e. that at least one coeﬃcient is nonzero. We could just create a disjunction ¬(c1 = 0) ∨ · · · ∨ ¬(cl = 0) for all the coeﬃcients ci , but we optimize things a bit by exploiting the sign context. First, we partition the coeﬃcients cs into those that are immediately decidable (dcs) and undecidable (ucs) from the context. If any decidable coeﬃcient is nonzero, we can just return the formula , while otherwise if there are no undecidable ones they must all be zero and so we can return ⊥. Otherwise we take the undecidable coeﬃcients c1 , . . . , ck and create the formula ¬(c1 = 0) ∨ · · · ∨ ¬(ck = 0) asserting that one of them is nonzero.

364

Decidable problems

let poly_nonzero vars sgns pol = let cs = coefficients vars pol in let dcs,ucs = partition (can (findsign sgns)) cs in if exists (fun p -> findsign sgns p <> Zero) dcs then True else if ucs = [] then False else end_itlist mk_or (map (fun p -> Not(mk_eq p zero)) ucs);;

The next function tests if one polynomial s(x) is non-divisible by another one p(x), treating both as univariate with the coeﬃcients parametrized by other variables. We will assume that the leading coeﬃcient a of p(x) is nonzero when this function is used. We simply pseudo-divide to obtain a remainder r such that ak s(x) = p(x)q(x) + r(x) and ∂(r) < ∂(p). Since a is a nonzero constant, p(x)|s(x) is equivalent to p(x)|r(x), and the latter, since r(x) has lower degree than p(x), holds precisely if r(x) is the zero polynomial. let rec poly_nondiv vars sgns p s = let _,r = pdivide vars s p in poly_nonzero vars sgns r;;

Now we are ready for the main quantiﬁer elimination from ∃x. p1 (x) = 0 ∧ · · · ∧ pk (x) = 0 ∧ q1 (x) = 0 ∧ · · · ∧ ql (x) = 0, assuming some initial processing so that eqs holds the list [p1 ; . . . ; pk ] and neqs the list [q1 ; . . . ; ql ], while sgns is the sign context. The ﬁrst step is to check if there are any constant polynomials (with respect to the top variable) in the list eqs. If so, we can pull them outside, since ∃x. c = 0 ∧ p[x] is equivalent to c = 0 ∧ (∃x. P [x]). We’re free to add c = 0 to the context for the sub-problem ∃x. P [x], but when doing so we check for failure, meaning that c = 0 already follows from the context. In this case we can just return ⊥ for the entire problem. Otherwise, if there are no equations the problem is just ∃x. q1 (x) = 0 ∧ · · · ∧ ql (x) = 0. Since any univariate polynomial has only ﬁnitely many roots, this will be true precisely if none of the qi is the zero polynomial, so we generate the appropriate formula by applying poly_nonzero to each and conjoining the results. Otherwise, we have at least one equation, and we pick one p(x) = 0 where p(x) has minimal degree n. We want to use this equation for elimination, but ﬁrst we need to ensure that its head coeﬃcient a is nonzero. Hence we case-split, and in the case where a = 0 just proceed recursively with that coeﬃcient removed. Once we know a = 0 together with p(x) = 0, it is legitimate to pseudodivide any polynomial by p(x) without changing its zero/nonzero status,

5.8 The complex numbers

365

because then if ak s(x) = p(x)q(x) + r(x) we have s(x) = 0 ⇔ r(x) = 0; this pseudo-division is implemented by cfn. If there are equations besides p(x) = 0, we just pseudo-divide all of them by p(x) and recurse: now some other equation will have smaller degree. Otherwise, if there are no inequations, the problem is simply ∃x. p(x) = 0. Since we know p(x) is nonconstant (that was checked ﬁrst), this is trivially true by the Fundamental Theorem of Algebra. Otherwise we multiply all the inequations together to get q(x) = q1 (x) . . . ql (x), and we need to solve the problem ∃x. p(x) = 0 ∧ q(x) = 0. As noted in the initial sketch, this is equivalent to ¬(∀x. p(x) = 0 ⇒ q(x) = 0) and so to the non-divisibility of q(x)∂(p) by p(x), so we create that formula: let rec cqelim vars (eqs,neqs) sgns = try let c = find (is_constant vars) eqs in (try let sgns’ = assertsign sgns (c,Zero) and eqs’ = subtract eqs [c] in And(mk_eq c zero,cqelim vars (eqs’,neqs) sgns’) with Failure "assertsign" -> False) with Failure _ -> if eqs = [] then list_conj(map (poly_nonzero vars sgns) neqs) else let n = end_itlist min (map (degree vars) eqs) in let p = find (fun p -> degree vars p = n) eqs in let oeqs = subtract eqs [p] in split_zero sgns (head vars p) (cqelim vars (behead vars p::oeqs,neqs)) (fun sgns’ -> let cfn s = snd(pdivide vars s p) in if oeqs <> [] then cqelim vars (p::(map cfn oeqs),neqs) sgns’ else if neqs = [] then True else let q = end_itlist (poly_mul vars) neqs in poly_nondiv vars sgns’ p (poly_pow vars q (degree vars p)));;

Our initial sign hypothesis will assert that 1 is positive and 0 is zero; by handling the constants like this we avoid a separate path in findsign. let init_sgns = [Fn("1",[]),Positive; Fn("0",[]),Zero];;

The core quantiﬁer elimination function now breaks up the existential formula into the appropriate list of zero and nonzero assertions, and calls cqelim appropriately: let basic_complex_qelim vars (Exists(x,p)) = let eqs,neqs = partition (non negative) (conjuncts p) in cqelim (x::vars) (map lhs eqs,map (lhs ** negate) neqs) init_sgns;;

366

Decidable problems

We package this core algorithm using a full DNF transformation: let complex_qelim = simplify ** evalc ** lift_qelim polyatom (dnf ** cnnf (fun x -> x) ** evalc) basic_complex_qelim;;

Examples Here is a simple example of quantiﬁer elimination in action; one √ can under4 2 stand why this formula holds by observing that x + 1 = (x + 2x + 1)(x2 − √ 2x + 1): # complex_qelim < x^4 + 1 = 0>>;; - : fol formula = <<true>>

The procedure works equally well in the context of parameters: # complex_qelim < x^4 + c = 0>>;; - : fol formula = <<~(~1 + c * (-4 + c * (6 + c * (-4 + c * 1))) = 0)>>

and we can check any simpliﬁed form of the equivalence by more quantiﬁer elimination: complex_qelim < x^4 + c = 0) <=> c = 1>>;;

The following proves the formulas for the sum and product of distinct roots of a quadratic equation: # complex_qelim < a * - : fol formula

c + x =

x y. b * x + c = 0 /\ a * y^2 + b * y + c = 0 /\ ~(x = y) * y = c /\ a * (x + y) + b = 0>>;; <<true>>

5.9 The real numbers We now consider a similar theory of real arithmetic with addition and multiplication. A decision procedure for this theory, based on quantiﬁer

5.9 The real numbers

367

elimination, was ﬁrst demonstrated by Tarski (1951).† However, Tarski’s procedure, a generalization of the classical technique due to Sturm (1835) for ﬁnding the number of real roots of a univariate polynomial, was both diﬃcult to understand and highly ineﬃcient in practice. Seidenberg (1954) gave a simpler algorithm; indeed the possibility of quantiﬁer elimination for this theory is often dually attributed as ‘Tarski–Seidenberg’. Other relatively simple algorithms were given by Cohen (1969) and by Kreisel and Krivine (1971). Perhaps the most eﬃcient general algorithm currently known, and the ﬁrst actually to be implemented on a computer, is the Cylindrical Algebraic Decomposition (CAD) method. This was introduced by Collins (1976) and has subsequently been reﬁned and improved, e.g. by the introduction of partial CAD (Hong 1990).‡ The rather simple algorithm we describe here is from H¨ormander (1983) based on an unpublished manuscript by Paul Cohen. In our language we will allow both equations s = t and inequalities s < t, s ≤ t, s > t and s ≥ t. Our algorithm necessarily has a somewhat diﬀerent ﬂavour from the complex number procedure, not just because of the presence of inequalities, but because the reals are not algebraically closed. For example, since the quadratic equation x2 + 1 = 0 has no solution over R, the following are both valid, yet there is no simple divisibility relation between powers of the antecedent and consequent polynomials: ∀x. x2 + 1 = 0 ⇒ x + 2 = 0, ∀x. x3 + 2x2 + x + 2 = 0 ⇒ x2 + 4x + 4 = 0. The algorithm will essentially use ordering properties, and we will freely exploit basic facts about polynomials over the reals.§ Some of our reasoning will involve derivatives, so we start with a function to diﬀerentiate a polynomial with respect to the top variable. The derivative of p(x) = c0 + c1 x + c2 x2 + · · · + cn xn is just p (x) = c1 + 2c2 + · · · + ncn xn−1 , but we need to operate on the canonical form. This auxiliary function takes as †

‡

§

Tarski actually discovered the procedure in 1930, but it remained unpublished for many years afterwards. Tarski’s procedure, and the one we will describe, work not only for the reals but for any ‘real closed ﬁeld’. A technique related to CAD was earlier proposed by L ojasiewicz (1964). Another relatively eﬃcient method was developed at much the same time as CAD by Monk (1975), working with Solovay; for a brief description see Rabin (1991). Most of these are familiar from elementary calculus. With more work, the properties we need can be deduced just from the real-closed ﬁeld axioms, proving that they are complete for formulas in this language.

368

Decidable problems

additional parameters the top variable x (as a term) and the implicit power of x by which the polynomial is multiplied; this determines the multiplier for the ﬁrst coeﬃcient: let rec poly_diffn x n p = match p with Fn("+",[c; Fn("*",[y; q])]) when y = x -> Fn("+",[poly_cmul(Int n) c; Fn("*",[x; poly_diffn x (n+1) q])]) | _ -> poly_cmul(Int n) p;;

Now to diﬀerentiate a polynomial p(x) = c + x · q(x), we just apply the auxiliary function to q(x) with n = 1; if p(x) is constant we just return zero. let poly_diff vars p = match p with Fn("+",[c; Fn("*",[Var x; q])]) when x = hd vars -> poly_diffn (Var x) 1 q | _ -> zero;;

The key component of the quantiﬁer elimination algorithm is a procedure to obtain a ‘sign matrix’ for a set of univariate polynomials p1 (x), . . . , pn (x). Such a matrix is based on a division of the real line into a (possibly empty) ordered sequence of m points x1 < x2 < · · · < xm representing precisely the roots of the polynomials, with the rows of the matrix representing, in alternating fashion, the points themselves and the intervals between adjacent pairs and the two intervals at the ends:

(−∞, x1 ), x1 , (x1 , x2 ), x2 , . . . , xm−1 , (xm−1 , xm ), xm , (xm , +∞) using the common shorthand for intervals (a, b) = {x | a < x ∧ x < b}, and columns representing the polynomials p1 (x), . . . , pn (x), with the matrix entries giving the signs, either positive (+), negative (−) or zero (0), of each polynomial pi at the points and on the intervals. For example, for the collection of polynomials:

p1 (x) = x2 − 3x + 2, p2 (x) = 2x − 3,

5.9 The real numbers

369

the sign matrix looks like this: Point/interval (−∞, x1 ) x1 (x1 , x2 ) x2 (x2 , x3 ) x3 (x3 , +∞)

p1 + 0 − − − 0 +

p2 − − − 0 + + +

Here x1 and x3 represent the roots 1 and 2 of p1 (x) while x2 represents 3/2, the root of p2 (x). However, the sign matrix contains no numerical information about the location of the points xi , merely specifying their order and what signs the various polynomials take on each point and each intermediate interval. Crucially, the sign matrix for a set of univariate polynomials p1 (x), . . . , pn (x) is suﬃcient to answer any question of the form ∃x. P [x] where the body P [x] is quantiﬁer-free and all atoms are of the form pi (x) i 0 for any of the relations =, <, >, ≤, ≥. Each relation is associated with a set of signs for p for which p 0 holds: let rel_signs = ["=",[Zero]; "<=",[Zero;Negative]; ">=",[Zero;Positive]; "<",[Negative]; ">",[Positive]];;

Now, given an association list pmat of polynomials with their signs, we can evaluate a formula by just: let testform pmat fm = eval fm (fun (R(a,[p;z])) -> mem (assoc p pmat) (assoc a rel_signs));;

As we will see, the generalization to multivariate polynomials is straightforward, so being able to ﬁnd the sign matrix is the core of our enterprise. And a fairly simple recursive algorithm to ﬁnd sign matrices can be based on the following observation. We can construct the sign matrix for the polynomials: p, p1 , . . . , pn given a sign matrix for the following polynomials, where p is the derivative of p, and each qi is the remainder on dividing p by pi (with p0 meaning p ): p , p1 , . . . , pn , q0 , q1 , . . . , qn .

370

Decidable problems

The procedure for deriving the sign matrix for the ﬁrst set, given one for the second, is as follows. First, we split the sign matrix into two equallysized parts, one for the p , p1 , . . . , pn and one for the q0 , q1 , . . . , qn , but for the moment keeping all the points, even if no polynomial in one set has a root at some of them. We can now infer the sign of p(xi ) for each point xi that is a root of one of the polynomials pk , as follows. Since qk is the remainder on dividing p by pk , we have p(x) = sk (x)pk (x) + qk (x) for some sk (x). Therefore, if pk (xi ) = 0 we have p(xi ) = qk (xi ) and so we can derive the sign of p at xi from that of the corresponding qk . If the point xi is not a root of one of the p , p1 , . . . , pn , or we are dealing with an interval, we just assign Nonzero; these will be eliminated in the next step. The following code implements this process for two corresponding rows pd and qd of the sign matrices for p , p1 , . . . , pn and q0 , . . . , qn respectively. let inferpsign (pd,qd) = try let i = index Zero pd in el i qd :: pd with Failure _ -> Nonzero :: pd;;

Having applied this to all rows, we throw away the second sign matrix, giving signs for the q0 , . . . , qn , and retain the (partial) matrix for p, p , p1 , . . . , pn , which we ‘condense’ to remove points that are not roots of one of the p , p1 , . . . , pn . The signs of the p , p1 , . . . , pn in an interval from which some other points have been removed can be read oﬀ from any of the subintervals in the original subdivision – they cannot change because there are no roots for the relevant polynomials there. let rec condense ps = match ps with int::pt::other -> let rest = condense other in if mem Zero pt then int::pt::rest else rest | _ -> ps;;

Now we have a sign matrix for p, p , p1 , . . . , pn with correct signs at all the points, but undetermined signs for p on the intervals, and the possibility that there may be additional roots of p inside these intervals. However, note that there can be at most one root of p in each interval, even including its endpoint(s). For if there were two roots, then p would reach a maximum or minimum somewhere in between them, contradicting the fact that p is nonzero on the interior of the interval. Consider ﬁrst an internal interval (xi , xi+1 ). By the observation above, if p(xi ) = 0 or p(xi+1 ) = 0 we know that there can be no other root in the

5.9 The real numbers

371

interval. If both p(xi ) and p(xi+1 ) are nonzero and their signs are diﬀerent then there is a root of p in the interval, by the intermediate value property. Finally, if the signs are both nonzero but are the same, there is no root in the interval, because in that case p would reach a maximum or minimum there (whether it crosses or just touches the x-axis), and this is impossible since p = 0. To summarize, there is one root of p inside the interval if the signs of p(xi ) and p(xi+1 ) are both nonzero and diﬀerent, and there is no root otherwise. What about the two semi-inﬁnite intervals? For suﬃciently large |x|, a polynomial is dominated by the term of highest degree, and if p(x) ∼ an xn we have p (x) ∼ nan xn−1 , so the ratio between the two eventually has positive sign as x → +∞ and negative sign as x → −∞. Let us temporarily introduce pseudo-endpoints −∞ and +∞ to denote ‘points at inﬁnity’. Based on the above observation, we deﬁne the sign of p(−∞) by ﬂipping the sign of p on the lowest interval (−∞, x1 ) and the sign of p(+∞) by copying the sign of p on the highest interval (xn , +∞). Now exactly the same decision method works for this case too, which makes the implementation more regular. The following function implements these observations to complete the sign matrix, assuming that the ‘points at inﬁnity’ have been added ﬁrst. When this is called, the ﬁrst three elements of ps are the lists of polynomial signs for respectively the leftmost point, the interval following it, and the next point to its right. We pick out the signs of p (the head of each list) at the left (l) and right (r) endpoints of the interval. It should actually be impossible for both signs to be zero, since that would imply a point of zero derivative between. And we hope never to encounter just Nonzero; by design we will always have a more precise sign whenever inferisign function is used. Otherwise, if just one sign is zero, we infer the sign on the interval from the sign at the nonzero end. If both are negative or both positive, we infer the sign from l (we could equally well use r). The more complex case is where l and r are opposites, and we insert a new point and its surrounding intervals. The signs of p on the new subintervals are taken from the corresponding endpoints, and it is zero at the new point. Nothing changes for the other polynomials throughout the original interval, so we just duplicate ints for them. In each case we recursively call inferisign to deal with the remaining points and intervals. And ﬁnally, when there are fewer than three elements, we assume we have reached the rightmost endpoint, so there are no intervals to infer the sign of p on, and we return the original sign matrix unchanged.

372

Decidable problems

let rec inferisign ps = match ps with ((l::ls) as x)::(_::ints)::((r::rs)::xs as pts) -> (match (l,r) with (Zero,Zero) -> failwith "inferisign: inconsistent" | (Nonzero,_) | (_,Nonzero) -> failwith "inferisign: indeterminate" | (Zero,_) -> x::(r::ints)::inferisign pts | (_,Zero) -> x::(l::ints)::inferisign pts | (Negative,Negative) | (Positive,Positive) -> x::(l::ints)::inferisign pts | _ -> x::(l::ints)::(Zero::ints)::(r::ints)::inferisign pts) | _ -> ps;;

Now we’re ready for the overall function to convert a sign matrix mat for p , p1 , . . . , pn , q0 , q1 , . . . , qn into one for p, p1 , . . . , pn . Rather than returning the result, it applies the given continuation function cont to it, since this ﬁts in with the later code structure. Otherwise it’s just a question of putting together the earlier pieces. We set l = n + 1, and apply inferpsign to all rows of the matrix, ﬁrst splitting them into the pieces for p , p1 , . . . , pn and for q0 , q1 , . . . , qn . After condensation to remove extraneous points, we get a partial sign matrix mat1 for p, p , p1 , . . . , pn . The points at inﬁnity are added, just for p since nothing else will be looked at, to give mat2. We then infer the signs on the intervals and remove the points at inﬁnity again to give mat3. Finally, we remove p from this matrix, condense again to remove points that were just roots of p , and apply the continuation to the result. let dedmatrix cont mat = let l = length (hd mat) / 2 in let mat1 = condense(map (inferpsign ** chop_list l) mat) in let mat2 = [swap true (el 1 (hd mat1))]::mat1@[[el 1 (last mat1)]] in let mat3 = butlast(tl(inferisign mat2)) in cont(condense(map (fun l -> hd l :: tl(tl l)) mat3));;

The reasoning underlying dedmatrix is based on fairly straightforward observations of real analysis. Essentially the same procedure can be used even for multivariate polynomials, treating other variables as parameters while eliminating one variable. The only complication is that instead of literally dividing one polynomial s by another one p: s(x) = p(x)q(x) + r(x) we may instead have only a pseudo-division ak s(x) = p(x)q(x) + r(x),

5.9 The real numbers

373

where a is the leading coeﬃcient of p, in general a polynomial in the other variables. As with the complex numbers, we will need to perform case-splits over polynomials in other variables to make sure a = 0. Even then, to infer the sign of r from that of s, we need to know the sign of ak . Our solution is an enhanced pseudo-division function ensuring that r has the same sign as s. We obtain the head coeﬃcient a of p(x) and perform pseudo-division as usual, say ak s(x) = p(x)q(x) + r(x). We then examine what we know from the context about the sign of a. If it is zero, we fail, and if the context does not determine it, findsign will fail. Otherwise if we know either that a > 0 or that k is even, we have ak > 0 and can safely return r(x). Otherwise, k must be odd. If we know a < 0, then also ak < 0 so we need to return −r(x). Otherwise, all we know is a = 0, so we implicitly multiply through again by a and return ar(x); note that ak+1 s(x) = ap(x)q(x) + ar(x), and since k is odd, k + 1 is even. let pdivide_pos vars sgns s p = let a = head vars p and (k,r) = pdivide vars s p in let sgn = findsign sgns a in if sgn = Zero then failwith "pdivide_pos: zero head coefficient" else if sgn = Positive or k mod 2 = 0 then r else if sgn = Negative then poly_neg r else poly_mul vars a r;;

We will also need to case-split over positive/negative status of coeﬃcients, and the following function is analogous to the function split_zero that we wrote for the complex numbers and will shortly use again. It is assumed that by the time we use this function, we already know from the context at least that the polynomial concerned is nonzero. let split_sign sgns pol cont = match findsign sgns pol with Nonzero -> let fm = Atom(R(">",[pol; zero])) in Or(And(fm,cont(assertsign sgns (pol,Positive))), And(Not fm,cont(assertsign sgns (pol,Negative)))) | _ -> cont sgns;;

In the later algorithm, the most convenient thing is to perform a threeway case-split over the zero, positive or negative cases, but call the same continuation on the positive and negative cases: let split_trichotomy sgns pol cont_z cont_pn = split_zero sgns pol cont_z (fun s’ -> split_sign s’ pol cont_pn);;

Sign matrix determination is now implemented by a set of three mutually recursive functions. The ﬁrst function casesplit takes two lists of polynomials: dun (so named because ‘done’ is a reserved word in OCaml) is

374

Decidable problems

the list whose head coeﬃcients have known sign, and pols is the list to be checked. As soon as we have determined all the head coeﬃcient signs, we call matrix. For each polynomial p in the list pols we perform appropriate case-splits. In the zero case we chop oﬀ its head coeﬃcient and recurse, and in the other cases we just add it to the ‘done’ list. But if any of the polynomials is a constant with respect to the top variable, we recurse to a delconst function to remove it. let rec casesplit vars dun pols cont sgns = match pols with [] -> matrix vars dun cont sgns | p::ops -> split_trichotomy sgns (head vars p) (if is_constant vars p then delconst vars dun p ops cont else casesplit vars dun (behead vars p :: ops) cont) (if is_constant vars p then delconst vars dun p ops cont else casesplit vars (dun@[p]) ops cont)

The delconst function just removes the polynomial from the list and returns to case-splitting, except that it also modiﬁes the continuation appropriately to put the sign back in the matrix before calling the original continuation: and delconst vars dun p ops cont sgns = let cont’ m = cont(map (insertat (length dun) (findsign sgns p)) m) in casesplit vars dun ops cont’ sgns

Finally, we come to the main function matrix, where we assume that all the polynomials in the list pols are non-constant and have a head coeﬃcient of known nonzero sign. If the list of polynomials is empty, then trivially the empty sign matrix is the right answer, so we call the continuation on that. Note the exception trap, though! Because of our rather naive case-splitting, we may reach situations where an inconsistent set of sign assumptions is made – for example a < 0 and a3 > 0 or just a2 < 0. This can in fact lead to the ‘impossible’ situation that the sign matrix has two roots of some p(x) with no root of p (x) in between them – in which case inferisign will generate an exception. We don’t actually want to fail here, but we’re at liberty to return whatever formula we like, such as ⊥. Otherwise, we pick a polynomial p of maximal degree, so that we make deﬁnite progress in the recursive step: we remove at least one polynomial of maximal degree and replace it only with polynomials of lower degree. One can show that the recursion is therefore terminating, via the wellfoundedness of the multiset order (Appendix 1) or using a more direct argument. We reshuﬄe the polynomials slightly to move p from position i to the head of the list, and add its derivative in front of that, giving qs. Then we form all

5.9 The real numbers

375

the remainders gs from pseudo-division of p by each member of the qs, and recurse again on the new list of polynomials, starting with the case-splits. The continuation is modiﬁed to apply dedmatrix and also to compensate for the shuﬄing of p to the head of the list: and matrix vars pols cont sgns = if pols = [] then try cont [[]] with Failure _ -> False else let p = hd(sort(decreasing (degree vars)) pols) in let p’ = poly_diff vars p and i = index p pols in let qs = let p1,p2 = chop_list i pols in p’::p1 @ tl p2 in let gs = map (pdivide_pos vars sgns p) qs in let cont’ m = cont(map (fun l -> insertat i (hd l) (tl l)) m) in casesplit vars [] (qs@gs) (dedmatrix cont’) sgns;;

To perform quantiﬁer elimination from an existential formula, we ﬁrst pick out all the polynomials (we assume atoms have already been normalized), set up the continuation to test the body on the resulting sign matrix, and call casesplit with the initial sign context. let basic_real_qelim vars (Exists(x,p)) = let pols = atom_union (function (R(a,[t;Fn("0",[])])) -> [t] | _ -> []) p in let cont mat = if exists (fun m -> testform (zip pols m) p) mat then True else False in casesplit (x::vars) [] pols cont init_sgns;;

Note that we can test any quantiﬁer-free formula using the matrix, not just a conjunction of literals. So we may elect to do no logical normalization of the formula at all, certainly not a full DNF transformation. We will however evaluate and simplify all the time: let real_qelim = simplify ** evalc ** lift_qelim polyatom (simplify ** evalc) basic_real_qelim;;

Examples We can try out the algorithm by testing if univariate polynomials have solutions: # # -

real_qelim <<exists x. x^4 + x^2 + 1 = 0>>;; : fol formula = <> real_qelim <<exists x. x^3 - x^2 + x - 1 = 0>>;; : fol formula = <<true>>

376

Decidable problems

and even, though not very eﬃciently, count them: # real_qelim <<exists x y. x^3 - x^2 + x - 1 = 0 /\ y^3 - y^2 + y - 1 = 0 /\ ~(x = y)>>;; - : fol formula = <>

If the reader is still a bit puzzled by all the continuation-based code, it might be instructive to see the sign matrix that gets passed to testform. One way is to switch on tracing; e.g. compare the output here with the example of a sign matrix we gave at the beginning: # #trace testform;; # real_qelim <<exists x. x^2 - 3 * x + 2 = 0 /\ 2 * x - 3 = 0>>;; # #untrace testform;;

We can eliminate quantiﬁers however they are nested, e.g. # real_qelim < f < a * e) ==> f <= a * k>>;; - : fol formula = <<true>>

and we can obtain parametrized solutions to root existence questions, albeit not very compact ones: # real_qelim <<exists x. a * x^2 + b * x + c = 0>>;; - : fol formula = <<0 + a * 1 = 0 /\ (0 + b * 1 = 0 /\ 0 + c * 1 = 0 \/ ~0 + b * 1 = 0 /\ (0 + b * 1 > 0 \/ ~0 + b * 1 > 0)) \/ ~0 + a * 1 = 0 /\ (0 + a * 1 > 0 /\ (0 + a * ((0 + b * (0 + b * -1)) + a * (0 + c * 4)) = 0 \/ ~0 + a * ((0 + b * (0 + b * -1)) + a * (0 + c * 4)) = 0 /\ ~0 + a * ((0 + b * (0 + b * -1)) + a * (0 + c * 4)) > 0) \/ ~0 + a * 1 > 0 /\ (0 + a * ((0 + b * (0 + b * -1)) + a * (0 + c * 4)) = 0 \/ ~0 + a * ((0 + b * (0 + b * -1)) + a * (0 + c * 4)) = 0 /\ 0 + a * ((0 + b * (0 + b * -1)) + a * (0 + c * 4)) > 0))>>

Moreover, we can check our own simpliﬁed condition by eliminating all quantiﬁers from a claimed equivalence, perhaps ﬁrst guessing: # real_qelim < b^2 >= 4 * a * c>>;; - : fol formula = <>

and then realizing we need to consider the degenerate case a = 0:

5.9 The real numbers

377

# real_qelim < a = 0 /\ (b = 0 ==> c = 0) \/ ~(a = 0) /\ b^2 >= 4 * a * c>>;; - : fol formula = <<true>>

In Section 4.7 we derived a canonical term rewriting system for groups, and we can prove that it is terminating using the following polynomial interpretation (Huet and Oppen 1980). With each term t in the language of groups we associate an integer value v(t) > 1, by assigning some arbitrary integer > 1 to each variable and then calculating the value of a composite term according to the following rules: v(s · t) = v(s)(1 + 2v(t)), v(i(t)) = v(t)2 , v(1) = 2. We should ﬁrst verify that this is indeed ‘closed’, i.e. that if v(s) and v(t) are both > 1, so are v(s · t), v(i(t)) and v(1). (The other required property, being an integer, is preserved by addition and multiplication.) We can do this pretty quickly: # real_qelim <<1 < 2 /\ (forall x. 1 < x ==> 1 < x^2) /\ (forall x y. 1 < x /\ 1 < y ==> 1 < x * (1 + 2 * y))>>;; - : fol formula = <<true>>

To avoid tedious manual transcription, we automatically translate terms to their corresponding ‘valuations’, where the variables in a term are simply mapped to similarly-named variables in the value polynomial. let rec grpterm tm = match tm with Fn("*",[s;t]) -> let t2 = Fn("*",[Fn("2",[]); grpterm t]) in Fn("*",[grpterm s; Fn("+",[Fn("1",[]); t2])]) | Fn("i",[t]) -> Fn("^",[grpterm t; Fn("2",[])]) | Fn("1",[]) -> Fn("2",[]) | Var x -> tm;;

Now to show that a set of equations {si = ti | 1 ≤ i ≤ n} terminates, it suﬃces to show that v(si ) > v(ti ) for each one. So let us map an equation

378

Decidable problems

s = t to a new formula v(s) > v(t), then generalize over all variables, relativized to reﬂect the assumption that they are all > 1: let grpform (Atom(R("=",[s;t]))) = let fm = generalize(Atom(R(">",[grpterm s; grpterm t]))) in relativize(fun x -> Atom(R(">",[Var x;Fn("1",[])]))) fm;;

After running completion to regenerate the set of equations: let eqs = complete_and_simplify ["1"; "*"; "i"] [<<1 * x = x>>; <>; <<(x * y) * z = x * y * z>>];;

we can create the critical formula and test it: # let fm = list_conj (map grpform eqs);; val fm : fol formula = <<(forall x4. x4 > 1 ==> (forall x5. x5 > 1 ==> (x4 * (1 + 2 * x5))^2 > x5^2 * (1 + 2 * x4^2))) /\ (forall x1. x1 > 1 ==> x1^2^2 > x1) /\ ... >>;; # real_qelim fm;; - : fol formula = true

Improvements The decidability of the theory of reals is a remarkable and theoretically useful result. In principle, we could use real_qelim to settle unsolved problems such as ﬁnding kissing numbers for spheres in various dimensions (Conway and Sloane 1993). In practice, such a course is completely hopeless. The natural algorithms based on CAD are doubly exponential in the size of the formula, and Davenport and Heintz (1988) have shown that this is a lower bound in general, though an algorithm due to Grigor’ev (1988) that is ‘only’ doubly exponential in the number of alternations of quantiﬁers may be advantageous for formulas with a limited quantiﬁer structure. These bad theoretical complexity bounds are matched by real practical diﬃculties, even on such simple-looking examples as ∀x. x4 + px2 + qx + r ≥ 0 (Lazard 1988). Motivated by the ‘feeling that a single algorithm for the full elementary theory of R can hardly be practical’ (van den Dries 1988), many authors have investigated special heuristic mixtures of algorithms for restricted subcases. One particularly notable failing of our algorithm is that it does not exploit equations in the initial problem to perform cancellation by pseudo-division, yet in many cases this would be a dramatic improvement – see Exercise 5.20

5.9 The real numbers

379

below. Indeed, even Collins’s original CAD algorithm, according to Loos and Weispfenning (1993), performed badly on the following: ∃c. ∀b. ∀a. (a = d ∧ b = c) ∨ (a = c ∧ b = 1) ⇒ a2 = b. We do poorly here too, but if we ﬁrst split the formula up into DNF: let real_qelim’ = simplify ** evalc ** lift_qelim polyatom (dnf ** cnnf (fun x -> x) ** evalc) basic_real_qelim;;

the situation is much better: # real_qelim’ < a^2 = b) <=> d^4 = 1>>;; - : fol formula = <<true>>

A reﬁnement of this idea of elimination using equations, developed and successfully applied by Weispfenning (1997), is to perform ‘virtual term substitution’ to replace other instances of x constrained by a polynomial p(x) = 0 by expressions for the roots of that polynomial. In the purely linear case, where the language does not include multiplication except by constants, things are better still: we can slightly elaborate the DLO procedure from Section 5.6 to rearrange equations or inequalities using arithmetic normalization. We just put the variable to be eliminated alone on one side of each equation or inequality (e.g. transforming 0 < 3x + 2y − 6z into −2/3y +2z < x when eliminating x) then proceed with the same elimination step: si < tj . (∃x. ( si < x) ∧ ( x < tj )) ⇔ i

j

i,j

This gives essentially the classic ‘Fourier–Motzkin’ elimination method, ﬁrst described by Fourier (1826) but then largely forgotten until being rediscovered much later by Dines (1919) and Motzkin (1936); Ferrante and Rackoﬀ (1975) give a reﬁnement inspired by Cooper’s algorithm avoiding the need for DNF conversion. Note that each such variable elimination can roughly square the number of inequalities, leading to exponential complexity even for a prenex existential formula with a conjunctive body, and this cost is known to be unavoidable in general for full quantiﬁer elimination (Fischer and Rabin 1974). But the special case of deciding a closed existentially quantiﬁed conjunction of linear constraints is essentially linear programming. For

380

Decidable problems

this, the classic simplex method (Dantzig 1963) often works well in practice, and more recent interior-point algorithms following Karmarkar (1984) even have provable polynomial-time bounds.†

5.10 Rings, ideals and word problems The algorithm for complex quantiﬁer elimination in Section 5.8 is often inefﬁcient because eliminating one quantiﬁer tends to make the formula substantially larger and blow up the degrees of the other variables. If we restrict ourselves to a more limited goal of testing validity over C of purely universal formulas: ∀x1 . . . xn . P [x1 , . . . , xn ] we can use a quite diﬀerent approach that deals with all the variables at once. We ﬁrst generalize such problems from C to broader classes of interpretations.

Word problems Suppose K is a class of algebraic structures, e.g. all groups. The word problem for K asks whether a set E of ground equations in some agreed language implies another such equation s = t in all structures of class K. More precisely, we may wish to distinguish: • the uniform word problem for K: deciding given any E and s = t whether E |=M s = t for all models M in K; • the word problem for K, E: with E ﬁxed, deciding given any s = t whether E |=M s = t for all models M in K; • the free word problem for K: deciding given any s = t whether |=M s = t for all models M in K. We’ve already developed an algorithm to solve the free word problem for groups: rewrite both sides of the equation s = t with the canonical term rewriting system for groups produced by Knuth–Bendix completion (Section 4.7) and see if the results are the same. Yet it turns out that there are ﬁnite E such that the word problem for groups and E is undecidable (Novikov 1955; Boone 1959). Somewhat more obscurely, there are classes K for which †

The linear programming problem was famously proved to be solvable in polynomial time by Khachian (1979), using a reduction to approximate convex optimization, solvable in polynomial time using the ellipsoid algorithm. However, the implicit algorithm was seldom competitive with simplex in practice. See Grotschel, Lovsz and Schrijver (1993) for a detailed discussion of the ellipsoid algorithm and its remarkable generality.

5.10 Rings, ideals and word problems

381

there is no uniform decision algorithm with E and s = t as inputs, even though for any speciﬁc ﬁnite E there is a decision algorithm taking s = t as input (Mekler, Nelson and Shelah 1993). Assuming that the class K can be axiomatized by Σ, the word problem asks whether Σ ∪ E |= s = t. If we further assume that E is ﬁnite, and replace constants not appearing in the axioms by variables, we can express the word problem as deciding whether the following holds, where all terms involve only constants and function symbols that occur in the axioms Σ: si = ti ⇒ s = t. Σ |= ∀x1 . . . xn . i

Rings Rings are algebraic structures that have both an addition and a multiplication operation, with respective identities 0 and 1, satisfying the following axioms: x + y = y + x, x + (y + z) = (x + y) + z, x + 0 = x, x + (−x) = 0, x · y = y · x, x · (y · z) = (x · y) · z, x · 1 = x, x · (y + z) = x · y + x · z. We will consider deductions in ﬁrst-order logic without equality. For this reason, we denote by Ring the above axioms together with the following equivalence and congruence properties: x = x, x = y ⇒ y = x, x = y ∧ y = z ⇒ x = z, x = x ⇒ −x = −x , x = x ∧ y = y ⇒ x + y = x + y , x = x ∧ y = y ⇒ x · y = x · y . so that p holds in all rings exactly if Ring |= p. Many familiar structures are rings, e.g. the integers, rationals, real numbers and complex numbers with the symbols interpreted in the obvious way. Also, for any n > 0 we can deﬁne

382

Decidable problems

a ﬁnite ring Z/nZ with domain {0, . . . , n − 1} interpreting the operations modulo n, e.g. −5 = 1, 3 + 5 = 2 and 3 · 5 = 3 in Z/6Z. Another interesting example can be deﬁned on ℘(A), the set of all subsets of an arbitrary set A, with 0 = ∅, 1 = A, −S = A − S, S + T = (S − T ) ∪ (T − S) (‘symmetric diﬀerence’) and S · T = S ∩ T . Various other equations follow just from the ring axioms, notably 0 · x = x · 0 = 0: 0 · x = x · 0 = x · 0 + 0 = x · 0 + (x · 0 + −(x · 0)) = (x · 0 + x · 0) + −(x · 0) = x · (0 + 0) + −(x · 0) = x · 0 + −(x · 0) = 0. Similarly, one can show that (−1) · x = −x. We use the binary subtraction notation s − t to abbreviate s + −t. Note that the ring axioms imply s = t ⇔ s − t = 0. (If s = t then s − t = s + −t = t + −t = 0, while if s − t = 0 then s = s + 0 = s + (t + −t) = s + (−t + t) = (s + −t) + t = (s − t) + t = 0 + t = t.) This allows us to state many results just for equations of the form t = 0 without real loss of generality. Just as we use the conventional symbols 1 and 0 for arbitrary rings, we abuse notation a little and write n to mean the ring element: n times 1 + ··· + 1.

However, it is important to realize that these values may not all be distinct. The smallest positive n such that n = 0 is called the characteristic of the ring, while if there is is no such n we say that the ring has characteristic zero. For example Z/6Z has characteristic 6, ℘(A) has characteristic 2 (even if A and hence ℘(A) is inﬁnite) and R has characteristic 0. Note that k = 0 in a ring R exactly if k is divisible by the ring’s characteristic char(R). If char(R) = 0 this is immediate since only 0 is divisible by 0, while for positive characteristic we can write k = q · char(R) + r where 0 ≤ r < char(R), and q · char(R) = q · 0 = 0 so k = 0 iﬀ r = 0. When we wish to restrict ourselves to rings of some speciﬁc characteristic n for n > 0 we can add a suitable set of axioms Cn : ¬(1 = 0), ¬(2 = 0), ··· ¬(n − 1 = 0), n = 0.

5.10 Rings, ideals and word problems

383

or specify that it has characteristic 0 by the inﬁnite set of axioms C0 = {¬(n = 0) | n ∈ N ∧ n ≥ 1}. At the very least we may freely choose to add the axiom C1 = {¬(1 = 0)} to indicate that the ring is non-trivial, since it makes little diﬀerence to the decision problem. Theorem 5.14 Ring ∪ Γ |= ∀x1 , . . . , xn . C1 |= ∀x1 , . . . , xn . i si = ti ⇒ s = t.

i si

= ti ⇒ s = t iﬀ Ring ∪ Γ ∪

Proof The left-to-right direction is immediate. In the other direction, note that any equation s = t follows from the ring axioms and 1 = 0.

The ring of polynomials Given a ring R, we want to deﬁne a set R[x1 , . . . , xn ] of polynomials in n variables with coeﬃcients in R. The appropriate deﬁnition in abstract algebra is neither of the following. • The set of expressions generating the polynomials. This fails to identify expressions like x+1 and 1+x that we want to think of as the same. (One can, however, deﬁne the polynomials as an appropriate quotient structure on the set of expressions, as Theorem 5.16 below indicates.) • The functions resulting from evaluating a polynomial. This may identify too many polynomials, such as x2 + x and 0 over a 2-element base ring. Rather, we will deﬁne a polynomial formally as a mapping p : Nn → R such that {i ∈ Nn | p(i) = 0} is ﬁnite. Intuitively we think of (i1 , . . . , in ) ∈ Nn as representing a monomial xi11 · · · · · xinn and the function p as giving the coeﬃcient of that monomial. For example, the polynomial normally written x21 x2 + 3x1 x2 is the function that maps (2, 1) → 1, (1, 1) → 3 and all other pairs (i, j) → 0. We deﬁne operations on R[x1 , . . . , xn ] in terms of those in the base ring R. Intuitively, the arithmetic operations correspond to expanding out and collecting like terms, e.g. (x+1)·(x−1) = x2 −1. It is a little tedious but not fundamentally diﬃcult to verify that these operations make the polynomials themselves into a ring; for a more detailed discussion of all this construction and other aspects of ring theory that we treat somewhat cursorily below, see Weispfenning and Becker (1993). • 0 is the constant function with value 0; • 1 is the function mapping (0, . . . , 0) → 1 and all other tuples to 0; • −p is deﬁned by (−p)(m) = −p(m);

384

Decidable problems

• p + q is deﬁned by (p + q)(m) = p(m) + q(m);

• (p · q) is deﬁned by (p · q)(m) = {(m1 ,m2 )|m1 ·m2 =m} p(m1 ) · q(m2 ), where monomial multiplication is deﬁned by (i1 , . . . , in ) · (j1 , . . . , jn ) = (i1 + j1 , . . . , in + jn ). We will implement the ring Q[x1 , . . . , xn ] of polynomials with rational coeﬃcients in OCaml, where for convenience we adopt a list-based representation of the graph of the function p, containing exactly the pairs (c, [i1 ; . . . ; in ]) such that p(i1 , . . . , in ) = c with c = 0. (The zero polynomial is represented by the empty list.) From now on we will sometimes use the word ‘monomial’ in a more general sense for a pair (c, m) including a constant multiplier.† We can multiply monomials in accordance with the deﬁnition as follows: let mmul (c1,m1) (c2,m2) = (c1*/c2,map2 (+) m1 m2);;

Indeed, we can divide one monomial by another in some circumstances: let mdiv = let index_sub n1 n2 = if n1 < n2 then failwith "mdiv" else n1-n2 in fun (c1,m1) (c2,m2) -> (c1//c2,map2 index_sub m1 m2);;

and even ﬁnd a ‘least common multiple’ of two monomials: let mlcm (c1,m1) (c2,m2) = (Int 1,map2 max m1 m2);;

To avoid multiple list representations of the same function p : Nn → Q, we ensure that the monomials are sorted according to a ﬁxed total order , with the largest elements under this ordering appearing ﬁrst in the list. We adopt the following order, which compares monomials ﬁrst according to their multidegree (the sum of the degrees of all the variables), breaking ties by ordering them reverse lexicographically. let morder_lt m1 m2 = let n1 = itlist (+) m1 0 and n2 = itlist (+) m2 0 in n1 < n2 or n1 = n2 & lexord(>) m1 m2;;

For example, x22 x21 x2 because the multidegrees are 2 and 3, while x21 x2 x32 because powers of x1 are considered ﬁrst in the lexicographic ordering. The attractions of this ordering are considered below; here we just note that it is compatible with monomial multiplication: if m1 m2 then also m · m1 m · m2 . This means that we can multiply a polynomial by †

Sometimes ‘term’ is used, but in our context that might be more confusing.

5.10 Rings, ideals and word problems

385

a monomial without reordering the list, which is both simpler and more eﬃcient: let mpoly_mmul cm pol = map (mmul cm) pol;;

Similarly, a polynomial can be negated by a mapping operation: let mpoly_neg = map (fun (c,m) -> (minus_num c,m));;

Note that the formal deﬁnition of the ring of polynomials renders ‘variables’ anonymous, but if we have some particular list of variables x1 , . . . , xn in mind, we can regard xi as a shorthand for (0, . . . , 0, 1, 0, . . . , 0) where only the ith entry is nonzero: let mpoly_var vars x = [Int 1,map (fun y -> if y = x then 1 else 0) vars];;

To create a constant polynomial, we use vars too, but only to determine how many variables we’re dealing with. If the constant is zero, we give the empty list, otherwise a list mapping the constant monomial to an appropriate value: let mpoly_const vars c = if c =/ Int 0 then [] else [c,map (fun k -> 0) vars];;

To add two polynomials, we can run along them recursively, putting the ‘larger’ of the two head monomials ﬁrst in the output list, or when two head monomials have the same degree, merging them by adding coeﬃcients and if the resulting coeﬃcient is zero, removing it. let rec mpoly_add l1 l2 = match (l1,l2) with ([],l2) -> l2 | (l1,[]) -> l1 | ((c1,m1)::o1,(c2,m2)::o2) -> if m1 = m2 then let c = c1+/c2 and rest = mpoly_add o1 o2 in if c =/ Int 0 then rest else (c,m1)::rest else if morder_lt m2 m1 then (c1,m1)::(mpoly_add o1 l2) else (c2,m2)::(mpoly_add l1 o2);;

Addition and negation together give subtraction: let mpoly_sub l1 l2 = mpoly_add l1 (mpoly_neg l2);;

386

Decidable problems

For multiplication, we just multiply the second polynomial by the various monomials in the ﬁrst one, adding the results together: let rec mpoly_mul l1 l2 = match l1 with [] -> [] | (h1::t1) -> mpoly_add (mpoly_mmul h1 l2) (mpoly_mul t1 l2);;

and we can get powers by iterated multiplication: let mpoly_pow vars l n = funpow n (mpoly_mul l) (mpoly_const vars (Int 1));;

We can also permit inversion of constant polynomials: let mpoly_inv p = match p with [(c,m)] when forall (fun i -> i = 0) m -> [(Int 1 // c),m] | _ -> failwith "mpoly_inv: non-constant polynomial";;

and hence also perform division subject to the same constraint: let mpoly_div p q = mpoly_mul p (mpoly_inv q);;

We can convert any suitable term in the language of rings into a polynomial by the usual process of recursion: let rec mpolynate vars tm = match tm with Var x -> mpoly_var vars x | Fn("-",[t]) -> mpoly_neg (mpolynate vars t) | Fn("+",[s;t]) -> mpoly_add (mpolynate vars s) | Fn("-",[s;t]) -> mpoly_sub (mpolynate vars s) | Fn("*",[s;t]) -> mpoly_mul (mpolynate vars s) | Fn("/",[s;t]) -> mpoly_div (mpolynate vars s) | Fn("^",[t;Fn(n,[])]) -> mpoly_pow vars (mpolynate vars t) | _ -> mpoly_const vars (dest_numeral tm);;

(mpolynate (mpolynate (mpolynate (mpolynate

vars vars vars vars

t) t) t) t)

(int_of_string n)

Then we can convert any suitable equational formula s = t, which we think of as s − t = 0, into a corresponding polynomial: let mpolyatom vars fm = match fm with Atom(R("=",[s;t])) -> mpolynate vars (Fn("-",[s;t])) | _ -> failwith "mpolyatom: not an equation";;

In later discussions, we will write ‘norm’ to abbreviate mpolynate vars where vars contains all the variables in any of the polynomials under

5.10 Rings, ideals and word problems

387

consideration. We also write s ≈ t to mean norm(s) = norm(t), i.e. that the terms s and t in the language of rings deﬁne the same polynomial.

The word problem for rings To state the next result, it’s helpful to introduce the concept of an ideal in a polynomial ring.† If p1 , . . . , pn are polynomials in R[x1 , . . . , xk ] (we often abbreviate such a ﬁnite sequence of variables xi as x) we write IdR p1 , . . . , pn (read ‘the ideal generated by p1 , . . . , pn ’) for the set of polynomials that can be expressed as follows: p1 · q 1 + · · · + p n · q n , where qi (sometimes referred to as cofactors) are arbitrary polynomials with coeﬃcients in R, allowing the empty sum 0. With slight abuse of language, we will also use the ideal expression p ∈ IdR p1 , . . . , pn for terms in the language of rings, when we should more properly write norm(p) ∈ IdR norm(p1 ), . . . , norm(pn ). Let us note the following closure properties. (i) 0 ∈ IdR p1 , . . . , pn , because we can take each qi = 0. (ii) Each pi ∈ IdR p1 , . . . , pn , because we can take qi = 1 and all other qj = 0. (iii) If p ∈ IdR p1 , . . . , pn and q ∈ IdR p1 , . . . , pn then also (p + q) ∈

IdR p1 , . . . , pn , because if i pi · qi = p and i pi · qi = q we have

i pi · (qi + qi ) = p + q. (iv) If p ∈ IdR p1 , . . . , pn and q is any other polynomial with coeﬃcients

in R, then (pq) ∈ IdR p1 , . . . , pn , because if i pi · qi = p then

p · (q · q ) = p · q. i i i (v) If p ∈ IdR p1 , . . . , pn then (−p) ∈ IdR p1 , . . . , pn . This follows from (iv) since −p = p · (−1). (vi) If p ∈ IdR p1 , . . . , pn and q ∈ IdR p1 , . . . , pn then also (p − q) ∈ IdR p1 , . . . , pn . This follows from (iii) and (v) since since p − q = p + (−q). Using the Horn nature of the ring axioms, we can ﬁnd a reduction to ideal membership of the uniform word problem for rings (Scarpellini 1969; Simmons 1970).‡ †

‡

Ideals were originally introduced by Kummer as a way of restoring unique factorization in algebraic number ﬁelds. Note that for a principal ideal, i.e. one generated by a single element, we have x ∈ Id y precisely if x is divisible by y. Ideals can be considered as a way of augmenting the ‘real’ divisors with additional ‘ideal’ ones, hence the name. The proof works slightly more directly using the Birkhoﬀ rules from Section 4.3, in which case we don’t need to consider the equality axioms as separate hypotheses. However, we emphasize a

388

Decidable problems

Theorem 5.15 Ring |= ∀x. p1 (x) = 0 ∧ · · · ∧ pn (x) = 0 ⇒ q(x) = 0 iﬀ q ∈ IdZ p1 , . . . , pn , i.e. there exist terms q1 ,. . . ,qn in the language of rings with p1 · q1 + · · · + pn · qn ≈ q. Proof We will replace Ring |= ∀x. p1 (x) = 0 ∧ · · · ∧ pn (x) = 0 ⇒ q(x) = 0 by the logically equivalent Ring ∪ {p1 = 0, . . . , pn = 0} |= q = 0, considering the x as Skolem constants. The right-to-left direction is the easier one: if there are qi with Ring |= p1 · q1 + · · · + pn · qn = q, then using hypotheses pi = 0 and ring properties 0 · qi and 0 + 0 = 0 repeatedly, we can derive q = 0. For the other direction, note that all the formulas Ring and pi = 0 are Horn clauses. By the results of Section 3.14, this means that if Ring ∪ {p1 = 0, . . . , pn = 0} |= q = 0 there is a Prolog-style deduction of q = 0 from the hypotheses Ring ∪ {p1 = 0, . . . , pn = 0}. We will show by induction on this proof that for each equation s = t in the proof tree, we have (s − t) ∈ IdZ p1 , . . . , pn . Each leaf s = t is either a ring axiom or reﬂexivity of equality, in which case s − t ≈ 0 ∈ IdZ p1 , . . . , pn , or one of the pi , and we know pi ∈ IdZ p1 , . . . , pn . For the inner nodes, we need to verify that the property is preserved when using equality and congruence rules, and all those follow immediately from the closure properties of ideals noted above. For example, if an internal node s = u uses transitivity of equality from subnodes s = t and t = u, we know by the inductive hypothesis that (s−t) ∈ IdZ p1 , . . . , pn and (t − u) ∈ IdZ p1 , . . . , pn . By closure of ideals under addition we have (s − u) = ((s − t) + (t − u)) ∈ IdZ p1 , . . . , pn . In the special case of the free word problem we have: Theorem 5.16 Ring |= s = t iﬀ s ≈ t, i.e. s and t deﬁne the same polynomial. Proof Apply the previous theorem in the degenerate case n = 0 to p = s − t.

In a more general direction, the Horn nature of the ring axioms allows us to relate the validity of an arbitrary universal formula in the language of rings to the special case of the word problem. We can put the body of the formula into CNF, distributing the universal quantiﬁers over the general ﬁrst-order deduction and the Horn nature of the ring axioms here to clarify the contrast with the word problem for integral domains considered below.

5.10 Rings, ideals and word problems

389

conjuncts and splitting the problem up, then write each resulting clause in the form pi (x) = 0 ⇒ qj (x) = 0. ∀x1 , . . . , xn . i

j

If there are no qj (x) then the formula is equivalent to ⊥, since all the ring axioms and pi (x) = 0 are deﬁnite clauses and therefore cannot be unsatisﬁable. If there is exactly one qj (x) then we have the word problem. If there are several qj (x), we can use the fact that theories deﬁned by Horn clauses are convex (Theorem 3.39) and therefore the above is equivalent to the disjunction of word problems (∀x1 , . . . , xn . pi (x) = 0 ⇒ qj (x) = 0). j

i

Thus, we can solve the entire universal theory of rings if we can solve the word problem, and we can solve that if we can solve ideal membership.

The word problem for torsion-free rings We say that a ring is torsion-free if it satisﬁes the inﬁnite set of axioms: T = {∀x. nx = 0 ⇒ x = 0 | n ≥ 1}. We can arrive at a satisfying ideal membership equivalence for the word problem in torsion-free rings (Simmons 1970). Theorem 5.17 Ring ∪ T |= ∀x. p1 (x) = 0 ∧ · · · ∧ pn (x) = 0 ⇒ q(x) = 0 iﬀ q ∈ IdQ p1 , . . . , pn . Proof A minor adaptation of the proof of Theorem 5.15. Note that q ∈ IdQ p1 , . . . , pn iﬀ there is a nonzero integer c such that cq ∈ IdZ p1 , . . . , pn . Now, the right-to-left direction follows as before, also using the non-torsion axiom cq = 0 ⇒ q = 0. In the other direction, note that the axioms T are still Horn, and in the same way we can prove the result by induction on a Prolog-style proof. Note that a non-trivial torsion-free ring must have characteristic zero because n = 0 for n ≥ 2 implies n · 1 = 0 and so 1 = 0. The converse is not true in general, though it is true in integral domains, considered next.

390

Decidable problems

The word problem for integral domains A ring is called an integral domain if it is non-trivial (1 = 0) and satisﬁes the following axiom I: x · y = 0 ⇒ x = 0 ∨ y = 0. If R is an integral domain, then either char(R) = 0 or char(R) = p for some prime number p, because if p = m · n = 0 the axiom I implies that either m = 0 or n = 0. We will show that Ring∪ {I} |= ∀x. p1 (x) = 0 ∧ · · · ∧ pn (x) = 0 ⇒ q(x) = 0 iﬀ there is some nonnegative integer k such that q k ∈ IdZ p1 , . . . , pn ; it is only in the power k that the result diﬀers from the one for general rings. In fact we consider the more general assertion, where we keep variables x for familiarity but assume they are really Skolem constants: Ring ∪ {I} ∪ {p1 (x) = 0, . . . , pn (x) = 0} ∪ {q1 (x) = 0, . . . , qm (x) = 0} |= ⊥. As with rings, we will consider a proof of such a statement, and show by recursion on proofs that it implies a corresponding ideal membership property. But this time we have a non-Horn axiom I, so we need a more general proof format than Prolog-style trees; roughly following Lifschitz (1980), we use binary resolution. This is refutation complete, so if the assertion above holds there is a proof of it by resolution. We may assume that all hypotheses are instantiated and consider a refutation of the instantiations by propositional resolution. Each clause in the refutation is a set of negated and unnegated literals that is implicitly a disjunction of the form: r

(ei = ei ) ∨

i=1

s

fj = fj .

j=1

For simplicity, we implicitly regard an equation s = t as s − t = 0 when we consider ideal membership assertions, so we often just consider the special case r s (ei = 0) ∨ fj = 0. i=1

j=1

We will show by induction on the proof that for all such clauses in such a refutation, there is a nonnegative integer k such that ((

m i=1

qi )(

s

j=1

fj ))k ∈ IdZ e1 , . . . , er , p1 , . . . , pn .

5.10 Rings, ideals and word problems

391

For the purely equational ring axioms l = r, including reﬂexivity of equality, we always have l − r ≈ 0 so trivially (l − r) ∈ IdZ p1 , . . . , pn . Equally trivially, for each unit clause pi = 0 we have pi ∈ IdZ p1 , . . . , pn . In both cases it was suﬃcient to take k = 1. The same is true of the equivalence and congruence properties of equality, as we can check systematically. • For x = y ⇒ y = x we need to show (y − x) ∈ IdZ x − y, p1 , . . . , pn , which is true since (y − x) ≈ −1 · (x − y). • For x = y ∧ y = z ⇒ x = z we need (x − z) ∈ IdZ x − y, y − z, p1 , . . . , pn , which is true since (x − z) ≈ 1 · (x − y) + 1 · (y − z). • For x = x ⇒ −x = −x we need (−x − −x ) ∈ IdZ x − x , p1 , . . . , pn , which is true since (−x − −x ) ≈ −1 · (x − x ). • For x = x ∧y = y ⇒ x+y = x +y we need to show ((x+y)−(x +y )) ∈ IdZ x − x , y − y , p1 , . . . , pn , which is true since ((x + y) − (x + y )) ≈ 1 · (x − x ) + 1 · (y − y ). • For x = x ∧ y = y ⇒ x · y = x · y we need to show (x · y − x · y ) ∈ IdZ x − x , y − y , p1 , . . . , pn , which is true since x · y − x · y ≈ y · (x − x ) + x · (y − y ). For a unit clause qi = 0, we have trivially qi ∈ IdZ qi , p1 , . . . , pn , so by closure of ideals under multiplication we have m i=1 qi ∈ IdZ qi , p1 , . . . , pn , where again we can take k = 1. The axiom I, which when put in clause form is xy = 0 ∨ x = 0 ∨ y = 0 is slightly subtler. In the simple case we have xy ∈ IdZ xy, p1 , . . . , pn and therefore we can take k = 1: m ( qi ) xy ∈ IdZ xy, p1 , . . . , pn , i=1

but we need to distinguish the special case where x and y receive the same instantiation: since we think of clauses as sets, this is technically a 2-element clause x2 = 0 ∨ x = 0 and we need k = 2: m

(( qi ) x)2 ∈ IdZ x2 , p1 , . . . , pn . i=1

Now we just need to show that the claimed property is preserved by resolution steps. We decompose each resolution step into a pseudo-resolution step, producing a ‘clause’ with possible duplicates, followed by a series of factoring steps. Let’s look at the factoring steps ﬁrst. If we factor two instances of a negated equation e = 0 ∨ e = 0 ∨ Γ , e = 0 ∨ Γ

392

Decidable problems

the result follows because IdZ e, e, . . . is the same as IdZ e, . . .. If we factor two instances of a positive equation f =0∨f =0∨Γ , f =0∨Γ then we have by hypothesis an ideal membership of the form: (p · f · f )k ∈ I which implies (because ideals are closed under multiplication by other terms): (p · f )2k ∈ I as required. The most complicated case is a pseudo-resolution step on e = 0: e = 0 ∨ ri=1 ei = 0 ∨ sj=1 fj = 0 e = 0 ∨ ti=1 gi = 0 ∨ uj=1 hj = 0 . t s u r i=1 ei = 0 ∨ i=1 gi = 0 ∨ j=1 fj = 0 ∨ j=1 hj = 0 By the inductive hypothesis applied to the two input clauses we have ideal memberships (QF )k ∈ IdZ e, e1 , . . . , er , p1 , . . . , pn , (QeH)l ∈ IdZ g1 , . . . , gt , p1 , . . . , pn , s u where we write Q = m i=1 qi , F = j=1 fj and H = j=1 hj . We can separate the cofactor r of e in the ﬁrst ideal membership: (QF )k − re ∈ IdZ e1 , . . . , er , p1 , . . . , pn and therefore (since xl − y l is always divisible by x − y): (QF )kl − rl el ∈ IdZ e1 , . . . , er , p1 , . . . , pn . Using closure under multiplication again, we have (QF )kl (QH)l − rl (QeH)l ∈ IdZ e1 , . . . , er , p1 , . . . , pn and therefore using the second ideal membership assertion (QF )kl (QH)l ∈ IdZ e1 , . . . , er , g1 , . . . , gt , p1 , . . . , pn and using closure under multiplication we can reach a common exponent as required: (QF H)kl+l ∈ IdZ e1 , . . . , er , g1 , . . . , gt , p1 , . . . , pn . We are ﬁnally ready to conclude:

5.10 Rings, ideals and word problems

393

Theorem 5.18 Ring ∪ {I} |= ∀x. p1 (x) = 0 ∧ · · · ∧ pn (x) = 0 ⇒ q1 (x) = 0 ∨ · · · ∨ qm (x) = 0 if and only if there is a nonnegative integer k such that m ( qi )k ∈ IdZ p1 , . . . , pn . i=1

Proof If the logical assertion holds, then since resolution is refutation complete, there is a derivation of ⊥ from the axioms Ring ∪ {I} ∪ {p1 (x) = 0, . . . , pn (x) = 0} ∪ {q1 (x) = 0, . . . , qm (x) = 0}. Applying the property deduced above to the empty clause yields the result. Conversely, if the ideal membership holds, then whenever all the pi (x) = 0 we m k have ( m i=1 qi ) = 0. If k is nonzero, it follows from axiom I that i=1 qi = 0 and then that some qi (x) = 0, contradicting one of the hypotheses. If all ki are zero we have deduced 1 = 0 and therefore any qi (x) = 0 at once. Several results on word problems are corollaries, most straightforwardly: Theorem 5.19 ∀x. p1 (x) = 0 ∧ · · · ∧ pn (x) = 0 ⇒ q(x) = 0 holds in all integral domains, i.e. Ring ∪ {I} ∪ C1 |= ∀x. p1 (x) = 0 ∧ · · · ∧ pn (x) = 0 ⇒ q(x) = 0, iﬀ there is a nonnegative integer k such that q k ∈ IdZ p1 , . . . , pn . Proof Combine Theorem 5.14 and the m = 1 case of the previous theorem. More speciﬁcally, we might ask about the word problem for integral domains of a particular characteristic p. Theorem 5.20 ∀x. p1 (x) = 0 ∧ · · · ∧ pn (x) = 0 ⇒ q(x) = 0 holds in all integral domains of characteristic p, i.e. Ring ∪ {I} ∪ Cp |= ∀x. p1 (x) = 0 ∧ · · · ∧ pn (x) = 0 ⇒ q(x) = 0, iﬀ there is a nonnegative integer k and an integer c not divisible by p such that such that cq k ∈ IdZ p, p1 , . . . , pn , where p is the constant polynomial corresponding to the integer p. Proof As usual, the right-to-left direction is straightforward. Conversely, if the logical assertion holds then we have Ring ∪ {I} ∪ C1 ∪ {c1 = 0, . . . , cm = 0, p = 0} |= ∀x. p1 (x) = 0 ∧ · · · ∧ pn (x) = 0 ⇒ q(x) = 0

394

Decidable problems

for a ﬁnite set of integers c1 , . . . , cm , none divisible by p. (In the case of nonzero characteristic, p = 0 and the various ci = 0 make up exactly the axiom Cp . In the case of zero characteristic, p = 0 is trivially derivable anyway, and by compactness only ﬁnitely many instances of c = 0 are used.) This is equivalent to: Ring ∪ {I} ∪ C1 |= p1 (x) = 0 ∧ · · · ∧ pn (x) = 0 ∧ p = 0 ⇒ c1 · · · cm q(x) = 0 By the main theorem we have (c1 · · · cm · q)k ∈ IdZ p, p1 , . . . , pn , and the result follows by writing c = (c1 · · · cm )k . The characteristic p is zero or a prime, so if it doesn’t divide any ci , and thus neither does it divide this c. As we will see later, this is equivalent to a famous theorem in algebraic geometry, the (strong) Hilbert Nullstellensatz. We will use the term ‘Nullstellensatz’ to refer to all the variants above, for integral domains in general or those of speciﬁed characteristic. In the special case of characteristic zero: Theorem 5.21 ∀x. p1 (x) = 0 ∧ · · · ∧ pn (x) = 0 ⇒ q(x) = 0 holds in all integral domains of characteristic 0 iﬀ there is a nonnegative integer k such that such that q k ∈ IdQ p 1 , . . . , pn . Proof As with torsion-free rings, note that q k ∈ IdQ p1 , . . . , pn iﬀ there is a nonzero integer c such that cq k ∈ IdZ p1 , . . . , pn . As usual, the right-to-left direction is straightforward: if all the pi = 0 are zero, so is cq k = 0 and hence q = 0, trivially if k = 0 so we get an immediate contradiction. Conversely, apply the previous theorem in the case p = 0; we don’t need to include p in the ideal since 0 is already a member of every ideal.

Fields A ﬁeld is a non-trivial ring where each nonzero element x has a multiplicative inverse x−1 such that x−1 · x = 1. Logically, the axioms for ﬁelds are just those for non-trivial rings together with ¬(x = 0) ⇒ x−1 x = 1, where x−1 is syntactic sugar for the application of a new unary function symbol. Note that a ﬁeld is automatically an integral domain, because if x · y = 0 yet x = 0 then y = 1 · y = (x−1 · x) · y = x−1 · (x · y) = x−1 · 0 = 0.

5.10 Rings, ideals and word problems

395

The converse is not true; Q, R and C are ﬁelds but Z is not (there is no element such that 2 · x = 1). The ring Z/nZ is a ﬁeld iﬀ it is an integral domain iﬀ n is a prime number (Section 3.3). However, every integral domain R can be extended to a ﬁeld (R’s ‘ﬁeld of fractions’), whose elements are equivalence classes of pairs (p, q) of elements of R such that q = 0, under the equivalence relation (p1 , q1 ) ∼ (p2 , q2 ) ⇔ p1 q2 = q1 p2 . Intuitively, we think of a pair (p, q) as representing the ‘fraction’ p/q, and the equivalence classes as taking into account the multiple pairs corresponding to the same fraction (e.g. 1/2 = 2/4 = 3/6). The operations are deﬁned in accordance with that intuition: 0 = (0, 1), 1 = (1, 1), −(p, q) = (−p, q), (p, q)−1 = (q, p), (p1 , q1 ) + (p2 , q2 ) = (p1 · q2 + p2 · q1 , q1 · q2 ), (p1 , q1 ) · (p2 , q2 ) = (p1 · p2 , q1 · q2 ); but, independent of any intuition, one can show directly that these operations are well-deﬁned with respect to the equivalence relation and satisfy the ﬁeld axioms; this is worked out in detail in many textbooks on abstract algebra (Cohn 1974; Jacobson 1989; Lang 1994). From the embeddability of integral domains in ﬁelds, we can conclude that integral domains and ﬁelds are equivalent w.r.t. universal formulas. Theorem 5.22 A universal formula in the language of rings holds in all ﬁelds [of characteristic p] iﬀ it holds in all integral domains [of characteristic p]. Proof If a formula holds in all integral domains, then it also holds in all ﬁelds, because a ﬁeld is a kind of integral domain. Conversely, if a property holds in all ﬁelds, then given an integral domain R, it holds in the ﬁeld of fractions of R and hence, since it is a universal formula, in the subset corresponding to R.

The Rabinowitsch trick If we can solve the word problem for ﬁelds or integral domains, we can solve the whole universal theory. To decide:

396

Decidable problems

∀x. p1 (x) = 0 ∧ · · · ∧ pn (x) = 0 ⇒ q1 (x) = 0 ∨ · · · qm (x) = 0 we can’t rely on convexity as we did for rings (the axiom I is non-Horn). But the integral domain axiom justiﬁes our condensing the disjunction of equations into one: ∀x. p1 (x) = 0 ∧ · · · ∧ pn (x) = 0 ⇒ q1 (x) · · · · · qm (x) = 0. In fact, in a ﬁeld we can reduce matters to a degenerate case of the word problem. Because all nonzero ﬁeld elements have multiplicative inverses, and 0 · y = 0 in any ring, we have: ¬(x = 0) ⇔ ∃y. xy = 1. This means that we can replace negated equations by unnegated ones, at the cost of adding new variables. For example, we can rewrite the standard word problem ∀x. p1 (x) = 0 ∧ · · · ∧ pn (x) = 0 ⇒ q(x) = 0 as ∀x z. p1 (x) = 0 ∧ · · · ∧ pn (x) = 0 ∧ 1 − q(x)z = 0 ⇒ ⊥. For the general universal case, we can condense the conclusion to one equation as noted above, or if we prefer introduce separate variables for every negated equation: ∀x z1 . . . zm . p1 (x) = 0 ∧ · · · ∧ pn (x) = 0 ∧ 1 − q1 (x)z1 = 0 ∧ · · · ∧ 1 − qm (x)zm = 0 ⇒ ⊥. This method of replacing negated equations by unnegated ones is known as the Rabinowitsch trick. Since ⊥ is equivalent to 1 = 0 in any ﬁeld, we can reduce such an assertion to membership of 1 in an ideal. (Note that if an ideal contains 1 then it is in fact a ‘trivial’ ideal consisting of the entire ring of polynomials, since ideals are closed under multiplication.) A Nullstellensatz in this special case of triviality is referred to as a weak Nullstellensatz. For example:

5.10 Rings, ideals and word problems

397

Theorem 5.23 ∀x. p1 (x) = 0 ∧ · · · ∧ pn (x) = 0 ⇒ ⊥ holds in all integral domains / ﬁelds, i.e. Ring ∪ {I} ∪ C1 |= ∀x. p1 (x) = 0 ∧ · · · ∧ pn (x) = 0 ⇒ ⊥, iﬀ 1 ∈ IdZ p1 , . . . , pn . Proof Apply the strong Nullstellensatz with q(x) = 1, noting that q k = 1. Similarly: Theorem 5.24 ∀x. p1 (x) = 0 ∧ · · · ∧ pn (x) = 0 ⇒ ⊥ holds in all integral domains / ﬁelds of characteristic 0 iﬀ 1 ∈ IdQ p1 , . . . , pn . Proof Apply the strong Nullstellensatz with q(x) = 1, noting that q k = 1. Using the Rabinowitsch trick plus a weak Nullstellensatz (Kapur 1988) is more attractive for automated theorem proving than a strong Nullstellensatz because we don’t have to search through all possible powers of the conclusion polynomial. However, the trick was ﬁrst used as a theoretical device to show that one can deduce a strong Nullstellensatz from the corresponding weak one. Indeed, given explicit cofactors for an ideal membership 1 ∈ IdZ p1 , . . . , pn , 1 − qz one can explicitly construct an l such that q l ∈ IdZ p1 , . . . , pn (see Exercise 5.23). This also shows that one can treat the Rabinowitsch trick as a purely formal transformation without reference to inverses. (Since we have noted that ﬁelds and integral domains are equivalent w.r.t. universal formulas in the language of rings, this observation is perhaps supererogatory.)

Algebraically closed ﬁelds The existence of multiplicative inverses in ﬁelds implies that a linear equation a · x + b = 0 in a ﬁeld has a solution unless a = 0 and b = 0; if a = 0 the solution is simply x = −b · a−1 . However, polynomial equations of higher degree such as quadratics may not have a solution; for instance x2 + 1 = 0 has no solution in the ﬁeld of real numbers. Recall that a ﬁeld is said to be algebraically closed when every polynomial other than a nonzero constant has a root. A fundamental result in algebra states that any ﬁeld can be extended to an algebraically closed ﬁeld. (As it is an extension, it necessarily has the same characteristic.) The proof is not too hard but uses a certain amount of algebraic machinery (Lang 1994); for a sketch of an alternative proof using

398

Decidable problems

results of logic see Exercise 5.25. So just as we related universal formulas for integral domains and ﬁelds, we can conclude: a universal formula in the language of rings holds in all algebraically closed ﬁelds [of characteristic p] iﬀ it holds in all ﬁelds [of characteristic p].

The Fundamental Theorem of Algebra, which we exploited to justify quantiﬁer elimination in Section 5.8, states exactly that the ﬁeld of complex numbers is algebraically closed. In fact, re-examining how the quantiﬁer elimination procedure was justiﬁed, the reader can observe that we use no properties beyond the fact that C is an algebraically closed ﬁeld of characteristic zero (see Exercise 5.18). Thus we conclude that any sentence has the same truth-value in all algebraically closed ﬁelds of characteristic zero. This means that the theory of algebraically closed ﬁelds of characteristic zero is complete, and in particular that: a closed formula holds in C iﬀ it holds in all algebraically closed ﬁelds of characteristic zero.

Combining all our results we see that all the following are equivalent for a universal formula in the language of rings. • • • • •

it it it it it

holds holds holds holds holds

in in in in in

all integral domains of characteristic 0, all ﬁelds of characteristic 0, all algebraically closed ﬁelds of characteristic 0, any given algebraically closed ﬁeld of characteristic 0, C.

(The Nullstellensatz, for example, is most commonly stated for a ﬁxed but arbitrary algebraically closed ﬁeld.) Thus, despite the lengthy detour into general algebraic structures, we have arrived back at the complex numbers. Modifying the quantiﬁer elimination procedure from Section 5.8 to take into account the characteristic (see Exercise 5.18), we can likewise see that it works identically for any algebraically closed ﬁeld of characteristic p. Thus, the theory of algebraically closed ﬁelds of a particular characteristic p is also complete. Abelian monoids and groups We started with the word problem for general rings, then considered rings with additional axioms and/or operations (integral domains, ﬁelds, algebraically closed ﬁelds). We can proceed towards structures with fewer axioms as well. A monoid is an algebraic structure with a distinguished element 1 and a binary operator · satisfying the axioms of associativity and identity

5.10 Rings, ideals and word problems

399

(so a group is a monoid with an inverse operation). An abelian monoid also satisﬁes commutativity of the operation, i.e: x · (y · z) = (x · y) · z, x · y = y · x, 1 · x = x. Recall that universal formulas hold in all integral domains iﬀ they hold in all ﬁelds, because every ﬁeld is an integral domain, while every integral domain can be extended to a ﬁeld. Similarly we have: Theorem 5.25 A universal formula in the multiplicative language of monoids holds in all abelian monoids iﬀ it holds in all rings. Proof Every ring is in particular an abelian monoid with respect to its multiplication operation, since the ring axioms include the abelian monoid axioms. So if any formula holds in all abelian monoids it holds in all rings. Conversely, every abelian monoid M can be extended, given any starting ring R such as Z, to a ring R(M ) called the monoid ring. This is based on the set of functions f : M → R such that {x|f (x) = 0} is ﬁnite. The operators are deﬁned just as for the polynomial ring R[X], using elements of the monoid rather than monomials, and monoid operations in place of monomial operations. We leave it to the reader to check that all details of the construction generalize straightforwardly. (Indeed, we could have regarded the polynomial ring as a special case of a monoid ring, based on the monoid of monomials.) Thus if a universal formula holds in all rings, it holds in all monoid rings and hence in the substructure of monoid elements (‘polynomials with at most one monomial’). Corollary 5.26 ∀x. s1 = t1 ∧ · · · ∧ sn = tn ⇒ s = t holds in all monoids iﬀ s − t ∈ IdZ s1 − t1 , . . . , sn − tn . Proof Combine the previous theorem and Theorem 5.15. We can do something similar for abelian groups, but this time piggybacking oﬀ the additive structure of the ring. (The ‘abelian’ is crucial: as we have already remarked the word problem for groups in general is undecidable.) We’ll therefore consider abelian groups additively, with the axioms: x + (y + z) = (x + y) + z, x + y = y + x,

400

Decidable problems

0 + x = x, −x + x = 0.

We will once again argue that the word problems for abelian groups and rings (in the common additive language) are equivalent. One can prove this similarly based on the fact that every abelian group can be embedded in the additive structure of a ring (Exercise 5.26), but the following proof is perhaps more illuminating. Theorem 5.27 The following are equivalent for a word problem in the additive language of abelian groups: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

∀x. s1 = t1 ∧ · · · ∧ sn = tn ⇒ s = t holds in all abelian groups; ∀x. s1 = t1 ∧ · · · ∧ sn = tn ⇒ s = t holds in all rings; s − t ∈ IdZ s1 − t1 , . . . , sn − tn ; there are integers c1 ,. . . ,cn such that s − t = c1 · (s1 − t1 ) + · · · + cn · (sn − tn ).

Proof (i) ⇒ (ii) because every ring is an additive abelian group. (ii) ⇒ (iii) is Theorem 5.15. It is easy to see that (iv) ⇒ (i) because the linear combination of terms gives rise to a proof in group theory just as it does (with more general cofactors) in ring theory. It just remains to prove (iii) ⇒ (iv). If the ideal membership holds, separate the cofactors into constant terms ci and those of higher degree qi : s − t = (c1 + q1 ) · (s1 − t1 ) + · · · + (cn + qn ) · (sn − tn ). Since all monomials in the polynomials s−t and all si −ti have multidegree 1, comparing coeﬃcients of the terms of multidegree 1 shows that s − t = c1 · (s1 − t1 ) + · · · + c1 · (sn − tn ) as required.

5.11 Gr¨ obner bases The previous section showed that we can reduce several logical decision problems to questions of ideal membership, even the triviality of ideals, over polynomial rings. To recap, a formula ∀x. p1 (x) = 0 ∧ · · · ∧ pn (x) ⇒ q(x) = 0 in the language of rings: • holds in all rings (or in all non-trivial rings) iﬀ q ∈ IdZ p1 , . . . , pn ; • holds in all torsion-free rings (or in all non-trivial torsion-free rings) iﬀ q ∈ IdQ p1 , . . . , pn ;

5.11 Gr¨ obner bases

401

• holds in all integral domains (or in all ﬁelds, or in all algebraically closed ﬁelds) iﬀ q k ∈ IdZ p1 , . . . , pn for some k ≥ 0, or iﬀ for some variable z not among the x we have 1 ∈ IdZ p1 , . . . , pn , 1 − qz; • holds in all integral domains of characteristic 0 (or in all ﬁelds of characteristic 0, or in all algebraically closed ﬁelds of characteristic 0, or in C) iﬀ q k ∈ IdQ p1 , . . . , pn for some k ≥ 0, or iﬀ for some variable z not among the x we have 1 ∈ IdQ p1 , . . . , pn , 1 − qz. But how do we solve such ideal membership questions? To be explicit, given multivariate polynomials q(x), p1 (x), . . . pn (x) we want to test whether there exist ‘cofactor’ polynomials q1 (x), . . . qn (x) such that: p1 (x)q1 (x) + · · · + pn (x)qn (x) = q(x). If we know that we only need to consider a limited class of monomials in the cofactors, a workable approach is to parametrize general polynomials of that form and test solvability of the linear constraints that arise from comparing coeﬃcients. For example, to show that x4 + 1 is in the ideal generated by x2 + xy + 1 and y 2 − 2 we might postulate that we only need terms of multidegree ≤ 2 in the cofactors: (x2 + xy + 1) · (a1 x2 + a2 y 2 + a3 xy + a4 x + a5 y + a6 ) +(y 2 − 2) · (b1 x2 + b2 y 2 + b3 xy + b4 x + b5 y + b6 ) = x4 + 1. If we expand out and compare coeﬃcients w.r.t. the original variables, we get the following linear constraints (for example, b6 − 2b2 + a2 by considering the coeﬃcient of y 2 ): b2 a1 − 1 = 0 a3 + a1 b1 + a2 + a3 = 0 b4 + a5 b5 = 0 −2b1 + a6 + a1 = 0 b6 − 2b2 + a2 −2b5 + a5 −2b4 + a4 = 0

=0 b3 + a2 = 0 =0 a4 = 0 =0 a5 + a4 = 0 = 0 −2b3 + a6 + a3 = 0 = 0 −2b6 + a6 − 1 = 0

These equations are solvable, so the polynomial is indeed in the ideal. Moreover, from the solutions to the equations, which can be expressed in terms of a parameter t: a1 = 1, a2 = t, a3 = −1, a4 = 0, a5 = 0, a6 = 1 − 2t, b1 = 1 − t, b2 = 0, b3 = −t, b4 = 0, b5 = 0, b6 = −t we can explicitly obtain suitable cofactors: (x2 +xy +1)·(x2 +ty 2 −xy +(1−2t))+(y 2 −2)·((1−t)x2 −txy −t) = x4 +1,

402

Decidable problems

such as the instance with t = 0: (x2 + xy + 1) · (x2 − xy + 1) + (y 2 − 2) · (x2 ) = x4 + 1. Despite a certain crudity, this approach can work well, since solving systems of linear equations is a well-studied topic for which polynomial-time and practically eﬃcient algorithms exist, not only over Q but also over Z (Nemhauser and Wolsey 1999). But a serious defect is the need to place a bound on the monomials considered in the cofactors. (One special case where this is unproblematical is solving the word problem for abelian groups: as noted we only need to consider constant cofactors.) We can perform iterative deepening, searching for increasingly ‘complicated’ cofactors. But this is only a semi-decision procedure like ﬁrst-order proof search: if the polynomial is in the ideal we will prove it, but if not we may search forever. In fact there are theoretical bounds on the multidegrees we need to consider, and this formed the basis of early decision procedures for the problem (Hermann 1926). However, this approach is rather pessimistic since even over Q the bounds are doubly exponential (‘only’ singly exponential for triviality of an ideal) and over Z the situation is worse; see Aschenbrenner (2004) for a detailed discussion. We will present instead a completely diﬀerent method of Gr¨ obner bases, giving algorithmic solutions not only for ideal membership but for several related problems. This approach was originally developed by Buchberger (1965) in his PhD thesis – see also Buchberger (1970) – and in retrospect it has much in common with Knuth–Bendix completion, which it predated by some years. We will present it emphasizing this connection and re-using some of the general theoretical results about abstract reduction relations from Section 4.5. Our focus will be on ideal membership in Q[x], which by the previous section allows us to decide universal formulas over C, or over all ﬁelds of characteristic 0. With a little care, Gr¨ obner bases can be generalized to Z[x] and other polynomial rings (Kandri-Rody and Kapur 1984). Polynomial reduction A polynomial equation m1 + m2 + · · · + mp = 0, where m1 is the head monomial (the maximal one according to the ordering morder_lt from Section 5.10) can be rewritten as m1 = −m2 + · · · + −mp . The idea in what follows is to use this as a ‘rewrite rule’ to simplify other polynomials: any polynomial multiple p = qm1 of m1 can be replaced by

5.11 Gr¨ obner bases

403

−qm2 + · · · + −qmp . For technical simplicity, we deﬁne one-step reduction as applying this replacement to a single monomial in the target polynomial. Explicitly, we write p →S p if p contains a monomial m such that for some polynomial h+q in S with head monomial h we have p = p−m (h+q) = (p− m)−m q, where m = h·m . For example, if S = {x2 −xy+y} and our variable order makes x2 the head monomial, we can repeatedly apply x2 = xy − y to reduce x4 + 1 as follows. (We show the actual reductions followed by a restoration of the canonical polynomial representation with like monomials collected together, to make it easier to grasp what is happening. Abstractly, though, we consider these folded together in the reduction relation.) x4 + 1 → x2 (xy − y) + 1 =

x3 y − x2 y + 1

→ xy(xy − y) − x2 y + 1 =

x2 y 2 − x2 y − xy 2 + 1

→ y 2 (xy − y) − x2 y − xy 2 + 1 =

−x2 y + xy 3 − xy 2 − y 3 + 1

→ −y(xy − y) + xy 3 − xy 2 − y 3 + 1 =

xy 3 − 2xy 2 − y 3 + y 2 + 1.

We have thus shown x4 +1 →∗ xy 3 −2xy 2 −y 3 +y 2 +1. Moreover, x appears only linearly in the result, so no further reductions are possible. Indeed, we will show that polynomial reduction is always terminating, whatever the set S and the initial polynomial. A reduction step with h + q removes a monomial m h, replacing it by the various monomials m (−q). Since h is the head monomial, all monomials in q are below h in the ordering, so by compatibility of the ordering with multiplication, all monomials in m q are below m h = m. We have thus replaced one monomial by a ﬁnite number of monomials that are smaller according to . Moreover, the monomial order is wellfounded; indeed, given a monomial m there are only ﬁnitely many m with m m, since we only need to consider those with at most the same multidegree. It follows at once from the wellfoundedness of the multiset ordering (see Appendix 1) that the reduction process is terminating. There may in general be several diﬀerent p such that p →S p , either because more than one polynomial in S is applicable, or because several monomials in p could be reduced. This means that conﬂuence is a non-trivial question, and we will return to it before long. But ﬁrst we will implement polynomial reduction as a function, making natural but arbitrary choices

404

Decidable problems

where nondeterminism arises. The following code attempts to apply pol as a reduction rule to a monomial cm: let reduce1 cm pol = match pol with [] -> failwith "reduce1" | hm::cms -> let c,m = mdiv cm hm in mpoly_mmul (minus_num c,m) cms;;

and the following generalizes this to an entire set pols: let reduceb cm pols = tryfind (reduce1 cm) pols;;

We use this to reduce a target polynomial repeatedly until no further reductions are possible; by the above remark, we know that this will always terminate. let rec reduce pols pol = match pol with [] -> [] | cm::ptl -> try reduce pols (mpoly_add (reduceb cm pols) ptl) with Failure _ -> cm::(reduce pols ptl);;

Conﬂuence Since polynomial reduction is terminating, conﬂuence is equivalent, by Newman’s lemma (Theorem 4.9), to just local conﬂuence. As with rewriting, we can reduce local conﬂuence to the consideration of a ﬁnite number of critical situations. Suppose that a polynomial p can be reduced in one step either to q1 or to q2 . Rather as with rewriting, we can distinguish two distinct possibilities. • The reductions result from rewriting diﬀerent monomials, i.e. p = m1 + m2 +p0 such that one rewrite maps m1 → r1 and the other maps m2 → r2 . Thus, q1 = r1 + m2 + p0 and q2 = m1 + r2 + p0 . • The reductions result from rewriting the same monomial, i.e. p = m + p0 and one reduction rewrites m → r1 and the other maps m → r2 . In the ﬁrst case, it looks clear that we can join q1 and q2 just by applying m2 → r1 to q1 and m1 → r2 to q2 , giving a common result r1 + r2 + p0 . It’s not quite that simple, because one of the reducts ri may contain a rational multiple of the other monomial mj , changing the coeﬃcient of mj in pi . However, since the monomial order is wellfounded, we cannot have both m1 m2 and m2 m1 , so either r2 does not involve m1 or r1 does not involve m2 . By symmetry, it suﬃces to consider one of these possibilities. So suppose that r2 does not involve m1 , while r1 = am2 + s2 for some constant

5.11 Gr¨ obner bases

405

a (possibly 0) and another polynomial s2 not involving the monomial m2 . We have: q1

=

r1 + m2 + p0

=

(am2 + s2 ) + m2 + p0

=

(a + 1)m2 + s2 + p0

→∗

(a + 1)r2 + s2 + p0 ,

while q2

=

m1 + r2 + p0

→

r1 + r2 + p0

=

(am2 + s2 ) + r2 + p0

=

am2 + s2 + r2 + p0

→∗

ar2 + s2 + r2 + p0

=

(a + 1)r2 + s2 + p0 .

Thus q1 and q2 are joinable. (We use →∗ rather than → in some steps to take in the possibility that a = 0 or a + 1 = 0.) This shows that non-conﬂuence can only occur in the second situation, with rewrites to the same monomial m. Just as with Knuth–Bendix completion, where we were able to cover all such situations with a ﬁnite number of critical pairs based on most general uniﬁers, for Gr¨ obner bases we can cover all situations by considering a ‘most general’ monomial to which both rewrites are applicable, namely the lowest common multiple (LCM) of m1 and m2 . This is indeed ‘most general’ because reduction is closed under monomial multiplication: Lemma 5.28 If p → q and m is a nonzero monomial, then also mp → mq. Proof By deﬁnition, if p → q, the reduction arises from some equation m = r such that p = m m + p and q = rm + p . But then mp = m(m m + p ) = m (mm )+mp and so a reduction to r(mm )+mp is possible; this however is exactly m(rm + p ) = mq. Corollary 5.29 If p →∗ q and m is a monomial or zero, then also mp →∗ mq. Proof By rule induction on the reduction sequence p →∗ q, applying the lemma repeatedly. The case m = 0 is trivial since we are permitted an empty reduction sequence in mp →∗ mq.

406

Decidable problems

We might be tempted to conclude that it suﬃces to analyze conﬂuence of the two rewrites to a single monomial LCM(m1 , m2 ). Such a conclusion would be too hasty, however, because although the previous corollary shows that ‘→∗ ’, and hence joinability, is closed under monomial multiplication, the same is not true of addition. For example, consider the rewrite rules: F = {w = x + y, w = x + z, x = z, x = y}. We have x + y ↓F x + z, since both terms are immediately reducible to y +z, yet we do not have y ↓F z. So although the two possible rewrites to the monomial w give joinable results, they lead to non-conﬂuence when applied to w within a polynomial w − x. So instead of focusing on p ↓ q (Exercise 5.29 pursues this idea) it is simpler to consider the relation p − q →∗ 0. This is also closed under monomial multiplication since if p − q →∗ 0 we have by Corollary 5.29 that m(p − q) →∗ 0 and hence mp − mq →∗ 0. Moreover, its closure under addition of another polynomial is a triviality, since (p + r) − (q + r) and p − q are the very same polynomial. Although this new relation does not coincide with joinability, it does imply it. Theorem 5.30 If p − q →∗ 0 then also p ↓ q. Proof By induction on the length of the reduction sequence in p − q →∗ 0. If p − q = 0 then p = q and the result is trivial. Otherwise, suppose p − q → r →∗ 0. The rewrite p − q → r must arise from some multiple of a monomial m in the polynomial p − q, say to s. Let a and b be the coeﬃcients of this monomial in p and q respectively. Thus we have: p = am + p1 , q = bm + q1 , p − q = (a − b)m + (p1 − q1 ), r = (a − b)s + (p1 − q1 ). Note that a − b = 0 because we assumed m actually occurs in p − q. Now we have p →∗ p = as + p1 and q →∗ q = bs + p1 , using either zero or one instances of the same rewrite, depending on whether a = 0 and b = 0 respectively. But now p −q = (a−b)s+(p1 −p2 ) = r →∗ 0. By the inductive hypothesis, therefore, p ↓ q and this shows that p ↓ q. The converse is not true in general, as the example F above shows. There we have x + y ↓F x + z yet (x + y) − (x + z) = y − z is irreducible and nonzero. However, if the rewrites F deﬁne a conﬂuent relation, many more

5.11 Gr¨ obner bases

407

nice properties hold, including this converse. We lead up to this via a few lemmas. Lemma 5.31 If p → q then p + r ↓ q + r. Proof Suppose the reduction p → q arises from reducing a monomial m in p = m +p to s, so q = s+p . Note that the monomial m does not occur in p by construction and does not occur in s because of the ordering restriction in polynomial rewrites. Let a be the coeﬃcient of the monomial m in r, i.e. r = am + r (this a may be zero). We have: p + r = (a + 1)m + p + r , q + r = am + s + p + r .

Thus we have the following rewrites, possibly zero-step if a = 0 or a + 1 = 0: ﬁrst p + r →∗ (a + 1)s + p + r and also q + r → as + s + p + r . But these results are equal, so p + r ↓ q + r as required. Lemma 5.32 If → is conﬂuent and p →∗ q then p + r ↓ q + r. Proof By induction on the reduction sequence p →∗ q. If p = q then p + r and q + r are the same polynomial, so trivially p + r ↓ q + r. Otherwise we have p → p →∗ q for some p . By Lemma 5.31 we have p + r ↓ p + r, while the inductive hypothesis tells us that p + r ↓ q + r. But by Lemma 4.11, the conﬂuence of → implies the transitivity of ↓, and thus p + r ↓ q + r as required. Theorem 5.33 If → is conﬂuent and p ↓ q then also p + r ↓ q + r for any other polynomial r. Proof We will prove by induction on a reduction sequence p →∗ s that for any q →∗ s we have p + r ↓ q + r. If the reduction sequence p →∗ s is empty, we have q →∗ p and the result is immediate by the previous lemma. Otherwise we have p → p →∗ s. By Lemma 5.31, p + r ↓ p + r, while the inductive hypothesis yields p + r ↓ q + r. Again appealing to Lemma 4.11 for the transitivity of joinability, we have p + r ↓ q + r. Corollary 5.34 If → is a conﬂuent polynomial reduction and p ↓ q then also p − q →∗ 0.

408

Decidable problems

Proof Since p ↓ q the previous theorem yields p − q ↓ q − q, i.e. p − q ↓ 0. Since 0 is in normal form w.r.t. →, this shows that p − q →∗ 0. Now we can arrive at an analogous theorem to Theorem 4.24 for rewriting. Given two polynomials p and q, deﬁning reduction rules m1 = p1 and m2 = p2 according to the chosen ordering, deﬁne their S-polynomial † as follows: S(p, q) = p1 m1 − p2 m2 , where LCM(m1 , m2 ) = m1 m1 = m2 m2 . In OCaml this becomes: let spoly pol1 pol2 = match (pol1,pol2) with ([],p) -> [] | (p,[]) -> [] | (m1::ptl1,m2::ptl2) -> let m = mlcm m1 m2 in mpoly_sub (mpoly_mmul (mdiv m m1) ptl1) (mpoly_mmul (mdiv m m2) ptl2);;

We have: Theorem 5.35 A set of polynomial reductions F deﬁnes a conﬂuent reduction relation →F iﬀ for any two polynomials p, q ∈ F we have S(p, q) →∗F 0. Proof If →F is conﬂuent, then since both LCM(m1 , m2 ) → p1 m1 and LCM(m1 , m2 ) → p2 m2 are permissible reductions, we have p1 m1 ↓ p2 m2 . But this and conﬂuence again, by Corollary 5.34, yields S(p, q) = p1 m1 − p2 m2 →∗ 0. Conversely, suppose all S-polynomials reduce to zero; we will show that the reduction relation is conﬂuent. We have shown that the only possibility for non-conﬂuence is when two rewrites apply to the same monomial m in a polynomial p = m + p . Since this monomial m is a multiple both of m1 and m2 , it must be a multiple of LCM(m1 , m2 ). So we can write p = m LCM(m1 , m2 ) + p and see that the two reductions give m p1 m1 + p and m p2 m2 + p . But since by hypothesis p1 m1 − p2 m2 →∗ 0, we have m p1 m1 −m p2 m2 →∗ 0 and so (m p1 m1 +p )−(m p2 m2 +p ) →∗ 0. However, by Theorem 5.30, this implies that m p1 m1 + p ↓ m p2 m2 + p as required.

†

The S stands for syzygy, a concept that is explained in many books on commutative algebra and algebraic geometry such as Weispfenning and Becker (1993).

5.11 Gr¨ obner bases

409

Gr¨ obner bases We’ve produced a decidable criterion for conﬂuence of a set of polynomial rewrites, but haven’t yet explained the relevance to the ideal membership problem. We say that a set of polynomials F is a Gr¨ obner basis for an ideal J if J = IdQ F (i.e. J is the ideal generated by F ) and F deﬁnes a conﬂuent reduction system. (The basic theory of Gr¨ obner bases was developed by Buchberger, who was at the time a Ph.D. student supervised by Gr¨ obner.) To see the signiﬁcance of the concept, we ﬁrst note a few more simple lemmas. Lemma 5.36 If → is a conﬂuent polynomial rewrite system, then if p ↓ q and r ↓ s, we also have p + r ↓ q + s. Proof Using Theorem 5.33 twice we see that p + r ↓ q + r and q + r ↓ q + s. Using transitivity of ‘↓’ (Lemma 4.11) we have p + r ↓ q + s as required. Lemma 5.37 If → is a conﬂuent polynomial rewrite system, then if p ↓ q then also rp ↓ rq for any polynomial r. Proof We can write r as a sum of monomials m1 + · · · + mk . By Lemma 5.29 we have mi p ↓ mi q for 1 ≤ i ≤ k and so by using the previous result repeatedly m1 p + · · · + mk p ↓ m1 q + · · · + mk q, i.e. rp ↓ rq as required.

Now we are ready to see how Gr¨obner bases allow us to decide ideal membership. Theorem 5.38 The following are equivalent: (i) F is a Gr¨ obner basis for IdQ F , i.e. →F is conﬂuent; (ii) for any polynomial p, we have p →∗F 0 iﬀ p ∈ IdQ F ; (iii) for any polynomials p and q, we have p ↓F q iﬀ p − q ∈ IdQ F . Proof First note the triviality that if p →∗F q then p − q ∈ IdQ F . Since ideals contain zero and are closed under addition, it suﬃces to prove that if p →F q then p − q ∈ IdQ F . But this is clear since if if p →F q then by deﬁnition, q arises from subtracting a multiple of a polynomial in q. Similarly, if p ↓F q then there is an r with p →∗F r and q →∗F r. By the remarks at the beginning, p − r ∈ IdQ F and q − r ∈ IdQ F , but then by the closure properties of ideals, p−q = (p−r)−(q −r) ∈ IdQ F . This shows that the ‘only if’ parts of (ii) and (iii) are immediate regardless of whether

410

Decidable problems

F is a Gr¨obner basis. And since p − q →∗ 0 implies p ↓ q by Theorem 5.30, we have (ii) ⇒ (iii) at once. Now we will prove the other implications. (i) ⇒ (ii). Suppose that F is a Gr¨obner basis. As noted above, if p →∗F 0 then p = p − 0 ∈ IdQ F . Conversely, if p ∈ IdQ F then we can write

k p = i=1 qi pi where each pi ∈ F . Since trivially each pi →F 0 (rewrite its head monomial), we see by the lemmas above that p →∗F 0. (Note that p →∗ 0 and p ↓ 0 are always equivalent since 0 is irreducible.) (iii) ⇒ (i). Now suppose p ↓F q iﬀ p − q ∈ IdQ F . Note that the relation on the right is trivially transitive, by the closure of ideals under addition. Consequently, the joinability relation ↓F is also transitive, but by Lemma 4.11 this is equivalent to conﬂuence. This result shows that a Gr¨ obner basis allows us to decide the ideal membership problem just by rewriting a given polynomial p to a normal form and comparing the normal form with zero. In particular, we can test if 1 is in the ideal by checking if 1 →∗F 0. Evidently this can only happen if there is a constant polynomial in the Gr¨ obner basis.

Buchberger’s algorithm The above result shows the value of Gr¨ obner bases in solving (among others) our original problem, membership of 1 in a polynomial ideal. Moreover, Theorem 5.35 allows us to implement a decidable test whether a given set of polynomials constitutes a Gr¨ obner basis. As we shall see, Buchberger’s algorithm allows us to go further and create a Gr¨ obner basis for (the ideal generated by) any ﬁnite set of polynomials. Suppose that given a set F of polynomials, some f, g ∈ F are such that S(f, g) →∗F h where h is in normal form but nonzero. Just as with Knuth–Bendix completion, we can add the new polynomial h to the set to obtain F = F ∪ {h}. Trivially, we have h →F 0, but to test F for conﬂuence we need also to consider the new S-polynomials of the form {S(h, k) | k ∈ F }. (Note that we only need to consider one of S(h, k) and S(k, h) since one reduces to zero iﬀ the other does.) Thus, the following algorithm maintains the invariant that all S-polynomials of pairs of polynomials from basis are joinable by the reduction relation induced by basis except possibly those in pairs. Moreover, since each S(f, g) is of the form hf + kg, the set basis always deﬁnes exactly the same ideal as the original set of polynomials:

5.11 Gr¨ obner bases

411

let rec grobner basis pairs = print_string(string_of_int(length basis)^" basis elements and "^ string_of_int(length pairs)^" pairs"); print_newline(); match pairs with [] -> basis | (p1,p2)::opairs -> let sp = reduce basis (spoly p1 p2) in if sp = [] then grobner basis opairs else if forall (forall ((=) 0) ** snd) sp then [sp] else let newcps = map (fun p -> p,sp) basis in grobner (sp::basis) (opairs @ newcps);;

So, if this process eventually terminates with no unjoinable S-polynomials, we know that the resulting set is conﬂuent and deﬁnes the same ideal, i.e. is a Gr¨obner basis for the ideal deﬁned by the initial polynomials. And in fact, we are in the happy situation, in contrast to completion, that termination is guaranteed. Note that each S-polynomial is reduced with the existing basis before it is added to that basis. Consequently, each polynomial added to basis has no monomial divisible by the head monomial of any existing polynomial in basis. So nontermination of the algorithm would imply the existence of an inﬁnite sequence of monomials (mi ) such that mj is never divisible by mi for i < j. However, we will show that such an inﬁnite mk 1 sequence is impossible.† Since the divisibility of dxn1 1 · · · xnk k by cxm 1 · · · xk is equivalent to mi ≤ ni for all 1 ≤ i ≤ k, this is an immediate consequence of the following result known as Dickson’s lemma (Dickson 1913). Lemma 5.39 Deﬁne the ordering ≤n on Nn by (x1 , . . . , xn ) ≤n (y1 , . . . , yn ) iﬀ xi ≤ yi for all 1 ≤ i ≤ n. Then there is no inﬁnite sequence (ti ) of elements of Nn such that ti ≤n tj for all i < j. Proof By induction on n. The result is trivial for n = 0, or an immediate consequence of wellfoundedness of N for n = 1. So it suﬃces to assume the result established for n, and prove it for n + 1. We use the same kind of ‘minimal bad sequence’ argument used in the proof that the lexicographic path order is terminating (Theorem 4.21). Suppose we have a sequence (ti ) of elements of Nn+1 that is ‘bad’, i.e. such that ti ≤n+1 tj for any i < j. We will show that there is also a mini†

The reader who knows some commutative algebra can prove this more directly by observing that the sequence of ideals Ik = Id m1 , . . . , mk would form a strictly increasing chain, contradicting Hilbert’s Basis Theorem in the form of the ascending chain condition. A fairly simple proof of the Hilbert Basis Theorem due to Sarges (1976) can be found in Weispfenning and Becker (1993).

412

Decidable problems

mal bad sequence. Since N is wellfounded, there must be a minimal a ∈ N that can occur as the left component of the start (a, s) of a bad sequence (where s ∈ Nn ). Let a0 be such a number. Similarly, for later elements, let ak+1 be the smallest number a ∈ N such that there is a bad sequence beginning (a0 , s0 ), . . . , (ak+1 , sk+1 ) for some s0 , . . . , sk+1 . This is the minimal bad sequence. However, the existence of a minimal bad sequence ((ai , si )) is contradictory. By the inductive hypothesis, there are no bad sequences in ≤n , so we must have some i < j such that si ≤n sj . Since ((ai , si )) is assumed bad, we cannot have (ai , si ) ≤n+1 (aj , sj ), and therefore we cannot have ai ≤ aj . But then aj < ai , and so there is a bad sequence (a0 , s0 ), . . . , (ai−1 , si−1 ), (aj , sj ), . . ., but this contradicts the minimality of ai . In order to start Buchberger’s algorithm oﬀ, we just collect the initial set of S-polynomials, exploiting symmetry to avoid considering both S(f, g) and S(g, f ) for each pair f and g: let groebner basis = grobner basis (distinctpairs basis);;

Universal decision procedure Although we could create some polynomials at once and start experimenting, it’s better to fulﬁl our original purpose of producing a decision procedure for universal formulas over the complex numbers (or over all ﬁelds of characteristic 0) based on Gr¨obner bases, since that provides a more ﬂexible input format. In the core quantiﬁer elimination step, we need to eliminate some block of existential quantiﬁers from a conjunction of literals. For the negative equations, we will use the Rabinowitsch trick. The following maps a variable v and a polynomial p to 1 − vp as required: let rabinowitsch vars v p = mpoly_sub (mpoly_const vars (Int 1)) (mpoly_mul (mpoly_var vars v) p);;

The following takes a set of formulas (equations or inequations) and returns true if they have no common solution. We ﬁrst separate the input formulas into positive and negative equations. New variables rvs are created for the Rabinowitsch transformation of the negated equations, and the negated polynomials are appropriately transformed. We then ﬁnd a Gr¨ obner basis for the resulting set of polynomials and test whether 1 is in the ideal (i.e. reduces to 0).

5.11 Gr¨ obner bases

413

let grobner_trivial fms = let vars0 = itlist (union ** fv) fms [] and eqs,neqs = partition positive fms in let rvs = map (fun n -> variant ("_"^string_of_int n) vars0) (1--length neqs) in let vars = vars0 @ rvs in let poleqs = map (mpolyatom vars) eqs and polneqs = map (mpolyatom vars ** negate) neqs in let pols = poleqs @ map2 (rabinowitsch vars) rvs polneqs in reduce (groebner pols) (mpoly_const vars (Int 1)) = [];;

For an overall decision procedure for universal formulas, we ﬁrst perform some simpliﬁcation and prenexing, in case some eﬀectively universal quantiﬁers are internal. Then we negate, break the formula into DNF and apply grobner trivial to each disjunct: let grobner_decide fm = let fm1 = specialize(prenex(nnf(simplify fm))) in forall grobner_trivial (simpdnf(nnf(Not fm1)));;

We can try one of our earlier examples: # grobner_decide < x^4 + 1 = 0>>;; 3 basis elements and 3 pairs 3 basis elements and 2 pairs - : bool = true

On the other hand, if we change x4 +1 to x4 +2 we get false, as expected. Moreover, on universal formulas, the Gr¨ obner basis algorithm is generally signiﬁcantly faster than the earlier quantiﬁer elimination procedure, especially when many variables are involved. Even the following simple example is solved in a fraction of the time taken by the earlier procedure: # grobner_decide <<(a * x^2 + b * x + c = 0) /\ (a * y^2 + b * y + c = 0) /\ ~(x = y) ==> (a * x * y = c) /\ (a * (x + y) + b = 0)>>;; ... 21 basis elements and 190 pairs - : bool = true

There are numerous reﬁnements to the basic Gr¨ obner basis algorithm, which can be found in the standard texts listed near the end of this chapter. For example, the guaranteed termination of Buchberger’s algorithm means we don’t need to have the same kind of worries about fairness that beset

414

Decidable problems

us when we considered completion. Thus, one can employ heuristics for which S-polynomial to consider next, rather than just processing them in round-robin fashion, without aﬀecting incompleteness. There are also various criteria that justify ignoring many S-polynomials, e.g. Buchberger’s ﬁrst and second criteria (see Exercise 5.30 for the former) and methods of Faug`ere (2002).

5.12 Geometric theorem proving A seminal event in the development of modern mathematics was the introduction of coordinates into geometry, mainly by Fermat and Descartes (hence Cartesian coordinates). For each point p in the original assertion we consider its coordinates, two real numbers px and py (for two-dimensional geometry). Geometrical assertions about the points can then be translated into equations in the coordinates. For example, three points a, b and c are collinear (on some common line) iﬀ: (ax − bx )(by − cy ) = (ay − by )(bx − cx ), while a is the midpoint of the line joining b and c iﬀ: 2ax = bx + cx ∧ 2ay = by + cy . Here’s a list of correspondences between assertions about points (numbered 1, 2, . . . ) and the corresponding equations, which we will use to automate such translation. Note that we don’t deﬁne ‘length’ or ‘angle’, since the translations would involve square roots and arctangents. However, we do deﬁne equality of lengths as equality of their squares, and we could likewise express most relationships among angles algebraically via the addition formula for tangents (see Exercise 5.37). It has even been suggested (Wildberger 2005) that geometry should be phrased in terms of quadrance and spread instead of length and angle, precisely to stick with algebraic functions of the coordinates.† †

In terms of the more familiar concepts, quadrance is the square of distance and spread is the square of the sine of an angle.

5.12 Geometric theorem proving

415

let coordinations = ["collinear", (** Points 1, 2 and 3 lie on a common line **) <<(1_x - 2_x) * (2_y - 3_y) = (1_y - 2_y) * (2_x - 3_x)>>; "parallel", (** Lines (1,2) and (3,4) are parallel **) <<(1_x - 2_x) * (3_y - 4_y) = (1_y - 2_y) * (3_x - 4_x)>>; "perpendicular", (** Lines (1,2) and (3,4) are perpendicular **) <<(1_x - 2_x) * (3_x - 4_x) + (1_y - 2_y) * (3_y - 4_y) = 0>>; "lengths_eq", (** Lines (1,2) and (3,4) have the same length **) <<(1_x - 2_x)^2 + (1_y - 2_y)^2 = (3_x - 4_x)^2 + (3_y - 4_y)^2>>; "is_midpoint", (** Point 1 is the midpoint of line (2,3) **) <<2 * 1_x = 2_x + 3_x /\ 2 * 1_y = 2_y + 3_y>>; "is_intersection", (** Lines (2,3) and (4,5) meet at point 1 **) <<(1_x - 2_x) * (2_y - 3_y) = (1_y - 2_y) * (2_x - 3_x) /\ (1_x - 4_x) * (4_y - 5_y) = (1_y - 4_y) * (4_x - 5_x)>>; "=", (** Points 1 and 2 are the same **) <<(1_x = 2_x) /\ (1_y = 2_y)>>];;

To translate a quantiﬁer-free formula we just use these templates as a pattern to modify atomic formulas. (To be applicable to general ﬁrst-order formulas, we should also expand each quantiﬁer over points into two quantiﬁers over coordinates.) let coordinate fm = onatoms (fun (R(a,args)) -> let xtms,ytms = unzip (map (fun (Var v) -> Var(v^"_x"),Var(v^"_y")) args) in let xs = map (fun n -> string_of_int n^"_x") (1--length args) and ys = map (fun n -> string_of_int n^"_y") (1--length args) in subst (fpf (xs @ ys) (xtms @ ytms)) (assoc a coordinations));;

For example: # coordinate < collinear(b,a,c)>>;; - : fol formula = <<(a_x - b_x) * (b_y - c_y) = (a_y - b_y) * (b_x - c_x) ==> (b_x - a_x) * (a_y - c_y) = (b_y - a_y) * (a_x - c_x)>>

We can optimize the translation process somewhat by exploiting the invariance of geometric properties under certain kinds of spatial transformation. The following generates an assertion that one of our geometric properties is unchanged if we systematically map each x → x and y → y : let invariant (x’,y’) ((s:string),z) = let m n f = let x = string_of_int n^"_x" and y = string_of_int n^"_y" in let i = fpf ["x";"y"] [Var x;Var y] in (x |-> tsubst i x’) ((y |-> tsubst i y’) f) in Iff(z,subst(itlist m (1--5) undefined) z);;

416

Decidable problems

We will check the invariance of our properties under various transformations of this sort. (We check them over the complex numbers for eﬃciency; if a universal formula holds over C it also holds over R.) Under a spatial translation x → x + X, y → y + Y : let invariant_under_translation = invariant (<<|x + X|>>,<<|y + Y|>>);;

all geometric properties above are invariant, as one would expect from the intended geometric meaning: # forall (grobner_decide ** invariant_under_translation) coordinations;; ... - : bool = true

Thus we may without loss of generality assume that one of the points, say the ﬁrst in the free variable list of the initial formula, is (0, 0). Moreover, the geometric properties are also unchanged under rotation about the origin. We can describe this algebraically by a transformation x → cx − sy, y → sx + cy with s2 + c2 = 1. (Intuitively we think of s and c as the sine and cosine of the angle of rotation, but we treat it purely algebraically.) let invariant_under_rotation fm = Imp(<<s^2 + c^2 = 1>>, invariant (<<|c * x - s * y|>>,<<|s * x + c * y|>>) fm);;

and conﬁrm: # forall (grobner_decide ** invariant_under_rotation) coordinations;; ... - : bool = true

Given any point (x, y), we can choose s and c subject to s2 + c2 = 1 to make sx + cy = 0. (The application of our real quantiﬁer elimination algorithm shown here works, but takes a little time.) # real_qelim <>;; - : fol formula = true

Thus, given two points A and B in the original problem, we may take them to be (0, 0) and (x, 0) respectively: let originate fm = let a::b::ovs = fv fm in subst (fpf [a^"_x"; a^"_y"; b^"_y"] [zero; zero; zero]) (coordinate fm);;

5.12 Geometric theorem proving

417

Two other important transformations are scaling and shearing. Any combination of translation, rotation, scaling and shearing is called an aﬃne transformation. let invariant_under_scaling fm = Imp(<<~(A = 0)>>,invariant(<<|A * x|>>,<<|A * y|>>) fm);; let invariant_under_shearing = invariant(<<|x + B * y|>>,<<|y|>>);;

Because all our geometric properties are invariant under scaling: # forall (grobner_decide ** invariant_under_scaling) coordinations;; - : bool = true

we might be tempted to go further and use (1, 0) for the point B, but we can only do this if we are happy to rule out the possibility that A = B. Similarly, we might want to use shearing invariance to justify taking three of the points as (0, 0), (x, 0) and (0, y), but this is problematic if the three points may be collinear. In any case, while some properties are invariant under shearing, perpendicularity and equality of lengths are not, as the reader can conﬁrm thus: # partition (grobner_decide ** invariant_under_shearing) coordinations;;

Thus, the special choice of coordinates based on invariance under scaling and shearing seems best left to the user setting up the problem.

Complex coordinates Once we’ve translated the assertion into its algebraic form, we just need to decide whether that statement is true for all real numbers. In principle, as Tarski (1951) already noted, we could use a quantiﬁer elimination procedure for the reals. In practice it’s hard to prove nontrivial geometric properties in this fashion, because even sophisticated algorithms for real quantiﬁer elimination, let alone the simple one from Section 5.9, are relatively ineﬃcient. Indeed, the best-known early work on automated theorem proving in geometry (Gelerntner 1959) wasn’t based on algebraic reduction, but attempted to mimic traditional Euclidean proofs. For some time after this, the subject of automated geometry theorem proving received little attention. Then Wu Wen-ts¨ un (1978) demonstrated an algebraic method capable of proving automatically a wide class of geometrical theorems, as its implementation by Chou (1988) convincingly demonstrated. Wu’s ﬁrst basic insight was simply this.

418

Decidable problems

Remarkably many geometrical theorems, when formulated as universal algebraic statements in terms of coordinates, are also true for all complex values of the ‘coordinates’.

This means that instead of using the highly ineﬃcient methods for deciding real algebra, we can try the much more practical methods for the complex numbers. Provided the statement is universal, we can use Gr¨ obner bases, knowing that validity over C implies validity over R. The converse is false (consider ∀x. x2 + 1 = 0), so even if a statement is false in C it might still be true in the intended domain. Nevertheless, it turns out in practice that most geometrical statements remain valid in the extended interpretation; see Exercise 5.38 for some rare exceptions. Another drawback is that we cannot express ordering of points using the complex numbers, which places some restrictions on the geometric problems we can formulate. Even so, with a few tricks in formulation, the approach using complex numbers is remarkably ﬂexible. Degenerate cases We can successfully prove a few simple geometry theorems based on this idea. For example, if the line joining the midpoint of a side of a triangle to the opposite vertex is actually perpendicular to the line, the triangle must be isosceles: # (grobner_decide ** originate) < lengths_eq(a,b,b,c)>>;; ... - : bool = true

However, we can immediately see some diﬃculties with this approach if we try to prove the parallelogram theorem, which asserts that the diagonals of an arbitrary parallelogram intersect at their midpoints: # (grobner_decide ** originate) <<parallel(a,b,d,c) /\ parallel(a,d,b,c) /\ is_intersection(e,a,c,b,d) ==> lengths_eq(a,e,e,c)>>;; ... - : bool = false

One might guess that this failure results from the use of complex coordinates. However, this is not the case; rather the failure results from neglecting the possibility that what we have called a ‘parallelogram’ might be trivial, for example all the points a, b, c and d being collinear:

5.12 Geometric theorem proving

419

# (grobner_decide ** originate) <<parallel(a,b,d,c) /\ parallel(a,d,b,c) /\ is_intersection(e,a,c,b,d) /\ ~collinear(a,b,c) ==> lengths_eq(a,e,e,c)>>;; ... - : bool = true

This hints at a general problem: the formulation of geometric theorems is usually based on some unstated assumptions about non-degeneracy that may be vital to their truth. Sometimes this doesn’t matter – the isosceles triangle theorem above remains true if the ‘triangle’ is is ﬂat or even a single point. However, in general some non-degeneracy conditions are necessary, and they may be diﬃcult to anticipate when looking at the ‘naive’ form of a complicated theorem. Wu’s second major achievement was to realize that these non-degenerate conditions are usually necessary, and to develop a way of producing them automatically as part of the proof of a theorem. Wu’s method Many geometry theorems are of the ‘constructive type’: one starts with an initial set of arbitrary points P1 , . . . , Pk and successively ‘constructs’ new points Pk+1 , . . . , Pn based on geometric constraints involving previously deﬁned points (including initial points). The conclusion of the theorem is then some assertion about this conﬁguration of points. The crucial point is the presence of a particular order of construction, with each point Pi satisfying constraints involving only the set of points {Pj | j < i}. Exploiting this ‘natural’ ordering of points appropriately – for example when choosing the variable ordering for Gr¨ obner bases – can make the theorem-proving process much more eﬃcient. Instead of pursing this, we will explain a somewhat diﬀerent approach developed by Wu, which exploits the initial constructive order and sharpens it to put the set of equations in triangular form, i.e. pm (x1 , . . . , xk , xk+1 , xk+2 , . . . , xk+m ) = 0, ··· p2 (x1 , . . . , xk , xk+1 , xk+2 ) = 0, p1 (x1 , . . . , xk , xk+1 ) = 0, p0 (x1 , . . . , xk ) = 0. where the polynomial pm involves a variable xk+m that does not appear in any of the successive polynomials, and then if we exclude that one, the next polynomial in sequence contains a variable that does not appear in the rest,

420

Decidable problems

and so on. The appeal of a triangular set is that it can be used to successively ‘eliminate’ variables in another polynomial, though not in such a simple way as with simultaneous linear equations. Suppose we assume the equations in such a triangular set as hypotheses. Given another polynomial p(x1 , . . . , xk+m ), we will use the triangular set to obtain a conjunction of conditions that are a suﬃcient (though not in general necessary) condition for p(x1 , . . . , xk+m ) = 0 to follow from the equations in the triangular set. First we pseudo-divide p(x1 , . . . , xk+m ) by pm (x1 , . . . , xk+m ), considering both as polynomials in xk+m with the other variables as parameters:

am (x1 , . . . , xk+m−1 )k p(x1 , . . . , xk+m ) = pm (x1 , . . . , xk+m )sm (x1 , . . . , xk+m ) + p (x1 , . . . , xk+m ).

Given pm (x1 , . . . , xk+m ) = 0, a suﬃcient condition for p(x1 , . . . , xk+m ) = 0 is am (x1 , . . . , xk+m−1 ) = 0 ∧ p (x1 , . . . , xk+m ) = 0. (If k = 0 we can omit the ﬁrst conjunct.) Writing p (x1 , . . . , xk+m ) in terms of powers of xk+m with ‘coeﬃcients’ in other variables:

c0 (x1 , . . . , xk+m−1 )+c1 (x1 , . . . , xk+m−1 )xk+m +· · ·+cr (x1 , . . . , xk+m−1 )xrk+m

we get a further suﬃcient condition that does not involve xk+m : am (x1 , . . . , xk+m−1 ) = 0 ∧ c0 (x1 , . . . , xk+m−1 ) = 0 ∧ · · · ∧ cr (x1 , . . . , xk+m−1 ) = 0.

We can then proceed to replace each ci (x1 , . . . , xk+m−1 ) = 0 in turn by its suﬃcient conditions using pm−1 (x1 , . . . , xk+m−1 ) = 0, and so on. The following function implements this idea: it takes a triangular set triang and a starting polynomial p, augmenting an initial set of conditions degens with a new set that together are suﬃcient for p to be zero whenever all the triang are. We assume that the list of variables vars deﬁnes the order of elimination, and the polynomials in triang are arranged in the appropriate order.

5.12 Geometric theorem proving

421

let rec pprove vars triang p degens = if p = zero then degens else match triang with [] -> (mk_eq p zero)::degens | (Fn("+",[c;Fn("*",[Var x;_])]) as q)::qs -> if x <> hd vars then if mem (hd vars) (fvt p) then itlist (pprove vars triang) (coefficients vars p) degens else pprove (tl vars) triang p degens else let k,p’ = pdivide vars p q in if k = 0 then pprove vars qs p’ degens else let degens’ = Not(mk_eq (head vars q) zero)::degens in itlist (pprove vars qs) (coefficients vars p’) degens’;;

Any set of polynomials can be transformed into a triangular set of polynomials that are all zero whenever all the initial polynomials are. If the desired ‘top’ variable xk+m occurs in at most one polynomial, we set that one aside and triangulate the rest with respect to the remaining variables. Otherwise, we can pick the polynomial p with the lowest degree in xk+m and pseudodivide all the other polynomials by p, then repeat. We must reach a stage where xk+m is conﬁned to one polynomial, since each time we run pseudodivision we reduce the aggregate degree of xk+m . This is implemented in the following function, where we assume that polynomials in the list consts do not involve the head variable in vars, but those in pols may do: let rec triangulate vars consts pols = if vars = [] then pols else let cns,tpols = partition (is_constant vars) pols in if cns <> [] then triangulate vars (cns @ consts) tpols else if length pols <= 1 then pols @ triangulate (tl vars) [] consts else let n = end_itlist min (map (degree vars) pols) in let p = find (fun p -> degree vars p = n) pols in let ps = subtract pols [p] in triangulate vars consts (p::map (fun q -> snd(pdivide vars q p)) ps);;

Because geometry statements tend to be of the constructive type, they are already in ‘almost triangular’ form and the triangulation tends to be quick and eﬃcient. Constructions like ‘M is the midpoint of the line AB’ or ‘P is the intersection of lines AB and CD’ deﬁne points by one or two constraints on their coordinates. Assuming all coordinates introduced later have been triangulated, we now only need to triangulate the two equations deﬁning these constraints by pseudo-division within this pair, and need not modify other equations. Thus, forming a triangular set tends to be much more eﬃcient than forming a Gr¨ obner basis. However, when it comes to actually reducing with the set, a Gr¨ obner basis is often much more eﬃcient.

422

Decidable problems

Now we will implement the overall procedure that returns a set of suﬃcient conditions for one conjunction of polynomial equations to imply another. The user is expected to list the variables in elimination order in vars, and specify which coordinates are to be set to zero in zeros. We could attempt to infer an order automatically, and rely on originate for the choice of zeros, but since both these parameters can aﬀect eﬃciency dramatically, a ﬁner degree of control is useful. let wu fm vars zeros = let gfm0 = coordinate fm in let gfm = subst(itlist (fun v -> v |-> zero) zeros undefined) gfm0 in if not (set_eq vars (fv gfm)) then failwith "wu: bad parameters" else let ant,con = dest_imp gfm in let pols = map (lhs ** polyatom vars) (conjuncts ant) and ps = map (lhs ** polyatom vars) (conjuncts con) in let tri = triangulate vars [] pols in itlist (fun p -> union(pprove vars tri p [])) ps [];;

Examples Let us try the procedure out on Simson’s theorem, which asserts that given four points A, B, C and D on a circle with centre O, the points where the perpendiculars from D meet the (possibly produced) sides of the triangle ABC are all collinear.

E D

C

F

A G

B

We can express this as follows: let simson = < collinear(e,f,g)>>;;

5.12 Geometric theorem proving

423

We choose a coordinate system with A as the origin and O on the xaxis, ordering the remaining variables according to one possible construction sequence: let vars = ["g_y"; "g_x"; "f_y"; "f_x"; "e_y"; "e_x"; "d_y"; "d_x"; "c_y"; "c_x"; "b_y"; "b_x"; "o_x"] and zeros = ["a_x"; "a_y"; "o_y"];;

Wu’s algorithm produces a result quite rapidly: # wu simson vars zeros;; - : fol formula list = [<<~(((0 + b_x * (0 + b_x * 1)) + b_y * (0 + b_y * 1)) + c_x * ((0 + b_x * -2) + c_x * 1)) + c_y * ((0 + b_y * -2) + c_y * 1) = 0>>; <<~(0 + b_x * (0 + b_x * 1)) + b_y * (0 + b_y * 1) = 0>>; <<~(0 + b_x * -1) + c_x * 1 = 0>>; <<~(0 + c_x * (0 + c_x * 1)) + c_y * (0 + c_y * 1) = 0>>; <<~0 + b_x * 1 = 0>>; <<~0 + c_x * 1 = 0>>; <<~-1 = 0>>]

Our expectation is that these correspond to non-degeneracy conditions. We can rewrite them more tidily as: (bx − cx )2 + (by − cy )2 = 0, b2x + c2x = 0, bx − cx = 0, c2x + c2y = 0, bx = 0, cx = 0, −1 = 0. The last is trivially true. The others do indeed express various nondegeneracy conditions: the points B and C are distinct, the points B and A are distinct, and the points C and A are distinct. (Remember that A is the origin in this coordinate system.) In the intended interpretation as real numbers, there is some redundancy, since bx −cx = 0 implies (bx −cx )2 +(by − cy )2 = 0. However, this is not in general the case over the complex numbers, and indeed there are non-Euclidean geometries (e.g. Minkowski geometry) in which non-trivial isotropic lines (lines perpendicular to themselves) may exist. To see how signiﬁcant the choice of coordinates can be for the eﬃciency of the method, it’s worth trying the same example without the special choice

424

Decidable problems

of coordinates. It takes much longer, though the output is the same, after allowing for the diﬀerent coordinate systems: # wu simson (vars @ zeros) [];;

An even trickier choice of coordinate system can be used for Pappus’s theorem, which asserts that given three collinear points A1 , A2 and A3 and three other collinear points B1 , B2 and B3 , the points of intersection of the pairs of lines joining the Ai and Bj are collinear. Exploiting the invariance of incidence properties under arbitrary aﬃne transformations, we can choose the two lines to be the axes, and hence set the x-coordinates of all the Bi and the y-coordinates of all the Ai to zero:

B3

B2 E B1

F D

A1

A2

A3

let pappus = < collinear(d,e,f)>>;; let vars = ["f_y"; "f_x"; "e_y"; "e_x"; "d_y"; "d_x"; "b3_y"; "b2_y"; "b1_y"; "a3_x"; "a2_x"; "a1_x"] and zeros = ["a1_y"; "a2_y"; "a3_y"; "b1_x"; "b2_x"; "b3_x"];;

We get a quick solution: # wu pappus vars zeros;; - : fol formula list = [<<~(0 + b1_y * (0 + a1_x * 1)) <<~(0 + b1_y * (0 + a1_x * 1)) <<~(0 + b2_y * (0 + a2_x * 1)) <<~0 + a1_x * -1 = 0>>; <<~0 +

+ b2_y + b3_y + b3_y a2_x *

* (0 * (0 * (0 -1 =

+ a2_x * -1) = 0>>; + a3_x * -1) = 0>>; + a3_x * -1) = 0>>; 0>>]

5.13 Combining decision procedures

425

The ﬁrst three degenerate conditions express precisely the conditions that the pairs of lines whose intersections we are considering are not in fact parallel. The others assert that the points A1 and A2 are not in fact the origin of the clever coordinate system we chose, i.e. the intersection of the two lines considered. Our examples above closely follow Chou (1984), and numerous other examples can be found in Chou (1988). Theoretically, Wu’s method is related to the characteristic set method (Ritt 1938) in the ﬁeld of diﬀerential algebra (Ritt 1950). For comparative surveys of various approaches to geometric theorem proving, including Wu’s method, Gr¨ obner bases and Dixon resultants, see Kapur (1998) and Robu (2002).

5.13 Combining decision procedures In many applications, such as program veriﬁcation, we want decision procedures that work even in the presence of ‘alien’ terms. For example, instead of proving over N that n < 1 ⇒ n = 0, one might want to prove el(a, i) < 1 ⇒ el(a, i) = 0, where el(a, i) denotes a[i], the ith element of some array a. This problem involves a function symbol el that is not part of the language of Presburger arithmetic. In this case, the solution is straightforward. Since ∀n ∈ N. n < 1 ⇒ n = 0 holds, we can specialize n to any term whatsoever, including el(a, i), and so derive the desired theorem. Thus, when faced with a problem involving functions or predicates not considered by a given decision procedure, we can simply try to generalize the problem by replacing them with fresh variables, solve the generalized problem and specialize it again to obtain the desired result. However, sometimes this process of generalization leads from a valid initial claim to a false generalization, even if the additional symbols are completely uninterpreted (i.e. if we assume no axioms for them). For example, the validity of the following (interpreting the arithmetic symbols in the usual way) m ≤ n ∧ n ≤ m ⇒ f (m − n) = f (0) only depends on basic substitutivity properties of f that will be valid for any normal interpretation of f . Yet the naive generalization replacing instances of f (· · ·) by new variables, m ≤ n ∧ n ≤ m ⇒ x = y, is clearly not valid. Thus, there arises the problem of ﬁnding an eﬃcient complete generalization of decision procedures for such situations.

426

Decidable problems

Limitations Unfortunately, the freedom to generalize existing decision procedures by introducing new symbols is quite limited. For example, consider the theory of reals with addition and multiplication, which we know is decidable (Section 5.9). If we add just one new monadic predicate symbol P , we can consider the following hypothesis H: (∀n. P (n + 1) ⇔ P (n)) ∧ (∀n. 0 ≤ n ∧ n < 1 ⇒ (P (n) ⇔ n = 0)). Over R, this constrains P to deﬁne exactly the class of integers. Thus given any problem over the integers involving addition and multiplication, we can reduce it to an equivalent statement over R by adding the hypothesis H and systematically relativizing all quantiﬁers using P . As we will see in Section 7.2, the theory of integers with addition and multiplication is highly undecidable, and hence so is the theory of R with one additional monadic predicate symbol. In fact, the theory is even more spectacularly undecidable than this reasoning implies (see Exercise 5.40). Presburger (linear integer) arithmetic with one new monadic predicate symbol is also undecidable (Downey 1972), and so is Presburger arithmetic with one new unary function symbol f . For the latter, consider a hypothesis: (∀n. f (−n) = f (n)) ∧ (f (0) = 0) ∧ (∀n. 0 ≤ n ⇒ f (n + 1) = f (n) + n + n + 1). This constrains f to be the squaring function, so we can deﬁne multiplication as noted in Section 5.7: m = n · p ⇔ (n + p)2 = n2 + p2 + 2m and again get into the realm of the undecidable theory of integer addition and multiplication. Halpern (1991) gives a detailed analysis of just how extremely undecidable the various extensions of Presburger arithmetic with new symbols are. All this might suggest that the idea of extending decision procedures to accommodate new symbols is a hopeless cause. However, provided we stick to validity of quantiﬁer-free or explicitly universally quantiﬁed statements, several standard decision procedures can be extended to allow uninterpreted function and predicate symbols of arbitrary arities, and we can even combine multiple decision procedures for various sets of symbols. The limitation to universal formulas may seem a severe restriction, but it still covers a large proportion of the problems that arise in many applications. We will present a general method for combining decision procedures due to Nelson and Oppen (1979). It is applicable in most situations when we have separate decision procedures for (universal formulas in) several theories

5.13 Combining decision procedures

427

T1 , . . . , Tn whose axioms involve disjoint languages, i.e. such that no two distinct Ti and Tj have axioms involving the same function or predicate symbol, except for equality.

Craig’s interpolation theorem Underlying the completeness of the Nelson–Oppen combination method is a classic result in pure logic due to Craig (1957), known as Craig’s interpolation theorem. This holds for logic with equality and logic without equality, and we will prove both forms below. The traditional formulation is: If |= φ1 ⇒ φ2 then there is an ‘interpolant’ ψ, whose free variables and function and predicate symbols occur in both φ1 and φ2 , such that |= φ1 ⇒ ψ and |= ψ ⇒ φ2 .

We will ﬁnd it more convenient to prove the following equivalent, which treats the two starting formulas symmetrically and ﬁts more smoothly into our refutational approach.† If |= φ1 ∧ φ2 ⇒ ⊥ then there is an ‘interpolant’ ψ whose only variables and function and predicate symbols occur in both φ1 and φ2 , such that |= φ1 ⇒ ψ and |= φ2 ⇒ ¬ψ.

The starting-point is the analogous result for propositional formulas, which is relatively easy to prove. Theorem 5.40 If |= A∧B ⇒ ⊥, where A and B are propositional formulas, then there is an interpolant C with atoms(C) ⊆ atoms(A) ∩ atoms(B), such that |= A ⇒ C and |= B ⇒ ¬C. Proof By induction on the number of elements in atoms(A) − atoms(B). If this set is empty, we can just take the interpolant to be A; this satisﬁes the atom set requirement since |= A ⇒ A holds trivially, and since |= A∧B ⇒ ⊥ we have |= B ⇒ ¬A. Otherwise, consider any atom p in A but not B and let A = psubst (p |⇒ ⊥) A ∨ psubst (p |⇒ ) A. Since A has fewer atoms not in B than A does, the inductive hypothesis means that there is an interpolant C such that |= A ⇒ C and |= B ⇒ ¬C. But note that |= A ⇒ A and so |= A ⇒ C too. Moreover, since atoms(C) ⊆ atoms(A ) ∩ atoms(B) and atoms(A ) = atoms(A) − {p} ⊆ atoms(A), this has the atom inclusion property as required. †

This is often referred to as the Craig–Robinson theorem, since as well as Craig’s theorem it is equivalent to a result in pure logic known as Robinson’s consistency theorem (A. Robinson 1956).

428

Decidable problems

This proof can easily be converted into an algorithm; we add simpliﬁcation at the end, to get rid of the new ‘true’ and ‘false’ atoms: let pinterpolate p q = let orify a r = Or(psubst(a|=>False) r,psubst(a|=>True) r) in psimplify(itlist orify (subtract (atoms p) (atoms q)) p);;

We will proceed to full ﬁrst-order logic with equality in a number of steps of increasing generality. First: Lemma 5.41 Let ∀x1 . . . xn . P [x1 , . . . , xn ] and ∀y1 . . . ym . Q[y1 , . . . , ym ] be two closed universal formulas such that: |= (∀x1 · · · xn . P [x1 , . . . , xn ]) ∧ (∀y1 · · · ym . Q[y1 , . . . , ym ]) ⇒ ⊥. Then there is a quantiﬁer-free ground formula C such that: |= (∀x1 · · · xn . P [x1 , . . . , xn ]) ⇒ C and |= (∀y1 · · · ym . Q[x1 , . . . , xn ]) ⇒ ¬C such that the only predicate symbols appearing in C are those that appear in both the starting formulas. Proof By Herbrand’s theorem, there are sets of ground terms (possibly after adding a new nullary constant to the language if there are none already) such that: |= (P [t11 , . . . , t1n ]∧· · ·∧P [tk1 , . . . , tkn ])∧(Q[s11 , . . . , s1m ]∧· · ·∧Q[sk1 , . . . , skm ]) ⇒ ⊥. Consider now the propositional interpolant C, containing only atomic formulas that occur in both the original propositional expansions, and such that: |= P [t11 , . . . , t1n ] ∧ · · · ∧ P [tk1 , . . . , tkn ] ⇒ C and |= Q[s11 , . . . , s1m ] ∧ · · · ∧ Q[sk1 , . . . , skm ] ⇒ ¬C By straightforward ﬁrst-order logic, we therefore have: |= (∀x1 . . . xn . P [x1 , . . . , xn ]) ⇒ C and |= (∀y1 . . . ym . Q[y1 , . . . , ym ]) ⇒ ¬C.

5.13 Combining decision procedures

429

Moreover, if R(t1 , . . . , tl ) appears in C, this atom must appear in the propositional expansions of both starting formulas, and therefore R must appear in both starting formulas. Again we can express the proof as an algorithm, for simplicity using the Davis–Putnam procedure from Section 3.8 to ﬁnd the set of ground instances. (This will usually loop indeﬁnitely unless the user does indeed supply formulas p and q such that |= p ∧ q ⇒ ⊥.) let urinterpolate p q = let fm = specialize(prenex(And(p,q))) in let fvs = fv fm and consts,funcs = herbfuns fm in let cntms = map (fun (c,_) -> Fn(c,[])) consts in let tups0 = dp_loop (simpcnf fm) cntms funcs fvs 0 [] [] [] in let tups = dp_refine_loop (simpcnf fm) cntms funcs fvs 0 [] [] [] in let fmis = map (fun tup -> subst (fpf fvs tup) fm) tups in let ps,qs = unzip (map (fun (And(p,q)) -> p,q) fmis) in pinterpolate (list_conj(setify ps)) (list_conj(setify qs));;

For example: # let p = prenex <<(forall x. R(x,f(x))) /\ (forall x y. S(x,y) <=> R(x,y) \/ R(y,x))>> and q = prenex <<(forall x y z. S(x,y) /\ S(y,z) ==> T(x,z)) /\ ~T(0,0)>>;; ... # let c = urinterpolate p q;; ... val c : fol formula = <<S(0,f(0)) /\ S(f(0),0) \/ S(0,f(0)) /\ S(f(0),0)>>

Note that, as expected, c involves only the common predicate symbol S, not the unshared ones R and T , and we can conﬁrm by running, say, meson that |= p ⇒ c and |= q ⇒ ¬c. However, c contains the unshared function symbols 0 and f , and indeed combinations of the two, so is not yet a full interpolant. (We could also simplify it to just S(0, f (0)) ∧ S(f (0), 0), but we won’t worry about that.) To show how we can always eliminate unshared function symbols from our partial interpolants, we note a few lemmas. Lemma 5.42 Consider the formula ∀x1 · · · xn .C[x1 , . . . , xn , z] with free variable z. Suppose that t = h(t1 , . . . , tm ) is a ground term such that for all terms h(u1 , . . . , um ) in C[x1 , . . . , xn , z], the ui are ground (in other words, there are no terms built by h from formulas involving variables). Then if: |= (∀x1 · · · xn . C[x1 , . . . , xn , t]) ⇒ ⊥

430

Decidable problems

we also have: |= (∃z. ∀x1 · · · xn . C[x1 , . . . , xn , z]) ⇒ ⊥. Proof From the main hypothesis, Herbrand’s theorem asserts that there are substitution instances sji such that the following is a propositional tautology: |= C[s11 , . . . , s1n , t] ∧ · · · ∧ C[sk1 , . . . , skn , t] ⇒ ⊥. Since this is a propositional tautology, it remains so if we consistently replace t by a new variable z, a mapping of terms and formulas we schematically denote by s → s , to obtain: |= C[s11 , . . . , s1n , t] ∧ · · · ∧ C[sk1 , . . . , skn , t] ⇒ ⊥ for appropriately replaced instances. But note that since there are no terms in C[x1 , . . . , xn , z] with topmost function symbol h involving variables, replacement within the formula is equivalent to replacement of each substituting term, where of course t = z:

|= C[s11 , . . . , s1n , z] ∧ · · · ∧ C[sk1 , . . . , skn , z] ⇒ ⊥. By simple ﬁrst-order logic, therefore: |= (∀x1 · · · xn . C[x1 , . . . , xn , z]) ⇒ ⊥ and so: |= (∃z. ∀x1 · · · xn . C[x1 , . . . , xn , z]) ⇒ ⊥ as required. We lift this to general formulas using Skolemization. Lemma 5.43 Consider any formula P [z] with free variable z only. Suppose t = h(t1 , . . . , tm ) is a ground term such that for all terms h(u1 , . . . , um ) in P [z], the ui are ground. Then if |= P [t] ⇒ ⊥ we also have |= (∃z.P [z]) ⇒ ⊥. Proof We may suppose that P [z] is in prenex normal form, since the transformation to PNF does not aﬀect the function symbols or free variables. We will now prove the result by induction on the number of existential quantiﬁers in this formula. If there are none, then the result follows from the previous lemma. Otherwise, we can write: P [z] =def ∀x1 · · · xm . ∃y. Q[x1 , . . . , xm , y, z].

5.13 Combining decision procedures

431

Let us Skolemize this using a function symbol f that does not occur in P [z]: P ∗ [z] =def ∀x1 · · · xm . Q[x1 , . . . , xm , f (x1 , . . . , xm ), z]. Since by hypothesis |= P [t] ⇒ ⊥ we also have |= P ∗ [t] ⇒ ⊥. The inductive hypothesis now tells us that |= (∃z. P ∗ [z]) ⇒ ⊥, and so |= P ∗ [c] ⇒ ⊥, where c is a constant symbol not appearing in P ∗ [z]. But by the basic equisatisﬁability property of Skolemization, this means |= P [c] ⇒ ⊥, and so |= (∃z. P [z]) ⇒ ⊥. We can use this repeatedly to reﬁne a partial interpolant so that it contains only shared function symbols. Consider a partial interpolant C with: |= (∀x1 . . . xn . P [x1 , . . . , xn ]) ⇒ C and |= (∀y1 . . . ym . Q[y1 , . . . , ym ]) ⇒ ¬C. Suppose it is not yet an interpolant, i.e. it contains at least one term built from a function symbol h that occurs in only one of the starting formulas. In order to apply replacement repeatedly, we need to be careful over the order in which we eliminate terms. Let t = h(t1 , . . . , tm ) be a maximal term in C starting with an unshared function symbol h, i.e. one that does not appear as a proper subterm of any other such term in C. Let D[z] result from C by replacing all instances of t with some variable z not occurring in C, so C = D[t]. Now, since h is non-shared, there are two cases. If h occurs in P [x1 , . . . , xn ] but not Q[y1 , . . . , ym ], then since |= (∀y1 . . . ym . Q[y1 , . . . , ym ]) ⇒ ¬C we also have |= (∀y1 . . . ym . Q[y1 , . . . , ym ]) ∧ D[t] ⇒ ⊥, and so by the previous lemma |= (∃z. (∀y1 . . . ym . Q[y1 , . . . , ym ]) ∧ D[z]) ⇒ ⊥, i.e. |= (∀y1 . . . ym . Q[y1 , . . . , ym ]) ⇒ ¬∃z. D[z]. On the other hand, since |= (∀x1 . . . xn . P [x1 , . . . , xn ]) ⇒ D[t]

432

Decidable problems

we trivially have |= (∀x1 . . . xn . P [x1 , . . . , xn ]) ⇒ ∃z. D[z]. Thus, we have succeeded in eliminating one term involving an unshared function symbol by replacing it with an existentially quantiﬁed variable. Dually, if h occurs in Q[y1 , . . . , ym ] but not P [x1 , . . . , xn ], then we have |= (∀x1 . . . xn . P [x1 , . . . , xn ]) ∧ ¬D[t] ⇒ ⊥, and so by the lemma |= (∃z. (∀x1 . . . xn . P [x1 , . . . , xn ]) ∧ ¬D[z]) ⇒ ⊥, i.e. |= (∀x1 . . . xn . P [x1 , . . . , xn ]) ⇒ ∀z. D[z], while again the counterpart is straightforward: |= (∀y1 . . . ym . Q[y1 , . . . , ym ]) ⇒ ¬(∀z. D[z]). This time, we have eliminated one term involving an unshared function symbol by replacing it with a universally quantiﬁed variable. We can now iterate this step over all terms involving unshared function symbols, existentially or universally quantifying over the new variable depending on which of the starting terms the top function appears in. Eventually we will eliminate all such terms and arrive at an interpolant. To turn this into an algorithm we ﬁrst deﬁne a function to obtain all the topmost terms whose head function is in the list fns, ﬁrst for terms: let rec toptermt fns tm = match tm with Var x -> [] | Fn(f,args) -> if mem (f,length args) fns then [tm] else itlist (union ** toptermt fns) args [];;

and then for formulas: let topterms fns = atom_union (fun (R(p,args)) -> itlist (union ** toptermt fns) args []);;

For the main algorithm, we ﬁnd the pre-interpolant using urinterpolate, ﬁnd the top terms in it starting with non-shared function symbols, sort them in decreasing order of size (so no earlier one is a subterm of a later one), then iteratively replace them by quantiﬁed variables.

5.13 Combining decision procedures

433

let uinterpolate p q = let fp = functions p and fq = functions q in let rec simpinter tms n c = match tms with [] -> c | (Fn(f,args) as tm)::otms -> let v = "v_"^(string_of_int n) in let c’ = replace (tm |=> Var v) c in let c’’ = if mem (f,length args) fp then Exists(v,c’) else Forall(v,c’) in simpinter otms (n+1) c’’ in let c = urinterpolate p q in let tts = topterms (union (subtract fp fq) (subtract fq fp)) c in let tms = sort (decreasing termsize) tts in simpinter tms 1 c;;

Note that while an individual step of the generalization procedure is valid regardless of whether we choose a maximal subterm, we do need to observe the ordering restriction to allow repeated application, otherwise we might end up with a term involving an unshared function h where one of the subterms is non-ground, when the lemma is not applicable. If we try this on our current example, we now get a true interpolant as expected. It uses only the common language of p and q: # let c = uinterpolate p q;; ... val c : fol formula = <>

and has the logical properties: meson(Imp(p,c));; meson(Imp(q,Not c));;

Now we need to lift interpolation to arbitrary formulas. Once again we use Skolemization. Let us suppose ﬁrst that the two formulas p and q have no common free variables. Since |= p∧q ⇒ ⊥ we also have |= (∃u1 · · · un .p∧q) ⇒ ⊥ where the ui are the free variables. If we Skolemize ∃u1 · · · un . p ∧ q we get a closed universal formula of the form p∗ ∧ q ∗ , with |= p∗ ∧ q ∗ ⇒ ⊥. Thus we can apply uinterpolate to obtain an interpolant. Recall that diﬀerent Skolem functions are used for the diﬀerent existential quantiﬁers in p and q,† while there are no common free variables that would make any of the Skolem constants for the ui common. Thus, none of the newly introduced Skolem †

This is an instance where the logically sound optimization of using the same Skolem function for the same formula would spoil the implementation.

434

Decidable problems

functions are common to p∗ and q ∗ and will not appear in the interpolant c. And since |= p∗ ⇒ c and |= q ∗ ⇒ ¬c with c containing none of the Skolem functions, the basic conservativity result (Section 3.6) assures us that |= p ⇒ c and |= q ⇒ ¬c, and it is also an interpolant for the original formulas. This is realized in the following algorithm: let cinterpolate p q = let fm = nnf(And(p,q)) in let efm = itlist mk_exists (fv fm) fm and fns = map fst (functions fm) in let And(p’,q’),_ = skolem efm fns in uinterpolate p’ q’;;

To deal with shared variables we could introduce Skolem constants by existential quantiﬁcation before the core operation. The only diﬀerence is that we need to replace them by variables again in the ﬁnal result to respect the conditions for an interpolant. We elect to ‘manually’ replace the common variables by new constants c i and then restore them afterwards. let interpolate p q = let vs = map (fun v -> Var v) (intersect (fv p) (fv q)) and fns = functions (And(p,q)) in let n = itlist (max_varindex "c_" ** fst) fns (Int 0) +/ Int 1 in let cs = map (fun i -> Fn("c_"^(string_of_num i),[])) (n---(n+/Int(length vs-1))) in let fn_vc = fpf vs cs and fn_cv = fpf cs vs in let p’ = replace fn_vc p and q’ = replace fn_vc q in replace fn_cv (cinterpolate p’ q’);;

We can test this on a somewhat elaborated version of the same example using a common free variable and existential quantiﬁers. # let p = <<(forall (forall and q = <<(forall (exists

x. exists y. R(x,y)) /\ x y. S(v,x,y) <=> R(x,y) \/ R(y,x))>> x y z. S(v,x,y) /\ S(v,y,z) ==> T(x,z)) /\ u. ~T(u,u))>>;;

Indeed, the procedure works, and we leave it to the reader to conﬁrm that the result is indeed an interpolant: # let c = interpolate p q;; ... val c : fol formula = <>

5.13 Combining decision procedures

435

There are yet two further generalizations to be made. First, note that interpolation applies equally to logic with equality, where now the interpolant may contain the equality symbol (even if only one of the formulas p and q does). We simply note that |= p ∧ q ⇒ ⊥ in logic with equality iﬀ |= (p ∧ eqaxiom(p)) ∧ (q ∧ eqaxiom(q)) ⇒ ⊥ in standard ﬁrst-order logic. Since the augmentations a ∧ eqaxiom(a) have the same language as a plus equality, the interpolant will involve only shared symbols in the original formulas and possibly the equality sign. To implement this, we can extract the equality axioms from equalitize (which is designed for validity-proving and hence adjoins them as hypotheses): let einterpolate p q = let p’ = equalitize p and q’ = equalitize q in let p’’ = if p’ = p then p else And(fst(dest_imp p’),p) and q’’ = if q’ = q then q else And(fst(dest_imp q’),q) in interpolate p’’ q’’;;

By using compactness, we reach the most general form of the Craig– Robinson theorem for logic with equality, where it is generalized to inﬁnite sets of sentences. Theorem 5.44 If T1 ∪ T2 |= ⊥ for two sets of formulas T1 and T2 , there is a formula C in the common language plus the equality symbol, and with only free variables appearing in T1 ∩ T2 , such that T1 |= C and T2 |= ¬C. Proof If T1 ∪ T2 |= ⊥, then, by compactness, there are ﬁnite subsets T1 ⊆ T1 and T2 ⊆ T2 such that T1 ∪ T2 |= ⊥. Form the conjunctions of their universal closures p and q and apply the basic result for logic with equality.

The Nelson–Oppen method To combine decision procedures for theories T1 , . . . , Tn (with axiomatizations using pairwise disjoint sets of function and predicate symbols), the Nelson–Oppen method doesn’t need any special knowledge about the implementation of those procedures, but just the procedures themselves and some characterization of their languages. In order to permit languages with an inﬁnite signature (e.g. all numerals n), we will characterize the language by discriminator functions on functions and predicates, rather than lists of them. All the information is packaged up into a triple. For example, the

436

Decidable problems

following is the information needed by the Nelson–Oppen for the theory of reals with multiplication: let real_lang = let fn = ["-",1; "+",2; "-",2; "*",2; "^",2] and pr = ["<=",2; "<",2; ">=",2; ">",2] in (fun (s,n) -> n = 0 & is_numeral(Fn(s,[])) or mem (s,n) fn), (fun sn -> mem sn pr), (fun fm -> real_qelim(generalize fm) = True);;

Almost identical is the corresponding information for the linear theory of integers, decided by Cooper’s method. Note that we still include multiplication (though not exponentiation) in the language though its application is strictly limited; this can be considered just the acceptance of syntactic sugar rather than an expansion of the language. let int_lang = let fn = ["-",1; "+",2; "-",2; "*",2] and pr = ["<=",2; "<",2; ">=",2; ">",2] in (fun (s,n) -> n = 0 & is_numeral(Fn(s,[])) or mem (s,n) fn), (fun sn -> mem sn pr), (fun fm -> integer_qelim(generalize fm) = True);;

We might also want to use congruence closure or some other decision procedure for functions and predicates that are not interpreted by any of the speciﬁed theories. The following takes an explicit list of languages langs and adds on another one that treats all other functions as uninterpreted and handles equality as the only predicate using congruence closure. This could be extended to treat other predicates as uninterpreted, either by direct extension of congruence closure to the level of formulas or by using Exercise 4.3. let add_default langs = langs @ [(fun sn -> not (exists (fun (f,p,d) -> f sn) langs)), (fun sn -> sn = ("=",2)),ccvalid];;

A special procedure for universal Presburger arithmetic plus uninterpreted functions and predicates was once given by Shostak (1979), before his own work on general combination methods to be discussed later. We will use as a running example the following formula valid in this combined theory: u + 1 = v ∧ f (u) + 1 = u − 1 ∧ f (v − 1) − 1 = v + 1 ⇒ ⊥. Homogenization The Nelson–Oppen method starts by assuming the negation of the formula to be proved, reducing it to DNF, and attempting to refute each disjunct.

5.13 Combining decision procedures

437

We will simply retain the original free variables in the formula in the negated form, for convenience of implementation, but note that logically all the ‘variables’ below should be considered as Skolem constants. In the running example, we have just one disjunct that we need to refute: u + 1 = v ∧ f (u) + 1 = u − 1 ∧ f (v − 1) − 1 = v + 1. The next step is to introduce new variables for subformulas in such a way that we arrive at an equisatisﬁable conjunction of literals, each of which except for equality uses symbols from only a single theory, a procedure known as homogenization or puriﬁcation. For our example we might get: u+1 = v ∧v1 +1 = u−1∧v2 −1 = v +1∧v2 = f (v3 )∧v1 = f (u)∧v3 = v −1. This introduction of fresh ‘variables’ is satisﬁability-preserving, since they are really constants. To implement the transformation, we wish to choose given each atom a language for it based on a ‘topmost’ predicate or function symbol. Note that in the case of an equation there may be a choice of which topmost function symbol to choose, e.g. for f (x) = y + 1. Note also that in the case of an equation between variables we need a language including the equality symbol in our list (e.g. the one incorporated by add_default). let chooselang langs fm = match fm with Atom(R("=",[Fn(f,args);_])) | Atom(R("=",[_;Fn(f,args)])) -> find (fun (fn,pr,dp) -> fn(f,length args)) langs | Atom(R(p,args)) -> find (fun (fn,pr,dp) -> pr(p,length args)) langs;;

Once we have ﬁxed on a language for a literal, the topmost subterms not in that language are replaced by new variables, with their ‘deﬁnitions’ adjoined as new equations, which may themselves be homogenized later. To handle the recursion replacing non-homogeneous subterms, we use a continuationpassing style where the continuation handles the replacement within the current context and accumulates the new deﬁnitions. The following general function maps a continuation-based operator over a list, modifying the list elements successively: let rec listify f l cont = match l with [] -> cont [] | h::t -> f h (fun h’ -> listify f t (fun t’ -> cont(h’::t’)));;

The continuations take as arguments the new term, the current variable index and the list of new deﬁnitions. The following homogenizes a term,

438

Decidable problems

given a language with its function and predicate discriminators fn and pr. In the case of a variable, we apply the continuation to the current state. In the case of a function in the language, we keep it but recursively modify the arguments, while for a function not in the language, we replace it with a new variable vn , with n picked at the outset to avoid existing variables: let rec homot (fn,pr,dp) tm cont n defs = match tm with Var x -> cont tm n defs | Fn(f,args) -> if fn(f,length args) then listify (homot (fn,pr,dp)) args (fun a -> cont (Fn(f,a))) n defs else cont (Var("v_"^(string_of_num n))) (n +/ Int 1) (mk_eq (Var("v_"^(string_of_num n))) tm :: defs);;

Homogenizing a literal is similar, using homot to deal with the arguments of predicates. let rec homol langs fm cont n defs = match fm with Not(f) -> homol langs f (fun p -> cont(Not(p))) n defs | Atom(R(p,args)) -> let lang = chooselang langs fm in listify (homot lang) args (fun a -> cont (Atom(R(p,a)))) n defs | _ -> failwith "homol: not a literal";;

This only covers a single pass of homogenization, and the new deﬁnitional equations may also have non-homogeneous subterms on their right-hand sides, so we need to pass those along for another iteration as long as there are any pending deﬁnitions: let rec homo langs fms cont = listify (homol langs) fms (fun dun n defs -> if defs = [] then cont dun n defs else homo langs defs (fun res -> cont (dun@res)) n []);;

The overall procedure just picks the appropriate variable index to start with: let homogenize langs fms = let fvs = unions(map fv fms) in let n = Int 1 +/ itlist (max_varindex "v_") fvs (Int 0) in homo langs fms (fun res n defs -> res) n [];;

5.13 Combining decision procedures

439

Partitioning The next step is to partition the homogenized literals into those in the various languages. The following tells us whether a formula belongs to a given language, allowing equality in all languages: let belongs (fn,pr,dp) fm = forall fn (functions fm) & forall pr (subtract (predicates fm) ["=",2]);;

and using that, the following partitions up literals according to a list of languages: let rec langpartition langs fms = match langs with [] -> if fms = [] then [] else failwith "langpartition" | l::ls -> let fms1,fms2 = partition (belongs l) fms in fms1::langpartition ls fms2;;

In our example, we will separate the literals into two groups, which we can consider as a conjunction: (u + 1 = v ∧ v1 + 1 = u − 1 ∧ v2 − 1 = v + 1 ∧ v3 = v − 1) ∧ (v2 = f (v3 ) ∧ v1 = f (u)) Interpolants and stable inﬁniteness Once those preliminary steps are done with, we enter the interesting phase of the algorithm. In general, the problem is to decide whether a conjunction of literals, partitioned into groups φk of homogeneous literals in the language of Tk , is unsatisﬁable: T1 , . . . , Tn |= φ1 ∧ · · · ∧ φn ⇒ ⊥. It will in general not be the case that any individual Ti |= φi ⇒ ⊥, just as in the example at the beginning of this section where naive generalization failed. The key idea underlying the Nelson–Oppen method is to use the kinds of interpolants guaranteed by Craig’s theorem as the only means of communication between the various decision procedures. In our example, where we have two theories (Presburger arithmetic and uninterpreted functions), a suitable interpolant is u = v3 ∧ ¬(v1 = v2 ). Once we know that, we can just use the constituent decision procedures in their respective domains:

440

Decidable problems

# (integer_qelim ** generalize) <<(u + 1 = v /\ v_1 + 1 = u - 1 /\ v_2 - 1 = v + 1 /\ v_3 = v - 1) ==> u = v_3 /\ ~(v_1 = v_2)>>;; - : fol formula = <<true>> # ccvalid <<(v_2 = f(v_3) /\ v_1 = f(u)) ==> ~(u = v_3 /\ ~(v_1 = v_2))>>;; - : bool = true

and conclude that the original conjunction is unsatisﬁable. (If we have more than two theories, we need an iterated version of the same procedure.) However, there remains the problem of ﬁnding an interpolant. The interpolation theorem assures us that an interpolant exists, and that it is built from variables using the equality relation. However, it may in general contain quantiﬁers, and this presents two problems: there are inﬁnitely many logically inequivalent possibilities, and we may not even be able to test prospective interpolants for suitability. (We would prefer to assume only component decision procedures for universal formulas, and indeed this is all we have for the theory of uninterpreted functions and equality.) Things would be much better if we could guarantee the existence of quantiﬁer-free interpolants involving just variables and equality. And indeed we almost have quantiﬁer elimination for the theory of equality, using a variant of the DLO decision procedure of Section 5.6. As usual we only need to eliminate one existential quantiﬁer from a conjunction of literals involving it. If there is any positive equation then we have (∃x. x = y ∧ P [x]) ⇔ P [y], so the only diﬃculty is a formula of the form ∃x. x = y1 ∧ · · · ∧ x = yk . In an interpretation with an inﬁnite domain (or one with more than k elements), this is trivially equivalent to , but unfortunately it has no quantiﬁer-free equivalent in general. If we assume that all models of the component theories are inﬁnite, we will have no problems. But while this is certainly valid for arithmetic theories, it isn’t for some others, such as the theory of uninterpreted functions. Instead, a weaker condition suﬃces.† Deﬁnition 5.45 A theory T is said to be stably inﬁnite iﬀ any quantiﬁerfree formula holds in all models of T iﬀ it holds in all inﬁnite models of T. †

Stable inﬁniteness is often deﬁned in the dual satisﬁability form. However, one needs to interpret satisﬁability with an implicit existential quantiﬁcation over valuations, the opposite of the convention we have chosen.

5.13 Combining decision procedures

441

Let us write Γ |=∞ φ to mean that φ holds in all models of Γ with an inﬁnite domain. Stable-inﬁniteness of a theory T is therefore assertion that T |=∞ φ iﬀ T |= φ whenever φ is quantiﬁer-free. Let C be any equality formula and C be the quantiﬁer-free form resulting from applying the quantiﬁer elimination procedure sketched above. This is equivalent in all inﬁnite models, i.e. |=∞ C ⇔ C . Therefore, if we can deduce T |= φ[C1 , . . . , Cn ], where φ is quantiﬁer-free except for the equality formulas C1 , . . . ,Cn , then a fortiori T |=∞ φ[C1 , . . . , Cn ], and so T |=∞ φ[C1 , . . . , Cn ], Therefore, by stable inﬁniteness of T , T |= φ[C1 , . . . , Cn ]. Consequently, when dealing with validity in a stably inﬁnite theory, we can replace equality formulas in an otherwise propositional formula with quantiﬁer-free forms. We will use this below. Our arithmetic theories, for example, are trivially stably inﬁnite, since they have only inﬁnite models. The theory of uninterpreted functions is also stably inﬁnite. For if a formula p fails to hold in some ﬁnite model, there is a ﬁnite model of its Skolemized negation. Since this is a ground formula, we can extend the domain of the model arbitrarily without aﬀecting its validity, since it is ground and therefore that validity does not involve any quantiﬁcation over the domain. Naive combination algorithm We’ll follow Oppen (1980a) in ﬁrst considering a naive way in which we could decide combinations of stably inﬁnite theories, and only then consider more eﬃcient implementations along the lines originally suggested by Nelson and Oppen. Recall that our general problem is to decide whether T1 , . . . , Tn |= φ1 ∧ · · · ∧ φn ⇒ ⊥. Suppose that the formulas φ1 , . . . , φn involve k variables (properly Skolem constants) x1 , . . . , xk . Let us consider all possible ways in which an interpretation can set them equal or unequal to each other, i.e. can partition the interpretations into equivalence classes. For each partitioning P of the x1 , . . . , xk , we deﬁne the arrangement ar(P ) to be the conjunction of (i) all

442

Decidable problems

equations xi = xj such that xi and xj are in the same class, and (ii) all negated equations ¬(xi = xj ) such that xi and xj are not in the same class. For example, if the partition P identiﬁes x1 , x2 and x3 but x4 is diﬀerent: ar(P ) = x1 = x2 ∧ x2 = x1 ∧ x1 = x3 ∧ x3 = x1 ∧ x2 = x3 ∧ x3 = x2 ∧ ¬(x1 = x4 ) ∧ ¬(x4 = x1 ) ∧ ¬(x2 = x4 ) ∧ ¬(x4 = x2 ) ∧ ¬(x3 = x4 ) ∧ ¬(x4 = x3 ). Although this is our abstract characterization of ar(P ), for the actual implementation we can be a bit more economical, provided the formula we produce is equivalent in ﬁrst-order logic with equality. For every equivalence class {x1 , . . . , xk } within a partition we include x1 = x2 ∧ x2 = x3 ∧ · · · ∧ xk−1 = xk , which is done by the following code: let rec arreq l = match l with v1::v2::rest -> mk_eq (Var v1) (Var v2) :: (arreq (v2::rest)) | _ -> [];;

and then for each pair of equivalence class representatives (chosen as the head of the list) xi and xj , we include ¬(xi = xj ) in one direction: let arrangement part = itlist (union ** arreq) part (map (fun (v,w) -> Not(mk_eq (Var v) (Var w))) (distinctpairs (map hd part)));;

Note that any ar(P ) implies either the truth or falsity of any equation between the k variables. And since the disjunction of all the possible arrangements is valid in ﬁrst-order logic with equality, the original assertion is equivalent to the validity, for all the possible partitions P , of T1 , . . . , Tn |= φ1 ∧ · · · ∧ φn ∧ ar(P ) ⇒ ⊥. Now, we claim that if the above holds, then subject to stable inﬁniteness, we actually have Ti |= φi ∧ ar(P ) ⇒ ⊥ for some 1 ≤ i ≤ n. This gives us, in principle, a decision method. Set up all the possible ar(P ) and for each one try to ﬁnd an i so Ti |= φi ∧ ar(P ) ⇒ ⊥, using the various component decision procedures. Now let us justify the claim.

5.13 Combining decision procedures

443

Since T1 and T2 ∪ · · · ∪ Tn have no symbols in common, the Craig Interpolation Theorem 5.44 implies the existence of an interpolant C, which we can assume thanks to stable inﬁniteness to be a quantiﬁer-free Boolean combination of equations, such that T1 |= φ1 ∧ ar(P ) ⇒ C, T2 , . . . , Tn |= φ2 ∧ · · · ∧ φn ∧ ar(P ) ⇒ ¬C. Since ar(P ) includes all equations either positively or negatively, either |= ar(P ) ⇒ ¬C or |= ar(P ) ⇒ C. In the former case, we actually have T1 |= φ1 ∧ ar(P ) ⇒ ⊥ as required. Otherwise we have T2 , . . . , Tn |= φ2 ∧ · · · ∧ φn ∧ ar(P ) ⇒ ⊥ and by using the same argument repeatedly, we see that eventually we do indeed reach a stage where some Ti |= φi ∧ ar(P ) ⇒ ⊥, so validity can be decided by one of the component decision procedures. It’s not hard to implement this, but one initial optimization seems worthwhile. Most of our component decision procedures are notably poor at dealing with equations x = t, but the Nelson–Oppen procedure naturally generates many such equations, both by the initial homogenization process and the positive equations generated by the arrangements. It’s useful to provide a wrapper that repeatedly uses such equations (with x ∈ FVT(t) of course) to eliminate the variable by substituting it into the other equations.† let dest_def fm = match fm with Atom(R("=",[Var x;t])) when not(mem x (fvt t)) -> x,t | Atom(R("=",[t; Var x])) when not(mem x (fvt t)) -> x,t | _ -> failwith "dest_def";; let rec redeqs eqs = try let eq = find (can dest_def) eqs in let x,t = dest_def eq in redeqs (map (subst (x |=> t)) (subtract eqs [eq])) with Failure _ -> eqs;;

Now, we start with a procedure that, given a set of theory triples and list of assumptions fms0, checks if they are consistent with a new set of assumptions fms: let trydps ldseps fms = exists (fun ((_,_,dp),fms0) -> dp(Not(list_conj(redeqs(fms0 @ fms))))) ldseps;; †

Another way of avoiding the set of equations arising from homogenization is not to actually perform homogenization, but regard alien subterms as variables only implicitly (Barrett 2002).

444

Decidable problems

The following auxiliary function generates all partitions of a set of objects: let allpartitions = let allinsertions x l acc = itlist (fun p acc -> ((x::p)::(subtract l [p])) :: acc) l (([x]::l)::acc) in fun l -> itlist (fun h y -> itlist (allinsertions h) y []) l [[]];;

Now we can decide whether every arrangement leads to inconsistency within at least one component theory: let nelop_refute vars ldseps = forall (trydps ldseps ** arrangement) (allpartitions vars);;

The overall procedure for one branch of the DNF merely involves homogenization followed by separation and this process of refutation. Note that since the arrangements only need to be able to decide the nominal interpolants considered above, we may restrict ourselves to considering variables that appear in at least two of the homogenized conjuncts (Tinelli and Harandi 1996). let nelop1 langs fms0 = let fms = homogenize langs fms0 in let seps = langpartition langs fms in let fvlist = map (unions ** map fv) seps in let vars = filter (fun x -> length (filter (mem x) fvlist) >= 2) (unions fvlist) in nelop_refute vars (zip langs seps);;

The obvious refutation wrapper turns it into a general validity procedure: let nelop langs fm = forall (nelop1 langs) (simpdnf(simplify(Not fm)));;

Indeed, our running example works: # nelop (add_default [int_lang]) < false>>;; - : bool = true

However, for larger examples, enumerating all arrangements can be slow. The number of ways B(k) of partitioning k objects into equivalence classes is known as the Bell number (Bell 1934), and it grows exponentially with k: # let bell n = length(allpartitions (1--n)) in map bell (1--10);; - : int list = [1; 2; 5; 15; 52; 203; 877; 4140; 21147; 115975]

5.13 Combining decision procedures

445

The Nelson–Oppen procedure The original Nelson–Oppen method is a reformulation of the above procedure that can be much more eﬃcient. After homogenization, we repeatedly try the following. • Try to deduce Ti |= φi ⇒ ⊥ in one of the component theories. If this succeeds, the formula is unsatisﬁable. • Otherwise, try to deduce a new disjunction of equations between variables in one of the component theories, i.e. Ti |= φi ⇒ x1 = y1 ∨ · · · ∨ xn = yn where none of the equations xj = yj already occurs in φi . • If no such disjunction is deducible, conclude that the original formula is satisﬁable. Otherwise, for each 1 ≤ j ≤ n, case-split over the disjuncts, adding xj = yj to every φi and repeating. Since there are only ﬁnitely many disjunctions of equations, this process must eventually terminate, since we cannot perform the ﬁnal case-split and augmentation indeﬁnitely. We can justify concluding satisﬁability in much the same way as before. If we reach a stage where no further disjunctions of equations are deducible, then we must retain consistency by adding xj = yj for every pair of variables not already assumed equal in the φi . But now, as with the arrangements in the previous algorithm, we have assumptions that decide all quantiﬁer-free equality formulas, so by the same argument, the original formula must be satisﬁable. To generate the disjunctions, we could simply enumerate all subsets of the set of equations. But in case this set is infeasibly large, we use a more reﬁned approach. We start with a function to consider subsets of l of size m and return the result of applying p to the ﬁrst one possible: let rec findasubset p m l = if m = 0 then p [] else match l with [] -> failwith "findasubset" | h::t -> try findasubset (fun s -> p(h::s)) (m - 1) t with Failure _ -> findasubset p m t;;

We can then use this to return the ﬁrst subset, enumerated in order of size, on which a predicate p holds: let findsubset p l = tryfind (fun n -> findasubset (fun x -> if p x then x else failwith "") n l) (0--length l);;

446

Decidable problems

Now the overall Nelson–Oppen refutation procedure uses the method of deduction and case-splits spelled out above. Because subsets are enumerated in order of size, and include the empty subset, we check satisﬁability within each existing theory ﬁrst without any separate code. let rec nelop_refute eqs ldseps = try let dj = findsubset (trydps ldseps ** map negate) eqs in forall (fun eq -> nelop_refute (subtract eqs [eq]) (map (fun (dps,es) -> (dps,eq::es)) ldseps)) dj with Failure _ -> false;;

Now nelop1 is very similar to the version before, except that it ﬁrst constructs the set of equations to pass to nelop_refute: let nelop1 langs fms0 = let fms = homogenize langs fms0 in let seps = langpartition langs fms in let fvlist = map (unions ** map fv) seps in let vars = filter (fun x -> length (filter (mem x) fvlist) >= 2) (unions fvlist) in let eqs = map (fun (a,b) -> mk_eq (Var a) (Var b)) (distinctpairs vars) in nelop_refute eqs (zip langs seps);;

and nelop is deﬁned in exactly the same way. We ﬁnd this is much faster on many examples than the naive procedure, e.g. # nelop (add_default [int_lang]) <= x + z /\ z >= 0 ==> f(f(x) - f(y)) = f(z)>>;; - : bool = true # nelop (add_default [int_lang]) <<x = y /\ y >= z /\ z >= x ==> f(z) = f(x)>>;; - : bool = true # nelop (add_default [int_lang]) < a + b <= 1 \/ b + f(b) <= 1 \/ f(f(b)) <= f(a)>>;; - : bool = true

Convexity It’s not immediately clear that the Nelson–Oppen method is faster in general than the straightforward case split over all variable arrangements. However, if we trace through the previous examples, we ﬁnd that in fact we never performed a non-trivial case-split, but actually deduced an equation (a disjunction of size 1) at each stage. Thus, it’s not so surprising that the procedure worked relatively quickly. This wasn’t just a lucky ﬂuke. One can prove that in certain situations no case-splits are ever needed.

5.13 Combining decision procedures

447

A theory T is said to be convex if whenever T |= L1 ∧ · · · ∧ Ln ⇒ A1 ∨ · · · ∨ Am for literals Li and atomic formulas Ai , then there is a particular k with 1 ≤ k ≤ m such that T |= L1 ∧ · · · ∧ Ln ⇒ Ak . We will consider here just the special case where all the Ai are equations between variables. Even then, none of the arithmetic theories we have considered so far is convex. The theory of reals with multiplication is not: # map (real_qelim ** [<<x * y = 0 /\ z <<x * y = 0 /\ z <<x * y = 0 /\ z - : fol formula list

generalize) = 0 ==> x = z \/ y = z>>; = 0 ==> x = z>>; = 0 ==> y = z>>];; = [<<true>>; <>; <>]

and neither is the linear theory of integers: # map (integer_qelim ** generalize) [<<0 <= x /\ x < 2 /\ y = 0 /\ z = 1 ==> x = y \/ x = z>>; <<0 <= x /\ x < 2 /\ y = 0 /\ z = 1 ==> x = y>>; <<0 <= x /\ x < 2 /\ y = 0 /\ z = 1 ==> x = z>>];; - : fol formula list = [<<true>>; <>; <>]

This might seem a bit discouraging. However the linear theory of reals is convex for equations between variables (see Exercise 5.42), so it’s only in the cases where discreteness is used essentially that non-convexity arises for the linear theory of integers. And the theory of uninterpreted functions is also convex, as more generally is any theory axiomatizable by Horn clauses (Theorem 3.39). Of course, since we enumerated disjunctions of equations in order of size anyway, there’s not much advantage in restricting ourselves to only single equations when proving unsatisﬁability. However, if we know all our theories are convex, we can conclude satisﬁability (and hence invalidity of the universally quantiﬁed starting formula before negation) without running through the potentially huge numbers of disjunctions of equations, which can be a dramatic improvement.

Shostak’s method The Nelson–Oppen approach is quite general, and has an appealing modularity, in that we can combine component decision procedures without any knowledge of their internal working. On the other hand, using decision procedures speculatively on all the possible equations or disjunctions of equations between variables is crude. It would be beneﬁcial to tweak individual decision procedures where possible so that they can produce the implied equations by a more intelligent approach than trial-and-error. Another popular way

448

Decidable problems

of combining decision procedures is derived from a method developed by Shostak (1984b). Shostak’s method is less generally applicable, in that it requires each component theory to have a canonizer and a solver. Roughly speaking: • A canonizer ‘can’ for a theory T maps each term t to a T -equivalent canonical (normal) form. This canonizer must satisfy some fairly natural technical restrictions, in particular the fact that if can(t) = f (s1 , . . . , sn ) then the si are themselves canonical, i.e. can(si ) = si for 1 ≤ i ≤ n. • A solver σ for a theory T maps equations s = t to a set S of equations of the form xi = ti whose conjunction is T -equivalent to the original, again with some technical restrictions like non-circularity (xi ∈ FVT(tj ) for any of the i and j). A simple example is linear arithmetic over R where an equation like x + 3y + z = 2x can be reduced to {x = 3y + z}, or {y = 13 x + −1 3 z}. Shostak’s procedure then uses the canonizers and solvers for the component theories and ties them into a central algorithm that is a generalization of congruence closure using the component solvers and canonizers. Experience indicates that this tighter integration can result in signiﬁcantly improved eﬃciency on many examples, as one might expect. On the other hand, it has a narrower range of applicability. The Nelson–Oppen method can apply to any decidable theories, and even in its simple form (only communicating equations not disjunctions of equations) applies to any convex theory. Shostak’s method, on the other hand, is complete iﬀ the theory is both convex and solvable; the presence of a canonizer is not actually theoretically necessary (Ganzinger 2002). Despite its practical popularity over the years since Shostak’s original publication, the algorithm has until recently steadfastly resisted a clearly correct proof of completeness, despite numerous attempts to explicate the theory. Shostak’s original paper has a number of signiﬁcant errors. For example, it was ﬁrst noticed by Levitt (1999) that in general, multiple solvers for the constituent theories cannot be combined as Shostak claimed. Reuß and Shankar (2001) subsequently showed that Shostak’s original algorithm and all the known later reﬁnements were in fact incomplete and potentially nonterminating. Concretely, they fail to prove our ﬁrst running example: # nelop (add_default [int_lang]) < false>>;; - : bool = true

and go into an inﬁnite loop on:

5.13 Combining decision procedures

449

# nelop (add_default [int_lang]) < false>>;; - : bool = true

The authors go on to present what is claimed to be a fully corrected version of Shostak’s method, a version of which has even been subjected to machine checking (Ford and Shankar 2002). The corrected method has been used as the basis for a real implementation of the combined procedure called Yices.† Note that there is an important diﬀerence between (i) combining one Shostak theory with non-trivial axioms and the theory of uninterpreted functions and (ii) combining multiple Shostak theories with non-trivial axioms. In the latter case, it is essentially never the case that solvers can be combined (Krsti´c and Conchon 2003), and the recent complete methods in Shostak style can be considered merely as optimizations of a Nelson–Oppen combination using canonizers.

Modern SMT systems At the time of writing, there is intense interest in decision procedures for combinations of (mainly, but not entirely quantiﬁer-free) theories. The topic has become widely known as satisﬁability modulo theories (SMT), emphasizing the perspective that it is a generalization of the standard propositional SAT problem. Indeed, most of the latest SMT systems use methods strongly inﬂuenced by the leading SAT solvers, and are usually organized around a SAT-solving core. The idea of basing other decision procedures around SAT appeared in several places and in several slightly diﬀerent contexts, going back at least to Armando, Castellini and Giunchiglia (1999). The simplest approach is to use the SAT checker as a ‘black box’ subcomponent. Given a formula to be tested for satisﬁability, just treat each atomic formula as a propositional atom and feed the formula to the SAT checker. If the formula is propositionally unsatisﬁable, then it is trivially unsatisﬁable as a ﬁrst-order formula and we are ﬁnished. If on the other hand the SAT solver returns a satisfying assignment for the propositional formula, test whether the implicit conjunction of literals is also satisﬁable within our theory or theories. If it is satisﬁable, then we can conclude that so is the whole formula and terminate. However, if the putative satisfying valuation is not satisﬁable in our theories, we conjoin its negation with the input formula, just like a conﬂict clause in †

yices.csl.sri.com.

450

Decidable problems

a modern SAT solver (see Section 2.9) and repeat the procedure. Since all propositional assignments only involve atoms in the original formula, and in each iteration we eliminate at least one satisfying assignment, this process must terminate. In this framework, we still need to test satisﬁability within our theory of various conjunctions of literals. In some sense, all this approach does is replace the immediate explosion of cases caused by an expansion into DNF with the possibly more eﬃcient and intelligent enumeration of satisfying assignments given by the SAT solver. Flanagan, Joshi, Ou and Saxe (2003) contrast this oﬄine approach with the online alternative where the theory solvers are integrated with the SAT solver in a more sophisticated way, so that the SAT solver can retain most of its context (e.g. conﬂict clauses or other useful state information) instead of starting afresh each time. Most modern SMT systems use a form of this online approach, with numerous additional reﬁnements. For example, it is probably worthwhile to standardize atomic formulas as much as possible w.r.t. the theories, e.g. putting terms in normal form, to give more information to the SAT solver. And although we have presented the theory solver as a separate entity that may itself use a Nelson–Oppen combinations scheme, it may be preferable to reimplement the theory combination scheme itself in the same SAT-based framework, e.g. via delayed theory combination (Bozzano, Bruttomesso, Cimatti, Junttila, Ranise, van Rossum and Sebastiani 2005). These general approaches to SMT are often called lazy, because the underlying theory decision procedures are only called upon when matters cannot be resolved by propositional reasoning. A contrasting eager approach is to reduce the various theories directly to propositional logic in a preprocessing step and then call the SAT checker just once (Bryant, Lahiri and Seshia 2002). It is also possible to combine lazy and eager techniques, e.g. by eliminating the need for congruence closure using the Ackermann reduction (Section 4.4) at the outset, but otherwise proceeding lazily.

Further reading Many logic texts discuss the decision problem. For solvable and unsolvable cases of the decision problem for logical validity, see B¨ orger, Gr¨ adel and Gurevich (2001), Ackermann (1954) and Dreben and Goldfarb (1979), plus the brief treatment is given by Hilbert and Ackermann (1950). Note that the decision problem is often treated from the dual point of view of satisﬁability rather than validity, so one needs to swap the role of ∀ and ∃ in the quantiﬁer preﬁxes to correlate such writings with our discussion. A survey of decidable

Further reading

451

theories is given by Rabin (1991), some of which we have considered in this chapter. Syllogisms are discussed extensively in texts on the history of logic such as Boche´ nski (1961), Dumitriu (1977), Kneale and Kneale (1962) and Kneebone (1963). There are a number of other quantiﬁer elimination results for mathematical theories known from the literature. Two fairly diﬃcult examples are the theories of abelian groups (Szmielew 1955) and Boolean algebras (Tarski 1949). A chapter of Kreisel and Krivine (1971) is devoted to quantiﬁer elimination, and includes the theory of separable Boolean algebras (and so atomic Boolean algebras as a special case). Other standard textbooks on model theory such as Chang and Keisler (1992), Hodges (1993b) and Marcja and Toﬀalori (2003) also discuss quantiﬁer elimination as well as related ideas like model completeness and o-minimality; one formulation of model completeness (A. Robinson 1963; MacIntyre 1991) for a theory T is that every formula is T -equivalent to a purely universal (or equivalently, purely existential) one. A survey of theories to which quantiﬁer elimination has been successfully applied is towards the end of Ershov, Lavrov, Taimanov and Taitslin (1965). Soloray (private communication) has also described to the present author a quantiﬁer elimination procedure for various kinds of real and complex vector space. A treatment of Presburger arithmetic and some other related theories is given by Enderton (1972), and a detailed treatment of the diﬀerent quantiﬁer elimination procedures of Presburger and Skolem by Smory´ nski (1980). This book contains a lot of information about related topics, including a discussion of the corresponding theory of multiplication. A nice application of quantiﬁer elimination for Presburger arithmetic is given by Smory´ nski (1981). Yap (2000) goes further into related decidability questions and has much other relevant material. Other approaches to Presburger arithmetic include the Omega test (Pugh 1992) and the method of Williams (1976). A quantiﬁer elimination procedure for linear arithmetic with a mixture of reals and integers is given by Weispfenning (1999). Basu, Pollack and Roy (2006) is a standard reference for quantiﬁer elimination and related questions for the reals, including CAD. Caviness and Johnson (1998) is a collection of important papers in the area including Tarski’s original article (which is otherwise quite hard to ﬁnd). The classical Sturm theory is treated in numerous practically-oriented books on algorithmic algebra such as Mignotte (1991) and Mishra (1993) as well as books specializing in real algebraic geometry such as Benedetti and Risler (1990) and Bochnak, Coste and Roy (1998). The Artin–Schreier theory of

452

Decidable problems

real closed ﬁelds is also discussed in many classic algebra texts like van der Waerden (1991) and Jacobson (1989). Discussion of the full quantiﬁer elimination results (or their equivalent in other formulations) can also be found in many of these texts, and as already noted our decision procedure follows H¨ ormander (1983) based on an unpublished manuscript by Paul Cohen.† Bochnak, Coste and Roy (1998) and G˚ arding (1997) give other presentations, while Schoutens (2001) and Michaux and Ozturk (2002) describe a very similar algorithm due to Muchnik. For more leisurely presentations of the Seidenberg and Kreisel–Krivine algorithms, see Jacobson (1989) and Engeler (1993) respectively. Two of the most powerful implementations of real quantiﬁer elimination available are QEPCAD‡ and REDLOG§ ; the latter needs the REDUCE computer algebra system. In his original article, Tarski raised the question of whether the theory of reals remains complete and decidable when one adds to the language the exponential function x → ex . This is still unknown, and analysis of related questions is still a hot research topic at the time of writing. One certainly needs to further expand the signature (rather as divisibility was needed to give quantiﬁer elimination for Presburger arithmetic) since the unexpanded language does not admit quantiﬁer elimination: in fact the following formula (Osgood 1916) has no quantiﬁer-free equivalent even in a language expanded with arbitrarily many total analytic functions: y > 0 ∧ ∃w. x = yw ∧ z = yew . What is known (Wilkie 1996) is that this theory and various similar ones are all model complete (see above). Moreover, Macintyre and Wilkie (1996) have shown decidability of the real exponential ﬁeld assuming the truth of Schanuel’s conjecture, a generalization of the Lindemann–Weierstrass theorem in transcendental number theory. In addition there are extensions of the linear theory of reals with transcendental functions that are known to be decidable (Weispfenning 2000). Another extension of the reals that is known to be decidable is with a unary predicate for the algebraic numbers (A. Robinson 1959). But adding periodic functions such as sin to the reals immediately leads to undecidability, because one can constrain variables to be integers, e.g. by sin(n · p) = 0 ∧ sin(p) = 0∧3 < p∧p < 4. It follows easily from the undecidability of Hilbert’s tenth problem (Matiyasevich 1970), which we shall see in Chapter 7, that † ‡ §

‘A simple proof of Tarski’s theorem on elementary algebra’, mimeographed manuscript, Stanford University 1967. See www.cs.usna.edu/~qepcad/B/QEPCAD.html. See www.fmi.uni-passau.de/~redlog/.

Further reading

453

even the universal fragment of this theory is undecidable, though this was actually proved earlier using a more direct argument (Richardson 1968). Since sin(z) = (eiz − e−iz )/2, adding an exponential function to the complex numbers leads at once to undecidability. Considering geometrically the subsets of Rn or Cn deﬁned by formulas (see Section 7.2 for a precise deﬁnition of deﬁnability by a formula) yields some connections with algebraic geometry. Note that existential quantiﬁcation over x corresponds to projection onto a hyperplane x = constant, and so, for example, (van den Dries 1988) Chevalley’s constructibility theorem ‘the projection of a constructible set is constructible’, is essentially just quantiﬁer elimination in another guise; this even applies to the generalization by Grothendieck (1964). And ‘Lefschetz’s principle’ in algebraic geometry, pithily but imprecisely stated by Weil (1946) as ‘There is but one algebraic geometry of characteristic p’ has a formal counterpart in the fact that the ﬁrst-order theory of algebraically closed ﬁelds of given characteristic is complete, and this formal version can be further generalized (Eklof 1973). These and other examples of applications of mathematical logic to pure mathematics are surveyed by Kreisel (1956), A. Robinson (1963), Kreisel and Krivine (1971) and Cherlin (1976). The phrase ‘word problem’ arises because terms in algebra are sometimes called ‘words’; it is quite unrelated to its use in elementary algebra for a problem formulated in everyday language where part of the challenge is to translate it into mathematical terms; see Watterson (1988), p.116. For more relationships between word problems and ideal membership, see KandriRody, Kapur and Narendran (1985). There are several books on Gr¨ obner bases including Adams and Loustaunau (1994) and Weispfenning and Becker (1993), as well as other treatments of algebraic geometry that cover the topic extensively, e.g. Cox, Little and O’Shea (1992), while a short treatment of the basic theory and its applications is given by Buchberger (1998). The text on rewriting methods by Baader and Nipkow (1998) also has a brief treatment of the subject, which like ours re-uses some of the results developed for rewriting. There is an approach to the universal theory of R analogous to the use of Gr¨ obner bases for C. The starting-point is an analogue of the Nullstellensatz for the reals, which likewise can be considered as a result about properties true in all ordered ﬁelds or in the particular structure R. (The Artin–Schreier theorem asserts that all ordered ﬁelds have a real closure, and one can show that all real-closed ﬁelds are elementarily equivalent.) Sums of squares of polynomials feature heavily in the various versions of the real Nullstellensatz; for example, the simplest version says that a conjunction p1 (x) = 0 ∧ · · · ∧

454

Decidable problems

pn (x) = 0 has no solution over R iﬀ there are polynomials such that s1 (x)2 + · · ·+sm (x)2 +1 ∈ Id p1 , . . . , pn . In order to ﬁnd the appropriate polynomials in practice, the most eﬀective approach seems to be based on semideﬁnite programming (Parrilo 2003). For interesting related material about sums of squares and Hilbert’s 17th problem see Reznick (2000) and Roy (2000). For logical or ‘metamathematical’ approaches to geometry in general, see Tarski (1959) and Schwabh¨ auser, Szmielev and Tarski (1983). Important aspects of Wu’s method are anticipated in a more limited mechanization theorem given by Hilbert (1899), while extensive practical applications of Wu’s method are reported by Chou (1988). A modern survey of Wu’s method and many other approaches to geometry theorem proving is given by Chou and Gao (2001). For a general perspective on the theory behind triangular sets see Hubert (2001). Narboux (2007) describes a graphical system that among other things can be used as an interface to the the code in this book. The proof of Craig’s theorem here is taken from Kreisel and Krivine (1971). Extending combination methods to theories that are not stably inﬁnite is problematical (Tinelli and Zarba 2005). In practice, most theories of interest that are not stably inﬁnite have natural domains with a speciﬁc ﬁnite size (e.g. machine words, with 232 elements). It’s arguably better to formulate theory combination in many-sorted logic, where we can still assume quantiﬁer elimination for equality formulas owing to the ﬁxed size for each domain (Ranise, Ringeissen and Zarba 2005). Even better, perhaps, is a parametric sort system (Krstic, Goel, Grundy and Tinelli 2007). Moreover, sort distinctions can even justify some extensions with richer quantiﬁer structure (Fontaine 2004). On the other hand, there are situations where a 1-sorted approach is needed, e.g. the ingenious combination of additive and multiplicative theories of arithmetic suggested by Avigad and Friedman (2006). There are some known cases of decidable combined theories that do not ﬁt into the Nelson–Oppen framework. A notable example is ‘BAPA’, the combination of the Boolean algebra of sets of uninterpreted elements with Presburger arithmetic, allowing any quantiﬁer structure and including a cardinality operator from sets to numbers. The decidability of this theory is arguably a direct consequence of results of Feferman and Vaught (1959), but was made explicit by Revesz (2004) and, in a more general form, Kuncak, Nguyen and Rinard (2005). For more on modern SMT systems see the survey by Barrett, Sebastiani, Seshia and Tinelli (2008), and rule-based presentations by Nieuwenhuis, Oliveras and Tinelli (2006) and Krsti´c and Goel (2007). The practical applications in the computer industry that have driven the current interest in SMT have also suggested other ‘computer-oriented’ theories whose

Exercises

455

decidability is of interest. For example, to verify hardware or low-level programs using machine integers, one may want to reason about operations on ﬁxed-size groups of bits such as bytes and words. One approach is via ‘bitblasting’, using a propositional variable for each bit and encoding arithmetic operations bitwise. Primitive as this seems, it is very ﬂexible and, thanks to the power of modern SAT solvers, often eﬀective.† Other approaches, e.g. the Shostak-like approach of Cyrluk, M¨ oller and Reuß (1997) or the use of modular arithmetic by Babi´c and Musuvathi (2005) are more elegant and can be more eﬃcient for large word sizes, but are also less general. Other interesting theories for programming include arrays (Stump, Dill, Barrett and Levitt 2001; Bradley, Manna and Sipma 2006) and recursive data types (Barrett, Shikanian and Tinelli 2007). Kroening and Strichman (2008) give a systematic overview of many of these topics, their integration into modern SMT systems and some of their practical applications. Bradley and Manna (2007) describe the key ideas of program veriﬁcation and how decision procedures can be applied to it, and they also provide a discussion of some important decision procedures and other logical material. Although it lies somewhat outside the topics we have considered, there are several quite eﬀective algorithms for automated summation of hypergeometric functions, which 2 can automatically prove impressive-looking identi

ties such as nk=0 nk = 2n n . Indeed, computer implementations of these algorithms are usually much more eﬀective than people. See Petkovˇsek, Wilf and Zeilberger (1996) for an introduction. Another slightly peripheral but interesting topic is deciding whether an equation in a language with addition, multiplication and exponentiation holds for the natural numbers (i.e. the free word problem for the structure N). This is known to be decidable (Macintyre 1981; Gureviˇc 1985), but contrary to a well-known conjecture (Doner and Tarski 1969) it does not coincide with the equational theory of a basic set of ‘high school algebra’ identities (Wilkie 2000) and in fact the equational theory is not ﬁnitely axiomatizable (Gureviˇc 1990; Di Cosmo and Dufour 2004).

Exercises 5.1

†

Roughly speaking, in a model of size k, we can think of ∀x. P [x] as equivalent to P [a1 ] ∧ · · · ∧ P [ak ] for some constants ai interpreted by elements of the model. Likewise we can think of existential quantiﬁers

For example, most of the collection of bit-level hacker tricks ` a la Warren (2002) listed in the page graphics.stanford.edu/~seander/bithacks.html have been veriﬁed for 32-bit words using this technique.

456

5.2

5.3 5.4

5.5

Decidable problems

as disjunctions. Make precise the observation that we can implement ﬁrst-order validity in ﬁnite models by expanding quantiﬁers in this way and using propositional logic – eﬀectively, we bypass part of the enumeration of possible models by relying on non-enumerative methods available for propositional logic. Implement it and compare its performance with the earlier function decide finite. Now experiment with reducing the nesting of quantiﬁers, and hence the possible blowup, by ﬁrst transforming into Skolem normal form (see Exercise 3.4) using deﬁnitions for subformulas. Does this improve performance? Prove that this is a sound approach. As we noted, some standard methods for ﬁrst-order proof turn out to be decision procedures for restricted subsets. Prove in particular that hyperresolution is complete for the AE fragment (Leitsch 1997). Show how to deduce the decidability of the preﬁx class ∀n ∃∃∀m from that for ∃∃∀m . Consider a formula that is in the EA subset we deﬁned, i.e. is of the form ∃x1 , . . . , xn . ∀y1 , . . . , ym . P [x1 , . . . , xn , y1 , . . . , ym ] with P quantiﬁer-free and without function symbols. (We even exclude constants, though we can just reconsider them as additional variables xi ). Show that it has a model iﬀ it has a model of size n (or 1 in the case n = 0), for logic without equality. What about logic with equality? The Friendship theorem asserts that in a set of people in which any two distinct people have exactly one common friend, there is one person who is everybody else’s friend. For a proof that it holds for any ﬁnite set of friends, see Aigner and Ziegler (2001). Show that the ﬁniteness is essential, and hence that the following formula does not have the ﬁnite model property: <<(forall x. ~friend(x,x)) /\ (forall x y. friend(x,y) ==> friend(y,x)) /\ (forall x y. ~(x = y) ==> exists z. friend(x,z) /\ friend(y,z) /\ forall w. friend(x,w) /\ friend(y,w) ==> w = z) ==> exists u. forall v. ~(v = u) ==> friend(u,v)>>;;

5.6

A class of models that can be expressed as Mod(Σ) (the set of all models of Σ) for some set of ﬁrst-order axioms Σ is said to be ‘Δelementary’, and if there is some such ﬁnite set Σ, simply ‘elementary’. Show that a class K is elementary precisely if both K and its complement K are Δ-elementary. Show that the class of models with

Exercises

5.7

5.8

5.9

5.10 5.11

5.12

5.13

5.14

457

inﬁnite domain is elementary, but the class of models with a ﬁnite domain is not. Use the deﬁnitions of ‘Δ-elementary’ and ‘elementary’ from the previous exercise. Show that the class of ﬁelds of characteristic zero is Δ-elementary but not elementary, while the class of Archimedean ﬁelds is not even Δ-elementary. Show that if a theory is ﬁnitely axiomatizable, any axiomatization of it has a ﬁnite subset that axiomatizes the same theory. That is, if Cn(Γ) = Cn(Δ) with Δ ﬁnite, then there’s a ﬁnite Γ ⊆ Γ with Cn(Γ ) = Cn(Γ). Show that if a theory is κ-categorical and ﬁnitely axiomatizable, then it is decidable. Hint: suppose the conjunction of the axioms is A. Add axioms Bi asserting that there are at least i distinct objects. Now apply the L o´s–Vaught test (Exercise 4.1) to A ∪ {Bi }. The theories of dense linear order with endpoints also admits quantiﬁer elimination. Implement such a quantiﬁer elimination procedure. Show that the theory of dense linear orders without endpoints is ℵ0 categorical. (If you get stuck, look for the classic ‘back and forth’ proof of this due to Cantor.) Hence show by the L o´s–Vaught test (Exercise 4.1) that the theory is complete, without any use of a concrete quantiﬁer elimination procedure. Give a quantiﬁer elimination procedure for the theory of arithmetic truths in a language including the successor function S and the ordering predicate < but not addition. Show that, by contrast to the version without <, this theory is ﬁnitely axiomatizable, and not κ-categorical for any inﬁnite κ. Show that while the same subsets of N are deﬁnable as without <, there are more subsets of N × N, including {(m, n) | m < n}. Show that {(m, n, p) | m + n = p} is still not deﬁnable. Instead of basing Cooper’s algorithm on the existence of minimal or arbitrarily negative solutions, we could have based it on maximal or arbitrarily large and positive ones. Deﬁne a notion of ‘A-set’ dual to the ‘B-set’ in our presentation and implement Cooper’s algorithm based on that. Now implement an ‘adaptive’ version that uses either the A-set or the B-set depending on which one yields a simpler result. Implement an optimization suggested by Cooper: instead of actu ally expanding out the formulas of the form dj=1 · · ·, introduce j as a new parameter while dealing with the remaining quantiﬁers. You will then need to deal with them at the end, but this is relatively straightforward. See whether this dramatically improves per-

458

5.15

5.16

5.17

5.18

5.19

Decidable problems

formance on problems, especially those with many quantiﬁers of the same kind. A set D ⊆ Z is said to be ‘eventually periodic’ iﬀ there are positive numbers n and p such that for all x ≥ n, we have x+p ∈ D ⇔ x ∈ D. Show that all sets of integers deﬁnable in the language of Presburger arithmetic are eventually periodic. Use this result to show that the set of squares {x2 | x ∈ Z} is not deﬁnable, and hence neither is the graph of the multiplication relation {(m, n, p) | mn = p}. Implement one of the algorithms from Harvey and Stuckey (1997) or Lahiri and Musuvathi (2005) for the UTVPI subset of Presburger arithmetic. A central component of the complex and real decision procedures was pseudo-division by repeated cancellation of polynomials, i.e. given p(x) = axn + p1 (x) and q(x) = bxm + q1 (x), forming bxm−n p(x) − aq(x) in order to cancel the leading terms. However, it would be more economical to avoid multiplying by common factors of a and b. For example, in the common operation of cancelling p(x) = axn + · · · and p (x) = naxn−1 + · · · it’s clearly unnecessary to multiply both p(x) and p (x) by a in order to cancel them. Modify the complex and real decision procedures so that they use a = a/ gcd(a, b) and b = b/ gcd(a, b) instead. Algorithms for multivariate GCDs based on repeated pseudo-division would give a nice simple implementation based on interlocking recursion – see, for example, Section 4.6.1 of Knuth (1969). Test the improvement on some examples. Take care that you do not violate sign constraints in the case of the reals – if a = bc then a = 0 implies b = 0 and c = 0, but a > 0 does not imply either b > 0 or c > 0. Can you similarly improve sign determination so it takes into account sign information for factors or multiples of the requested polynomial? Modify the complex quantiﬁer elimination procedure to work over algebraically closed ﬁelds of arbitrary characteristic p. The main place where we implicitly relied on characteristic zero is that we start with the hypothesis that 1 is nonzero (actually positive), and deduce that any multiple of a nonzero number is nonzero. In a ﬁeld of characteristic p, we need to check divisibility by p. Generalize it to work in unspeciﬁed characteristic, case-splitting over c = 0 even for constants as need be. How does eﬃciency change? Show that if for arbitrarily large p, a given set of sentences holds in some algebraically closed ﬁeld of characteristic p, then it holds in some algebraically closed ﬁeld of characteristic 0. Hence show that

Exercises

5.20

5.21

5.22

5.23

5.24

5.25

459

every injective polynomial map f : Cn → Cn is also surjective. This requires quite a bit of algebra; for a proof see Weiss and D’Mello (1997), p23. The algorithm we presented for reals does not exploit the possibility of using an equation as part of a conjunction to simplify other conjuncts. Implement this feature and test the resulting algorithm on some otherwise diﬃcult examples. Augment the DLO procedure from Section 5.6 so that it performs Fourier–Motzkin elimination for the linear theory of reals, as sketched near the end of Section 5.9. Optimize it so that both strict (<) and non-strict (≤) inequalities are handled directly instead of transforming s ≤ t ⇔ s < t ∨ s = t as we did with the DLO procedure. Implement the further non-DNF optimization from Ferrante and Rackoﬀ (1975) and compare the two procedures on some examples. Enhance the H¨ ormander implementation so that it attempts to ﬁnd simple factorizations when constructing the sign matrix, e.g. inferring the sign of x5 y 4 from the sign of x and y. Try the result out on examples. Also consider reducing the number of polynomials considered in the complex and real quantiﬁer elimination by maintaining them in monic form to avoid rational multiples. Show how to take explicit cofactors for an ideal membership of the form 1 ∈ Id p1 , . . . , pn , 1 − qz and explicitly ﬁnd an l and cofactor expansion showing q l ∈ Id p1 , . . . , pn . Hint: intuitively we have z = 1/q, so consider multiplying the ﬁrst equation by q l where l is the largest power of z in the cofactors. A ring is said to be reduced when it has no nilpotent elements, i.e. satisﬁes the axioms ∀x. xn = 0 ⇒ x = 0 for all n ≥ 1. A ring is called a Boolean ring when it satisﬁes the axiom ∀x. x2 = x. (Note that a Boolean ring is automatically reduced, even though it may have zero-divisors.) Show how to reduce the word problems for reduced rings, non-trivial reduced rings (also satisfying 1 = 0), and Boolean rings to equivalent ideal membership assertions. This exercise is intended for readers who know a bit of algebra; it shows that the usual ‘Zornication’ in the proof that every ﬁeld has an algebraic closure can be replaced by the compactness theorem (Kreisel and Krivine 1971). Note that given any ﬁeld F and polynomial p with coeﬃcients in F , one can construct a ﬁeld extension F of F such that p has a root in F , by forming the quotient of F [x] by a maximal ideal containing p. Thus, we can form an extension where any ﬁnite set of polynomials all have a root, and hence by

460

5.26

5.27

5.28

5.29

5.30

5.31

Decidable problems

compactness where all polynomials in F have a root. We can then take a minimal subﬁeld of elements algebraic over F and this is an algebraically closed extension of F . Show that if G is any abelian group, then it can be embedded in the ring on Z × G with the operations deﬁned as (m, a) + (n, b) = (m + n, a + b) and (m, a) · (n, b) = (m · n, m · b + n · a), where m · x is just x+· · ·+x repeated m times (Cohn 1974). In fact, many additive abelian groups can be given a ring structure without increasing the domain. Show however that the additive group of rational numbers p/q where q is squarefree (not divisible by n2 for n > 1) cannot be turned into a ring based on the existing domain. Show that the word problem for abelian groups can be reduced to that for abelian monoids by pushing down inversion to the variables using (xy)−1 = x−1 y −1 , introducing a new variable zi for each term yi−1 and testing the monoid word problem with the additional equations zi yi = 1. Implement code to solve ideal membership goals using the approach set out at the beginning of Section 5.11, parametrizing general cofactors polynomials and comparing coeﬃcients. How does performance compare with our Gr¨ obner basis approach? By considering the rewrite set F = {w = x + y, w = x + z, x = z, x = y} we pointed out that joinability of the ‘critical pair’ (x + y, x + z) arising from w was not in itself enough to imply conﬂuence of rewrites to w in the polynomial w − x. However, there is another unjoinable critical pair in this rewrite set, namely (y, z), so this does not provide a counterexample to the global assertion ‘joinability of all critical pairs under →F is a necessary and suﬃcient condition for F to be a Gr¨ obner basis’. Can you ﬁnd such a counterexample, or else prove that the assertion is in fact true?

l

k Show that if p = i=1 pi and q = j=1 qi are two polynomials, with the monomials pi arranged in decreasing order (pi pi+1 ) in the monomial ordering, and likewise for the qj , then if LCM(p1 q1 ) = p1 q1 up to a constant multiple, S(f, g) →{p,q} 0. This observation, known as Buchberger’s ﬁrst criterion, justiﬁes a change to spoly so that if two rewrites to a monomial are ‘orthogonal’ (snd(m) = snd(mmul m1 m2)) it just returns the zero polynomial []. How does that optimization improve performance? Show that a polynomial P [sin(θ), cos(θ)] is identically zero iﬀ x2 + y 2 = 1 ⇒ P [x, y] = 0 is valid over the complex numbers.

Exercises

5.32

5.33

5.34

5.35

5.36

†

461

Enhance the Cooper and H¨ ormander algorithms in a uniform way so that they handle a unary absolute value function abs(x) = |x| by performing suitable case-splits, e.g. expanding abs(x + y) ≤ a to x + y ≤ a ∧ −(x + y) ≤ a. Test this function on simple properties of absolute values, e.g. ||x| − |y|| ≤ |x − y|, then see whether you can handle the following. Consider a sequence of integers (or indeed reals) with the property that xi + xi+2 = |xi+1 | for all i ≥ 0 (the values of x0 and x1 can be chosen arbitrarily). Such a sequence has the at ﬁrst sight surprising property that it is periodic with period 9.† Can you ﬁnd an attractive argument to show this? Are any of our algorithms capable of verifying it by brute force, showing 8i=0 xi + xi+2 = |xi+1 | ⇒ x0 = x9 ∧ x1 = x10 ? Do any of the optimizations considered in other exercises help? Complex quantiﬁer elimination for universal formulas (e.g. Gr¨ obner bases) can be used to solve combinatorial problems, as the following graph-colouring example due to Bayer (1982) indicates. Let z be a primitive cube root of unity, i.e. z 3 = 1 but z k = 1 for 0 < k < 3. Represent colours by 1, z and z 2 . Each vertex, represented by variables xi , has one of these colours, so we assert x3i − 1 = 0. Now if two vertices represented by xi , xj have an edge between them, we want to constrain them to have diﬀerent colours. We can do this by forcing one of the other roots, i.e. asserting x2i + xi xj + x2j = 0. Show that a graph is 3-colourable iﬀ these equations are all satisﬁable; try some concrete examples. Can you extend this to 4-colourability? Show that the subsets of C deﬁnable using addition, multiplication and equations, with arbitrary propositional and quantiﬁer structure, are either ﬁnite or coﬁnite, and hence that the set of reals is not deﬁnable. We mentioned the two possibilities of introducing a separate Rabinowitsch variable for each negated equation, or combining them all into one negated equation by multiplication then using a single Rabinowitsch variable. We adopted the former; try the latter and see how performance compares on examples. Implement a combination of complex_qelim and the generally faster method for universal formulas using Gr¨ obner bases, so that outer universal quantiﬁers are handled by the latter but general quantiﬁer

See M. Brown in ‘Problems and solutions’, American Mathematical Monthly 90, p.569, 1983. Colmerauer (1990) gives a solution using Prolog III.

462

Decidable problems

elimination is used internally as necessary. A typical example you might want to try is the following: < z = x \/ z = y) ==> a * x * y = c /\ a * (x + y) + b = 0>>;;

5.37

5.38

5.39

5.40

†

Show how to encode equality of angles in algebraic terms using the coordinates. Implement an OCaml function that generates an assertion, using algebraic functions of the coordinates only, that one angle is the sum of two others, and that one angle is n times another one, for an arbitrary positive integer n. If three distinct points in the plane all lie on a circle with centre O, and also all lie on a circle with centre O , then O = O . Show by an explicit counterexample that when formulated in terms of coordinates, this fails when the coordinates are allowed to be complex. Look up the ‘83 theorem’ of Mac Lane (1936) and show that it also fails for complex ‘coordinates’. Show also that the Steiner–Lehmus theorem fails over the complex numbers.† One can imagine a more ambitious project of not merely verifying geometric theorems, but discovering new ones, perhaps by guessing and testing via some speciﬁc numerical instances, then attempting to prove the ones that pass the ﬁrst test (Davis and Cerutti 1976). Implement a program to do this. The system of second-order arithmetic extends the usual ﬁrst-order arithmetic of natural numbers by having a separate class of unary predicate (or set) variables over which quantiﬁcation is permitted. For example, one can state the principle of mathematical induction by ∀P.P (0)∧(∀n.P (n) ⇒ P (n+1)) ⇒ ∀n.P (n), whereas in ﬁrst-order arithmetic the quantiﬁcation over P is not possible. Show that in the ﬁrst-order theory of reals with a predicate for the integers, one can interpret second-order arithmetic. That is, there is an (injective) function I from formulas in the language of second-order arithmetic to those in the language of the ﬁrst-order theory of reals with an integer predicate, such that each φ is true in arithmetic iﬀ the corresponding I(φ) is true over the reals. The author does not know a precise reference for this ‘folklore’ result, which he learned from Robert Solovay, though see Exercises 8B.2 and 8B.3 of Moschovakis (1980) for a related result. Hint: you might map the predicate (set)

See groups.google.com/group/geometry.college/msg/323a597e9348ba50 for a note on this by Conway.

Exercises

5.41

5.42 5.43 5.44

463

P to the digits in a real number’s positional expansion, e.g. the set {1, 3, 5, . . .} of odd numbers to the real number 0.1010101 . . . . Prove a reﬁnement of Craig’s interpolation theorem due to Lyndon (1959), which asserts that if |= A ⇒ B we can choose the interpolant C such that |= A ⇒ C and |= C ⇒ B with all the usual conditions and the fact that predicate symbols appear only with a particular sign if they appear with that sign in both A and B. Prove that the linear theory of reals is convex for equations between variables. Prove that for theories with no 1-element models, convexity implies stable inﬁniteness (Barrett, Dill and Levitt 1996). Show that the SAT problem can be reduced with only linear blowup to deciding satisﬁability of a conjunction of literals in the combination of (i) the UTVPI fragment of linear integer arithmetic and (ii) uninterpreted function symbols. (Hint: consider transforming a clause p ∨ ¬q ∨ r into a literal f (p, q, r) = f (0, 1, 0).) This shows that even if two theories have an eﬃcient decision procedure, their combination may not (unless the theories are convex).

6 Interactive theorem proving

Our eﬀorts so far have been aimed at making the computer prove theorems completely automatically. But the scope of fully automatic methods, subject to any remotely realistic limitations on computing power, covers only a very small part of present-day mathematics. Here we develop an alternative: an interactive proof assistant that can help to precisely state and formalize a proof, while still dealing with some boring details automatically. Moreover, to ensure its reliability, we design the proof assistant based on a very simple logical kernel.

6.1 Human-oriented methods We’ve devoted quite a lot of energy to making computers prove statements completely automatically. The methods we’ve implemented are fairly powerful and can do some kinds of proofs better than (most) people. Still, the enormously complicated chains of logical reasoning in many ﬁelds of mathematics are seldom likely to be discovered in a reasonable amount of time by systematic algorithms like those we’ve presented. In practice, human mathematicians ﬁnd these chains of reasoning using a mixture of intuition, experimentation with speciﬁc instances, analogy with or extrapolation from related results, dramatic generalization of the context (e.g. the use of complexanalytic methods in number theory) and of course pure luck – see Lakatos (1976), Polya (1954) and Schoenfeld (1985) for varied attempts to subject the process of mathematical discovery to methodological analysis. It’s probably true to say that very few human mathematicians approach the task of proving theorems with methods like those we have developed. One natural reaction to the limitations of systematic algorithmic methods is to try to design computer programs that reason in a more human-like style. Even before the methods we’ve discussed so far were properly developed, 464

6.1 Human-oriented methods

465

some researchers instinctively felt that systematic methods would be of little practical use and embarked on more human-oriented approaches. For example, Newell and Simon (1956) designed a program that could prove many of the simple logic theorems in Principia Mathematica (see Section 6.4). At about the same time Gelerntner (1959) designed a prover that could prove facts in Euclidean geometry using human-style diagrams to direct or restrict the proofs. However, it turned out that their rationale, in particular their pessimism about systematic methods, was not entirely vindicated. For example, the systematic approaches to geometry theorem proving starting with Wu (see Section 5.12) have been remarkably eﬀective and certainly go beyond anything achieved by Gelerntner or others using human-oriented approaches. As Wang (1960) remarked when presenting his simple systematic program for the AE fragment of ﬁrst-order logic (Section 5.2) that was dramatically more eﬀective than Newell and Simon’s: The writer [...] cannot help feeling, all the same, that the comparison reveals a fundamental inadequacy in their approach. There is no need to kill a chicken with a butcher’s knife. Yet the net impression is that Newell–Shore–Simon failed even to kill the chicken with their butcher’s knife.

In fairness to those pursuing the human-oriented approach, however, their primary objective was often not to make an eﬀective theorem prover, incidentally appealing though that might be. Rather it was to understand, by formally reconstructing it, the human thought process. Mediocrity may indicate success rather than failure in pursuit of that goal, since people are generally not very good at solving logic puzzles! After these initial explorations in the 1950s with both ‘systematic’ and ‘human-oriented’ approaches to theorem proving, the former won out almost completely. Only a few researchers pursued human-oriented approaches, notably Bledsoe, who, for example, attempted to formalize methods often used by humans for proving theorems about limits in analysis (Bledsoe 1984). Bledsoe’s student Boyer together with Moore developed the remarkable NQTHM prover (Boyer and Moore 1979) which can often perform automatic generalization of suggested theorems and prove the generalizations by induction. The success of NQTHM, and the contrasting diﬃculty of ﬁtting its methods into a simple conceptual framework, has led Bundy (1991) to reconstruct its methods in a general science of reasoning based on proof planning. A more hawkish reaction to the limited success of human-oriented methods when computerized is to observe that in some situations, systematic methods are better even for people. For instance, Knuth and Bendix (1970)

466

Interactive theorem proving

suggest that completion (Section 4.7) is a useful systematization of the ways mathematicians experiment with equational axioms. Dislike of anthropomorphism in computing generally (Dijkstra 1982b) has perhaps spurred a drive in some quarters towards making human proof more systematically organized and syntax-driven – in short more machine-like (Dijkstra and Scholten 1990). And Wos attributes his considerable success in applying automated reasoning to the fact that he plays to a computer’s strengths instead of attempting to make it emulate human thought: Simply put, diﬀerences abound between the way a person reasons and the way a program of the type featured here reasons. Those diﬀerences may in part explain why OTTER has succeeded in answering questions that were unanswered for decades, and also explain why its use has produced proofs far more elegant than those previously known. (Even if I knew what was needed, I would not redesign OTTER to function as a mathematician, logician, or any other person does, and not because of a lack of respect for people’s reasoning.) (Wos and Pieper 1999)

6.2 Interactive provers and proof checkers Experience suggests that neither approach, systematically algorithmic or heuristic and human-oriented, is capable of proving a wide range of diﬃcult mathematical theorems automatically. Moreover, there is no indication that incremental improvements in such methods together with advances in technology will change this fact. Some might even argue that it is hardly desirable to automate proofs that humans are incapable of developing themselves. [...] I consider mathematical proofs as a reﬂection of my understanding and ‘understanding’ is something we cannot delegate, either to another person or to a machine. (Dijkstra 1976b)

A more modest goal is to create a system that can verify a proof found by a human, or assist in a limited capacity under human guidance. At the very least the computer should act as a humble clerical assistant checking the correctness of the proof, guarding against typical human errors such as implicit assumptions and forgotten special cases. At best the computer might help the process substantially by automating certain parts of the proof; after all, proofs often contain parts that are just routine veriﬁcations or are amenable to automation, such as algebraic identities. This idea of a machine and human working together to prove theorems from sketches was already envisaged by Wang (1960), whose work on automated theorem proving was merely intended to lay the groundwork for such a system: The original aim of the writer was to take mathematical textbooks such as Landau on the number system, Hardy–Wright on number theory, Hardy on the calculus,

6.2 Interactive provers and proof checkers

467

Veblen–Young on projective geometry, the volumes by Bourbaki, as outlines and make the machine formalize all the proofs (ﬁll in the gaps).

Early proof assistants Early computers only supported batch working with a long turnaround time. But by the 1960s, a more interactive style was becoming widespread. Thanks to this, and perhaps motivated by a feeling that the abilities of fully automated systems were starting to plateau, there was increasing interest in the idea of a proof assistant. The ﬁrst eﬀective realization was the SAM (semi-automated mathematics) family of provers: Semi-automated mathematics is an approach to theorem-proving which seeks to combine automatic logic routines with ordinary proof procedures in such a manner that the resulting procedure is both eﬃcient and subject to human intervention in the form of control and guidance. Because it makes the mathematician an essential factor in the quest to establish theorems, this approach is a departure from the usual theorem-proving attempts in which the computer unaided seeks to establish proofs. (Guard, Oglesby, Bennett and Settle 1969)

In 1966, the ﬁfth in the series of systems, SAM V, was used to construct a proof of a hitherto unproven conjecture in lattice theory (Bumcrot 1965). This was indubitably a success for the semi-automated approach because the computer automatically proved a result now called ‘SAM’s lemma’ and the mathematician recognized that it easily yielded a proof of Bumcrot’s conjecture. Not long after the SAM project, two other important proof-checking systems appeared: AUTOMATH (de Bruijn 1970; de Bruijn 1980; Nederpelt, Geuvers and Vrijer 1994) and Mizar (Trybulec 1978; Trybulec and Blair 1985). Both of these have been highly inﬂuential in diﬀerent ways, and both have been used to check non-trivial pieces of mathematics. Although we will refer to these systems too as ‘interactive’, we use this term loosely as an antonym of ‘automatic’. Both AUTOMATH and Mizar were oriented around batch usage. However, the ﬁles that they process consist of a proof, or a proof sketch, which they check the correctness of, rather than a statement that they attempt to prove automatically.

LCF Many successful proof checkers, including Mizar, have relatively weak automation, and oblige the user to describe the proof in a rather detailed manner with only small gaps for the machine to ﬁll in. For example, Mizar’s

468

Interactive theorem proving

automated abilities are quite restricted, to steps that are ‘obvious’ in a precise logical sense (Davis 1981; Rudnicki 1987). To some extent this weakness is a conscious design choice. If the gaps in a proof sketch are too large, that sketch is diﬃcult to understand for a human reader working without machine assistance – and now that the emphasis is on helping a human mathematician rather than automated tours de force, that seems an undesirable feature. This restriction also sharply circumscribes the search needed to ﬁll a gap in the proof or decide that the inference implicit in that gap is non-obvious, so the proof-checking process can be made quite eﬃcient. Since Mizar is designed for batch usage, where a potentially large proof text is checked in a single interaction, this is especially important. However, the Mizar deﬁnition of an obvious inference often fails to coincide with the human deﬁnition of what is obvious, and some such dissonance seems inevitable. A particular diﬃculty is that what a person considers obvious may include domain-speciﬁc knowledge about the branch of mathematics being formalized. For example, algebraic identities are often obvious or routine, yet decomposing them to steps that Mizar will accept as obvious can be tedious. Moreover, there seems no end in sight to the new facts that may come to be considered obvious once a certain result has been formalized (Zammit 1999b). For example, one might establish that a certain binary operator ‘⊗’ arising in an abstract branch of mathematics is associative and commutative. From that point on it might be considered obvious that, say, w ⊗ (x ⊗ (y ⊗ z)) = (x ⊗ z) ⊗ (w ⊗ y), and one wouldn’t interrupt the ﬂow of a more interesting proof to belabour this point. However, a purely logical deduction of this from the associative and commutative law requires several instances of these laws, and so it turns out not to be obvious in the Mizar sense. The initial designer(s) of a proof checker can hardly be expected to anticipate all its future applications and the new facts that may come to be regarded as ‘obvious’ in consequence. This suggests that the ideal proof checker should be programmable, i.e. that ordinary users should be able to extend the built-in automation as much as desired. Provided the basic mechanisms of the theorem prover are straightforward and well-documented and the source code is made available, there’s no reason why a user shouldn’t extend or modify it – we hope that many readers will do something similar with the code discussed in this book. However, diﬃculties arise if we want to restrict the user to extensions that are logically sound, since unsoundness renders questionable the whole idea of machine-checking supposedly more fallible human proofs. Even the isolated automated theorem proving programs we’ve implemented in this book are often subtler than they appear,

6.3 Proof systems for ﬁrst-order logic

469

and we wouldn’t be surprised to ﬁnd that they contain occasional bugs rendering them incorrect. The diﬃculty of integrating a large body of special proof methods into a powerful interactive system without compromising soundness is considerably greater. One inﬂuential solution to this diﬃculty was introduced in the Edinburgh LCF project led by Robin Milner (Gordon, Milner and Wadsworth 1979). The original Edinburgh LCF system was designed to support proofs in a logic P P λ based on the ‘Logic of Computable Functions’ (Scott 1993) – hence the name LCF. But the key idea, as Gordon (1982) emphasizes, is equally applicable to more orthodox logics supporting conventional mathematics, and subsequently many ‘LCF-style’ proof checkers were designed using the same principles (Gordon 2000). Two key ideas underlie the LCF approach, one of which permits ﬂexible programmability and one of which enforces logical soundness. • The system is implemented within an interactive programming language, and the user interacts via the top-level loop of that programming language. Consequently, the user has the full power of a general-purpose programming language available to implement new proof procedures. • A special type (say thm) of proven theorems is distinguished, such that anything of type thm must by construction have been proved rather than merely asserted. This is enforced by making thm an abstract type whose only constructors correspond to approved methods of inference. The original LCF project introduced a completely new programming language called ML (meta language) speciﬁcally designed for implementing LCF-style provers – our own implementation language, Objective CAML, is a direct descendant of it. We will implement in OCaml a prover for ﬁrstorder logic using the LCF approach, but ﬁrst we need to ﬁx a suitable set of approved inference rules.

6.3 Proof systems for ﬁrst-order logic A formal language like ﬁrst-order logic is intended to be a precise version of informal mathematical notation. Given such a language, a formal proof system should formalize and systematize the permissible steps in a mathematical proof. (These are exactly the characteristica and calculus that Leibniz dreamed of.) Abstractly, we can consider a proof system as simply a relation of ‘provability’, deﬁned inductively via a set of rules that we think of as permissible proof steps. We will always write Γ p to mean ‘p is provable from

470

Interactive theorem proving

assumptions Γ’, occasionally attaching a subscript to the ‘turnstile’ symbol when we want to make the particular proof system explicit. For purely equational reasoning, a natural proof system is the one deﬁned by Birkhoﬀ’s rules (see Section 4.3). These nicely formalize the way one typically reasons with equations, and even though using them to prove theorems may require great subtlety, the individual rules themselves are all fairly simple. In addition, the rules are complete: Δ s = t (‘s = t is provable from Δ’) if and only if Δ |= s = t (‘s = t is a logical consequence of Δ’). We would naturally wish for all these properties in a proof system for ﬁrst-order logic in general. The ﬁrst proof system adequate for ﬁrst-order logic was developed by Frege (1879). While this work is now regarded as crucial in the modern evolution of logic, it was little appreciated in Frege’s lifetime, and similar ideas were developed partly independently by others such as Peano, Peirce and Russell. Frege’s proof system actually went far beyond ﬁrst-order logic, and was used to support his ‘logicist’ thesis that all mathematics is reducible to logic. On studying Frege’s work, it became apparent to Russell how much of his philosophical analysis had already been anticipated, often in more reﬁned form, by Frege’s own formal development of arithmetic (Frege 1893). But Russell noticed that Frege’s work had a serious ﬂaw: the logical system was inconsistent, and could actually be used to prove any fact, true or false, by exploiting a logical antinomy now commonly known as Russell’s paradox (see Section 7.1). Despite Peano’s limited articulation of a formal system, Zermelo (1908), who independently discovered Russell’s paradox, claimed that Peano’s approach was also subject to it. It was really Hilbert and Ackermann (1950) in the original 1928 edition of their short textbook who isolated ﬁrst-order logic, presented a precise system of formal rules for it and raised the question of the completeness of those rules. Arguably, completeness was implicit in an earlier paper by Skolem (1922), but it was ﬁrst proved explicitly by G¨ odel (1930). Subsequently, many diﬀerent kinds of formal proof system for ﬁrst-order logic were introduced and proved complete. We can roughly distinguish three kinds: • Hilbert or Frege systems (Frege 1879; Hilbert and Ackermann 1950), • natural deduction (Gentzen 1935; Prawitz 1965), • sequent calculus (Gentzen 1935). We will see in more detail later how Hilbert systems work, since we are going to make one the foundation of our LCF implementation. But let us now devote a few words to the other two approaches, presenting both of

6.3 Proof systems for ﬁrst-order logic

471

them in terms of sequents. A sequent Γ → p, where p is a formula and Γ a set of formulas, is thought of intuitively as meaning ‘if all the Γ hold then p holds’, synonymous in the ﬁnite case Γ = {p1 , . . . , pn } with p1 ∧· · ·∧pn ⇒ p.† In the modern literature, one usually sees Γ p rather than Gentzen’s original notation Γ → p. However, we will avoid that, since we want to emphasize the equivalence between the notion of provability deﬁned below and semantic entailment |=. The latter has the feature that quantiﬁcation over valuations is done per formula, not once over the whole assertion. For example, just as it’s not the case that P (x) ⇒ P (y) is valid, the sequent P (x) → P (y) will not be derivable, yet P (x) |= P (y); see the discussion in Section 3.3. In fact, we will for simplicity focus on deducibility without hypotheses p, but since in Section 6.8 we consider the general case, it seems better to avoid any risk of confusion. As the word ‘natural’ suggests, natural deduction systems are supposed to be closer than Hilbert systems to intuitive reasoning, in particular when reasoning from assumptions. They are based on a set of ‘introduction’ and ‘elimination’ rules for each logical connective, which introduce or eliminate the top-level connective in the conclusion. For example, the implicationintroduction rule is Γ ∪ {p} → q , Γ→p⇒q while the implication-elimination rule is:‡ Γ→p⇒q Γ→p. Γ→q The or-introduction rule has both a left and a right variant: Γ→p Γ→p∨q

Γ→q . Γ→p∨q

The or-elimination rule is a little more complicated: Γ→p∨q †

‡

Γ ∪ {p} → r Γ→r

Γ ∪ {q} → r

.

In (classical) sequent calculus, sequents are further generalized so that the right-hand side may be a set of formulas, and Γ → Δ means ‘if all the Γ hold then at least one of the Δ holds’. However, using single-conclusion sequents is enough to show the essential ﬂavour of natural deduction and sequent calculus. Natural deduction systems are often presented with the hypotheses Γ implicit, but the ‘trivial reformulation’ (Prawitz 1971) in terms of sequents makes it easier to give a precise statement of the rules and stresses the similarities and diﬀerences with sequent calculus. For simplicity we always assume that there is a ﬁxed set of assumptions. In many formulations, the two theorems above the line may have diﬀerent sets of assumptions Γ and Δ and the ﬁnal theorem inherits Γ ∪ Δ.

472

Interactive theorem proving

Natural deduction systems are indeed relatively good for formalizing typical human proofs. However, the formulation of some rules such as orelimination is rather messy. Instead of both introduction and elimination rules for the conclusion, Gentzen’s sequent calculus systems have only introduction rules, but both left (assumption) and right (conclusion) versions. For example, the right or-introduction rules are as in natural deduction, but there is a left-introduction rule: Γ ∪ {p} → r Γ ∪ {q} → r . Γ ∪ {p ∨ q} → r Similarly, the implication-introduction rule is as in natural deduction,† but instead of a right-elimination rule we have a left-introduction rule Γ → p Γ ∪ {q} → r . Γ ∪ {p ⇒ q} → r In order to perform proofs in practice, it’s convenient to use the cut rule: Γ ∪ {p} → q Γ ∪ {q} → r . Γ ∪ {p} → r However, the Hauptsatz (major theorem) in Gentzen (1935) shows that the cut rule is inessential: any proof involving cut can be transformed into a cut-free one, albeit possibly at the cost of unfeasibly large blowup. The particular appeal of cut-free sequent calculus proofs is that all the other rules build up the formula without introducing any logical connectives not involved in the result. This allows proofs to be found in a syntaxdirected way, just as with semantic tableaux. In fact, although the original motivations of Beth and Hintikka were semantic, tableaux can be considered a reformulation of sequent calculus. The approaches of several pioneers of automated theorem proving like Prawitz, Prawitz and Voghera (1960) and Wang (1960) were founded on Gentzen’s proof methods, rather than semantic considerations. And the inverse method, developed by Maslov (1964), while closely related to resolution, was motivated by searching for proofs in sequent calculus using not the obvious top-down syntax-directed approach, but working from the bottom upwards – hence the name.‡ Pioneers like Frege, Peano and Russell clearly used their formal proof systems. But while proof in natural deduction systems does tend to be more † ‡

For simplicity, we are ignoring here the possibility of multiple formulas on the right of the sequent. Note that variables in the inverse method are essentially metavariables, so it is not restricted to ﬁnding cut-free proofs. Therefore, the inverse method is quite dissimilar to tableaux despite their common roots in sequent calculus.

6.4 LCF implementation of ﬁrst-order logic

473

natural than in Hilbert systems, proof theorists like Gentzen were more intent on bringing out structure and symmetry in logic than with developing practical tools. Indeed, most mathematicians do not even formalize statements in logic, let alone prove them using formal rules because it is ‘too complicated in practice’ (Rasiowa and Sikorski 1970). Dijkstra (1985) has remarked that ‘as far as the mathematical community is concerned George Boole has lived in vain’.

6.4 LCF implementation of ﬁrst-order logic Like Frege, Russell was interested in establishing a ‘logicist’ thesis that all mathematics could in principle be reduced to pure logic. To this end, he derived in Principia Mathematica (Whitehead and Russell 1910) a body of elementary mathematical theorems by explicit formal proofs. This was an extraordinarily painstaking task, and Russell (1968) remarks that his intellect ‘never quite recovered from the strain’. However, with computer assistance, the length and tedium of formal proofs need no longer be such a serious obstacle.† Our ﬁrst priority is that the basic inference rules should be simple, so we can really feel conﬁdent in our logical foundations and their computer implementation. If this comes at the cost of lengthier formal proofs, we are undismayed, since most of the low-level proof generation will be hidden by additional layers of programming. Usually, ﬁrst-order proof systems have at least one rule or axiom scheme involving substitution, e.g. a rule allowing us to pass from a universal theorem ∀x.P [x] to any substitution instance P [t]. But, as we saw in Section 3.4, a correct implementation of substitution is not entirely trivial. We will avoid building any such intricate code into our logical core by setting up simpler rules from which substitution is derivable (Tarski 1965; Monk 1976).‡ We have two ‘proper’ rules that take theorems and produce new theorems. One is modus ponens : p⇒q p q

†

‡

Russell reacted enthusiastically to some early experiments in automated theorem proving, remarking ‘I am delighted to know that Principia Mathematica can now be done by machinery’ (O’Leary 1991). In other respects our setup is not unlike the system P1 given by Church (1956), but with elimination axioms for connectives that Church uses as metalogical abbreviations.

474

Interactive theorem proving

and the other is generalization, allowing us to universally quantify a theorem over any variable: p . ∀x. p Each ‘axiom’ is really a schema of axioms, stated for arbitrary formulas p, q and r, terms s, si , t, ti and variable x. For each one, there are inﬁnitely many speciﬁc instances: p ⇒ (q ⇒ p), (p ⇒ q ⇒ r) ⇒ (p ⇒ q) ⇒ (p ⇒ r), ((p ⇒ ⊥) ⇒ ⊥) ⇒ p, (∀x. p ⇒ q) ⇒ (∀x. p) ⇒ (∀x. q), p ⇒ ∀x. p [provided x ∈ FV(p)], (∃x. x = t) [provided x ∈ FVT(t)], t = t, s1 = t1 ⇒ · · · ⇒ sn = tn ⇒ f (s1 , ..., sn ) = f (t1 , ..., tn ), s1 = t1 ⇒ · · · ⇒ sn = tn ⇒ P (s1 , ..., sn ) ⇒ P (t1 , ..., tn ). Those would in fact suﬃce if we were content to express all theorems just using ‘⊥’, ‘⇒’ and ‘∀’. However, this is rather unnatural, so we add additional axiom schemas that amount to ‘deﬁnitions’ of the other connectives. Since these are stated as equivalences, we also need to add some properties of equivalence in order to make use of those deﬁnitions: (p ⇔ q) ⇒ p ⇒ q, (p ⇔ q) ⇒ q ⇒ p, (p ⇒ q) ⇒ (q ⇒ p) ⇒ (p ⇔ q), ⇔ (⊥ ⇒ ⊥), ¬p ⇔ (p ⇒ ⊥), p ∧ q ⇔ (p ⇒ q ⇒ ⊥) ⇒ ⊥, p ∨ q ⇔ ¬(¬p ∧ ¬q), (∃x. p) ⇔ ¬(∀x. ¬p). At least one property of this proof system is relatively easy to check.

6.4 LCF implementation of ﬁrst-order logic

475

Theorem 6.1 If p then |= p, i.e. anything provable using these rules is logically valid in ﬁrst-order logic with equality. In other words, the inference rules are sound. Proof One simply needs to check that each instance of the axiom schemas is logically valid, and that the two proper inference rules when applied to logically valid formulas also produce logically valid formulas. The overall result follows by rule induction. In the LCF approach, abstract logical inference rules are implemented as ML functions manipulating objects of the special type thm. We declare a suitable OCaml signature to enforce the type discipline, giving names to the primitive rules and ﬁxing them as the only basic operations on type thm: module type Proofsystem = sig type thm val modusponens : thm -> thm -> thm val gen : string -> thm -> thm val axiom_addimp : fol formula -> fol formula -> thm val axiom_distribimp : fol formula -> fol formula -> fol formula -> thm val axiom_doubleneg : fol formula -> thm val axiom_allimp : string -> fol formula -> fol formula -> thm val axiom_impall : string -> fol formula -> thm val axiom_existseq : string -> term -> thm val axiom_eqrefl : term -> thm val axiom_funcong : string -> term list -> term list -> thm val axiom_predcong : string -> term list -> term list -> thm val axiom_iffimp1 : fol formula -> fol formula -> thm val axiom_iffimp2 : fol formula -> fol formula -> thm val axiom_impiff : fol formula -> fol formula -> thm val axiom_true : thm val axiom_not : fol formula -> thm val axiom_and : fol formula -> fol formula -> thm val axiom_or : fol formula -> fol formula -> thm val axiom_exists : string -> fol formula -> thm val concl : thm -> fol formula end;;

The functions modusponens and gen implement proper inference rules, so they take theorems as arguments and produce new theorems. The functions implementing axiom schemas also mostly take arguments, but only to indicate the desired instance of the schema. Finally, the concl (‘conclusion’) function maps a theorem back to the formula it proves. This has no logical role, but we often want to ‘look inside’ a theorem, for example to decide on what kind of inference rules to apply to it. Of course, we don’t allow the reverse operation mapping any formula to a corresponding theorem, since that would defeat the whole purpose of using a limited set of rules.

476

Interactive theorem proving

A guiding principle in the choice of primitive rules is that they should admit a simple and transparent implementation. The only non-trivial part involves checking the side-conditions x ∈ FV(p) and x ∈ FVT(t). Although these are hardly diﬃcult, the most straightforward implementations presuppose some set operations, which we choose to sidestep by coding the tests directly. The following function decides whether a term s occurs as a subterm of another term t; we allow any term s, not just a variable, though this generality is not exploited: let rec occurs_in s t = s = t or match t with Var y -> false | Fn(f,args) -> exists (occurs_in s) args;;

Now we deﬁne a similar function for deciding whether a term t occurs free in a formula fm. When t is a variable Var x, this means the same as x ∈ FV(fm), but it is expressed more directly. The free in function actually allows an arbitrary term t, not just a variable, extending the concept in a natural way to say that there is a subterm t of fm none of whose variables are in the scope of a quantiﬁer. As it happens, we will only use this when t is a variable, but the extra generality does not make the code any longer. let rec free_in t fm = match fm with False| True -> false | Atom(R(p,args)) -> exists (occurs_in t) args | Not(p) -> free_in t p | And(p,q)|Or(p,q)|Imp(p,q)|Iff(p,q) -> free_in t p or free_in t q | Forall(y,p)|Exists(y,p) -> not(occurs_in (Var y) t) & free_in t p;;

Besides being more direct and more general, this function can be significantly more eﬃcient in some cases than ﬁrst computing the free-variable set then testing membership. For example, if we ask whether x is free in P (x) ∧ Q or in ∀x. Q, we never need to examine Q but can return ‘true’ and ‘false’ respectively by looking at the other part of the formula. Using these ingredients, we can now implement the proof system itself. While this chunk of code might not look particularly beautiful, a side-byside examination shows that it is a direct transliteration of the logical rules. These few dozen lines, together with occurs in and free in and a few auxiliary functions like exists and itlist2, constitute the entire logical

6.4 LCF implementation of ﬁrst-order logic

477

core of our theorem prover. Provided we got this right, we can be conﬁdent that anything of type thm we derive later really has been proved.† module Proven : Proofsystem = struct type thm = fol formula let modusponens pq p = match pq with Imp(p’,q) when p = p’ -> q | _ -> failwith "modusponens" let gen x p = Forall(x,p) let axiom_addimp p q = Imp(p,Imp(q,p)) let axiom_distribimp p q r = Imp(Imp(p,Imp(q,r)),Imp(Imp(p,q),Imp(p,r))) let axiom_doubleneg p = Imp(Imp(Imp(p,False),False),p) let axiom_allimp x p q = Imp(Forall(x,Imp(p,q)),Imp(Forall(x,p),Forall(x,q))) let axiom_impall x p = if not (free_in (Var x) p) then Imp(p,Forall(x,p)) else failwith "axiom_impall: variable free in formula" let axiom_existseq x t = if not (occurs_in (Var x) t) then Exists(x,mk_eq (Var x) t) else failwith "axiom_existseq: variable free in term" let axiom_eqrefl t = mk_eq t t let axiom_funcong f lefts rights = itlist2 (fun s t p -> Imp(mk_eq s t,p)) lefts rights (mk_eq (Fn(f,lefts)) (Fn(f,rights))) let axiom_predcong p lefts rights = itlist2 (fun s t p -> Imp(mk_eq s t,p)) lefts rights (Imp(Atom(R(p,lefts)),Atom(R(p,rights)))) let axiom_iffimp1 p q = Imp(Iff(p,q),Imp(p,q)) let axiom_iffimp2 p q = Imp(Iff(p,q),Imp(q,p)) let axiom_impiff p q = Imp(Imp(p,q),Imp(Imp(q,p),Iff(p,q))) let axiom_true = Iff(True,Imp(False,False)) let axiom_not p = Iff(Not p,Imp(p,False)) let axiom_and p q = Iff(And(p,q),Imp(Imp(p,Imp(q,False)),False)) let axiom_or p q = Iff(Or(p,q),Not(And(Not(p),Not(q)))) let axiom_exists x p = Iff(Exists(x,p),Not(Forall(x,Not p))) let concl c = c end;;

To proceed further, we’ll open the module and set up a printer as usual:

†

Bugs in derived rules may indeed lead to the deduction of the wrong theorem, i.e. not the one that was intended. But they cannot lead to an invalid one. And, needless to say, we are tacitly assuming the correctness of the OCaml type system, OCaml implementation, operating system, and underlying hardware! In fact, by subverting the OCaml type system or using mutability of strings, it is possible to derive false results even in our LCF prover, but we restrict ourselves to ‘normal’ functional programming.

478

Interactive theorem proving

include Proven;; let print_thm th = open_box 0; print_string "|-"; print_space(); open_box 0; print_formula print_atom 0 (concl th); close_box(); close_box();; #install_printer print_thm;;

6.5 Propositional derived rules Our proof system with its strange-looking menagerie of axioms will turn out to be complete for ﬁrst-order logic, while being technically simple (the code implementing it is short). But, in stark contrast to natural deduction, explicit proofs in the system tend to be very un-natural. For example, consider proving the apparent triviality p ⇒ p for some arbitrary p. Readers who haven’t seen something similar before will probably ﬁnd it a bit of a puzzle. Either by a ﬂash of inspiration or with computer assistance (see Exercise 6.5) one can arrive at the following: 1 2 3 4 5

(p ⇒ (p ⇒ p) ⇒ p) ⇒ (p ⇒ (p ⇒ p)) ⇒ (p ⇒ p) [second axiom], p ⇒ (p ⇒ p) ⇒ p [ﬁrst axiom], (p ⇒ (p ⇒ p)) ⇒ (p ⇒ p) [modus ponens, 1 and 2], p ⇒ (p ⇒ p) [ﬁrst axiom], p ⇒ p [modus ponens, 3 and 4].

The above sequence of steps can be considered a proof of the following metatheorem about our deductive system: for any formula p we have p ⇒ p, each instance of which for a particular p is a formal theorem in the system. We give the proof a computational twist in our LCF implementation, by implementing an OCaml function taking a formula p as its argument and proving the corresponding p ⇒ p: let imp_refl p = modusponens (modusponens (axiom_distribimp p (Imp(p,p)) p) (axiom_addimp p (Imp(p,p)))) (axiom_addimp p p);;

6.5 Propositional derived rules

479

We can thereafter use imp_refl as another inference rule. It is a derived one, not a primitive one like modusponens, but works equally well: # # -

imp_refl <>;; : thm = |- r ==> r imp_refl <<exists x y. ~(x = y)>>;; : thm = |- (exists x y. ~x = y) ==> (exists x y. ~x = y)

As in standard logic texts – Mendelson (1987) and Andrews (1986) are typical – we will build up a sequence of more interesting metatheorems, using earlier metatheorems as lemmas. But we’ll always have an explicitly computational implementation of the metatheorems, using earlier ones as subcomponents. For example, consider the metatheorem that if p ⇒ p ⇒ q is provable then so is p ⇒ q. We can represent this as an inference rule: p⇒p⇒q p⇒q and prove it appealing to p ⇒ p as a lemma: 1 2 3 4 5

(p ⇒ p ⇒ q) ⇒ (p ⇒ p) ⇒ (p ⇒ q) [second axiom], p ⇒ p ⇒ q [assumed], (p ⇒ p) ⇒ (p ⇒ q) [modus ponens, 1 and 2], p ⇒ p [from the lemma], p ⇒ q [modus ponens, 3 and 4].

This proof can be expressed as a derived inference rule in OCaml, using imp_refl as a subcomponent: let imp_unduplicate th = let p,pq = dest_imp(concl th) in let q = consequent pq in modusponens (modusponens (axiom_distribimp p p q) th) (imp_refl p);;

Elementary derived rules The ﬁrst three axioms and the modus ponens inference rule suﬃce for all propositional reasoning, provided one is prepared to express all formulas in terms of {⇒, ⊥}. We will often prove formulas by mapping them into this subset and dealing with them there. So instead of negation ¬p we will often use the logically equivalent p ⇒ ⊥, and the following variants of the usual syntax functions handle this form:

480

Interactive theorem proving

let negatef fm = match fm with Imp(p,False) -> p | p -> Imp(p,False);; let negativef fm = match fm with Imp(p,False) -> true | _ -> false;;

Our next derived rule is a rather simple one: given a theorem q and a formula p, it produces the theorem p ⇒ q, i.e. adds an additional antecedent to something already proved. This might not appear enormously useful, but it comes in handy later on. The rule works by forming the axiom instance q ⇒ p ⇒ q and then performing modus ponens with that and the input theorem q to obtain p ⇒ q. let add_assum p th = modusponens (axiom_addimp (concl th) p) th;;

This is used as a component in a slightly more interesting rule which, given a theorem q ⇒ r and a formula p returns the theorem (p ⇒ q) ⇒ (p ⇒ r). It does it by using add assum to add a new hypothesis p to the input theorem to give p ⇒ q ⇒ r. Modus ponens is then performed with this and the axiom instance (p ⇒ q ⇒ r) ⇒ (p ⇒ q) ⇒ (p ⇒ r) to obtain the desired theorem. let imp_add_assum p th = let (q,r) = dest_imp(concl th) in modusponens (axiom_distribimp p q r) (add_assum p th);;

We will leave the reader to understand the proofs underlying many of the rules that follow, letting the code speak for itself.† One way is to run through the code line-by-line in an OCaml session picking some arbitrary formulas as inputs.‡ Alternatively, one can simply sketch out the steps on paper. The next rule, much used in what follows, is for transitivity of implication: from p ⇒ q and q ⇒ r obtain p ⇒ r. let imp_trans th1 th2 = let p = antecedent(concl th1) in modusponens (imp_add_assum p th2) th1;;

We can use this to deﬁne other simple rules for implication, such as passing from p ⇒ r to p ⇒ q ⇒ r: † ‡

Not much will be lost by ignoring the details; the proofs are mainly technical puzzles without any deeper signiﬁcance. This is trickier for rules that take theorems as inputs, since we can’t create any desired theorem, by design. One could temporarily add an axiom function to the primitive basis to create arbitrary theorems.

6.5 Propositional derived rules

481

let imp_insert q th = let (p,r) = dest_imp(concl th) in imp_trans th (axiom_addimp r q);;

and from p ⇒ q ⇒ r to q ⇒ p ⇒ r: let imp_swap th = let p,qr = dest_imp(concl th) in let q,r = dest_imp qr in imp_trans (axiom_addimp q p) (modusponens (axiom_distribimp p q r) th);;

The following is a derived axiom schema (derived rule with no theorem arguments) producing (q ⇒ r) ⇒ (p ⇒ q) ⇒ (p ⇒ r): let imp_trans_th p q r = imp_trans (axiom_addimp (Imp(q,r)) p) (axiom_distribimp p q r);;

If p ⇒ q then (q ⇒ r) ⇒ (p ⇒ r): let imp_add_concl r th = let (p,q) = dest_imp(concl th) in modusponens (imp_swap(imp_trans_th p q r)) th;;

(p ⇒ q ⇒ r) ⇒ (q ⇒ p ⇒ r): let imp_swap_th p q r = imp_trans (axiom_distribimp p q r) (imp_add_concl (Imp(p,r)) (axiom_addimp q p));;

and if (p ⇒ q ⇒ r) ⇒ (s ⇒ t ⇒ u) then (q ⇒ p ⇒ r) ⇒ (t ⇒ s ⇒ u): let imp_swap2 th = match concl th with Imp(Imp(p,Imp(q,r)),Imp(s,Imp(t,u))) -> imp_trans (imp_swap_th q p r) (imp_trans th (imp_swap_th s t u)) | _ -> failwith "imp_swap2";;

We can also easily derive a ‘right’ version of modus ponens, passing from p ⇒ q ⇒ r and p ⇒ q to p ⇒ r. (This could be obtained more eﬃciently using axiom_distribimp, but the code is slightly longer.) let right_mp ith th = imp_unduplicate(imp_trans th (imp_swap ith));;

That gives us enough basic properties of implication to make further progress. However, since we need to use the axioms of the form p ⊗ q ⇔ · · ·

482

Interactive theorem proving

for expressing propositional connectives ⊗ in terms of others, it’s convenient to deﬁne operations that map p ⇔ q to p ⇒ q and to q ⇒ p: let iff_imp1 th = let (p,q) = dest_iff(concl th) in modusponens (axiom_iffimp1 p q) th;; let iff_imp2 th = let (p,q) = dest_iff(concl th) in modusponens (axiom_iffimp2 p q) th;;

and conversely to map p ⇒ q and q ⇒ p together to p ⇔ q: let imp_antisym th1 th2 = let (p,q) = dest_imp(concl th1) in modusponens (modusponens (axiom_impiff p q) th1) th2;;

Now we consider some rules for dealing with falsity and ‘negation’ (in the sense of p ⇒ ⊥). We often want to eliminate double ‘negation’ from the consequent of an implication, passing from p ⇒ (q ⇒ ⊥) ⇒ ⊥ to p ⇒ q: let right_doubleneg th = match concl th with Imp(_,Imp(Imp(p,False),False)) -> imp_trans th (axiom_doubleneg p) | _ -> failwith "right_doubleneg";;

An immediate application is the classic rule ⊥ ⇒ p, traditionally called ex falso quodlibet (‘from falsity, anything goes’): let ex_falso p = right_doubleneg(axiom_addimp False (Imp(p,False)));;

Also useful is a variant of imp_trans that copes with an extra level of implication in the ﬁrst theorem, from p ⇒ q ⇒ r and r ⇒ s to p ⇒ q ⇒ s: let imp_trans2 th1 th2 = let Imp(p,Imp(q,r)) = concl th1 and Imp(r’,s) = concl th2 in let th = imp_add_assum p (modusponens (imp_trans_th q r s) th2) in modusponens th th1;;

A generalization in a diﬀerent direction allows us to map a list of theorems p ⇒ qi for 1 ≤ i ≤ n and another theorem q1 ⇒ · · · ⇒ qn ⇒ r to a result p ⇒ r: let imp_trans_chain ths th = itlist (fun a b -> imp_unduplicate (imp_trans a (imp_swap b))) (rev(tl ths)) (imp_trans (hd ths) th);;

6.5 Propositional derived rules

483

Finally, a couple more rules for implication will be useful later for technical reasons, one for deriving (q ⇒ ⊥) ⇒ p ⇒ (p ⇒ q) ⇒ ⊥: let imp_truefalse p q = imp_trans (imp_trans_th p q False) (imp_swap_th (Imp(p,q)) p False);;

and the other producing a kind of monotonicity theorem for implication of the form (p ⇒ p) ⇒ (q ⇒ q ) ⇒ (p ⇒ q) ⇒ p ⇒ q : let imp_mono_th p p’ q q’ = let th1 = imp_trans_th (Imp(p,q)) (Imp(p’,q)) (Imp(p’,q’)) and th2 = imp_trans_th p’ q q’ and th3 = imp_swap(imp_trans_th p’ p q) in imp_trans th3 (imp_swap(imp_trans th2 th1));;

Derived connectives Most derived inference rules so far have involved the ‘primitive’ logical constants implication and falsity. But we can equally well deﬁne derived rules to encapsulate properties of other connectives. The simplest example is the theorem : let truth = modusponens (iff_imp2 axiom_true) (imp_refl False);;

For negation, contraposition passes from p ⇒ q to ¬q ⇒ ¬p: let contrapos th = let p,q = dest_imp(concl th) in imp_trans (imp_trans (iff_imp1(axiom_not q)) (imp_add_concl False th)) (iff_imp2(axiom_not p));;

Some rules for conjunction will also be useful later. There are several important features of this connective, for instance that p ∧ q ⇒ p: let and_left p q = let th1 = imp_add_assum p (axiom_addimp False q) in let th2 = right_doubleneg(imp_add_concl False th1) in imp_trans (iff_imp1(axiom_and p q)) th2;;

and that symmetrically p ∧ q ⇒ q: let and_right p q = let th1 = axiom_addimp (Imp(q,False)) p in let th2 = right_doubleneg(imp_add_concl False th1) in imp_trans (iff_imp1(axiom_and p q)) th2;;

More generally, we can get the list of theorems p1 ∧ · · · ∧ pn ⇒ pi for 1 ≤ i ≤ n:

484

Interactive theorem proving

let rec conjths fm = try let p,q = dest_and fm in (and_left p q)::map (imp_trans (and_right p q)) (conjths q) with Failure _ -> [imp_refl fm];;

Conversely, p and q together imply p ∧ q, i.e. p ⇒ q ⇒ p ∧ q: let and_pair p q = let th1 = iff_imp2(axiom_and p q) and th2 = imp_swap_th (Imp(p,Imp(q,False))) q False in let th3 = imp_add_assum p (imp_trans2 th2 th1) in modusponens th3 (imp_swap (imp_refl (Imp(p,Imp(q,False)))));;

Also useful are two rules to ‘shunt’ between conjunctive antecedents and iterated implication, passing from p ∧ q ⇒ r to p ⇒ q ⇒ r: let shunt th = let p,q = dest_and(antecedent(concl th)) in modusponens (itlist imp_add_assum [p;q] th) (and_pair p q);;

and from p ⇒ q ⇒ r to p ∧ q ⇒ r: let unshunt th = let p,qr = dest_imp(concl th) in let q,r = dest_imp qr in imp_trans_chain [and_left p q; and_right p q] th;;

6.6 Proving tautologies by inference The derived rules deﬁned so far can make certain propositional steps easier to perform by inference. Now we will deﬁne a more ambitious rule that can automatically prove any propositional tautology. Unlike the previous derived rules, this will require non-trivial control ﬂow. Our plan is to implement a version of the tableau procedure considered in Section 3.10, systematically modiﬁed to use inference instead of ad hoc formula manipulation. That is, rather than simply asserting that lists of formulas p1 , . . . , pn and literals l1 , . . . , lm lead to a contradiction, the main function will actually prove the following theorem: p1 ⇒ · · · ⇒ pn ⇒ l1 ⇒ · · · ⇒ lm ⇒ ⊥. The pattern of recursion, breaking apart the ﬁrst formula p1 and making recursive calls for the new problem(s), is very close to the implementation of tableau, and it is instructive to look at their code side-by-side.

6.6 Proving tautologies by inference

485

The principal diﬀerence is that we need to justify all steps in terms of inference rules. Other notable diﬀerences are: • the core inference steps are presented in terms of implication and falsity, with other propositional connectives immediately eliminated; • we do not handle quantiﬁers and uniﬁcation, only propositional structure. Eliminating deﬁned connectives Our ﬁrst order of business is the elimination of connectives other than falsity and implication. Most of the other connectives are deﬁned by axioms of the form p ⊗ q ⇔ · · ·. The exception is ‘⇔’ itself, so for uniformity we implement a derived rule for (p ⇔ q) ⇔ (p ⇒ q) ∧ (q ⇒ p): let iff_def p q = let th = and_pair (Imp(p,q)) (Imp(q,p)) and thl = [axiom_iffimp1 p q; axiom_iffimp2 p q] in imp_antisym (imp_trans_chain thl th) (unshunt (axiom_impiff p q));;

Now we can produce an equivalent for any formula built with a ‘deﬁned’ connective at the top level: let expand_connective fm = match fm with True -> axiom_true | Not p -> axiom_not p | And(p,q) -> axiom_and p q | Or(p,q) -> axiom_or p q | Iff(p,q) -> iff_def p q | Exists(x,p) -> axiom_exists x p | _ -> failwith "expand_connective";;

The formula we are considering will always be a hypothesis in a refutation, so we want to prove that it implies its expanded form. On the other hand, the formula may be positive, in which case we want to produce p⊗q ⇒ · · ·, or negative, in which case we want (p ⊗ q ⇒ ⊥) ⇒ (· · ·) ⇒ ⊥: let eliminate_connective fm = if not(negativef fm) then iff_imp1(expand_connective fm) else imp_add_concl False (iff_imp2(expand_connective(negatef fm)));;

Simulating tableau steps So now we just need to implement the key steps underlying tableaux as inference rules. The ﬁrst one corresponds to conjunctive splitting: we can obtain a contradiction from p ∧ q, or in our context (p ⇒ −q) ⇒ ⊥, by

486

Interactive theorem proving

obtaining one from p and q separately. The following inference rule gives a list containing the two theorems ((p ⇒ q) ⇒ ⊥) ⇒ p and ((p ⇒ q) ⇒ ⊥) ⇒ (q ⇒ ⊥): let imp_false_conseqs p q = [right_doubleneg(imp_add_concl False (imp_add_assum p (ex_falso q))); imp_add_concl False (imp_insert p (imp_refl q))];;

which we can use to pass from p ⇒ (q ⇒ ⊥) ⇒ r to ((p ⇒ q) ⇒ ⊥) ⇒ r: let imp_false_rule th = let p,r = dest_imp (concl th) in imp_trans_chain (imp_false_conseqs p (funpow 2 antecedent r)) th;;

The dual step is disjunctive splitting: if we can obtain a contradiction from p separately and also from q separately, then we can obtain one from p ∨ q, in our context −p ⇒ q. So we need to pass from (p ⇒ ⊥) ⇒ r and q ⇒ r to (p ⇒ q) ⇒ r: let imp_true_rule th1 th2 = let p = funpow 2 antecedent (concl th1) and q = antecedent(concl th2) and th3 = right_doubleneg(imp_add_concl False th1) and th4 = imp_add_concl False th2 in let th5 = imp_swap(imp_truefalse p q) in let th6 = imp_add_concl False (imp_trans_chain [th3; th4] th5) and th7 = imp_swap(imp_refl(Imp(Imp(p,q),False))) in right_doubleneg(imp_trans th7 th6);;

Ultimately, we will need to obtain a contradiction from two complementary literals; in fact the following will allow us to deduce p ⇒ −p ⇒ q for any q: let imp_contr p q = if negativef p then imp_add_assum (negatef p) (ex_falso q) else imp_swap (imp_add_assum p (ex_falso q));;

In the original tableau procedure, we add a literal to the lits list when there is currently no complementary literal. To maintain the correspondence between those lists and the iterated implications in the present version, we need to be able to justify the same step by inference: if we can derive a contradiction from a ‘shuﬄed’ implication, we can also derive one from the unshuﬄed version. To get a smoother recursion, we ﬁrst implement a rule

6.6 Proving tautologies by inference

487

producing the implicational theorem (p0 ⇒ p1 ⇒ · · · ⇒ pn−1 ⇒ pn ⇒ q) ⇒ (pn ⇒ p0 ⇒ p1 ⇒ · · · ⇒ pn−1 ⇒ q), where q may itself be an iterated implication: let rec imp_front_th n fm = if n = 0 then imp_refl fm else let p,qr = dest_imp fm in let th1 = imp_add_assum p (imp_front_th (n - 1) qr) in let q’,r’ = dest_imp(funpow 2 consequent(concl th1)) in imp_trans th1 (imp_swap_th p q’ r’);;

Now to pull the nth component of an iterated implication to the front: let imp_front n th = modusponens (imp_front_th n (concl th)) th;;

Tableaux by inference All the pieces are now in place for an inferential version of tableaux. The basic pattern of recursion is the same as in the plain version, with lists of formulas (fms) and literals (lits), but the function returns the canonical theorem rather than just quietly succeeding. So we usually need to perform inference rules to get us back to a solution of the initial problem from the solutions to modiﬁed problem(s) resulting from recursive calls. We will go through the cases in the following code one at a time. let rec lcfptab fms lits = match fms with False::fl -> ex_falso (itlist mk_imp (fl @ lits) False) | (Imp(p,q) as fm)::fl when p = q -> add_assum fm (lcfptab fl lits) | Imp(Imp(p,q),False)::fl -> imp_false_rule(lcfptab (p::Imp(q,False)::fl) lits) | Imp(p,q)::fl when q <> False -> imp_true_rule (lcfptab (Imp(p,False)::fl) lits) (lcfptab (q::fl) lits) | (Atom(_)|Forall(_,_)|Imp((Atom(_)|Forall(_,_)),False) as p)::fl -> if mem (negatef p) lits then let l1,l2 = chop_list (index (negatef p) lits) lits in let th = imp_contr p (itlist mk_imp (tl l2) False) in itlist imp_insert (fl @ l1) th else imp_front (length fl) (lcfptab fl (p::lits)) | fm::fl -> let th = eliminate_connective fm in imp_trans th (lcfptab (consequent(concl th)::fl) lits) | _ -> failwith "lcfptab: no contradiction";;

The ﬁrst two cases are needed because using the minimalist set of connectives {⊥, ⇒} we can end up with either ⊥ or ⊥ ⇒ ⊥ as an assumption.

488

Interactive theorem proving

In the former case, we can obtain a contradiction directly, but we must remember to add all the assumptions to maintain the pattern. The latter assumption is thrown away in the recursive call and put back into the ﬁnal theorem afterwards. Actually we ignore all implications p ⇒ p since no such implication can contribute to ﬁnding a contradiction. The next couple of cases implement conjunctive and disjunctive splitting. Thanks to the work we did above embodying these steps in special inference procedures, the implementation is straightforward. We just need a guard to make sure that disjunctive splitting of p ⇒ q doesn’t break up implications p ⇒ ⊥ into subgoals p ⇒ ⊥ and ⊥, since then we’d get into an inﬁnite loop; these are always dealt with by other cases. The ﬁfth case applies to literals, and ﬁrst attempts to ﬁnd a complementary literal in the list. If it succeeds, it uses imp_contr to construct an implication, remembering to add all the additional assumptions to maintain the pattern using imp_insert etc. Otherwise the literal is shuﬄed back in the list and a recursive call made; afterwards imp_front is used to bring it back to the front if the whole function terminates successfully. The sixth case deals with non-primitive logical connectives, and makes a recursive call after expanding them, and the last case applies when nothing else works and therefore no refutation will be achieved.

Proving tautologies Now to prove that p is a tautology, we apply the above procedure to p ⇒ ⊥ to obtain a theorem (p ⇒ ⊥) ⇒ ⊥ and then apply double-negation elimination to get p: let lcftaut p = modusponens (axiom_doubleneg p) (lcfptab [negatef p] []);;

for example: # # # -

lcftaut : thm = lcftaut : thm = lcftaut : thm =

<<(p ==> q) \/ (q ==> p)>>;; |- (p ==> q) \/ (q ==> p) <